Electrical Sector Solutions

Volume 7:
Logic Control,
Operator Interface
and Connectivity
Solutions
 Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial 1
Volume 2—Commercial Distribution 2
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies 3
Volume 4—Circuit Protection 4
Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection 5
Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control 6
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface
and Connectivity Solutions 7
Tab 1—Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-1
Tab 2—Stacklights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-1
Tab 3—Control Relays and Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-1
Tab 4—PLC, I/O and Communications Products . . . . . . . . V7-T4-1
Tab 5—Operator Interface Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-1
Tab 6—Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-1
Tab 7—Industrial Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-1
Tab 8—Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks
and Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-1
Tab 9—Connectivity Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-1
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-A1-1
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-A2-1
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-A3-1
Copyright

Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not
be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available
upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without
notice. Photographs are representative of production units.

Terms and Conditions

All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes
occur, they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders
accepted by Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions
as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.

Technical and Descriptive Publications

This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further
information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated
brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton
Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com.

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in
facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of
these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that
are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these
codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.

These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products
Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior
or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.

Copyright ©2019 Eaton, All Rights Reserved.

 Introduction

Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,

control and automation, and monitoring products.
At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every
successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly
skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built
on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer
service and support, we know what’s important to you.

Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic
approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on
the following three areas in all we do:
● Reliability—maintain the ● Efficiency—minimize ● Safety—identify and
appropriate level of power energy usage, operating mitigate electrical hazards
continuity without costs, equipment footprint to protect what you value
disruption or unexpected and environmental impact most
downtime

Using the Eaton Catalog Library

As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive
catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our
products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work
in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E,
for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include:
● Volume 1—Residential ● Volume 7—Logic Control, ● Volume 12—Aftermarket,
and Light Commercial Operator Interface and Renewal Parts and Life
(CA08100002E) Connectivity Solutions Extension Solutions
● Volume 2—Commercial (CA08100008E) (CA08100014E)
Distribution (CA08100003E) ● Volume 8—Sensing ● Volume 13—Counters,
● Volume 3—Power Solutions (CA08100010E) Timers and Tachometers
Distribution and Control ● Volume 9—Original (CA08100015E)—Available
Assemblies (CA08100004E) Equipment Manufacturer in electronic format only
● Volume 4—Circuit (CA08100011E) ● Volume 14—Fuses
Protection (CA08100005E) ● Volume 10—Enclosed (CA08100016E)—Available
● Volume 5—Motor Control Control (CA08100012E) in electronic format only
and Protection ● Volume 11—Vehicle and ● Volume 15—Solar Inverters
(CA08100006E) Commercial Controls and Electrical Balance of
● Volume 6—Solid-State (CA08100013E) System (CA08100018E)
Motor Control
(CA08100007E)
These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview
of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information,
consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library.
These references include:
● The Consulting Application ● The Eaton Power Quality
Guide (CA08104001E) Product Guide (COR01FYA)

If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for,
not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the
Literature Library.
By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent
version of each volume and tab.

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com i
Introduction

Icons

Green Leaf
Eaton Green Solutions are products, systems or solutions that represent Eaton
benchmarks for environmental performance. The green leaf symbol is our
promise that the solution has been reviewed and documented as offering
exceptional, industry-leading environmental benefits to customers, consumers
and our communities. Though all of Eaton’s products and solutions are
designed to meet or exceed applicable government standards related to
protecting the environment, our products with the Green Leaf designation
further provide “exceptional environmental benefit.”

Learn Online
When you see the Learn Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and search for
the product or training page. There you will find 100-level training courses,
podcasts, webcasts or games and puzzles to learn more.

Drawings Online
When you see the Drawings Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and find the
products page. There you will find a tab that includes helpful product drawings
and illustrations.

Contact Us
If you need additional help, you can find contact information
under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.

ii Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

10250T Pushbuttons 1.1 Toggle Switches—E10

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-2
1
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-4 1
1.2 Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-8
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-10 1
1.3 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-25
1
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-26
1
1.4 22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-42 1
RMQ-Titan M22 Series
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-47
1
1.5 22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-133 1
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-135
1
1.6 Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators 1
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-168
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-172 1
1.7 Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail 1
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-186
RMQ Compact C22 Series
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-188
1
1.8 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-195 1
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-197
1
1.9 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-213 1
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-217
1
1.10 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-284
1
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-290 1
1.11 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-326
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-328 1
1.12 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-351
1
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-353
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-1
 1.1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10

Toggle Switches—E10 Contents

1 Description Page
1 Toggle Switches—E10
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-3
1 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-3
Product Selection
1 Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-4
Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-5
1 Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-5
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-5
1 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-6
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-6
1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-7
1
1
1
1 Product Description Features
The E10 switches from
1 Eaton’s Electrical Sector are
General Purpose Toggles Heavy-Duty Hesitation Non-Illuminated AC Rated
● Various circuit functions Switches Pushbuttons
intended for general purpose
1 light industrial use. Designed include maintained and ● One-hole panel mount ● One-hole panel mount
for retrofit and OEM momentary ● Three position switch ● Medium-duty
1 applications. ● Poles include from single- offers unique positive ● Spade and screw
pole single-throw to four- center stop feature to terminations available
pole double-throw
1 ● Spade, screw, and solder
assure lever cannot be
thrown from one side
● Various bushing lengths
and button extensions
terminations available through the center OFF
1 ● Numerous ratings position without stopping
● Numerous ampere ratings
with horsepower ratings
Short 11/32 in and tall
● Design feature is a major
1 ●

15/32 in bat lever available acceptance for motor

reversing and speed
Standard 15/32–32 thd.
1 ●

● Hardware furnished
control applications
● Prevents motor damage
assembled
1 resulting from high
current generation by
1 counter EMF of the
armature at the time of
reversing
1 ● Known as anti-plugging,
hesitation, positive stop
1 or positive off switch

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10
1.1
Standards and Certifications
● UL Recognized
1
CSA—File No. LR40068
●
1
1
1
Catalog Number Selection 1
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Toggle Switches—E10 Series
Not to be used for ordering purposes 1
E10 T 1 06 A S = E10T106AS 1

Series Complete Cat. No.

1
0.563 in (14.3 mm)
Lever Length Function
Termination
S = Screw Single-pole 1
T = 0.563 in (14.3 mm) lever Poles L = Solder lug 6 Amperes
A = ON—None—OFF
E = 0.688 in (17.5 mm) lever 1 = Single-pole B = OFF—None—(ON) P = Spade ON—None—OFF
Screw terminal
1
2 = Two-pole D = ON—OFF—ON
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
E
F
= ON—None—ON
= ON—OFF—(ON)
1
G = (ON)—OFF—(ON)
Ratings—125V H = ON—None—(ON) 1
06 = 6 Amperes
15 = 15 Amperes
20 = 20 Amperes
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-3
 1.1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10

Product Selection
1
Toggle Switches
1
E10 Series—AC Rated—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
1 Nominal AC Ratings
Function—Circuit with Lever In
Poles DOWN 0.250 in (6.4 mm)
Amperes hp
1 125V 250V 50V
and
Throw 1
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
Position—
Keyway
Screw Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal
Catalog Number
Solder Lug
Catalog Number

1 Single-Pole Single-Pole
6 3 — 1 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10T106AS E10T106AP E10T106AL
1 15 10 3/4 E10T115AS E10T115AP E10T115AL
20 10 3/4 E10E120AS E10E120AP E10E120AL
1 6 3 — 1 P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10T106DS E10T106DP —
15 10 3/4
1 E10T115DS E10T115DP E10T115DL
20 10 3/4 E10E120DS — —
1 6 3 — 1 P.D.T. ON None ON E10T106ES — —
15 10 3/4 E10T115ES E10T115EP E10T115EL
1 20 10 3/4 E10E120ES — —
— 10 1/2 1 P.S.T. OFF None (ON) E10T115BS E10T115BP —
1 1 P.D.T. ON OFF (ON) E10T115FS E10T115FP —

1 1 P.D.T. ON None (ON) E10T115HS E10T115HP —

1 P.D.T. (ON) OFF (ON) E10T115GS E10T115GP —
1 Two-Pole Two-Pole
6 3 — 2 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10T206AS E10T206AP —
1 15 10 3/4 E10T215AS E10T215AP E10T215AL
20 10 3/4 E10E220AS E10E220AP E10E220AL
1 6 3 — 2. P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10T206DS E10T206DP —

1 15 10 3/4 E10T215DS E10T215DP E10T215DL

20 10 3/4 E10E220DS E10E220DP —
1 6 3 — 2 P.D.T. ON None ON E10T206ES — —
15 10 3/4 E10T215ES E10T215EP E10T215EL
1 20 10 3/4 E10E220ES — —
15 10 1/2 2 P.S.T. OFF None (ON)
1 E10T215BS — —
2 P.D.T. ON None (ON) E10T215HS E10T215HP —
1 2 P.D.T. (ON) OFF (ON) E10T215GS E10T215GP —
Three-Pole Three-Pole
1 15 10 3/4 3 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10E315AS E10E315AP —
3 P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10E315DS E10E315DP E10E315DL
1 3 P.D.T. ON None ON E10E315ES E10E315EP E10E315EL

1
1
1 Four-Pole Four-Pole
15 10 3/4 4 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10E415AS — E10E415AL
1 4 P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10E415DS — E10E415DL

1 4 P.D.T. ON None ON E10E415ES — E10E415EL

1
1
Note
1 1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V7-T1-6.

V7-T1-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10
1.1
Hesitation Switches
1
E10 Series—Special Purpose—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Heavy-Duty Hesitation
Switch Nominal Ratings Function—Circuit with Lever In…
1
Amperes hp
28 125 250 250 UP CENTER
DOWN
Position—
Poles
and Screw Terminal
1
Vdc Vac Vac Vac Operation Position Position Keyway Throw 1 Catalog Number
15 15 10 3/4 Maintained ON OFF ON 2 P.D.T. E10E215SS
1
3 P.D.T. E10E315SS
1
4 P.D.T. E10E415SS
1
Pushbuttons 1
One-Hole Mounted E10 Series—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces 1
Medium-Duty, Mom. Nominal Ratings
Contact
Amperes hp
Poles
Bushing
Length
Button
Extension
Typical
Maximum Spade Terminal
1
125 Vac 250 Vac 125– and in (mm) in (mm) Operating Screw Terminal 0.250 in (6.4 mm)
NO NC NO NC 250V Throw 1 Contacts Dim. “A” Dim. “B” Force Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
6 — 3 — — 1 P.S.T. NO 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 0.9 lbs E10P106RS E10P106RP
0.34 (8.6) 0.25 (6.4) E10P106JS — 1
15 — 10 — 1/3 1 P.S.T. NO 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 0.9 lbs E10P115RS E10P115RP
0.34 (8.6) 0.25 (6.4) E10P115JS —
1
15 10 10 5 1/4 2 1 P.D.T. NO, NC 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 1.0 lbs E10P115LS — 1
1
Accessories
1
Toggle Switches Accessories—Minimum Order Quantity 100 Pieces
Description Material/Notes Catalog Number 1
Hexagon locknut Zinc-chromate treated steel E10TA101
Knurled face nut Zinc-chromate treated steel E10TA102
1
Internal tooth lockwasher Cadmium plated steel E10TA103
1
Terminal screws #6-32 x 3/16 in binding head E10TA201
Spade terminal adapter—0.250 in (6.4 mm) Assembles to screw terminals E10TA202 1
ON-OFF indicating plate—vertical orientation Burnished nickel finish steel E10TA301
OFF-ON indicating plate—horizontal orientation Burnished nickel finish steel E10TA302 1
E10TA104 Flip-up guard for toggle switches E10TA104
1
1
1
E10TA105 Fixed shroud for toggle switches E10TA105
1
1
1
Notes
Interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through the center position until pressure is momentarily relieved. 1
Designed for control and protection of reversing motors.
1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V7-T1-6. 1
2 Rated 1/4 hp at 125V, 1/2 hp at 250V.
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-5
 1.1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10

Technical Data and Specifications

1
Toggle Switches
1 Description Specification

1 AC ratings 6–20A, 125 Vac

3–10A, 250 Vac
Max. 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
1 DC ratings 6–20A, 28 Vdc
Electrical life 6,000 cycles make/break at switch ampere rating
1
Operation Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications
Maintained and momentary contacts
1 Poles/throws 1 through 4, single and double throw

1 Mounting One hole with threaded 0.468 in-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 in (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway
that serves as anti-rotational feature

1 Lever lengths 0.563 in (14.3 mm) or 0.688 in (17.5 mm), bright nickel plated
Terminals Screw, 0.250 in (6.4 mm) spade and solder lug
1
1 Hesitation Switches
Description Specification
1 Operation Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications; maintained contacts; ideal
for reversing motor applications; interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through center position until manual
1 pressure is momentarily relieved
AC ratings 15A, 125 Vac
1 10A, 250 Vac
Max. 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
DC ratings 15A, 28 Vdc
1
Poles/throws 2, 3 and 4, double throw only
1 Mounting Single-pole with threaded 0.468 in-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.049 in (1.7 x 1.2 mm) deep keyway
Lever length 0.687 in (17.4 mm), stainless steel
1 Terminals Screw

1
Pushbutton Actuators
1 Description Specification

1 AC ratings 6–15A, 125 Vac (NO)

3–10A, 250 Vac (NO)
Max. 1/3 hp at 125/250 Vac
1 Operation Slow make/slow break mechanism
Normally open contacts
1 Poles/throws Single, single and double throw
Mounting One hole with 0.468 in-32 threaded bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 in (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway
1 Two bushing heights: 11/16 in (17.5 mm) and 11/32 in (8.7 mm)
Button extensions 17/32 in (13.5 mm) and 1/4 in (6.4 mm), bright nickel plated
1 Terminals Screw

1
1 Circuit Diagrams

1 SPST DPST 3PST 3PDT 4PST 4PDT

1 SPDT
DPDT
1
1
1

V7-T1-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches—E10
1.1
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Toggle Switch Dimensions 1
Bushing Lever
No. of Length Length Screw Terminals Spade Terminals Solder Lug 1
Poles Operation A B C D E C1 D E C D E
1 Momentary 0.47 0.56 1.00 1.17 0.63 1.13 1.13 0.63 1.00 1.13 0.63 1
and maintained (11.9) (14.2) (25.4) (29.7) (16.0) (28.7) (28.7) (16.0) (25.4) (28.7) (16.0)
2 Maintained 0.47 0.56 1.06 1.31 0.75 1.19 1.31 0.75 1.06 1.31 0.75 1
(11.9) (14.2) (26.9) (33.3) (19.1) (30.2) (33.3) (19.1) (26.9) (33.3) (19.1)
Momentary 0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.31
(33.3)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1
3 Maintained 0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.27
(32.3)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1.37
(34.8)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1.23
(31.2)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1
4 Maintained 0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.20
(30.5)
1.30
(33.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.30
(33.0)
1.34
(34.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.23
(31.2)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1
1
Toggle Switch Hesitation Switch Pushbutton Actuator
1
0.69 0.04 (1) x 0.07 (1.8)
(17.5) Keyway
0.47-32
Thread 0.47 0.47-32
1
(11.9) Thread
0.07 (1.8) x
B 0.05 (1.3)
Keyway
B 1
1.25
D A (31.8) A 1
0.63
(16)

E
C 1.13
(28.7) 1
1.47
(37.3)
1.34
(34) 1.13
1
(28.7)
1
Accessories 1
E10TA301 E10TA302
E10TA101 E10TA102 ON-OFF Indicating Plate— ON-OFF Indicating Plate— 1
Hexagon Locknut Knurled Face Nut Vertical Orientation Horizontal Orientation

ON
1
O O
1.0 F
0.08
0.07
(1.8)
0.06
(1.5)
(25.4) F N 1
(2) 0.63
0.63
(16)
(16)
0.63
OFF
0.03
1
(16) (.8)
1
Note
1 Spade terminal adapters are used on 6 ampere and momentary screw terminal switches, adding 0.42 in (10.7 mm) to dimension C. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-7
 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Pushbutton Control Stations Contents

1 Description Page
1 Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-9
1 Product Selection
M22 Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . V7-T1-10
1 Commercial Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-11
General Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . V7-T1-12
1 Special Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . V7-T1-13
10250H Series Heavy-Duty
1 Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-14
10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm
1 Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-15
Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty
1 30.5 mm Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-16
Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion
1 Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations . . . . V7-T1-17
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-17
1 Custom Assembled Stations
Specification Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-18
1 Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-20
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-22
1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-22

1
1 Product Description
M22 Assembled Control Special Purpose Control 10250T Series Heavy-Duty Class I Division 2 E34 Series
1 Stations Stations 30.5 mm Control Stations Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm
● M22 series operators ● Standard grade ● 10250T Series operators Control Stations
1 ● Available in horizontal and ● Polyester enclosure ● ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc ● E34 Series operators
vertical configurations UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, enclosures ● Factory sealed contact
1 ● Impact resistant
●

4X, 13 ● Surface or flush mounting blocks

polycarbonate enclosures Single 3/4 in NPT conduit ● Die-cast, polyester or
1 ● Optional yellow covers
10250H Series Heavy-Duty
●

entrance on one and two stainless steel enclosures

Control Stations element stations
● Base mounting contact ● Approved for NEC Class I
1 blocks and light units for
● 10250H Series operators ● Single 1 in NPT conduit Division 2 Groups B, C and
quick wiring and vibration ● Dark brown polyester entrance on three element D or Class I Zone 2 Group
1 resistance enclosure stations IIB plus Hydrogen type
● Protective rubber gaskets hazardous locations
Commercial Control Stations Class I Division 2 10250T
1 provide NEMA 3S rating on
Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm
● 10250T series operators pushbuttons
Control Stations
1 ● Full front label ● Top and bottom 3/4 in NPT
● 10250T Series operators
● Specific function labels on conduit entrances
Factory sealed contact
1 front of enclosure ● Includes alternate legend
●

blocks
plates and spare mounting
General Purpose Control screws ● Die-cast, polyester or
1 Stations stainless steel enclosures
● Construction grade ● Approved for NEC Class I
1 ● General purpose wall Division 2, Groups B, C and
mount D or Class I Zone 2 Group
1 ● Popular with contractors IIB plus Hydrogen type
hazardous locations
● UL (NEMA) Type 1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Features
1
M22 Assembled Control General Purpose Control 10250T Series Heavy-Duty
Stations Stations 30.5 mm Control Stations 1
● IP66, UL (NEMA) Type 4X, ● Construction grade ● 30.5 mm operators
13 ● General purpose wall ● Industrial grade 1
● Impact resistant mount ● Zinc die cast enclosure
polycarbonate enclosures ● Popular with contractors ● Popular with industrial end 1
● Optional yellow cover ● UL (NEMA) Type 1 users
● 25% smaller depth than
Special Purpose Control
● UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 1
most competitor 13
Stations
enclosures
● Standard grade Class I Division 2 Control
1
● Base mounting contact
blocks and light units for Stations
faster wiring and vibration
● Polyester enclosure
● Available with 10250T or
1
● UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4,
resistance 4X, 13 E34 30.5 mm operators
● Zinc die cast, polyester or
1
Commercial Control Stations 10250H Series Heavy-Duty stainless steel enclosures
● ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc Control Stations ● Factory-sealed contact
1
enclosures ● Industrial grade blocks
● Pre-assembled and labeled ● Extra heavy-duty ● Popular with industrial end 1
for functions such as “Fuel ● Polyester enclosure users
Shut-Off”
● Booted buttons ● UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 1
● Great for commercial
● Outdoor installation 13
applications
● UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, ● NEC Class I Division 2 1
4, 4X, 12, 13 Groups B, C and D
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-9
 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Product Selection
1
M22 Assembled Control Stations
1
1
1
1
1
1
One Element Control Stations
1 Enclosure
Orientation Description Color 1 Inscription Cover Color Catalog Number
1 Horizontal 40 mm mushroom head push-pull emergency stop operator Red NC — Yellow M22-C1-M1H

1 Horizontal 40 mm illuminated mushroom head push-pull emergency stop

operator, 85–264 Vac
Red NO-NC — Yellow M22-C1-M2H

Horizontal 40 mm mushroom head twist-to-release emergency stop operator Red NC — Yellow

1 M22-C1-M3H
Horizontal 40 mm mushroom head key-release emergency stop operator Red NC — Yellow M22-C1-M4H
1 Horizontal Flush pushbutton Green NO Gray M22-C1-M5H
Horizontal Flush pushbutton Green NO START Gray M22-C1-M6H
1 Horizontal Extended pushbutton Red NC Gray M22-C1-M7H
Horizontal Extended pushbutton Red NC STOP Gray M22-C1-M8H
1 Horizontal Key-operated selector switch, two-position maintained — NO OFF-ON Gray M22-C1-M9H

1 Horizontal Knob type selector switch, three-position maintained — 2NO HAND 0 AUTO Gray M22-C1-M10H
Horizontal Double pushbutton Green NO START Gray M22-C1-M11H
1 Red NC STOP

1 Two Element Control Stations

Element 1 Element 2 Enclosure
1 Orientation Description Color 1 Inscription Description Color 1 Inscription Cover Color Catalog Number
Horizontal Extended pushbutton Red NC Flush pushbutton Green NO Gray M22-C2-M1H
1 Vertical Flush pushbutton Green NO START Extended pushbutton Red NC STOP Gray M22-C2-M2V
Vertical Flush pushbutton Black NO FORWARD Flush pushbutton Black NO REVERSE Gray M22-C2-M3V
1
Three Element Control Stations
1
Element 1 Element 2 Element 3 Enclosure
Orientation Description Color 1 Inscription Description Color 1 Inscription Description Color 1 Inscription Cover Color Catalog Number
1
Horizontal Extended Red NC Indicating White 85–264 — Flush Green NO Gray M22-C3-M1H
pushbutton light Vac pushbutton
1 Vertical Indicating White 85–264 — Flush Green NO START Extended Red NC STOP Gray M22-C3-M2V
light Vac pushbutton pushbutton
1 Horizontal Flush Green NO Extended Red NC Flush Green NO Gray M22-C3-M3H
pushbutton pushbutton pushbutton
1 Vertical Flush Black NO OPEN Extended Red NC STOP Flush Black NO CLOSE Gray M22-C3-M4V
pushbutton pushbutton pushbutton
1 Vertical Flush Black NO FORWARD Flush Red NC STOP Flush Black NO REVERSE Gray M22-C3-M5V
pushbutton pushbutton pushbutton
1 Vertical Flush Black NO UP Flush Red NC STOP Flush Black NO DOWN Gray M22-C3-M6V
pushbutton pushbutton pushbutton
1 Notes
For assembled control stations not found in this selection, please contact the Eaton Technical Resource Center
1 at 1-877-ETN CARE (386-2273) or [email protected].
1 Contact block configuration.
1

V7-T1-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Commercial Control Stations
1
Available Catalog Numbers
Catalog Enclosure 1
Number 1 Operator Color Label
10250T5B62-S101 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY STOP 1
10250T5B62-S102 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF
10250T5B62-S103 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY GENERATOR STOP
1
10250T5B62-S104 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY HVAC SHUT-DOWN 1
10250T5B62-S105 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL DISCONNECT
10250T5B62-S106 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY BOILER SHUT-DOWN 1
10250T5B62-S107 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY CHILLER STOP
10250T5B62-S108 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY FUEL SHUT-OFF 1
10250T5B62-S109 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY REFRIGERATION STOP
10250T5B62-S110 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY POWER OFF
1
Key Specifications What is included?
● 30.5 mm (10250T series) Eaton’s pre-assembled,
10250T5B62-S111 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY GAS SHUT-OFF 1
operators enclosed emergency stop 10250T5B62-S112 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY VENTILATION SHUT-DOWN
● ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc pushbutton stations include 10250T5B62-S113 Push-Pull Gray GENERATOR 1
enclosures an operator, an enclosure,
● Industrial grade contact blocks and a variety 1
of unique labels. Each label
● UL® Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 Additional Contact Blocks
has white lettering on a red
● Single 3/4 in NPT conduit background indicating the
(Sold Separately) 1
entrance function and red lettering on a Circuit
● Dimensions—in (mm) white background indicating Catalog Number Configuration 1
● Enclosure: the operator type. 10250T51 1NC
3.88 W x 4.00 H x 3.00 D 10250T53 1NO
1
(98.6 x 101.6 x 76.3)
NO-NC
● Operator:
10250T1
1
10250T3 2NC
1.63 D (to enclosure) x
1.50 diameter 10250T2 2NO 1
(41.4 x 38.1)
Note
1 Includes 1NO-1NC contact block.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-11
 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

General Purpose Control Stations

1
Type N Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 1
1 Contact
Symbol Button Type/Color Legends Catalog Number
1 Single Button One Element Enclosure Type
Station for Padlock
1 Attachment 1 Flush/green START 10250H5100

1 Flush/red STOP 10250H5101

1 Extended/red STOP 10250H5104

1
Palm operated/black None 10250H89 2
1
1 Selector Switch Three-position selector
switch/black knob
RUN/OFF/AUTO 10250H289 2

1
1
Two Button Station Two Element Enclosure Type
1 Flush/red START/STOP 10250H5200

1
Flush/green START/STOP 10250H5207
1 extended/red

1 Flush/black (all) RAISE/LOWER 10250H5201

FOR/REV 10250H5202
1 OPEN/CLOSE 10250H5203
UP/DOWN 10250H5204
1 HIGH/LOW 10250H5205

1 FAST/SLOW 10250H5208
Three Button Station Three Element Enclosure Type
1 Flush/black (all) FOR/REV/STOP 10250H5300
UP/DOWN/STOP 10250H5301
1 RAISE/LOWER/STOP 10250H5302
OPEN/CLOSE/STOP
1 10250H5303
FAST/SLOW/STOP 10250H5304
1 Three Button Station
with Indicating Light
110/220V neon indicating light START/STOP
Clear—flush/green; flush/red 10250H5310
1 Red—flush/green; flush/red 10250ED853
Amber—flush/green; flush/red 10250ED853-2
1
1
1 Notes
1 Padlock attachment (10250H5110) must be purchased separately.
2 Round button.
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Type N Control Stations—Open Type Construction (No Cover)
Contact
1
Symbol Button Type/Color Legends Catalog Number
Selector Switch One Element Enclosure Type
1
Three-position selector RUN/OFF/AUTO
switch/black knob
10250H2538
1
1
1
Two Button Station Two Element Enclosure Type
Flush/green START/STOP 10250H2747
1
1
1
Mechanically Flush/black (all) None 1 10250H2544 1
Interlocked mech. interlocked
Pushbuttons
1
1
1
1
Special Purpose Control Stations 1
Special Purpose Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13 1
Contact
Symbol Feature Legends Catalog Number
1
10250H_ One Element Pushbutton Type
Flush START 10250H2738 1
STOP 10250H658
1
1
With lock hasp STOP 10250H665

1
10250H_ Two Element Pushbutton Type
Flush START/STOP 10250H364 1
With lock hasp START/STOP 10250H671 1
Buttons interlocked FAST/SLOW 10250ED664 1
FOR/REV 10250H2740
UP/DOWN 10250H2741
1
OPEN/CLOSE 10250H2742
1
Note
1 No legend on buttons. Specify any standard legend. 1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-13
 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

10250H Series Heavy-Duty Control Stations

1
Type H Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1 Assembled Unassembled
Legend Alternate
1 Element Type Feature Circuit Plate Legend Plate Catalog Number
10250H_ One Element
1 Pushbuttons Without padlock hasp 1NO-1NC JOG START 10250H1881
STOP
1
RUN

1 With padlock hasp 1NC STOP — 10250H4239

Knob selector Two-position 1NO-1NC OFF/ON — 10250H4526
1 switch
Three-position 1NO-1NC MAN/OFF/AUTO — 10250H4527
10250H_ Two Element
1 Pushbuttons Standard 1NO-2NC START/STOP — 10250H1884

1 2NO-2NC RAISE/LOWER FORWARD 10250H1885

REVERSE
1 OPEN
CLOSE
1 Standard and 1NO-2NC START/STOP — 10250H4240
standard with
1 padlock hasp
10250H_ Three Element
1 Pushbuttons Standard 2NO-3NC FOR/REV/STOP START OPEN 10250H1890
Two standard and JOG CLOSE 10250H4241
1 standard with
RAISE FAST
padlock hasp
LOWER SLOW
1
Indicating 120V Light-red lens 1NO-2NC MOTOR — 10250H1913
light and and two plain RUNNING
1 pushbuttons START/STOP

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations
1
Complete Assembled Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Contact Surface Mounting Flush Mounting 2
1
Element Type 1 Features Block(s) Legend Catalog Number Catalog Number
Break Glass Station Break Glass Station
1
Break glass station 3 Gray enclosure NC (logic level) EMERG. OFF 10250TGS —
Red enclosure 10250TGR —
1
1
1
One Element One Element
Pushbutton Standard NO-NC START 10250T3516 10250T3573
1
NC STOP 10250T3518 10250T3575
NO-NC None 10250T3540 10250T3597
1
Mushroom head NO-NC START 10250T3517 10250T3574
1
NC STOP 10250T3519 10250T3576
With lock hasp 4 NC STOP 10250T3520 10250T3577 1
Selector switch Two-position NO-NC OFF/ON 10250T3523 10250T3580
black knob
Three-position 2NO MAN/OFF/AUTO 10250T3524 10250T3581
1
black knob
Push-pull Momentary 2NC START/STOP 10250T3545 10250T3602
1
three-position red button
Two Element Two Element 1
Pushbuttons Standard 1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3525 10250T3582
2NO-2NC RAISE/LOWER 10250T3672 10250T3673
1
2NO-2NC None 10250T3541 10250T3598
With lock hasp 4 1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3542 10250T3599
1
Standard and mushroom head 1NO-2NC START/STOP
Standard with NO-NC START/STOP
10250T3526
10250T3528
10250T3583
10250T3585
1
maintained contact 5
Plus NC
1
Three Element Three Element
Pushbuttons Standard 2NO-3NC FOR, REV, STOP 10250T3532 10250T3589 1
2NO-3NC UP, DOWN, STOP 10250T3615 —
2NO-3NC OPEN, CLOSE, STOP 10250T3614 — 1
2NO-3NC None, None, STOP 10250T3543 10250T3600
Two standard and with lock hasp 2NO-3NC None, None, STOP 10250T3544 10250T3601 1
Indicating light Red lens — 120V 1NO-2NC MOTOR RUN, 10250T3536 10250T3593
(transformer type)
and pushbuttons
Red lens — 240V
START/STOP
10250T3537 10250T3594 1
Red lens — 480V 10250T3538 10250T3595
Red lens — 600V 10250T3539 10250T3596 1
1
Break Glass Kit
Break Glass
Operator 6 Description Catalog Number
1
Operator with hammer and five glass discs 10250TBG 1
Glass discs only (5) 10250TGL
1
Notes 1
1 Stop buttons are red—all others are black.
2 NEMA 4–13, if properly mounted on a flat surface. Consists of front plate, legend, operator and contact blocks.
3 Break glass stations will not function with Normally Open contact blocks.
1
4 Lock is 10250TA2.
5 Uses deep cover instead of shallow cover. Switch component is 10250TA67—mechanically interlocked operators. 1
6 Shown assembled to contact block (contact block supplied separately).

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-15
 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations

1
Complete Assembled Stations—
1 UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Die Cast Polyester Molded Stainless Steel
1 Contact Button Legend Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure
Symbol Type/Color Marking Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 10250T7007 Single Pushbutton
Flush/green START 10250T7003 10250T7003P 10250T7003S
1 1NO
Extended/red STOP 10250T7005 10250T7005P 10250T7005S
1NC
Alum. jumbo EMER. STOP
1 mushroom/red (engraved button)
10250T7007 10250T7007P 10250T7007S

Flush/black No legend 10250T7009 10250T7009P 10250T7009S

1 10250T7023P Two Pushbuttons

1 1NO
Flush/green START 10250T7023 10250T7023P 10250T7023S

1NC Extended/red STOP

1 Each Button Flush/black No legend 10250T7025 10250T7025P 10250T7025S
Flush/black No legend
1
1
10250T7033S Single Pilot Light—Two Pushbuttons
1 120 Vac red No legend 10250T7033 10250T7033P 10250T7033S
1NO Flush/green START
1 1NC Extended/red STOP
Each Button
1 120 Vac red No legend 10250T7035 10250T7035P 10250T7035S
Flush/black
1 Flush/black

1
Three-Position Selector Switch
1 2NO Maintained HAND/OFF/AUTO 10250T7011 10250T7011P 10250T7011S
knob/black
2NC
1 Maintained No legend 10250T7013 10250T7013P 10250T7013S
knob/black
1
1 Single Pushbutton Maintained
Push-pull EMER. STOP 10250T7019 10250T7019P 10250T7019S
1 with jumbo
mushroom/red
(engraved button)

1 Pull Push
O X 1NO
X O 1NC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations
1
Complete Assembled Stations—
E34EX_
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1
Die Cast Polyester Molded Stainless Steel
Contact Button Legend Enclosure Enclosure Enclosure 1
Symbol Type/Color Marking Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Single Pushbutton 1
Flush/green START E34EX7003 E34EX7003P E34EX7003S
1NO
Extended/red STOP E34EX7005 E34EX7005P E34EX7005S
1
1NC
Alum. jumbo EMER. STOP E34EX7007 E34EX7007P E34EX7007S
mushroom/red (engraved button) 1
Flush/black No legend E34EX7009 E34EX7009P E34EX7009S
1
Two Pushbuttons

1NO
Flush/green START E34EX7023 E34EX7023P E34EX7023S 1
Extended/red STOP
1NC
Each Button Flush/black No legend E34EX7025 E34EX7025P E34EX7025S
1
Flush/black No legend 1
1
Three-Position Selector Switch
1
2NO Maintained HAND/OFF/AUTO E34EX7011 E34EX7011P E34EX7011S
knob/black
2NC 1
Maintained No legend E34EX7013 E34EX7013P E34EX7013S
knob/black
1
1
Single Pushbutton Maintained
Push-pull with jumbo
mushroom/red
EMER. STOP
(engraved button)
E34EX7019 E34EX7019P E34EX7019S 1
1
Pull Push
O
X
X 1NO
O 1NC 1
1
1
Accessories
1
Padlock Attachment Type N Control Stations
Description Catalog Number 1
Padlock attachment—For field assembly on square button type 10250H5110
(except extended button types) 1
1
Note
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-16. 1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-17
 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Custom Assembled Stations Specification Form

1
Ordering Instructions Step 7
1 Step 1
Position 1 Fax Sheet 2 of this form to
Eaton’s TRC, Technical
1 Copy this ordering guide from
catalog.
Resource Center, at 828-651-
0549 to the attention of—
Position 1
Custom Stations Order or
1 Step 2 Position 2 email to [email protected].
Specify 10250T or E34
1 pushbutton lines in the
Within a few days you will
receive a confirmation fax
corresponding box on the Position 1
with the custom station part
1 following page. Position 2
number and price.
Position 3
10250T
1 Pages
V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283 Step 8
E34 Pages Place your order over the
1 V7-T1-284 to V7-T1-325
Position 1 VISTA System.
Position 2
10250T and Pages For Selector and Roto-Push
1 E34 V7-T1-351 to V7-T1-391 Position 3
Operators
Class I Div. 2 Position 4
1 10250T or E34
Step 3
Position Locations For single contact blocks or
1 Check back of panel
dimensions—specify single
1NO-1NC contact blocks, the
Step 6 mounting position of contacts
or double depth enclosure in
1 the corresponding box on the For non-standard legends, must be specified. For
specify legend desired, letter example: If a 1NO-1NC
following page.
1 size and location on the contact block is required,
specify if NO is to be
Step 4 layout sketches on the
mounted in Top A position or
1 Specify enclosure catalog
following page. For
limitations see Page Bottom B position.
number and price in the
V7-T1-262. For pricing,
1 corresponding box on the
use the blank legend catalog
following page. Enclosures
number and “STAMP” Suffix
can be found on Pages
1 V7-T1-110, V7-T1-263
(Ex.: 10250TS36STAMP) and
reference the most recent
and V7-T1-313. For pricing,
1 reference the most recent
PAD or VISTA-line.
PAD or VISTA-line. Example: 10250TS36
1
Step 5 Special
Legend
1 Specify catalog numbers for
for Position #_______
desired operator, legend
1 plate, light unit, accessory
and contact block(s) for each LETTER
location in the enclosure in SIZE
1 the corresponding box on the 3/32 in
following page. (See position
1 locations on this page.) 1/8 in ✔
3/16 in
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
To — Eaton’s TRC, Custom Station Order
(828) 651-0549 FAX, or email to [email protected]
FACTORY USE ONLY
1
Part Number

From — Customer Name ___________________________________________ Product Code 1

Suffix
Customer Contact __________________________________________ 1
Date
Phone Number_____________________________________________
Fax Number _______________________________________________
Engineer 1
Email Address _____________________________________________ 1
Step 2) Step 3) ✔ Step 4) 1
10250T ❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2 Single Depth Enclosure Enclosure Catalog Number Price

E34 ❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2

1
Double Depth Enclosure
1
Step 5) 1
Price Price Contact Price Contact Price Total
Position Operator U.S. $ Light Unit U.S. $ Block U.S. $ A/L B/R Block U.S. $ A/L B/R Price 1
1
1
2

3 1
4
1
Price Price Price Total
Position Legend Plate U.S. $ Lens or Caps U.S. $ Accessory U.S. $ Price 1
1
1
2

3 1
4
1
Total:
1
10% Adder
for Assembled Stations 1
Step 6) Non-standard Legends 1
Special Legend for Position #_______ Special Legend for Position #_______ Special Legend for Position #_______
1
1
1
1
1
1
LETTER SIZE ✔ LETTER SIZE ✔ LETTER SIZE ✔ 1
3/32 inch (2.4 mm) 3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
1
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)

3/16 inch (4.8 mm)

3/16 inch (4.8 mm) 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) 1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-19
 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Renewal Parts
1
Type N Renewal Parts
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Assembled Stations—Type N
1 Item No. Item No.
No. Description Req. Part Number No. Description Req. Part Number
1 Type N—Square Buttons Type N—Square Buttons, continued
1 Cover 1 9 Pushbutton element 1
1 Two element 49-3524 1NO-1NC 86-2588
One element—top button 49-3524-2 2NO 86-2588-2
1 One element—bottom button 49-3524-3 1NO 86-2588-3

1 2 Cover screw 2 11-2168 1NC 86-2588-4

3 Pushbutton support bracket 1 79-6649 10 Cover 1 49-3464
1 4 Pushbutton support bracket screw 1 11-2090 11 Pushbutton support bracket 1 79-6650
5 Pushbutton spring 2 69-2571 12 Pushbutton—top position 1
1 6 Disc (when used—two element assembly) 2 16-1960 FORWARD/black 53-1170-7
7 Pushbutton—top position 1 UP/black
1 53-1170-4
START/green 53-1169-3 RAISE/black 53-1170-5

1 RAISE/black 53-1169-66 OPEN/black 53-1170-9

FORWARD/black 53-1169-7 FAST/black 53-1170-6
1 OPEN/black 53-1169-9 13 Pushbutton middle position 1
UP/blank 53-1169-11 REVERSE/black 53-1169-15
1 Blank/green 53-1169 DOWN/black 53-1169-18

1 8 Pushbutton—bottom position 1 LOWER/black 53-1169-16

STOP/red 53-1202-2 CLOSE/black 53-1169-17
1 Extended STOP/red 53-1202-5 SLOW/black 53-1169-13
REVERSE/black 53-1169-8 14 Pushbutton—bottom position 1
1 CLOSE/black 53-1169-10 STOP/red 53-1201-2
DOWN/black 53-1169-12 15 Pushbutton element 1
1 LOWER/black 53-1169-6 2NO-3NC 86-2593

1 Blank/red 53-1202 16 Cover 1 49-3524-4

1
1

V7-T1-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Assembled Stations—Type N, continued
Item No. Item No.
1
No. Description Req. Part Number No. Description Req. Part Number
Type N—Square Buttons, continued Type N—Round Buttons
1
17 Lens 1 Similar Pushbutton assembly and element for:
to 27 1
Clear 28-494 10250H289 1 10250H2538
Red 28-887-2 10250H364 1 86-353 1
Amber 28-887-3 10250H685 1 86-353-8
18 Shield 1 73-1337 10250H665 1 86-353-8 1
19 Shield screws 4 11-2012 10250H671 1 86-353
20 Lamp (neon NE48) 1 28-494 10250H2738 1 86-353-3
1
21 Lamp receptacle 1 28-902 10250H2740 1 86-356
1
22 Lamp receptacle screw 1 911-330F1 10250H2741 1 86-356
23 Pilot light terminal base 1 86-2586 10250H2742 1 86-356 1
24 Lens 1
Clear 28-887 1
Red 28-887-2
Amber 28-887-3
1
25 Pushbutton support bracket 1 79-6650-2 1
26 Pushbutton element 1
1NO-1NC 86-2594 1
1
Type H Renewal Parts
7 8 7 7
1
1
6 9 12
10
10
1
5 5
1
4 4 5
1
4
1
3 3 11
1
1
1 2 1 2 2 1
Pushbutton Indicating Light Selector Switch 1
1
Assembled Stations—Type H
Item No. Item No. 1
No. Description Req. Part Number No. Description Req. Part Number
Type H—Assembled Stations Type H—Assembled Stations 1
1 Screw 2 11-4654 7 Screw 4 11-953
2 Screw 2 11-5719 8 Diaphragm 1 32-253-2
1
3 Base 1 17-16560 9 Mounting plate 1 17-19522 1
4 Contact blocks See Page V7-T1-265 10 Gasket 1 32-254
5 10250T operator See Pages V7-T1-219 11 Base 1 17-16561 1
to V7-T1-255
12 Mounting plate 1 17-19523
6 Mounting plate 1 17-19524 1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-21
 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled

Technical Data and Specifications

1
Ratings
1
Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type N Control Stations
1 Volts AC Volts DC
Description 110 220 440 550 120 240 600
1 Make and emergency interrupt capacity 30 15 7.5 6 1.0 0.5 0.1

1 Normal load break 3 1.5 0.75 0.6 1.0 0.5 0.1

Continuous current 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1
1 Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type H Control Stations
Volts AC 50/60 Hz Volts DC
1 Description 120 240 480 600 125 250
Make and emergency interrupt capacity 60 30 15 12 1.1 0.55
1
Normal load break 6 3 1.5 1.2 1.1 0.55
1 Continuous amperes 10 10 10 10 10 10
Voltamperes —
1 Make and emergency interrupt capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 138
Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138
1
1 Dimensions
1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Type N Control Stations

1
4.00 4.00 6.00
1 (101.6) (101.6) (152.4)

1 3.25 3.25 5.00

(82.6) (82.6) (127.0)
1
1 1.50
(38.1)
2.25 a
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
2.25 a
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
2.25 a
(57.2)
2.25 2.25 2.25
1 (57.2) (57.2) (57.2)
Single Button Station Two Button Station Three Button Station
1
Special Purpose Control Stations
1
1
1 5.50
(139.7)
6.25
(158.8)

1
1 0.75 (19.1) 3.38
2.25 Pipe Tap (85.9)
(57.2)
1 3.13
Ship Wt.
2.5 Lb (1.1 kg)
(79.5)
1
Note
1 1 2.38 (60.5) for neon indicating light.

V7-T1-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
1.2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Type H Control Stations
1
NEMA Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 13
No. of Dimensions 1
Elements Wide High Deep
1 and 2 4.50 (114.3) 8.25 (209.6) 4.50 (114.3) 1
3 4.50 (114.3) 10.75 (273.1) 4.25 (108.0)
1
10250T and E34 1
Approximate Enclosure Dimensions 1
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
Surface Mounting 1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Dimensions in In (mm) Stainless Steel Enclosure 1
Number 7/32 Screw Size for
Mounting Polyester
of
Elements
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C D E
Conduit
Entrance 1
Cast
1
1 3.88 4.00 3.00 2.69 3.25 3/4 E
(98.6) (101.6) (76.3) (68.3) (82.6) B
2 3.88 5.88 3.00 2.69 5.13 3/4
1
(98.6) (149.4) (76.3) (68.3) (130.3)
3 3.88 7.75 3.00 2.69 7.00 1
1
(98.6) (196.9) (76.3) (68.3) (177.8) D
4 33.88 9.63 3.00 2.69 8.88 1 A
C
1
Surface
(98.6) (244.6) (76.3) (68.3) (225.6)
Polyester 1
1 3.81 6.63 3.38 2.94 4.88 1

(96.8) (168.4) (85.9) (74.7) (124.0) 1

2 3.81 6.63 3.38 2.94 4.88 1

(96.8) (168.4) (85.9) (74.7) (124.0) 1

3 3.81 8.88 3.38 2.94 7.13 1

(96.8) (225.6) (85.9) (74.7) (181.1) 1

4 3.81 6.63 3.38 2.94 4.88 1

(96.8) (168.4) (85.9) (74.7) (124.0) 1

Stainless Steel
1 3.00 3.50 3.00 1.50 4.25 1 1
(76.2) (88.9) (76.2) (38.1) (108.0)
2 3.50 6.75 3.00 1.50 7.50 1 1
(88.9) (171.5) (76.2) (38.1) (190.5)
3 3.50 9.00 3.00 1.50 9.00 1 1
(88.9) (228.6) (76.2) (38.1) (228.6)
4 3.50 11.25 3.00 1.50 12.00 1
1
(88.9) (285.8) (76.2) (38.1) (304.8)

Note 1
1 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-23
 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16

16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Contents

1 Description Page
1 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-25
1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-26
1 Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-28
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-29
1 Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated,
Illuminated and Keyed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-30
1 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-34
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-37
1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-39

1
1
1
1 Product Overview
1 Product Description Features Standards and Certifications
The RMQ-16 pushbutton ● Wide product breadth: ● Laser etched operators ● UL Listed
1 line offers a wide array of RMQ-16 offers illuminated ● Heavy-duty construction ● CSA Certified
functional and attractively and non-illuminated with IP65 on front of panel ● IEC/EN 60947-5 VDE-0660
designed illuminated and pushbuttons, keyed,
1 non-illuminated pushbuttons, non-keyed, and illuminated
operators ● IP65
● LED or incandescent
selector switches, emergency selector switches,
1 stops and indicating lights. emergency stops, and a
illumination available
The illuminated line is offered large variety of accessories
● Front-of-panel operators
1 with either incandescent or ● Custom laser etching:
available in either
18 x 18 mm or 25 x 25 mm
LED. RMQ-16 devices are Hundreds of standard sizes
1 designed with two front-of-
panel operator sizes. The
markings available in
● Safety rated emergency
addition to infinite possible
18 x 18 mm or 25 x 25 mm stops (IEC 60947-5,
1 square operators can help
custom images with laser
etching positively driven contacts)
the user achieve over three ● Mounting diameter
1 times the information density
● High durability:
Pushbuttons and selector 16.2 mm to EN 50007
compared with 22 mm ranges. switches rated for 3 million
1 mechanical operations
● High information density:
1 Square operators (18 mm
or 25 mm) allow for side-
1 by-side mounting and
achieve over three times
1 the information density of
typical 22 mm installations
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Product Selection Guide
1
Pushbuttons
1
1
1
1
Description Non-Illuminated Illuminated 1
Product Selection Page V7-T1-26 Page V7-T1-27
1
Indicating Lights
1
1
1
Description Flush Extended 1
Product Selection Page V7-T1-28 Page V7-T1-28
1
Emergency Stops 1
1
1
1
Description Non-Illuminated Illuminated
Product Selection Page V7-T1-29 Page V7-T1-29 1
Selector Switches
1
1
1
1
Description Non-Illuminated Illuminated Keyed
1
Product Selection Page V7-T1-30 Page V7-T1-31 Page V7-T1-32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-25
 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16

Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated

1
Catalog Number Selection
1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.

1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated

1 Q 18 – DR – BL / WB

1 Face Plate Bulb

18 = 18 x 18 mm Operator Type Button Plate WB = With incandescent bulb 24V
1 25 = 25 x 25 mm D= Non-illuminated momentary GN = Green BL = Blue
DR = Non-illuminated maintained RT = Red GE = Yellow
LT = Illuminated momentary SW = Black X = Without
1 LTR = Illuminated maintained WS = White

1
Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
1 ● Momentary or maintained
● Customizable laser etched pushbutton operators
1 ● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator
● 3 million mechanical operations
1 ● IEC/EN 60947-5
● IP65
1
Q18-D-GN Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
1 Button Catalog Number
Type Color 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
1 Momentary Green Q18D-GN Q25D-GN
Red
1 Q18D-RT Q25D-RT
Black Q18D-SW Q25D-SW

1 White Q18D-WS Q25D-WS

Blue Q18D-BL Q25D-BL
1 Yellow Q18D-GE Q25D-GE
Without Q18D-X 1 Q25D-X 1
1 Maintained Green Q18DR-GN Q25DR-GN

1 Red Q18DR-RT Q25DR-RT

Black Q18DR-SW Q25DR-SW
1 White Q18DR-WS Q25DR-WS
Blue Q18DR-BL Q25DR-BL
1 Yellow Q18DR-GE Q25DR-GE
Without Q18DR-X 1 Q25DR-X 1
1
Note
1 1 To order separate button plates, see Page V7-T1-36.

1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Illuminated Pushbuttons
● Momentary or maintained 1
● LED or incandescent
● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator
1
● 3 million mechanical operations
● IEC/EN 60947-5
1
● IP65 1
Illuminated Pushbuttons Without Bulb 1
Q18-LT-GE
Catalog Number 2
1
Button
Type Color 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
1
Momentary Green Q18LT-GN Q25LT-GN
Red Q18LT-RT Q25LT-RT 1
Black Q18LT-SW Q25LT-SW
White Q18LT-WS Q25LT-WS 1
Blue Q18LT-BL Q25LT-BL
Yellow Q18LT-GE Q25LT-GE
1
Maintained Green Q18LTR-GN Q25LTR-GN
1
Red Q18LTR-RT Q25LTR-RT
Black Q18LTR-SW Q25LTR-SW 1
White Q18LTR-WS Q25LTR-WS
Blue Q18LTR-BL Q25LTR-BL 1
Yellow Q18LTR-GE Q25LTR-GE
1
Notes
1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18LT-GN/WB.
2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-34.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-27
 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16

Indicating Lights
1
Catalog Number Selection
1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Indicating Lights—Flush and Extended
1
Q 18 – LF – WS / WB
1
1 Face Plate Bulb
18 = 18 x 18 mm Bezel Button Plate WB = With incandescent bulb 24V
25 = 25 x 25 mm
1 LF = Flush indicator light
LH = Extended indicator light
GN = Green
RT = Red
BL = Blue
GE = Yellow
WS = White
1
Product Selection
1 Indicating Lights
● LED or incandescent
1 ● Flush and extended lenses
● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator
1 ● 3 million mechanical operations
● IEC/EN 60947-5
1 ● IP65

1 Indicating Lights Without Bulb 1

Button Catalog Number 2
1 Type Color 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Q18-LF-GE Flush Green Q18LF-GN Q25LF-GN
1 Red Q18LF-RT Q25LF-RT
White
1 Q18LF-WS Q25LF-WS
Blue Q18LF-BL Q25LF-BL
1 Yellow Q18LF-GE Q25LF-GE
Q18-LH-BL Extended. Green Q18LH-GN Q25LH-GN
1 Red Q18LH-RT Q25LH-RT
White Q18LH-WS Q25LH-WS
1 Blue Q18LH-BL Q25LH-BL

1 Yellow Q18LH-GE Q25LH-GE

Notes
1 1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18-LF-GN/WB.
2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-34.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Emergency Stops
1
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1
Emergency Stops—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 1
Q 25 – LPV – S 1
Face Plate Color 1
25 = 25 x 25 mm Operator Type Blank = Red
PV = Emergency stop S = Black 1
LPV = Emergency stop (illuminated)
1
Product Selection 1
Emergency Stops 1
● Push/pull operation
● Illuminated or non-illuminated 1
● Emergency stop (red) or Machine stop (black) available
● Suitable for use in safety applications 1
● IEC/EN 60947-5
● IP65 1
Q25PV Emergency Stops—Non-Illuminated Q25LPV Emergency Stops—Illuminated 1 1
Button Catalog Number Button Catalog Number
Color 25 x 25 mm Color 25 x 25 mm 1
Red Q25PV Red Q25LPV
Black Q25PV-S Black Q25LPV-S
1
1
Note
1 Includes built-in multiple LED 24 Vdc.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-29
 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16

Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated, Illuminated and Keyed

1
Catalog Number Selection
1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.

1 Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated

1 Q 18 – WK1R

1 Face Plate Selector Positions

18 = 18 x 18 mm WK1 = Two positions momentary
1 25 = 25 x 25 mm WK3 = Three positions momentary
WK1R = Two positions maintained
WK3R = Three positions maintained
1 WK3R1 = Three positions maintained/momentary
WK3R2 = Three positions momentary/maintained
1
Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
1 ● Momentary or maintained
● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator
1 ● VS Anti-rotation feature
● 3 million mechanical operations
1 ● IP65

1 Q18WK1 Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated

Switch Catalog Number
1 Function Position Position 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary 2 Q18WK1 Q25WK1
1
1 Maintained Q18WK1R Q25WK1R

1
Momentary 3 Q18WK3 Q25WK3
1
1 Maintained Q18WK3R Q25WK3R

1
Maintained/momentary Q18WK3R1 Q25WK3R1
1
1 Momentary/maintained Q18WK3R2 Q25WK3R2

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1
Selector Switches—Illuminated 1
Q 18 – LWK1 – WS / WB 1
Face Plate Bulb
1
18 = 18 x 18 mm Switch Positions Button Plate WB = With incandescent bulb 24V
25 = 25 x 25 mm LWK1 = Two positions momentary GN = Green WS = White
1
LWK3 = Three positions momentary RT = Red
LWK1R =
LWK3R =
Two positions maintained
Three positions maintained
1
LWK3R1 = Three positions maintained/momentary
LWK3R2 = Three positions momentary/maintained 1
Product Selection
1
Illuminated Selector Switches 1
● LED or incandescent
● Momentary or maintained 1
● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator
● VS Anti-rotation feature
1
● 3 million mechanical operations
● IP65
1
Q18LWK1-GN Selector Switches—Illuminated without Bulb 1 1
Catalog Number 2

Function Position
Button
Color
Switch
Position 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
1
Momentary 2 Green Q18LWK1-GN Q25LWK1-GN
1
Red Q18LWK1-RT Q25LWK1-RT
White Q18LWK1-WS Q25LWK1-WS 1
Maintained Green Q18LWK1R-GN Q25LWK1R-GN
Red Q18LWK1R-RT Q25LWK1R-RT 1
White Q18LWK1R-WS Q25LWK1R-WS
Momentary 3 Green Q18LWK3-GN Q25LWK3-GN
1
Red Q18LWK3-RT Q25LWK3-RT 1
White Q18LWK3-WS Q25LWK3-WS
Maintained Green Q18LWK3R-GN Q25LWK3R-GN 1
Red Q18LWK3R-RT Q25LWK3R-RT
White Q18LWK3R-WS Q25LWK3R-WS
1
Maintained/ Green
momentary
Q18LWK3R1-GN Q25LWK3R1-GN
1
Red Q18LWK3R1-RT Q25LWK3R1-RT
White Q18LWK3R1-WS Q25LWK3R1-WS 1
Momentary/ Green Q18LWK3R2-GN Q25LWK3R2-GN
maintained
Red Q18LWK3R2-RT Q25LWK3R2-RT 1
White Q18LWK3R2-WS Q25LWK3R2-WS
1
Notes
1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18LWK1-GN/WB.
2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-34.
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-31
 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16

Catalog Number Selection

1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.

1 Keyed Selector Switches—Two- and Three-Position

1 Q 18 – S1 – A1 – WS
1
Face Plate Color
18 = 18 x 18 mm GN = Green WS = White
1 25 = 25 x 25 mm S1 =
Switch Positions
Two positions momentary
Key Code
A1–A7 = Switch and key removal RT = Red BL = Blue
S1R = Two positions maintained positions (detailed below) SW = Black
1 S3 = Three positions momentary
S3R = Three positions maintained
1
1 Product Selection
Keyed Selector Switches
1 ● 5 color options
● Momentary or maintained
1 ● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator
VS Anti-rotation feature
1 ●

● 3 million mechanical operations

1 ● IP65

1 Q18S1 Keyed Selector Switches—Two-Position

Button Switch Key Removal Catalog Number
1 Function Color Position Position 1 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary Black O Q18S1 Q25S1
1
Maintained Black O
1 Q18S1R Q25S1R

1 Maintained Black O Q18S1R-A1 Q25S1R-A1

1
1 Keyed Selector Switches—Three-Position
Button Switch Key Removal Catalog Number
1 Function Color Position Position 1 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary Black O Q18S3 Q25S3
1
1 Maintained O, II Q18S3R Q25S3R

1 Maintained O Q18S3R-A1 Q25S3R-A1

I, O Q18S3R-A2 Q25S3R-A2
1 O, II Q18S3R-A3 Q25S3R-A3
Maintained/ I, O
1 momentary
Q18S3R-A4 Q25S3R-A4
O Q18S3R-A5 Q25S3R-A5

1 Momentary/ O, II Q18S3R-A6 Q25S3R-A6

maintained
O Q18S3R-A7 Q25S3R-A7
1 Note
1 I = Key is removed at the left.
1 O = Key is removed at the center.
II = Key is removed at the right.
1
1

V7-T1-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Q18S1-BL Keyed Selector Switches, Multicolor—Two-Position
Button Switch Key Removal Catalog Number
1
Function Color Position Position 1 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary Green 0 Q18S1-GN Q25S1-GN
1
Red Q18S1-RT Q25S1-RT
1
White Q18S1-WS Q25S1-WS
Blue Q18S1-BL Q25S1-BL 1
Maintained Green 0 Q18S1R-GN Q25S1R-GN
Red Q18S1R-RT Q25S1R-RT 1
White Q18S1R-WS Q25S1R-WS
Blue Q18S1R-BL Q25S1R-BL 1
1
Q18S3-RT Keyed Selector Switches, Multicolor—Three-Position
Button Switch Key Removal Catalog Number
1
Function Color Position Position 1 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary Green 0 Q18S3-GN Q25S3-GN
1
Red Q18S3-RT Q25S3-RT
1
White Q18S3-WS Q25S3-WS
Blue Q18S3-BL Q25S3-BL 1
Maintained Green 0, II Q18S3R-GN Q25S3R-GN
Red Q18S3R-RT Q25S3R-RT 1
White Q18S3R-WS Q25S3R-WS
Blue Q18S3R-BL Q25S3R-BL 1
Note
1 I = Key is removed at the left.
1
O = Key is removed at the center.
II = Key is removed at the right. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-33
 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16

Accessories
1
E10 Contact Elements ISH2,8 Insulated Ferrule
1 Catalog Catalog
Feature Number Description Number
1 Normally open (N/O) E10 Insulated ferrule ISH2,8

1
R16-MS Combination Box Spanner
1 E01 Normally closed (N/C) E01 Catalog
Description Number
1 Mounting ring tool 16-MS

1 Anti-Rotation Tab
VS
1 Description
Catalog
Number
SRA10 Screw Adapter
1 Catalog
Guard ring VS

Feature Number
1 Normally open (N/O) SRA10
Normally closed (N/C) SRA01 E8-SW Housing
1 Lamp sockets SRAL Catalog
Description Color Number
1 Surface mount enclosure White I8
Flush mount panel White E8
1 Black E8-SW
WBGL6 Incandescent 24V Bulbs
1 Catalog
Voltage Current Color Number Blanking Plug
Q18BS
1 6V 1W White WBGL6 Catalog
12V WBGL12 Size Number
1 24–28V WBGL24 18 x 18 mm Q18BS
25 x 25 mm Q25BS
1
WBLED-GN6 LEDs (AC/DC)
1 Catalog
Voltage Current Color Number
Q25AGR Cover Plate
1 Multiple Chip LED Catalog
Size Color Number
6V 45 mA Green WBLED-GN6
1 12V 24 mA WBLED-GN12 25 x 38 mm Black Q25AS

6V 45 mA Red WBLED-RT6 Gray Q25AGR

1
12V 24 mA WBLED-RT12

1 6V 45 mA Yellow WBLED-GE6
Note
12V 24 mA WBLED-GE12
1 Positive pole to X1. Integral suppressor circuit up to 1000V.
1 Single Chip LED 1
18–30V 7–12.5 mA Green LEDWB-G
1 Red LEDWB-R

1 White LEDWB-W
Blue LEDWB-B
1 Yellow LEDWB-Y

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
02SQ25 Insert Plate SQT11 Emergency Stop Labels
Catalog Catalog
1
Size Number Type Feature Number
10 x 22 mm BLANK 02SQ25 Square 4 Languages SQT11
1
Blank SQT-GE
1
Legend Plate
Q25TS-X
Catalog
SRT11 Circle 4 Languages SRT11 1
Blank SRT-GE
Size Color Number
25 x 38 mm Black Q25TS-X
1
Gray Q25TGR-X 1
1
Extra Keys
1
ES16 Codes for Extra Keys
Legend Plate—Complete
Q25TS_
Catalog
Color Catalog Number 1
Size Etching Number Green ES16-GN
25 x 38 START Q25TS-111 Red ES16-RT
1
Black
STOP Q25TS-110 ES16
1
FAULT Q25TS-250 White ES16-WS
HAND 0 AUTO Q25TS-197 Blue ES16-BL 1
MAN 0 AUTO Q25TS-397
0 Q25TS-10 1
I Q25TS-11
0 I Q25TS-90
1
I 0 II Q25TS-93 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-35
 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16

Button Plates Button Plates

1 Catalog Catalog
Type Color Etching Number Type Color Etching Number
1 18 x 18 mm Black — 01TQ18 25 x 25 mm Black — 01TQ25
CUSTOM CUSTOM
1 01TQ18-ETCH 01TQ25-ETCH
21TQ18 21TQ25
1 19TQ18 19TQ25
White — 02TQ18 “STOP” 112TQ25
1 CUSTOM 02TQ18-ETCH “ON” 221TQ25
20TQ18 White — 02TQ25
1 Green — 03TQ18 CUSTOM 02TQ25-ETCH

1 CUSTOM 03TQ18-ETCH 20TQ25

11TQ18 Green — 03TQ25
1 Red — 04TQ18 CUSTOM 03TQ25-ETCH
CUSTOM 04TQ18-ETCH “START” 111TQ25
1 10TQ18 11TQ25
Yellow — 05TQ18 Red — 04TQ25
1 CUSTOM 05TQ18-ETCH CUSTOM 04TQ25-ETCH

1 Blue — 06TQ18 “STOP” 110TQ25

CUSTOM 06TQ18-ETCH 10TQ25
1 “OFF” 217TQ25
Yellow — 05TQ25
1 CUSTOM 05TQ25-ETCH
Blue —
1 06TQ25
CUSTOM 06TQ25-ETCH
1
Instructions for Ordering Laser Inscriptions
1 1. Identify part number to be inscribed.

1 2. Pick symbol from library and identify suffix code associated with the symbol.
3. Order part number already listed in the catalog with -ETCH suffix.
1 4. When placing an order by fax or Vistaline on the web, reference order item number and indicate appropriate
symbol code or desired text.
1
Example
1 To order a 25 mm green flush button plate with the inscription AUTO HAND:

1 Order Catalog Number 03TQ25-ETCH.

AUTO HAND inscription is found on Page V7-T1-127 in the M22 Symbols Library, suffix code is X91.
In the order notes, reference item number and suffix X91.
1
Note: For a complete list of available symbols, see Pages V7-T1-124 to V7-T1-130, M22 Symbols Library.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Technical Data and Specifications
1
RMQ-16
Specification
Illuminated Pushbutton Illuminated Selector 1
Description Unit Contact Elements Operators (Maintained) Switches Indicating Lights
General Technical Data 1
Standards UL, CSA, IEC/EN 60 947, VDE 0660, CE
Lifespan, mechanical (operations) x 105 100 30 (3) 3 — 1
Maximum operating frequency Ops/h 3600 3600 (1800) 1800 —
Operating force N 3 4 — — 1
Operating torque Nm — 0.2 —
Degree of protection to IEC/EN 60 529 IP20 with ISH2,8 IP65 IP65 IP65 1
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60 068-2-3/Damp heat, cyclical, to IEC 60 068-2-30
Ambient temperature 1
Open °C –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60
Enclosed °C –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 1
Mounting position As required As required As required As required
Mechanical shock resistance to IEC 60 068-2-27 g 40 40 40 40 1
(half-sinusoidal shock, duration 11 ms)
Terminal capacity (min./max.) mm2 0.5/1.0 0.5/1.0 0.5/1.0 0.5/1.0 1
Blade terminal 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm to DIN 46 244
Ferrule 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm to DIN 46 247 and IEC 60 760 1
Dimensions See Page V7-T1-39 See Page V7-T1-39 See Page V7-T1-39 See Page V7-T1-39
Contacts 1
Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp V 4000 800 800 800
Rated insulation voltage U i V 250 250 250 250 1
Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3
Rated operational voltage U e (max.) V 250 24 24 24 1
Rated operational current I e (max.) A 4 — — —
Control circuit reliability at 1
24 Vdc/5 mA (Fault probability Hr) <10–7, <1 fault in 107 operations
5 Vdc/1 mA (Fault probability Hr) <5 x 10–6, < fault in 5 x 106 operations 1
Use of insulated ferrule ISH 2.8
From U e >24 Vac/dc recommended >24 Vac/dc recommended >24 Vac/dc recommended >24 Vac/dc recommended 1
From U e >50 Vac or 120 Vdc is mandatory, even on unused blade terminals
Maximum short-circuit protective device 1
Fuseless Type FAZ-B6 — — —
Fuse A gG/gL 10 — — — 1
Switching Capacity
Rated operational current I e 1
AC-15
24V A 4 — — —
48V A 4 — — —
1
110V A 4 — — —
1
230V A 4 — — —
DC-13
24V A 3 — — —
1
42V A 1.0 — — —
60V A 0.8 — — —
1
110V A 0.5 — — —
1
220V A 0.2 — — —
UL/CSA Data UL listed File No. E 29 184, Guide No. NKCR/CSA certified File No. 46 552 Class No. 321103 1
Blade terminal 0.110 x 0.032 in 0.110 x 0.032 in 0.110 x 0.032 in 0.110 x 0.032 in
Fast-on connector 0.110 x 0.032 in AMP #60 197-1, 62 050-1 or equivalent 1
Rated voltage maximum AC Vac 300 24 24 24
Contact rating code AC E10/E01 C300/Q300 — — — 1
Thermal continuous test current A 2.5 — — —
Rated voltage maximum DC Vdc 300 — — — 1
Contact rating code DC E10/E01 C300/R300 — — —
Thermal continuous test current A 2.5 — — — 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-37
 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16

RMQ-16, continued
1 Specification
Emergency Stop
Pushbutton Operators Key-Released Emergency Stop Operators
1 Description Unit (Maintained) Selector Switches Operators Operators (Illuminated) 1
General Technical Data
1 Standards UL, CSA, IEC/EN 60 947, VDE 0660, CE
Lifespan, mechanical (operations) x 105 30 (3) 3 3 0.5 0.5
1 Maximum operating frequency Ops/h 3600 (1800) 1800 1800 600 600
Operating force N 4 — — 25 25
1 Operating torque Nm — 0.2 0.4 — —
Degree of protection to IEC/EN 60 529 IP65 IP65 IP65 IP65 IP65
1 Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60 068-2-3
Damp heat, cyclical, to IEC 60 068-2-30
1 Ambient temperature
Open °C –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60
1 Enclosed °C –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40
Mounting position As required As required As required As required As required
1 Mechanical shock resistance to g 40 40 40 40 40
IEC 60 068-2-27 (half-sinusoidal shock,
1 duration 11 ms)
Terminal capacity (min./max.) mm2 — — — — 0.5/1.0
1 Blade terminal — — — — 2.8 x 0.8 mm
Ferrule — — — — 2.8 x 0.8 mm
1 Dimensions See Page V7-T1-39 See Page V7-T1-39 See Page V7-T1-39 See Page V7-T1-39 See Page V7-T1-39

1 Lifespan, Electrical AC-15 to IEC/EN 60 947-5-1 at 230V

l e = Rated operational current
1
Operations
5.0
x 10 6
1 4.0 E10
3.0
1 E01
2.0
1
1 0.9
1.0
0.8
0.7
1 0.6
0.5

1 0.4

0.3

1 0.2

1
1 0.1

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.9 2.0 3.0 4.0

1 0.6 0.8 1.0 l e [A]

1 Note
1 See illuminated selector switches on Page V7-T1-31 for contact values.

1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-38 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
1.3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
1
Actuating and Indicator Elements 1
Square Style Q…BS
1
18.0
M16 x 1 [0.71]
1
1
1
39.0 [1.54] Ø25.0 [0.98] Ø18.0 [0.71]
4.0 [0.16]
24.0 [0.94]
1
1
Q…D-_, Q…DR-_ Q…S_ Q…WK_
1
1
1
39.0 [1.54]
39.0 [1.54] 1
11.0 [0.43] 39.0 [1.54] 26.0 [1.02]
17.0 1
[0.67] 13.0 [0.51]
1
Q…LT-_, Q…LTR-_, Q…LF-_ Q…LH-_ Q…LWK_
1
1
1
49.0 [1.93] 49.0 [1.93] 49.0 [1.93] 1
11.0
[0.43]
16.0 26.0 1
[0.63] [1.02]
1
Q25PV_, Q25LPV_
1
1
Ø 28.0
[1.10]
1
Ø 25.0 37.0 [1.46] 1
[0.98] 39.0 [1.54]
49.0 [1.93] 1
28.0 [1.10]

1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-39
 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16

Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]

1
Front Fixing
1 Q18, Q25, E89, SRA, VS, M16

1 E01, E10 18.0

[0.71] ISH 2.8
[0.11]
1
1
49.0 [1.93]
1 6.0
[0.24] 58.0 [2.28]

1 Grid Dimension to Minimum Grid Spacing

Drilling Dimensions IEC/EN 60947 Dimension Mounting Distance
1
Drilling Q25 Q18 Mounting
1 18.0
[0.71]
1
25.0
[0.98]
1
16.2 [0.64]
1 + 0.2
0 25.0
18.0 [0.71]
[0.98]
1
RMQ Screw Adapter Anti-Rotation Feature RMQ-16 Label Mount
1
SRA_ VS Q25TS-_
1 14.9 [0.59]

1 22.0
12.0
[0.47]
[0.87]
1 17.8
[0.70]
38.0
1 [1.50]
17.8
1 18.5 [0.73]
[0.70]
13.0
[0.51]
1
5.6 [0.22]
1 25.0 [0.98]

1 Blanking Plates
Q25AS
1
1 4.0
[0.16]

1
1 38.0
[1.50]

1
13.0
1 [0.51]
12.0
1 [0.47]
Note
25.0 [0.98]
1 Exposed conductive part (metal).
1

V7-T1-40 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Contents
Description Page
1
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-42
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-105 1
Coding Adapter Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-112
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-113 1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-117
Symbols Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-123 1
Drawings
Online
1
1
1
1
1
Product Description Standards and Certifications 1
Eaton’s M22 industrial heavy- Highly Modular and All operators and components All pushbuttons, emergency-
1
duty pushbutton line offers a Versatile Line are IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660. stops, indicating lights,
wide array of functional, potentiometers and selector
attractive and ergonomically
● Field convertible functions
(pushbuttons and selector
All operators carry an IP66 switches carry NEMA 4X, 13. 1
designed illuminated and non- rating with some rated for
switches), maintained to washdown environment with Marine classification
illuminated pushbuttons, momentary IP67 and IP69K. societies: Bureau Veritas
1
selector switches, push-pulls, ●
Customizable laser (BV), Germanischer Lloyd
alternate action and twist-to-
release operators. The engraving capabilities (GL), and Lloyd’s Register of 1
complete illuminated line is Shipping (LR) approved.
only offered in LED light units
LED Indicators 1
to ensure high-quality
●
100,000 hours of life
brightness and up to 100,000 in high-vibration
environments
1
hours of LED illumination.
M22 operators are available ● Lenses specifically
designed for LED
1
with either a silver or black
nylon colored or chrome illumination
metal bezel. The space- ●
Multi-color LED in the
1
saving modular construction flat contact family allows
of the M22 line makes on- versatility in design and 1
the-job assembly fast and reduces installation costs
simplifies the stocking of and footprint 1
both components and
Rugged Design
complete devices.
●
Most pushbutton operators
1
NEW and contact blocks exceed
Eaton has expanded M22 5 million mechanical 1
pilot devices with a metal operations
bezel option. The new M22M ●
All components have IP66 1
pushbutton is an elegant rating, and some carry
chrome metal bezel that is IP67 and IP69K for 1
attractive, durable and rugged washdown environment;
for heavy-duty environments. see Page V7-T1-113 for 1
M22M devices are configurable further technical data
and complement components
within the M22 line. Innovative Technologies 1
●
ASi communicating
devices 1
●
Palm switches
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-41
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5mm 22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Features Benefits
1 ●
Field convertible ●
Silver, black or chrome ●
Modular construction ●
Anti-rotation tab saves
pushbuttons and metal bezel now available makes assembly fast and installation time and
1 mushroom operators from ●
Snap-lock contact blocks simplifies stocking of prevents operator rotation
maintained to momentary and light units for front or components and complete ● High mechanical and
1 status base mounting devices electrical life allows for use
●
Field convertible selector ●
Notched hole mounting ●
Field convertibility of in tough and challenging
1 switches from momentary with anti-rotation tab and operator status for applications
to maintained operation central nut mounting on pushbuttons and selector ●
Laser inscription
1 and vice versa each operator switches helps distributors capabilities allow for high-
●
LED offering only for all ●
Over 5 million mechanical and customers reduce quality, wear-resistant
inventory and increase
1 illuminated operators operations and 1.6 million
functionality
markings
●
Laser engraved electrical (reference ●
All normally closed (NC)
●
LED offering only for
1 pushbuttons, lenses and
enclosures
specification sheet)
improved brightness
contacts are direct opening
action, i.e., NC contacts
●
Direct opening action
Heavy-duty construction normally closed contacts quality and up to 100,000 are physically forced open
1 ●

with a minimum of IP66 hours of operation by direct linkage with the

●
Unique and innovative
and UL NEMA® type 4X / offerings, such as four-way
●
Plastic construction is pushbutton operator
1 13 on front of panel pushbuttons and USB/ corrosion resistant. in the unlikely event of
operators. Many operators RJ45 bulkhead interfaces Operators are designed contact weld
1 even carry IP67 and IP69K, ● Screw or spring-cage
for rugged environments, ●
Some M22 operators are
for the toughest ideal for washdown capable of communication
terminals applications (reference
1 applications
each operator’s IP ratings
via ASi protocol
●
M22 offers USB and RJ45
and IEC/EN 60529 for ingress
1 protection definition)
connections

1
1 Product Selection Guide
Pushbuttons
1
1
1
1 Description Non-illuminated, flush Non-illuminated, extended Illuminated, flush Illuminated, extended

1 Operator Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained

Pages V7-T1-47 to Pages V7-T1-50, Pages V7-T1-52, Pages V7-T1-54, Pages V7-T1-57 to Pages V7-T1-60, Pages V7-T1-62, Pages V7-T1-64,
1 Product Selection V7-T1-49 V7-T1-51 V7-T1-53 V7-T1-55 V7-T1-59 V7-T1-61 V7-T1-63 V7-T1-65

1
Indicating Lights
1
1
1
1 Description Flat Conical
Pages V7-T1-66, Pages V7-T1-66,
1 Product Selection V7-T1-67 V7-T1-67

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Emergency Stops
1
1
1
Description Non-illuminated Illuminated Key release Mechanical indication 1
Product Selection Page V7-T1-69 Page V7-T1-69 Page V7-T1-70 Page V7-T1-70
1
Selector Switches 1
1
1
1
Non-illuminated Non-illuminated Illuminated Key-operated
Description knob type rotary type 1
Pages V7-T1-74, Pages V7-T1-76, Pages V7-T1-79 Pages V7-T1-82
Product Selection V7-T1-75 V7-T1-77 to V7-T1-81 to V7-T1-85 1
1
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
1
1
1
Description Non-illuminated Non-illuminated 1
Operator Momentary Maintained
Pages V7-T1-88, Pages V7-T1-90, 1
Product Selection V7-T1-89 V7-T1-91
1
Double Pushbuttons 1
1
1
1
Extended pushbuttons Flush top and center Flush pushbuttons and
Description and center light light, extended bottom center light 1
Operator Momentary Momentary —
Product Selection Page V7-T1-93 Page V7-T1-94 Page V7-T1-94
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-43
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Four-Way Pushbuttons Bulkhead Interfaces

1
1
1
1
1 Description Non-interlocked Interlocked Description Bulkhead interfaces

1 Operator Momentary Maintained Product Selection Page V7-T1-101

Product Selection Page V7-T1-97 Page V7-T1-97
1
Joysticks ASi Adapter Modules
1
1
1
1
Description Joysticks Description ASi adapter modules
1 Product Selection Page V7-T1-98 Product Selection Page V7-T1-102

1 Potentiometers Palm Switches

1
1
1
1 Description Potentiometers Description Palm switches

Product Selection Page V7-T1-100 Product Selection Page V7-T1-103

1
Acoustic Devices Assembled Control Stations
1
1
1
1
Description Acoustic devices Description Assembled control stations

1 Product Selection Page V7-T1-100 Product Selection Page V7-T1-10

1 Through-the-Door Operators

1
1
1
Description Through-the-door operators
1 Product Selection Page V7-T1-101

1
1

V7-T1-44 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
M22-_ Point-of-Purchase Units
Contact
1
Color Type Configuration 1 Catalog Number

Black Flush momentary NO/NC M22-D-S-K11-P

1
Red Extended momentary NO/NC M22-DH-R-K11-P 1
Green Flush momentary NO/NC M22-D-G-K11-P
Red Ext. illuminated (12–30V) momentary NO/NC M22-DLH-R-K11-R-P 1
Red Ext. illuminated (85–264V) momentary NO/NC M22-DLH-R-K11-230R-P
White Flush illuminated (12–30V) maintained NO/NC M22-DRL-W-K11-W-P
1
White Flush illuminated (85–264V) maintained NO/NC M22-DRL-W-K11-230W-P
1
Red Indicating light (12–30V) — M22-L-R-R-P
Green Indicating light (12–30V) — M22-L-G-G-P 1
Red Indicting light (85–264V) — M22-L-R-230R-P
Green Indicating light (85–264 Vac) — M22-L-G-230G-P 1
Red Twist-to-release E-stop 1NO/2NC M22-PVT-K12-P
Red Illuminated (12–30V) push-pull E-stop 1NO/2NC M22-PVL-K12-R-P
1
Red Illuminated (85–264V) push-pull E-stop 1NO/2NC M22-PVL-K12-230R-P
1
— Two-position maintained V selector switch NO/NC M22-WKV-K11-P
— Three-position momentary selector switch NO/NC M22-WK3-K22-P 1
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-45
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Contents

1 Description Page
1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . V7-T1-47
1 Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-50
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . V7-T1-52
1 Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . V7-T1-54
Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-57
1 Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-60
Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-62
1 Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-64

1
1
1
1
1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
1 Product Description Features
Eaton’s M22 pushbutton ● Field convertible from ●
Modular construction
1 line is a complete, modular maintained to momentary makes assembly fast and
and versatile offering. From (available on maintained simplifies stocking of
field-convertible maintained pushbuttons only) components and complete
1 operators to customizable devices
●
Customizable laser
laser engraved buttons, the engraving on all buttons ●
Capable of communicating
1 M22 pushbutton line provides ●
LED offering only for via ASi protocol with ASi
endless opportunity for improved brightness adapter modules
1 flexibility and reduced quality and up to 100,000
inventory. Each operator hours of operation Protection Type
1 type provides options for
ordering as complete or
●
More than five million
●
IP67, IP69K
mechanical operations on ● NEMA 4X, 13
component parts allowing
1 for a perfect fit for each momentary and 1 million
application. All of this on maintained pushbuttons
1 flexibility comes in a very
rugged design.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-46 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons 1
M22 – D – S – X0 – K10 1
Bezel
M22 = Silver Inscription Contact Blocks
1
M22S = Black GB0 = STOP X0 = K10 = 1NO K30 = 3NO
M22M = Metal GB1 = START X1 = K01 = 1NC K03 = 3NC 1
GB2 = CLOSE X4 = K20 = 2NO K21 = 2NO-1NC

Operator Type
Button Plate Color GB3 =
GB4 =
UP
DOWN
X5 =
X6 =
K02 =
K11 =
2NC
1NO-1NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC 1
G = Green S = Black GB5 = OFF
D= Flush momentary Y = Yellow R = Red X7 =
DH = Extended momentary B = Blue W = White
GB6 = ON X8 = 1
DG = Flush with guard 1 GB14 = RESET
GB15 = FORWARD
DR =
DGH =
Flush maintained
Extended momentary with guard 1
GB16 = REVERSE 1
DRH = Extended maintained
1
Silver bezel only.
1
1
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary 1
M22-D-G-K10 Complete Devices 1
Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Color Configuration 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Black NO M22-D-S-K10 M22S-D-S-K10 M22M-D-S-K10
NC M22-D-S-K01 M22S-D-S-K01 M22M-D-S-K01
1
M22S-D-G-K10
2NO M22-D-S-K20 M22S-D-S-K20 M22M-D-S-K20
1
2NC M22-D-S-K02 M22S-D-S-K02 M22M-D-S-K02
1NO-1NC M22-D-S-K11 M22S-D-S-K11 M22M-D-S-K11 1
Red NO M22-D-R-K10 M22S-D-R-K10 M22M-D-R-K10
NC M22-D-R-K01 M22S-D-R-K01 M22M-D-R-K01 1
2NO M22-D-R-K20 M22S-D-R-K20 M22M-D-R-K20
2NC M22-D-R-K02 M22S-D-R-K02 M22M-D-R-K02
1
M22M-D-G-K10
1NO-1NC M22-D-R-K11 M22S-D-R-K11 M22M-D-R-K11 1
Green NO M22-D-G-K10 M22S-D-G-K10 M22M-D-G-K10
NC M22-D-G-K01 M22S-D-G-K01 M22M-D-G-K01 1
2NO M22-D-G-K20 M22S-D-G-K20 M22M-D-G-K20
2NC M22-D-G-K02 M22S-D-G-K02 M22M-D-G-K02
1
1NO-1NC M22-D-G-K11 M22S-D-G-K11 M22M-D-G-K11
1
Note
1
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-47
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary

1
M22-D-G Operators Only 1
1 Button Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Color Inscription Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

1 Black — M22-D-S M22S-D-S M22M-D-S

Red — M22-D-R M22S-D-R M22M-D-R
1 STOP M22-D-R-GB0 M22S-D-R-GB0 —
M22-D-R-X0 M22S-D-R-X0 M22M-D-R-X0
1 M22S-D-G Green — M22-D-G M22S-D-G M22M-D-G

1 START M22-D-G-GB1 M22S-D-G-GB1 M22M-D-G-GB1

M22-D-G-X1 M22S-D-G-X1 M22M-D-G-X1
1 White — M22-D-W M22S-D-W M22M-D-W
Blue — M22-D-B M22S-D-B M22M-D-B
1 Yellow — M22-D-Y M22S-D-Y M22M-D-Y
— — M22-D-X-SRG 2 M22S-D-X-SRG 2 M22M-D-X-SRG 2
1 M22M-D-G
— M22-D-X-SWRGYB 3 M22S-D-X-SWRGYB 3 M22M-D-X-SWRGYB 3

1
1
1
M22-DG-G Silver Guarded
1 Button Silver Bezel
Color Inscription Catalog Number
1 Black — M22-DG-S
Red — M22-DG-R
1 Green — M22-DG-G

1 White — M22-DG-W
Blue — M22-DG-B
1 Yellow — M22-DG-Y
— — M22-DG-X-SRG 2
1 — M22-DG-X-SWRGYB 3

1 Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
1 3 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-48 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
1
ss

1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
Components
1
Button Plates 1 Buttonless Operator
M22-XD-G
Color Inscription Catalog Number
1
Black — M22-XD-S 2 1
Custom M22-XD-S-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XD-S-GB0 1
START M22-XD-S-GB1
Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
CLOSE M22-XD-S-GB2 Catalog Catalog Catalog 1
UP M22-XD-S-GB3 Number 4 Number 4 Number 4
DOWN
OFF
M22-XD-S-GB4
M22-XD-S-GB5
M22-D-X M22S-D-X M22M-D-X 1
ON Silver Guarded
TEST
M22-XD-S-GB6
M22-XD-S-GB9
1
FORWARD M22-XD-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XD-S-GB16
1
RAISE M22-XD-S-GB17
LOWER M22-XD-S-GB18
1
M22-XD-S-X0 Silver Bezel
M22-XD-S-X1
Catalog
Number 4
1
M22-XD-S-X2
M22-XD-S-X4
M22-DG-X 1
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-S-X7
M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 1
Red — M22-XD-R 2 Terminal Contact
Custom M22-XD-R-ETCH 3 Type Configuration 5 Catalog Number 1
STOP M22-XD-R-GB0 Screw NO M22-K10
OFF M22-XD-R-GB5 NO, early-make M22-K10P 1
M22-XD-R-X0 NC M22-K01
Green — M22-XD-G 2 NC, late-break M22-K01D 1
Custom M22-XD-G-ETCH 3 Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
START M22-XD-G-GB1 M22-FK01
NC M22-CK01 1
ON M22-XD-G-GB6 NC, late-break M22-CK01D
M22-XD-G-X1 2NO M22-CK20 1
Blue — M22-XD-B 2 2NC M22-CK02
Custom M22-XD-B-ETCH 3 NO-NC M22-CK11 1
RESET M22-XD-B-GB14 NC M22-FK01 6

White —
M22-XD-B-X6
M22-XD-W 2
NO M22-FK10 6 1
Custom M22-XD-W-ETCH 3
START M22-XD-W-GB1 Notes
1
1 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
M22-XD-W-X1
Yellow — M22-XD-Y 2
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
1
Custom M22-XD-Y-ETCH 3
Black, red, green — M22-XD-SRG
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols

Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.

1
Black, white, — M22-XD-SWRGYB For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
red, green,
4
5
Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1
yellow, blue All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
6
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-49
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1

1
Operators Only 2
1 M22-DR-S
Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Black M22-DR-S M22S-DR-S M22M-DR-S

1 Red M22-DR-R M22S-DR-R M22M-DR-R

Green M22-DR-G M22S-DR-G M22M-DR-G
1 M22S-DR-S
White M22-DR-W M22S-DR-W M22M-DR-W
Blue M22-DR-B M22S-DR-B M22M-DR-B
1 Yellow M22-DR-Y M22S-DR-Y M22M-DR-Y
3
M22-DR-X-SRG M22S-DR-X-SRG M22M-DR-X-SRG
1 4
M22-DR-X-SWRGYB M22S-DR-X-SWRGYB M22M-DR-X-SWRGYB

1
1 M22M-DR-S

1
1
1
Notes
1 1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,

which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1 3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).

1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
1 to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-50 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
1
ss

1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XD-S Button Plates 2 Buttonless Operator 1
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black — M22-XD-S 3
1
Custom M22-XD-S-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XD-S-GB0 1
START M22-XD-S-GB1
CLOSE M22-XD-S-GB2
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Black Bezel
Catalog
Metal Bezel
Catalog
1
UP M22-XD-S-GB3 Number 5 Number 5 Number 5
DOWN M22-XD-S-GB4
M22-DR-X M22S-DR-X M22M-DR-X
1
OFF M22-XD-S-GB5
ON M22-XD-S-GB6 1
TEST M22-XD-S-GB9
Contact Blocks 2
FORWARD M22-XD-S-GB15 M22-K10
Terminal Contact
1
REVERSE M22-XD-S-GB16
Type Configuration 6 Catalog Number
RAISE M22-XD-S-GB17
Screw NO M22-K10
1
LOWER M22-XD-S-GB18
M22-XD-S-X0 NO, early-make M22-K10P
1
M22-XD-S-X1 NC M22-K01
M22-XD-S-X2 NC, late-break M22-K01D 1
M22-XD-S-X4 M22-FK01 Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-S-X7
NC M22-CK01 1
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
Red — M22-XD-R 3
Custom M22-XD-R-ETCH 4 2NO M22-CK20 1
STOP M22-XD-R-GB0 2NC M22-CK02
OFF M22-XD-R-GB5 NO-NC M22-CK11
1
M22-XD-R-X0 7

Green — M22-XD-G 3
NC M22-FK01
1
NO M22-FK10 7
Custom M22-XD-G-ETCH 4
START M22-XD-G-GB1 Notes 1
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching
ON M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-G-X1
the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
1
Blue — M22-XD-B 3 Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
Custom M22-XD-B-ETCH 4 3 Minimum order quantity of (10). 1
RESET M22-XD-B-GB14 4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols

M22-XD-B-X6 Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
1
White — M22-XD-W 3 5 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Custom M22-XD-W-ETCH 4 6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1
START M22-XD-W-GB1 7 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,

M22-XD-W-X1 M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only. 1

Yellow — M22-XD-Y 3
Custom M22-XD-Y-ETCH 4 1
Black, red, green — M22-XD-SRG
Black, white, red,
green, yellow, blue
— M22-XD-SWRGYB 1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-51
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary

1 Complete Devices
M22-DH-R-K10
1 Button
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number

1 Red NO M22-DH-R-K10 M22S-DH-R-K10 M22M-DH-R-K10

NC M22-DH-R-K01 M22S-DH-R-K01 M22M-DH-R-K01
1 M22S-DH-R-K10 2NO M22-DH-R-K20 M22S-DH-R-K20 M22M-DH-R-K20
2NC M22-DH-R-K02 M22S-DH-R-K02 M22M-DH-R-K02
1 1NO-1NC M22-DH-R-K11 M22S-DH-R-K11 M22M-DH-R-K11

1
1 M22M-DH-R-K10

1
1
Silver Guarded
1 M22-DGH-R-K10
Button Contact Block Silver Bezel
Color Configuration 1 Catalog Number
1 Red NO M22-DGH-R-K10
NC M22-DGH-R-K01
1 2NO M22-DGH-R-K20

1 2NC M22-DGH-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22-DGH-R-K11
1 Operators Only 2
M22-DH-R

1 Button
Color Inscription
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number

1 Black — M22-DH-S M22S-DH-S M22M-DH-S

Red — M22-DH-R M22S-DH-R M22M-DH-R
1 M22S-DH-R STOP M22-DH-R-GB0 M22S-DH-R-GB0 M22M-DH-R-GB0
M22-DH-R-X0 M22S-DH-R-X0 M22M-DH-R-X0
1 Green — M22-DH-G M22S-DH-G M22M-DH-G
White — M22-DH-W M22S-DH-W M22M-DH-W
1 Blue — M22-DH-B M22S-DH-B M22M-DH-B

1 M22M-DH-R Yellow — M22-DH-Y M22S-DH-Y M22M-DH-Y

3
— M22-DH-X-SRG M22S-DH-X-SRG M22M-DH-X-SRG
1 4 — M22-DH-X-SWRGYB M22S-DH-X-SWRGYB M22M-DH-X-SWRGYB

1
Silver Guarded
M22-DGH-R-K10
1 Button Silver Bezel
Color Inscription Catalog Number

1 Black — M22-DGH-S
Red — M22-DGH-R
1 STOP M22-DGH-R-GB0
M22-DGH-R-X0
1 Green — M22-DGH-G
White — M22-DGH-W
1 Blue — M22-DGH-B

1 Yellow — M22-DGH-Y

Notes
1 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

1 3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).

V7-T1-52 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
1
ss

1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
Components 1
Button Plates 1 Buttonless Operator
M22-XDH-R
Color Inscription Catalog Number
1
Black — M22-XDH-S 2 1
Custom M22-XDH-S-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDH-S-GB0 1
START M22-XDH-S-GB1
Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
CLOSE
UP
M22-XDH-S-GB2
M22-XDH-S-GB3
Catalog Catalog Catalog 1
Number 4 Number 4 Number 4
DOWN
OFF
M22-XDH-S-GB4
M22-XDH-S-GB5
M22-D-X M22S-D-X M22M-D-X 1
ON M22-XDH-S-GB6 Silver Guarded
TEST M22-XDH-S-GB9
1
FORWARD M22-XDH-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XDH-S-GB16
1
RAISE M22-XDH-S-GB17
LOWER M22-XDH-S-GB18 1
M22-XDH-S-X0 Silver Bezel
M22-XDH-S-X1
Catalog
Number 4
1
M22-XDH-S-X2
M22-XDH-S-X4
M22-DG-X 1
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-S-X7
M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 1
Red — M22-XDH-R 2 Terminal Contact
Custom M22-XDH-R-ETCH 3 Type Configuration 5 Catalog Number 1
STOP M22-XDH-R-GB0 Screw NO M22-K10
OFF M22-XDH-R-GB5 NO, early-make M22-K10P 1
M22-XDH-R-X0 NC M22-K01
Green — M22-XDH-G 2 NC, late-break M22-K01D 1
Custom M22-XDH-G-ETCH 3 Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
START M22-XDH-G-GB1 M22-FK01
NC M22-CK01 1
ON M22-XDH-G-GB6 NC, late-break M22-CK01D
M22-XDH-G-X1 2NO M22-CK20 1
Blue — M22-XDH-B 2 2NC M22-CK02
Custom
RESET
M22-XDH-B-ETCH 3
M22-XDH-B-GB14
NO-NC M22-CK11 1
NC M22-FK01 6

White —
M22-XDH-B-X6
M22-XDH-W 2
NO M22-FK10 6 1
Custom M22-XDH-W-ETCH 3
START M22-XDH-W-GB1 Notes
1
1
M22-XDH-W-X1 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Yellow — M22-XDH-Y 2 Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110. 1
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
Custom M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 3
Black, red, green — M22-XDH-SRG
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols

Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.

1
Black, white, red, — M22-XDH-SWRGYB For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
green, yellow, blue 4 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
6 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,

M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.

1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-53
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1

1
M22-DRH-W Operators Only 2
1 Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

1 Black M22-DRH-S M22S-DRH-S M22M-DRH-S

Red M22-DRH-R M22S-DRH-R M22M-DRH-R
1 Green M22-DRH-G M22S-DRH-G M22M-DRH-G
White M22-DRH-W M22S-DRH-W M22M-DRH-W
1 M22S-DRH-W
Blue M22-DRH-B M22S-DRH-B M22M-DRH-B

1 Yellow M22-DRH-Y M22S-DRH-Y M22M-DRH-Y

3
M22-DRH-X-SRG M22S-DRH-X-SRG M22M-DRH-X-SRG
1 4
M22-DRH-X-SWRGYB M22S-DRH-X-SWRGYB M22M-DRH-X-SWRGYB

1 M22M-DRH-W

1
1
1
Notes
1 1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,

which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

1 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
1 to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-54 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
1
ss

1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components
M22-XDH-W Button Plates 2 Buttonless Operator 1
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black — M22-XDH-S 3
1
Custom M22-XDH-S-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XDH-S-GB0 1
START M22-XDH-S-GB1
CLOSE M22-XDH-S-GB2
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Black Bezel
Catalog
Metal Bezel
Catalog
1
UP M22-XDH-S-GB3 Number 5 Number 5 Number 5
DOWN M22-XDH-S-GB4
M22-DR-X M22S-DR-X M22M-DR-X
1
OFF M22-XDH-S-GB5
ON M22-XDH-S-GB6 1
TEST M22-XDH-S-GB9
Contact Blocks 2
FORWARD M22-XDH-S-GB15 M22-K10
Terminal Contact
1
REVERSE M22-XDH-S-GB16
Type Configuration 6 Catalog Number
RAISE M22-XDH-S-GB17
Screw NO M22-K10
1
LOWER M22-XDH-S-GB18
NO, early-make M22-K10P
M22-XDH-S-X0
NC M22-K01
1
M22-XDH-S-X1
NC, late-break M22-K01D
M22-XDH-S-X2
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
1
M22-XDH-S-X4 M22-FK01
NC M22-CK01
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-S-X7
NC, late-break M22-CK01D 1
2NO M22-CK20
Red — M22-XDH-R 3
Custom M22-XDH-R-ETCH 4
2NC M22-CK02 1
NO-NC M22-CK11
STOP M22-XDH-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDH-R-GB5
NC M22-FK01 7 1
NO M22-FK10 7
M22-XDH-R-X0
Green — M22-XDH-G 3
1
Custom M22-XDH-G-ETCH 4
START M22-XDH-G-GB1
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
1
ON M22-XDH-G-GB6 switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
M22-XDH-G-X1 2 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories, 1
Blue — M22-XDH-B 3 Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
Custom M22-XDH-B-ETCH 4
3 Minimum order quantity of (10).
4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
1
RESET M22-XDH-B-GB14
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
M22-XDH-B-X6 For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
1
White — M22-XDH-W 3 5 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

Custom M22-XDH-W-ETCH 4 6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

7 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
1
START M22-XDH-W-GB1
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
M22-XDH-W-X1 1
Yellow — M22-XDH-Y 3
Custom M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 4 1
Black, red, green — M22-XDH-SRG
Black, white,
red, green, yellow,
— M22-XDH-SWRGYB 1
blue
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-55
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Catalog Number Selection

1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1 Illuminated Pushbuttons
1 M22 – DRL – R – GB0 – K10 – 230R
1 Bezel Light Units
M22 = Silver 12–30 Vac/Vdc
1 M22S = Black
M22M = Metal
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
1 B = Blue
85–264 Vac
Operator Type Lens Color Contact Blocks
230W = White
1 DL = Illuminated flush momentary W= White K10 = 1NO K30 = 3NO 230R = Red
DLH = Illuminated extended momentary R= Red K01 = 1NC K03 = 3NC 230G = Green
DGL = Illuminated flush momentary with guard 1 G= Green K20 = 2NO K21 = 2NO-1NC
1 DRL = Illuminated flush maintained Y= Yellow K02 = 2NC K12 = 1NO-2NC
230B = Blue

DGLH = Illuminated extended momentary with guard 1 B= Blue K11 = 1NO-1NC

1 DRLH = Illuminated extended maintained A= Amber
1
Silver bezel only.
1 Inscription
GB0 = STOP
1 GB1 = START
GB2 = CLOSE
1 GB3 = UP
GB4 = DOWN
GB5 = OFF
1 GB6 = ON
GB14 = RESET
GB15 = FORWARD
1 GB16 = REVERSE
X0 =
1 X1 =
X4 =
X5 =
1 X6 =

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-56 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Product Selection
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary

M22-DL-G-K01-G Complete Devices 1

Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Color Configuration 1 Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K01-R M22S-DL-R-K01-R M22M-DL-R-K01-R
NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K01-230R M22S-DL-R-K01-230R M22M-DL-R-K01-230R
1
2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K02-R M22S-DL-R-K02-R M22M-DL-R-K02-R 1
M22S-DL-G-K01-G 2NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K02-230R M22S-DL-R-K02-230R M22M-DL-R-K02-230R
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K11-R M22S-DL-R-K11-R M22M-DL-R-K11-R 1
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K11-230R M22S-DL-R-K11-230R M22M-DL-R-K11-230R
Green NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K10-G M22S-DL-G-K10-G M22M-DL-G-K10-G
1
NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K10-230G M22S-DL-G-K10-230G M22M-DL-G-K10-230G
1
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K20-G M22S-DL-G-K20-G M22M-DL-G-K20-G
M22M-DL-G-K01-G
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K20-230G M22S-DL-G-K20-230G M22M-DL-G-K20-230G 1
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K11-G M22S-DL-G-K11-G M22M-DL-G-K11-G
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K11-230G M22S-DL-G-K11-230G M22M-DL-G-K11-230G 1
White NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K10-W M22S-DL-W-K10-W —
NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K10-230W M22S-DL-W-K10-230W M22M-DL-W-K10-230W
1
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K20-W M22S-DL-W-K20-W — 1
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K20-230W M22S-DL-W-K20-230W M22M-DL-W-K20-230W
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K11-W M22S-DL-W-K11-W — 1
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K11-230W M22S-DL-W-K11-230W M22M-DL-W-K11-230W

Note
1
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-57
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary

1 Operators Only 1
M22-DL-G

1 Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number
Red
1 M22-DL-R M22S-DL-R M22M-DL-R
Green M22-DL-G M22S-DL-G M22M-DL-G
1 White M22-DL-W M22S-DL-W M22M-DL-W
M22S-DL-G Blue M22-DL-B M22S-DL-B M22M-DL-B
1 Yellow M22-DL-Y M22S-DL-Y M22M-DL-Y
Amber M22-DL-A M22S-DL-A M22M-DL-A
1
1
M22M-DL-G
1
1
1
1 M22-DGL-G
Silver Guarded
Silver Bezel
1 Button Color Catalog Number
Red M22-DGL-R
1 Green M22-DGL-G
White M22-DGL-W
1 Blue M22-DGL-B
Yellow M22-DGL-Y
1 Note
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-58 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
1
kne
ss
1
1
Note: Included
with operator. 1
Components
M22-XDL-G Button Lenses 1 M22-LED-W Light Units 1 1
Color Inscription Catalog Number Terminal LED Light Unit
Red — M22-XDL-R 2
Type Color Voltage Catalog Number 1
Custom M22-XDL-R-ETCH 3 Screw White 12–30 M22-LED-W
STOP M22-XDL-R-GB0 Red Vac/Vdc M22-LED-R 1
Green M22-LED-G
OFF M22-XDL-R-GB5
M22-XDL-R-X0
Screw
Blue
White 85–264
M22-LED-B
M22-LED230-W
1
Green — M22-XDL-G 2 Vac
Red
Custom M22-XDL-G-ETCH 3 M22-FLED-_
Green
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
1
START M22-XDL-G-GB1
Blue M22-LED230-B
ON M22-XDL-G-GB6 Spring-cage White 12–30 M22-FLED-W 1
M22-XDL-G-X1 Red Vac/Vdc M22-FLED-R
Blue — M22-XDL-B 2 Green M22-FLED-G 1
Custom M22-XDL-B-ETCH 3 Blue M22-FLED-B
RESET M22-XDL-B-GB14 Red/Green/
Yellow
24 Vdc M22-FLED-RG 5 1
M22-XDL-B-X6
5
Red, Green,
White — M22-XDL-W 2
Blue, Yellow,
M22-FLED-RGB
1
Custom M22-XDL-W-ETCH 3 White, Violet,
Yellow —
Custom
M22-XDL-Y 2
M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 3
Turquoise 1
Amber — Contact Blocks 1
Custom
M22-XDL-A
M22-XDL-A-ETCH
M22-K10
Terminal Contact
1
Type Configuration 6 Catalog Number

Buttonless Operator Screw NO M22-K10

1
M22-DL-X
NO, early-make M22-K10P
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Black Bezel
Catalog
Metal Bezel
Catalog NC M22-K01 1
Number 4 Number 4 Number 4 NC, late-break M22-K01D
M22-DL-X M22S-DL-X M22M-DL-X Spring-cage NO M22-CK10 1
M22-FK01 NC M22-CK01

M22S-DL-X
NC, late-break M22-CK01D 1
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02 1
NO-NC M22-CK11
NC
NO
M22-FK01 7
M22-FK10 7
1
M22M-DL-X 1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see 1
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
1
M22-DGL-X Silver Guarded
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
Silver Bezel For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 1
Catalog 4
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Number 4 5
6
Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108. 1
M22-DGL-X All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
7
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-59
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1

1
M22-DRL-W-K10-W Complete Devices
1 Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Color Configuration 2 Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

1 White NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K10-W M22S-DRL-W-K10-W M22M-DRL-W-K10-W

NO 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K10-230W M22S-DRL-W-K10-230W M22M-DRL-W-K10-230W
1 NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K01-W M22S-DRL-W-K01-W M22M-DRL-W-K01-W
M22S-DRL-W-K10-W
NC 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K01-230W M22S-DRL-W-K01-230W M22M-DRL-W-K01-230W
1 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K20-W M22S-DRL-W-K20-W M22M-DRL-W-K20-W

1 2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K20-230W M22S-DRL-W-K20-230W M22M-DRL-W-K20-230W

2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K02-W M22S-DRL-W-K02-W M22M-DRL-W-K02-W
1 2NC 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K02-230W M22S-DRL-W-K02-230W M22M-DRL-W-K02-230W

M22M-DRL-W-K10-W 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K11-W M22S-DRL-W-K11-W M22M-DRL-W-K11-W

1 1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K11-230W M22S-DRL-W-K11-230W M22M-DRL-W-K11-230W

1
1
1
Operators Only 3
1 M22-DRL-W
Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1
Red M22-DRL-R M22S-DRL-R M22M-DRL-R

1 Green M22-DRL-G M22S-DRL-G M22M-DRL-G

White M22-DRL-W M22S-DRL-W M22M-DRL-W
1 M22S-DRL-W Blue M22-DRL-B M22S-DRL-B M22M-DRL-B
Yellow M22-DRL-Y M22S-DRL-Y M22M-DRL-Y
1 Amber M22-DRL-A M22S-DRL-A M22M-DRL-A

1
1
M22M-DRL-W
1
1
1
1 Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,

which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

1 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
1 to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.

V7-T1-60 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
Note: Included 1
with operator.
Components 1
M22-XDL-W Button Lenses 2 M22-LED-W Light Units 2
Color Inscription Catalog Number Terminal LED Light Unit 1
Type Color Voltage Catalog Number
Red — M22-XDL-R 3
Custom M22-XDL-R-ETCH 4 Screw White 12–30 M22-LED-W 1
Red Vac/Vdc M22-LED-R
STOP M22-XDL-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDL-R-GB5
Green M22-LED-G 1
Blue M22-LED-B
M22-XDL-R-X0
Green — M22-XDL-G 3
Screw White
Red
85–264
Vac
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
1
Custom M22-XDL-G-ETCH 4 M22-FLED-_
Green M22-LED230-G
START M22-XDL-G-GB1
Blue M22-LED230-B
1
ON M22-XDL-G-GB6 Spring-cage White 12–30 M22-FLED-W
M22-XDL-G-X1 Red Vac/Vdc M22-FLED-R 1
Blue — M22-XDL-B 3 Green M22-FLED-G
Custom M22-XDL-B-ETCH 4 Blue M22-FLED-B 1
RESET M22-XDL-B-GB14 Red/Green/ 24 Vdc M22-FLED-RG 6
M22-XDL-B-X6 Yellow
Red, Green, M22-FLED-RGB 6
1
White — M22-XDL-W 3
Blue, Yellow,

Yellow
Custom
—
M22-XDL-W-ETCH 4
M22-XDL-Y 3
White, Violet, 1
Turquoise
M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 4
Amber
Custom
— M22-XDL-A Contact Blocks 2
1
M22-K10
Custom Terminal Contact
M22-XDL-A-ETCH
Type Configuration 7 Catalog Number 1
Buttonless Operator Screw NO M22-K10
M22-DRL-X
Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel NO, early-make M22-K10P
1
Catalog Catalog Catalog NC M22-K01
Number 5 Number 5 Number 5 NC, late-break M22-K01D 1
M22-DRL-X M22S-DRL-X M22M-DRL-X Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
M22-FK01 NC M22-CK01 1
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
M22S-DRL-X
2NO M22-CK20 1
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC
NC
M22-CK11
M22-FK01 8
1
NO M22-FK10 8
1
M22M-DRL-X

1
Notes 1
Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
1
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
3
4
Minimum order quantity of (10). 1
When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 1
5
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
6
7
Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108. 1
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
8 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-61
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary

1
M22-DLH-R-K11-R Complete Devices
1 Button Contact Block Light Unit Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Color Configuration 1 Voltage Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

1 Red 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-R-K11-R M22S-DLH-R-K11-R M22M-DLH-R-K11-R

1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-R-K11-230R M22S-DLH-R-K11-230R M22M-DLH-R-K11-230R
1 Green 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-G-K20-G M22S-DLH-G-K20-G M22M-DLH-G-K20-G
M22S-DLH-R-K11-R
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-G-K20-230G M22S-DLH-G-K20-230G M22M-DLH-G-K20-230G
1 White 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-W-K20-W M22S-DLH-W-K20-W M22M-DLH-W-K20-W

1 2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-W-K20-230W M22S-DLH-W-K20-230W M22M-DLH-W-K20-230W

1
1 Complete Press-to-Test Units
Silver Bezel Black Bezel
1 Button Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number Catalog Number
Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-T-R-R M22S-T-R-R
1 Blue M22-T-B-B M22S-T-B-B
Yellow M22-T-Y-W M22S-T-Y-W
1 Green M22-T-G-G M22S-T-G-G
White M22-T-W-W M22S-T-W-W
1 Red 85–264 Vac M22-T-R-230R M22S-T-R-230R

1 Blue M22-T-R-230B M22S-T-B-230B

Yellow M22-T-Y-230W M22S-T-Y-230W
1 Green M22-T-G-230G M22S-T-G-230G
White M22-T-W-230W M22S-T-W-230W
1
M22-DLH-R Operators Only 2
1 Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Red M22-DLH-R M22S-DLH-R M22M-DLH-R
Green M22-DLH-G M22S-DLH-G M22M-DLH-G
1 White M22-DLH-W M22S-DLH-W M22M-DLH-W
M22S-DLH-R
1 Blue M22-DLH-B M22S-DLH-B M22M-DLH-B
Yellow M22-DLH-Y M22S-DLH-Y M22M-DLH-Y
1 Amber M22-DLH-A M22S-DLH-A M22M-DLH-A

1 M22M-DLH-R

1
1
1
Silver Guarded
M22-DGLH-R
1 Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number

1 Red M22-DGLH-R
Green M22-DGLH-G
1 White M22-DGLH-W
Blue M22-DGLH-B
1 Yellow M22-DGLH-Y

Notes
1 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

V7-T1-62 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
1
kne
ss
1
1
Note: Included
with operator. 1
Components
M22-XDH-R Button Lenses 1 M22-LED-W Light Units 1 1
Color Inscription Catalog Number Terminal LED Light Unit
Red — M22-XDLH-R 2
Type Color Voltage Catalog Number 1
Custom M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 3 Screw White 12–30 M22-LED-W
STOP M22-XDLH-R-GB0 Red Vac/Vdc M22-LED-R 1
OFF M22-XDLH-R-GB5 Green M22-LED-G
M22-XDLH-R-X0
Blue M22-LED-B 1
Screw White 85–264 M22-LED230-W
Green — M22-XDLH-G 2
Vac
Custom M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 3 M22-FLED-_
Red
Green
M22-LED230-R
M22-LED230-G
1
START M22-XDLH-G-GB1
Blue M22-LED230-B
ON M22-XDLH-G-GB6
Spring-cage White 12–30 M22-FLED-W
1
M22-XDLH-G-X1 Red Vac/Vdc M22-FLED-R
Blue — M22-XDLH-B 2 Green M22-FLED-G 1
Custom M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 3 Blue M22-FLED-B
RESET M22-XDLH-B-GB14 Red/Green/ 24 Vdc M22-FLED-RG 5 1
M22-XDLH-B-X6 Yellow
White — M22-XDLH-W 2 Red, Green,
Blue, Yellow,
M22-FLED-RGB 5 1
Custom M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 3
White, Violet,
Yellow — M22-XDLH-Y 2 Turquoise 1
Custom M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH 3
Contact Blocks 1
Amber —
Custom
M22-XDLH-A
M22-XDLH-A-ETCH
M22-K10
Terminal Contact
1
Type Configuration 6 Catalog Number
Buttonless Operator Screw NO M22-K10
1
M22-DL-X
NO, early-make M22-K10P
Silver Bezel
Catalog
Black Bezel
Catalog
Metal Bezel
Catalog NC M22-K01
1
Number 4 Number 4 Number 4 NC, late-break M22-K01D
M22-DL-X M22S-DL-X M22M-DL-X Spring-cage NO M22-CK10 1
M22-FK01 NC M22-CK01
M22S-DL-X NC, late-break M22-CK01D 1
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02 1
NO-NC M22-CK11
NC M22-FK01 7 1
NO M22-FK10 7
M22M-DL-X 1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see 1
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2
Minimum order quantity of (10).
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
1
M22-DGL-X Silver Guarded Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
Silver Bezel For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 1
Catalog 4 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Number 4 5 Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
M22-DGL-X
7 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,

M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only. 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-63
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1

1
M22-DRLH-W Operators Only 2
1 Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Red M22-DRLH-R M22S-DRLH-R M22M-DRLH-R
Green M22-DRLH-G M22S-DRLH-G M22M-DRLH-G
1 White M22-DRLH-W M22S-DRLH-W M22M-DRLH-W
M22S-DRLH-W
1 Blue M22-DRLH-B M22S-DRLH-B M22M-DRLH-B
Yellow M22-DRLH-Y M22S-DRLH-Y M22M-DRLH-Y
1 Amber M22-DRLH-A M22S-DRLH-A M22M-DRLH-A

1
1 M22M-DRLH-W

1
1
1 Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,

1 which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-64 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components 1
M22-XDLH-W Button Lenses 2 M22-LED-W Light Units 2
Color Inscription Catalog Number Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
1
Red — M22-XDLH-R 3

Custom M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 4 Screw White 12–30

Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W 1
STOP M22-XDLH-R-GB0 Red M22-LED-R
OFF M22-XDLH-R-GB5
Green
Blue
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
1
M22-XDLH-R-X0
Screw White 85–264 M22-LED230-W
Green — M22-XDLH-G 3
Red Vac M22-LED230-R 1
Custom M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 4 M22-FLED-_
Green M22-LED230-G
START M22-XDLH-G-GB1 Blue M22-LED230-B 1
ON M22-XDLH-G-GB6 Spring-cage White 12–30 M22-FLED-W
M22-XDLH-G-X1 Red Vac/Vdc M22-FLED-R 1
Blue — M22-XDLH-B 3 Green M22-FLED-G
Custom
RESET
M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 4
M22-XDLH-B-GB14
Blue
Red/Green/ 24 Vdc
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 6
1
Yellow
White —
M22-XDLH-B-X6
M22-XDLH-W 3
Red, Green, M22-FLED-RGB 6 1
Blue, Yellow,
Custom M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 4
Yellow — M22-XDLH-Y 3
White, Violet,
Turquoise
1
4
Custom M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH
Amber — M22-XDLH-A M22-K10 Contact Blocks 2 1
Terminal Contact
Custom M22-XDLH-A-ETCH Type Configuration 7 Catalog Number
1
Screw NO M22-K10
Buttonless Operator
M22-DRL-X
Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
NO, early-make M22-K10P 1
NC M22-K01
Catalog Catalog Catalog
NC, late-break
Number 5 Number 5 Number 5
Spring-cage NO
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
1
M22-DRL-X M22S-DRL-X M22M-DRL-X M22-FK01 NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
1
M22S-DRL-X 2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02 1
NO-NC M22-CK11
NC M22-FK01 8 1
NO M22-FK10 8
1
M22M-DRL-X Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
1
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2
For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see 1
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
3 Minimum order quantity of (10).
4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
1
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDLH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
5 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
6 Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
7 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
8 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,

M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only. 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-65
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Indicating Lights
1
Product Description Features
1 Eaton’s M22 indicating lights As with the pushbuttons, the ● Customizable laser ● Modular construction
use the combination of a indicating light lenses can be engraving on all lenses makes assembly fast and
1 durable, bright LED unit and
modern lenses designed
laser engraved. Indicating
lights can be ordered as
● LED offering only for simplifies stocking of
components and complete
improved brightness
specifically for this type of complete devices, including devices
1 LED to create a bright and lens and LED unit, or as
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation ●
Capable of communicating
visible indicating light. modular components. via ASi protocol with ASi
1 ●
Lenses designed
specifically for LED adapter modules
illumination Protection Type
1 ● IP67, IP69K
●
NEMA 4X, 13
1
Catalog Number Selection
1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.

1 Indicating Lights
M22 - L – B – GB8 – B
1
Operator Type Lens Color Plate Inscription Light Units
1 M22-L = Flush indicating light W=
R=
White
Red
ETCH =
GB5 =
Custom 1
OFF
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W = White
85–264 Vac
230W = White
G= Green GB6 = ON R = Red 230R = Red
1 Y= Yellow GB8 = FAULT G = Green 230G = Green
B= Blue GB15 = FORWARD B = Blue 230B = Blue
GB16 = REVERSE
1
1
When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
1 Note: Light unit should match color of lens.
Use white light unit with yellow lens.
(see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-L-B-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.

1 Product Selection
1 Indicating Lights, Flush
Complete Devices
1 M22-L-R-R
Lens Color Light Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number

1 White
Red
White
Red
12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-L-W-W
M22-L-R-R

1 Green
Yellow
Green
White
M22-L-G-G
M22-L-Y-W
Blue Blue
1 Amber White
M22-L-B-B
M22-L-A-W
White White 85–264 Vac M22-L-W-230W
1 Red Red M22-L-R-230R
Green Green M22-L-G-230G
1 Yellow White M22-L-Y-230W
Blue Blue M22-L-B-230B
1 Amber White M22-L-A-230W

1
Operators Only 1
1 Lens Color Catalog Number Lens Color Catalog Number
M22-L-R Flat M22-LH-R Conical
1 White M22-L-W White M22-LH-W
Red M22-L-R Red M22-LH-R
1 Green M22-L-G Green M22-LH-G
Yellow M22-L-Y Yellow M22-LH-Y
1 Blue M22-L-B Blue M22-LH-B
Amber M22-L-A Amber M22-LH-A

1 Note
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

V7-T1-66 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Indicating Lights, Flush
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
1
kne
ss
1
1
Note: Included
with operator. 1
Components 1
M22-XL-R Lenses 1 M22-LED-W Light Units 14
Color Inscription Catalog Number Terminal LED Light Unit 1
Type Color Voltage Catalog Number
Flat
Red — M22-XL-R 2 Screw White 12–30 M22-LED-W 1
Red Vac/Vdc M22-LED-R
Custom M22-XL-R-ETCH 3
OFF M22-XL-R-GB5 Green M22-LED-G 1
Green — M22-XL-G 2 Blue M22-LED-B
Custom M22-XL-G-ETCH 3 Screw White 85–264 M22-LED230-W 1
Red Vac M22-LED230-R
ON M22-XL-G-GB6 M22-FLED-_
REVERSE M22-XL-G-GB16 Green M22-LED230-G 1
Blue — M22-XL-B 2 Blue M22-LED230-B
Custom M22-XL-B-ETCH 3 Spring-cage White 12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-FLED-W 1
FAULT M22-XL-B-GB8 Red M22-FLED-R
White — M22-XL-W 2 Green M22-FLED-G 1
Custom M22-XL-W-ETCH 3 Blue M22-FLED-B
OFF M22-XL-W-GB5 Red/Green/
Yellow
24 Vdc M22-FLED-RG 5
1
ON M22-XL-W-GB6 5
Red, Green, M22-FLED-RGB
FAULT M22-XL-W-GB8 Blue, Yellow, 1
FORWARD M22-XL-W-GB15 White, Violet,
Turquoise
Yellow — M22-XL-Y 2 1
Custom M22-XL-Y-ETCH 3 Notes
Amber —
Custom
M22-XL-A 2
M22-XL-A-ETCH 3
1 For complete listing of available lenses and light units, see Accessories,

Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.

1
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
Conical
Red — M22-XLH-R
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols 1
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
Green — M22-XLH-G
Blue — M22-XLH-B
For example, M22-XL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4 Select the same color LED element as lens color; for yellow and amber lenses,
1
White — M22-XLH-W choose a white LED.
Yellow — M22-XLH-Y
5
Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108. 1
Amber — M22-XLH-A
1
M22-L-X Lensless Indicating Light 1
Catalog Number
M22-L-X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-67
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Emergency Stops
1
Product Description Features
1 Eaton’s M22 emergency ● Push-pull and twist to ●
Suitable for use in safety
stops are a durable and release options available as applications up to
1 reliable solution to a variety
of e-stop applications. With
well as illuminated and
keyed release
Category-4 or Sil-3

standard push-pull, as well Protection Type

1 as twist-to-release and key-
●
LED offering only for
improved brightness ●
IP67, IP69K
release, illuminated options quality and up to 100,000 (IP66 key-release)
1 and red or black operators, hours of operation ●
NEMA 4X, 13
the M22 e-stop is a robust ●
More than 100,000
1 solution. As with all mechanical operations
operators, they can be ●
Capable of communicating
1 ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as via ASi protocol with ASi
modular components for adapter modules
1 the perfect fit.

1
1 Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Emergency Stops
1
M22 – PVT – MS2 – K10 – 230R
1
Operator Color Key Release Code Contact Blocks Light Units
1 M22 = Silver Blank = MS1 K10 = NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22S = Black MS2 = MS2 K10P = NO, early-make W = White
1 MS3 = MS3
MS4 = MS4
K01 = NC
K01D = NC, late-break
R = Red
G = Green
Operator Type
MS5 = MS5 CK10 = NO B = Blue
1 PV =
PV45P =
Non-illuminated push-pull emergency stop
Non-illuminated 45 mm emergency stop
MS6 = MS6 CK01 = NC 85–264 Vac
MS7 = MS7 CK01D = NC, late-break 230W = White
PV60P = Non-illuminated 60 mm emergency stop MS8 = MS8 Ck20 = 2NO 230R = Red
1 PV45P-MPI = Non-illuminated mechanical indication, 45 mm RS = Ronis CK02 = 2NC 230G = Green
PV60P-MPI = Non-illuminated mechanical indication, 60 mm (45 and 60 mm only) CK11 = NO-NC 230B = Blue
PVT = Non-illuminated twist-to-release emergency stop
1 PVT45P = Non-illuminated twist-to-release 45 mm emergency stop
PVT60P = Non-illuminated twist-to-release 60 mm emergency stop
1 PVT45P-MPI = Non-illuminated twist-to-release with mechanical
indication, 45 mm
PVT60P-MPI = Non-illuminated twist-to-release with mechanical
1 PVS =
indication, 60 mm
Non-illuminated keyed release (red operator only)
PVS45P = Non-illuminated keyed release 45 mm (red only)
1 PVS60P = Non-illuminated keyed release 60 mm (red only)
PVL = Illuminated push-pull emergency stop
PVLT = Illuminated twist-to-release emergency stop
1 PVLT45P = Illuminated twist-to-release 45 mm emergency stop
PVLT60P = Illuminated twist-to-release 60 mm emergency stop
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-68 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Emergency Stops
Complete Devices 1
Button LED Contact Block Light Unit
Type Color Color Configuration 1 Voltage Catalog Number 1
M22-PV-K01 Non-Illuminated 1
Push-pull Red — NC — M22-PV-K01
2NC M22-PV-K02 1
1NO-2NC M22-PV-K12
Twist-to-release Red — NC — M22-PVT-K01
1
2NC M22-PVT-K02
1
1NO-2NC M22-PVT-K12
Key release Red — NC — M22-PVS-K01 1
2NC M22-PVS-K02
1NO-2NC M22-PVS-K12 1
M22-PVL-K01-R Illuminated
Push-pull Red Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVL-K01-R
1
2NC M22-PVL-K02-R
1
1NO-2NC M22-PVL-K12-R
NC 85–264 Vac M22-PVL-K01-230R 1
2NC M22-PVL-K02-230R
1NO-2NC M22-PVL-K12-230R 1
Twist-to-release Red Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVLT-K01-R
2NC M22-PVLT-K02-R
1
1NO-2NC M22-PVLT-K12-R 1
NC 85–264 Vac M22-PVLT-K01-230R
2NC M22-PVLT-K02-230R 1
1NO-2NC M22-PVLT-K12-230R
1
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-69
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Emergency Stops

1
1
1
1 ma
x
thic . 5mm
1 kne
ss

1
1 Note: Included
with operator.
1
1 Components

1 M22-PVL Push-Pull Emergency Stops M22-PVS60P-MS1 Key Release Emergency Stops 2

Actuator Catalog Actuator Key Catalog
1 Illumination/Indication Size Number Size Code Number

None 35 mm M22-PV 35 mm MS1 M22-PVS 3

1 45 mm M22-PV45P MS2 M22-PVS-MS2
60 mm M22-PV60P MS3 M22-PVS-MS3
1 LED illumination 35 mm M22-PVL MS4 M22-PVS-MS4

1 45 mm M22-PVL45P MS5 M22-PVS-MS5

60 mm M22-PVL60P MS6 M22-PVS-MS6
1 Mechanical indication 45 mm M22-PV45P-MPI MS7 M22-PVS-MS7
60 mm M22-PV60P-MPI MS8 M22-PVS-MS8
1 45 mm MS1 M22-PVS45P
MS2
1 M22-PVT45P-MPI Twist-to-Release Emergency Stops
M22-PVS45P-MS2
MS3 M22-PVS45P-MS3
Actuator Catalog
1 Illumination/Indication Size Number MS4 M22-PVS45P-MS4
MS5 M22-PVS45P-MS5
1 None 35 mm M22-PVT
MS6 M22-PVS45P-MS6
45 mm M22-PVT45P
MS7 M22-PVS45P-MS7
1 60 mm M22-PVT60P
MS8 M22-PVS45P-MS8
LED illumination 35 mm M22-PVLT
1 45 mm M22-PVLT45P
Ronis M22-PVS45P-RS
60 mm MS1 M22-PVS60P
60 mm M22-PVLT60P
1 Mechanical indication 45 mm M22-PVT45P-MPI
MS2 M22-PVS60P-MS2
MS3 M22-PVS60P-MS3
1 60 mm M22-PVT60P-MPI
MS4 M22-PVS60P-MS4
MS5 M22-PVS60P-MS5
1 MS6
M22S-PVLT Machine Stop Operators (Black) 1 M22-PVS60P-MS6

1 Illumination Type
Actuator
Size
Catalog
Number
MS7 M22-PVS60P-MS7
MS8 M22-PVS60P-MS8
1 Non-illuminated Push-pull 35 mm M22S-PV Ronis M22-PVS60P-RS
Twist-to- 35 mm M22S-PVT
Notes
1 release 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
LED illumination Push-pull 35 mm M22S-PVL 2 Key included. For identical locks and keys, use the same key code. One key is included with

1 Twist-to- 35 mm M22S-PVLT actuator; additional keys are available as accessories.

3 Includes Key Code MS1.
release
1 Maximum number of contacts: four M22-(C)K01,…10, or two M22-(C)K02,…20, …11.
Refer to IL or technical data sheet for more information.
1

V7-T1-70 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Contact Blocks 1 M22-ES-MS1 Extra Keys 6
Terminal Mounting Contact For Key Code Catalog Number 1
Type Location 2 Configuration 3 Catalog Number

M22-K10 Screw Front NO M22-K10

MS1
MS2
M22-ES-MS1
M22-ES-MS2
1
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
MS3 M22-ES-MS3
1
MS4 M22-ES-MS4
NC, late-break M22-K01D
NC 4 M22-K01PV6
MS5 M22-ES-MS5 1
MS6 M22-ES-MS6
SMCB, NC
SMCB, 2NC
M22-K01SMC10
M22-K02SMC10
MS7 M22-ES-MS7 1
MS8 M22-ES-MS8
Base SMCB, NC
SMCB, 2NC
M22-KC01SMC10
M22-KC02SMC10
1
Accessories
M22-K01SMC10 Self-
monitoring
Front 1NC M22-K01SMC10
Description Voltage Catalog Number 1
2NC M22-K02SMC10
(1NC and M22-XGPV Yellow guard ring — M22-XGPV
1NO in
series)
Base 1NC M22-KC01SMC10 1
2NC M22-KC02SMC10
1
M22G-XGPV Gray guard ring — M22G-XGPV 1
FK01SMC10 Self-
monitoring
NC M22-FK01SMC10 1
3NC M22-AFK03SMC10
spring-cage
M22-MGTA Rectangular guard — M22-MGTA
1
1
1
M22-FK01 Spring- Front NO M22-CK10
1
cage M22-PL-PV Sealing shroud — M22-PL-PV
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
1
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
1
NO-NC M22-CK11
NC M22-FK01 5 M22-XPV60-Y-120 Illuminated ring 24 Vac/Vdc M22-XPV60-Y-24
1
NO 5 120 Vac M22-XPV60-Y-120
M22-FK10
230 Vac M22-XPV60-Y-230
1
Light Units 1
M22-LED-W 1
Terminal LED Light Unit
Type Color Voltage Catalog Number
Notes
1
Screw White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-W
1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-R Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110. 1
Screw White 85–264 Vac M22-LED230-W 2 Self-monitoring contact blocks (SMCB type) cannot be used with illuminated

Red 85–264 Vac M22-LED230-R

3
emergency stops.
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
Screw White 207–264 Vac M22-LED230H-W 4
Allows up to six contact blocks to be utilized, For use only with only M22-PV_.
M22-FLED-_
Red 207–264 Vac M22-LED230H-R 5
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks, 1
Spring- White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-FLED-W M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
cage
Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-FLED-R
6 For use with key release operators only. One key included with operator.
1
Maximum number of contacts: four M22-(C)K01,…10, or two M22-(C)K02,…20, …11.
Refer to IL or technical data sheet for more information. 1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-71
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Selector Switches Contents

1 Description Page
1 Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-73
1 Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-78
Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-82
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Selector Switches
1 Product Description Features
Eaton’s M22 selector switch ● Adding or removing coding ●
Coding adapter options
1 line offers an almost endless adapters allows for field make assembly fast and
variety of options in convertibility of simplify stocking of
maintained/momentary, key- maintained/momentary different configurations of
1 removal and illuminated and key removal positions selector switches
devices. The coding adapters ● LED offering only for ●
Capable of communicating
1 used for maintained/ improved brightness via ASi protocol with ASi
momentary and key removal quality and up to 100,000 adapter modules
1 positions make the M22 hours of operation
stand out from competitive ●
More than 100,000 Protection Type
1 devices. By simply adding or
removing a coding adapter
mechanical operations ●
IP66
● NEMA 4X, 13
from inside the operator,
1 the end-user can change
the function of the button.
1 Operator options include
standard knob, rotary head,
1 illuminated and keyed
versions. As with all
1 operators, they can be
ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
1 modular components to
meet application specific
1 requirements.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-72 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
1
M22 – WRK – – X91 – K10 1
1
Bezel
Inscription 2 Contact Blocks
M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
X91 = AUTO-HAND K10 = NO 1
X92 = II-I K10P = NO, early-make
M22M = Metal
2 Rotary type only. Options 1
K11 = NO-NC
Handle Type 1 Number of Positions K22 = 2NO-2NC
W= Momentary rotary Blank = Two-position K20 = 2NO 1
WK = Momentary knob 3 = Three-position K02 = 2NC
WKV = Maintained V-position knob 4 = Four-position 1
WR = Maintained rotary
WRK = Maintained knob
1
1
All momentary selector switches can
be converted in the field to maintained
operation with the removal of a color- 1
coded adapter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-73
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
1 M22-WKV-K10 Complete Devices, Knob Type 1
Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
1 Type Switching Position Configuration 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Two-position Maintained NO M22-WRK-K10 M22S-WRK-K10 M22M-WRK-K10
1 40° 1NO-1NC M22-WRK-K11 M22S-WRK-K11 M22M-WRK-K11

1 2NO-2NC M22-WRK-K22 M22S-WRK-K22 M22M-WRK-K22

M22M-WKV-K10
1 Maintained V NO M22-WKV-K10 M22S-WKV-K10 M22M-WKV-K10
60° 1NO-1NC
1 M22-WKV-K11 M22S-WKV-K11 M22M-WKV-K11
2NO-2NC M22-WKV-K22 M22S-WKV-K22 M22M-WKV-K22
1 Three-position Maintained 2NO M22-WRK3-K20 M22S-WRK3-K20 M22M-WRK3-K20
2NO-2NC M22-WRK3-K22 M22S-WRK3-K22 M22M-WRK3-K22
1 60° 60°

1 Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

1 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-74 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
1
Components
M22-WK Operators Only, Knob Type 1 1
Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Type Switching Position Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Two-position Momentary 2 M22-WK M22S-WK M22M-WK
1
40°
1
Maintained M22-WRK M22S-WRK M22M-WRK

M22M-WK
40° 1
1
Maintained V M22-WKV M22S-WKV M22M-WKV
60° 1
2
Three-position Momentary M22-WK3 M22S-WK3 M22M-WK3
1
40° 40°
1
Maintained M22-WRK3 M22S-WRK3 M22M-WRK3
1
60° 60°
1
Maintained, return from left M22-WRK3-2 M22S-WRK3-2 M22M-WRK3-2
1
40° 40° 60° 60°
1
Maintained, return from right M22-WRK3-1 M22S-WRK3-1 M22M-WRK3-1

40° 40° 60° 60°

1
Four-position Maintained M22-WRK4 M22S-WRK4 M22M-WRK4
1
1
1
Notes 1
1
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2
Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color
coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-75
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Non-Illuminated Selector Switches

1
Components
1
M22S-WR3-X94 Operators Only, Rotary Type 1
1 Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Type Switching Position Inscription Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Two-position Momentary 2 I-O M22-W M22S-W M22M-W
40°
1
1 Maintained I-O M22-WR M22S-WR M22M-WR
40° Custom M22-WR-ETCH 3 M22S-WR-ETCH 3 M22M-WR-ETCH 3
1 AUTO-HAND M22-WR-X91 M22S-WR-X91 M22M-WR-X91
II-I M22-WR-X92 M22S-WR-X92 M22M-WR-X92
1 Three-position Momentary 2 I-O-II M22-W3 M22S-W3 M22M-W3

1 40° 40°

1 Maintained I-O-II M22-WR3 M22S-WR3 M22M-WR3

1 60° 60°
Custom M22-WR3-ETCH 3 M22S-WR3-ETCH 3 M22M-WR3-ETCH 3
AUTO-O-MAN M22-WR3-X94 M22S-WR3-X94 M22M-WR3-X94
1 Four-position Maintained 0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22-WR4 M22S-WR4 M22M-WR4

1
1
1 Notes
1
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1 2
Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color
coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.
3
When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130)
1 into the Order Notes. For example, M22-WR3-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X88, Line item #_.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-76 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
1
1
1
ma 1
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss 1
1
Note: Included
1
with operator.
1
Components
1
M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 Accessories
Terminal Contact Description Catalog Number 1
Type Configuration 2 Catalog Number
M22-XW Plunger bridge 4 M22-XW
Screw NO M22-K10 1
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01 1
NC, late-break M22-K01D

M22-FK01
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10 M22-XWS Key cover M22-XWS
1
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D 1
2NO M22-CK20
2NC
NO-NC
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
M22-XC-R Key withdraw adapter 5 M22-XC-R 1
NC M22-FK01 3
NO M22-FK10 3
1
M22-XC-Y Coding adapter M22-XC-Y
1
1
1
M22-XGWK Guard ring M22-XGWK
1
1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, 1
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2
3
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
4 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated 1
three-position selector switches only.
5 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-77
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Catalog Number Selection

1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1 Illuminated Selector Switches
1 M22 – WLK – R – K10 – R
1
Bezel Handle Color Contact Blocks Light Units
1 M22 = Silver W = White K10 = 1NO K30 = 3NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc
M22S = Black R = Red K01 = 1NC K03 = 3NC W = White
1 M22M = Metal G = Green K20 = 2NO K21 = 2NO-1NC R = Red
Y = Yellow K02 = 2NC K12 = 1NO-2NC G = Green
B = Blue K11 = 1NO-1NC B = Blue
1 Handle Type 85–264 Vac
WLK = Illuminated knob type 230W = White
1 momentary, two-position
WLKV = Illuminated Knob type
230R = Red
230G = Green
momentary, V-position 230B = Blue
1 WLK3 = Illuminated knob type
momentary, three-position

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-78 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Product Selection
1
Illuminated Selector Switches
Components 1
Operators Only, Knob Type 1
1
M22-WLK-W

Type Switching Position Button Color

Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number 1
Two-position Momentary 2 White
40°
M22-WLK-W M22S-WLK-W M22M-WLK-W
1
Red M22-WLK-R M22S-WLK-R M22M-WLK-R
Green M22-WLK-G M22S-WLK-G M22M-WLK-G 1
Yellow M22-WLK-Y M22S-WLK-Y M22M-WLK-Y
Blue M22-WLK-B M22S-WLK-B M22M-WLK-B 1
Maintained White M22-WRLK-W M22S-WRLK-W M22M-WRLK-W
40° Red M22-WRLK-R M22S-WRLK-R M22M-WRLK-R
1
Green M22-WRLK-G M22S-WRLK-G M22M-WRLK-G
1
Yellow M22-WRLK-Y M22S-WRLK-Y M22M-WRLK-Y
Blue M22-WRLK-B M22S-WRLK-B M22M-WRLK-B 1
Maintained V White M22-WLKV-W M22S-WLKV-W M22M-WLKV-W
60° Red M22-WLKV-R M22S-WLKV-R M22M-WLKV-R 1
Green M22-WLKV-G M22S-WLKV-G M22M-WLKV-G
Yellow M22-WLKV-Y M22S-WLKV-Y M22M-WLKV-Y
1
Blue M22-WLKV-B M22S-WLKV-B M22M-WLKV-B 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded

adapter. See Page V7-T1-112. 1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-79
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Illuminated Selector Switches

1
Components
1
M22-WLK3-W Operators Only, Knob Type 1
1 Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Type Switching Position Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Three-position Momentary 2 White M22-WLK3-W M22S-WLK3-W M22M-WLK3-W
Red M22-WLK3-R M22S-WLK3-R M22M-WLK3-R
1 40° 40°
Green M22-WLK3-G M22S-WLK3-G M22M-WLK3-G
Yellow M22-WLK3-Y M22S-WLK3-Y M22M-WLK3-Y
1 Blue M22-WLK3-B M22S-WLK3-B M22M-WLK3-B

1 Maintained White M22-WRLK3-W M22S-WRLK3-W M22M-WRLK3-W

Red M22-WRLK3-R M22S-WRLK3-R M22M-WRLK3-R
1 60° 60°
Green M22-WRLK3-G M22S-WRLK3-G M22M-WRLK3-G
Yellow M22-WRLK3-Y M22S-WRLK3-Y M22M-WRLK3-Y
1 Blue M22-WRLK3-B M22S-WRLK3-B M22M-WRLK3-B
Maintained, return from right White
1 M22-WRLK3-1-W M22S-WRLK3-1-W M22M-WRLK3-1-W
Red M22-WRLK3-1-R M22S-WRLK3-1-R M22M-WRLK3-1-R
40° 40° 60° 60°
1 Green M22-WRLK3-1-G M22S-WRLK3-1-G M22M-WRLK3-1-G
Yellow M22-WRLK3-1-Y M22S-WRLK3-1-Y M22M-WRLK3-1-Y
1 Blue M22-WRLK3-1-B M22S-WRLK3-1-B M22M-WRLK3-1-B
Maintained, return from left White M22-WRLK3-2-W M22S-WRLK3-2-W M22M-WRLK3-2-W
1 Red M22-WRLK3-2-R M22S-WRLK3-2-R M22M-WRLK3-2-R
40° 40° 60° 60°
1 Green M22-WRLK3-2-G M22S-WRLK3-2-G M22M-WRLK3-2-G
Yellow M22-WRLK3-2-Y M22S-WRLK3-2-Y M22M-WRLK3-2-Y
1 Blue M22-WRLK3-2-B M22S-WRLK3-2-B M22M-WRLK3-2-B

Notes
1 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded

1 adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-80 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Illuminated Selector Switches
1
1
1
ma
1
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss 1
1
Note: Included
1
with operator.
1
1
Light Units Accessories
M22-LED-W
Terminal LED Light Unit Description Catalog Number
1
Type Color 2 Voltage Catalog Number
Screw White 12–30 M22-LED-W
M22-XW Plunger bridge 6 M22-XW 1
Red Vac/Vdc M22-LED-R
Green M22-LED-G 1
Blue M22-LED-B
Screw White 85–264 M22-LED230-W M22-XWS Key cover M22-XWS 1
Red Vac M22-LED230-R
M22-FLED-_
Green M22-LED230-G 1
Blue M22-LED230-B
Spring-cage White 12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-FLED-W
Key withdraw adapter 7 M22-XC-R
1
Red M22-FLED-R M22-XC-R
Green
Blue
M22-FLED-G
M22-FLED-B
1
Red/Green/ 24 Vdc M22-FLED-RG 3
Yellow 1
Red, Green, M22-FLED-RGB 3 M22-XC-Y Coding adapter M22-XC-Y
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
1
Turquoise
1
Contact Blocks 1 M22-XGWK Guard ring M22-XGWK
M22-K10
Terminal Contact
1
Type Configuration 4 Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10 1
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01 Notes
1
1
NC, late-break M22-K01D For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10 2 Select the same color LED element as lens color; for yellow lens, choose a white LED. 1
M22-FK01 NC M22-CK01 Select a white lens if utilizing multi-color LED, M22-FLED-RG or M22-FLED-RGB.
NC, late-break M22-CK01D 3 Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
1
2NO M22-CK20 4 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

2NC
NO-NC
M22-CK02
M22-CK11
5 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,

M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.

1
6
NC M22-FK01 5 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
NO M22-FK10 5
three-position selector switches only.
7 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-81
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Catalog Number Selection

1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1 Key-Operated Selector Switches
1 M22 – WS – MS2 – A1
1
Bezel Handle Type Key Code Key Removal Position
1 M22 = Silver
M22S = Black
WS =
WS3 =
Two-position, momentary
Three-position, momentary
Blank = MS1
MS2 = MS2
Refer to coding adapter assembly
and functional test guide on Page
M22M = Metal WRS = Two-position, maintained MS3 = MS3 V7-T1-112.
1 WRS3 = Three-position, maintained MS4 = MS4
MS5 = MS5
MS6 = MS6
1 MS7 = MS7
MS8 = MS8
1
Product Selection
1
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
1 Components
1 M22-WS Operators Only 3
Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
1 Type Switching Position Key Removal Position Key Code Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 4 Return from right, key MS1 M22-WS M22S-WS M22M-WS
1 40° removable left
MS2 M22-WS-MS2 M22S-WS-MS2 M22M-WS-MS2

1 MS3 M22-WS-MS3 M22S-WS-MS3 M22M-WS-MS3

MS4 M22-WS-MS4 M22S-WS-MS4 M22M-WS-MS4
M22S-WRS
1 MS5 M22-WS-MS5 M22S-WS-MS5 M22M-WS-MS5
MS6 M22-WS-MS6 M22S-WS-MS6 M22M-WS-MS6
1 MS7 M22-WS-MS7 M22S-WS-MS7 M22M-WS-MS7
MS8 M22-WS-MS8 M22S-WS-MS8 M22M-WS-MS8
1 Two-position Maintained Key removable left MS1 M22-WRS-A1 M22S-WRS-A1 M22M-WRS-A1
40°
1 MS2 M22-WRS-MS2-A1 M22S-WRS-MS2-A1 M22M-WRS-MS2-A1
MS3 M22-WRS-MS3-A1 M22S-WRS-MS3-A1 M22M-WRS-MS3-A1
1 MS4 M22-WRS-MS4-A1 M22S-WRS-MS4-A1 M22M-WRS-MS4-A1
MS5 M22-WRS-MS5-A1 M22S-WRS-MS5-A1 M22M-WRS-MS5-A1
1 MS6 M22-WRS-MS6-A1 M22S-WRS-MS6-A1 M22M-WRS-MS6-A1
MS7
1 M22-WRS-MS7-A1 M22S-WRS-MS7-A1 M22M-WRS-MS7-A1
MS8 M22-WRS-MS8-A1 M22S-WRS-MS8-A1 M22M-WRS-MS8-A1

1 Key removable left/right MS1 M22-WRS M22S-WRS M22M-WRS

MS2 M22-WRS-MS2 M22S-WRS-MS2 M22M-WRS-MS2
1 MS3 M22-WRS-MS3 M22S-WRS-MS3 M22M-WRS-MS3
MS4 M22-WRS-MS4 M22S-WRS-MS4 M22M-WRS-MS4
1 MS5 M22-WRS-MS5 M22S-WRS-MS5 M22M-WRS-MS5

1 MS6 M22-WRS-MS6 M22S-WRS-MS6 M22M-WRS-MS6

MS7 M22-WRS-MS7 M22S-WRS-MS7 M22M-WRS-MS7
1 MS8 M22-WRS-MS8 M22S-WRS-MS8 M22M-WRS-MS8

Notes
1 1
Includes one key.
2
Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-112.
1 3
4
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.
1
1

V7-T1-82 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
Components
1
M22-WS3-X93 Operators Only, continued 3 1
Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Type Switching Position Key Removal Position Key Code Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1
Three-position Momentary 4 Return from left/right, MS1 M22-WS3 M22S-WS3 M22M-WS3
key removable center
40° 40°
MS2 M22-WS3-MS2 M22S-WS3-MS2 M22M-WS3-MS2 1
MS3 M22-WS3-MS3 M22S-WS3-MS3 M22M-WS3-MS3
MS4 M22-WS3-MS4 M22S-WS3-MS4 M22M-WS3-MS4 1
M22M-WS3-X93
MS5 M22-WS3-MS5 M22S-WS3-MS5 M22M-WS3-MS5
MS6 M22-WS3-MS6 M22S-WS3-MS6 M22M-WS3-MS6
1
MS7 M22-WS3-MS7 M22S-WS3-MS7 M22M-WS3-MS7 1
MS8 M22-WS3-MS8 M22S-WS3-MS8 M22M-WS3-MS8
Three-position Maintained Key removable MS1 M22-WRS3-A1 M22S-WRS3-A1 M22M-WRS3-A1 1
left/center/right
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A1
60° 60°
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A1
1
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A1
1
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A1
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A1 1
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A1
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A1 1
Key removable MS1 M22-WRS3-A2 M22S-WRS3-A2 M22M-WRS3-A2
center/left
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A2
1
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A2
1
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A2
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A2 1
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A2
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A2 1
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A2
Key removable MS1 M22-WRS3-A3 M22S-WRS3-A3 M22M-WRS3-A3
1
center/right
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A3 1
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A3
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A3 1
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A3
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A3
1
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A3
1
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A3
Key removable
left/right
MS1 M22-WRS3 M22S-WRS3 M22M-WRS3 1
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2 M22S-WRS3-MS2 M22M-WRS3-MS2
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3 M22S-WRS3-MS3 M22M-WRS3-MS3 1
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4 M22S-WRS3-MS4 M22M-WRS3-MS4
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5 M22S-WRS3-MS5 M22M-WRS3-MS5
1
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6 M22S-WRS3-MS6 M22M-WRS3-MS6
1
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7 M22S-WRS3-MS7 M22M-WRS3-MS7
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8 M22S-WRS3-MS8 M22M-WRS3-MS8 1
Notes
1 Includes one key. 1
2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-112.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
4 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-112.
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-83
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Key-Operated Selector Switches 12

1
Components
1
M22-WS3-X93 Operators Only, continued 3
1 Key Removal Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Type Switching Position Position Key Code Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Three-position Maintained Return from left, MS1 M22-WRS3-A7 M22S-WRS3-A7 M22M-WRS3-A7
key removable center
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A7
1 60° 60°
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A7
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A7
1 M22M-WS3-X93 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A7

1 MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A7

MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A7
1 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A7
Return from left, MS1 M22-WRS3-A6 M22S-WRS3-A6 M22M-WRS3-A6
1 key removable
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A6
center/right
MS3
1 M22-WRS3-MS3-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A6
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A6
1 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A6
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A6
1 MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A6
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A6
1 Three-position Maintained Return from right, MS1 M22-WRS3-A4 M22S-WRS3-A4 M22M-WRS3-A4
key removable left/
1 60° 60°
center
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A4
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A4
1 MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A4
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A4
1 MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A4
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A4
1 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A4

1 Return from right,

key removable center
MS1 M22-WRS3-A5 M22S-WRS3-A5 M22M-WRS3-A5
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A5
1 MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A5
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A5
1 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A5
MS6
1 M22-WRS3-MS6-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A5
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A5
1 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A5

Notes
1 1
Includes one key.
2
Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-112.
1 3
Includes contact block mounting adapter.

1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-84 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Key-Operated Selector Switches
1
1
1

ma
1
x
thic . 5mm
kne
ss
1
1
Note: Included 1
with operator.
1
Components
1
M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 Accessories
Terminal Contact Description Catalog Number 1
Type Configuration 2 Catalog Number 4
M22-XW Plunger bridge M22-XW
Screw NO M22-K10 1
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01 1
NC, late-break M22-K01D

M22-FK01
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10 M22-XWS Key cover M22-XWS 1
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break
2NO
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
1
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11 M22-XC-R Key withdraw adapter 5 M22-XC-R
1
NC M22-FK01 3
NO M22-FK10 3 1
1
M22-XC-Y Coding adapter M22-XC-Y

M22-ES-MS1 Extra Keys 1

Key Code Catalog Number
MS1 M22-ES-MS1
1
MS2 M22-ES-MS2 M22-XGWK Guard ring M22-XGWK
MS3 M22-ES-MS3
1
MS4 M22-ES-MS4
MS5 M22-ES-MS5
1
MS6 M22-ES-MS6
MS7 M22-ES-MS7
Notes
1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
1
MS8 M22-ES-MS8 Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1
3 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,

M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.

4 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
1
three-position selector switches only.
5 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position. 1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-85
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Mushroom Head Pushbuttons

1
Product Description Features
1 Eaton’s M22 mushroom head ● Field convertible from ●
Modular construction
operators are a durable and maintained to momentary makes assembly fast and
1 unique way to include
standard pushbutton
(available on maintained
pushbuttons only)
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
functionality. Like the devices
1 standard pushbutton line,
●
Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons ●
Capable of communicating
the maintained pushbuttons via ASi protocol with ASi
1 are field convertible to
●
More than five million
mechanical operations on adapter modules
momentary. They also offer momentary and one million
1 laser engraving and a robust on maintained pushbuttons Protection Type
five million mechanical ● IP67, IP69K
1 operations on the standard
momentary operator. As with
●
NEMA 4X, 13
all operators, they can be
1 ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
1 modular components.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-86 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
1
M22 – DP – R – GB4 – K01 1
1
Bezel Plate Inscription Contact Blocks
M22 = Silver ETCH = Custom 1 X0 = K01 = NC
1
M22S = Black GB0 = STOP X1 = K10 = NO
M22M = Metal GB1 = START X4 = K11 =
K12 =
NO-NC
1NO-2NC
1
GB3 = UP X5 =
GB4 = DOWN X6 =
GB5 = OFF X7 =
1
Operator Type Operator Color GB6 = ON
DP = Non-illuminated momentary
mushroom head pushbutton
R = Red
S = Black
GB15 =
GB16 =
FORWARD
REVERSE
1
DRP = Non-illuminated maintained G = Green
mushroom head pushbutton Y = Yellow
1 When ordering, specify inscription per
catalog number suffix from the Symbols
1
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to
V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes. 1
For example, M22-DP-R-ETCH;
Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91,
Line item #_. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-87
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Product Selection
1
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 1
1 M22-DP-R-K01 Complete Devices
Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
1 Color Configuration 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Red NC M22-DP-R-K01 M22S-DP-R-K01 M22M-DP-R-K01
1
2NC M22-DP-R-K02 M22S-DP-R-K02 M22M-DP-R-K02

1 M22S-DP-R-K01
1NO-2NC M22-DP-R-K12 M22S-DP-R-K12 M22M-DP-R-K12
1NO-1NC M22-DP-R-K11 M22S-DP-R-K11 M22M-DP-R-K11
1
1
1
M22M-DP-R-K01

1
1
1
1 Operators Only 2
M22-DP-G
1 Button Color
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Metal Bezel
Catalog Number

1 Black M22-DP-S M22S-DP-S M22M-DP-S

Red M22-DP-R M22S-DP-R M22M-DP-R
1 Green M22-DP-G M22S-DP-G M22M-DP-G

M22S-DP-G Yellow M22-DP-Y M22S-DP-Y M22M-DP-Y

1
1
1
1 M22M-DP-G

1
1
1
Notes
1 1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-88 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator. 1
Components 1
M22-XDP-G Mushroom Head Plates M22-DP-G-X Insertless Mushroom Head Operators
Color Inscription Catalog Number Bezel Color Catalog Number 1
Black -— M22-XDP-S 2 Silver Black M22-DP-S-X
Custom M22-XDP-S-ETCH 3 Red M22-DP-R-X
1
STOP M22-XDP-S-GB0 Green M22-DP-G-X
START M22-XDP-S-GB1 Yellow M22-DP-Y-X 1
FORWARD M22-XDP-S-GB15 Black Black M22S-DP-S-X
REVERSE M22-XDP-S-GB16 Red M22S-DP-R-X 1
UP M22-XDP-S-GB3 Green M22S-DP-G-X
DOWN M22-XDP-S-GB4 Yellow M22S-DP-Y-X 1
OFF M22-XDP-S-GB5 Metal Black M22M-DP-S-X
ON M22-XDP-S-GB6 Red M22M-DP-R-X 1
M22-XDP-S-X0 Green M22M-DP-G-X
M22-XDP-S-X1 Yellow M22M-DP-Y-X 1
M22-XDP-S-X4
M22-XDP-S-X5
M22-K10 Contact Blocks 4 1
M22-XDP-S-X7 Terminal Contact
Red — M22-XDP-R 2 Type Configuration 5 Catalog Number 1
Custom M22-XDP-R-ETCH 3 Screw NO M22-K10
STOP M22-XDP-R-GB0 NO, early-make M22-K10P 1
OFF M22-XDP-R-GB5 NC M22-K01
M22-XDP-R-X0 NC, late-break M22-K01D 1
Green — M22-XDP-G 2 Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
M22-FK01
Custom
START
M22-XDP-G-ETCH 3
M22-XDP-G-GB1
NC
NC, late-break
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
1
ON 2NO M22-CK20
M22-XDP-G-GB6
M22-XDP-G-X0 2NC M22-CK02
1
M22-XDP-G-X1 NO-NC M22-CK11
White — M22-XDP-W 2 NC M22-FK01 6 1
Custom M22-XDP-W-ETCH 3 NO M22-FK10 6
Yellow — M22-XDP-Y 2
1
Custom M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 3
Notes 1
1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2 Minimum order quantity of (10).
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
1
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 1
4 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,

Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.

5 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
6 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,

M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only. 1

1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-89
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 12
1 M22-DRP-R-K01 Complete Devices
Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
1 Color Configuration 3 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Red NC M22-DRP-R-K01 M22S-DRP-R-K01 M22M-DRP-R-K01
1
2NC M22-DRP-R-K02 M22S-DRP-R-K02 M22M-DRP-R-K02

1 1NO-2NC M22-DRP-R-K12 M22S-DRP-R-K12 M22M-DRP-R-K12

M22S-DRP-R-K01 1NO-1NC M22-DRP-R-K11 M22S-DRP-R-K11 M22M-DRP-R-K11
1
1
1
M22M-DRP-R-K01
1
1
1
1
M22-DRP-G Operators Only
1 Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Black M22-DRP-S M22S-DRP-S M22M-DRP-S
Red M22-DRP-R M22S-DRP-R M22M-DRP-R
1 Green M22-DRP-G M22S-DRP-G M22M-DRP-G
M22S-DRP-G Yellow M22-DRP-Y M22S-DRP-Y M22M-DRP-Y
1
1
1
1 M22M-DRP-G

1
1
1 Notes
1
35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
1 2
Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
1 3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.

1
1
1
1
1 Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
1

V7-T1-90 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 12
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Included
with operator.
1
Components 1
M22-XDP-G Mushroom Head Plates 3 M22-DRP-G-X Insertless Mushroom Head Operators
Color Inscription Catalog Number Bezel Color Catalog Number 1
Black — M22-XDP-S 4 Silver Black M22-DRP-S-X
Custom M22-XDP-S-ETCH 5 Red M22-DRP-R-X
1
STOP M22-XDP-S-GB0 Green M22-DRP-G-X
START M22-XDP-S-GB1 Yellow M22-DRP-Y-X 1
FORWARD M22-XDP-S-GB15 Black Black M22S-DRP-S-X
REVERSE M22-XDP-S-GB16 Red M22S-DRP-R-X 1
UP M22-XDP-S-GB3 Green M22S-DRP-G-X
DOWN M22-XDP-S-GB4 Yellow M22S-DRP-Y-X 1
OFF M22-XDP-S-GB5 Metal Black M22M-DRP-S-X
ON M22-XDP-S-GB6 Red M22M-DRP-R-X 1
M22-XDP-S-X0 Green M22M-DRP-G-X
M22-XDP-S-X1 Yellow M22M-DRP-Y-X 1
M22-XDP-S-X4
M22-XDP-S-X5
M22-K10 Contact Blocks 3 1
M22-XDP-S-X7 Terminal Contact
Red — M22-XDP-R 4 Type Configuration 6 Catalog Number 1
Custom M22-XDP-R-ETCH 5 Screw NO M22-K10
STOP M22-XDP-R-GB0 NO, early-make M22-K10P 1
OFF M22-XDP-R-GB5 NC M22-K01
M22-XDP-R-X0 NC, late-break M22-K01D 1
Green — M22-XDP-G 4 Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
M22-FK01 NC
Custom
START
M22-XDP-G-ETCH 5
M22-XDP-G-GB1 NC, late-break
M22-CK01
M22-CK01D
1
ON 2NO M22-CK20
M22-XDP-G-GB6
M22-XDP-G-X0 2NC M22-CK02
1
M22-XDP-G-X1 NO-NC M22-CK11
White — M22-XDP-W 4 NC M22-FK01 7 1
Custom M22-XDP-W-ETCH 5 NO M22-FK10 7
Yellow — M22-XDP-Y 4
1
Custom M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 5
Notes
1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
1
2 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by

switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 1
3 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,

Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.

4 Minimum order quantity of (10).
1
5
When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes. 1
For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
7 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
1
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-91
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Double Pushbuttons
1
Product Description Features
1 Eaton’s M22 double ● Flush and extended, as ● More than 200,000
pushbutton line is perfect for well as color options allow mechanical operations
1 applications such as motor
and pump starting, as well as
for the perfect combination
button
● Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
anytime space is limited. In
1 addition to the two buttons
●
Integrated indicating light
adds even more
adapter modules

that fit in one 22 mm hole is functionality in one Protection Type

1 the integrated white standard 22 mm hole ●
IP66
indicating light between ●
Customizable laser ●
NEMA 4X, 13
1 them. These three operators engraving on all buttons
allow for multiple functions to ●
LED offering only for
1 occur in a single space.
Green/red, black/white and improved brightness
black/black color options quality and up to 100,000
1 along with laser engraving hours of operation
allow for further custom
1 applications.

1 Catalog Number Selection

Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Double Pushbuttons
1
M22 – DDL – GR – GB5 – K10 – G
1
1 Bezel Inscription Contact Blocks Light Units
M22 = Silver GB0 = STOP K10 = 1NO K30 = 3NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc
1 M22S = Black GB1 = START
GB3 = UP
K01 =
K20 =
1NC
2NO
K03 = 3NC
K21 = 2NO-1NC
W = White
R = Red
GB4 = DOWN K02 = 2NC K12 = 1NO-2NC G = Green
1 Operator Type Button Plate Color
GB5 = OFF
GB6 = ON
K11 = 1NO-1NC B = Blue
85–264 Vac
DDL = Extended buttons and light Top Bottom GB14 = RESET 230W = White
1 DDLF = Flush buttons and light GR = Green Red GB15 = FORWARD 230R = Red
DDLM = Extended bottom button WS = White Black GB16 = REVERSE 230G = Green
230B = Blue
1 S = Black Black X0 =
X1 =
X5 =
1 X5 =
X6 =
X7 =
1 X5 =

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-92 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Product Selection
1
Components
Double Pushbuttons, Extended Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary 1
Operators Only 1 1
Color Inscription
Bezel Top Bottom Top Bottom Catalog Number
1
M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0 Silver Green Red — — M22-DDL-GR
Custom Custom M22-DDL-GR-ETCH 2 1
M22-DDL-GR-X1-X0
START STOP M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0 1
White Black — — M22-DDL-WS
Custom Custom M22-DDL-WS-ETCH 2 1
M22-DDL-WS-X1-X0

Black Black
START
—
STOP
—
M22-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0
M22-DDL-S
1
Custom Custom M22-DDL-S-ETCH 2
— — M22-DDL-S-X4-X5
1
M22-DDL-S-X7-X7
M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0 Black Green Red — — M22S-DDL-GR
1
Custom Custom M22S-DDL-GR-ETCH 2
M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0
1
START STOP M22S-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
White Black — — M22S-DDL-WS 1
Custom Custom M22S-DDL-WS-ETCH 2
M22S-DDL-WS-X1-X0 1
START STOP M22S-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0
Black Black — — M22S-DDL-S 1
Custom Custom M22S-DDL-S-ETCH 2
— M22S-DDL-S-X4-X5 1
M22S-DDL-S-X7-X7

Notes
1
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes. 1
For example, M22-DDL-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-93
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary

1
Operators Only 1
1 Bezel
Color
Top Bottom
Inscription
Top Bottom Catalog Number

1 M22-DDLF-GR Silver Green Red — — M22-DDLF-GR

Custom Custom M22-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2
1 White Black — — M22-DDLF-WS
Custom Custom M22-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2
1 Green Red M22-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
White Black M22-DDLF-WS-X1-X0
1
1 M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0 Black Green Red — — M22S-DDLF-GR
Custom Custom M22S-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2
1 White Black — — M22S-DDLF-WS
Custom Custom M22S-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2
1 Green Red M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
White Black M22S-DDLF-WS-X1-X0
1
1 Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbutton and Center Light, Extended Bottom Pushbutton, Momentary
1 Operators Only 1
Color Inscription
1 Bezel Top Bottom Top Bottom Catalog Number
M22-DDLM-GR Silver Green Red — — M22-DDLM-GR
1 Custom Custom M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2
White Black — — M22-DDLM-WS
1 Custom Custom M22-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2
Green Red M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
1 White Black M22-DDLM-WS-X1-X0

1
M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0 Black Green Red — — M22S-DDLM-GR
1 Custom Custom M22S-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2
White Black — — M22S-DDLM-WS
1 Custom Custom M22S-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2
Green Red M22S-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
1 White Black M22S-DDLM-WS-X1-X0

1 Notes
1
Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1 2
When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-94 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Double Pushbuttons
1
1
1
ma
x
1
thic . 5mm
kne
ss 1
1
Note: Included
with operator. 1
1
M22-LED-W Light Units 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 3 Catalog Number
1
Screw White 12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W Screw NO M22-K10 1
Red M22-LED-R NO, early-make M22-K10P
Green
Blue
M22-LED-G
M22-LED-B
NC
NC, late-break
M22-K01
M22-K01D
1
Screw White 85–264 Spring-cage NO
Red Vac
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED230-R
M22-FK01
NC
M22-CK10
M22-CK01
1
M22-FLED-_
Green M22-LED230-G NC, late-break M22-CK01D
Blue M22-LED230-B 2NO M22-CK20
1
Spring-cage White 12–30 M22-FLED-W 2NC M22-CK02
Red Vac/Vdc M22-FLED-R NO-NC M22-CK11
1
Green M22-FLED-G NC M22-FK01 4
Blue M22-FLED-B NO M22-FK10 4 1
Red/Green/ 24 Vdc M22-FLED-RG 2
Yellow 1
Red, Green, M22-FLED-RGB 2 Notes
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
1 For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories, 1
Turquoise Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
2 Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
4 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,

M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only. 1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-95
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Four-Way Pushbuttons
1
Product Description Features
1 Eaton’s M22 four-way push- ● Four buttons in one ● Customizable laser
button is a truly unique operator allows for engraving on all buttons for
1 offering. A four-way
pushbutton offers four
increased functionality in
limited space
directional or other
applications
different buttons mounted
1 in a single 22 mm hole. This
●
Optional interlocking
option, which prevents two
●
Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
is ideal not only for an buttons from being adapter modules
1 application with limited actuated at the same time
space, but also directional Protection Type
1 applications (when ordered ●
IP66
with the four arrow engraving
1 option). Another unique
option is the interlocked
version, which prevents two
1 opposite buttons from being
actuated at the same time.
1
Catalog Number Selection
1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1 Four-Way Pushbuttons
1 M22 – D4 – S – X7 – K01
1
Bezel Button Color Inscription Contact Blocks
1 M22 = Silver S = Black ETCH = Custom 1 K10 = 1NO K30 =3NO
M22S = Black X7 = K01 = 1NC K03 =3NC
1 1 When ordering, specify
K20 =
K02 =
2NO
2NC
K21 =2NO-1NC
K12 =1NO-2NC
inscription per catalog K11 = 1NO-1NC
1 Operator Type
D4 = Four-way pushbutton,
number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-123
momentary, non-interlocked to V7-T1-130) into the Order
1 DI4 = Four-way pushbutton, Notes.
momentary, interlocked For example, M22-D4-S-ETCH;
Order Notes: Mark with symbol
1 X91, Line item #_.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-96 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Product Selection
1
Four-Way Pushbuttons, Momentary
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne 1
ss

1
1
Note: Included
with operator. 1
Components 1
Operators Only 1
M22-D4-S-X7
Type Bezel Color Inscription Catalog Number
1
Non-interlocked Silver Black — M22-D4-S
1
Custom M22-D4-S-ETCH 3
Directional arrows M22-D4-S-X7 1
Black Black — M22S-D4-S
Custom M22S-D4-S-ETCH 3 1
Directional arrows M22S-D4-S-X7
Interlocked Silver Black — M22-DI4-S 1
Custom M22-DI4-S-ETCH 3
Directional arrows M22-DI4-S-X7 1
Black Black — M22S-DI4-S
Custom M22S-DI4-S-ETCH 3 1
Directional arrows M22S-DI4-S-X7
1
M22-K10 Contact Blocks 12 1
Terminal Contact
Configuration 4
Type Catalog Number
1
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P 1
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break
Spring-cage NO
M22-K01D
M22-CK10
1
M22-FK01 NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D 1
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02 1
NO-NC M22-CK11
NC M22-FK01 5 1
NO M22-FK10 5
1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1
2 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library

(see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.

1
For example, M22-D4-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1
5 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,

M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only. 1

1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-97
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Joysticks
1
Product Description Features
1 Eaton’s M22 joystick line ● Available in four-position ●
Capable of communicating
comes in a wide variety of and two-position via ASi protocol with ASi
1 options. From vertical and
horizontal two-position
● Two switch point option adapter modules
allows for two contacts in
switches to the maintained Protection Type
1 four-position, these operators
each direction (up to eight
total contacts in one ●
IP66
fit a variety of applications. An operator)
1 additional option, two switch
points, allows for eight
1 isolated circuits to be
actuated individually on a
1 single operator.

1 Product Selection
Joysticks
1
Components
1 M22-WJ2H Operators 1
Switching Silver Bezel Black Bezel Metal Bezel
1 Number of Directions Position Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Two-position horizontal Momentary M22-WJ2H M22S-WJ2H M22M-WJ2H
1 Two switch points M22-WJ2H-2P M22S-WJ2H-2P M22M-WJ2H-2P

1 M22M-WJ2H
Two-position horizontal Maintained M22-WRJ2H M22S-WRJ2H M22M-WRJ2H
Two-position vertical Momentary M22-WJ2V M22S-WJ2V M22M-WJ2V
1 Two switch points M22-WJ2V-2P M22S-WJ2V-2P M22M-WJ2V-2P
Two-position vertical Maintained M22-WRJ2V M22S-WRJ2V M22M-WRJ2V
1 Four-position Momentary M22-WJ4 M22S-WJ4 M22M-WJ4
Two switch points
1 M22-WJ4-2P M22S-WJ4-2P M22M-WJ4-2P
Four-position Maintained M22-WRJ4 M22S-WRJ4 M22M-WRJ4

1 Note
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-98 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Joysticks
1
1
1
ma
x
thic . 5mm
kne
1
ss
1
1
Note: Included
with operator. 1
1
M22-K10 Contact Blocks 12 Joystick with Double Contact
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 3 Catalog Number The joystick allows the control
1
0
of up to four directions of
Screw NO M22-K10
movement on machines. 1 1
NO, early-make M22-K10P
Different variants of the
NC
NC, late-break
M22-K01
M22-K01D
joystick have two/four- 1
positions and other variants
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
M22-FK01 NC M22-CK01
have two settings for each 1
position. This allows, for
NC, late-break M22-CK01D 0
2NO M22-CK20
example, two-speed settings
for each direction. For this
1 1
2NC M22-CK02 2
application, a standard
NO-NC M22-CK11 normally open contact and an 1
NC M22-FK01 4 early-make contact are fitted
NO M22-FK10 4 in series. Momentary contact 1
and latching contact versions
are available. 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
1
Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1
4 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,

M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only. 1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-99
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Potentiometers Acoustic Devices

1
Product Description Product Description
1 Eaton’s M22 potentiometers allow for a ready to use operator in Eaton’s M22 acoustic devices are a simple and aesthetic way to
a conveniently sized package. M22 potentiometers include the add a buzzer or indicator to any application. Fitting in the same
1 resistive element, instead of just a knob, and a built in legend
surrounding the knob. The slim design, with integrated contacts
22 mm hole, these devices can be ordered in continuous or
pulsed tone and with or without the IP40 enclosure.
and the range of resistances available, allows for a quick install.
1
Features Features
1 ●
Scale markings on the knob allows the operator to be used ●
Continuous or pulsed tone available
without an additional legend plate ●
83 dB / 10 cm decibel rating
1 ● Oversized knob option available ●
Slim design allows for space saving and simple wiring and
●
Slim design allows for space saving and simple wiring and installation
1 installation
Protection Type Protection Type
1 ●
IP66 ●
IP40
●
NEMA 4X, 13 ●
NEMA 12
1
Product Selection Product Selection
1
Potentiometers Acoustic Devices
1 M22-R10K Complete Devices M22-AMC-XAM Complete Devices
Resistance Decibel
1 Bezel Rk Catalog Number Description Rating Catalog Number
Silver 1 M22-R1K Indicator with buzzer, 83 dB/ M22-AMC-XAM
1 4.7 M22-R4K7 black continuous tone, 10 cm
18–30 Vac/Vdc
10 M22-R10K
1 47 M22-R47K
Indicator with buzzer,
black pulsed tone,
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-AMC-XAMP
M22M-R10K
100 M22-R100K 18–30 Vac/Vdc
1 470 M22-R470K
Black 1 M22S-R1K
1 4.7 M22S-R4K7
M22-XAM Buzzers
10 M22S-R10K Decibel
1 47 M22S-R47K Description Rating Catalog Number
100 M22S-R100K Indicator without 83 dB/ M22-AMC
1 470 M22S-R470K buzzer, black 10 cm
Metal 1 M22M-R1K Buzzer only, 83 dB/ M22-XAM
1 4.7 M22M-R4K7 continuous tone,
18–30 Vac/Vdc
10 cm
10 M22M-R10K
Buzzer only, pulsed 83 dB/ M22-XAMP
1 47 M22M-R47K tone, 18–30 Vac/Vdc 10 cm
100 M22M-R100K
1 470 M22M-R470K
Oversized Knob

1 Silver 1
4.7
M22-R1K-RH
M22-R4K7-RH
10
1 47
M22-R10K-RH
M22-R47K-RH
100 M22-R100K-RH
1 470 M22-R470K-RH
Black 1 M22S-R1K-RH
1 4.7 M22S-R4K7-RH
10 M22S-R10K-RH
1 47 M22S-R47K-RH
100 M22S-R100K-RH
1 470 M22S-R470K-RH
Metal 1 M22M-R1K-RH
1 4.7 M22M-R4K7-RH
10 M22M-R10K-RH
1 47 M22M-R47K-RH
100 M22M-R100K-RH
1 470 M22M-R470K-RH

V7-T1-100 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Through-the-Door Operators Bulkhead Interfaces
1
Product Description Product Description
Eaton’s M22 through-the-door operators use the same familiar Eaton’s M22 bulkhead interfaces are another unique offering in 1
flush pushbutton look with the addition of a cut-to-length rod the M22 line. This device allows for a secure connection to any
that allows for a simple reset operator. USB or RJ45 connected device within an enclosure or panel.
With an IP65 rating when closed, these devices are not only
1
convenient, but robust and reliable.
1
Features Features
●
Customizable laser engraving on all buttons ●
Convenient and safe way to make a data connection to inside 1
●
More than five million mechanical operations of the panel without opening the panel door
●
Pushrod can be cut to length 1
Protection Type Protection Type 1
●
IP67, IP69K ●
IP65 when closed, IP20 when connected
●
NEMA 4X, 13 1
Product Selection Product Selection 1
Through-the-Door Operators 1 Bulkhead Interfaces 1
M22-DZ-B-X6 Complete Devices M22-USB-SA USB Socket 45 1
Color Inscription Catalog Number Used for USB connection plug IP65 when
Blue — M22-DZ-B
closed, IP20 when connected. 1
Bezel Catalog Number
RESET M22-DZ-B-GB14
M22-DZ-B-X6 Silver M22-USB-SA 1
Red — M22-DZ-R
M22-DZ-R-X0 1
STOP M22-DZ-R-GB0
1
M22-DZ-X Buttonless Operator
M22-RJ45-SA RJ45 Socket 6 1
Bezel Catalog Number
Used for RJ45 Ethernet connection IP65
Silver M22-DZ-X when closed, IP20 when connected. 1
Metal M22M-DZ-X Bezel Catalog Number
Silver M22-RJ45-SA
1
1
M22-XD-B Button Plates 2
Color Inscription Catalog Number 1
Blue — M22-XD-B 3 Notes
RESET M22-XD-B-GB14
1 The pushrod is 3.24 in long and can be cut to length. 1
2 Any combination of plate color and inscription is available.
M22-XD-B-X6
Red — M22-XD-R 3
3 Minimum order quantity of (10).
4 USB interface is complete with 2-ft-long USB cable.
1
M22-XD-R-X0 5 USB interface is UL Listed, CSA approved and USB 3.0.

STOP M22-XD-R-GB0 6 RJ45 interface is an eight-wire connector. 1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-101
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

ASi Adapter Modules

1
Product Description
1 Eaton’s M22 ASi adapter modules add functionality to every
operator in the M22 line. These devices can be connected to any
1 operator that uses contact blocks or LED units. The simple snap-
on design allows for a quick integration of an entire application of
operators to a communicating network.
1
Features
1 ●
Allows compatible operators to communicate on an ASi
network
1 ● Not only can the status of a contact block be read, but LEDs
can be illuminated by an ASi adapter
1 ● ASi adapters simply clip on to the back of the contact blocks
and LEDs
1 ●
Insulation displacement connectors allow for installation of
adapters without any tools
1 ●
Two integrated LEDs indicate status of communications

Protection Type
1 ● IP20
1
Product Selection
1 ASi Adapter Modules
1 M22-ASI Complete Devices
Description Catalog Number
1 ASi adapter module M22-ASI
ASi adapter module for M22-ASI-C
1 base mounting
ASi adapter module for M22-ASI-S
1 E-stop
ASi adapter module for M22-ASI-CS
E-stop base mounting
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-102 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Palm Switches Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and
1
not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Palm Switches, Type 4X/13 Enclosure
1
FAK – S – KC10 – I
1
Operator Type Contact Blocks Enclosure 1
FAK = Palm switch KC10 = NO Top Color
KC01 = NC
CKC10 = NO
I = Gray
IY = Yellow
1
Operator Color CKC01 = NC
S = Black 1
R = Red
Product Description Y = Yellow
Eaton’s M22 palm switches are an oversized button that mount 1
directly to an enclosure base. This allows for a standalone button
that can be mounted anywhere. The enclosure uses base- 1
mounted contact blocks, which allows for quick wiring and Product Selection
mounting. The palm switches come in momentary or maintained 1
versions. As with other M22 operators, the palm switches are Complete Devices
available as complete devices, including the enclosure and
contact blocks or as modular components. Operator, Base and Contact Blocks 1 1
Button Contact Block
Features Color Configuration 2 Catalog Number 1
●
Oversized operator in black, red and yellow color options FAK-S-KC11-I Momentary
●
Button integrated directly into an enclosure Black 1NO-1NC FAK-S-KC11-I 1
● Base mounting contact blocks allow for simple wiring and Red 1NO-1NC FAK-R-KC11-I
installation Yellow 1NO-1NC FAK-Y-KC11-I 1
● More than one million mechanical operations on momentary
and 100,000 on maintained operators 1
FAK-R-V-KC01-IY Maintained
Protection Type Red NC FAK-R-V-KC01-IY 1
●
IP67, IP69K 2NC FAK-R-V-KC02-IY
● NEMA 4X, 13 1NO-2NC FAK-R-V-KC12-IY 1
1NO-1NC FAK-R-V-KC11-IY

1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,

Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.

1
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-103
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Components
1
Operators Only
1 FAK-S
Type Button Color Catalog Number

1 Momentary Black
Red
FAK-S
FAK-R
Yellow
1 Maintained Red
FAK-Y
FAK-R-V-Y

1
Palm Switch Enclosure Base
1 FAK-IU
Catalog Number

1 FAK-IU

1
1 Contact Blocks 1
M22-K10
1 Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 2 Catalog Number
Screw NO
1 NC
M22-KC10
M22-KC01
Spring-cage NO M22-CKC10
1 NC M22-CKC01
NC M22-FK01 3
1 M22-FK01
NO M22-FK10 3

1
1
1
1 Notes
1
For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-110.
1 2
3
All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-104 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Accessories
Button Plates
1
M22-XD-S

Color Inscription
Catalog Number
Flush Pushbutton
Catalog Number
Extended Pushbutton
Catalog Number
Mushroom Head Button 1
Black —
White —
M22-XD-S
M22-XD-W
M22-XDH-S
M22-XDH-W
M22-XDP-S
M22-XDP-W
1
M22-XDH-R Red — M22-XD-R M22-XDH-R M22-XDP-R
Green — M22-XD-G M22-XDH-G M22-XDP-G
1
Yellow — M22-XD-Y M22-XDH-Y M22-XDP-Y
Blue — M22-XD-B M22-XDH-B —
1
Black, white, red, green, yellow, blue — M22-XD-SWRGYB M22-XDH-SWRGYB —
Black, red, green — M22-XD-SRG M22-XDH-SRG — 1
M22-XDP-G
Black Custom M22-XD-S-ETCH M22-XDH-S-ETCH M22-XDP-S-ETCH
White Custom M22-XD-W-ETCH M22-XDH-W-ETCH M22-XDP-W-ETCH 1
Red Custom M22-XD-R-ETCH M22-XDH-R-ETCH M22-XDP-R-ETCH
Green Custom M22-XD-G-ETCH M22-XDH-G-ETCH M22-XDP-G-ETCH 1
Yellow Custom M22-XD-Y-ETCH M22-XDH-Y-ETCH M22-XDP-Y-ETCH
Blue Custom M22-XD-B-ETCH M22-XDH-B-ETCH — 1
Black STOP M22-XD-S-GB0 M22-XDH-S-GB0 M22-XDP-S-GB0
Red STOP M22-XD-R-GB0 M22-XDH-R-GB0 M22-XDP-R-GB0 1
Black START M22-XD-S-GB1 M22-XDH-S-GB1 M22-XDP-S-GB1
White START M22-XD-W-GB1 M22-XDH-W-GB1 — 1
Green START M22-XD-G-GB1 M22-XDH-G-GB1 M22-XDP-G-GB1
Black CLOSE M22-XD-S-GB2 M22-XDH-S-GB2 — 1
Black UP M22-XD-S-GB3 M22-XDH-S-GB3 M22-XDP-S-GB3
Black DOWN M22-XD-S-GB4 M22-XDH-S-GB4 M22-XDP-S-GB4 1
Black OFF M22-XD-S-GB5 M22-XDH-S-GB5 M22-XDP-S-GB5
Red
Black
OFF
ON
M22-XD-R-GB5
M22-XD-S-GB6
M22-XDH-R-GB5
M22-XDH-S-GB6
M22-XDP-R-GB5
M22-XDP-S-GB6
1
Green
Black
ON
TEST
M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-S-GB9
M22-XDH-G-GB6
M22-XDH-S-GB9
M22-XDP-G-GB6
—
1
Blue RESET M22-XD-B-GB14 M22-XDH-B-GB14 —
Black FORWARD M22-XD-S-GB15 M22-XDH-S-GB15 M22-XDP-S-GB15
1
Black REVERSE M22-XD-S-GB16 M22-XDH-S-GB16 M22-XDP-S-GB16
Black RAISE M22-XD-S-GB17 M22-XDH-S-GB17 —
1
Black LOWER M22-XD-S-GB18 M22-XDH-S-GB18 —
Black M22-XD-S-X0 M22-XDH-S-X0 M22-XDP-S-X0
1
Red M22-XD-R-X0 M22-XDH-R-X0 M22-XDP-R-X0
Green — — M22-XDP-G-X0 1
Black M22-XD-S-X1 M22-XDH-S-X1 M22-XDP-S-X1
White M22-XD-W-X1 M22-XDH-W-X1 — 1
Green M22-XD-G-X1 M22-XDH-G-X1 M22-XDP-G-X1
Black M22-XD-S-X2 M22-XDH-S-X2 — 1
Green M22-XD-G-X2 M22-XDH-G-X2 —
Black M22-XD-S-X4 M22-XDH-S-X4 M22-XDP-S-X4 1
Black M22-XD-S-X5 M22-XDH-S-X5 M22-XDP-S-X5
Blue M22-XD-B-X6 M22-XDH-B-X6 — 1
Black M22-XD-S-X7 M22-XDH-S-X7 M22-XDP-S-X7
Black M22-XD-S-X8 M22-XDH-S-X8 — 1
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X9 M22-XDH-S-X9 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X10 M22-XDH-S-X10 — 1
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X11 M22-XDH-S-X11 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X12 M22-XDH-S-X12 — 1
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X13 M22-XDH-S-X13 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X14 M22-XDH-S-X14 — 1
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X15 M22-XDH-S-X15 —
Black
Black
See 1 below
See 1 below
M22-XD-S-X16
M22-XD-S-X17
M22-XDH-S-X16
M22-XDH-S-X17
—
—
1
Note
1 Refer to the Symbols Library, (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130), for symbol image.
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-105
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

M22-XDLH-W Button Lenses

1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Color Inscription Flush Extended Color Inscription Flush Extended
1 White — M22-XDL-W M22-XDLH-W Blue Custom M22-XDL-B-ETCH M22-XDLH-B-ETCH
Red — M22-XDL-R M22-XDLH-R Red STOP M22-XDL-R-GB0 M22-XDLH-R-GB0
1 M22-XDL-G Green — M22-XDL-G M22-XDLH-G Green START M22-XDL-G-GB1 M22-XDLH-G-GB1
Yellow — M22-XDL-Y M22-XDLH-Y Red OFF M22-XDL-R-GB5 M22-XDLH-R-GB5
1 Blue — M22-XDL-B M22-XDLH-B Green ON M22-XDL-G-GB6 M22-XDLH-G-GB6
White Custom M22-XDL-W-ETCH M22-XDLH-W-ETCH Blue RESET M22-XDL-B-GB14 M22-XDLH-B-GB14
1 Red Custom M22-XDL-R-ETCH M22-XDLH-R-ETCH Red M22-XDL-R-X0 M22-XDLH-R-X0
Green Custom M22-XDL-G-ETCH M22-XDLH-G-ETCH Green M22-XDL-G-X1 M22-XDLH-G-X1
1 Yellow Custom M22-XDL-Y-ETCH M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH Blue M22-XDL-B-X6 M22-XDLH-B-X6

1 Mounting Adapters
Description Catalog Number
1 M22-A Contact block mounting adapter M22-A

1
M22-A4 Contact block mounting adapter, M22-A4
1 four-position (for use with
four-way pushbuttons, joysticks
and four-position selector switches
1 only).

M22-LS Allows mounting of M22 pushbuttons M22-LS

1 to LS-Titan limit switch bodies
(for the full LS-Titan catalog section,
see PG08301004E).
1
1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks
Mounting Contact Package
1 Location Terminal Type Configuration 1 Qty. Catalog Number
Front Screw NO 1 M22-K10
1 NO 25 M22-K10-B25
NO 100 M22-K10-B100
1 NO, early-make 1 M22-K10P
NC 1 M22-K01
1 M22-FK01 NC 25 M22-K01-B25
NC 100 M22-K01-B100
1 NC, late-break
SMCB, NC
1
1
M22-K01D
M22-K01SMC10
SMCB, 2NC 1 M22-K02SMC10
1 Base NO 1 M22-KC10
NO 25 M22-KC10-B25
1 NO 100 M22-KC10-B100
NC 1 M22-KC01
1 NC 25 M22-KC01-B25
NC 100 M22-KC01-B100
1 SMCB, NC 1 M22-KC01SMC10
SMCB, 2NC 1 M22-KC02SMC10
1 Front Spring-cage NO 1 M22-CK10
NC 1 M22-CK01
NC, late-break 1
1 2NO 2 1
M22-CK01D
M22-CK20
2NC 2 1 M22-CK02
1 NO-NC 2 1 M22-CK11
NC 20 M22-FK01 3
1 NO 20 M22-FK10 3
Base NO 1 M22-CKC10
1 NC 1 M22-CKC01

Notes
1 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2 Not stackable.

1 3 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks, M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.

V7-T1-106 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
M22-LED-W Light Units
Mounting 1
Terminal Type Location LED Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Screw Front White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-W 1
Red M22-LED-R
Green M22-LED-G 1
Blue M22-LED-B
White 85–264 Vac M22-LED230-W 1
Red M22-LED230-R
M22-FLED-_
Green M22-LED230-G 1
Blue M22-LED230-B
White 207–264 Vac
Red
M22-LED230H-W
M22-LED230H-R
1
Green M22-LED230H-G
Blue M22-LED230H-B 1
Base White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LEDC-W
Red M22-LEDC-R 1
Green M22-LEDC-G
Blue M22-LEDC-B 1
White 85–264 Vac M22-LEDC230-W
Red M22-LEDC230-R 1
Green M22-LEDC230-G
Blue
White 207–264 Vac
M22-LEDC230-B
M22-LEDC230H-W
1
Red M22-LEDC230H-R
Green M22-LEDC230H-G
1
Blue M22-LEDC230H-B
Spring-cage Front White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-CLED-W 1
Red M22-CLED-R
Green M22-CLED-G 1
Blue M22-CLED-B
White 85–264 Vac M22-CLED230-W 1
Red M22-CLED230-R
Green M22-CLED230-G 1
Blue M22-CLED230-B
Base White 12–30 Vac/Vdc
Red
M22-CLEDC-W
M22-CLEDC-R
1
Green M22-CLEDC-G
Blue M22-CLEDC-B 1
White 85–264 Vac M22-CLEDC230-W
Red M22-CLEDC230-R 1
Green M22-CLEDC230-G
Blue M22-CLEDC230-B 1
Front White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-FLED-W
Red M22-FLED-R 1
Green M22-FLED-G
Blue
Red/Green/Yellow 24 Vdc
M22-FLED-B
M22-FLED-RG 1
1
Red, Green, Blue, M22-FLED-RGB 1
Yellow, White, Violet, 1
Turquoise
1
M22-XLED60 LED Resistor and Test Elements

Terminal Type
Mounting
Location
Element
Type Voltage Catalog Number
1
Screw Front Resistor 23 42–60 Vac/Vdc
220 Vdc
M22-XLED60
M22-XLED220
1
Test 12–240 Vac/Vdc
85–264 Vac
M22-XLED-T
M22-XLED230-T
1
1
Notes
1
Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
1
2
Resistor units to be used with 12–30V light units.
3
Refer to IL04716002E for use of resistor elements in series for higher DC voltage. 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-107
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Multi-Color LED Input Guide

1 Terminal Color
X1 X2 X3 X4
1 Catalog Number +R +G +B GND
■ ■
1 M22-FLED-RG Red — —
Green — ■ — ■
1 Yellow ■ ■ — ■
M22-FLED-RGB Red ■ — — ■
1 Green — ■ — ■
Yellow ■ ■ — ■
1 White ■ ■ ■ ■

1 Blue — — ■ ■
Violet ■ — ■ ■
1 Turquoise — ■ ■ ■

1
Legend Plate Holders and Inserts, Pushbuttons and Double Pushbuttons 1
1 Description Inscription Catalog Number
M22S-ST-X Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert, — M22S-ST-X
1 for pushbuttons
Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert, — M22S-STDD-X
1 for double pushbuttons

1
M22-XST-GB0 Legend plate insert — M22-XST
1 Custom M22-XST-ETCH 2
STOP M22-XST-GB0
1 START M22-XST-GB1
OFF M22-XST-GB5
1 ON M22-XST-GB6
RUN M22-XST-GB7
1 FAULT M22-XST-GB8
OFF ON M22-XST-GB10
1 MAN. AUTO M22-XST-GB11
MAN. O AUTO M22-XST-GB12
1 HAND AUTO M22-XST-D11
HAND O AUTO M22-XST-D12
1 1 M22-XST-X52
2 M22-XST-X53
1 OI M22-XST-X88
O-I M22-XST-X89
1 I O II M22-XST-X93

Notes
1 1 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library

1 (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes.

For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.

1 Example
To order a legend plate for a pushbutton with non-standard markings (FORWARD):
1 1. Select legend plate holder—M22S-ST-X.
1 2. Select legend plate insert—M22-XST-ETCH.
3. Select FORWARD from the Symbols Library, Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130, identified by GB15 suffix.
1
4. Indicate on the order form in the order notes—suffix GB15, line item # ___ .
1
1

V7-T1-108 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Legend Plates, Complete 1
Description Inscription Catalog Number 1
M22S-ST-GB0 For use with pushbuttons Legend plate holder with insert STOP M22S-ST-GB0
and indicating lights START M22S-ST-GB1
1
OFF M22S-ST-GB5
ON M22S-ST-GB6
1
RUN M22S-ST-GB7
FAULT M22S-ST-GB8 1
1 M22S-ST-X52
2 M22S-ST-X53 1
Selector switches — OFF ON M22S-ST-GB10
MAN. AUTO M22S-ST-GB11 1
MAN. O AUTO M22S-ST-GB12
HAND AUTO M22S-ST-D11 1
HAND O AUTO M22S-ST-D12
OI M22S-ST-X88 1
O-I M22S-ST-X89
I O II M22S-ST-X93 1
M22-XZK Emergency-stop operators Rectangular yellow legend plate — M22-XZK
Custom M22-XZK-ETCH 2 1
EMERGENCY-STOP M22-XZK-GB99
1
M22-XYK Square yellow legend plate — M22-XYK 1
— M22-XYK-ETCH 2
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XYK1 1
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XYK5
Round yellow legend plate, 90 mm — M22-XAK 1
Custom M22-XAK-ETCH 2
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XAK1 1
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XAK5
M22-XBK1 Round yellow legend plate, 60 mm — M22-XBK 1
Custom M22-XBK-ETCH 2
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XBK1 1
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XBK5
1
M22-XCK1 Four-way pushbutton, Silver square legend plate — M22-XCK 1
joystick and four-position Custom M22-XCK-ETCH 2
selector switches
Four directional arrows M22-XCK1 1
0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22-XCK2
Two directional arrows M22-XCK3 1
Notes 1
1 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130) into the Order Notes. 1
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-109
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Surface Mounting Enclosures 1 Selector Switch Accessories

1 Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number
M22-IY1-PG Yellow top, black base for M22-IY1-PG Plunger bridge 2 M22-XW
1 emergency-stop operators
M22-XW

1
1 M22-XWS Key cover M22-XWS

1 M22-IY-PG One-element enclosure

Two-element enclosure
M22-I1-PG
M22-I2-PG
Three-element enclosure
1 Four-element enclosure
M22-I3-PG
M22-I4-PG M22-XC-R Key withdraw adapter 3 M22-XC-R
Six-element enclosure M22-I6-PG
1 M20 connecting screw M22-XI
M20 cord grip V-M20
1
M22-XC-Y Coding adapter M22-XC-Y
1 M22-EY1 Flush Mounting Plates, Aluminum
Finish Rating Catalog Number
1 One Hole
Yellow paint for — M22-XGWK Guard ring M22-XGWK
1 emergency-stop
M22-EY1

operators
1 Gray anodized IP65 M22-E1
Two Holes
1 Gray anodized IP65 M22-E2 Notes
1 Requires use of base mounted contact blocks.
Three Holes
2 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
1 Gray anodized IP65 M22-E3
three-position selector switches only.
Four Holes 3 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.

1 Gray anodized IP65 M22-E4

Five Holes
1 Gray anodized IP65 M22-E5
Six Holes

1 Anodized IP40 M22-E6

1 Shrouds, Plastic
M22-H1
1 Description Rating Catalog Number
One-element IP55 M22-H1
1 Two-element IP55 M22-H2
Three-element IP55 M22-H3
1 Four-element IP40 M22-H4
Five-element IP40 M22-H5
1 Six-element
Mounting plate
IP40
—
M22-H6
M22-XE5
Plaster keys for —
1 flush mounting
M22-UPE

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-110 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Emergency Stop Operator Accessories Mounting Accessories
Description Voltage Catalog Number Description Catalog Number 1
M22-XGPV Yellow guard ring — M22-XGPV M22-TC and M22-TA Telescopic clip with top-hat rail M22-TC
Telescopic clip M22-TA
1
Telescopic clip extension M22-TCV
1
M22G-XGPV Gray guard ring — M22G-XGPV 1
M22-IVS DIN rail mounting adapter M22-IVS
1
1
M22-MGTA Rectangular guard — M22-MGTA

M22-GR Mounting ring M22-GR 1

1
1
M22-PL-PV Sealing shroud — M22-PL-PV M22-MS Mounting ring tool M22-MS
1
1
1
M22-XPV60-Y-120 Illuminated ring 24 Vac/Vdc M22-XPV60-Y-24
120 Vac M22-XPV60-Y-120 1
230 Vac M22-XPV60-Y-230 M22S-R30 Adapter ring set for M22S-R30
30 mm holes 1
1
M22-B Blanking Plugs 1
Color Catalog Number
Gray M22-B
M22-T-D and
M22-T-DD
Protective Diaphragm 1
For Use with … Catalog Number
Black M22S-B
Flush pushbuttons and M22-T-D 1
indicating lights
Double pushbuttons M22-T-DD
1
M22-NT Notching Tool
Dust Covers
1
Punching tool used to produce the cutout M22-ADC4
for the anti-rotation tab as defined in Description Catalog Number
1
IEC/EN 60947-5-1. Contact block dust cover M22-XKDP
Article Operator dust cover,
max three contact blocks
M22-ADC 1
Description Unit Number Catalog Number
Operator dust cover,
St 37 sheet steel:
Max. 3 mm thickness
1 028144 M22-NT
max four contact blocks
M22-ADC4
1
Stainless steel:
Max. 1.5 mm thickness 1
Kits
Description Catalog Number 1
Includes one each: M22-XW, M22-KT1
M22-XC-R, M22-XC-Y, M22S-B, 1
M22-A, M22-XD-SWRGYB
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-111
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Coding Adapter Guide

1
Selector Switches
1 Two-Position Selector Switch
Top (B) Bottom (A) Catalog Number Function
1 Top (B)
M22(S)-W(L)(K) Momentary

1 M22(S)-WR(L)(K) Maintained

1
Bottom (A)
Three-Position Selector Switch
1 Function
Top (B) Bottom (A) Catalog Number Left Right
1 M22(S)-W(L)(K)3 Momentary Momentary

1 M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3 Maintained Maintained

1 M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3-1 Maintained Momentary

M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3-2 Momentary Maintained

1
1 Two-Position Key-Operated Selector Switch
Center Right
1 Top (B) Bottom (A) Catalog Number Key Withdraw Function Key Withdraw
M22(S)-WS Yes Momentary No
1
M22(S)-WRS Yes Maintained Yes
1
M22(S)-WRS-A1 Yes Maintained No

1
1 Three-Position Key-Operated Selector Switch
Left Center Right
Top (B) Bottom (A) Catalog Number Function Key Withdraw Key Withdraw Function Key Withdraw
1
M22(S)-WS3 Momentary No Yes Momentary No
1 M22(S)-WRS3 Maintained Yes Yes Maintained Yes

1 M22(S)-WRS3-A1 Maintained No Yes Maintained No

1 M22(S)-WRS3-A2 Maintained Yes Yes Maintained No

M22(S)-WRS3-A3 Maintained No Yes Maintained Yes

1
M22(S)-WRS3-A4 Maintained Yes Yes Momentary No
1 M22(S)-WRS3-A5 Maintained No Yes Momentary No

1 M22(S)-WRS3-A6 Momentary No Yes Maintained Yes

1 M22(S)-WRS3-A7 Momentary No Yes Maintained No

1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-112 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches and Emergency-Stop Operators

Momentary Maintained
Indicating Lights,
Buzzers and Emergency-Stop Selector Key-Operated Double
1
Description Pushbuttons Pushbuttons Potentiometers Operators Switches Operators Pushbuttons
General
1
Standards IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660 1
UL #E29184 UL #E29184 UL #E29184 UL #340491 UL #E29184 UL #E29184 UL #E29184
Lifespan, mechanical Operations x 10 6 >5 >1 — >0.1 >0.1 >0.1 >0.2 1
Operating frequency Operations/h >3600 >1800 — >600 >2000 >100 >3600
Actuating force n >5 >5 — >50 – — >5 1
Operating torque Nm — — — — >0.3 >0.5 —
(screw terminals)
1
Protection Type
IP IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K Indicating lights: IP67, 69K IP67, IP69K
Buzzers: IP40
IP66 IP66 IP66
1
Potentiometers: IP66
UL type 4X, 13 4X, 13 Indicating lights: 4X/13 4X, 13 4X, 13 4X, 13 4X, 13 1
Buzzers: 12

Climatic proofing
Potentiometers: 4X/13
Damp heat, constant, according to IEC 60068-2-78
1
Damp heat, cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient temperature, °F –13 to 158 –13 to 158 –13 to 158 –13 to 158 –13 to 158 –13 to 158 –13 to 158
1
operating (°C) (–25 to 70) (–25 to 70) (–25 to 70) (–25 to 70) (–25 to 70) (–25 to 70) (–25 to 70)
Mounting position As required As required As required As required As required As required As required 1
Mechanical shock g >30 >30 >30 >50 >30 >30 >30
resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27
1
shock duration 11 ms,
half-sinusoidal 1
Terminal Capacities
Solid AWG — — 20-16 — — — — 1
mm2 — 0.5–1.5 — —
Stranded AWG — — 20-16 — — — — 1
mm2 — 0.5–1.5 — —
Contacts 1
Rated impulse withstand Uimp Vac — — 4000 — — — —
voltage 1
Rated insulation voltage Ui V — — 2500 — — — —
Overvoltage category/
pollution degree
— — III/3 — — — — 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-113
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Contact Blocks and Light Units

1 Contact LED
Description Blocks Light Units
1 General
Standards IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 60947
1 VDE 0660
UL #E29184
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
x 10 6
1 Lifespan, mechanical
Operating frequency
Operations
Operations/h
>5
>3600
—
—
>5
1 Actuating force
Operating torque (screw terminals)
n
Nm <0.8
—
—

1 Protection Type
IP IP20 IP20

1 UL type
Climatic proofing
— —
Damp heat, constant, according to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30
1 Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70)
Mounting position As required As required
1 Mechanical shock resistance to g >30 >30
IEC 60068-2-27 shock duration
1 11 ms, half-sinusoidal
Terminal Capacities
1 Solid AWG 18–14 18–14
mm2 0.75–2.5 0.75–2.5
1 Stranded AWG 20–14 20–14
mm2 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5
1 Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Vac 6000 6000
1 Rated insulation voltage Ui V 500 500
Overvoltage category/ III/3 III/3
pollution degree
1 NEMA contact ratings A600, Q300 —
Current draw — 5–15 mA
1 Control Circuit Reliability
at 24 Vdc/5 mA HF Fault probability <10-7, <1 fault in 107 operations —
1 at 5 Vdc/1 mA HF Fault probability <5 x 10 -6, <1 fault in 5 x 10 6 operations —

1 Max. Short-Circuit Protective Device

Fuse gG/gL A 10 —

1 Switching Capacity
Rated Operational Current
AC-15
1 115V Ie A 6 —
230V Ie A 6 —
1 400V Ie A 4 —
500V Ie A 2 —
1 DC-13
24V Ie A 3 —
1 42V Ie A 1.7 —
60V Ie A 1.2 —
1 110V Ie A 0.6 —
220V Ie A 0.3 —
1 Lifespan, Electrical
AC-15
1 230V/0.5A Operations x 10 6 1.6 —
230V/1.0A Operations x 10 6 1 —
1 230V/3.0A Operations x 10 6 0.7 —
DV-13
1 12V/2.8A Operations x 10 6 1.2 —

1 Contact Element Note: >200 Vac/60 Hz: –25/55°C

V7-T1-114 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Palm Switches
Description Momentary Maintained FAK-R-V-KC11-I 1
General
Standards IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 60947
1
VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660
Lifespan, mechanical Operations x 10 6 >1 >0.1 >0.1 1
Operating frequency Operations/h >3600 >600 >600
Actuating force n 20–40 40–60 15–25
1
Operating torque Nm — — —
Degree of protection, IEC/EN 60529 IP IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K IP65
1
UL Type 4X, 13 4X, 13 4X, 13
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
1
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –73 to 104 (–25 to 40) –73 to 104 (–25 to 40) –73 to 104 (–25 to 40) 1
Mounting position As required
Mechanical shock resistance to g >15 >15 >15
1
IEC 60068-2-27
shock duration 11 ms, half-sinusoidal 1
ASi Adapter Modules
Description M22-ASI M22-ASI-C
1
General 1
Standards IEC/EN 60947, IEC/EN 60947,
DIN EN 50295 DIN EN 50295
Radio interference suppression EN 55011, EN 55011,
1
EN 55022 EN 55022
Limit value class — —
1
Protection type IP20 IP00
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78, cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30
1
Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55)
Shock resistance shock duration 11 ms g >30 >30
1
Vibration to IEC 60068-2-27 Hz — —
(amplitude 1 mm) 1
Dimensions mm — —
Weight kg — —
1
Mounting Front mounting Front mounting
Mounting position As required As required
1
Power Supply
Rated voltage to AS-interface Vdc 26.5–31.6 26.5–31.6
1
specification
Connection technique Yellow plug-in terminal as insulation Two cables onboard 1
piercing terminal
Power supply Completely from the AS-interface cable 1
Addressing Via connection to AS-interface cable
Total power consumption of mA >40 >40 1
the AS-interface
AS-interface — — 1
Rated operational current at full load mA — —
Rated operational current when idle mA — — 1
(no I, O set)
Status LEDs POWER AS-interface cable:
green LED on the rear side of the element
POWER AS-interface cable:
green LED on the board
1
ERROR AS-interface, AS-interface master ERROR AS-interface, AS-interface master
failure: red LED on the rear side of the element failure: red LED on the board 1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-115
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

ASi-S Adapter Modules

1 Description M22-ASI-S M22-ASI-CS
Inputs
1 Inputs, protected against Number Two (normally 22V/5 mA) Two (normally 22V/5 mA)
short-circuit
1 Voltage range Vdc — —
Rated current per input mA — —
1 High signal level V — —
Low signal mA — —
1 Length of connecting cables cm — —
Outputs
1 Outputs, protected against Number One (normally 19V/8 mA) One (normally 19V/8 mA)
short-circuit
1 Voltage range Vdc — —
Max. Current Carrying Capacity
1 All outputs — —
S three external outputs — —
1 Length of connecting cables cm — —
Profile S-3.A.E S-3.A.E
1 Specification 2.1 2.1
Addresses Number 62 62
1 Emergency-Stop Circuits

1 Connection of the AS-interface line Yellow plug terminal with insulation

piercing
Two cables on the circuit board

Power supply Complete from AS-interface, Complete from AS-interface,

1 cable 26.5–31.6 Vdc cable 26.5–31.6 Vdc
Fixing Front mounted Base mounted
1 Addressing Via AS-interface cable Via AS-interface cable
Max. total current A 45 mA 45 mA
1 Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55)
Shock resistance 30g/11 ms as per IEC 60068-2-27 30g/11 ms as per IEC 60068-2-27
1 Protection type IP20 IP00
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78, Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78,
1 cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30 cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30
Mounting position As required As required
1 Standards EN 50178 EN 50178
EN 50 295 EN 50 295
1 Inputs Two-channel input (22V/5 mA) Two-channel input (22V/5 mA)
(moduled by code sequence) (moduled by code sequence)
(two break contact sets M22-K01) (two break contact sets M22-K01)
1 Outputs One output, typically 19V/8 mA, One output, typically 19V/8 mA,
short-circuit proof short-circuit proof
1 Status Displays
Power, AS-interface cable Green LED on the back Green LED on the back
1 AS-interface error, Red LED on the back Red LED on the back
AS-interface master failure
1 Profile S-7.B.E S-7.B.E

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-116 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Operators and Indicating Lights 1
M22 x 0.06 (1.5)
1
Ø 1.17 (29.7)

Ø 1.16 (29.5)
1

1.17 (29.7)
1
0.04 (1)–0.24 (6)
1
0.39 (10) 0.75 (19)
1
1
Pushbuttons Selector Switches Operators
M22…-D-_ M22…-DH-_ M22…-W-_ M22…-WL-_
1
1
1
1
1
0.93 (23.7) 1.06 (26.9)
0.39 (10) 0.65 (16.4)
1
M22-DG(L)-_ M22…-DD-_
Key-Operated Selector Switches 1
M22…-W(R)S-_
1
Ø1.17 (29.7)

2.15 (54.7)

1
Ø1.17 (29.7)

1
0.65 (16.5)
1
0.52 (13.2)
0.81 (20.6)
M22-D, Base Mounted 1.88 (47.75)
1
1
Indicating Light
1.47 (37.2)

1
M22-L_
1
>0.01 (0.3) 0.04 (1)
1
1.78 (45.3)
1
1
0.45 (11.5) 1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-117
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Illuminated Pushbuttons Contact Block Mounting Adapter
1 M22…-DL-_ M22…-DLH_ M22-A_ M22S-A…

1 0.85 (21.5)

1.77 (45)
1
0.76 (19.3)
1
1.73 (44)
1 1.18 (30)
0.39 (10) 0.65 (16.4)
1
1 Mushroom Head Pushbutton Front Mounted Centering Adapter
M22…-DP-_ M22-ZA
1

0.84 (21.4)
Ø1.44 (36.5)

1
1
1 1.18 (30) 0.7 (17.8)

1 0.93 (23.6)
Front Mounted Indicating Light
1
Emergency-Stop Operators
1 M22-PV_

1.46 (37)
M22S-PV_
M22-PVL_
1 M22-PVS_

1
1.38 (35)

1 1.18 (30) 1.77 (45)

1
1.5 (38) Pushbutton, Complete Devices
1
1.89 (47.9)
1 2.96 (75.1)
A

1
Potentiometer
1
0.39 (10)
0.39 (10)
0.39 (10)

M22(S)-R_

1 1.77 (45)
2.8 (71)

1 1.18 (30)

1 x M22-K_ 2 x M22-K_ 1 x M22-CK_ 2 x M22-CK_

1 A 1.46 (37.2) 1.46 (37.2) 1.54 (39.0) 1.54 (39.0)

1 1.15 (29.2) 1.3 (32.9)

1
1
1

V7-T1-118 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
DIN-Rail Mounting Adapter Front Mounted Mounting Plate
M22-E_ 1
1.42 (36)

0.88 (22.4)
4 x M4 x 16 1

2.15 (54.5)
2.54 (64.5)

2.83 (72)
2.2 (56)
1
1
0.88 (22.4)
1
M22-D...
M22-L... 1.39 (35.2)
1.3 (33)
0.1 (2.5)
0.12 (3)
1
M22-W... e
M22-P... 2.23 (56.7) 0.12 (3.1)
0.18 (4.5 (M4)) a1 1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights with M22-TC Telescopic
Catalog Catalog 1
Number a1 e Number a1 e
Clip and M22-TVC Extension
M22-E(Y) 1 2.83 (72) 2.21 (56) M22-E4 6.73 (171) 6.10 (155) 1
M22-D_ M22-E2 4.13 (105) 3.50 (89) M22-E5 8.03 (204) 7.40 (188)
M22-L_ M22-TC M22-TCV
M22-W_
1
M22-E3 5.43 (138) 4.80 (122) M22-E6 9.33 (237) 8.70 (221) 1
M22-P_

C Base Mounted Surface Mounting Enclosure 1

M22-I_ 1
D

1.73 (44)
M20 M20
1

2.62 (66.5)
3.15 (80)
E
A B G
F H 1
A B C D E F G H
1.3 (33)
e M4 1
1.77 2.36–3.94 0.79 0.79 0.18 0.39 154 0.39 b
(45) (60–100) (20) (20) (4.5) (10) (39) (10) a 1
1 Top-hat rail to IEC/EN 60715. M20/M25
0.7 (17.8)
2.2 (56)
1
Palm Switches 1
FAK_

L-... M20 M20 1

1.89 (48)
1
1.36 (34.5)

Catalog Mounting
1
1.57 (40)

Number Locations a b e Cable Entries

M5 x 20
M22-I(Y)1 1 2.83 1.68 2.30 2 x M16 3 x M20 2 x M25
(72.0) (42.6) (58.5) 1
M22-I2 2 4.72 3.37 4.19 2 x M20 3 x M20 2 x M25
2.56 (65)
M22-I3 3
(120.0)
6.02
(85.6)
4.67
(106.5)
5.49 2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20
1
1.42 (36)
3.35 (85) (153.0) (118.6) (139.5)
M22-I4 4 7.32 5.97 6.79 2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20 1
0.26 (6.5) – 0.3 (7.5)

Ø94 (186.0) (151.6) (172.5)

M22-I6 6 9.92 8.57 9.39 2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20 1
(252.0) (217.6) (238.5)
1
3.98 (101)

1
0.71 (18)

1
1 3 x M20 lateral, 1 x M16 in bottom.
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-119
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Covers Legend Plates
1 M22-H_ M22S-ST-_ M22S-STDD-X
a2 3.74 (95)
1

1.38 (35)

1.85 (47)
1
2.32 (59)

1 M20 M20 M20

0.59 (15)

1.08 (27.5)
1.18 (30)
Catalog
1 Number a2 Cable Entry Style
M22-H1 1.65 (42) 3 x M20 One-piece
1 M22-H2 2.95 (75) 4 x M20 1.18 (30)
M22-H3 4.25 (108) 4 x M20
1 M22-H4 5.55 (141) 4 x M20 Split
M22-H5 6.85 (174) 5 x M20
Mounting Hole with Lug Slot
1 M22-HE6 8.15 (207) 6 x M20 0.13 (3.2)

1 Connecting Screw

0.95 (24.1)
1 M22-XI 1

1
1
0.88 (22.3) 0.04 (1)–0.24 (6)
1 0.04 (1)
1 Gasket.
1
Shroud with Plaster Keys
1 M22-UPE

1 a2 +1.65 (42)
a2 +1.26 (32)
1 a2

1
2.76 (70)
0.16 (4)
2.2 (56)

1 M22-H...

1
e
1 e + 0.51 (13)
0.35 (9)
1
1 M22-H...
0.35 (9)

1.02 (26)
1 0.31 (8)
1
0.31 (8)

1 2 3
M22-UPE
1 2
Box for closing off when plastering.
3
Plaster thickness less than 8 mm.
1 4
Plaster thickness more than 8 mm.

V7-T1-120 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Grid Dimension to IEC/EN 60947 Grid Dimension for M22-DD_
1
1
1
1
1.97 (50)

1
1

2.95 (75)
2.48 (63)
1
1
1.18 (30)
1
Grid Dimension for Various Combinations 1
1
1.18 (30) 1
1
B

Grid Dimension for M22-DDL_

a 1.18 (30)
1
Pushbutton 1
A Diaphragm
M22-T-DD 1
b 2.28 (58)
1
1
b 1.73 (44)

Pushbutton Diaphragm
Pushbutton diaphragm cannot be combined with label mount.
1
Catalog Number A> B>
M22(S)-_(IEC/EN 60947) 1.18 (30.0) 1.97 (50.0)
1
RMQ-Titan min. 1.18 (30.0) 1.58 (40.0)
M22-D_ + M22-T-D 1.30 (33.0) 1.58 (40.0)
1
M22-D(R)P_ 1.50 (38.0) 1.58 (40.0)
M22-PV_ 1.50 (38.0) 1.58 (40.0)
1
Pushbutton diaphragm cannot be combined with label mount. 1
M22-PV(L) + M22-PL-PV 1.89 (48.0) 2.20 (56.0)
M22-PV(L)(S_) + M22-D_ 1.30 (33.0) 1.58 (40.0) Emergency Stop Sealing Cover 1
M22-DDL_ 1.18 (30.0) 2.17 (55.0)
M22-DDL_ + M22-T-DD 1.30 (33.0) 2.28 (58.0)
M22-PL-PV
1
M22-ST_ 1.18 (30.0) 1.97 (50.0)
2.03 (51.6)

M22-STDD_ 1.18 (30.0) 2.95 (75.0) 1

M22-CK_ 1.18 (30.0) 1.77 (45.0)
M22-CLED_ 1.18 (30.0) 1.77 (45.0) 1
M22-XAK_ 3.54 (90.0) 3.54 (90.0)
M22-XZK_ 1.30 (33.0) 2.04 (52.0) 1
0.41 (10.4)

M22-XBK_ 2.36 (60.0) 2.36 (60.0)

1.89 (48)

M22-XYK_ 1.97 (50.0) 1.97 (50.0) 1

M22-D4 2.17 (55.0) 2.17 (55.0)
M22-WR…4 1.97 (50.0) 1.97 (50.0) 1
M22-W…J4 1.97 (50.0) 1.97 (50.0)
1.26 (32) 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-121
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Blanking Plugs Emergency Stop Legend Plate
1 M22…B-_ M22-XAK_ M22-X(Y)ZK_
1.16 (29.5)
1 d= 0.03 (0.8)

1.97 (50)
1

0.65 (16.5)
1
1.3 (33)
1 Pushbutton Diaphragm

1 M22-T-D M22-T-D
3.54 (90)
0.67 (17)

1
M22-XBK-_ M22-XYK-_
2.28 (58)

1 0.13 (3.2)

5)
2.

1.97 (50)
(2
1
89
0.
Ø
1 0.49 (12.5)
1.3 (33)
1.3 (33)
1 0.67 (17)
1.97 (50)
0.91 (23)
1
Guard Ring
Ø 2.36 (60)
1 M22-XGWK M22-XGPV

1 Joystick
0.98 (25)

R35 R41
M22…W…J_
1
1 Ø 1.42 (36)

1
2.68 (68) 1.97 (50)
1 3.07 (78)
2.95 (75)
1.18 (30)
1 Key Cover
1 M22-XWS Four-Way Pushbutton
0.2 (5) M22…-D…4-_
1
0.79 (20)

1
1
1
1 0.47 (12) Ø 0.98 (25) 2.17 (55)
0.45 (11.5)
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-122 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Symbols Library
1
Instructions for Ordering Laser Inscriptions
1. Identify part number to be inscribed. 1
2. Pick symbol from library and identify suffix code associated with the symbol.
1
3. Order part number already listed in the catalog with -ETCH suffix.
4. When placing an order by fax or Vistaline on the Web, reference order item number and 1
indicate appropriate suffix code.
1
Example
To order a green flush button plate with the inscription AUTO HAND: 1
Order Catalog Number: M22-XD-G-ETCH (see Page V7-T1-49).
1
AUTO HAND inscription is found on Page V7-T1-127 in the Symbols Library, suffix code is X91.
In the order notes, reference item number and suffix X91. 1
1
Letter height 3 mm: max. three lines, max. 12 characters per line.
Letter height 5 mm: max. two lines, max. eight characters per line.
1
1
Note: For symbols or text not found in the Symbols Library, please contact the
Eaton Technical Resource Center at 1-877-ETN CARE (386-2273) or [email protected]. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-123
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm).
1
Text—English Text—German
1 Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Inscription Number Suffix Inscription Number Suffix Inscription Number Suffix Inscription Number Suffix
1 GB0 GB18 D0 D25

1 GB1 GB19 D1 D28

1 GB2 GB20 D2 D29

1 GB3 GB21 D3 D30

1 GB4 GB22 D4 D31

1 GB5 GB23 D5 D32

1 GB6 GB24 D6 D33

1 GB7 GB25 D7 D34

1 GB8 GB26 D8 D35

1 GB9 GB27 D9 D36

1 GB10 GB32 D10 D37

1 GB11 GB62 D11 D38

1 GB12 GB63 D12 D39

1 GB14 GB64 D13 D40

1 GB15 GB65 D14 D41

1 GB16 GB66 D15 D42

1 GB17 GB99 D16 D43

1 D17 D44

1 D18 D72

1 D19 D73

1 D20 D74

1 D21 D75

1 D22 D99

1 D23 D100

1 D24

1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
1 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

V7-T1-124 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm).
Text—French Text—Swedish Symbols
1
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
1
F0 S0 X0 X13
1
F1 S1
1
F2 S2 X1 X14
1
F3 S3
1
X2
F4 S4 X15
1
F5 S5
1
F6 S6 X3 X16
1
F7 S7
1
F8 S8 X4 X17
1
F9 S9
1
F10 S10 X5 X18
1
F11 S11
1
F12 S12 X6 X19
1
F14 S14
1
F15 S15 X7 X20
1
F16 S16
1
F17 S17 X8 X21
1
F18 S18
1
F19 S19 X9 X22
1
F20 S20
1
F67 S21 X10 X23
1
F68 S22
1
F99 S23 X11 X24
1
S32
1
S45 X12 X25
1
S46
1
S99
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line. 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-125
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

1 Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix

1 X26 X40 X54 X68

1
1 X27 X41 X55 X69

1
1 X28 X42 X56 X70

1
X29 X43 X57 X71
1
1
X30 X44 X58 X72
1
1
X31 X45 X59 X73
1
1
X32 X46 X60 X74
1
1
X33 X47 X61 X75
1
1
X34 X48 X62 X76
1
1
X35 X49 X63 X77
1
1
X36 X50 X64 X78
1
1
X37 X51 X65 X79
1
1
X38 X52 X66 X80
1
1
X39 X53 X67 X81
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
1 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

V7-T1-126 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
1
X82 X104 X118 X132
1
1
X83 X105 X119 X133
1
1
X88 X106 X120 X134
1
1
X89 X107 X121 X135
1
1
X90 X108 X122 X136
1
1
X91 X109 X123 X137
1
1
X92 X110 X124 X138
1
1
X93 X111 X125 X139
1
1
X94 X112 X126 X140
1
1
X95 X113 X127 X141
1
1
X100 X114 X128 X142
1
1
X101 X115 X129 X143
1
1
X102 X116 X130 X144
1
1
X103 X117 X131 X145
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line. 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-127
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

1 Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix

1 X146 X160 X174 X188

1
1 X147 X161 X175 X189

1
1 X148 X162 X176 X190

1
X149 X163 X177 X191
1
1
X150 X164 X178 X192
1
1
X151 X165 X179 X193
1
1
X152 X166 X180 X194
1
1
X153 X167 X181 X195
1
1
X154 X168 X182 X196
1
1
X155 X169 X183 X197
1
1
X156 X170 X184 X198
1
1
X157 X171 X185 X199
1
1
X158 X172 X186 X200
1
1
X159 X173 X187 X201
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
1 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

V7-T1-128 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22
1.4
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
1
X202 X216 X230 X244
1
1
X203 X217 X231 X245
1
1
X204 X218 X232 X246
1
1
X205 X219 X233 X247
1
1
X206 X220 X234 X248
1
1
X207 X221 X235 X249
1
1
X208 X222 X236 X250
1
1
X209 X223 X237 X251
1
1
X210 X224 X238 X252
1
1
X211 X225 X239 X253
1
1
X212 X226 X240 X254
1
1
X213 X227 X241 X255
1
1
X214 X228 X242 X256
1
1
X215 X229 X243 X257
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line. 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-129
 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ-Titan Modular Pushbuttons—M22

1 Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix

1 X258 X265 X272 X279

1
1 X259 X266 X273 X280

1
1 X260 X267 X274 X281

1
X261 X268 X275 X282
1
1
X262 X269 X276 X283
1
1
X263 X270 X277 X284
1
1
X264 X271 X278 X285
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
1 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.

V7-T1-130 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Contents
Description Page
1
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-133
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and 1
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-134
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-147 1
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-150
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-153 1
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-160
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-162 1
1
1
1
1
Product Overview 1
Product Description Standards and Certifications 1
Eaton’s C22 compact Wide Product Breadth LED Indicators All operators are IEC/EN
pushbutton line offers an ● In addition to the standard ● 100,000 hours of life 60947 VDE 0660, UL Listed, 1
industry leading array of compact offering of in high-vibration and CSA Certified.
functional, attractive, and
ergonomically designed
indicating lights and environments All operators carry an IP65, 1
pushbuttons, Eaton’s ● Lenses specifically IP66, IP67 or IP69K rating.
“all-in-one” illuminated and
non-illuminated pushbuttons,
C22 offers keyed and
non-keyed operators
designed for LED
All products carry ratings of
1
selector switches, emergency illumination
and emergency stops NEMA 1, 3R, 4X, 12 and 13
stops and indicating lights. ● Hundreds of styles with Rugged Design
1
The complete illuminated line
standard laser etch ● Pushbuttons (momentary)
is only offered in LED light
units to ensure high-quality markings with the ability rated for 5 million
1
brightness and up to 100,000 to use custom M22 laser mechanical operations
hours of LED illumination. etched buttons in and selector switches 1
C22 operators are available conjunction with C22 (non-keyed) rated for
with either a silver or black buttonless operators 1 million mechanical 1
bezel and share the exact ● Pigtail lengths vary from operations
same front of the panel 0.2 to 3.5 m and allow
three connection options—
● All components have IP65 1
look and feel as Eaton’s rating, and some carry
M8, M12 and flying lead IP67 and IP69K for wash-
M22 line. The C22’s compact,
“all-in-one” design with the down environment, which
1
contact block(s) and also means oil tight
operators integral provides ● C22 with pigtail has an
1
the user with a simple solution. IP65 rear rating, eliminating
The 2017 product extension
the need for an enclosure 1
in dust and water jet
C22 with pigtail has more
than doubled the portfolio.
applications 1
The C22 with pigtail now
allows customers the ability 1
to directly mount the product
without the need for 1
pushbutton enclosures.
With three different
connection methods and
1
multiple lengths, the C22
with pigtail can be used for 1
a wide range of applications.
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-131
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Features Benefits
1 ● Field convertible ● Notched hole mounting ● Compact, “all-in-one” ● Operators are designed
maintained pushbuttons with anti-rotation tab and operator and contact block for rugged environments,
1 from maintained to central nut mounting on design simplifies product ideal for wash-down
momentary each operator selection, inventory, and applications (reference
1 ● LED offering only for all ● Pushbuttons (momentary) installation each operator’s IP ratings
illuminated operators rated for 5 million ● Field convertibility of for ingress protection
1 ● Laser engraved mechanical operations pushbuttons and selector definition)
pushbuttons and lenses and selector switches switches helps distributors ● Anti-rotation tab saves
1 ● Heavy-duty construction
(non-keyed) rated for and customers reduce installation time and
1 million mechanical inventory and increase prevents operator rotation
with a minimum of IP65
operations functionality
1 and UL NEMA® Type 4X/13
● Unique compact offerings,
● High mechanical and
electrical life allows for
on front of panel operators. ● LED offering only for
including keyed and non- improved brightness use in tough and
1 Many operators even carry
IP67 and IP69K, for the keyed operators and quality and up to 100,000 challenging applications
toughest applications emergency stops hours of operation ● Laser inscription
1 ● Silver or black colored ● Plastic construction is capabilities allow for high
nylon bezels corrosion resistant quality, wear-resistant
1 ● Eliminate enclosure, on markings
machine installations ● By having a compact
1 design emergency stop, the
C22 design eliminates the
1 need for self-monitoring
contact blocks
1 ● M12/M8 connections
allow connection directly
into communications
1 systems such as
SmartWire-DT or AS6
1
1 7

1 11

1 1

8
1 2
12
1
1 3
8

1 4
13 Legend
1 = Pushbutton
8
1 2 = Illuminated pushbutton
3 = LED indicator
1 5

14
4 = Knob selector
9
5 = Key selector
1
6 = E-stop

1 6 7 = Legend plate
15 8 = E-stop legend plates
1 10
9 = Guard rings
10 = Illuminated guard ring
1 11 = Mounting ring

1 12 = M12 connector: 4-pole

13 = M12 connector: 5-pole
1 14 = M8 connector: 4-pole
15 = Flying lead
1

V7-T1-132 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Product Selection Guide
1
Pushbuttons
1
1
1
Non-illuminated, flush, pigtail Illuminated, flush, pigtail
Description Non-illuminated, flush (M8/M12/flying lead) Illuminated, flush (M8/M12/flying lead) 1
Operator Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained
1
Product Selection Page V7-T1-135 Page V7-T1-137 Page V7-T1-136 Page V7-T1-138 Page V7-T1-141 Page V7-T1-143 Page V7-T1-142 Page V7-T1-144
1
Extended Pushbuttons
1
1
1
Description Non-illuminated, extended Illuminated, extended 1
Operator Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained
Product Selection Page V7-T1-139 Page V7-T1-140 Page V7-T1-145 Page V7-T1-146 1
Indicating Lights 1
1
1
1
Indicating lights with pigtail
Description Indicating lights (M8/M12/flying lead) 1
Product Selection Page V7-T1-148 Page V7-T1-149
1
Emergency Stops
1
1
1
Twist release with or without Push-Pull with Pigtail 1
Description Twist release Keyed-release indicator and flying lead/M12 (flying lead/M12)
Product Selection Page V7-T1-151 Page V7-T1-151 Page V7-T1-152 Page V7-T1-152 1
Selector Switches 1
1
1
1
Non-illuminated, knob type,
Description Non-illuminated, knob type Key-operated with pigtail Key-operated with pigtail 1
Product Selection Page V7-T1-154 Page V7-T1-156 Page V7-T1-155 Page V7-T1-158
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-133
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Contents

1 Description Page
1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary V7-T1-135
1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush,
Momentary, with Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-136
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained V7-T1-137
1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush,
Maintained, with Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-138
1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons,
Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-139
1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons,
Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-140
1 Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-141
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush,
1 Momentary, with Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained . .
V7-T1-142
V7-T1-143
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush,
1 Maintained, with Pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-144
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary V7-T1-145
1 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained V7-T1-146
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-147
1 Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-150
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-153
1 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-160
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-162
1
1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Product Description Features
1 Eaton’s C22 Compact ● Field convertible Protection Type
Pushbuttons are a complete maintained pushbuttons IP67/IP69K
1 line of monoblock type from maintained to
●

● NEMA 4X, 13
pushbuttons with the contact momentary
1 blocks, mounting adapter, ● LED offering only for
● IP65 rear (pigtail devices)
and operator all-in-one. The improved brightness
1 C22 pushbuttons offer the quality and up to 100,000
same look and feel as their hours of operation
modular counterpart, the
1 M22. They also carry many of
● Laser engraved
pushbuttons and lenses
the same rugged ratings and
1 options, such as laser
● Pushbuttons (momentary)
etching, field convertibility, rated for 5 million
1 and LED technology. They mechanical operations
also feature IP65 rear ratings ● Pigtail option allows direct
machine mounting
1 when purchased with pigtail,
M8/M12/flying lead.
1 Note: For additional accessories,
please see Pages V7-T1-105 to
V7-T1-111, 22.5 mm Modular
1 Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories.

1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-134 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons 1
C22 - D - G - X1 - K10 - P1
1

Bezel Operator Type Button Plate Color Button Etching Contact Blocks
Connector Type
P1 = 0.2 m M12, 4-pole
1
C22 = Silver D= Flush, momentary G = Green X0 = K10 = 1NO P3 = 0.5 m M12, 4-pole
C22S = Black DR = Flush, maintained R = Red X1 = K20 = 2NO P5 = 1.0 m M12, 4-pole 1
DH = Extended, momentary S = Black K01 = 1NC P30 = 0.2 m M8, 4-pole
P31 = 0.5 m M8, 4-pole
DRH = Extended, maintained W = White
X = Buttonless
K02 = 2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC P32 = 1.0 m M8, 4-pole 1
P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
P65 = 3.5 m flying lead 1
Product Selection 1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary 1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
C22(S)-D-_ 1
Button Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel
Color Etching Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number
1
Green — 1NO C22-D-G-K10 C22S-D-G-K10
— 2NO C22-D-G-K20 C22S-D-G-K20 1
— 1NO/1NC C22-D-G-K11 C22S-D-G-K11
X1 1NO C22-D-G-X1-K10 C22S-D-G-X1-K10 1
X1 2NO C22-D-G-X1-K20 C22S-D-G-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-D-G-X1-K11 C22S-D-G-X1-K11
1
Red — 1NC C22-D-R-K01 C22S-D-R-K01
1
— 2NC C22-D-R-K02 C22S-D-R-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-D-R-K11 C22S-D-R-K11 1
X0 1NC C22-D-R-X0-K01 C22S-D-R-X0-K01
X0 2NC C22-D-R-X0-K02 C22S-D-R-X0-K02 1
X0 1NO/1NC C22-D-R-X0-K11 C22S-D-R-X0-K11
Black — 1NC C22-D-S-K01 C22S-D-S-K01
1
— 2NC C22-D-S-K02 C22S-D-S-K02 1
— 1NO/1NC C22-D-S-K11 C22S-D-S-K11
X0 1NC C22-D-S-X0-K01 C22S-D-S-X0-K01 1
X0 2NC C22-D-S-X0-K02 C22S-D-S-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-D-S-X0-K11 C22S-D-S-X0-K11
1
White — 1NO C22-D-W-K10 C22S-D-W-K10
1
— 2NO C22-D-W-K20 C22S-D-W-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-D-W-K11 C22S-D-W-K11 1
X1 1NO C22-D-W-X1-K10 C22S-D-W-X1-K10
X1 2NO C22-D-W-X1-K20 C22S-D-W-X1-K20 1
X1 1NO/1NC C22-D-W-X1-K11 C22S-D-W-X1-K11
Buttonless — 1NO C22-D-X-K10 C22S-D-X-K10
1
— 2NO C22-D-X-K20 C22S-D-X-K20
1
— 1NC C22-D-X-K01 C22S-D-X-K01
— 2NC C22-D-X-K02 C22S-D-X-K02 1
— 1NO/1NC C22-D-X-K11 C22S-D-X-K11
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-135
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary, with Pigtail

1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary, with Pigtail
C22-D-_
1 Button
Color Contacts
Connector
Length
Connector
Type
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Green 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-D-G-K10-P30
1 1NO 0.2 M12 C22-D-G-K10-P1
1NO 0.5 M8
1 1NO 0.5 M12
C22-D-G-K10-P31
C22-D-G-K10-P3

1 1NO
1NO
1
1
M8
M12
C22-D-G-K10-P32
C22-D-G-K10-P5

1 1NO 1 Flying lead C22-D-G-K10-P62

1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-D-G-K10-P65

1 Red 1NC 0.2 M8 C22-D-R-K01-P30

1NC 0.2 M12 C22-D-R-K01-P1
1 1NC 0.5 M8 C22-D-R-K01-P31
1NC 0.5 M12 C22-D-R-K01-P3
1 1NC 1 M8 C22-D-R-K01-P32
1NC 1 M12 C22-D-R-K01-P5
1 1NC 1 Flying lead C22-D-R-K01-P62
1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-D-R-K01-P65
1 Black 1NC 0.2 M8 C22-D-S-K01-P30
1NC 0.2 M12 C22-D-S-K01-P1
1 1NC 0.5 M8 C22-D-S-K01-P31
1NC 0.5 M12 C22-D-S-K01-P3
1 1NC 1 M8 C22-D-S-K01-P32
1NC 1 M12 C22-D-S-K01-P5
1 1NC 1 Flying lead C22-D-S-K01-P62
1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-D-S-K01-P65
1 White 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-D-W-K10-P30
1NO 0.2 M12 C22-D-W-K10-P1
1 1NO 0.5 M8 C22-D-W-K10-P31
1NO 0.5 M12 C22-D-W-K10-P3
1 1NO 1 M8 C22-D-W-K10-P32
1NO 1 M12 C22-D-W-K10-P5
1 1NO 1 Flying lead C22-D-W-K10-P62
1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-D-W-K10-P65
1 Buttonless 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-D-X-K10-P30
1NO 0.2 M12 C22-D-X-K10-P1
1 1NO 0.5 M8 C22-D-X-K10-P31
1NO 0.5 M12 C22-D-X-K10-P3
1 1NO 1 M8 C22-D-X-K10-P32
1NO 1 M12
1 1NO 1 Flying lead
C22-D-X-K10-P5
C22-D-X-K10-P62
1NO 3.5 Flying lead
1 2NO 1 Flying lead
C22-D-X-K10-P65
C22-D-X-K20-P62

1 2NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-D-X-K20-P65

1NC/1NO 1 Flying lead C22-D-X-K11-P62

1 1NC/1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-D-X-K11-P65

1NC 0.2 M8 C22-D-X-K01-P30
1 1NC 0.2 M12 C22-D-X-K01-P1
1NC 0.5 M8 C22-D-X-K01-P31
1 1NC 0.5 M12 C22-D-X-K01-P3
1NC 1 M8 C22-D-X-K01-P32
1 1NC 1 M12 C22-D-X-K01-P5
1NC 1 Flying lead C22-D-X-K01-P62
1 1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-D-X-K01-P65
2NC 1 Flying lead C22-D-X-K02-P62
1 2NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-D-X-K02-P65

V7-T1-136 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
1
C22(S)-DR-_ Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
Button Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel 1
Color Etching Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number
Green — 1NO C22-DR-G-K10 C22S-DR-G-K10 1
— 2NO C22-DR-G-K20 C22S-DR-G-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-DR-G-K11 C22S-DR-G-K11
1
X1 1NO C22-DR-G-X1-K10 C22S-DR-G-X1-K10
1
X1 2NO C22-DR-G-X1-K20 C22S-DR-G-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-DR-G-X1-K11 C22S-DR-G-X1-K11 1
Red — 1NC C22-DR-R-K01 C22S-DR-R-K01
— 2NC C22-DR-R-K02 C22S-DR-R-K02 1
— 1NO/1NC C22-DR-R-K11 C22S-DR-R-K11
X0 1NC C22-DR-R-X0-K01 C22S-DR-R-X0-K01
1
X0 2NC C22-DR-R-X0-K02 C22S-DR-R-X0-K02 1
X0 1NO/1NC C22-DR-R-X0-K11 C22S-DR-R-X0-K11
Black — 1NC C22-DR-S-K01 C22S-DR-S-K01 1
— 2NC C22-DR-S-K02 C22S-DR-S-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DR-S-K11 C22S-DR-S-K11
1
X0 1NC C22-DR-S-X0-K01 C22S-DR-S-X0-K01
1
X0 2NC C22-DR-S-X0-K02 C22S-DR-S-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-DR-S-X0-K11 C22S-DR-S-X0-K11 1
White — 1NO C22-DR-W-K10 C22S-DR-W-K10
— 2NO C22-DR-W-K20 C22S-DR-W-K20 1
— 1NO/1NC C22-DR-W-K11 C22S-DR-W-K11
X1 1NO C22-DR-W-X1-K10 C22S-DR-W-X1-K10
1
X1 2NO C22-DR-W-X1-K20 C22S-DR-W-X1-K20
1
X1 1NO/1NC C22-DR-W-X1-K11 C22S-DR-W-X1-K11
Buttonless — 1NO C22-DR-X-K10 C22S-DR-X-K10 1
— 2NO C22-DR-X-K20 C22S-DR-X-K20
— 1NC C22-DR-X-K01 C22S-DR-X-K01 1
— 2NC C22-DR-X-K02 C22S-DR-X-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DR-X-K11 C22S-DR-X-K11
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
1
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-137
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained, with Pigtail

1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained, with Pigtail
C22-DR-_
1 Button
Color Contacts
Connector
Length
Connector
Type
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Green 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-DR-G-K10-P30
1 1NO 0.2 M12 C22-DR-G-K10-P1
1NO 0.5 M8
1 1NO 0.5 M12
C22-DR-G-K10-P31
C22-DR-G-K10-P3

1 1NO
1NO
1
1
M8
M12
C22-DR-G-K10-P32
C22-DR-G-K10-P5

1 1NO 1 Flying lead C22-DR-G-K10-P62

1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-DR-G-K10-P65

1 Red 1NC 0.2 M8 C22-DR-R-K01-P30

1NC 0.2 M12 C22-DR-R-K01-P1
1 1NC 0.5 M8 C22-DR-R-K01-P31
1NC 0.5 M12 C22-DR-R-K01-P3
1 1NC 1 M8 C22-DR-R-K01-P32
1NC 1 M12 C22-DR-R-K01-P5
1 1NC 1 Flying lead C22-DR-R-K01-P62
1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-DR-R-K01-P65
1 Black 1NC 0.2 M8 C22-DR-S-K01-P30
1NC 0.2 M12 C22-DR-S-K01-P1
1 1NC 0.5 M8 C22-DR-S-K01-P31
1NC 0.5 M12 C22-DR-S-K01-P3
1 1NC 1 M8 C22-DR-S-K01-P32
1NC 1 M12 C22-DR-S-K01-P5
1 1NC 1 Flying lead C22-DR-S-K01-P62
1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-DR-S-K01-P65
1 White 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-DR-W-K10-P30
1NO 0.2 M12 C22-DR-W-K10-P1
1 1NO 0.5 M8 C22-DR-W-K10-P31
1NO 0.5 M12 C22-DR-W-K10-P3
1 1NO 1 M8 C22-DR-W-K10-P32
1NO 1 M12 C22-DR-W-K10-P5
1 1NO 1 Flying lead C22-DR-W-K10-P62
1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-DR-W-K10-P65
1 Buttonless 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-DR-X-K10-P30
1NO 0.2 M12 C22-DR-X-K10-P1
1 1NO 0.5 M8 C22-DR-X-K10-P31
1NO 0.5 M12 C22-DR-X-K10-P3
1 1NO 1 M8 C22-DR-X-K10-P32
1NO 1 M12
1 1NO 1 Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K10-P5
C22-DR-X-K10-P62
1NO 3.5 Flying lead
1 2NO 1 Flying lead
C22-DR-X-K10-P65
C22-DR-X-K20-P62

1 2NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-DR-X-K20-P65

1NC/1NO 1 Flying lead C22-DR-X-K11-P62

1 1NC/1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-DR-X-K11-P65

1NC 0.2 M8 C22-DR-X-K01-P30
1 1NC 0.2 M12 C22-DR-X-K01-P1
1NC 0.5 M8 C22-DR-X-K01-P31
1 1NC 0.5 M12 C22-DR-X-K01-P3
1NC 1 M8 C22-DR-X-K01-P32
1 1NC 1 M12 C22-DR-X-K01-P5
1NC 1 Flying lead C22-DR-X-K01-P62
1 1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-DR-X-K01-P65
2NC 1 Flying lead C22-DR-X-K02-P62
1 2NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-DR-X-K02-P65

V7-T1-138 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
1
C22(S)-DH-_ Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Button Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel 1
Color Etching Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number
Green — 1NO C22-DH-G-K10 C22S-DH-G-K10 1
— 2NO C22-DH-G-K20 C22S-DH-G-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-DH-G-K11 C22S-DH-G-K11
1
X1 1NO C22-DH-G-X1-K10 C22S-DH-G-X1-K10
1
X1 2NO C22-DH-G-X1-K20 C22S-DH-G-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-DH-G-X1-K11 C22S-DH-G-X1-K11 1
Red — 1NC C22-DH-R-K01 C22S-DH-R-K01
— 2NC C22-DH-R-K02 C22S-DH-R-K02 1
— 1NO/1NC C22-DH-R-K11 C22S-DH-R-K11
X0 1NC C22-DH-R-X0-K01 C22S-DH-R-X0-K01
1
X0 2NC C22-DH-R-X0-K02 C22S-DH-R-X0-K02 1
X0 1NO/1NC C22-DH-R-X0-K11 C22S-DH-R-X0-K11
Black — 1NC C22-DH-S-K01 C22S-DH-S-K01 1
— 2NC C22-DH-S-K02 C22S-DH-S-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DH-S-K11 C22S-DH-S-K11
1
X0 1NC C22-DH-S-X0-K01 C22S-DH-S-X0-K01
1
X0 2NC C22-DH-S-X0-K02 C22S-DH-S-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-DH-S-X0-K11 C22S-DH-S-X0-K11 1
White — 1NO C22-DH-W-K10 C22S-DH-W-K10
— 2NO C22-DH-W-K20 C22S-DH-W-K20 1
— 1NO/1NC C22-DH-W-K11 C22S-DH-W-K11
X1 1NO C22-DH-W-X1-K10 C22S-DH-W-X1-K10
1
X1 2NO C22-DH-W-X1-K20 C22S-DH-W-X1-K20
1
X1 1NO/1NC C22-DH-W-X1-K11 C22S-DH-W-X1-K11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-139
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained

1
C22(S)-DRH-_ Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained
1 Button Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel
Color Etching Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Green — 1NO C22-DRH-G-K10 C22S-DRH-G-K10
— 2NO C22-DRH-G-K20 C22S-DRH-G-K20
1 — 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-G-K11 C22S-DRH-G-K11

1 X1 1NO C22-DRH-G-X1-K10 C22S-DRH-G-X1-K10

X1 2NO C22-DRH-G-X1-K20 C22S-DRH-G-X1-K20
1 X1 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-G-X1-K11 C22S-DRH-G-X1-K11
Red — 1NC C22-DRH-R-K01 C22S-DRH-R-K01
1 — 2NC C22-DRH-R-K02 C22S-DRH-R-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-R-K11 C22S-DRH-R-K11
1 X0 1NC C22-DRH-R-X0-K01 C22S-DRH-R-X0-K01

1 X0 2NC C22-DRH-R-X0-K02 C22S-DRH-R-X0-K02

X0 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-R-X0-K11 C22S-DRH-R-X0-K11
1 Black — 1NC C22-DRH-S-K01 C22S-DRH-S-K01
— 2NC C22-DRH-S-K02 C22S-DRH-S-K02
1 — 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-S-K11 C22S-DRH-S-K11
X0 1NC
1 C22-DRH-S-X0-K01 C22S-DRH-S-X0-K01
X0 2NC C22-DRH-S-X0-K02 C22S-DRH-S-X0-K02
1 X0 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-S-X0-K11 C22S-DRH-S-X0-K11
White — 1NO C22-DRH-W-K10 C22S-DRH-W-K10
1 — 2NO C22-DRH-W-K20 C22S-DRH-W-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-W-K11 C22S-DRH-W-K11
1 X1 1NO C22-DRH-W-X1-K10 C22S-DRH-W-X1-K10

1 X1 2NO C22-DRH-W-X1-K20 C22S-DRH-W-X1-K20

X1 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-W-X1-K11 C22S-DRH-W-X1-K11
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-140 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons 1
C22 - DL - G - X1 - K10 - 24 - P1
1
Bezel Operator Type LED/Lens Color Lens Etching LED Voltage Connector Type 1
C22 = Silver DL = Illuminated, flush, momentary G = Green X0 = 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc P1 = 0.2 m M12, 4-pole
C22S = Black DRL =
DLH =
Illuminated, flush, maintained
Illuminated, extended, momentary
R = Red
W = White
X1 = 120 = 120 Vac
230 = 230 Vac
P3 = 0.5 m M12, 4-pole
P5 = 1.0 m M12, 4-pole
1
DRLH = Illuminated, extended, maintained B = Blue P30 = 0.2 m M8, 4-pole
XG = Green without lens
Contact Blocks
P31 = 0.5 m M8, 4-pole 1
XR = Red without lens P32 = 1.0 m M8, 4-pole
XW = White without lens K10 = 1NO P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
XB = Blue without lens K01 = 1NC P65 = 3.5 m flying lead 1
1
Product Selection
Illuminated, Flush, Momentary 1
C22(S)-DL-_ Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary 1
Button Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel
LED Color Color Voltage Etching Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-G-K10-24 C22S-DL-G-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-G-K10-120 C22S-DL-G-K10-120 1
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-G-K10-230 C22S-DL-G-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DL-G-X1-K10-24 C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-24
1
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-G-X1-K10-120 C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-120 1
230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-G-X1-K10-230 C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-XG-K10-24 C22S-DL-XG-K10-24 1
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XG-K10-120 C22S-DL-XG-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XG-K10-230 C22S-DL-XG-K10-230
1
Red Red 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DL-R-K01-24 C22S-DL-R-K01-24
1
120 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-R-K01-120 C22S-DL-R-K01-120
230 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-R-K01-230 C22S-DL-R-K01-230 1
24 Vac/Vdc X0 1NC C22-DL-R-X0-K01-24 C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-24
120 Vac X0 1NC C22-DL-R-X0-K01-120 C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-120 1
230 Vac X0 1NC C22-DL-R-X0-K01-230 C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DL-XR-K01-24 C22S-DL-XR-K01-24
1
120 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-XR-K01-120 C22S-DL-XR-K01-120
1
230 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-XR-K01-230 C22S-DL-XR-K01-230
White White 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-W-K10-24 C22S-DL-W-K10-24 1
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-W-K10-120 C22S-DL-W-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-W-K10-230 C22S-DL-W-K10-230 1
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DL-W-X1-K10-24 C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-24
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-W-X1-K10-120 C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-120
1
230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-W-X1-K10-230 C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-230 1
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-XW-K10-24 C22S-DL-XW-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XW-K10-120 C22S-DL-XW-K10-120 1
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XW-K10-230 C22S-DL-XW-K10-230
Blue Blue 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-B-K10-24 C22S-DL-B-K10-24
1
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-B-K10-120 C22S-DL-B-K10-120
1
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-B-K10-230 C22S-DL-B-K10-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-XB-K10-24 C22S-DL-XB-K10-24 1
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XB-K10-120 C22S-DL-XB-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XB-K10-230 C22S-DL-XB-K10-230 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-141
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary, with Pigtail

1
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary, with Pigtail
1 C22-DL-_
Button Connector Connector Silver Bezel
Color Contacts Length Type Catalog Number
1 Green 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-DL-G-K10-24-P30
1NO 0.2 M12 C22-DL-G-K10-24-P1
1 1NO 0.5 M8 C22-DL-G-K10-24-P31
1NO 0.5 M12
1 1NO 1 M8
C22-DL-G-K10-24-P3
C22-DL-G-K10-24-P32

1 1NO 1 M12 C22-DL-G-K10-24-P5

1NO 1 Flying lead C22-DL-G-K10-24-P62
1 1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-DL-G-K10-24-P65
Red 1NC 0.2 M8 C22-DL-R-K01-24-P30
1 1NC 0.2 M12 C22-DL-R-K01-24-P1
1NC 0.5 M8 C22-DL-R-K01-24-P31
1 1NC 0.5 M12 C22-DL-R-K01-24-P3
1NC 1 M8 C22-DL-R-K01-24-P32
1 1NC 1 M12 C22-DL-R-K01-24-P5
1NC 1 Flying lead C22-DL-R-K01-24-P62
1 1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-DL-R-K01-24-P65
Blue 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-DL-B-K10-24-P30
1 1NO 0.2 M12 C22-DL-B-K10-24-P1

1 1NO 0.5 M8 C22-DL-B-K10-24-P31

1NO 0.5 M12 C22-DL-B-K10-24-P3
1 1NO 1 M8 C22-DL-B-K10-24-P32
1NO 1 M12 C22-DL-B-K10-24-P5
1 1NO 1 Flying lead C22-DL-B-K10-24-P62
1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-DL-B-K10-24-P65
1 White 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-DL-W-K10-24-P30
1NO 0.2 M12 C22-DL-W-K10-24-P1
1 1NO 0.5 M8 C22-DL-W-K10-24-P31
1NO 0.5 M12 C22-DL-W-K10-24-P3
1 1NO 1 M8 C22-DL-W-K10-24-P32
1NO 1 M12 C22-DL-W-K10-24-P5
1 1NO 1 Flying lead C22-DL-W-K10-24-P62

1 1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-DL-W-K10-24-P65

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-142 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
1
C22(S)-DRL-_ Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel 1
LED Color Color Voltage Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number
Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-G-K10-24 C22S-DRL-G-K10-24 1
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-G-K10-120 C22S-DRL-G-K10-120
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-G-K10-230 C22S-DRL-G-K10-230
1
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-XG-K10-24 C22S-DRL-XG-K10-24
1
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XG-K10-120 C22S-DRL-XG-K10-120
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XG-K10-230 C22S-DRL-XG-K10-230 1
Red Red 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC C22-DRL-R-K01-24 C22S-DRL-R-K01-24
120 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-R-K01-120 C22S-DRL-R-K01-120 1
230 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-R-K01-230 C22S-DRL-R-K01-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC C22-DRL-XR-K01-24 C22S-DRL-XR-K01-24
1
120 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-XR-K01-120 C22S-DRL-XR-K01-120 1
230 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-XR-K01-230 C22S-DRL-XR-K01-230
White White 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-W-K10-24 C22S-DRL-W-K10-24 1
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-W-K10-120 C22S-DRL-W-K10-120
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-W-K10-230 C22S-DRL-W-K10-230
1
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-XW-K10-24 C22S-DRL-XW-K10-24
1
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XW-K10-120 C22S-DRL-XW-K10-120
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XW-K10-230 C22S-DRL-XW-K10-230 1
Blue Blue 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-B-K10-24 C22S-DRL-B-K10-24
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-B-K10-120 C22S-DRL-B-K10-120 1
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-B-K10-230 C22S-DRL-B-K10-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-XB-K10-24 C22S-DRL-XB-K10-24
1
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XB-K10-120 C22S-DRL-XB-K10-120
1
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XB-K10-230 C22S-DRL-XB-K10-230
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-143
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained, with Pigtail

1
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained, with Pigtail
1 C22_DRL-G-_
Button Connector Connector Silver Bezel
Color Contacts Length Type Catalog Number
1 Green 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P30
1NO 0.2 M12 C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P1
1 1NO 0.5 M8 C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P31
1NO 0.5 M12
1 1NO 1 M8
C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P3
C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P32

1 1NO 1 M12 C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P5

1NO 1 Flying lead C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P62
1 1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-DRL-G-K10-24-P65
Red 1NC 0.2 M8 C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P30
1 1NC 0.2 M12 C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P1
1NC 0.5 M8 C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P31
1 1NC 0.5 M12 C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P3
1NC 1 M8 C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P32
1 1NC 1 M12 C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P5
1NC 1 Flying lead C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P62
1 1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-DRL-R-K01-24-P65
Blue 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P30
1 1NO 0.2 M12 C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P1

1 1NO 0.5 M8 C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P31

1NO 0.5 M12 C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P3
1 1NO 1 M8 C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P32
1NO 1 M12 C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P5
1 1NO 1 Flying lead C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P62
1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-DRL-B-K10-24-P65
1 White 1NO 0.2 M8 C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P30
1NO 0.2 M12 C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P1
1 1NO 0.5 M8 C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P31
1NO 0.5 M12 C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P3
1 1NO 1 M8 C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P32
1NO 1 M12 C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P5
1 1NO 1 Flying lead C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P62

1 1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-DRL-W-K10-24-P65

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-144 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
1
C22(S)-DLH-_ Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Button Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel 1
LED Color Color Voltage Etching Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number
Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DLH-G-K10-24 C22S-DLH-G-K10-24 1
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-G-K10-120 C22S-DLH-G-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-G-K10-230 C22S-DLH-G-K10-230
1
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-24 C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-24
1
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-120 C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-12
230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-230 C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-23 1
Red Red 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DLH-R-K01-24 C22S-DLH-R-K01-24
120 Vac — 1NC C22-DLH-R-K01-120 C22S-DLH-R-K01-120 1
230 Vac — 1NC C22-DLH-R-K01-230 C22S-DLH-R-K01-230
24 Vac/Vdc X0 1NC C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-24 C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-24
1
120 Vac X0 1NC C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-120 C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-12 1
230 Vac X0 1NC C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-230 C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-23
White White 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DLH-W-K10-24 C22S-DLH-W-K10-24 1
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-W-K10-120 C22S-DLH-W-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-W-K10-230 C22S-DLH-W-K10-230
1
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-24 C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-24
1
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-120 C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-12
230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-230 C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-23 1
Blue Blue 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DLH-B-K10-24 C22S-DLH-B-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-B-K10-120 C22S-DLH-B-K10-120 1
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-B-K10-230 C22S-DLH-B-K10-230
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-145
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained

1
C22(S)-DRLH-_ Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush Extended, Maintained
1 Button Button Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel
LED Color Color Voltage Etching Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DRLH-G-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-G-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-G-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-G-K10-120
1 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-G-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-G-K10-230

1 24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-24

120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-120
1 230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-230
Red Red 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DRLH-R-K01-24 C22S-DRLH-R-K01-24
1 120 Vac — 1NC C22-DRLH-R-K01-120 C22S-DRLH-R-K01-120
230 Vac — 1NC C22-DRLH-R-K01-230 C22S-DRLH-R-K01-230
1 24 Vac/Vdc X0 1NC C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-24 C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-24

1 120 Vac X0 1NC C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-120 C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-120

230 Vac X0 1NC C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-230 C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-230
1 White White 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DRLH-W-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-W-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-W-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-W-K10-120
1 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-W-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-W-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO
1 C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-24
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-120
1 230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-230
Blue Blue 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DRLH-B-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-B-K10-24
1 120 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-B-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-B-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-B-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-B-K10-230
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
1 switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-146 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Indicating Lights Contents
Description Page
1
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and 1
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-134
Indicating Lights 1
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-148
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-148 1
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-150
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-153 1
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-160
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-162 1
1
1
1
1
Indicating Lights 1
Product Description Features 1
C22 indicating lights use a ● LED offering only for Protection Type
combination of a durable, improved brightness ● IP67/IP69K 1
bright LED unit and modern quality and up to 100,000 ● NEMA 4X, 13
lenses designed specifically hours of operation
for this type of LED to create
● IP65 rear rating with pigtail 1
● Lenses specifically
a bright and visible indicating designed for LED
light. As with the illumination
1
pushbuttons, the indicating ● Lenses capable of being
light lenses can be laser laser etched for custom 1
etched, simply order without solutions that last
lens and order M22/C22
custom etched lenses
● Units with pigtail allow for 1
to attach. direct machine mounting
with high degree of 1
Indicating lights with pigtail protection backside
have options for M12, M8, 1
or flying lead connectors,
providing high degree of
protection options.
1
Note: For additional accessories,
please see Pages V7-T1-105 to
1
V7-T1-111, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-147
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Catalog Number Selection

1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1 Indicating Lights

1 C22 - L - G - 24 - P1

1
Bezel LED/Lens Color LED Voltage Connector Type
1 C22-L = Flush indicating light G= Green 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc P1 = 0.2 m M12, 4-pole
R= Red 120 = 120 Vac P3 = 0.5 m M12, 4-pole
W= White 230 = 230 Vac P5 = 1.0 m M12, 4-pole
1 Y= Yellow P30 = 0.2 m M8, 4-pole
B= Blue P31 = 0.5 m M8, 4-pole
1 XG =
XR =
Green without lens
Red without lens
P32 = 1.0 m M8, 4-pole
P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
XW = White without lens 1 P65 = 3.5 m flying lead
1 XB = Blue without lens

1
Product Selection
1 Indicating Lights
1 C22-L-_ Indicating Lights
Lens Color LED Color Voltage Catalog Number
1 Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-G-24

1 120 Vac C22-L-G-120

230 Vac C22-L-G-230
1 Red Red 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-R-24
120 Vac C22-L-R-120
1 230 Vac C22-L-R-230
White White 24 Vac/Vdc
1 C22-L-W-24
120 Vac C22-L-W-120
1 230 Vac C22-L-W-230
Yellow White 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-Y-24
1 120 Vac C22-L-Y-120
230 Vac C22-L-Y-230
1 Blue Blue 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-B-24

1 120 Vac C22-L-B-120

230 Vac C22-L-B-230
1 Without Lens Green 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XG-24
120 Vac C22-L-XG-120
1 230 Vac C22-L-XG-230
Red 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XR-24
1 120 Vac C22-L-XR-120

1 230 Vac C22-L-XR-230

White 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XW-24
1 120 Vac C22-L-XW-120
230 Vac C22-L-XW-230
1 Blue 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XB-24
120 Vac
1 C22-L-XB-120
230 Vac C22-L-XB-230
1 Note
1 Use white LED for both white and yellow lenses.

1
1

V7-T1-148 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
C22 with Pigtail LED Options
1
C22 with Pigtail LED Options
C22_L-_
24 Vac/Vdc only indicating lights. 1
Connector 0.2 m 0.5 m 1.0 m 3.5 m
Color Type Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Green M8 C22-L-G-24-P30 C22-L-G-24-P31 C22-L-G-24-P32 —
M12 C22-L-G-24-P1 C22-L-G-24-P3 C22-L-G-24-P5 —
1
Flying lead — — C22-L-G-24-P62 C22-L-G-24-P65
Red M8 C22-L-R-24-P30 C22-L-R-24-P31 C22-L-R-24-P32 —
1
M12 C22-L-R-24-P1 C22-L-R-24-P3 C22-L-R-24-P5 —
1
Flying lead — — C22-L-R-24-P62 C22-L-R-24-P65
White M8 C22-L-W-24-P30 C22-L-W-24-P31 C22-L-W-24-P32 — 1
M12 C22-L-W-24-P1 C22-L-W-24-P3 C22-L-W-24-P5 —
Flying lead — — C22-L-W-24-P62 C22-L-W-24-P65 1
Yellow M8 C22-L-Y-24-P30 C22-L-Y-24-P31 C22-L-Y-24-P32 —
M12 C22-L-Y-24-P1 C22-L-Y-24-P3 C22-L-Y-24-P5 — 1
Flying lead — — C22-L-Y-24-P62 C22-L-Y-24-P65
Blue M8 C22-L-B-24-P30 C22-L-B-24-P31 C22-L-B-24-P32 — 1
M12 C22-L-B-24-P1 C22-L-B-24-P3 C22-L-B-24-P5 —
Flying lead — — C22-L-B-24-P62 C22-L-B-24-P65
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-149
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Emergency Stops Contents

1 Description Page
1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-134
1 Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-147
Emergency Stops
1 Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-151
Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-151
1 Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-153
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-160
1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-162

1
1
1
1
1 Emergency Stops
1 Product Description Features
C22 emergency stops are a ● Available in push-pull, Protection Type
1 durable and reliable solution twist-release, twist-release ● Twist-Release
to a variety of e-stop with indicator, and key ● IP67/IP69K
applications. This compact release 38 mm through
1 e-stop, available as twist-to- 60 mm operators ● Keyed-Release
release and keyed-release, ● Available with M12 or flying IP66
1 is a simple product that lead pigtails, allowing direct
●

eliminates the need for self- machine mounting and

● NEMA 4X, 13
1 monitoring contact blocks, easy reliable connections ● With pigtail
all while still meeting almost ● Meet functional safety ● IP65 rear rating
1 all of the industry safety
standards.
requirements for E-stops

1 E-stops with pigtails allow

for direct machine mounting,
1 eliminating the need for an
enclosure with high degree
of rear protection. Flying
1 leads also allow for quick
termination to nearby
1 controls or functional
safety devices.
1 Note: For additional accessories,
please see Pages V7-T1-105 to
1 V7-T1-111, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-150 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Emergency Stops 1
C22 - PVS45P - MS1 - K01 - P10
1
1
Operator Type Key Code Contact Blocks Connector Type
PVT45P = Twist-release, 45 mm
PVT60P = Twist-release, 60 mm
MS1 =
MS2 =
MS1
MS2
K02 = 2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC
P10 = 0.2 m M12, 5-pole
P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
1
PVS45P = Key-release, 45 mm MS3 = MS3 P65 = 3.5 m flying lead
PVS60P = Key-release, 60 mm MS4 =
MS5 =
MS4
MS5
1
MS6 = MS6
MS7 = MS7 1
MS8 = MS8
RS = Ronis-445
1
Product Selection 1
Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release
1
C22-PVT_ Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Twist-Release
Contact Block 1
Release Method Operator Size Configuration Catalog Number
Twist-release 45 mm 2NC C22-PVT45P-K02 1
1NO/1NC C22-PVT45P-K11
60 mm 2NC C22-PVT60P-K02
1
1NO/1NC C22-PVT60P-K11
1
Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release
1
C22-PVS_ Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Keyed-Release 1
Contact Block
Release Method Operator Size Key Code Configuration Catalog Number 1
Keyed-release 45 mm MS1 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS1-K11
1
MS2 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS2-K02 1
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS2-K11
MS3 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS3-K02 1
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS3-K11
MS4 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS4-K02
1
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS4-K11
1
MS5 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS5-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS5-K11 1
MS6 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS6-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS6-K11 1
MS7 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS7-K11
1
MS8 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS8-K02
1
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS8-K11
Ronis 2NC C22-PVS45P-RS-K02 1
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-RS-K11

Note: = Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-151
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

C22-PVS_ Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Keyed-Release, continued

1 Contact Block
Release Method Operator Size Key Code Configuration Catalog Number
1 Keyed-release 60 mm MS1 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC
1 C22-PVS60P-MS1-K11
MS2 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS2-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS2-K11
MS3 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS3-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS3-K11
MS4 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS4-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS4-K11

1 MS5 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS5-K02

1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS5-K11
1 MS6 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS6-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS6-K11
1 MS7 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS7-K11
1 MS8 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS8-K02

1 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS8-K11
Ronis 2NC C22-PVS60P-RS-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-RS-K11

1
E-stop
1
E-stop
1 Release Method Operator Size Contacts Connector Length Connector Type Catalog Number
C22-PV-K11-P62 Push-pull 38 mm 2NC 1 Flying lead C22-PV-K02-P62
1 38 mm 2NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-PV-K02-P65
38 mm 1NO/1NC 1 Flying lead C22-PV-K11-P62
1 38 mm 1NO/1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-PV-K11-P65
45 mm 2NC 0.2 M12, 5-pole C22-PV-K02-P10
1 C22-PVT-K02-P65 Twist release 38 mm 2NC 1 Flying lead C22-PVT-K02-P62
38 mm 2NC 3.5 Flying lead
1 C22-PVT-K02-P65
38 mm 1NO/1NC 1 Flying lead C22-PVT-K11-P62

1 38 mm 1NO/1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-PVT-K11-P65

45 mm 2NC 1 Flying lead C22-PVT45P-K02-P62
1 45 mm 2NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-PVT45P-K02-P65
45 mm 1NO/1NC 1 Flying lead C22-PVT45P-K11-P62
1 45 mm 1NO/1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-PVT45P-K11-P65
45 mm 2NC 0.2 M12, 5-pole C22-PVT45P-K02-P10
1 C22-PVT45PMPIK Twist release 45 mm 2NC 1 Flying lead C22-PVT45PMPIK02-P62
02-P65 mechanical indication
45 mm 2NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-PVT45PMPIK02-P65
1 45 mm 1NO/1NC 1 Flying lead C22-PVT45PMPIK11-P62
45 mm 1NO/1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-PVT45PMPIK11-P65
1
Note: = Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-152 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Selector Switches Contents
Description Page
1
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and 1
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-134
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-147 1
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-150
Selector Switches 1
Non-Illuminated, Knob Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-154
Non-Illuminated, Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-156 1
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-160
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-162 1
1
1
1
1
Selector Switches 1
Product Description Features 1
With over 20 variations of ● Selector switch (non- Protection Type
operation and 8 varieties of keyed) rated for 1 million ● IP65 1
key codes, the C22 line offers mechanical operations ● NEMA 4X, 13
a very complete line of
selector switches.
● Rear pigtails provide IP65 1
front and rear ratings,
eliminating enclosure
Pigtail units come in M12, M8
requirements and reducing
1
or flying lead options.
installation times
Note: For additional accessories, 1
please see Pages V7-T1-105 to
V7-T1-111, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-153
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Catalog Number Selection

1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1 Selector Switches—Non-Keyed

1 C22 - WK - K10 - P1

1 Bezel Operator Type Contact Blocks Connector Type

C22 = Silver WK = 2-position, momentary K10 = 1NO P1 = 0.2 m M12, 4-pole
1 C22S = Black WKV = 2-position, momentary, “V” position K20 = 2NO P3 = 0.5 m M12, 4-pole
WRK = 2-position, maintained K01 = 1NC P5 = 1.0 m M12, 4-pole
WRKV = 2-position, maintained, “V” position K02 = 2NC P30 = 0.2 m M8, 4-pole
1 WK3 = 3-position, momentary K11 = 1NO/1NC P31 = 0.5 m M8, 4-pole
WRK3 = 3-position, maintained P32 = 1.0 m M8, 4-pole
1 P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
P65 = 3.5 m flying lead

1
Product Selection
1 Non-Illuminated, Knob Type
1 C22(S)-WK-_/ Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Knob Type
C22(S)-WRK_ Switching Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel
1 Type Position Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 1NO C22-WK-K10 C22S-WK-K10
1 40° 2NO C22-WK-K20 C22S-WK-K20
1NC C22-WK-K01 C22S-WK-K01
1 2NC C22-WK-K02 C22S-WK-K02

1 1NO/1NC C22-WK-K11 C22S-WK-K11

Momentary 1NO C22-WKV-K10 C22S-WKV-K10
1 60° 2NO C22-WKV-K20 C22S-WKV-K20
1NC C22-WKV-K01 C22S-WKV-K01
1 2NC C22-WKV-K02 C22S-WKV-K02
1NO/1NC
1 C22-WKV-K11 C22S-WKV-K11
Maintained 1NO C22-WRK-K10 C22S-WRK-K10
1 40° 2NO C22-WRK-K20 C22S-WRK-K20
1NC C22-WRK-K01 C22S-WRK-K01
1 2NC C22-WRK-K02 C22S-WRK-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRK-K11 C22S-WRK-K11
1 Maintained 1NO C22-WRKV-K10 C22S-WRKV-K10
60°
1 2NO C22-WRKV-K20 C22S-WRKV-K20
1NC C22-WRKV-K01 C22S-WRKV-K01
1 2NC C22-WRKV-K02 C22S-WRKV-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRKV-K11 C22S-WRKV-K11
1 Three-position Momentary 2NO C22-WK3-K20 C22S-WK3-K20
40° 40° 2NC C22-WK3-K02 C22S-WK3-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-WK3-K11 C22S-WK3-K11

1 Maintained 2NO C22-WRK3-K20 C22S-WRK3-K20

60° 60° 2NC C22-WRK3-K02 C22S-WRK3-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-WRK3-K11 C22S-WRK3-K11

Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-154 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Knob Type, with Pigtail
1
C22-W_ Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Knob Type, with Pigtail
Switching Connector Silver Bezel 1
Type Position Contacts Length Connector Type Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 1NC 1 Flying lead C22-WK-K01-P62 1
1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-WK-K01-P65
1NO 0.5 M8 C22-WK-K10-P30 1
1NO 0.5 M12 C22-WK-K10-P1
1NO 1 M8 C22-WK-K10-P32
1
1NO 1 M12 C22-WK-K10-P5
1NO 1 Flying lead C22-WK-K10-P62
1
1NO 3.5 Flying lead
1NO/1NC 1 Flying lead
C22-WK-K10-P65
C22-WK-K11-P62
1
1NO/1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-WK-K11-P65 1
2NC 1 Flying lead C22-WK-K02-P62
2NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-WK-K02-P65 1
2NO 1 Flying lead C22-WK-K20-P62
2NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-WK-K20-P65 1
Maintained 1NC 1 Flying lead C22-WRK-K01-P62
1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-WRK-K01-P65 1
1NO 0.5 M8 C22-WRK-K10-P30
1NO 0.5 M12 C22-WRK-K10-P1 1
1NO 1 M8 C22-WRK-K10-P32
1NO 1 M12 C22-WRK-K10-P5
1
1NO 1 Flying lead C22-WRK-K10-P62
1NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-WRK-K10-P65
1
1NO/1NC 1 Flying lead C22-WRK-K11-P62
1
1NO/1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-WRK-K11-P65
2NC 1 Flying lead C22-WRK-K02-P62 1
2NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-WRK-K02-P65
2NO 1 Flying lead C22-WRK-K20-P62 1
2NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-WRK-K20-P65
Three-position Momentary 1NO/1NC 1 Flying lead C22-WK3-K11-P62 1
1NO/1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-WK3-K11-P65
2NC 1 Flying lead C22-WK3-K02-P62 1
2NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-WK3-K02-P65
2NO 1 Flying lead C22-WK3-K20-P62
1
2NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-WK3-K20-P65
Maintained 1NO/1NC 1 Flying lead C22-WRK3-K11-P62
1
1NO/1NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-WRK3-K11-P65
1
2NC 1 Flying lead C22-WRK3-K02-P62
2NC 3.5 Flying lead C22-WRK3-K02-P65 1
2NO 1 Flying lead C22-WRK3-K20-P62
2NO 3.5 Flying lead C22-WRK3-K20-P65 1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-155
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Catalog Number Selection

1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1 Selector Switches—Keyed

1 C22 - WS - MS1 - A1 - K10 - P1

1

1 Bezel Operator Type Key Code Contact Blocks Connector Type

C22 = Silver WS = 2-position, momentary MS1 = MS1 K10 = 1NO P1 = 0.2 m M12, 4-pole
1 C22S = Black WRS = 2-position, maintained MS2 = MS2 K20 = 2NO P3 = 0.5 m M12, 4-pole
WRS-…-A1 = 2-position, maintained, MS3 = MS3 K01 = 1NC P5 = 1.0 m M12, 4-pole
1
key removal left MS4 = MS4 K02 = 2NC P30 = 0.2 m M8, 4-pole
1 WS3 = 3-position, momentary MS5 = MS5 K11 = 1NO/1NC P31 = 0.5 m M8, 4-pole
WRS3 = 3-position, maintained MS6 = MS6 P32 = 1.0 m M8, 4-pole
1 MS7 = MS7
MS8 = MS8
P62 = 1.0 m flying lead
P65 = 3.5 m flying lead

1
Non-Illuminated, Key Operated
1
C22(S)-WS-MS_ Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated
1 Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel
Position Type Key Code Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number

1 Two-position Momentary MS1 1NO C22-WS-MS1-K10 C22S-WS-MS1-K10

key removal left
2NO C22-WS-MS1-K20 C22S-WS-MS1-K20
1 40°
1NC C22-WS-MS1-K01 C22S-WS-MS1-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS1-K02 C22S-WS-MS1-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS1-K11 C22S-WS-MS1-K11

1 MS2 1NO C22-WS-MS2-K10 C22S-WS-MS2-K10

2NO C22-WS-MS2-K20 C22S-WS-MS2-K20
1 1NC C22-WS-MS2-K01 C22S-WS-MS2-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS2-K02 C22S-WS-MS2-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS2-K11 C22S-WS-MS2-K11
MS3 1NO C22-WS-MS3-K10 C22S-WS-MS3-K10
1 2NO C22-WS-MS3-K20 C22S-WS-MS3-K20

1 1NC C22-WS-MS3-K01 C22S-WS-MS3-K01

2NC C22-WS-MS3-K02 C22S-WS-MS3-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS3-K11 C22S-WS-MS3-K11
MS4 1NO C22-WS-MS4-K10 C22S-WS-MS4-K10
1 2NO C22-WS-MS4-K20 C22S-WS-MS4-K20
1NC
1 C22-WS-MS4-K01 C22S-WS-MS4-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS4-K02 C22S-WS-MS4-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS4-K11 C22S-WS-MS4-K11
MS5 1NO C22-WS-MS5-K10 C22S-WS-MS5-K10
1 2NO C22-WS-MS5-K20 C22S-WS-MS5-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS5-K01 C22S-WS-MS5-K01
1 2NC C22-WS-MS5-K02 C22S-WS-MS5-K02

1 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS5-K11 C22S-WS-MS5-K11

Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.

1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-156 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
C22(S)-WRS-MS_ Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, continued
Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel
1
Position Type Key Code Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number
Two-position, Momentary MS6 1NO C22-WS-MS6-K10 C22S-WS-MS6-K10
1
continued key removal left
2NO
40°
C22-WS-MS6-K20 C22S-WS-MS6-K20
1
1NC C22-WS-MS6-K01 C22S-WS-MS6-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS6-K02 C22S-WS-MS6-K02 1
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS6-K11 C22S-WS-MS6-K11
MS7 1NO C22-WS-MS7-K10 C22S-WS-MS7-K10 1
2NO C22-WS-MS7-K20 C22S-WS-MS7-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS7-K01 C22S-WS-MS7-K01
1
2NC C22-WS-MS7-K02 C22S-WS-MS7-K02
1
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS7-K11 C22S-WS-MS7-K11
MS8 1NO C22-WS-MS8-K10 C22S-WS-MS8-K10 1
2NO C22-WS-MS8-K20 C22S-WS-MS8-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS8-K01 C22S-WS-MS8-K01 1
2NC C22-WS-MS8-K02 C22S-WS-MS8-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS8-K11 C22S-WS-MS8-K11
1
Two-position Maintained
key removal left/right
MS1 1NO C22-WRS-MS1-K10 C22S-WRS-MS1-K10 1
2NO C22-WRS-MS1-K20 C22S-WRS-MS1-K20
40°
1NC C22-WRS-MS1-K01 C22S-WRS-MS1-K01 1
2NC C22-WRS-MS1-K02 C22S-WRS-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS1-K11 C22S-WRS-MS1-K11
1
MS2 1NO C22-WRS-MS2-K10 C22S-WRS-MS2-K10
1
2NO C22-WRS-MS2-K20 C22S-WRS-MS2-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS2-K01 C22S-WRS-MS2-K01 1
2NC C22-WRS-MS2-K02 C22S-WRS-MS2-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS2-K11 C22S-WRS-MS2-K11 1
MS3 1NO C22-WRS-MS3-K10 C22S-WRS-MS3-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS3-K20 C22S-WRS-MS3-K20
1
1NC C22-WRS-MS3-K01 C22S-WRS-MS3-K01
1
2NC C22-WRS-MS3-K02 C22S-WRS-MS3-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS3-K11 C22S-WRS-MS3-K11 1
Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-157
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

C22(S)-WRS…-MS1_ Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, continued

1 Contact Block Silver Bezel Black Bezel
Position Type Key Code Configuration Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Two-position, Maintained MS4 1NO C22-WRS-MS4-K10 C22S-WRS-MS4-K10
continued key removal left/right
2NO
1 40°
C22-WRS-MS4-K20 C22S-WRS-MS4-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS4-K01 C22S-WRS-MS4-K01
1 2NC C22-WRS-MS4-K02 C22S-WRS-MS4-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS4-K11 C22S-WRS-MS4-K11
1 MS5 1NO C22-WRS-MS5-K10 C22S-WRS-MS5-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS5-K20 C22S-WRS-MS5-K20
1 1NC C22-WRS-MS5-K01 C22S-WRS-MS5-K01

1 2NC C22-WRS-MS5-K02 C22S-WRS-MS5-K02

1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS5-K11 C22S-WRS-MS5-K11
1 MS6 1NO C22-WRS-MS6-K10 C22S-WRS-MS6-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS6-K20 C22S-WRS-MS6-K20
1 1NC C22-WRS-MS6-K01 C22S-WRS-MS6-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS6-K02 C22S-WRS-MS6-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS6-K11 C22S-WRS-MS6-K11

1 MS7 1NO C22-WRS-MS7-K10 C22S-WRS-MS7-K10

2NO C22-WRS-MS7-K20 C22S-WRS-MS7-K20
1 1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K01 C22S-WRS-MS7-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS7-K02 C22S-WRS-MS7-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K11 C22S-WRS-MS7-K11
MS8 1NO
1 C22-WRS-MS7-K10 C22S-WRS-MS7-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS7-K20 C22S-WRS-MS7-K20
1 1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K01 C22S-WRS-MS7-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS7-K02 C22S-WRS-MS7-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K11 C22S-WRS-MS7-K11
Two-position Maintained MS1 1NO C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K10 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K10
1 key removal left
2NO C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K20 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K20
40°
1 1NC C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K01 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K02 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K02
1 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K11 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K11
Three Position Momentary MS1 2NO C22-WS3-MS1-K20 C22S-WS3-MS1-K20
1 Key Removal Center
2NC C22-WS3-MS1-K02 C22S-WS3-MS1-K02
40° 40°
1NO/1NC C22-WS3-MS1-K11 C22S-WS3-MS1-K11
1
Maintained MS1 2NO C22-WRS3-MS1-K20 C22S-WRS3-MS1-K20
1 Key Removal Left/Right
2NC C22-WRS3-MS1-K02 C22S-WRS3-MS1-K02
60° 60°
1NO/1NC
1 C22-WRS3-MS1-K11 C22S-WRS3-MS1-K11

1 Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.

1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-158 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, with Pigtail
1
C22-W_ Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, with Pigtail
Switching Connector Silver Bezel 1
Position Position Contacts Length Connector Type Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 1NC 1m Flying lead C22-WS-MS1-K01-P62 1
40° 1NC 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WS-MS1-K01-P65
1NO 0.2 m M12 C22-WS-MS1-K10-P1 1
1NO 0.2 m M8 C22-WS-MS1-K10-P30
1NO 1m M12 C22-WS-MS1-K10-P5
1
1NO 1m M8 C22-WS-MS1-K10-P32
1NO 1m Flying lead C22-WS-MS1-K10-P62
1
1NO 3.5 m Flying lead
1NO/1NC 1m Flying lead
C22-WS-MS1-K10-P65
C22-WS-MS1-K11-P62
1
1NO/1NC 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WS-MS1-K11-P65 1
2NC 1m Flying lead C22-WS-MS1-K02-P62
2NC 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WS-MS1-K02-P65 1
2NO 1m Flying lead C22-WS-MS1-K20-P62
2NO 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WS-MS1-K20-P65 1
Maintained 1NC 1m Flying lead C22-WRS-MS1-K01-P62
60° 1NC 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WRS-MS1-K01-P65 1
1NO 0.2 m M12 C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P1
1NO 0.2 m M8 C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P30 1
1NO 1m M12 C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P5
1NO 1m M8 C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P32
1
1NO 1m Flying lead C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P62
1NO 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WRS-MS1-K10-P65
1
1NO/1NC 1m Flying lead C22-WRS-MS1-K11-P62
1
1NO/1NC 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WRS-MS1-K11-P65
2NC 1m Flying lead C22-WRS-MS1-K02-P62 1
2NC 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WRS-MS1-K02-P65
2NO 1m Flying lead C22-WRS-MS1-K20-P62 1
2NO 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WRS-MS1-K20-P65
Three-position Momentary 1NO/1NC 1m Flying lead C22-WS3-MS1-K11-P62 1
40° 40° 1NO/1NC 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WS3-MS1-K11-P65
2NC 1m Flying lead C22-WS3-MS1-K02-P62 1
2NC 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WS3-MS1-K02-P65
2NO 1m Flying lead C22-WS3-MS1-K20-P62
1
2NO 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WS3-MS1-K20-P65
Maintained 1NO/1NC 1m Flying lead C22-WRS3-MS1-K11-P62
1
60° 60° 1NO/1NC 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WRS3-MS1-K11-P65
1
2NC 1m Flying lead C22-WRS3-MS1-K02-P62
2NC 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WRS3-MS1-K02-P65 1
2NO 1m Flying lead C22-WRS3-MS1-K20-P62
2NO 3.5 m Flying lead C22-WRS3-MS1-K20-P65 1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-159
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Technical Data and Specifications

1
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1 Pushbutton Actuators Emergency Stop/
Illuminated Pushbuttons C22 Indicator Selector Switch Key-Operated Emergency Switching
1 Description Unit Momentary Maintained Lights C22 Actuators C22 Buttons C22 OFF Pushbuttons C22
General
1
Standards IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660

1 Lifespan, mechanical Operations x 106 5 1 — 1 0.1 0.05

Operating frequency Operations/h >3600 >3600 — >2000 >100 >300
1 Actuating force N >5 >5 — — — >50
Operating torque Nm — — — >0.3 >0.5 —
1 Terminal screw tightening torque Nm 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

1 Threaded ring tightening torque Nm 2 2 2 2 2 2

Protection type IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K IP65 IP66 IP67, IP69K
1 Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60068-2-30

1 Ambient temperature
Open °C –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70°
1 Storage °C –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80°
Mounting position As required As required As required As required As required As required
1 Mechanical shock resistance to g 30 30 30 30 30 30
IEC 60068-2-27 Shock duration
1 11 ms, half-sinusoidal
Terminal capacities
1 Solid mm2 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5
Flexible with ferrule mm2 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5
1 Contacts

1 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 250 250 250 250 250 250
1 Overvoltage category/pollution III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3
degree
1 Control circuit reliability
at 5 Vdc/1 mA HF Fault Values follow Values follow — Values follow Values follow Values follow
1 probability
at 17 Vdc/7 mA HF Fault N/O contact: statistically determined — N/O contact: statistically determined 1 failure per
1 probability 1 failure per 17 x 106 operations
N/C contact: statistically determined
17 x 106 operations
N/C contact: statistically determined 1 failure per
1 failure per 0.9 x 106 operations 0.9 x 106 operations
1 at 24 Vdc/5 mA HF Fault Values follow Values follow — Values follow Values follow Values follow
probability
1 Max. short-circuit protective device
Fuse gG/gL A 10 10 — 10 10 10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-160 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22, continued
Push-button Actuators Emergency Stop/
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons C22 Indicator Selector Switch Key-Operated Emergency Switching
Description Unit Momentary Maintained Lights C22 Actuators C22 Buttons C22 OFF Pushbuttons C22 1
Switching Capacity
Rated operational current
1
AC-15
1
24V Ie A 4 4 — 4 4 4
110V Ie A 2 2 — 2 2 2 1
230V Ie A 1.5 1.5 — 1.5 1.5 1.5
DC-13 1
24V Ie A 3 3 — 3 3 3
60V Ie A 1 1 — 1 1 1
1
110V Ie A 0.6 0.6 — 0.6 0.6 0.6 1
220V Ie A 0.3 0.3 — 0.3 0.3 0.3
Lifespan, electrical 1
AC-15
230V/0.5A Operations x 106 0.4 0.4 — 0.4 0.4 0.4
1
230V/1.0A x 106 0.6 0.6 — 0.6 0.6 0.6
1

Contact Travel
1
Contact Travel Diagram 1
3
1
4
0 3.15 5.5
1
1
1
2 0 2.2 5.5 1
Contact closed
1
Contact open

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-161
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Dimensions
1 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
1 Illuminated Pushbuttons

1 Flat Extended
C22(S)-DRL_/C22(S)-DL_ C22(S)-DRLH_/C22(S)-DLH_
1 9.6 9.6
6.0 [0.38] 6.0 [0.38]
1 1.0–6.0 [0.24] 1.0–6.0 [0.24]
[0.04–0.24] 4.0 [0.04–0.24] 4.0
1 [0.16] M22 x 1.5 [0.16] M22 x 1.5

1 Ø29.7 20.2 Ø29.5 Ø29.7 20.2 Ø29.5

[1.17] [0.80] [1.16] [1.17] [0.80] [1.16]
1
1 10.4 16.7
[0.41] 54.6 [2.15] [0.66] 60.9 [2.40]
1
Pushbutton Actuators
1
Flat Extended
1 C22(S)-DR_/C22(S)-D_ C22(S)-DRH_/C22(S)-DH_
1 9.6 9.6
6.0 [0.38] 6.0 [0.38]
1 1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
[0.24] 1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
[0.24]
4.0 4.0
[0.16] M22 x 1.5 [0.16] M22 x 1.5
1
1 Ø29.7
[1.17]
20.2
[0.80]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
20.2
[0.80]
Ø29.5
[1.16]

1
1 10.4
[0.41] 54.6 [2.15]
16.7
[0.66] 60.9 [2.40]

1
Indicating Lights
1 Flat
1 C22-L_
9.6
1 6.0 [0.38]
1.0–6.0 [0.24]
1 [0.04–0.24] 4.0
M22 x 1.5
[0.16]
1
Ø29.7 Ø20.2 Ø29.5
1 [1.17] [0.80] [1.16]

1
11.7
1 [0.46] 55.9 [2.20]

1
1
1

V7-T1-162 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
1
Emergency Stop/Emergency Switching OFF Pushbuttons
C22-PVT45P_ C22-PVT60P_ 1
6.0
9.3
[0.37] 6.0
9.3
[0.37]
1
1.0–6.0 [0.24]
1.0–6.0 [0.24]
[0.04–0.24] 4.0
[0.04–0.24]
4.0 1
[0.16] [0.16]
1
Ø45.0 Ø29.5 Ø60.0 Ø29.5
[2.36] [1.16]
[1.77] [1.16] 1
Ø20.4 M22 x 1.5 Ø20.4
48.0
[1.89]
45.0
[1.77]
[0.80] 48.0 45.0 [0.80] 1
[1.89] [1.77] M22 x 1.5
93.0 [3.66]
92.0 [3.62] 1
C22-PVT45P-MS_ C22-PVT45P-RS_
1
6.0 9.3 6.0 9.3 1
[0.24] [0.37] 1.0–6.0 [0.24] [0.37]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24] 4.0
[0.16]
[0.04–0.24] 4.0
[0.16]
1
Ø45.0 Ø29.5 Ø45.0 Ø29.5
1
[1.17] [1.16] [1.77] [1.16]
1
48.0 Ø20.4 Ø20.4
48.0
[1.89] 45.0 [0.80]
[1.89] 45.0
[0.80] 1
[1.77] M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5
75.0 [2.95] [1.77]
120.0 [4.72] 71.0 [2.80] 1
116.0 [4.57]
1
C22-PVT60P-MS_
6.0 9.3
1
1.0–6.0 [0.24] [0.37]
[0.04–0.24]
4.0
1
[0.16]
1
Ø60.0 Ø29.5
[2.36] [1.16] 1
Ø20.4
48.0 45.0 [0.80] 1
[1.89] [1.77]
M22 x 1.5
75.0 [2.95] 1
120.0 [4.72]
1
C22-PVT60P-MS_
6.0 9.3
1
1.0–6.0 [0.24] [0.37]
[0.04–0.24]
4.0
1
[0.16]
1
Ø60.0 Ø29.5
[2.36] [1.16] 1
Ø20.4
48.0
[1.89]
45.0 [0.80] 1
[1.77] M22 x 1.5
71.0 [2.80] 1
116.0 [4.57]

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-163
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]

1
Selector Switch Actuators
1 Selector Switch Actuators/V Position
1 C22(S)-W(R)K_ C22(S)-W(R)KV_
9.6 9.6
1 6.0 [0.38] 6.0 [0.38]
1.0–6.0 [0.24] 1.0–6.0 [0.24]
1 [0.04–0.24] 4.0
M22 x 1.5
30° [0.04–0.24] 4.0
M22 x 1.5
[0.16] [0.16]

1
Ø29.7 20.2 Ø29.5 Ø29.7 20.2 Ø29.5
1 [1.17] [0.80] [1.16] [1.17] [0.80] [1.16]

1
27.8 27.8
1 [1.09] 72.0 [2.83] [1.09] 72.0 [2.83]

1
Key Operated Actuators
1
C22(S)-WS(3)-MS_/C22(S)-WRS(3)-MS_
1 9.6
6.0 [0.38]
1 1.0–6.0 [0.24]
[0.04–0.24] 4.0
M22 x 1.5
1 [0.16]

1 Ø29.7 20.2 Ø29.5

[1.17] [0.80] [1.16]

1
20.8 44.2 [1.74]
1 [0.82]
47.9 [1.89]
1 92.1 [3.63]

1 C22(S)-WS(3)-RS_/C22(S)-WRS(3)-RS_
1 9.6
6.0 [0.38]

1 1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16] M22 x 1.5
1
1 Ø29.7
[1.17]
20.2
[0.80]
Ø29.5
[1.16]

1 24.9 44.2 [1.74]

[0.98]
1 47.9 [1.89]

1 92.1 [3.63]

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-164 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
1
Pushbuttons, M12A Pushbuttons, M8
C22-D...-P1/-P3/-P5 C22-D...-P30/-P31/-P32
1
M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 1
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
1
1
1.0–6.0 1.0–6.0 1
[0.04–0.24] [0.04–0.24]
10.4 10.4
[0.41] [0.41] 1
45.7 [1.80] 45.7 [1.80]
1
Pushbuttons, Unterminated Cable End, Flying Lead
C22-D...-P/-P62/-P65 1
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7 1
[Ø1.17]

1
1.0–6.0 1
[0.04–0.24]
10.4
[0.41]
1
45.7 [1.80]
1
Indicator Lights, M12A Indicator Lights, M8
C22-L-...-P1/-P3/-P5 C22-L-...-P30/-P31/-P32 1

M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5

1
Ø29.7 Ø29.7 1
[Ø1.17] [Ø1.17]
1
1.0–6.0
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24] [0.04–0.24]
11.7
[0.46]
11.7 1
[0.46]
45.7 [1.80] 45.7 [1.80] 1
Indicator Lights, Unterminated Cable End, Flying Lead
C22-L-...-P62/-P65 1
1
M22 x 1.5

Ø29.7
1
[Ø1.17]
1
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
11.7 1
[0.46]
45.7 [1.80] 1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-165
 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22

Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]

1
Emergency Switching Off, M12A
C22-PVT...-P10
1
1 M22 x 1.5

1 Ø45.0
[Ø1.77]

1
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
1
48.4 [1.91] 45.7 [1.80]
1
Emergency Switching Off, Unterminated Cable End, Flying Lead
1 C22-PVT...-P62/-P65

1 M22 x 1.5

1 Ø45.0
[Ø1.77]
1
1
1.0–6.0
1 [0.04–0.24]

1 48.4 [1.91] 45.7 [1.80]

Emergency Switching Off, M12

1 C22-PV-...-P10

1 M22 x 1.5

1 Ø38.0
[Ø1.50]
1
1
1.0–6.0
1 [0.04–0.24]

1 48.3 [1.90] 45.7 [1.80]

Emergency Switching Off, Unterminated Cable End, Flying Lead

1 C22-PV-...-P62/-P65

1
M22 x 1.5
1 Ø38.0
[Ø1.50]
1
1
1.0–6.0
1 [0.04–0.24]

1 48.3 [1.90] 45.7 [1.80]

V7-T1-166 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm RMQ Compact Pushbuttons—C22
1.5
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
1
Key-Operated Buttons, M12A
C22-W(R)S(3)-MS1-...-P1/-P5
1
M22 x 1.5 1
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
1
1
1.0–6.0
1
27.5 [0.04–0.24]
[1.08] 20.4
1
[0.80] 45.7 [1.80]
1
Key-Operated Buttons, M8 1
C22-W(R)S(3)-MS1-...-P30/-P32
1
M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7
[Ø1.17]
1
1

27.5
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24] 1
[1.08] 20.4
[0.80] 45.7 [1.80] 1
1
Key-Operated Buttons, Unterminated Cable End, Flying Lead
C22-W(R)S(3)-MS1-...-P62/-P65 1

M22 x 1.5
1
Ø29.7 1
[Ø1.17]
1
1
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
27.5
[1.08]
1
20.4
[0.80] 45.7 [1.80]
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-167
 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators

Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators Contents

1 Description Page
1 Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—
M30 Flat Operators
1 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-170
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-172
1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-180
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-183
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Product Description Features Standards and
The new and modern M30 ●
Flat design for modern look ●
AFX mounting system Certifications
1 30 mm operators of the and smooth transition for easy and secure ● All operators and
Global pilot devices offer a between the machine and installation components are IEC/
1 flat design and functionality the operator ● Robust against vandalism EN 60947 VDE 0660
while withstanding exposure ●
Compatible with existing ●
Up to IP69K for increased ●
All M30 flat operators (for
1 to oil, dirt and water. Ability to M22 contact blocks protection enclosed type devices or
be combined with existing (M22-K…) and indicating flat-front surface mounted
●
For M30 CAD drawings,
1 traditional and flat designed
M22 contact blocks and
lights for enhanced please visit the 3D devices only) are
modularity (M22-LED…) drawings section under environmentally rated as
indicating lights, M30 and sustainable inventory
1 operators provide modularity, management
the documentation tab at Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
www.eaton.com/m30 UL File #: E29184
simplicity and elegance for ● Compatible with the new
1 more demanding commercial M22 flat contact blocks
●
Refer to Instruction Leaflet
● All operators carry an IP66
rating with some rated for
and industrial applications. IL047019ZU for further
(M22-FK…) and indicating washdown environments
1 Our new offering includes lights for optimized
details
with IP67 and IP69K
stainless steel bezel (M30I) footprint (M22-FLED-…) ●
Marine classification
1 options for extended ● Stainless steel bezel societies: Bureau Veritas
corrosion protection along (M30I) options for (BV), Germanischer Lloyd
1 with the metal bezel (M30C) extended corrosion (GL) and Lloyd’s Register of
options for everyday protection along with the Shipping (LR) approved
1 operations. metal bezel (M30C)
options for everyday
operations
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-168 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
M30 Flat Operators Use M22 Contact Blocks and Indicating Lights
1
1
1
1
1
Note: When an M30 part number is ordered,
1
the operator comes standard with the AFX
mounting system, ring and adapter. 1
M22-LED-W Light Units 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 1
Terminal LED Light Unit Terminal Contact
Type Color Voltage Catalog Number Type Configuration 3 Catalog Number 1
Screw White 12–30 M22-LED-W Screw NO M22-K10
Red Vac/Vdc M22-LED-R NO, early-make M22-K10P 1
Green M22-LED-G NC M22-K01
Blue M22-LED-B NC, late-break M22-K01D 1
Screw White 85–264 M22-LED230-W Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
M22-FLED-_ Red Vac M22-LED230-R
M22-FK01
NC M22-CK01 1
Green M22-LED230-G NC, late-break M22-CK01D
Blue M22-LED230-B 2NO M22-CK20 1
Spring-cage White 12–30 M22-FLED-W 2NC M22-CK02
Vac/Vdc
Red M22-FLED-R NO-NC M22-CK11 1
Green M22-FLED-G NC M22-FK01 4
Blue M22-FLED-B NO M22-FK10 4 1
Red/Green/ 24 Vdc M22-FLED-RG 2
Yellow
Red, Green, M22-FLED-RGB 2
1
Notes
Blue, Yellow,
White, Violet,
Turquoise
1 For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories,

Pages V7-T1-105 to V7-T1-112.

1
2 Please see color input key on Page V7-T1-108.
3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
4 Additional contacts may not be stacked behind M22-F type contact blocks,
1
M22-F can be stacked behind standard M22 contacts only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-169
 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators

System Overview
1
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1 13
14
1
12
1
13
1 11

1 10
13

1 14
15

1
12
1
1
1
1
1 1 11
13
1 10

1 12 16

1 2

1 17

1 3
11

1 10

1
1 4

1
18

1
5
1
1 7

1 6

1
8
1
1
1 9

V7-T1-170 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators (Legend)
Item Description Item Description
1
1 M30 4-Way Selector Switches
4-positions
10 Blanking Plugs
See Page V7-T1-180
1
With rotary head or thumb-grip
0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 maintained action 1
See Page V7-T1-173
2 M30 Joysticks 11 RMQ-AFX 1
2- or 4-positions Anti-rotation tab
See Page V7-T1-177 Included with the equipment supplied with M30 front elements 1
3 M30 Pushbuttons 12 Threaded Rings
Momentary and maintained See Pages V7-T1-116 and V7-T1-117 1
Flush
Colors: White, green, red, yellow, blue, black
Illuminated pushbutton actuators
1
Colors: White, green, red, yellow, blue, orange
See Page V7-T1-172 1
4 M30 Selector Switches 13 Mounting Adapters
2- and 3-positions For flush mounting 1
With rotary head, thumb-grip For contact and LED elements
Programmable maintained/momentary action
Illuminated selector switches with transparent thumb-grip
See Page V7-T1-181 1
Colors: White, green, red, yellow, blue
See Page V7-T1-173 1
5 M30 Key-Operated Buttons 14 Traditional and flat contact blocks
For individual lock mechanisms M30 flat operators are compatible with M22 traditional 1
2- or 3-positions and flat contact blocks
Programmable momentary/maintained action and key withdraw
Suitable for master key systems
N/C and N/O
Universal contacts suitable for use with electronic devices
1
See Page V7-T1-174 Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 1
Traditional contact blocks: 2 levels
See Page V7-T1-112
1
6 M30 Indicator Lights 15 Traditional and flat LED indicating lights
Colors: White, green, red, yellow, blue, orange Cage clamp with push-in terminals 1
See Page V7-T1-177 M30 flat operators are compatible with M22 traditional and
flat indicating lights
See Page V7-T1-113 and V7-T1-114
1
7 SmartWire-DT Encoders, M30 Potentiometers
Resistances of 1 kΩ–1 MΩ
16 Telescopic Clip
For adjusting the depth of rear mounting devices in CI and CI-K
1
Three individual connections enclosures and cabinets
See Page V7-T1-179 See Pages V7-T1-117 and V7-T1-125 1
8 M30 Panel Mount Connectors 17 Convenient Labeling
USB 3.0 A laser inscription with any text and/or symbol can be added to illuminated 1
and non-illuminated pushbuttons. When ordering, specify inscription per
catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library.
See Pages V7-T1-129 through V7-T1-136
1
9 M30 Panel Mount Connectors 18 SmartWire-DT
Product Characteristics
1
RJ45
• Clip-fit assembly modular system
• Metal bezel, flus 1
• Mounting hole diameter: 30.5 mm
• Minimum grid dimension: 40 x 50 mm
• Min. degree of protection: IP66
1
• Up to 6 contacts per mounting location
• For switching differing potential
• Approved throughout the world
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-171
 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators

Product Selection
1
M30—Pushbuttons
1 IP67, IP69K—Metal Bezel—Flush
1 Front Dimensions: 36 mm Diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
1 Button Plate Std. Pack Catalog Number Button Plate Std. Pack Catalog Number
M30C-FD- Momentary 12 M30C-FDR-S Maintained 12

1 1 unit M30C-FD-S 1 unit M30C-FDR-S

1 M30C-FD-W M30C-FDR-W

M30C-FD-R M30C-FDR-R
1
M30C-FD-G M30C-FDR-G
1 M30C-FD-Y M30C-FDR-Y

1 M30C-FD-B M30C-FDR-B

1 M30C-FD-GR M30C-FDR-S-X0

M30C-FD-S-X0 M30C-FDR-W-X1
1
M30C-FD-W-X1 M30C-FDR-R-X0
1
M30C-FD-W-X11 M30C-FDR-G-X1
1 M30C-FD-R-X0 Custom M30C-FDR-ETCH 3
Without button plate 1 unit
1 M30C-FD-G-X1
M30C-FDR-X M30C-FDR-X

1 M30C-FD-B-X217

M30C-FD-GR-X66
1
Custom M30C-FD-ETCH 3
1 M30C-FD-X Without button plate 1 unit M30C-FD-X

1
1
1
1 Notes
1 Maintained/momentary action can be changed on device.

1 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.

3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130).

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-172 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
M30—Selector Switches
1
IP64, Metal Bezel
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
1
Maintained/momentary action can be changed with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters
Action
1
1
Button Plate Std. Pack Catalog Number
With Rotary Head Two-Position 1
1 unit M30C-FW
1
M30C-FWR

AUTO HAND M30C-FWR-X91

1
M30C-FWR-X92
1
With Thumb-Grip 1 unit M30C-FWK 1
M30C-FWRK 1
1
With Thumb-Grip 1 unit M30C-FWKV 1
1
1
With Rotary Head Three-Position 1
1 unit M30C-FW
1
M30C-FWR3
1
M30C-FWR3-X7 1
0
M30C-FWR3-X94
1
Ma
Auto

n.

With Thumb-Grip 1 unit M30C-FWK3

M30C-FWRK3
1
Selectable Maintained, return from left M30C-FWRK3-1 1
40° 40° 60° 60° 1
Maintained, return from right M30C-FWRK3-2
1
40° 40° 60° 60°

23
1
With Rotary Head Four-Position

4
0
1 1 unit M30C-FWR4 1
0 0
3 2
0
1
With Thumb-Grip 4
0
1 M30C-FWRK4
1
0 0
3
0
2
1
1
Notes
1 With plunger bridge for middle contact.
1
2 Not compatible with configuration adapters.
3 Use M22-A4 mounting adapter, see Page V7-T1-180. 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-173
 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators

M30—Key-Operated Buttons
1
Key-Operated Buttons for Individual Lock Mechanisms
1
IP64, Metal Bezel
1 Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Maintained/momentary action can be changed with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters
1 Key withdraw can be changed with M22-XC-… configuration adapters

1 Action

Lock Equipment
1 Mechanism Key Withdrawable at Position Supplied Key Code Std. Pack Catalog Number

Two-Position Two-Position
1 — 0 — — With MS1 1 unit M30C-FWS
one key
MS2 M30C-FWS-MS2
1 MS3 M30C-FWS-MS3

1 MS4 M30C-FWS-MS4
MS5 M30C-FWS-MS5
1 MS6 M30C-FWS-MS6
MS7 M30C-FWS-MS7
1 MS8 M30C-FWS-MS8
— 0 — I MS1 M30C-FWRS
1 MS2 M30C-FWRS-MS2
MS3
1 M30C-FWRS-MS3
MS4 M30C-FWRS-MS4
1 MS5 M30C-FWRS-MS5
MS6 M30C-FWRS-MS6
1 MS7 M30C-FWRS-MS7
MS8 M30C-FWRS-MS8
1 MS10 M30C-FWRS-MS10
— 0 — — MS1
1 M30C-FWRS-A1
MS2 M30C-FWRS-MS2-A1

1 MS3 M30C-FWRS-MS3-A1
MS4 M30C-FWRS-MS4-A1
1 MS5 M30C-FWRS-MS5-A1
MS6 M30C-FWRS-MS6-A1
1 MS7 M30C-FWRS-MS7-A1
MS8
1 M30C-FWRS-MS8-A1
MS10 M30C-FWRS-MS10-A1

1 — I — II MS1 M30C-FWRS-X95
Two-Position Ronis 455 0 — I With MS1 1 unit M30C-FWRS-RS
1 (Ronis 455)
Ronis 455 0 — —
two keys
MS1 M30C-FWRS-RS-A1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-174 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
IP64, Metal Bezel, continued
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter 1
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Maintained/momentary action can be changed with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters 1
Key withdraw can be changed with M22-XC-… configuration adapters
Action 1
Lock
Mechanism Key Withdrawable at Position
Equipment
Supplied
Key
Code Std. Pack Catalog Number
1
Three-Position Three-Position
1
— 0 — — With MS1 1 unit M30C-FWS3
one key
MS2 M30C-FWS3-MS2 1
MS3 M30C-FWS3-MS3
MS4 M30C-FWS3-MS4 1
MS5 M30C-FWS3-MS5
MS6 M30C-FWS3-MS6
1
MS7 M30C-FWS3-MS7
1
MS8 M30C-FWS3-MS8
Selectable — Selectable — MS1 M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A1 1
MS2 M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A1
MS3 M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A1 1
MS4 M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A1
MS5 M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A1
1
MS6 M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A1
1
MS7 M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A1
MS8 M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A1 1
— — Selectable — MS1 M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A2
MS2 M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A2 1
MS3 M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A2
MS4 M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A2
1
MS5 M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A2
1
MS6 M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A2
MS7 M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A2 1
MS8 M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A2
— — Selectable — MS1 M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A3 1
MS2 M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A3
MS3 M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A3
1
MS4 M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A3
1
MS5 M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A3
MS6 M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A3 1
MS7 M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A3
MS8 M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A3 1
— — Selectable — MS1 M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A4
MS2 M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A4
1
MS3 M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A4
MS4 M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A4
1
MS5 M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A4 1
MS6 M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A4
MS7 M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A4 1
MS8 M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A4
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-175
 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators

IP64, Metal Bezel, continued

1 Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
1 Maintained/momentary action can be changed with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters
Key withdraw can be changed with M22-XC-… configuration adapters
1 Action

1 Lock
Mechanism Key Withdrawable at Position
Equipment
Supplied
Key
Code Std. Pack Catalog Number

1 Three-Position Three-Position, continued

Selectable — Selectable — With MS1 1 unit M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A5
one key
1 MS2 M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A5
MS3 M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A5
1 MS4 M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A5
MS5 M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A5
1 MS6 M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A5

1 MS7 M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A5
MS8 M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A5
1 — — Selectable — MS1 M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A6
MS2 M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A6
1 MS3 M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A6
MS4 M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A6
1 MS5 M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A6
MS6
1 M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A6
MS7 M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A6
1 MS8 M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A6
— — Selectable — MS1 M30C-FWRS3-MS1-A7
1 MS2 M30C-FWRS3-MS2-A7
MS3 M30C-FWRS3-MS3-A7
1 MS4 M30C-FWRS3-MS4-A7
MS5
1 M30C-FWRS3-MS5-A7
MS6 M30C-FWRS3-MS6-A7

1 MS7 M30C-FWRS3-MS7-A7
MS8 M30C-FWRS3-MS8-A7
1 Three-Position Ronis 455 0 — — With — 1 unit M30C-FWRS3-RS
(Ronis 455) two keys
— M30C-FWRS3-RS-A1
1
1
1
1
1 Two- or Three-Position Two- or Three-Position
— — Selectable — With MS1 1 unit M30C-FWRS3-A1
1 two keys
MS2 M30C-FWRS3-A2

1 MS3 M30C-FWRS3-A3
MS4 M30C-FWRS3-A4
1 MS5 M30C-FWRS3-A5
MS6 M30C-FWRS3-A6
1 MS7 M30C-FWRS3-A7
MS10 M30C-FWRS3-A10
1
1

V7-T1-176 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
M30—Joysticks, Indicator Lights and Illuminated Operators
1
Joystick Joysticks—IP66, Metal Bezel Indicator Lights Indicator Lights—IP67, Metal Bezel
With one operating point per operating Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter 1
direction NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
With metal shaft
Std. Catalog 1
Lens Pack Number
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
1 unit M30C-FL-W 1
Action
M30C-FL-R
Std. Catalog 1
Description Pack Number M30C-FL-G
Two-position 1 unit M30C-FWRJS2H
M30C-FL-Y
1
Three-position M30C-FWRJS2V
M30C-FL-B 1
Four-position M30C-FWJS4
M30C-FL-A
1
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons 1
IP67, IP69K, Metal Bezel, Flush IP67, IP69K, Metal Bezel, Flush 1
Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13 NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13 1
Button Std. Catalog Button Std. Catalog
Plate Pack Number Plate Pack Number 1
Momentary 1 unit M30C-FDL-W Maintained 1 unit M30C-FDRL-W

M30C-FDL-R M30C-FDRL-R
1
M30C-FDL-G M30C-FDRL-G 1
M30C-FDL-Y M30C-FDRL-Y 1
M30C-FDL-B M30C-FDRL-B
1
M30C-FDL-A M30C-FDRL-A

M30C-FDL-W-X0 M30C-FDRL-W-X0
1
M30C-FDL-W-X1 M30C-FDRL-W-X1 1
M30C-FDL-W-X100 M30C-FDRL-R-X0 1
M30C-FDL-R-X0 M30C-FDRL-G-X1
1
M30C-FDL-G-X1 Custom M30C-FDRL-ETCH 1

M30C-FDL-G-X32
Maintained Without 1 unit M30C-FDRL-X 1
button plate

M30C-FDL-Y-X162 1

Momentary
Custom M30C-FDL-ETCH 1 1
Without 1 unit M30C-FDL-X
button plate
1
Note 1
1 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library

(see Pages V7-T1-123 to V7-T1-130).

1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-177
 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators

Illuminated Selector Switches

1
IP64, Metal Bezel, with Thumb-Grip IP64, Metal Bezel, with Thumb-Grip
1 Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter Front dimensions: 36 mm diameter
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13 NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
1 Maintained/momentary action can be changed Maintained/momentary action can be changed
with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters with M22-XC-Y configuration adapters
1 Action Action

1 Button
Plate
Std.
Pack Catalog Number
Button
Plate
Std.
Pack Catalog Number

1 Momentary Two-Position Momentary Three-Position

1 unit M30C-FWLK-W 1 unit M30C-FWLK3-W
1 M30C-FWLK-R M30C-FWLK3-R

1 M30C-FWLK-G M30C-FWLK3-G

1 M30C-FWLK-Y M30C-FWLK3-Y

M30C-FWLK-B M30C-FWLK3-B
1
1 unit M30C-FWRLK-W 1 unit M30C-FWRLK3-W
1 M30C-FWRLK-R M30C-FWRLK3-R

1 M30C-FWRLK-G M30C-FWRLK3-G

1 M30C-FWRLK-Y M30C-FWRLK3-Y

M30C-FWRLK-B M30C-FWRLK3-B
1
Momentary Two-Position (V-Configuration) Maintained, 1 unit M30C-FWRLK3-1-W
1 1 unit M30C-FWLKV-W
return from left
M30C-FWRLK3-1-R
40° 40°
1 M30C-FWLKV-R
M30C-FWRLK3-1-G
M30C-FWLKV-G
1 60° 60° M30C-FWRLK3-1-Y
M30C-FWLKV-Y
M30C-FWRLK3-1-B
1 M30C-FWLKV-B
Maintained, 1 unit M30C-FWRLK3-2-W
1 return from right
M30C-FWRLK3-2-R
40° 40°
1 M30C-FWRLK3-2-G

1 60° 60° M30C-FWRLK3-2-Y

M30C-FWRLK3-2-B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-178 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
Potentiometers
1
IP66, Metal Bezel Potentiometer
Three individual screw connections
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
1
Resistance accuracy: ±10% (linear) / Rated power P = 0.5 W
1
Resistance
(R) kOhm Scale/Inscription Contact Sequence Std. Pack Catalog Number
1
Potentiometer 1 Standard scale/inscription 1 unit M30C-FR1K
4.7
Z1 Z2
M30C-FR4K7 1
10 M30C-FR10K
47 M30C-FR47K 1
100 M30C-FR100K
470 M30C-FR470K 1
2.2 M30C-FR2K2
22 M30C-FR22K 1
1000 M30C-FR1M
1 Without scale/inscription 1 unit M30C-FR1K-BLANK 1
2.2 M30C-FR2K2-BLANK
4.7 M30C-FR4K7-BLANK 1
10 M30C-FR10K-BLANK
22 M30C-FR22K-BLANK 1
47 M30C-FR47K-BLANK
100 M30C-FR100K-BLANK 1
470 M30C-FR470K-BLANK
1000 M30C-FR1M-BLANK 1
1
IP65, SmartWire-DT Potentiometer
Only in conjunction with M22-SWD-R function element 1
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Bezel Contact Sequence Std. Pack Catalog Number 1
M22-R-SWD Silver bezel (M22) 1 unit M22-R-SWD
1
1
1
Metal bezel (flat front) 1 unit M30C-FR-SWD 1
1
IP65, SmartWire-DT Encoders
With actuation function 1
NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
Only in conjunction with M22-SWD-INC function element 1
Bezel Contact Sequence Std. Pack Catalog Number
M30C-FINC-SWD Silver bezel (M22) — 1 unit M22-INC-SWD
1
Metal bezel (flat front) — 1 unit M30C-FINC-SWD
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-179
 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators

Blanking Plugs
1 Round design, IP67, IP69K
For sealing spare mounting locations
1 For use Std.
with … Color Pack Catalog Number
1 M22 50 units M22-B216388

1 250 units M22-B-GVP216389

50 units M22S-B216390
1
250 units M22S-B-GVP216391
1
M30 1 unit M30C-FB187028

1
1
Technical Data
1
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices
1 Double Contact (Illuminated) Pushbuttons,
Contact Elements Elements LED Elements Mushroom Pushbuttons
1 Description Unit M22-(C)K… M22-FK… M22-CK20/02/11 M22(C)-LED… M22-FLED… Momentary Maintained
General
1 Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 — IEC/EN 60947-5-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 — EC/EN 60947-5-1 —
Lifespan, mechanical (operations) x 106 5 1 — — — 5 1
1 Operating frequency (operations) h ≤ 3600 ≤ 3600 ≤ 3600 — — ≤ 3600 ≤ 1800
Operating force N 5 4.5 10 — — 5 5
1 Operating torque (screw terminals) Nm 0.8 — — 0.8 — — —
Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529) IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K
1 Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant as defined in IEC 60068-2-7; Damp heat, cyclic as defined in IEC 60068-2-3
Ambient air temperature, open °C –25 to +70 –25 to +70 –25 to +70 –25 to +70 –25 to +70 –25 to +70 –25 to +70
1 Mounting position Any Any Any Any Any Any Any
Mechanical shock resistance as g 30 50 30 30 50 M22: 30 M22: 30
1 defined in IEC 60068-2-27 Shock M30: 15 M30: 15
duration: 11 ms, half sine shock

1 Terminal capacities
Solid mm2 0.75–2.5 2 x 1 (0.2–1.5) 0.5–1.5 0.75–2.5 1 x 1 (0.2– 1.5) — —
2 x 1 (0.75–1.5) 1 1 x 1 (0.75–1.5) 1
1 Stranded mm2 0.5–2.5 — 0.5–1.5 0.5–2.5 1 x 1 (0.2–1.5) — —

1 Flexible with ferrule mm2 0.5–1.5 2 x 1 (0.25–1) 2 0.5–1.5 — 1 x 1 (0.25–1) 2 — —

Notes
1 1 Can be plugged without tools.
2 Use WAGO Variocrimp 4 crimping tool; please enquire for others.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-180 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices, continued
Double Contact (Illuminated) Pushbuttons,
1
Contact Elements Elements LED Elements Mushroom Pushbuttons
Description Unit M22-(C)K… M22-FK… M22-CK20/02/11 M22(C)-LED… M22-FLED… Momentary Maintained 1
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Vac 6000 4000 — 6000 4000 — — 1
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 500 250 — 500 250 — —
Overvoltage category/ III/3 III/3 — III/3 III/3 — —
1
degree of pollution
Control circuit reliability 1
At 24 Vdc/5 mA (failure rate) HF < 10-7 1 — — — — — —
At 5 Vdc/1 mA (failure rate) HF < 5 x 10-6 2 — — — — — —
1
Max. short-circuit protective device
Fuseless (part no.) A PKZM0–10/FAZ-B6/1 FAZ-B4 — — — — —
1
Fuse (gG/gL) 10 4 — — — — —
1
Switching Capacity
Rated operational current 1
AC-15: 24 V Ie A — 4 — — — — —
60 V Ie A — 4 — — — — — 1
100 V Ie A — 2 — — — — —
115 V Ie A 6 — — — — — — 1
230 V Ie A 6 1.5 — — — — —
400 V Ie A 4 — — — — — — 1
500 V Ie A 2 — — — — — —
DC-13: 24 V Ie A 3 1.5 — — — — — 1
42 V Ie A 1.7 — — — — — —
60 V Ie A 1.2 0.8 — — — — — 1
110 V Ie A 0.6 (M22-CK...: 0.8) 0.4 — — — — —
220 V Ie A 0.3 0.2 — — — — — 1
Lifespan, electrical
AC-15: 230 V/0.5 A (operations) x 106 1.6 — — — — — — 1
230 V/1.0 A (operations) x 106 1 — — — — — —
230 V/3.0 A (operations) x 106 0.7 — — — — — — 1
DC-15: 12 V/2.8 A (operations) x 106 1.2 — — — — — —
1
Notes
1 < 10-7 (i.e., one failure every 107 operations).
2 < 5 x 10-6 (i.e., one failure every 5 x 106 operations).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-181
 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators

Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices, continued

1 Indicator Lights
Double Actuator (Illuminated) Key-Operated Acoustic Devices Controlled Stop/
1 Description Unit Pushbuttons Selector Switches Joysticks Buttons Potentiometers Emergency Stop
General
1 Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-5
Lifespan, mechanical (operations) x 106 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 — 0.1
1 Operating frequency (operations) h ≤ 3600 ≤ 2000 ≤ 2000 ≤ 100 — ≤ 600
Operating force N 5 — 5 — — 50
1 Operating torque (screw terminals) Nm — 0.3 — 0.5 — —
Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529) IP66 M22: IP66 IP66 M22: IP66 Indicator lights: IP67 IP67, IP69K
1 M30: IP64 M30: IP64 Acoustic devices: IP40
Potentiometers: IP66
1 Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant as defined in IEC 60068-2-7; Damp heat, cyclic as defined in IEC 60068-2-3
Ambient air temperature, open °C –25 to +70 –25 to +70 –25 to +70 –25 to +70 –25 to +70 –25 to +70
1 Mounting position Any Any Any Any Any Any
Mechanical shock resistance as g 30 M22: 30 M22: 30 M22: 30 M22: 30 50
1 defined in IEC 60068-2-27 Shock M30: 15 M30: 15 M30: 15 M30: —
duration: 11 ms, half sine shock
1 Terminal capacities
Solid mm2 — — — — 0.5–1.5 —
1 Stranded mm2 — — — — 0.5–1.5 —
Flexible with ferrule mm2 — — — — — —
1 Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Vac — — — — 4000 —
1 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V — — — — 250 —
Overvoltage category/ — — — — III/3 —
1 degree of pollution
Control circuit reliability — — — — — —
1 At 24 Vdc/5 mA (failure rate) HF — — — — — —
At 5 Vdc/1 mA (failure rate) HF — — — — — —
1 Max. short-circuit protective device
Fuseless (part no.) A — — — — — —
1
Fuse (gG/gL) — — — — — —

1 Switching Capacity
A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-182 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [inches]
1
M30… with 2 M22-K… Standard Contact Elements M30… with M22-FK… Flat Rear Contact Elements 1
1
1
Ø35.4 38.0 46.3 Ø35.4 46.3
[Ø1.39] [1.50] [1.82] [Ø1.39] [1.82] 1
1
11.8 1
[0.46]
11.8
[0.46] 1
52.8 [2.08] 37.5
79.2 [3.12] [1.48] 1
Pushbuttons, Blanking Plug Indicator Lights 1
M30C-FD…, M30C-FB M30C-FL…
1
M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 1
1
Ø35.4 46.0 Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81] [Ø1.39] [1.81] 1
1
36.0 [1.42] 36.0 [1.42] 1
1.5–5.5 1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22] [0.06–0.22] 1
4.82
2.65 26.3
[0.10] [1.04]
[0.19]
2.65 26.3
1
[0.10] [1.04]
1
Selector Switches Illuminated Selector Switches
With Rotary Head M30C-FW… With Thumb-Grip, Four-Way M30C-FW(L)K(V)-…
1
1
M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5
1
Ø35.4 46.0 Ø35.4 46.0
1
[Ø1.39] [1.81] [Ø1.39] [1.81]
1
1
36.0 [1.42] 36.0 [1.42]

1.5–5.5 1.5–5.5
1
[0.06–0.22] [0.06–0.22]
16.4 2.65
26.3
1
[0.64] [0.10]
[1.04]
2.65 26.3 19.6 1
[0.10] [1.04] [0.77]

1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-183
 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators

Approximate Dimensions in mm [inches]

1
Key-Operated Buttons Key-Operated Buttons
1 M30C-FW(R)S(3)-MS… M30C-FW(R)S(3)-RS…

1 M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5

1
1 Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]

1
1 36.0 [1.42] 36.0 [1.42]
1.5–5.5 1.5–5.5
1 [0.06–0.22] [0.06–0.22]

1 40.5 [1.59]
38.7 [1.52]
2.65 26.3 2.65 26.3
1 [0.10] [1.04] [0.10] [1.04]

Key-Operated Buttons
1
M30C-FW(R)S(3)-SA…
1
M22 x 1.5
1
1 Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
1
1
36.0 [1.42]
1 1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
1
45.2 [1.78]
1 2.65 26.3
[0.10] [1.04]
1
Potentiometers Potentiometers, SmartWire-DT
1 M30C-FR… M30C-FR-SWD

1 M22 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5

1
1 Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81]

1
1 36.0 [1.42] 36.0 [1.42]
1.5–5.5
1 [0.06–0.22] 1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
2.65
1 [0.10] 40.2
[1.58]
2.65 26.3 [1.04]
[0.10]
21.9 21.9 [0.86]
1 [0.86]

V7-T1-184 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Modular 30 mm Pilot Devices—M30 Flat Operators
1.6
Approximate Dimensions in mm [inches]
1
Encoders, SmartWire-DT Joysticks
M30C-FINC-SWD M30C-FW(R)JS… 1
M22 x 1.5
M22 x 1.5 1
Ø35.4
[Ø1.39]
1
Ø35.4 46.0
[Ø1.39] [1.81] 1
1
36.0 [1.42]
1
1.5–5.5 46.0
[0.06–0.22]
36.0 [1.42]
[1.81] 1
2.65 1.5–5.5
[0.10] 26.3 [1.04] [0.06–0.22]
1
26.4 [1.04] 2.65 26.3
[0.10] [1.04] 1
65.9 [2.59]
1
Mounting hole Mounting hole
without key slot with key slot 1
M30C-FW(R)(L)K…
M30C-FW(R)(S) Ø4.8 +0.2
0 1
[Ø0.19 +0.01
0 ]

1
31.9
Ø30.5 +0.5
0
[1.25] 1
[Ø1.2 +0.02
0 ]

Ø30.5 +0.5
0
1
[Ø1.2 +0.02
0 ]
1
Grid dimensions for
various combinations 1
1
50.0
[1.97]
1
1
Ø30.5 +0.5
0
40.0
[1.57] [Ø1.2 +0.02
0 ] 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-185
 1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail

Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices —C30 Flat with Pigtail Contents

1 Description Page
1 Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—
C30 Flat with Pigtail
1 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-187
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-188
1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-192
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-193
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 Product Description Features Standards and
The new and modern all-in- Our product offering includes The cable, plug connector and Certifications
1 one C30 compact and flat momentary and maintained housing are already ● All operators and
30 mm pilot devices with operators; illuminated and integrated and permanently components are IEC/
1 pigtail integrate the required non-illuminated pushbuttons; installed for plug and play. EN 60947 VDE 0660
cable, connector and housing illuminated and non- ● All C30 flat operators (for
C30 pilot devices are also
1 in one single device. illuminated selector switches
fully assembled for easy enclosed type devices or
and indicating lights. C30 pilot flat-front surface mounted
Ability to provide protection stocking and sustainable
1 up to IP69K at the front and
devices come with the
following pigtail options: inventory management. devices only) are
IP65 at the back make these environmentally rated as
1 devices the perfect choice for ● P5 for 1 m cable with M12 Type 1, 3R, 4X, 12 or 13
applications where oil-tight UL File #: E29184
● P32 for 1 m cable with M8
1 protection from dirt and liquid
is a must.
● P62 for 1 m cable with
● All operators carry an IP66
rating with some rated for
open wire
washdown environments
1 ● P65 for 3.5 m with IP67 and IP69K
C30 compact and flat with ● Marine classification
1 pigtail 30 mm pilot devices societies: Bureau Veritas
offer modern look and (BV), Germanischer Lloyd
1 smooth transition between (GL) and Lloyd’s Register of
the machine and the Shipping (LR) approved
1 operator.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-186 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
1.7
System Overview
1
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
5
1
1
4
6 1
1
1
1
1
7 1
1
1
1 1
8 1
1
2 1
1
9
1
3 1
1
1
1
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail (Legend)
Item Description Item Description Item Description 1
1 C30 Pushbuttons 3 C30 Indicator Lights 6 SmartWire-DT I/O Module
1
Momentary and maintained Flush For connecting digital input/output signals
Flush Colors: white, green, red, blue, yellow to SmartWire-DT
Colors: white, green, red, black With cable (1.5 or 3 m) and plug (M12A or M8, IP67 1
With cable (1.5 or 3 m) and plug (M12A or M8, 4-pole) or unterminated cable end (4-pole)
4-pole) or unterminated cable end (4-pole)
See Page V7-T1-188
24 Vac/Vdc
See Page V7-T1-190
1
2 C30 Illuminated Pushbutton Actuators 4 RMQ-AFX Anti-Rotation Tab 7 Cable with M12A Plug, 4-Pole 1
Momentary and maintained Included with C30 compact devices
Flush
Colors: white, green, red, blue
5 Threaded Rings 8 Cable with M8A Plug, 4-Pole 1
With cable (1.5 or 3 m) and plug (M12A or M8, See Page V7-T1-110
4-pole) or unterminated cable end (4-pole)
24 Vac/Vdc
9 Cable End Open, 4-Pole 1
See Page V7-T1-191
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-187
 1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail

Product Selection
1
Pushbuttons
1 30 mm Flat Front—Metal Bezel
1 IP66, IP67, IP69K (at front), IP65 (at rear)
Flush
1 Contact Configuration 1
Cable Button NO = Normally NC = Normally Contact Contact Std. Momentary Maintained
Length (m) Plate Open Contact Closed Contact Sequence 2 Diagram Pack Catalog Number Catalog Number
1
Cable (Black) with 1 — 1NC 1 1 Unit C30C-FD-R-K01-P5 C30C-FDR-R-K01-P5
M12A Plug, 4-Pole 0 2.2 5.5
1 Zw = 4.5 mm C30C-FD-S-K01-P5 C30C-FDR-S-K01-P5
4

1 Without C30C-FD-X-K01-P5 C30C-FDR-X-K01-P5

button
plate
1 1 1NO — 1 1 Unit C30C-FD-G-K10-P5 C30C-FDR-G-K10-P5
0 3.15 5.5
1 C30C-FD-W-K10-P5 C30C-FDR-W-K10-P5
4

1 Without
button
C30C-FD-X-K10-P5 C30C-FDR-X-K10-P5

plate
1 Cable (Black) with 1 — 1NC 1 1 Unit C30C-FD-R-K01-P32 C30C-FDR-R-K01-P32
M8 Plug, 4-Pole 0 2.2 5.5
1 Zw = 4.5 mm C30C-FD-S-K01-P32 C30C-FDR-S-K01-P32
4

Without
1 button
C30C-FD-X-K01-P32 C30C-FDR-X-K01-P32

plate
1 1 1NO — 1 1 Unit C30C-FD-G-K10-P32 C30C-FDR-G-K10-P32
0 3.15 5.5

1 4
C30C-FD-W-K10-P32 C30C-FDR-W-K10-P32

Without C30C-FD-X-K10-P32 C30C-FDR-X-K10-P32

1 button
plate
1 Notes
1 = Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
1 2 Contact sequence: = contact closed; = contact open.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-188 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
1.7
30 mm Flat Front—Metal Bezel, continued
IP66, IP67, IP69K (at front), IP65 (at rear) 1
Flush
Contact Configuration 1
1
Cable Button NO = Normally NC = Normally Contact Contact Std. Momentary Maintained
Length (m) Plate Open Contact Closed Contact Sequence 2 Diagram Pack Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Cable (Black) with 1 — 1NC BN 1 Unit C30C-FD-R-K01-P62 C30C-FDR-R-K01-P62
M12A Plug, 4-Pole 0 2.2 5.5 1
Zw = 4.5 mm C30C-FD-S-K01-P62 C30C-FDR-S-K01-P62

Without
BK

C30C-FD-X-K01-P62 C30C-FDR-X-K01-P62
1
button
plate
2NC BN WH

0 2.2 5.5
C30C-FD-X-K02-P62 C30C-FDR-X-K02-P62
1
Zw = 4.5 mm
BK BU 1
1NO 1NC BN WH 3.15 C30C-FD-X-K11-P62 C30C-FDR-X-K11-P62
1
0 2.2 5.5

1NO —
BK

BN
BU

1 Unit C30C-FD-G-K10-P62 C30C-FDR-G-K10-P62

1
0 3.15 5.5
C30C-FD-W-K10-P62 C30C-FDR-W-K10-P62 1
BK

Without
button
C30C-FD-X-K10-P62 C30C-FDR-X-K10-P62 1
2NO BN WH C30C-FD-X-K20-P62 C30C-FDR-X-K20-P62
plate
0 3.15 5.5 1
BK BU

3.5 — 1NC BN 1 Unit C30C-FD-R-K01-P65 C30C-FDR-R-K01-P65

1
0 2.2 5.5
Zw = 4.5 mm C30C-FD-S-K01-P65 C30C-FDR-S-K01-P65 1
BK

Without
button
C30C-FD-X-K01-P65 C30C-FDR-X-K01-P65
1
2NC BN WH C30C-FD-X-K02-P65 C30C-FDR-X-K02-P65
plate
0 2.2
Zw = 4.5 mm
5.5
1
BK BU

1NO 1NC BN WH 3.15 C30C-FD-X-K11-P65 C30C-FDR-X-K11-P65 1

BK BU 0 2.2 5.5
1
1NO — BN

0 3.15 5.5
1 Unit C30C-FD-G-K10-P65 C30C-FDR-G-K10-P65 1
C30C-FD-W-K10-P65 C30C-FDR-W-K10-P65
BK 1
Without C30C-FD-X-K10-P65 C30C-FDR-X-K10-P65
button
plate
2NO BN WH C30C-FD-X-K20-P65 C30C-FDR-X-K20-P65 1
0 3.15 5.5

BK BU
1
Notes 1
1 = Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in IEC/EN 60947-5-1.
2 Contact sequence: = contact closed; = contact open. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-189
 1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail

Indicating Lights
1
30 mm Flat Front—Metal Bezel
1 LED Rated Operating Voltage: 24 Vac/Vdc
IP66, IP67, IP69K (at Front), IP65 (at Rear)
1 Cable Std.
Connection Type Length (m) Lens LED Contact Sequence Pack Catalog Number
1 C30C-FL-B-24-P5 Cable (Black) with M12A Plug 4-Pole 1 2 1 Unit C30C-FL-B-24-P5

LED
1 3
C30C-FL-G-24-P5

C30C-FL-R-24-P5
1
C30C-FL-W-24-P5
1 C30C-FL-Y-24-P5

1 C30C-FL-B-24-P32 Cable (Black) with M8 Plug 4-Pole 1 2 1 Unit C30C-FL-B-24-P32

LED
1 3
C30C-FL-G-24-P32

C30C-FL-R-24-P32
1
C30C-FL-W-24-P32
1 C30C-FL-Y-24-P32

1 C30C-FL-B-24-P62 Cable (Black) with Unterminated End 4-Pole 1 WH 1 Unit C30C-FL-B-24-P62

LED
1 BU
C30C-FL-G-24-P62

C30C-FL-R-24-P62
1
C30C-FL-W-24-P62
1 C30C-FL-Y-24-P62

1 3.5 1 Unit C30C-FL-B-24-P65

1 C30C-FL-G-24-P65

C30C-FL-R-24-P65
1
C30C-FL-W-24-P65
1 C30C-FL-Y-24-P65

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-190 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
1.7
Illuminated Pushbutton Actuators
1
30 mm Flat Front—Metal Bezel
LED Rated Operating Voltage: 24 Vac/Vdc 1
IP66, IP67, IP69K (at Front), IP65 (at Rear)
Flush 1
Contact Configuration 1
NO = NC = 1
Cable Normally Normally
Length Button Open Closed Contact Contact Std. Momentary Maintained
(m) Plate LED Contact Contact Sequence 2 Diagram Pack Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Cable (Black) with 1 — 1NC 1 2 1 C30C-FDL-RK01-24P5 C30C-FDRL-RK01-24P5
M12A Plug, 4-Pole 0 2.2 5.5
1

LED
Zw = 4.5 mm
4 3 1
1NO — 1 2 C30C-FDL-BK10-24P5 C30C-FDRL-BK10-24P5
0 3.15 5.5 1

LED
C30C-FDL-GK10-24P5 C30C-FDRL-GK10-24P5
4 3

C30C-FDL-WK10-24P5 C30C-FDRL-WK10-24P5 1
Cable (Black) with
M8 Plug, 4-Pole
1 — 1NC 1

LED
2

0 2.2 5.5
1 C30C-FDL-RK01-24P32 C30C-FDRL-RK01-24P32 1
Zw = 4.5 mm
4 3 1
1NO — 1 2 C30C-FDL-BK10-24P32 C30C-FDRL-BK10-24P32
0 3.15 5.5 1
LED

C30C-FDL-GK10-24P32 C30C-FDRL-GK10-24P32
4 3

C30C-FDL-WK10-24P32 C30C-FDRL-WK10-24P32
1
Cable (Black) with 1 — 1NC BN WH 1 C30C-FDL-RK01-24P62 C30C-FDRL-RK01-24P62 1
Unterminated End, 0 2.2 5.5
LED

4-Pole
BK BU
Zw = 4.5 mm
1
1NO — BN WH

0 3.15 5.5
C30C-FDL-BK10-24P62 C30C-FDRL-BK10-24P62
1
LED

C30C-FDL-GK10-24P62 C30C-FDRL-GK10-24P62
BK BU 1
C30C-FDL-WK10-24P62 C30C-FDRL-WK10-24P62

1 — 1NC BN WH 1 C30C-FDL-RK01-24P65 C30C-FDRL-RK01-24P65

1
0 2.2 5.5
LED

Zw = 4.5 mm 1
BK BU

1NO — BN WH C30C-FDL-BK10-24P65 C30C-FDRL-BK10-24P65 1

0 3.15 5.5
LED

C30C-FDL-GK10-24P65 C30C-FDRL-GK10-24P65
BK BU
1
C30C-FDL-WK10-24P65 C30C-FDRL-WK10-24P65
1
Mounting Ring Tool
1
Description
Std.
Pack Catalog Number
1
For threaded ring; can be used with cordless screwdriver. 1 Unit C22-MS 1
Notes
1 = Safety function implemented with positive opening as defined in IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 1
2 Contact sequence: = contact closed; = contact open.
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-191
 1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail

Technical Data
1
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
1 (Illuminated)
Controlled stop/ pushbuttons
1 emergency switching Momentary/ Selector Key-operated Indicator
Description Unit off buttons maintained switches buttons lights

1 General
Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-5 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 IEC/EN 60947-5-1
1 VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660 VDE 0660
Lifespan, mechanical Operations x 106 0.05 5/1 1 0.1 —

1 Operating frequency Operations/h 300 3600 2000 100 —

Operating force N 50 5 — — —
1 Operating torque Nm — — 0.3 0.5 —
Plug tightening torque Nm M12 = 1, M8 = 0.6 M12 = 1, M8 = 0.6 M12 = 1, M8 = 0.6 M12 = 1, M8 = 0.6 M12 = 1, M8 = 0.6
1 Threaded ring tightening torque Nm 2 2 2 2 2
Climatic proofing
1 Damp heat, constant As defined in As defined in As defined in As defined in As defined in
IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-78
1 Damp heat, cyclic As defined in
IEC 60068-2-30
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-30
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-30
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-30
As defined in
IEC 60068-2-30

1 Degree of protection IP66, IP67, IP69K

(at front) IP65 (at rear)
IP66, IP67, IP69K
(at front) IP65 (at rear)
IP66, IP67, IP69K
(at front) IP65 (at rear)
IP66, IP67, IP69K
(at front) IP65 (at rear)
IP66, IP67, IP69K
(at front) IP65 (at rear)
Ambient air temperature 1
1 Open °C –30 – +70 –30 – +70 –30 – +70 –30 – +70 –25 – +70
Storage °C –30 – +80 –30 – +80 –30 – +80 –30 – +80 –30 – +80
1 Mounting position Any Any Any Any Any

1 Mechanical shock resistance for a shock

duration of 11 ms
g >30 >30 >30 >30 >30

Contacts
1 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Vac M12A/unterminated: M12A/unterminated: M12A/unterminated: M12A/unterminated: M12A/unterminated:
4000 M8: 800 4000 M8: 800 4000 M8: 800 4000 M8: 800 4000 M8: 800
1 Rated insulation voltage Ui V M12A/unterminated: M12A/unterminated: M12A/unterminated: M12A/unterminated: M12A/unterminated:
250 M8: 30 250 M8: 30 250 M8: 30 250 M8: 30 250 M8: 30
1 Overvoltage category/degree of pollution III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3
Control circuit reliability at 17 Vdc/7 mA HF
1 NO (statistically determined) 1 failure per 17 x 106 1 failure per 17 x 106 1 failure per 17 x 106 1 failure per 17 x 106 —
operations operations operations operations
1 NC (statistically determined) 1 failure per 0.9 x 106 1 failure per 0.9 x 106 1 failure per 0.9 x 106 1 failure per 0.9 x 106 —
operations operations operations operations
1 Fuse gG/gL A 4 4 4 4 4
Conditional short-circuit current Iq kA 1 1 1 1 1
1 Switching capacity
Rated operational current Ie A
1 AC-15: 24 V Ie A 4 4 4 4 —
DC-13: 24 V Ie A 3 3 3 3 —
1 Cable characteristics
Versions M12A/ M12A/M8/ M12A/M8/ M12A/M8/ M12A/M8/
1 unterminated unterminated unterminated unterminated unterminated
Material PUR PUR PUR PUR PUR
1 Diameter x mm 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7
Actuator travel and actuation force as per — — — — —
1 DIN EN 60947-5-1, K.5.4.1
Positive opening sequence mm 4.65 4.65 4.65 4.65 —
1 Maximum travel mm 5.11 5.7 5.7 5.7 —
Minimum force for positive opening N K01 = 15/ K01 = 15/ K01 = 15/ K01 = 15/ —
1 K11 = 20/K02 = 34 K11 = 20/K02 = 30 K11 = 20/K02 = 35 K11 = 20/K02 = 36

Note
1 1 Applicable for C22 with pigtail options.

V7-T1-192 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail
1.7
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [inches]
1
Pushbuttons, M12A 1
C30C-FD(R)(L)-…-P5 1
1
M20 x 1.5
1
Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81) 1
1
1.5–5.5
36.0
[1.42]
1
[0.06–0.22]
2.65 1
[0.10]
53.3 [2.10] 1
Pushbuttons, M8 1
C30C-FD(R)(L)-…-P32
1
1
M20 x 1.5
1
Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81) 1
1
1.5–5.5
36.0
[1.42] 1
[0.06–0.22]
2.65
[0.10]
1
53.3 [2.10]
1
Pushbuttons, Unterminated Cable End 1
C30C-FD(R)(L)-…-P62/-65
1
1
M20 x 1.5
1
Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81) 1
1
36.0
1.5–5.5
[0.06–0.22]
[1.42] 1
2.65
[0.10] 1
53.3 [2.10]
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-193
 1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Global Compact 30 mm Pilot Devices—C30 Flat with Pigtail

Approximate Dimensions in mm [inches]

1
Indicator Lights, M12A
1 C30C-FL-…-P5

1
1 M20 x 1.5

1 Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81)
1
1 36.0
1.5–5.5 [1.42]
1 [0.06–0.22] 4.82
[0.19]
1 2.65
[0.10]

1 53.3 [2.10]

1 Indicator Lights, M8
C30C-FL-…-P32
1
1
M20 x 1.5
1
Ø35.39 46.0
1 (Ø1.39) (1.81)

1
1 1.5–5.5
36.0
[1.42]
[0.06–0.22] 4.82
1 [0.19]
2.65
1 [0.10]
53.3 [2.10]
1
Indicator Lights, Unterminated Cable End
1
C30C-FL-…-24-P62/-P65
1
1 M20 x 1.5

1 Ø35.39 46.0
(Ø1.39) (1.81)
1
1
1.5–5.5 36.0
1 [0.06–0.22] 4.82
[1.42]

[0.19]
1 2.65
[0.10]
1 53.3 [2.10]

V7-T1-194 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Contents
Description Page
1
30.5 mm Square Multifunction 1
Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-196 1
Product Selection
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-197 1
Operator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-200
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-206 1
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-207
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-210 1
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-211
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-212 1
1
1
1
Standards and 1
Product Description Features Certifications
The E30 industrial pushbutton Type E30 control units consist Die Cast Construction ● UL Listed—File No.
1
and indicating light line from of a basic operator with one E131568
Eaton’s Electrical Sector or more buttons and lenses
Each operator has high
pressure type seals to ● CSA Certified—File No.
1
features a wide selection of and contact block selection prevent the passage of oil LR68551
square, multifunction dependent on the specific and other contaminants 1
operators which conveniently operator configuration. through the operator into the
mount in a standard 30.5 mm
● Pushbutton operators will contact structure or panel 1
(1-13/64 in) diameter panel interior. Each operator uses a
hole. Up to six input and accommodate up to four Ingress Protection
indicating functions can be single depth stackable Buna N cork gasket between
● Single and dual indicating
1
contact blocks behind each the mounting flange on the
grouped into a single operator and the panel to lights
operating head, saving operating button, up to
maintain oiltightness. ● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 1
valuable panel space. eight circuits maximum.
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Attractive square operator ● Indicating lights are 1
styling, coupled with custom supplied complete with ● All other operators
either a transformer light
legending of colored buttons
and lenses and many special unit up to 600 Vac supply
● UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
4, 4X, 12, 13
1
function accessories, makes line voltage or full voltage
E30 components ideally light unit up to 120 Vac/Vdc 1
suited for use on control supply line voltage.
consoles and for a variety of ● Combination pushbutton 1
industrial OEM applications. with indicating light
operators are supplied 1
complete with a
transformer or full voltage
unit. Contact blocks must
1
be ordered separately, up to
four circuits maximum. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-195
 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Product Identification
1
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
1
Multifunction Operator
Upper Contact Block
(see Pages V7-T1-197 to V7-T1-199)
1 Operating Plunger Quarter Turn Screw—
Mounts Locking Ring to Operator

1 Gasket
Single Circuit
Contact Block
1
1
1 Buttons and Lenses Supplied Retaining Nut
Blank or with Custom Secures Operator
1 Legend(s) to Panel
(see Pages V7-T1-200 to
Lower Contact
1 V7-T1-204)
Block Operating Locking Ring—Supplied with
Operator—Serves as Mount Transformer or
Plunger Two Circuit
for Light Element and Full Voltage Light
1 Contact Blocks Element—Supplied
Contact Block
with Operator

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-196 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Product Selection
1
Operators
1
When Ordering a Complete E30 Control Unit Specify
Catalog Number of … Ordering Example (E30AB) 1
Operator E30KB130 “START”
Button(s) E30KB231 “STOP”
1
Contact block(s) E30KLA1 1NO
1
Accessories (if required) E30KLA2 1NC
1
Square Multifunction Operators 1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Single Button Operator Single Button Operator/without Button (Order Button Separately)
Button Type 1
Required 1 Operation Special Features Catalog Number
Momentary — E30AA 1
1
Shown with
Extended Button
1
Two Button Operator/without Buttons (Order Buttons Separately)
1
Two Button Operator
Button Types
Required 1
Operation
Top Button Bottom Button Special Features Catalog Number
1
Momentary Momentary — E30AB 1
Momentary Momentary With mechanical E30AC
interlock 1
Shown with Maintained Release — E30AD 2
Extended Buttons (all contacts) (all contacts)
1
Maintained Release With mechanical E30AP 23
(all contacts) (all contacts) interlock
1
Two Button Operator with Long (OFF) Release Bar—Includes OFF Bar/Button
1
Two Button Operator
(Order Other Buttons Separately)
Operation
1
Button Types
Required 45 Top Button Bottom Button Special Features Catalog Number
1
Maintained Maintained — E30AF
1
Maintained Maintained With mechanical E30AG
Shown with Long
interlock
Release Bar
Maintained Momentary With mechanical E30AH
1
interlock
Maintained Maintained Top button operates E30AK 6
1
(all contacts) (bottom contacts only) both top and
bottom contacts 1
Notes
1 Order from table on Page V7-T1-200. 1
2 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
3 Buttons are interlocked so that one of the two is maintained at all times. 1
Depressing the other button releases the maintained button and maintains the depressed button.
4 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch.

For other colors or markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. 1
For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR100.
5 Order from table on Page V7-T1-201.
6 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-197
 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1 Two Button Operator with (OFF) Release—Includes OFF Bar/Button(s)

(Order Other Buttons Separately)
1 Button Types Operation
Required 12 Top Button Bottom Button Special Features Catalog Number
1 Two Button Operator Maintained Momentary Release bar for E30AL
top button
1
1
1 Shown with Release
Bar for Top Button
1 Two Button Operator Maintained Maintained Individual release E30AN
bars for each button
1 Maintained Maintained Individual release E30AM
with interlock with interlock bars for each button
1
1 Shown with Release
Bars for Each Button
1
1 Single Indicating Single Indicating Light Unit/without Lens (Order Lens Separately)
Light Unit Type of Light Element
1 Transformer Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC) (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
1 Lens Type
Required 3 Voltage
Lamp
Number 4 Catalog Number Voltage
Lamp
Number 4 Catalog Number

1 Shown with Lens

120 #259 E30BA 24 24PSB E30BJ
120 120PSB E30BM
1
1
1 Dual Indicating Dual Indicating Light Unit/without Lenses (Order Lenses Separately)
Light Unit Type of Light Element
1 Transformer Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC) (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
1 Lens Types Lamp Lamp
Required 5 Voltage Number 4 Catalog Number Voltage Number 4 Catalog Number
1 120 6PSB E30CA 24 24PSB E30CJ
Shown with Lens 120 120PSB E30CM
1
1
Notes
1 1 Order from table on Page V7-T1-201.
2 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or

markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of
1 standard red release bar, order E30KR101.
3 Order from table on Page V7-T1-202.

1 4 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED part numbers, see table on Page V7-T1-210.
5 Order from table on Page V7-T1-203.

1
1
1

V7-T1-198 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Single Button Operator Single Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Button or Lens
and Indicating Light (Order Button and Lens Separately) 1
Type of Light Element
Transformer Full Voltage 1
Button and Operation (60/50 Hertz AC) (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lens Types
Required 1
(Bottom
Button) Voltage
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number Voltage
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number
1
Shown with Button
and Lens
Momentary 120 6PSB E30DA 24 24PSB E30DX3 1
120 120PSB E30DF
1
1
Single Button Operator Single Button Operator with (OFF) Release Bar and Indicating Light—
Includes OFF Bar/Button (Order Other Button and Lens Separately)
1
with Release Bar and
Indicating Light
Type of Light Element 1
Transformer Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC) (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Button and
Lens Types
Operation
(Bottom Lamp Lamp
1
Required 1 Button) Voltage Number 3 Catalog Number Voltage Number 2 Catalog Number
Maintained 120 6PSB E30DG 24 24PSB E30DX13
1
Shown with Button
and Lens 120 120PSB E30DM
1
1
Two Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Buttons or Lens
1
Two Button Operator
with Indicating Light (Order Buttons and Lens Separately)
Type of Light Element
1
Transformer Full Voltage
Button and (60/50 Hertz AC) (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) 1
Lens Types Button Lamp Lamp
Required 4 Operation Voltage Number 2 Catalog Number Voltage Number 2 Catalog Number 1
Shown with Button Momentary 120 6PSB E30EA 24 24PSB E30EX3
and Lens
120 120PSB E30EF 1
Momentary 120 6PSB E30EG 24 24PSB E30EX13
with
120 120PSB E30EM
1
interlock
1
Two Button Operator Two Button Operator with Dual Indicating Lights/without Buttons and Lens 1
with Dual Indicating Type of Light Element
Lights
Transformer Full Voltage 1
Button and (60/50 Hertz AC) (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Lens Types
Required 1
Button
Operation Voltage
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number Voltage
Lamp
Number 2 Catalog Number
1
Momentary 120 6PSB E30JA 24 24PSB E30JX3 1
120 120PSB E30JF
Shown with Button
and Lens 1
Notes
1
1 Order from tables on Pages V7-T1-200 to V7-T1-204.
2 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED part numbers, see table on Page V7-T1-210. 1
3 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or

markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of
standard red release bar, order E30KR101.
1
4 Order from tables on Pages V7-T1-202 and V7-T1-203.
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-199
 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Operator Components
1
Operating Buttons Only
1
Type A Extended Type A Buttons with Standard Markings 1
1 Button Button Extended Button Short Button Extended Button Short Button
Application Color Marking Catalog Number Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Black Blank E30KA100 E30KA150 Green START E30KA330 E30KA380
START — E30KA180 Yellow Blank E30KA400 E30KA450
1 Red Blank E30KA200 E30KA250 White Blank E30KA500 E30KA550
EMERG. STOP E30KA204 Gray Blank
1 — E30KA600 E30KA650
OFF E30KA218 E30KA268 Brown Blank E30KA700 E30KA750
1 STOP E30KA231 E30KA281 Orange Blank E30KA800 E30KA950
Green Blank E30KA300 E30KA350 Blue Blank E30KA900 E30KA950
1
1 Type B Extended Type B Buttons with Standard Markings 2
Button Button Extended Button Short Button Extended Button Short Button
1 Application Color Marking Catalog Number Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number Catalog Number
Black Blank E30KB100 E30KB150 Black REVERSE E30KB125 E30KB175
1 AUTO E30KB101 E30KB151 RUN E30KB126 E30KB176
CLOSE E30KB102 E30KB152 SLOW E30KB128 E30KB178
1
DOWN E30KB103 E30KB153 START E30KB130 E30KB180

1 FAST E30KB105 E30KB155 TEST E30KB132 E30KB182

FORWARD E30KB107 E30KB157 UP E30KB134 E30KB184
1 HIGH E30KB109 E30KB159 Red Blank E30KB200 E30KB250
IN E30KB110 E30KB160 EMERG. STOP E30KB204 —
1 INCH E30KB111 E30KB161 OFF E30KB218 E30KB268

1 JOG E30KB112 E30KB162 STOP E30KB231 E30KB281

JOG FOR. E30KB113 E30KB163 Green Blank E30KB300 E30KB350
1 JOG REV. E30KB114 E30KB164 START E30KB330 E30KB380
LOW E30KB115 E30KB165 Yellow Blank E30KB400 E30KB450
1 LOWER E30KB116 E30KB166 White Blank E30KB500 E30KB550
MAN E30KB117 E30KB167 AUTO E30KB501 —
1 ON E30KB119 E30KB169 HAND E30KB508 —

1 OPEN E30KB120 E30KB170 Gray Blank E30KB600 E30KB650

OUT E30KB121 E30KB171 Brown Blank E30KB700 E30KB750
1 RAISE E30KB122 E30KB172 Orange Blank E30KB800 E30KB850
RESET E30KB124 E30KB174 Blue Blank E30KB900 E30KB950
1 Notes
1 Use with operator E30AA, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
1 2 Use with operators E30AB thru AE, AL and DA thru DF, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-200 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Type C Extended Type C Buttons with Standard Markings 1
Button Button Extended Button Short Button Extended Button Short Button
1
Application Color Marking Catalog Number Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number Catalog Number
Black Blank E30KC100 E30KC150 Black RESET E30KC124 E30KC174
1
AUTO REVERSE
E30KC101 E30KC151 E30KC125 E30KC175
1
CLOSE E30KC102 E30KC152 RUN E30KC126 E30KC176
DOWN E30KC103 E30KC153 SLOW E30KC128 E30KC178 1
FAST E30KC105 E30KC155 START E30KC130 E30KC180
FORWARD E30KC107 E30KC157 TEST E30KC132 E30KC182 1
HAND E30KC108 E30KC158 UP E30KC134 E30KC184
HIGH E30KC109 E30KC159 Red Blank E30KC200 E30KC250
1
IN E30KC110 E30KC160 OFF E30KC218 —
1
INCH E30KC111 E30KC161 STOP E30KC231 E30KC281
JOG E30KC112 E30KC162 Green Blank E30KC300 E30KC350 1
JOG FOR. E30KC113 E30KC163 START E30KC330 E30KC380
JOG REV. E30KC114 E30KC164 Yellow Blank E30KC400 E30KC450 1
LOW E30KC115 E30KC165 White Blank E30KC500 E30KC550
LOWER E30KC116 E30KC166 Gray Blank E30KC600 E30KC650
1
MAN E30KC117 E30KC167 Brown Blank E30KC700 E30KC750 1
ON E30KC119 E30KC169 Orange Blank E30KC800 E30KC850
OPEN E30KC120 E30KC170 Blue Blank E30KC900 E30KC950 1
OUT E30KC121 E30KC171
RAISE E30KC122 E30KC172
1
Note
1 Use with operators E30AF thru AK, AL thru AM and DG thru DM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-201
 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Operating Buttons and Lens Only

1 Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking 1

1 Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.

White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
1 Type E Buttons with Standard Markings 2
Type E Button
1 Button
Application Color Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number Color Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number

1 Black Blank E30KE100 Black RESET E30KE124

CLOSE E30KE102 REVERSE E30KE125
1 DOWN E30KE103 RUN E30KE126
FAST E30KE105 SLOW E30KE128
1 FORWARD E30KE107 START E30KE130
HIGH TEST
1 E30KE109 E30KE132
IN E30KE110 UP E30KE134
1 INCH E30KE111 Red Blank E30KE200
JOG E30KE112 OFF E30KE218
1 JOG FOR. E30KE113 STOP E30KE231
JOG REV. E30KE114 Green Blank E30KE300
1 LOW E30KE115 START E30KE330

1 LOWER E30KE116 Yellow Blank E30KE400

ON E30KE119 White Blank E30KE500
1 OPEN E30KE120 Gray Blank E30KE600
OUT E30KE121 Brown Blank E30KE700
1 PHASE E30KE122 Orange Blank E30KE800
Blue Blank E30KE900
1
1 Type F Lenses with Standard Markings 3
Type F Lens
1 Button
Application Color Marking Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number

1 Red Blank E30KF10 Green OFF E30KF22

MOTOR RUN E30KF11 Amber Blank E30KF30
1 ON E30KF12 Blue Blank E30KF40
POWER ON E30KF13 Clear Blank E30KF50
1 Green Blank E30KF20 White Blank E30KF60
MOTOR STOP E30KF21
1 MOTOR RUN E30KF23

1 Notes
1 For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on

1 Pages V7-T1-207 to V7-T1-209.

2 Use with operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and JA thru JM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
3 Use with operators E30BA thru BY, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-202 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Operating Lens Only
Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking 1 1
Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
1

Type G Lenses with Standard Markings 2

1
Type G Lens
Lens
Application Color Marking Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number
1
Red Blank E30KG10 Green OFF E30KG22 1
MOTOR RUN E30KG11 READY E30KG23
ON E30KG12 Amber Blank E30KG30 1
POWER ON E30KG13 Blue Blank E30KG40
Green Blank E30KG20 Clear Blank E30KG50
1
MOTOR RUN White Blank
E30KG24 E30KG60
1
MOTOR STOP E30KG21

1
Type J Lens Type J Lenses with Standard Markings 3 1
Lens
Application Color Marking Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number
1
Red Blank E30KJ10 Green OFF E30KJ22
MOTOR RUN E30KJ11 ON E30KJ24 1
ON E30KJ12 Amber Blank E30KJ30
POWER ON E30KJ13 Blue Blank E30KJ40
1
MOTOR STOP E30KJ14 Clear Blank E30KJ50
Green Blank E30KJ20 White Blank E30KJ60
1
MOTOR STOP E30KJ21 1
MOTOR RUN E30KJ23
1
Type K Lenses Type K Lenses with Standard Markings (Sold in Pairs Only) 4 1
Color Marking
Lens Left Hand Right Hand Left Hand Right Hand 1
Application Lens Lens Lens Lens Catalog Number
Red Red ON ON E30KK12 1
Green ON OFF E30KK13
Green OFF OFF E30KK22
1
Red OFF ON E30KK23
1
Notes
1 For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on 1
Pages V7-T1-207 to V7-T1-209.
2 Use with operators E30CA thru CM and DA thru DM, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high except MOTOR RUN,

POWER ON and MOTOR STOP are 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.

1
3 Use with operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and GA thru GM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
4 Use with operators E30JA thru JW, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high 1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-203
 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Type K Lenses Type K Lenses—Blank (Sold in Pairs Only)

1 Color Color
Left Hand Right Hand Left Hand Right Hand
1 Lens Lens Catalog Number Lens Lens Catalog Number
Red Red E30KK10 Blue Red E30KK41
1 Green E30KK11 Green E30KK42

1 Amber E30KK17 Amber E30KK43

Blue E30KK14 Blue E30KK40
1 Clear E30KK15 Clear E30KK45
White E30KK16 White E30KK46
1 Green Red E30KK21 Clear Red E30KK51
Green E30KK20 Green E30KK52
1 Amber E30KK27 Amber E30KK53

1 Blue E30KK24 Blue E30KK54

Clear E30KK25 Clear E30KK50
1 White E30KK26 White E30KK56
Amber Red E30KK31 White Red E30KK61
1 Green E30KK32 Green E30KK62
Amber Amber
1 E30KK30 E30KK63
Blue E30KK34 Blue E30KK64
1 Clear E30KK35 Clear E30KK65
White E30KK36 White E30KK60
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-204 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks—Molded, phenolic construction. Mounting Positions
1
Enclosed silver contacts with reliability “nibs” that improve the
reliability of switching performance under dry circuit, corrosive Upper Contact Block Stack Operating Plunger 1
atmosphere and fine dust conditions. For more extreme Upper Contact
conditions, the logic level contact blocks described below are 1 2 3
Block Stack 1
recommended. 4
Contact Block
Logic Level Contact Blocks—Feature palladium contacts. 5 6
Mounting
Positions
1
Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for 7 8
voltages and currents approaching zero. When mounted in an
Lower Contact Block Stack Lower Contact 1
enclosure rated for highly corrosive environments, logic level Operating Plunger Block Stack
contact blocks can be used where exposure to chemicals may
cause failure to other types of materials. Contact Blocks Can Be Mounted in
1
Positions Listed Below
Mounting Limitations
Catalog Number
of Operator Upper Stack Lower Stack
1
See the contact block mounting limitations for Type E30 E30AA thru E30AM 1 1-2-3-4 5-6-7-8
pushbutton and combination pushbutton and light operators on 1
E30BA thru E30CM None None
this page. Mounting positions 1 thru 8 indicate single depth
contact blocks. Each of these positions can represent either a E30DA thru E30DM None 5-6-7-8 1
single circuit 600 volt block or a two-circuit 120 volt block. The E30EA thru E30GM 2-3-4 6-7-8
two-circuit 600 volt block requires two of the numbered
E30JA thru E30JM 3-4 7-8 1
positions shown.
1
Contact Block Selection
Contact Block Type 2 1
Pressure Terminals Quick Connect Terminals 3
Single Circuit,
Screw Terminals
Circuit
Standard
Catalog Number
Logic Level
Catalog Number
Standard
Catalog Number
1
1NO 600 Vac, 250 Vdc—Single Circuit 1
E30KLA1 E30KLAE1 E30KLB1
Two Circuit, 1NC E30KLA2 E30KLAE2 E30KLB2 1
Screw Terminals
1NO-1NC 600 Vac, 250 Vdc—Two Circuit 1
E30KLA3 E30KLAE3 E30KLB3
2NO E30KLA4 E30KLAE4 E30KLB4 1
Two Circuit, Quick
Connect Terminals 1
2NC E30KLA5 E30KLAE5 E30KLB5
1
Special Contact Operation

120 Vac Only— 1NO-1NC

Overlapping
E30KLA6 4 — E30KLB6 4 1
Two Circuit

2NO E30KLA7 4 — E30KLB7 4 1

(One early closing)
1
2NC E30KLA8 — E30KLB8
(One late opening)
1
1NO-1NC 120 Vac Only—Two Circuit
E30KLA9 5 — E30KLB9 5
1
Notes
1 Except operator E30AD, AJ or AK which will accommodate contact blocks 1, 2, 5 and 6 only. (See Mounting Positions above.)
1
2 Individually boxed contact blocks master packed 10 per carton.
3 Supplied with non-stacking screws. Limited to 2 contact blocks mounted in positions 1 and 5.
1
4 Do not use with maintained operators.
5 Contacts must be same polarity. 1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-205
 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Accessories
1
Accessories
1 Description Color/Type Catalog Number

1 E30KR_ Collar—Snap on mounting for assembly in the field. Permits

color coding of operator heads. Size: 1-19/32 x 1-19/32 x 9/16 in.
Black E30KR1
Red E30KR2
1 Green E30KR3
Yellow E30KR4
1 White E30KR5
Gray
1 E30KR6
Orange E30KR8
1 Blue E30KR9
Brown E30KR10
1 E30KT_ Shroud—Similar to collar above except for extension above Full shroud E30KT6
the face of button to prevent accidental actuation of button. (gray)
1 Full
Half shroud with an extension on only half the collar may be positioned
to protect top or bottom button.
Half shroud E30KT7
Shroud (gray)
1
Half
1 Shroud

1 E30KR3_ Guard—Two collars deep, removable slide prevents accidental Red with white slide E30KR31
operation. White slide can be marked with grease pencil.
Red with clear slide E30KR32
1
1
E30KR30 Terminal Block—2 terminals, each will accommodate 2-wire E30KR30
1 terminations.

1
1 E30KT_ Padlock Attachment for locking single button and bottom button
of multi-function operators in the depressed position. Locks NC
Short button E30KT1
Extended button E30KT2
contacts open or early closing NO contacts closed. Cannot be used
1 in conjunction with collar, shroud or boot.

1 E30KT3 Transparent Boot—Guards against ingress of foreign material E30KT3 1

and freezing rain. Note: If this boot is used in conjunction with
1 operator types AD or AE, an extended type button must be used
in the top position and a short button in the lower position.

1
E30KT_ Square Hole Plug—
1 Gray enameled E30KT4
Stainless steel E30KT5
1
E30KV1 Lamp and Lens Removal Tool—Will not fit Cat. No. E30B light units E30KV1
1 listed on Page V7-T1-198.

1 E22CW Octagonal Wrench for mounting operators to panel. E22CW

1
1 E30KV2 Button and Lens Removal Tool E30KV2

1
1 Note
1 Color coordinating collars, padlock attachments or legend plates cannot be used with operators equipped with a
1 transparent boot.

V7-T1-206 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Options
1
Markings and Legend Plates
Buttons or Lenses with Non- Ordering Instructions Ordering Example How to Use the Legend
1
Standard Horizontal Markings Location Figure
Markings not listed as
● Specify catalog number of
blank button or lens of
Green Type B button to be
marked with non-standard
1
No. of Characters per Line
Standard Markings below are desired color, plus suffix legend “ALL
considered non-standard. If “STAMP” for non-standard ELEVATORS DOWN.”
Buttons Lenses 1
more than one marking is or “STD” for standard Line Position
required on a button or lens, markings in order notes. Catalog No.: E30KB300STAMP
Letter Size: 1/8 in 7 A 8
1
order non-standard markings. See Pages V7-T1-200 to
Pos. A—ALL 9 C 8
V7-T1-204.
Pos. C—ELEVATORS 7 E 8
1
● Specify size, legend desired Pos. F—DOWN
and location in order notes 1
by alphas as shown in
example.
● Do not exceed maximum
1
number of legend
characters per line. 1
1
Legend Locations
Type A buttons and Type F lenses 1
1/8 in 9 B 8
9 A 8 1
9 D 8 9 D 8
(3 mm)
High 9 G 8
9 E 8
9 G 8
9 E 8
9 G 8 1
Char. 9 J 8 9 J 8
9 K 8 9 K 8
9 M 8
9 N 8
1
Type F lens only

A 8
1
9 B 8
3/16 in C 8
(5 mm)
9 F 8
9 D 8
9
9
B
F
8
8
9 E 8
F 8
1
High
Char. 9 H 8 9 J 8
9 K 8
9 K 8
J 8
1
L 8

Type B buttons and Type G lenses

1
1/8 in 3/16 in
(3 mm) 9 B 8
7 A 8
(5 mm) 8 B 8 1
9 C 8 9 C 8 9 C 8
High 9 D 8
High
7 F 8 8 D 8
Char. Char. 1
Type C buttons
1/8 in
5 B
4 A 3/16 in
5 B
1
(3 mm) 6 C 6 C (5 mm) 6 C
High
Char.
5 D 4 E High
Char.
5 D
1
Type D buttons Type K buttons
1/8 in 3/16 in 1/8 in 3/16 in
1
(3 mm) 5 A (5 mm) (3 mm) B 4 E 4 (5 mm) B 4 E 4
High
6 B
5 C High
6 B High High 1
Char. Char. Char. Char.
A 4 D 4
C 4 F 4 1
Type E buttons and Type J lenses 1
1/8 in 3/16 in
(3 mm) 9 B 8
7 A 8 (5 mm) 9 B 8 1
High 7 C 8 High
Char. Char.
1
Standard Markings 1
AUTO EMERG. STOP HAND INCH JOG REV. MAN. OPEN RESET SLOW TEST MOTOR STOP
CLOSE FAST HIGH JOG LOW OFF OUT REVERSE START UP POWER ON
DOWN FORWARD IN JOG FOR. LOWER ON RAISE RUN STOP MOTOR RUN READY
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-207
 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Legend Arrangements and Legend Locations

1
Legend plates Legend plates Legend plates
1 E30KM1 or KM11 E30KM5 or KM15 E30KM6 or KM16

B H G
1 Legend plates
E30KM4 or KM14 H

1 A
B K
A J
B
1 D M B K
Legend plates
1 E30KM3 or KM13
B F M C L
1 C
D M
D
1 Legend plates G
E30KM2 or KM12
A E
1 B F
B F M
D
1 A E L
C
1 B F
B F B F M

1
Legend Plates E30KN76 or KN76B
1
LINE B
1 L
I
L
I
N N Legend plates
1 E E E30KN76 or KN76B
1/8 in character
A C size only with a maximum
1 of six characters.

1
1
Maximum Number and Size of Permissible Legend Characters of Custom Stamped Legend Plates
1 Size and Maximum Number of Characters Per Line
One Span Two Span Three Span
1 No.of 3/32 in 1/8 in 3/16 in 3/32 in 1/8 in 3/16 in 3/32 in 1/8 in 3/16 in
Type Lines (2.5 mm) (3 mm) (5 mm) (2.5 mm) (3 mm) (5 mm) (2.5 mm) (3 mm) (5 mm)
1 Standard 1 13 10 10 30 22 22 47 34 34

1 Large 1 13 10 10 30 23 23 47 36 36
2 13 10 10 30 23 23 47 36 36
1 Characters available for non-standard markings
3/32 in (2.5 mm)—1/8 in (3 mm)—3/16 in (5 mm)

1 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ./—, 1234567890

1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-208 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Buttons or Lenses with Non-Standard Vertical Markings
1
Ordering Instructions Legend Plates When Ordering Legend Plates Ordering Example:
● Specify catalog number Legend plates for Type E30 with Markings Three span legend plate to be 1
of blank button or lens of compact pushbutton and ● Catalog number of blank marked “MASTER
desired color, selected indicating light operators legend plate CONTROL”, “STATION A” 1
from listings on Pages hook directly onto the ● Insert the following in and “STATION B.”
V7-T1-200 to V7-T1-204. operator and are clamped in order notes: 1
place when the operator Catalog No.: E30KM3STAMP
● Specify size, legend ● Legends required
locking nut behind the panel Letter Size: 1/8 in (3.2 mm)
desired, location and state
“vertically marked” in is secured.
● Size of characters— Pos. C—MASTER CONTROL 1
3/32, 1/8, 3/16 in (2.4, Pos. B—STATION A
order notes. 3.2, 4.8 mm)
Two and three span plates
are designed for use where
Pos. F—STATION B 1
Note: Specify either 1/8 or 3/16 in ● Positions of legends on
(3.2 or 4.8 mm) character height. two or more operators are one line standard and
Do not exceed maximum number mounted adjacent to each two line large legend
1
of characters as outlined in table other on minimum plates by alphas as
below. horizontal mounting shown in sketches on 1
centers. These legend plates following page.
Ordering Example:
Green Type K button to be
mount in the same manner as 1
single span units.
marked with “RUN” “ON.” Blank Legend Plates and Legend Plates
with Markings
1
Catalog No.: E30KK20STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 in (4.8 mm)
Type
One Span
Catalog Number
1
Vertically Marked
Pos. B—RUN
Pos. E—ON
Black
1
Standard— One Span Standard E30KM1

Maximum Number of Characters 1

Maximum Number of Characters
Description Type 1/8 in (3.2 mm) 3/16 in (4.8 mm) Large—One Span Large E30KM4
1
Buttons A 7 5 1
B 7 5
C 4 3 1
D 5 3
E 7 5
1
Lenses F 7 5
1
G 7 5
J 7 5 1
K 3 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-209
 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Replacement Parts
1
Replacement Light Units for E30 Components
1 Part Numbers—Receptacles without Lamps
Voltage Single Dual Single Light Single Light Dual Light
1 AC and DC Indicating Light Indicating Light Single Pushbutton Dual Pushbutton Dual Pushbutton
Full Voltage Type
1
6V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567

1 12V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567

18/24V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567
1 28V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567
32V 57-2579-3A 57-2568-2A 57-2568-2A — 57-2567
1 48V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567

1 120V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567

Transformer Type
1 120V 42-2672A 42-2663A 42-2663A 42-2671A 42-2664A
208V 42-2672-2A 42-2663-2A 42-2663-2A 42-2671-2A 42-2664-2A
1 240V 42-2672-3A 42-2663-3A 42-2663-3A 42-2671-3A 42-2664-3A
380V 42-2672-4A 42-2663-4A 42-2663-4A 42-2671-4A 42-2664-4A
1 480V 42-2672-5A 42-2663-5A 42-2663-5A 42-2671-5A 42-2664-5A

1 600V 42-2672-6A 42-2663-6A 42-2663-6A 42-2671-6A 42-2664-6A

Description and Part Numbers—Related Parts
1 Inner lens 28-1008 28-1010 28-1010 28-1010 28-1010
Retaining nut 15-1885 15-1885 15-1885 15-1885 15-1885
1 Gasket 16-2092 16-2092 16-2092 16-2092 16-2092
Locking ring 52-1116 52-1116 52-1116 52-1116 52-1116
1
1 Replacement Lamps for E30 Illuminated Operators
1 Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number
6PSB 6V T2 slide E30 transformer and full voltage 28-1022
1 12PSB 12V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1025
24PSB 24V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1026
1 28PSB 28V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1027
48PSB 48V T2 slide E30 full voltage
1 28-1028
60PSB 60V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1598

1 120PSB 120V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1029

#259 6.3V T3-1/4 wedge E30 single transformer 28-949
1
1 Replacement Lamps—Incandescent and LED
Incandescent Lamps LED Lamps
1 Lamp Manufacturer’s Base Eaton’s Eaton’s Part Number
Voltage Part Number Style Part Number Red Green Yellow Blue 1
1 6 6PSB T2 slide 28-1022 35-1523 35-1523-2 35-1523-3 35-1523-17
12 12PSB T2 slide
1 28-1025 35-1523-11 35-1523-12 35-1523-13 35-1523-18
24 24PSB T2 slide 28-1026 35-1523-4 35-1523-5 35-1523-6 35-1523-19

1 28 28PSB T2 slide 28-1027 35-1523-4 35-1523-5 35-1523-6 35-1523-19

48 48PSB T2 slide 28-1028 35-1523-14 35-1523-15 35-1523-16 35-1523-20
1 120 120PSB T2 slide 28-1029 35-1523-7 35-1523-8 35-1523-9 35-1523-21

1 Note
1 E30 blue LED bulbs may not provide sufficient intensity for some applications.

V7-T1-210 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
1.8
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Operator Specifications
Description Specification
1
Climate Conditions 1
Operating –20° to 150°F (–29° to 65°C)
Terminals 1
Light units Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) 1
Contact block Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) 1
Materials
Operator Zinc base die casting with a copper-nickel-chrome plated finish 1
Withstands the 200 hr. salt spray test in accordance with MIL Spec. QQ-M-151A and NEMA 4X testing.
Internal parts Including shafts, washers and springs, are made of stainless steel 1
Buttons and lenses Colorfast, wear resistant, molded acetal resin
Contact blocks Made of molded, heat resistant, mineral filled phenolic
1
Contact block plungers are molded of nylon filled phenolic
Contacts are silver 1
Reliability nibs These nibs combine a scrubbing action with high pressure density when the contacts are closed
They push through particles and films found on contact surfaces in industrial environments
Reliability nibs self-adjust to the application—dry circuit, normal or heavy-duty
1
1
Reliability Nibs
1
1
Dry Circuit Medium Duty Heavy-Duty
1
Electrical Ratings 1
Contact Blocks 1
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designation A600 and P300
Vac A600 Vdc P300 1
Description 120V 240V 480V 600V 24/28V 125V 250V
Make and emergency 60 30 15 12 5.73 1.1 0.55 1
interrupting capacity (Amps)
Normal load break (Amps) 6 3 1.5 1.2 5.73 1.1 0.55 1
Continuous current (Amps) 10 10 10 10 5 5 5
1
● UL A600/P300 nominal connect 10A
● 1NO, 1NC, 2NO, 2NC, 1NO-1NC, early make, late break and 1
overlapping configurations
● Mechanical positive drive operation on NC contacts 1
● Palladium alloy contact for logic level or highly corrosive
environments 1
Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and 1
Hostile Atmosphere Application Light Unit
Description Specification Description Specification 1
Maximum amperes 0.5A 1 Bulbs—Average Life
Maximum volts 120 Vac/Vdc Transformer type 20,000 hrs.
1
Resistor/direct voltage type 2,500 hrs. min. at rated voltage 1
LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.

Note 1
1 Logic level contact blocks are UL A600/P500 rated per table above.

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-211
 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30

Dimensions
1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Pushbutton Operators Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators
0.81 1.72 1.72 0.81 1.72
1 0.53 (20.6) (43.7) (43.7)
1.75 0.53 (20.6) (43.7) Operator
(13.5) (13.5) Types E30EA–
1.75 Plunger (44.5) E30GM
1 (44.5) 2 Circ. Extends to
Cont. Blocks 0.25 (6.4) 1.13 Operator
(28.7) Types E30JA–
1.13 0.88
1 (28.7) 1.88
(47.8)
(22.4)
E30JW
Transformer
1.88
or Full Voltage
1 (47.8)
Light Element
1.47
1 1.47 Panel
(37.3)
Square 0.84
Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
Plungers
Extended
(37.3) 0.63 (16) 0.06 (1.5) Min. 0.88 0.88
Square Std. (21.3) 0.25 (6.4) Max. to 0.25 (6.4)
1 0.25 (6.4) Max. (22.4) (22.4)
Button 1 Circ.
0.78 (19.8) Ext. Button Cont. Blocks
1
Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators Indicating Light Operators
1 0.81 1.72 0.81 1.72
(20.6) (43.7) Full Voltage (20.6) (43.7)
1.75 0.53 1.75 0.53
1 (44.5) (13.5)
Types DF,
DM and DX (44.5) (13.5)

1.13 1.13 Operator

1 (28.7)
0.88
(22.4) Transformer (28.7) 0.88 Types E30BA–
E30BM
1.88 Types DA – DL 1.88 (22.4)
(47.8) (47.8)
1 Operator
Types E30CA–
E30CM
1 1.47
(37.3)
0.88 (22.4) 0.88 (22.4)
1.47
(37.3)
Square Panel Plunger Extends Square Panel
0.84 0.06 (1.5) Min. to 0.25 (6.4) on 0.84 0.06 (1.5) Min.
1 (21.3) 0.25 (6.4) Max. Contact Blocks (21.3) 0.25 (6.4) Max.

1 Padlocking Attachment and Half Shroud E30KT7 Drilling Dimensions—Minimum Spacing 12

0.69 1.63 a
1 (17.5) (41.3)

1 0.5 (12.7)

1 2.25 a Drill .14

0.75 (57) (3.5)
(19.1) 0.6
1 (15)

1.59
1 (40.4) 0.56 ø 1.20 (30.5)
1.44 1.13 (14.2)
Notes
1 (36.6)
0.11 (2.8)
(28.7)
1 Dimensions shown allow adequate space for the addition of one or two high legend plates
0.31 (7.9) and color coordinating collars.
Max. Dia. Hole
1 2 Locating nib hole or notch is 0.136 in (3.5 mm) drill. Alternate to drilling mounting holes use

Greenlee Tool Co. punch (No. 730-S) to punch the hole and (No. 730-K) to punch the notch.
Legend Plates
1
4.69 (119.1) Three Span
1 3.06 (77.7) Two Span
1.44
(36.6)
1 One Span
0.78
1 (19.8) 0.39
(9.9)

1 Standard 0.08 (1.9)

Large 0.02
1 0.05 (1.3) (0.5)

V7-T1-212 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Contents
Description Page
1
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-214
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-214 1
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-215
Product Selection 1
Point-of-Purchase Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-217
Non-Illuminated Momentary 1
Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-218
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-219 1
Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units . V7-T1-222
Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-223 1
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-224 1
Push-Pull Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-226
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-229 1
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-232
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-233 1
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-237
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-238
1
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-241
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . V7-T1-244
1
Joystick Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-245 1
Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-246
Roto-Push Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-249 1
Roto-Push Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-250
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-255 1
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-260
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-269 1
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-271
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-274 1
Drawings
Online 1
Product Description Features Application Description Standards and 1
The 30.5 mm pushbutton line ● Heavy-duty zinc die cast Certifications
features a zinc die cast construction
Contact Operation
● CE EN 60947-5-1 and
1
construction with chrome- Slow make and break. All
● Enclosed silver contacts 60947-5-5
plated housing and mounting with reliability nibs
normally closed contacts
● UL 508—File No. 131568
1
nut. The same durable have positive opening
● Diaphragm seals with operation, i.e., normally closed ● CSA C22.2 No. 14—File
construction is also available drainage holes contacts are forced open in No. LR68551 1
with the corrosive resistant
E34 line of pushbuttons.
● Grounding nibs on the the event of contact weld or
See E34 section on Pages operator casing spring breakage. 1
V7-T1-284 to V7-T1-325.
Benefits Ingress Protection 1
Reliability nibs improve When mounted in similarly
●

contact reliability even rated enclosure— 1

under dry circuit and fine
dust conditions
● Standard indicating lights 1
● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
● Drainage holes prevent
buildup of liquid inside the
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
operator which can prevent ● IEC IP65
operation in freezing ● Most other operators 1
environments ● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
● Grounding nibs bit through 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
paint and other coatings to
provide secure ground
● IEC IP65
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-213
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Product Overview
1
Reliability Nibs Grounding Nibs Diaphragm Seal with
1 Eaton’s contact blocks 10250T line operators have Drainage Holes
feature enclosed silver “grounding nibs”—four
1 contacts with pointed metal points on the operator Liquid Drainage
“reliability nibs” for reliable casting designed to bite Eaton’s pushbutton operators
performance from logic level through most paints and offer front of panel drainage
1 up to 600V. To ensure reliable other coatings on metal via holes in the operator
switching, nibs bite through panels to enhance the ground bushing. Hidden from view by
1 oxide which can form on silver connection when the operator the mounting nut, these
contacts, eliminating the is securely tightened. holes prevent buildup of liquid
1 need for expensive logic level
Grounding Nibs
inside the operator, which
blocks for most applications. can prevent operation in
1 Reliability Nibs Grounding
Nibs
freezing environments.
The holes also provide a route
for escaping liquid in high
1 pressure washdowns,
effectively relieving pressure
1 Dry Circuit
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
1 in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.
Medium Duty
1 Diaphragm Seal

1 Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Heavy-Duty
Drainage Hole
1 Flexible
Diaphragm
1 Reliability nibs improve
performance in dry circuit, Stainless
Steel
corrosive, fine dust and other Operating
1 contaminated atmospheres. Spring
Under normal environmental Colorfast
1 conditions, the minimum Molded
Button
operational voltage is 5V and
1 the minimum operational Drainage Hole
current is 1 mA, AC/DC. For Mounting Nut
1 operation under a wider range
of environmental conditions,
logic level contact blocks with
1 inert palladium tipped
contacts are recommended.
1
1
Product Identification
1
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Series
1
Terminal Clamps
Shipped Ready to Wire
1
1
1
1
1
1 Mounting Nut Legend Plate Operator Color Coded Plungers Stackable Contact
Red = NC Green = NO Blocks up to 12 Circuits
per Operator
1

V7-T1-214 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
1
1
10250T 10 1 – 1 1

1
10 = Flush
Operator
Blank
Circuit
= Operator only
1
11 = Extended 1 = 1NO-1NC
12 = 40 mm mushroom 2 = 2NO 1
17 = 65 mm mushroom Button Color 3 = 2NC
50 = 1/2 shroud vertical mount 51 = 1NC
51 = 1/2 shroud horizontal mount 1 = Black 5 = Gray 53 = 1NO 1
2 = Red 6 = White
3 = Green 8 = Blue
4 = Yellow 9 = Orange 1
1
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Push-Pulls
1
10250T 5 63 C47 – 1 1

1
Operator Circuit 1
5 = Two-position maintained LED Voltage Blank = Operator only
4 = Three-position mom push-mom pull Blank = Non-illuminated 1= 1NO-1NC
9 = Three-position mt push-mom pull Blank = Incandescent 2= 2NO 1
10 = Three-position mom push-mom pull 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc 3= 2NC
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
51 =
53 =
1NC
1NO
1
Incandescent LED
Light Unit Light Unit 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
Blank = Non-illuminated Blank = Non-illuminated
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc 1
2A = 120 Vac
89 = 24V/XFR 89L = 24V/XFR
2D = 120 Vdc
63 = 120V/XFR
64 = 208V/XFR
63L = 120V/XFR
64L = 208V/XFR
1
65 = 240V/XFR 65L = 240V/XFR Non-Illuminated Illuminated
82 = 277V/XFR 82L = 277V/XFR Button Incandescent LED Lens Type 1
66 = 380V/XFR 66L = 380V/XFR B60 = Black 40 mm C47 = RD = Red 40 mm
67 = 480V/XFR 67L = 480V/XFR
68 = 600V/XFR 68L = 600V/XFR
B62
B63
= Red 40 mm
= Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
C53 =
C48 =
ED = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
GD = Green 40 mm
1
69 = 6V/FV 97L = Full voltage B61 = Green 40 mm C49 = LD = Blue 40 mm
70 = 12V/FV
79 = 24V/FV
B64 = Blue 40 mm C50 = AD = Amber 40 mm 1
J60 = Black 65 mm C51 = WD = White 40 mm
83 = 32V/FV = Red 65 mm C52 = — = Clear 40 mm
80 = 120V/RES
J62
J63 = Red 65 mm—“E” STOP C57 = RS = Red side light 1
81 = 240V/RES J61 = Green 65 mm C63 = ES = Red side light—“E” STOP
J64 = Yellow 65 mm C58 =
C59 =
GS = Green side light
LS = Blue side light
1
C64 = AS = Amber side light
C60 = YS = Yellow side light 1
C61 = WS = White side light
C62 = — = Clear side light
C65 = RH = Red heavy-duty 1
C66 = GH = Green heavy-duty
C67 = AH = Amber heavy-duty 1
Note
1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-215
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
1
1 10250T 416 C21 – 1 1

1 Incandescent Light Unit LED Light Unit Circuit

416 = 24V/XFR 397L = Full voltage Incandescent Lens Color LED Lens Color LED Voltage Blank = Operator only
1 411 = 120V/XFR 416L = 24V/XFR C21 = Red RD = Red Blank = Incandescent 1= 1NO-1NC
412 = 240V/XFR 411L = 120V/XFR C22 = Green GD = Green 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc 2= 2NO
1 419 = 277V/XFR
413 = 380V/XFR
412L = 240V/XFR
419L = 277V/XFR
C23 = Yellow
C26 = White
YD = Yellow
WD = White
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
3=
51 =
2NC
1NC
414 = 480V/XFR 413L = 380V/XFR C24 = Blue LD = Blue 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc 53 = 1NO
1 415 = 600V/XFR 414L = 480V/XFR C43 = Amber AD = Amber 60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
473 = 6V/FV 415L = 600V/XFR C25 = Clear 2A = 120 Vac
474 = 12V/FV 2D = 120 Vdc
1 476 = 24V/FV
477 = 32V/FV
1 478 = 48V/FV
471 = 120V/RES
472 = 240V/RES
1
1 Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test

1 10250T 203N C1N 1

1
Light Unit Type LED Voltage
1 Standard—Incandescent
181N = 120V/XFR
Standard—LED
181L = 120V/XFR
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
182N = 240V/XFR 182L = 240V/XFR 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
1 198N = 277V/XFR 198L = 277V/XFR 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
183N = 380V/XFR 183L = 380V/XFR 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
184N = 480V/XFR 184L = 480V/XFR 60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
1 185N = 600V/XFR 185L = 600V/XFR 2A = 120 Vac
203N = 6V/FV 197L = Full voltage 2D = 120 Vdc
1 204N = 12V/FV
206N = 24V/FV
PresTest—LED
Plastic Glass Lens Color Plastic Glass Lens Color
221L = 120V/XFR
207N = 32V/FV
1 208N = 48V/FV
222L = 240V/XFR
223L = 380V/XFR
Standard/Master—Incandescent
C1N = C7N = Red
Standard/Master/PresTest—LED
RP = RG = Red
201N = 120V/RES
224L = 480V/XFR C2N = C8N = Green GP = GG = Green
202N = 240V/RES
1 226N = 120V/neon
225L = 600V/XFR
297L = Full voltage
C3N = — = Yellow YP = — = Yellow
227N = 240V/neon C6N = C12N = White WP = WG = White
C4N = C10N = Blue LP = LG = Blue
1 PresTest—Incandescent C19N = C9N = Amber AP = AG = Amber
221N = 120V/XFR C5N = C11N = Clear
222N = 240V/XFR
1 223N = 380V/XFR
PresTest—Incandescent
224N = 480V/XFR C21 = C13N = Red
C22 = C14N = Green
1 225N = 600V/XFR
232N = 6V/FV C23 = — = Yellow
LED Voltage
233N = 12V/FV C26 = C18N = White
Blank = Incandescent
1 235N = 24V/FV C24 =
C43 =
C16N = Blue
C15N = Amber 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
238N = 32V/FV 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
239N = 48V/FV C25 = C17N = Clear
1 231N = 120V/RES
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
240N = 240V/RES 60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
1 Master Test—Incandescent 2A = 120 Vac
187N = 120V/XFR
189N = 240 Vac—SS
1
1 Note
1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.

1
1
1

V7-T1-216 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Product Selection
1
Point-of-Purchase Packaging
1
Point-of-Purchase 10250T Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Devices
Packaged Pilot Device Product Description Catalog Number 1
Emergency Stop Operators
Red non-illuminated 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved 10250T5B62-1-POP
1
push-pull legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.
Red mushroom 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved 10250T32R-POP
1
pushbutton legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.
Red jumbo Engraved EMERG. STOP with 1NO-1NC contact block. 10250T33-POP 1
mushroom pushbutton
Momentary Pushbuttons 1
Black flush pushbutton 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved 10250T30B-POP
Green flush pushbutton
legend plates: START and JOG.
10250T30G-POP
1
Red extended
pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes one square engraved
legend plate: STOP.
10250T31R-POP
1
Indicating Lights
1
Red indicating light Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc with two extra lenses: Green and amber. 10250T206NC1N-POP
Also includes two square engraved legend plates: RUN and JOG.
Red indicating light Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc with two extra lenses: Green and Amber. 10250T34R-POP
1
Also includes one square engraved legend plate: RUN and JOG.
Illuminated Pushbuttons
1
Red illuminating
pushbutton
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc with 1NO-1NC contact block and two
extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes one square
10250T476C21-1-POP
1
engraved legend plate: POWER ON.
Red illuminating Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc with 1NO-1NC contact block and two 10250T411C21-1-POP 1
pushbutton extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes one square
engraved legend plate: POWER ON. 1
Selector Switches
Black knob two-position 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes three square engraved 10250T20KB-POP 1
selector switch legend plates: OFF/ON, HAND/AUTO and RUN/JOG.
Black knob three-position 2NO-2NC contact blocks. Also includes 1 square engraved 10250T22KB-POP 1
selector switch legend plate: HAND/OFF/AUTO.
Black knob three-position
selector switch
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes legend plate:
HAND/OFF/AUTO
10250T21KB-POP 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-217
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1 Pushbutton Units—Flush, Extended, Mushroom Head or Jumbo Mushroom Head Operators

Flush Button
1
1 Contact
Type Button Color
Flush Button
Catalog Number
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Mushroom Button
Catalog Number
Jumbo Mushroom
Catalog Number
1NO Black
1 10250T23B 10250T25B 10250T26B 10250T27B
Red 10250T23R 10250T112-53 10250T122-53 10250T172-53
1 Extended Button
Green 10250T23G 10250T25G 10250T26G 10250T27G
Yellow 10250T23Y 10250T25Y 10250T26Y 10250T27Y
1 Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-53
1NC Black 10250T101-51 10250T111-51 10250T121-51 10250T171-51
1 Red 10250T102-51 10250T25R 10250T26R 10250T27R

1 Mushroom Button
Green 10250T103-51 10250T113-51 10250T123-51 10250T173-51
Yellow 10250T104-51 10250T120-51 10250T124-51 10250T174-51
1 Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T29
1NO-1NC Black 10250T30B 10250T31B 10250T32B 10250T33B
1 Red 10250T30R 10250T31R 10250T32R 10250T33R
Green 10250T30G 10250T31G 10250T32G 10250T33G
1 Jumbo Mushroom Yellow 10250T30Y 10250T31Y 10250T32Y 10250T33Y

1 Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T33

2NO Black 10250T101-2 10250T111-2 10250T121-2 10250T171-2
1 Red 10250T102-2 10250T112-2 10250T122-2 10250T172-2
Green 10250T103-2 10250T113-2 10250T123-2 10250T173-2
1 Yellow 10250T104-2 10250T120-2 10250T124-2 10250T174-2
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP
1 — — — 10250T17213-2
2NC Black 10250T101-3 10250T111-3 10250T121-3 10250T171-3

1 Red 10250T102-3 10250T112-3 10250T122-3 10250T172-3

Green 10250T103-3 10250T113-3 10250T123-3 10250T173-3
1 Yellow 10250T104-3 10250T120-3 10250T124-3 10250T174-3
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-3
1
Note
1 1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-218 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Pushbuttons
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated 1
Note: To order complete assembled unit
Button Color Catalog Number
using one composite catalog number, 1
10250T10_ Flush button 1 Black 10250T101 add contact block and legend plate suffix
Red 10250T102 to the end of operator catalog number.
Example: 10250T101-1TS33
1
Green 10250T103
Yellow 10250T104 1
Gray 10250T105
White 10250T106
1
Blue 10250T108 1
Orange 10250T109
10250T11_ Extended button Black 10250T111
Operator
10250T101 1
Red 10250T112
Green 10250T113
1
Yellow 10250T120
1
White 10250T116
Blue 10250T118 1
Orange 10250T119
10250T5_ Half shrouded button Vertical Horizontal 1
Black 10250T501 10250T511
Red 10250T502 10250T512
1
Contact Block
Green 10250T503 10250T513 10250T1 1
Yellow 10250T504 10250T514
Gray 10250T505 10250T515 1
White 10250T506 10250T516
Blue 10250T508 10250T518
1
Orange 10250T509 10250T519
1
10250T12_ Mushroom button Black 10250T121
Red 10250T122 1
Green 10250T123
Yellow 10250T124
Legend Plate
10250TS33
1
Blue 10250T129
1
10250T17_ Jumbo mushroom button 2 Black 10250T171
Red 10250T172 1
Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250T17213
Green 10250T173
1
Yellow 10250T174
1
1
10250ED1164_ Low operating force— Black 10250ED1164-2
jumbo mushroom 23
Red 10250ED1164-3 1
Green 10250ED1164-4
Yellow 10250ED1164-5
1
Clear 10250ED1164
1
Notes
1
1 To order operator with factory assembled extended retaining nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications,

add suffix letter E to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T101E. 1

2 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
3 Operating force—Standard = 2.4 lb; low force = 1.6 lb.
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-219
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1
10250TA_ Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators
1 Description Catalog Number
Black flush and green flush 10250TA66
1 Black flush and long red 10250TA67
Black flush and red mushroom head 10250TA68
1 Black flush and lock-down red mushroom head 10250TA69 1

1 Black flush and red jumbo mushroom head 10250TA76

Green flush and long red 10250TA72
1 Black long and long red 10250TA73
Green flush and red mushroom head 10250TA77
1 Green flush and black flush 10250TA75

1
Lockout Pushbutton Operators with Padlock Attachments
1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1 The following pushbutton and (stopped position) or locking a locking, or choose the
mushroom operators include button in the up position (to “Spring Loaded” latch type
1 an integral padlock prevent starting). Select the where the padlock
attachment for applications “Hand” latch type which attachment springs into place
requiring lockout/tagout of functions as a momentary when the button is pressed.
1 specific machine functions. pushbutton until the operator Units accept a customer
They are available in styles presses the button and supplied 1/4 in padlock.
1 which allow locking of a moves the padlock
button in the down position attachment into position for
1
10250TA16 Padlockable in the Down Position 2
1 Operator Type Color Latch Type Catalog Number

1 Flush head Red Hand 10250TA16

Mushroom head Red Hand 10250TA42
1 Red Spring loaded 10250TA45
Jumbo head 3 Red Hand 10250TA52
1 Red Spring loaded 10250TA55
Red (EMERG. STOP) Spring loaded 10250ED952
1
1 Padlockable in the Up Position 2
Operator Type Color Latch Type Catalog Number
1 10250TA4_ Mushroom head Black Hand 10250TA41
Green Hand 10250TA43
1
1
1
10250TA5_ Jumbo mushroom Black Hand 10250TA51
head 3
1 Green Hand 10250TA53
Yellow Hand 10250TA54
1
1
Notes
1 Hand attachment must be manually moved into place for locking. Spring loaded: when operator is pressed—
attachment springs into place. Must be moved manually to release button.

1 1
2
NC contacts must be mounted behind lock-down mushroom head operator to ensure lockout.
Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included.
3 Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists.
1

V7-T1-220 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Key Pushbutton Operator
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
These devices incorporate an
integral locking mechanism
prevent operation (Locked
Up) or setting unit to lock
normal operation. With the
key in the center position,
1
which enables locking units in when the button is pressed these operators function as a
various positions (Locked (Push to Lock), requiring the normal momentary 1
Down), locking units to key to be inserted to return to pushbutton (Free).
1
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Key Operators Below
Listed operators have Replacement Keys 1
identical locks and keys Description Catalog Number
(Key Code H661) Catalog
Replacement keys 10250ED824
1
Number 10250ED824. For
(code H661)
dissimilar lock and key
combinations, see listing on
1
Page V7-T1-242.
1
Key Pushbutton Operator
10250T43_
Key Position and C
1
L R
Pushbutton Operations
Key Removal Vertical Mounting 1
1
Positions Catalog Number
Three-Position
1
Lock up Free Lock down All 10250T430
1
Lock up Free Lock down L and R 10250T431
Lock up Free Lock down C and R 10250T432 1
Two-Position
Lock up Free — L and C 10250T433 1
Lock up Free — L 10250T434
— Free Lock down C and R 10250T435
1
— Free Lock down R 10250T436 1
— Free Push to lock C and R 10250T437
— Free Push to lock R 10250T438 1
1
Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
10250ED1043-4 Operator Only with Button 1
Description Catalog Number
Latch-in, twist-to-release operator with red mushroom head button 10250ED1043-4 1
1
Note
1
1 Horizontal mounting available on request.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-221
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1 ● LED or incandescent
● Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
1 ● Plastic lenses

1
24V Full Voltage Illuminated Pushbutton Units
1 Illuminated Pushbutton Illuminated Pushbutton
LED/Lamp 1NO 1NO-1NC 1NC
1 Type Voltage Color Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
LED Lamp
1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Bayonet
base
10250T397LRD24-53 10250T397LRD24-1 10250T397LRD24-51
Green 10250T397LGD24-53 10250T397LGD24-1 10250T397LGD24-51
1 Amber 10250T397LAD24-53 10250T397LAD24-1 10250T397LAD24-51
Yellow 10250T397LYD24-53 10250T397LYD24-1 10250T397LYD24-51
1 Blue 10250T397LLD24-53 10250T397LLD24-1 10250T397LLD24-51
White 10250T397LWD24-53 10250T397LWD24-1 10250T397LWD24-51
1 120 Vac/Vdc Red 10250T397LRD2A-53 10250T397LRD2A-1 10250T397LRD2A-51
Green 10250T397LGD2A-53 10250T397LGD2A-1 10250T397LGD2A-51
1 Amber 10250T397LAD2A-53 10250T397LAD2A-1 10250T397LAD2A-51
Yellow 10250T397LYD2A-53 10250T397LYD2A-2 10250T397LYD2A-51
1 Blue 10250T397LLD2A-53 10250T397LLD2A-1 10250T397LLD2A-51
White 10250T397LWD2A-53 10250T397LWD2A-1 10250T397LWD2A-51
1 Transformer 120 Vac Red 10250T411LRD06-53 10250T411LRD06-1 10250T411LRD06-51
Green 10250T411LGD06-53 10250T411LGD06-1 10250T411LGD06-51
1 Amber 10250T411LAD06-53 10250T411LAD06-1 10250T411LAD06-51
Yellow 10250T411LYD06-53 10250T411LYD06-1 10250T411LYD06-51
1 Blue 10250T411LLD06-53 10250T411LLD06-1 10250T411LLD06-51
White
1 Incandescent Lamp
10250T411LWD06-53 10250T411LWD06-1 10250T411LWD06-51

1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 10250T476C21-53 10250T476C21-1 10250T476C21-51

Green 10250T476C22-53 10250T476C22-1 10250T476C22-51

1 Amber 10250T476C43-53 10250T476C43-1 10250T476C43-51

Yellow 10250T476C23-53 10250T476C23-1 10250T476C23-51
1 Blue 10250T476C24-53 10250T476C24-1 10250T476C24-51
Clear 10250T476C25-53 10250T476C25-1 10250T476C25-51
1 White 10250T476C26-53 10250T476C26-1 10250T476C26-51
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB 10250T471C21-53 10250T471C21-1 10250T471C21-51
1 Green 10250T471C22-53 10250T471C22-1 10250T471C22-51
Amber 10250T471C43-53 10250T471C43-1 10250T471C43-51
1 Yellow 10250T471C23-53 10250T471C23-1 10250T471C23-51
Blue 10250T471C24-53 10250T471C24-1 10250T471C24-51
1 Clear 10250T471C25-53 10250T471C25-1 10250T471C25-51
White 10250T471C26-53 10250T471C26-1 10250T471C26-51
1 Transformer 120 Vac Red #755 10250T75R 1 10250T76R 1 10250T77R 1
Green 10250T75G 1 10250T76G 1 10250T77G 1
1 Amber 10250T75A 1 10250T76A 1 10250T77A 1
Yellow 10250T75Y 1 10250T76Y 1 10250T77Y 1
1 Blue 10250T75B 1 10250T76B 1 10250T77B 1
Clear 10250T75C 1 10250T76C 1 10250T77C 1
1 White 10250T75W 1 10250T76W 1 10250T77W 1

1 Note
1 For flashing module catalog number 10250TFL1, add suffix code FM to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T75RFM.

1
1

V7-T1-222 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Indicating Light Units 1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
● LED or incandescent ● Standard and PresTest PresTest—This device monitored and connects 1
● Full voltage, resistor or types incorporates a press-to-test the lamp to a continuously
feature whereby depressing energized circuit for
transformer type ● Plastic lenses
the lens disconnects the light immediate detection of
1
from the source being faulty lamps.
1
24V Full Voltage Indicating Light Units 1
Illuminated Light LED/Lamp Indicating Light PresTest
Type Voltage Color Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
LED Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Bayonet 10250T197LRP24 10250T297LRP24
1
base
Green 10250T197LGP24 10250T297LGP24
120 Vac Transformer
Amber 10250T197LAP24 10250T297LAP24
1
PresTest
Yellow 10250T197LYP24 10250T297LYP24
Blue 10250T197LLP24 10250T297LLP24
1
White 10250T197LWP24 10250T297LWP24
1
120 Vac Red 10250T197LRP2A 10250T297LRP2A
Green 10250T197LGP2A 10250T297LGP2A 1
Amber 10250T197LAP2A 10250T297LAP2A
Yellow 10250T197LYP2A 10250T297LYP2A 1
Blue 10250T197LLP2A 10250T297LLP2A
White 10250T197LWP2A 10250T297LWP2A 1
Transformer 120 Vac Red 10250T181LRP06 10250T221LRP06
Green 10250T181LGP06 10250T221LGP06 1
Amber 10250T181LAP06 10250T221LAP06
Yellow 10250T181LYP06 10250T221LYP06 1
Blue 10250T181LLP06 10250T221LLP06
White 10250T181LWP06 10250T221LWP06
1
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 10250T206NC1N 10250T235NC21
1
Green 10250T206NC2N 10250T235NC22
1
Amber 10250T206NC19N 10250T235NC43
Yellow 10250T206NC3N 10250T235NC23 1
Blue 10250T206NC4N 10250T235NC24
Clear 10250T206NC5N 10250T235NC25 1
White 10250T206NC6N 10250T235NC26
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB 10250T201NC1N 10250T231NC21 1
Green 10250T201NC2N 10250T231NC22
Amber 10250T201NC19N 10250T231NC43 1
Yellow 10250T201NC3N 10250T231NC23
Blue 10250T201NC4N 10250T231NC24 1
Clear 10250T201NC5N 10250T231NC25
White 10250T201NC6N 10250T231NC26
1
Transformer 2 120 Vac Red #755 10250T34R 10250T74NR
Green 10250T34G 10250T74NG
1
Amber 10250T34A 10250T74NA
1
Yellow 10250T34Y 10250T74NY
Blue 10250T34B 10250T74NB 1
Clear 10250T34C 10250T74NC
White 10250T34W 10250T74NW 1
Notes
1 Standard indicating lights are rated UL (NEMA) 3S as well. 1
2 For flashing lamp add letter F to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T34RF.

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-223
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

1 ● LED or incandescent
● Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
1
1 Operators without Lens
Illuminated Pushbutton

1 LED/Lamp
Illuminated
Pushbutton Indicating Light PresTest Master Test
Type Voltage Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Incandescent Unit
Full voltage AC/DC 6 #755 10250T473 10250T203N 10250T232N —
1 12 #756 10250T474 10250T204N 10250T233N —
Indicating Light
1 24 #757 10250T476 10250T206N 10250T235N —
32 #1828 10250T477 10250T207N 10250T238N —
1 48 #1835 10250T478 10250T208N 10250T239N —
Resistor AC/DC 2 120 120MB 10250T471 10250T201N 10250T231N —
1 240 120MB 10250T472 10250T202N 10250T240N —
PresTest
Transformer AC only 3 24 #755
1 10250T416 — — —
120 10250T411 10250T181N 10250T221N —

1 240 10250T422 10250T182N 10250T222N —

277 10250T419 10250T198N — —
1 380 10250T413 10250T183N 10250T223N —
Master Test 480 10250T414 10250T184N 10250T224N —
1 600 10250T415 10250T185N 10250T225N —

1 Neon AC/DC 4 120 NE51H-R22 — 10250T226N — —

240 NE51H-R68 — 10250T227N — —
1 Solid-state 50/60 Hz only 120 120MB — — — 10250T189N
LED (LEDs not included) 1
1 Full voltage — Bayonet 10250T397L 10250T197L 10250T297L —
base
Transformer AC only 24 10250T416L — — —
1 120 10250T411L 10250T181L 10250T221L —

1 240 10250T412L 10250T182L 10250T222L —

277 10250T419L 10250T198L — —
1 380 10250T413L 10250T183L 10250T223L —
480 10250T414L 10250T184L 10250T224L —
1 600 10250T415L 10250T185L 10250T225L —

1 Notes
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color. See Page V7-T1-269 for LED Selection and Page V7-T1-216 for Catalog Numbering

System.
1 2 Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
3 For flashing lamp, add letter F to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T181NF.

1 4 Resistant to shock and vibration. For best illumination use amber, yellow or clear lens.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-224 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Plastic Indicating and Master Test Lenses
Plastic Glass
1
Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Red 10250TC1N 10250TC7N
1
Green 10250TC2N 10250TC8N
1
Glass Amber 10250TC19N 10250TC9N
Yellow 10250TC3N — 1
Blue 10250TC4N 10250TC10N
Clear 10250TC5N 10250TC11N 1
White 10250TC6N 10250TC12N
1

10250TC2_ Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses 1

Color Catalog Number
1
Red 10250TC21
Green 10250TC22 1
Yellow 10250TC23
Amber 10250TC43 1
Blue 10250TC24
Clear 10250TC25
1
White 10250TC26 1
1
Plastic PresTest Lenses

Color
Plastic
Catalog Number
Glass
Catalog Number
1
Red 10250TC21 10250TC13N 1
Green 10250TC22 10250TC14N
Glass Amber 10250TC43 10250TC15N 1
Yellow 10250TC23 —
Blue 10250TC24 10250TC16N
1
Clear 10250TC25 10250TC17N
1
White 10250TC26 10250TC18N
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-225
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Push-Pull Emergency Stops (Compliant with IEC 60947-5-5)

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1 ● Two- and three-position

● Non-illuminated
1 ● LONC contact block

1
10250T579C47-71X Two-Position Push-Pull Units
1 Operator Position 1
Pull Push Button Type/Color Lamp Type Voltage Catalog Number
1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Transformer 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T563C47-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Transformer 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T563C53-71X
1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Transformer 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T563LED06-71X

1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T579C47-71X

X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T579C53-71X
1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T580C47-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T580C53-71X
1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589C47-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589C53-71X
1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589LED06-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated LED Transformer 24 Vac
1 10250T589LRD06-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T597LED24-71X

1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T597LED2A-71X

X O 40 mm red—illuminated LED Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T597LRD24-71X
1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated LED Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T597LRD2A-71X
X O 40 mm red — — — 10250T5B62-71X
1 X O 40 mm red—EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T5B63-71X
X O 65 mm red — — — 10250T5J62-71X
1 X O 65 mm red—EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T5J63-71X

1 Note
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-226 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Two-Position Push-Pull Units
Operator Position 1
1
Pull Push Mounting Location
Button Type/Color
2
Contact
Type A B Catalog Number
2 1
Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull 1
10250T5B62-1X O X 40 mm/red 1NO 10250T5B62-1X
X O
1
1NC

1
10250T5B63-1X O X 40 mm engraved 1NO 10250T5B63-1X 1
X O EMERG. STOP/red
1NC 1
1
10250T5J63-1X O
X
X
O
65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NO 10250T5J63-1X
1
1NC
1
1
10250ED1080-2 O X 65 mm aluminum engraved 1NO 10250ED1080-2
X O EMERG. STOP/red 1
Special security 1NC
jumbo mushroom head 1
1
1
Button and Color Selection
Color Suffix Code Catalog Number 1
Standard Standard—40 mm
Red B62 10250TB62
1
Red (EMERG. STOP) B63 10250TB63 1
Green B61 10250TB61
Black B60 10250TB60 1
Blue B64 10250TB64
Jumbo Mushroom Jumbo Mushroom Head 3
1
Head (Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm
Red J62 10250TJ62 1
Red (EMERG. STOP) J63 10250TJ63
Green J61 10250TJ61
1
Black J60 10250TJ60 1
Yellow J64 10250TJ64

Notes 1
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table. 1
Example: 10250T5B64-1X.
3 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-227
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1
10250T_ Three-Position Push-Pull Units
1 Operator Position 1
Pull Intermediate Push Mounting Location
1 Button Type/Color 2
Contact
Type A B Catalog Number 2

1 Maintained Push, Momentary Pull

X O O 40 mm/black 1NC 10250T9B60-3X
1 X X O
40 mm/red 1NC 10250T9B62-3X
40 mm engraved 10250T9B63-3X
1 EMERG. STOP/red
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
1 X O O 40 mm/black 1NC 10250T4B60-3X
X X O
40 mm/red 1NC 10250T4B62-3X
1
O O X 40 mm/black 1NO 10250T10B60-1X
1 X O O
40 mm/red 1NC 10250T10B62-1X

1
1 Button and Color Selection
Color Suffix Code Catalog Number
1 Standard Standard—40 mm

1 Red B62 10250TB62

Red (EMERG. STOP) B63 10250TB63
1 Green B61 10250TB61
Black B60 10250TB60
1 Blue B64 10250TB64
Jumbo Mushroom Jumbo Mushroom Head 3
1 Head (Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm
Red J62 10250TJ62
1 Red (EMERG. STOP) J63 10250TJ63
Green
1 J61 10250TJ61
Black J60 10250TJ60
1 Yellow J64 10250TJ64

Notes
1 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table.

1 Example: 10250T5B64-1X.
3 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-228 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
● LED or incandescent 1
● Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
● Two-position maintained 1
1
Two-Position Push- Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
Pull Operator Operator Position 1 1
Maintained— Maintained—
Red Standard
Pull Push
Contact Mounting Location LED/Lamp Push-Pull 1
Lamp Type Voltage Type A B Number Catalog Number 2
O X LED Full Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Bayonet 10250T597LRD24-1X 1
X O base
120 Vac/Vdc 1NC 10250T597LRD2A-1X
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589LRD06-1X
1
120 Vac 10250T563LRD06-1X
1
O X Incandescent Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 10250T579C47-1X
X O
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120MB 10250T580C47-1X 1
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T589C47-1X
120 Vac 10250T563C47-1X 1

10250ED137_ Jumbo Lens Illuminated E-Stops 1

1
Contact
Lamp Button Type/Color Type Voltage Type Catalog Number
1
LED Two-position illuminated maintained push/pull— Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 10250ED1375
50 mm jumbo lens/red 1NC
LED Three-position illuminated momentary push/pull— Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 10250ED1376
1
50 mm jumbo lens/red 1NC
LED Three-position illuminated momentary push/pull— Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 10250ED1377
1
50 mm jumbo lens/red 1NC
LED Three-position illuminated maintained push/momentary pull— Full voltage 1NO 10250ED1378
1
50 mm lens/red 1NC

Notes
1
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on next page. Example: 10250T579C63-1X. 1
For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-235.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-229
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1
Lens and Color Selection
1 Incandescent LED
Color Suffix Code Suffix Code Catalog Number
1 Standard Standard—40 mm
Red C47 RD 10250TC47
1 Red (EMERG. STOP) C53 ED 10250TC53
Green
1 C48 GD 10250TC48
Blue C49 LD 10250TC49
1 Amber C50 AD 10250TC50
White C51 WD 10250TC51
1 Clear C52 CD 10250TC52
Side-Lighted Side-Lighted Aluminum—40 mm 1
1 Aluminum
Red C57 RS 10250TC57

1 Red (EMERG. STOP) C63 ES 10250TC63

Green C58 GS 10250TC58
1 Blue C59 LS 10250TC59
Amber C64 AS 10250TC64
1 Yellow C60 YS 10250TC60
White C61 WS 10250TC61
1 Clear C62 CS 10250TC62

1 Aluminum Transparent
Center
Aluminum Transparent Center—40 mm 1
Red C65 RH 10250TC65
1 Green C66 GH 10250TC66
Amber C67 AH 10250TC67
1
1 Jumbo Lens Jumbo Lens—50 mm
Red — — 10250TC77
1
1 Note
1 Clear anodized aluminum and colored lens.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-230 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Three-Position Push- Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Pull Operator Operator Position 1
1
Momentary— Maintained— Momentary—
Pull Intermediate Push Mounting Location LED/ Red Standard 1
Contact Lamp Push-Pull
Lamp Type Voltage Type A B Number Catalog Number 3
1
O O X LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Bayonet 10250T1097LRD24-1X
X O O base
120 Vac 1NC 10250T1097LRD2A-1X 1
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T1089LRD06-1X
120 Vac 10250T1063LRD06-1X 1
X O O Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Bayonet 10250T497LRD24-3X
X X O
120 Vac 1NC
base
10250T497LRD2A-3X
1
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T489LRD06-3X 1
120 Vac 10250T463LRD06-3X
O O X Incan- Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 10250T1079C47-1X 1
X O O descent
Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB 10250T1080C47-1X
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T1089C47-1X
1
120 Vac 10250T1063C47-1X
1
X O O Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 10250T479C47-3X
X X O
Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB 10250T480C47-3X 1
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T489C47-3X
120 Vac 10250T463C47-3X 1
1
Three-Position Push- Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Pull Operator Operator Position 1
1
Momentary— Maintained— Momentary—
Pull Intermediate Push Mounting Location LED/ Red Standard 1
Contact Lamp Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
Lamp Type Voltage Type A B Number
1
X O O LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Bayonet 10250T997LRD24-3X
X X O base
120 Vac 1NC 10250T997LRD2A-3X 1
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T989LRD06-3X
120 Vac 10250T963LRD06-3X 1
X O O Incan- Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 10250T979C47-3X
X X O descent
Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB 10250T980C47-3X
1
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T989C47-3X 1
120 Vac 10250T963C47-3X

Notes
1
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on Page V7-T1-230. 1
Example: 10250T1079C53-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-235.
3 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on Page V7-T1-230.

Example: 10250T979C53X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-235.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-231
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Potentiometers
1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1
Vertical or Horizontal 1 Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10%
One-Hole Mounting
1 Potentiometer
Ohms Catalog Number
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 23
1
1000 10250T331
1 2500 10250T332
5000 10250T338
1 10000 10250T333
25000 10250T334
1 50000 10250T335

1 Operator only 4 10250T330

Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings E34LP99
1 Notes
1 Shown with standard aluminum dial plate.

1 2 Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalog number.

Example: 10250T33136. To order separately, see footnote 3 below.

3 Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates,
1 order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
4 For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing

1 on Page V7-T1-279.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-232 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated push-pull ● Maintained—(Two- ● Momentary Pull, The operators, buttons,
1
pushbutton unit, arranged for position). Maintains in the Maintained Push—(Three- contact blocks, etc., are
one-hole mounting, can pulled or pushed position position). Spring returns to offered as building block 1
replace two pushbuttons and until manually actuated to intermediate position components that can be
a pilot light or the non- the opposite mode. when pulled. Maintains in intermixed to satisfy many 1
illuminated form can replace ● Momentary—(Three- pushed position until requirements. This minimizes
two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
position). Spring returns to manually returned to
intermediate (ready to
the need for a varied and
costly inventory.
1
an intermediate position
types: when pulled or pushed and reset) position. Maintained
released. stop holds circuit open and 1
will prevent other series
connected operators from 1
starting the system.
1
1
Two-Position Typical Applications
Maintained Push-Pull 1 Control Line—Diagram Operator Circuits Operator Mode 1
Three-wire Push-Pull Momentary 2NC START (mom.) Normal pos. STOP (mom.)
three-position L1 A Circuit Operator L2 push and pull contact block (maint.) 1
momentary 10250T4 10250T3
M OL
1
B Circuit M Momentary 1NO-1NC
1
push and pull contact block
10250T10 10250T1 1
Two-wire Push-Pull Maintained 1NC START (maint.) No STOP (maint.)
two-position
maintained
L1 Operator L2 push and pull
10250T5
contact block
10250T51
intermediate
position
1
M OL
1
A or B Circuit 1
Three-wire Push-Pull Maintained 2NC START (mom.) Normal pos. STOP (maint.)
momentary pull L1
maintained push
A Circuit Operator L2 push and
momentary
contact block
10250T3
(maint.) 1
M OL pull
10250T9 1
B Circuit M 1
Notes
A and B circuits shown in the application illustrations are defined in the “Application Guide” on the following page.
1
1 Shown without button on lens.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-233
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Application Guide
1 To assist in the selection of and adapter to the operator. Contact Circuit Locations
contact blocks, the sketch to The table below shows the
1 the right shows pictorially by effect of the push and pull
Locating Nib

symbols A and B locations of operations on either NO or

1 contact circuits after NC contacts. (X = contact
A
assembly of contact blocks closed, O = contact open).
1 B

1
1 10250T579C47-71X Push-Pull Operator Components
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
1 Out—Pull Intermediate In—Push

1 Contact Block Mounting Location

Type of Operator A B A B A B Contact Block 1 Catalog Number
1 Two-Position Operator without Lens

1 Maintained push-pull O
X
or
O
X
No intermediate
position
X
O
or
X
O
1NO
1NC
10250T5

1 O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
Maintained push-pull with O O No intermediate X X 1NO
1 anti-theft jumbo mushroom X
or
X position O
or
O 1NC
10250ED1080

O O X X 2NO
1 X X O O 2NC
Three-Position Operator without Lens
1 Momentary push-pull O O O O X O 1NO 10250T4 1
or or or
X X O X O O 1NC
1 O O O O X O 2NO
X X O X O O 2NC
1 Maintained push-momentary pull O O O O X O 1NO 10250T9 1
or or or
X X O X O O 1NC
1 O O O O X O 2NO
X X O X O O 2NC
1 Momentary push-pull O
or
O O
or
O X
or
X 1NO 10250T10 1
X X O O O O 1NC
1 O O O O X X 2NO
X X O O O O 2ND
1 Note
1 Maximum of two blocks, four circuits. Special function contact blocks shown on Page V7-T1-265 CANNOT be used with three-position push-pull operators 10250T4,

1 10250T9 or 10250T10.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-234 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Ordering Example with One Composite Number 1
Non-illuminated:
10250T5 + 10250TB62 + 10250T1 = 10250T5B62-1X
1
Incandescent: 1
10250T5 + 10250T79 + 10250TC47 + 10250T1 = 10250T579C47-1X
LED: 1
10250T5 + 10250T97L + 10250TC47 + Voltage code + 10250T1 = 10250T597LRD24-1X
1
06—6 Vac/Vdc 60—60 Vac/Vdc
12—12 Vac/Vdc 2A—120 Vac
24—24 Vac/Vdc 2D—120 Vdc
1
48—48 Vac/Vdc
1
Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Light Unit LED/Lamp
1
Type Type Voltage Number Catalog Number
LED Full voltage — Bayonet 10250T97L
1
1
(LEDs not included) base
Transformer 24
AC only 120
10250T89L
10250T63L 1
50/60 Hz 208 10250T64L
240
277
10250T65L
10250T82L
1
380 10250T66L
480 10250T67L 1
600 10250T68L
Incandescent Full voltage
AC or DC
6
12
10250T69
10250T70
1
24/28 10250T79
32 10250T83 1
Resistor 120 120MB 10250T80
AC or DC 240 10250T81 1
Transformer 24 #755 10250T89
AC only 120 10250T63 1
50/60 Hz 208 10250T64
240 10250T65
277 10250T82 1
380 10250T66
480
600
10250T67
10250T68
1
Note
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page V7-T1-269.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-235
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices

1 Incandescent LED
Lens Color Suffix Code Suffix Code 1 Catalog Number
1 Standard Standard
Red
1 C47 RD 10250TC47
Red (EMERG. STOP) C53 ED 10250TC53
1 Green C48 GD 10250TC48
Blue C49 LD 10250TC49
1 Amber C50 AD 10250TC50
White C51 WD 10250TC51
1 Clear C52 CD 10250TC52

1 Side-Lighted Anodized
Aluminum Ring
Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red C57 RS 10250TC57
1 Red (EMERG. STOP) C63 ES 10250TC63
Green C58 GS 10250TC58
1 Blue C59 LS 10250TC59
Amber C64 AS 10250TC64
1 Yellow C60 YS 10250TC60

1 White C61 WS 10250TC61

Clear C62 CS 10250TC62
1 Heavy-Duty Aluminum Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red C65 RH 10250TC65
1 Green C66 GH 10250TC66
Amber
1 C67 AH 10250TC67
White C68 — 10250TC68
1 Jumbo Lens Jumbo Lens—50 mm
Red — — 10250TC77
1
1
1 Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Color Suffix Code Catalog Number Legend Plates
1 Standard Standard For a complete listing
of available legend plates
1 Red B62 10250TB62
see Pages V7-T1-260 to
Red (EMERG. STOP) B63 10250TB63 V7-T1-262.
1 Green B61 10250TB61
Jumbo
Black B60 10250TB60 Standard
1 Blue B64 10250TB64
P R
S T
Jumbo Mushroom Head 2
1 Jumbo Mushroom
Head (Anodized) Aluminum
Red J62 10250TJ62
1 Red (EMERG. STOP) J63 10250TJ63

1 Green J61 10250TJ61

Black J60 10250TJ60
1 Yellow J64 10250TJ64

Notes
1 1 Suffix codes should only be used for assembling composite catalog numbers. To order lens above, order by catalog number.
2 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.

1
1
1

V7-T1-236 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Selector Switch Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
● Two-, three- and four-position maintained 1
● Non-illuminated and illuminated
1
Two-Position Two-Position Selector Switch 1
Maintained Switch Operator Position 1 Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Operator Contact Mounting Location Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever 1
Action 2 Type A B Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
X O 1NC 10250T20KB 10250T20LB 10250ED1117-KR 10250ED1117-LR 1
M M

O X 1NO 1
1
Three-Position Selector Switch
Three-Position
Maintained Switch
1
Operator Position 1 Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Operator Contact Mounting Location Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever 1
Action 2 Type A B Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
X O O M 1NO 10250T21KB 10250T21LB 10250ED1117-2KR 10250ED1117-2LR 1
M M

Three-Position
O O X 1NO
1
Maintained Switch X O O 1NO 10250T22KB 10250T22LB 10250ED1117-3KR 10250ED1117-3LR
1
O X O 2NC (Series)
1
O O X 1NO
1
Four-Position Selector Switch
1
Three-Position
Maintained Switch Operator Position 1 Non-Illuminated
Mounting Location Black Knob
Illuminated—120V Transformer 1
Operator Contact Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever
Action 2 Type A B Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
1
X O O O M M 1NC 10250T46KB 10250T46LB 10250ED1117-4KR 10250ED1117-4LR

O X O O M M 1NO
1
O O X O 1NO 1
O O O X 1NC 1
1
Color Selection
1
Illuminated Non-Illuminated
Code Code Code Code Code Code 1
Color Letter Color Letter Color Letter Color Letter Color Letter Color Letter
Red R White W Amber A Black B Green G Blue L 1
Green G Blue B Clear C Red R White W Orange O

Notes 1
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained.
3 To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Color Selection table. Example: 10250T20KG.
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-237
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Selector Switch Selection

1
1
1
1
1
Cam and Contact Block Selection Systematic Approach
1 Selector switches in their ● Up to six NO or NC Application: HAND-OFF- For the AUTO circuit, the
varied forms (two-position, contacts may be mounted AUTO selector switch. In this “X-O” diagram would look like
three-position and four- behind each plunger circuit, one incoming line is this:
1 position) are a big factor location for a total of distributed to two other
contributing to the great twelve contacts. Single outgoing circuits by the
1 flexibility of control that a well circuit contact blocks have switch. The two circuits can
HAND OFF AUTO

rounded line of “pushbuttons” only one plunger with the be looked at individually.
1 can achieve. Because of their other side of the block
Step 1: Elementary
O O X
flexibility, they tend to cause “open.” Therefore, single
Diagram. Putting them together, the
1 difficulty with product
selection and application.
circuit contact blocks
transmit motion to blocks Construct on paper, or in your complete “X-O” diagram is:
The following systematic behind them only for the mind, a simple elementary
1 approach should simplify position containing the diagram of the switching XOO
that task. circuit. scheme as follows: OOX
1 ● Each cam has two
Cam and contact block
separate lobes, each of HAND Outgoing Once the “X-O” diagram has
selection is better understood
1 if you: which operates one of the Incoming
OFF
Circuit been generated the next step
two contact block plungers Line is to select the cam and
Outgoing
1 ● Work with each incoming independently of each AUTO Circuit contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
and outgoing wire/circuit other. Those are identified
as position A (locating nib desired “X-O” functions.
1 separately.
side) and position B
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
The selection tables on the
● Recognize the terms NO From the elementary
and NC only identify the (opposite of locating nib). diagram, you can construct an following pages list the
1 type of contact by its mode The position designations “X-O” diagram which various types (shapes) of
before mounting to the give direction in selecting describes when the contacts cams by number to choose
1 operator. The “X-O” table and mounting of the are to be closed (X) or open from and the type of contact
(Page V7-T1-240) shows contact blocks. (O) in the various positions of and position to achieve the
1 how that contact will act Contact Circuit Locations the switch. The “X-O” for the function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.
after assembly to the HAND circuit looks like this:
1 operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
Locating Nib

HAND OFF AUTO

circuit, O = open circuit.
1 A

B X O O
1
In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
1 (HAND) but open in the
center and right.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-238 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Step 3: Cam Selection. Step 5: Selector Switch Example Selection Table
The cam you select Operator. Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3
1
determines the operation of Lastly, you have to choose No. “X-O” Pattern Top A Bottom B Top A Bottom B
all contact blocks mounted to from the many types of
1 X O O a —
1
the operator. It is selected on operators—knob and lever
the basis that it provides the in various colors or keyed. 1
simplest circuitry for the Also what combinations of NO NC NO
desired “X-O” diagram. The maintained and spring 4 O O X — —
selection tables show all the return functions are 1
“X-O” combinations. For the required. Selection of these NO NO
purpose of this example, the operators can be found on 1
applicable portion of those Page V7-T1-242. For the
Two-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
tables is shown on this page. example in step 4 you may
Desired Circuit and
1
want a three-position
Now to make the cam maintained black knob, Operator Position
selection, make a simple cam 3—Catalog Number Contact Blocks Required to 1
worksheet such as: 10250T1323. Accomplish Circuit Function
No. Top Plunger A Bottom Plunger B 1
Cam 2 Cam 3 The Complete Switch:
1 X O
or
XOO (A)NO-(B)NC (A)NO
10250T1323 with one
10250T2 or, for one
NC NC 1
OOX (B)NO (B)NO
composite catalog number, 2 O X
10250T21KB found on NO
or
NO
1
It becomes immediately Page V7-T1-237.
obvious that cam 3 is the Note 1
better choice for two Diagrams 1 Wired in series.

reasons, (1) the series

combination can be avoided
Circuits shown illustrate 1
connections to obtain a
making it simpler to wire, (2)
only two contacts are
selector switch circuit
combination and are shown
1
required, which is less with their appropriate line
expensive than the three diagrams. Field wiring of 1
contacts required by cam 2. jumper connections required
Step 4: Contact Block as shown. 1
Selection. X = Closed circuit
Having selected the cam, O = Open circuit
1
contact block selection is
simply a matter of gathering Wiring of Jumper 1
the A position and B position Connections
circuits into pairs which make
up the most convenient contact
1
block arrangement. If there is Series Connection
an imbalance in the number of 1
circuits under A or B, then
single circuit blocks must be 1
selected for these leftover Parallel Connection
circuits. 1
Back to the worksheet, Four-position selector
having selected cam 3 do switches are limited to four 1
this: contact blocks.

Contact Blocks
1
X O X ANO
O O X BNO
10250T2 For selection and number
of available contact blocks
1
per operator, see Pages
V7-T1-265 to V7-T1-268. 1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-239
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection

1 Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
1 Desired Circuit and Operator with Cam Code #2 Operator with Cam Code #3
Operator Position Mounting Location Mounting Location
1 Top Bottom Top Bottom
Plunger Plunger Plunger Plunger
1 No. A B A B
1 X O O
1 NO NC NO

2 X X O
1 NC NC

1 3 X O X

1 NO
NO NO
4 O O X
1
NO NO
1 5 O X X
NC
1 NC NO
6 O X O
1 NC NC NC

1
1 Four-Position Switch—Contact Block Selection
Contact Blocks Contact Blocks
1 Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function Function
1 Desired Circuit and Mounting Location Desired Circuit and Mounting Location
Operator Position Top Bottom Operator Position Top Bottom
1 No.
Plunger
A
Plunger
B No.
Plunger
A
Plunger
B

1 1 X O O O
NC
10 X O X O

1 2 O X O O NC
NO
NO
1 3 O O X O 11 X X X O

NO
1 4 O O O X NC
NC NO NO
1 5 X O O X 12 O X X X

1 NC NC
6 O X X O
NO NC
1 NO
NO NO
1 7 O O X X 13 X O X X

1 NO NC
8 X X O O NO
1 NC NC
NC NO

1 9 O X O X 14 X X O X

1 NO
NC
NC NO
NC
1

V7-T1-240 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Selector Switch Operators
1
Key Operators
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
Two-Position Key Operators with Cam 1
Maintained 1 Optional Key Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting
Positions Operator Action 2 Cam Code 3 Removal Positions 4 Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Two-position—60° throw 1 1, 2, 3 10250T1511_ 10250T1611_
M M
1
1 2 10250T1571_ 10250T1581_
M S 1
Three-position—60° throw M 2 1–7 10250T1522_ 10250T1622_
M M 3 10250T1523_ 10250T1623_
1

S
M
M
2 1, 4, 5 10250T1532_ 10250T1632_ 1
3 10250T1533_ 10250T1633_
M 2 4 10250T1542_ 10250T1642_ 1
S S 3 10250T1543_ 10250T1643_
M 2 2, 4, 6 10250T1652_ 10250T1662_
1
M S 3 10250T1653_ 10250T1663_
1
Four-position—40° throw M M 7 7 10250T1677_ 10250T1687_

M M 1
Notes
1 Horizontal mount, key removal #1 keyed selector switch, cam 1 shown.
1
2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and tables on 1
Pages V7-T1-238, V7-T1-239 and V7-T1-240.
4 Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-242. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number.
1
Example: 10250T15112.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-241
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Key Removal Positions Replacement Key “H” Series Locks without Master Keys for Above
1 C Description Catalog Number Master Key—with Key Slot Locks
Cover Application Catalog Number
Replacement keys 10250ED824
1 L R
(code H661) Lock and Key Code Numbers
For code:
H501 H635 H663
1 Selector Switch Operators with
H620 H639 H675
MD1–MD20 10250ED825-3
Code Key Removal Dissimilar Locks and Keys ME2–ME18 10250ED825-4
Suffix Position (UL [NEMA] 4, 4X and 13)
1 1 Right only
H621 H643 H683
MJ1–MJ16 10250ED825-5
The locks in all key operators H634 H654 H688
listed on Pages V7-T1-221,
1 2 Left only
V7-T1-242 and V7-T1-379 are
3 Right and left “M” Series Locks with
identical and use key code
1 4 Center only
number H661. Two keys are
Master Key—with Key Slot
Cover
5 Right and center supplied with every lock. For
1 6 Left and center additional code number H661 Lock and Key Code Numbers
7 All positions keys, order Catalog Number MD1 MD14 ME8 MJ6
1 Note: Key removal in “spring
10250ED824. For others,
order 10250ED1130 and
MD2 MD15 ME11 MJ10
return from” positions not designate lock number. MD3 MD16 ME16 MJ11
1 recommended.
When dissimilar locks for MD4 MD19 ME17 MJ13
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar each operator or each group
1 Locks for Key Operators of operators are required,
MD5 MD20 ME18 MJ15

select from the lock and key MD7 ME2 ME19 MJ16
Operators listed on Page
1 V7-T1-242 have identical
combination listed below. MD9 ME3 MJ1 MD17
When Ordering Operator MD10 ME5 MJ3
locks and keys (Key Code
1 Only or a complete control
H661) Catalog Number MD11 ME6 MJ4
unit with a substitute lock,
10250ED824. For dissimilar
order from table below and MD13 ME7 MJ5
1 lock and key combinations,
add “except Lock and Key
see listing on this page.
Code No. …”
1
1 Selector Switch Operators with Caps
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Selector Switch Operators with Caps
1 Black Knob Selector Switch— Black Lever Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 3 Vertical Mounting 3
1 Positions Operator Action 2 Cam Code 4 Catalog Number Cam Code 4 Catalog Number
Two-Position Two-position—60° throw 1 10250T1311 1 10250T3011
1 Maintained 1 M M

1 10250T1371 1 10250T3071
1 M S

1
Three-position—60° throw 2 10250T1322 2 10250T3022
1 Three-Position
Maintained 5 M
M
M 3 10250T1323 3 10250T3023
2 10250T1332 2 10250T3032
1 S
M
M 3 10250T1333 3 10250T3033
M 2 10250T1342 2 10250T3042
1 S S 3 10250T1343 3 10250T3043
M 2 10250T1352 2 10250T3052
1 M S 3 10250T1353 3 10250T3053
Four-position—40° throw M M 7 10250T1367 7 10250T3067
1
M M

1 Notes
1 Black knob selector switch, cam 1 shown.
1 2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
3 Field convertible to horizontal mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.

1 4 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and

tables on Pages V7-T1-238, V7-T1-239 and V7-T1-240.

5 Black lever selector switch, cam 3 shown.
1

V7-T1-242 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Selector Switch Operators without Caps
Operators can be ordered 1
with caps assembled to
them by adding the code 1
number from the table on
this page to the end of 1
catalog number below.
Example: 10250T4011KB
1
Selector Switch Operators without Caps
Two-Position Selector
Switch Maintained
1
Positions Operator Action 1 Cam Code 2 Catalog Number
Two-position—60° throw
M M
1 10250T4011 1
1 10250T4081 1
M S

Three-position—60° throw M 2 10250T4022 1

M M 3 10250T4023
M 2 10250T4032
1
S M 3 10250T4033 1
M 2 10250T4042
S S 3 10250T4043 1
M 2 10250T4052
M S 3 10250T4053
1
Four-position—40° throw 7
M M 10250T4067
1
M M
1
Knob Operating Caps 1
Knob Lever Lever 3 Coin Slot
Catalog and Catalog and Catalog and Catalog and 1
Color Code Number Code Number Color Code Number Code Number
Black 10250TKB 10250TLB Black 10250TSB 10250TCB 1
Lever
Red 10250TKR 10250TLR Red 10250TSR 10250TCR 1
Green 10250TKG 10250TLG Green 10250TSG 10250TCG 1
Lever for Use with
Maintained Operators
Yellow 10250TKY 10250TLY Yellow 10250TSY 10250TCY 1
White 10250TKW 10250TLW White 10250TSW 10250TCW 1
Gray Gray
10250TKA 10250TLA 10250TSA 10250TCA
1
Coin Slot Blue 10250TKL 10250TLL Blue 10250TSL 10250TCL
1
Orange 10250TKD 10250TLO Orange 10250TSO 10250TCO
1
Notes
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
1
2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and

tables on Pages V7-T1-238, V7-T1-239 and V7-T1-240. 1

3 Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.

1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-243
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Illuminated Selector Switch Operators

1
Illuminated Selector Switches without Caps
1
Two-Position Selector Operator without Knob or Lever
1 Switch Maintained Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 4
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz Lamps: 6V—#755, 12V—#756, 24V—#757,
1 6 Volt #755 Lamp
Cam Code Number and
48V—#1835, 120/240V—120MB
Cam Code Number and
Positions Operator Action 1 Code 2 Voltage Catalog Number 3 Code 2 Voltage Catalog Number 3
1 Two-position—60° throw 1 24 10250T5961 1 6 10250T6201
M M
120 12
1 208
10250T5971
10250T6511 24
10250T6211
10250T6221

1 240 10250T5981 48 10250T6231

380 10250T5991 120 10250T6361
1 480 10250T6001 240 5 10250T6371
600 10250T6011
1 Three-position—60° throw M + 2 or 3 24 10250T602_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T624_
M M 120 10250T603_ 12 10250T625_
1 208 10250T652_ 24 10250T626_
240 10250T604_ 48 10250T627_
1 380 10250T605_ 120 10250T638_
480 10250T606_ 240 5 10250T639_
1 600 10250T607_
M + 2 or 3 24 10250T654_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T612_
1 M S 120 10250T620_ 12 10250T632_
208 10250T655_ 24 10250T642_
1 240 10250T656_ 48 10250T672_

1 380 10250T657_ 120 10250T622_

480 10250T658_ 240 10250T682_

1 600 10250T659_
M + 2 or 3 24 10250T660_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T613_
1 S M 120 10250T621_ 12 10250T633_
208 10250T661_ 24 10250T643_
1 240 10250T662_ 48 10250T673_
380 10250T663_ 120 10250T623_
1 480 10250T664_ 240 10250T683_
600 10250T665_
1 M + 2 or 3 24 10250T614_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T628_
S S 120 10250T615_ 12 10250T629_
1 208 10250T653_ 24 10250T630_
240 10250T616_ 48 10250T631_
1 380 10250T617_ 120 10250T640_

1 480 10250T618_ 240 5 10250T641_

600 10250T619_

1 Four-position—40° throw M M 7 24 10250T6087 7 6 10250T6327

120 10250T6097 12 10250T6337
1 M M 208 10250T6547 24 10250T6347
240 10250T6107 48 10250T6357
1 380 10250T6117 120 10250T6427
480 10250T6127 240 5 10250T6437
1 600 10250T6137

Notes
1 1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection tables on Pages V7-T1-238, V7-T1-239 and V7-T1-240.

1 3 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.

4 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-269.

1 5 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.

V7-T1-244 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Knob Illuminated Knobs and Levers
Knob Lever
1
Code Number and Code Number and
Color 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Red 10250TER 10250TFR
Lever
Green 10250TEG 10250TFG 1
Yellow 10250TEA 10250TFA
Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL
1
Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC 1
White 10250TEW 10250TFW
Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM 1
1
Joystick Units
1
Two-Position Joystick Joystick Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position 2 1
Up Down
Center
Operator Contact Mounting Location
Two-Position
Assembled Unit
1
Action 3 Type A B Catalog Number 4
X O O S 1NC 10250T452-3X
1
M
O O X S 1NC 1
Notes 1
1 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer), red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
2 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
3 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
1
4 Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-245
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Joysticks
1
Two-Position Joystick Operators Application Caution
1 The device mounts in the The maximum travel of the The use of NC contacts is Joystick operators are not
standard 30.5 mm mounting knob operator (full up to full preferred because they recommended on certain DC
1 hole. Allow sufficient panel down) is 2.2 in (24°) provide positive drive contact applications above 24 Vdc
space for lever movement. momentary, 2.5 in (30°) opening and a direct which may involve lightly
1 maintained, but ample space
for lever operation must be
relationship between lever
movement and affected
engaging the contacts
(teasing) to achieve speed
allowed. These operators are terminal, i.e., up movement control, positioning, jogging,
1 field convertible from affects the top terminals. etc. Excessive arcing and
momentary to maintained deterioration of the contacts
1 operation or vice versa. will occur.

1 Two-Position Joystick Operators—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

Two-Position Joystick
Operator
1 Contact Block Limitations
Two-Position Operator Only—AC Applications Only
Description 1 Catalog Number

1 Momentary Mode
4NC contact blocks max.
Momentary up and down 10250T452
Maintained up—momentary down 10250T4521
3NO contact blocks max.
1 Maintained down—momentary up 10250T4522
Maintained Mode Maintained up and down 10250T4525
2 contact blocks max.
1
1 Contact Block Operation and Selection
Handle Position 2
1 Up Down
Center Mounting Location 23
1 Contact Block
Type 4 Top A Bottom B Catalog Number
X O O 1NC 10250T51
1
O O X 1NC 10250T51
1 O X O 2LONC (Series) 10250T45

X O O 1NC
1 10250T3

O O X 1NC
1 X X O 1LONC 10250T45

O X X 1LONC
1
X O O 1NC 10250T44 5

1 O O X 1NO

O O X 1NC
1 X O O 1NO

1
1 A and B Mounting Location
Locating Nib
1 Top Up
Contacts
Center
1 Bottom
Down
Contacts
1 Up
NC Contact at Top
Center
All NC and NO Contacts
Down
NC Contact at Bottom
Is Closed, NO at Are Open (1/2 Way), Is Closed, NO at
1 Bottom Is Closed Late Opening NC Is Closed Top Is Closed

Notes
1 1 Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa. To expedite shipment of maintained types,

order momentary operator 10250T452 which is a stocked device.

2 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
1 3 See above for “A” and “B” mounting location.
4 NO = normally open, NC = normally closed, LONC = late opening normally closed.

1 5 Four circuits in single block depth—rated 300V max.

V7-T1-246 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Four-Position Joystick Operators
The joystick operated control The panel area required for The latch holds the lever in 1
unit is intended for AC the four-position operator is the center position. The
application only. For other equivalent to two standard trigger latch must be released 1
use, see Application pushbutton operators. before lever can moved into
Caution on preceding page. any position. 1
1
Four-Position Joystick Four-Position Joystick Operators—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Contact Block Limitations Description 1 Catalog Number 1
Operator Only—AC Application Only
Four contact blocks max.—two in each position Four-position—without latch 10250T451_ 1
Four-position—with latch 10250T461_
Hole Plug
1
Four contact blocks max.—two in each position To plug unused hole 10250TA7 1
Four-Position Joystick
Operator with Latch
1
1
1
1
Field Conversion—Gate Two-, Three- or Eight- Adjacent Functions Maintained Positions 1
Position Operation Maintained Positions
The factory assembled four- Left Right Suffix
position operator is Up Up Up Up Down Left Right Number 1
assembled with a gate or
X — — — 1
arranged for four handle Two-Position — — — — 2
1
positions. Gate Left Right

Handle Positions
— X — — 3
1
or or or — — X — 4

Three-Position
Left
Down
Down Right
Down
— — — — 5 1
Gate X — X — 6
Four-Position
Gate
X — — X 7 1
Maintained Position
— X X — 8
Three additional gates, Eight-Position For maintained position (non- — X — X 9
1
supplied with every operator, Gate spring return), locate required
allow on the job conversion to The eight-position gate
maintained position or — — X X 10 1
three- or eight-position positions of operating lever X X X — 11
controls the four functions
operation as illustrated. shown as “Up,” “Down,”
and add appropriate suffix
number to the catalog
X X — X 12 1
“Left” and “Right.” The number selected from the X — X X 13
remaining four diagonal table above. — X X X 14
1
positions each actuate two
X X X X 15
adjacent functions; for 1
example, “Left Down” On an eight-position gate,
actuates both “Left” and
“Down.” The operator may
when an adjacent vertical and 1
horizontal position are both
be arranged for spring return
of handle to center position,
maintained, the included
diagonal position is also
1
or maintained in up to eight maintained.
positions (see description of 1
maintained position operator).
Note 1
1 Momentary operators—spring return to center. For maintained operators add suffix code from table on this page.

Example: 10250T45110. Operator without latch, maintained in left and right positions. 1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-247
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Contact Block Operation Blank Legend Plates for Joystick Operators

1
Contact blocks mount directly to the back of the operator. For When ordering engraved legend plates, order by catalog number
reliable operation, the maximum number of contact blocks that and insert the following into order notes:
1 should be installed behind each operator lever is two (four total).
● Legend required
1 The figure below identifies the circuits activated by each of the ● Size of characters: 3/16,
eight possible lever positions. Contact block plungers 1, 2, 3, 4 1/8, 3/32 in (4.8, 3.2, 2.4 mm)
1 are depressed (change state) when handle is in the position
indicated by arrows below.
● Location by letter (A–N)
Locations K and M can accommodate up to two lines
1 Circuit Activation horizontally; L and N up to two lines vertically.

1 1 Maximum number of characters:

● Horizontal
1 2
3/16 in—13, 1/8 in—14, 3/32 in—19
● Vertical
1 3 3/16 in—10, 1/8 in—13, 3/32 in—14
4 Ordering Example:
1
Two-position legend plate to be marked “UP” “DOWN.”
1 Note: Joystick in its resting state, center position, does not activate Catalog No. 10250TJ2S4STAMP
contact block plungers. Letter Size: 3/16 in (4.8 mm)
1 Pos. K—UP
Ordering Example: Pos. M—DOWN
1 Suppose you are looking for a four-position momentary joystick
without a latch and the following circuit arrangements. Two-Position
1 X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit. K K

1 Example Circuit Arrangements

2.19
(55.6) L N
Circuit Up Down Left Right Sq.
1 1st X X X X M M

Catalog Number Catalog Number

1 2nd X O O X
Blank Plate
The contact blocks and their mounting locations would be as
1 follows: 10250TJS3 10250TJS4
Engraved Plate
Example Contact Blocks and Locations
1 10250TJS3STAMP 10250TJS4STAMP
2nd 1st
1 Circuit Circuit
Four-Position
NO NO
1 NC NO C
A
B
D C
A
B
D

1 10250T1 10250T2 E
G H
F E
G H
F

NC NO J J
1 NO NO
10250T1 10250T2
1
Catalog Number Catalog Number
A complete bill of material for this example would include:
1 Blank Plate
10250TJS1 10250TJS2
Example Order
1 Engraved Plate
Qty. Catalog Number
10250TJS1STAMP 10250TJS2STAMP
1 1 10250T451
2 10250T2
1 2 10250T1

1
1
1

V7-T1-248 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Roto-Push Units
1
Two-Position Momentary
Complete assembled two- Mounting Location 1
position Roto-Push® Units are
Locating
listed below. These operators Nib 1
have black flush buttons and
are arranged for vertical A
mounting. Order legend
1
B
plates separately.
1
1
Roto-Push Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Roto-Push—Black
Flush Button Operator Position 1
1
Collar Left Collar Right
1
Typical Applications Contact Mounting Location
(Most Common Examples) Normal Depressed Normal Depressed Type A B Catalog Number 2 1
Two-Position
FORWARD/REVERSE; O O O X 1NO 10250T2411-2
1
HIGH/LOW; OPEN/CLOSE; O X O O
UP/DOWN; etc. 1NO 1
JOG/RUN; MAN./AUTO; O X O X 1NO 10250T24111-2 1
etc. O O X X
1NO 1
RUN/JOG; START/JOG;
etc.
O
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
1NO 10250T24111-1 1
1NC
1
SAFE/RUN; etc. O O O X 1NO 10250T2415-2
O O X X 1
1NO
1
1
Two-Position Latched
The two-position Roto-Push extreme right position 1
Latch Unit is fully assembled automatically depresses and
and only requires a legend latches the button in the
plate for a great variety of depressed position. The
1
applications. When the white filled groove in the
selector collar is in the button indicates the selector 1
extreme left position, the collar position. The selector
button is in the free or normal collar has spring return to the 1
position and can be operated left position except when in
as a standard pushbutton.
Rotating the collar to the
the extreme right latched
position.
1
1
Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Red Long
Color and Type Contact Vertical Mounting
1
of Button Block Catalog Number
Red long 1NC 10250T72
1
2NC
10250T73 1
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 1
2 Roto-Push assembled with contact blocks.

1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-249
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Roto-Push Operators
1
Roto-Push Components When Ordering Specify
1 A Roto-Push control unit In selecting the cam and ● Catalog number of
combines the function of a contact blocks for the listed operator with cam code
1 pushbutton and a selector function, the analysis involves suffix from tables below
switch. The contacts are considering the function with and on following pages,
1 operated by the combined
action of rotating the outer
the collar rotated to the given
position with the button free
Example: 10250T2411.
● Catalog number(s) for
collar and pushing a button (designated as “N”) and then contact blocks and legend
1 contained in the collar. in that same position with plates if required.
the button depressed ● To select the cam and
1 (designated “D”). This is done contact blocks needed for
for each rotational position of two-position and three-
1 the collar. position switches, use the
tables on following pages.
1
1 Operator and Cam Operator and Cam
Color and Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting
1 Type of
Button
Cam Code No.
Select from Tables
Catalog and
Code Number
Catalog and
Code Number

1 Black flush + 1 to 18 10250T241_ 10250T251_

Red flush 1 10250T242_ 10250T252_
1 Green flush 10250T243_ 10250T253_
Black long 10250T261_ 10250T271_
1 Red long 1 10250T262_ 10250T272_
Green long
1 10250T263_ 10250T273_

1 Two-Position Roto-Push Operator—Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode

1 Special Rotor Latch
This differs from the other its position. As the button is
1 Roto-Push operators in that depressed by rotating the
as the collar is rotated to the collar, the button also rotates
1 right it depresses the button
and releases the button when
and indicates its mode by a
white line on the button face.
rotated left. But the button in This button can be used as an
1 the released position can be emergency stop or latched
momentarily pushed stop.
1 independent of the collar or

1
Special Roto Latch— Special Rotor Latch—
1 Red Long Button UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color and Type Vertical Mounting
1 of Button Catalog Number
Red long 10250T3213
1 Black long 10250T3214

1 Note
1 Not to be used for emergency stop application.

1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-250 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push
Collar Position
1
1
Circuit Sequence 1
Combination
Number N D N D Cam Code 1 Cam Code 2 Cam Code 3 Cam Code 4 Cam Code 5 Cam Code 6 1
1 O O O X — — —
A NO A NO A NO 1
2 O O X O — — — A NC A NC — 1
B NO B NO
1
3 O O X X — — — —
B NO A NO 1
4 O X O O
B NO
A NC — — — A NC 1
B NO B NO

5 O X O X — — —
1
A NO B NO A NO
B NO
1
6 O X X O — — — — — —
7 O X X X — — A or B NO — 1
B NO B NO
1
8 X O O O — — A or B NC B NC — B NC
1
9 X O O X — — — — — — 1
10 X O X O A NC B NC — A NC — —
B NC 1
11 X O X X B NC A NO
— — —
A NO 1
B NC B NC

12 X X O O — — — — B NC A NC
1
1
13 X X O O — — — —
A NO A NO
B NC B NC
1
14 X X X O A NC A NC — — A NC — 1
1
Series and Parallel
Connections Circuit Location 1
A NO
Locating
Nib
1
B NC
Series Connection
A 1
B
A NO 1
B NC
Parallel Connection Letters “A” and “B” 1
represent the locations which
The connections are not the two circuits of a contact 1
made at the factory. They are block will occupy in relation
illustrated in the selection
table as requirements, but
to the locating nib of the
operator.
1
must be made on the job.
1
Note
1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-251
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push, continued

1 Collar Position

1
Combination Circuit Sequence 1
1 Number N D N D Cam Code 10 Cam Code 11 Cam Code 12 Cam Code 13 Cam Code 14
15 O O O X — — — —
1 A
B
NO
NO
16 O O X O — A or B NC
1 A NC A NC A NC
B NO
1 17 O O X X — — —
B NO B NO
1 18 O X O O — —
A NO A NO B NO
1 B NC
19 O X O X — — —
1 A NO B NO

1 20 O X X O — — — — A NC
B NO
1 21 O X X X A NC — —
A NO A NO
B NO
1 B NO B NO
22 X O O O A NC A NC — —
1 B NC B NC
A
B
NO
NC

1 23 X O O X — — — —
A NO
B NC
1 24 X O X O — A NC B NC — —

1
25 X O X X A NC — — B NC
A NO
1 B NO
26 X X O O B NC B NC — — —
1
1 27 X X O O —
A NO
A or B NO
A NO A NO
B NC
1 28 X X X O — — — —
A NC
1 B NC

1 Series and Parallel

Connections Circuit Location
1 Locating
A NO Nib
1 B NC
A
Series Connection
1 A NO
B

B NC
1
Parallel Connection Letters “A” and “B”
1 The connections are not
represent the locations which
the two circuits of a contact
made at the factory. They are block will occupy in relation
1 illustrated in the selection to the locating nib of the
table as requirements, but operator.
1 must be made on the job.
Note
1 1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.

V7-T1-252 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push
Collar Position
1
1
Combination Circuit Sequence 1
Number N D N D N D Cam Code 7 Cam Code 8 Cam Code 9 Cam Code 15 2 Cam Code 16 Cam Code 17 Cam Code 18 1
1 O O O O O X — 2 —
A NO
A NC
B NO B NO
A NC
1
B NO B NO B NO
2 O O O O X X — — — — — 1
B NO A NO
3 O O O X O O — — — — — 1
A NO A NO
B NC B NO
4 O O O X O X — — — — — —
1
B NO
1
5 O O O X X X — — 2 — — — —
A NO 1
6 O O X X O O — — — — — —
A
B
NO
NO
1
7 O O X X O X — — — — — —
B NO
1
8 O O X X X O — — — — — —
A NC 1
B NO
9 O O X X X X — — — — — — 1
B NO
10 O X O O O O — 2
1
A NO A NO A NO
A NO A NO B NO
B NC B NC B NC 1
11 O X O O O X — — — —
A NO
A
B
NO A
NO B
NO
NO
1
12 O X O O X X — — — — —
A NO
—
1
B NO
13 O X O X O O — — — — — —
1
A NO
14 O X O X O X — — — — — —
1
A NO
B NO 1
15 O X X X O O — — — — — —
A NO 1
16 O X X X O X — — — — — —
A
B
NO
NO
1
17 O X X X X X
A NO
— — — — — — 1
B NO
1
Series and Parallel Connections Circuit Location
The connections are not made at the factory. Locating Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations 1
A NO Nib
B NC
They are illustrated in the selection table as which the two circuits of a contact block will
Series Connection
requirements, but must be made on the job. A occupy in relation to the locating nib of the 1
operator.
A NO
B
1
B NC
Parallel Connection
1
Notes 1
1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
2 Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page V7-T1-266.
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-253
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push, continued

1 Collar Position

1
Combination Circuit Sequence 1
1 Number N D N D N D Cam Code 7 Cam Code 8 2 Cam Code 9 Cam Code 15 Cam Code 16 Cam Code 17 Cam Code 18
18 X O O O O O — — — — — —
1 A
B
NC
NC

1 19 X O O O X X — A NC — — — — —

1 20 X O O O X O — A NC — — — — —
B NC
1
21 X O X X O O — — — — — A NC —
1 B NC

1 22 X O X X X X A NC A NC — — A NC B NC A NC
B NO B NO B NO

1 23 X O X X X O A NC — — — — —
A NC

1 B NC

24 X O X O X O — — — A NC — — A NC
1 B NC B NC

1 25 X O X O X X — — — A NC
2 — — A NC

1 26 X X O O O O B NC — A NC2 — — — —

1 27 X X O O O X
A NO
— — — — — —
B NC
1
28 X X O O X O — B NC — — — — —
1
29 X X O O X X — A NC A NC — — — —
1 B NO B NO

30 X X X X O O — — — — —
1 B NC A NC

1 31 X X X X X O A
B
NC A
NC B
NO
— — B NC —
A NO
NC B NC
1 32 X X X O X O — — — 2 — — B NC
B NC
1 33 X X X O X X — — — — — A NC
A NO
B NC
1 B NC

Series and Parallel Connections Circuit Location

1
The connections are not made at the factory. Locating Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations
A NO
1 B NC
They are illustrated in the selection table as Nib which the two circuits of a contact block will
requirements, but must be made on the job. A occupy in relation to the locating nib of the
Series Connection operator.
1 B
A NO
1 B NC
Parallel Connection
1
Notes
1 1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
2 Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page V7-T1-266.

V7-T1-254 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Accessories
Padlocks not included with
1
padlocking attachments. For
operators with built-in 1
padlock attachment, see
Page V7-T1-220. 1
Accessories 1
Description Catalog Number
Padlock Attachments
1
10250TA2 Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.
10250TA2
1
Will not lock NO contact.
1
10250TA26 Padlocking Attachment for Use with Extended Pushbutton 10250TA26 1
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.
1
10250TA36 Padlocking Cover Guard 10250TA36 1
Cover locked over flush button makes it unaccessible or on extended button
locks NC contacts open. Takes 1/4 in shank size padlock.
1
10250TA38 Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard 10250TA38
1
When used with a 1/4 in padlock, makes flush and long button and knob selector
switch unaccessible, but not locked down. Without the padlock, it is a flip-up guard. 1
Padlock hasp can be removed before assembly.
1
10250TA63 Padlocking Attachment for Use with Flexible Weather Resistant Boot 10250TA63
Used on long button operators. Stainless steel. Use only for locking NC contacts open. 1
1
10250TA64 Padlock Attachment 10250TA64 1
For use with illuminated pushbuttons and maintained push-pull operators having
standard button or lens only. Use 1/4 in padlock. Locks in down position only.
1
10250TA11 Padlocking Attachment for Non-Illuminated Knob Selector Switches 10250TA11
1
Provision for up to 5, 1/4 in padlocks.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-255
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Accessories, continued
1 Description Catalog Number

1 Shrouds and Guards

10250TA6 Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator 10250TA6
Prevents accidental operation. (Not for push-pull operators.)
1
1
10250TA12 Extended Retaining Nut 10250TA12
1 Replaces standard nut and provides guard for flush head pushbutton operators.

1
1 10250TA15 Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton 10250TA15

1
1 10250TA56_ Shroud
For jumbo mushroom head operator.
1 Gray 10250TA56

Yellow 10250TA56Y
1
10250ED1241 Half Shroud—Yellow 10250ED1241
1 For jumbo mushroom head operator.

1
10250TA101 Fingerproof Shroud—10 per package 10250TA101
1 Fits new style contact blocks and light units.

1
1 Boots

1 10250TA_ Flexible Weather Resistant Boot

For use with button operators (extended buttons preferred).
Temperature to –25°F (–32°C).
1 (See Page V7-T1-259 for 10250TA96 Tightening Tool.)
Black 10250TA3
1 Red 10250TA4 1
Green 10250TA10
1 10250TA25 Transparent Boot 10250TA25
For regular illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest—
1 Temperature to –38°F (–39°C). 2

1
10250TA4_ Boot for Flush Pushbutton
1 Clear 10250TA46
Black 10250TA47
1 Red 10250TA48

1 Green 10250TA49

Notes
1 1 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-256 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Accessories, continued
Description Catalog Number
1
Hardware and Kits
1
10250TK3 Thrust Washers— 10250TK3
To meet Ford Motor Co. mounting specifications.
1
10250TK5 Contact Block Tape Seal— 10250TK5
1
Seals plunger openings on last contact block. Order in multiples of 10 pieces.
1
1
56-9337 Selector Switch Operator Gasket— 56-9337
Seals out dust from getting in-between the cam and contact block plungers.
Supplied as standard with all selector switches. 1
1
10250TA3_ Special Retaining Nut—
To accommodate thick panel: 1
Indicating lights 10250TA30
PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches 10250TA31
1
10250TA62 Terminal Block— 10250TA62 1
Two terminals, each will accommodate two wire terminations.

1
1
10250TA8 Spacer Ring— 10250TA8
Used when legend plate is not required. 1
1
10250TA79 Stacking Screw— 10250TA79
Replaces transformer mounting screws on indicating light so terminal block 1
10250TA62 can be mounted to light to support and connect a series resistor.
This screw also fits all contact blocks. Order in multiples of 10.
10250TA2_ Base Mounting Spacers 1—
1
Equivalent to contact block in depth
(one block deep).
10250TA22 1
Complete with screws, washers, etc. 10250TA23 1
(two block deep).

10250TKG_ Grounding Kits— 1

Kits consist of a ring connector and a #6 screw for mounting connector to rear
of contact block mounting screw.
1
All components except standard indicating lights and PresTest indicating lights. 10250TKG1
Standard indicating lights 10250TKG2 2 1
PresTest indicating lights 10250TKG3 2
10250TA7_ Contact Block Terminal Jumpers— 1
Available in multiples of 100 only.
Terminal to terminal—within block (short) 1
100 per pkg. 10250TA70
1000 per pkg. 10250TA70-2
1
Terminal to terminal—block to block (long)
1
100 per pkg. 10250TA71
1000 per pkg. 10250TA71-2 1
Notes
1 Component only. Not to be used for custom built (factory assembled) stations. 1
2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.

1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-257
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Accessories, continued
1 Description Catalog Number

1 Special Operators and Attachments

10250TA5 Wobble Stick 10250TA5
Complete with retaining nut—fits standard button.
1
1 10250TA14 Lever Operator 10250TA14
For use with two vertically mounted flush pushbuttons.
1
1
1 10250TA_ Maintained Contact Attachment Release Button Assembly 1
Mechanically interlocks with another pushbutton and contact block (not included).
1 Provides mode indication. Minimum hole centers 1.62 in (41.1 mm), maximum
2.313 in (58.8 mm).
Black
1 10250TA17
Red 10250TA18

1 Green 10250TA19
Yellow 10250TA20
1 Same with Long Button—Black 10250TA39
10250TA1 Maintained Contact Attachment 1 10250TA1
1 Mechanically interlocks two buttons and provides position indication for one.
Use with two pushbutton operators and one or more contact blocks.
1
1
1 10250TA13 Roto-Push Lever Operator—
Used to provide lever operation for Roto-Push operators.
10250TA13

1
1
Special Light Modules
1 10250TA79 Master Test (Dual Input) Module—
Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation
1 between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48 Vdc 10250TMT8
1
1
10250TFL_ Flasher Module—
Changes any AC illuminated device to a controlled flashing light.
1 Fits 10250T, E30 and E34 devices.
24V 10250TFL2
1
120V 10250TFL1
1 10250ED986-4 Flashing Incandescent Lamp— 10250ED986-4
For use with 120V transformer type or 6V full voltage type indicating lights including
1 PresTest and most E29 devices.

1
1 Note
1 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.

1
1
1

V7-T1-258 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Accessories, continued
Description Catalog Number
1
Hole Plugs
1
10250TA7 Plug— 10250TA7
For unused holes—steel, painted gray (stainless steel, use E30KT5, see Page V7-T1-206)
1
1
Tools
10250TA95 Octagonal 10250T (notched to fit over selector switch lever), E29 and E30 10250TA95
1
1
1
E22CW E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T (will not fit over selector switch levers) E22CW
1
10250TA96 Tool for Tightening Boots— 10250TA96
1
Used to install boot Catalog Numbers 10250TA3, A4, A10 and A25.
1
10250TA102 10250T, E34 Allen Wrench— 10250TA102 1
Used for removal of jumbo mushroom head.
1
10250TA74 Lamp Removal Tools— 10250TA74
For transformer type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches. 1
Fits #12 lamp.

E30KV1 For full voltage and resistor type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and E30KV1 1
selector switches and E30.
1
E29KLT Standard indicating lights. Fits #44, #755, #6S6 and #10S6. E29KLT

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-259
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Options
1
Legend Plates
1 Legend Plates with Standard Markings
1 The legend plates listed
below are sized for all
spacing less than 1.75 in,
replace the S in the catalog
size legend plates, “MS” or
“P” size, have limited space
standard commercial number with MS, or the M for legend.
1 enclosures and Eaton’s cast with P (except push-pull). No
enclosures. For vertical change in price. The smaller
1
1 Square Legend Plate For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights—Standard
Color of Square 1 1/2 Round Color of Square 1 1/2 Round
1 Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number
Blank—see table on Page V7-T1-262.
1 Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High
1/2 Round Legend Plate
CLAMP Black OFF Red
1 10250TS90 10250TM90 10250TS24 10250TM24
CLOSE 10250TS73 10250TM11 ON Black 10250TS25 10250TM25
1 DOWN 10250TS74 10250TM12 OPEN 10250TS26 10250TM26
EMERG. STOP Red 10250TS13 10250TM13 OUT 10250TS27 10250TM27
1 FAST Black 10250TS75 10250TM14 POWER ON 10250TS80 10250TM80
FASTER 10250TS87 10250TM87 RAISE 10250TS28 10250TM28
1 FEEDER ON 10250TS94 10250TM94 READY 10250TS86 10250TM86

1 FEEDER OFF 10250TS95 10250TM95 RESET 10250TS29 10250TM29

FORWARD 10250TS15 10250TM15 REVERSE 10250TS30 10250TM30
1 HIGH 10250TS16 10250TM16 RUN 10250TS31 10250TM31
IN 10250TS17 10250TM17 SAFE 10250TS85 10250TM85
1 INCH 10250TS18 10250TM18 SLOW 10250TS32 10250TM32
JOG 10250TS19 10250TM19 SLOWER 10250TS88 10250TM88
1 JOG FOR. 10250TS20 10250TM20 START 10250TS33 10250TM33

1 JOG REV. 10250TS21 10250TM21 STOP Red 10250TS34 10250TM34

LOW 10250TS22 10250TM22 TEST Black 10250TS83 10250TM83
1 LOWER 10250TS23 10250TM23 TRANSFER 10250TS93 10250TM93
LUBE-FAIL 10250TS92 10250TM92 TRIP 10250TS84 10250TM84
1 MOTOR RUN 10250TS81 10250TM81 UNCLAMP 10250TS91 10250TM91
MOTOR STOP UP
1 10250TS82 10250TM82 10250TS35 10250TM35

1 Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square

1 Color Standard Jumbo 2 Extra Large
Lettering Field Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number

1 Black White or silver 3 10250TSP76 10250TLP76 10250TEP76

White Red or black 3 10250TSP77 10250TLP77 10250TEP77
1 Notes
1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
1 2 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
3 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.

1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-260 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Square Legend Plate For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators—Standard Size
Color of Square 1 1/2 Round Color of Square 1 1/2 Round
1
Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number
Blank—see table on Page V7-T1-262.
1
1/2 Round Legend Plate
2-Position—5/32 in High Lettering 3-Position—1/8 in High Lettering
1
FOR. REV. Black 10250TS38 10250TM38 AUTO OFF HAND Black 10250TS49 10250TM49
HAND AUTO 10250TS39 10250TM39 FOR. OFF REV. 10250TS50 10250TM50 1
HIGH LOW 10250TS40 10250TM40 FOR. SAFE REV. 10250TS69 10250TM69
JOG RUN 10250TS41 10250TM41 HAND OFF AUTO 10250TS51 10250TM51 1
MAN. AUTO 10250TS67 10250TM67 MAN. OFF AUTO 10250TS68 10250TM68
OFF ON 10250TS42 10250TM42 OPEN OFF CLOSE 10250TS53 10250TM53
1
OPEN CLOSE 10250TS43 10250TM43 RUN SAFE JOG 10250TS70 10250TM70
1
RUN JOG 10250TS44 10250TM44 UP OFF DOWN 10250TS54 10250TM54
SAFE RUN 10250TS45 10250TM45 ON STOP SAFE Red 10250TS71 10250TM71 1
START JOG 10250TS46 10250TM46
START STOP 10250TS47 10250TM47 1
UP DOWN 10250TS48 10250TM48
1
45 mm and 70 mm Plastic—Round
1
70 mm Round—Plastic
Legend Plate Color
Lettering Field Catalog Number
1
45 mm 1
Blank Yellow or red 2 10250TRP78
70 mm 1
Blank Yellow or red 2 10250TRP76
Red EMERG. STOP Yellow 10250TRP79
1
1
For Push-Pull Units 3

Color of Square 1 1/2 Round

1
Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number
Standard Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/32 in High
1
PULL START/PUSH STOP Green/red 10250TPP2 10250TR2 1
PUSH ON/PULL OFF Black 10250TPP5 10250TR5
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black 10250TPP8 10250TR8 1
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black 10250TPP11 10250TR11
Jumbo Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 1/8 in High
1
PULL START/PUSH STOP Green/red 10250TPP3 10250TR3
1
PULL ON/PUSH OFF Black 10250TPP6 10250TR6
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black 10250TPP9 10250TR9 1
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black 10250TPP12 10250TR12

Notes
1
1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
2 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required. 1
3 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols in the center of the plate.
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-261
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings

1 When Ordering Specify Ordering Example: Legend Characters Blackening Kit
Available
1 ● Catalog number of blank
plate phase plus Suffix
Catalog No.:
10250TS36STAMP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
Solution blackens aluminum
exposed by engraving
“STAMP.” Letter Size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm) PQRSTUVWXYZ/-.,1 process. Must be applied
1 ● Insert the following into Pos. A—POWER HOUSE 234567890 immediately after engraving.
Order Notes: legend, letter Pos. B—START PUMP 1 0.3 oz. bottle—sufficient for
1 size and locations (letters
Legend characters on black approximately 1100 legend
and red plates are white— plates.
A–W)—combine letters for on satin aluminum plates,
1 definitive locations as characters are black. Catalog Number: 10250TBK
shown.
1
1 Legend Positions
Extra Large Size Small Size Standard Size
1 Cat. No. 10250TNP99 10250TMS or TP Series 10250TS or TM Series
A A A
1 B B G F
C Jumbo Size
1 D
10250TL or TJ Series
AB AE AF
A
K
1 L
B
C
B4 C4
D A4 D4 A
1 K G H I

1
Blank and Custom Engraved Legend Plates
1 Four-Position Selector Switch Push-Pull with Symbols 1
Small Standard Jumbo 2 Extra Large 3 Custom 4 Standard Standard Jumbo 2
1 Style Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Square 5 Black 10250TMS36 10250TS36 10250TL36 — 10250TS76 10250TS72 10250TPP17 10250TPP18
1 Red 10250TMS37 10250TS37 10250TL37 — — — — —
Green/red — — — — — — 10250TPP20 10250TPP21
1 Satin alum. — — — 10250TNP99 — — — —
1/2 Round Black 10250TP36 10250TM36 10250TJ36 — — 10250TM72 10250TR17 10250TR18
1 Red 10250TP37 10250TM37 10250TJ37 — — — — —
Green/red — — — — — — 10250TR20 10250TR21
1 Satin alum. — 10250TM89 10250TJ89 — — — — —

1
Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions
1 Character Size
Top Approximate Dimensions 3/32 in High 1/8 in High 3/16 in High
1 (Aluminum in Inches (mm) Number Number of Number Number of Number Number of
and Plastic) Width Height Style of Lines Characters of Lines Characters of Lines Characters
1 Small 6 1.59 (40.4) 1.59 (40.4) Square 1 17 — — — —
1/2 Round 1 15 1 12 1 9
1 Standard and 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) Square 2 18 2 13 1 9
custom
1/2 Round 2 15 2 12 1 9
1 Jumbo 7 2.19 (55.6) 2.19 (55.6) Square 5 23 3 18 2 12
1/2 Round 5 19 4 15 2 11
1 Extra large 3 2.44 (62.0) 2.44 (62.0) Square 6 25 3 18 3 12

1 Notes
1 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols in the center of the plate.
2 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
1 3 When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures.
4 Slightly larger than standard size for legends requiring more space—fits cast enclosures.

1 5 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
6 Recommended only when mounting on minimum centers (less than 1-3/4 in [44.5 mm] vertical centers).

1 7 Can be used on top row only of any enclosure.

V7-T1-262 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Enclosures
1
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
1
Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1
Number of One Contact Block Depth Two Contact Block Depth 1
Elements Catalog Number Catalog Number
Die Cast Enclosure Die Cast Enclosure—In-Line 234 NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
1 10250TN1 10250TN11
2 10250TN2 10250TN12
1
3 10250TN3 10250TN13
1
4 — 10250TN14
Polyester Enclosure Polyester 4—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12 1
1 — E34N51
2 — E34N52 1
3 — E34N53
4 — E34N54
1
1
Stainless Steel Stainless Steel 45—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
Enclosure
1 — 10250TN33 1
2 — 10250TN34
3 — 10250TN35 1
4 — 10250TN36
1
1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-276.
1
Mounting Instructions
1
Two-position joystick must be One and Two Contact Block 1
used with two contact block Depth Enclosures Enclosure Layouts
deep enclosures (maximum
number of contact blocks = 1).
Top – For Vertical Mounting 1
Four-position joysticks cannot
Top – For Horizontal

be used within these 1 1 1 1 1

Mounting

enclosures. 2 2 2
1
3 3
One Contact Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
Block Depth
Enclosure
4 1
1
Notes
1 For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-264.
2 All die cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23.
1
See listing on Page V7-T1-257.
3 When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used. 1
4 When used with resistor light units, only the 2 contact block depth enclosure can be used.
5 14 gauge, type 304.
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-263
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only

1
Flush Mounting Covers Covers Only—Flush Mounting
1 Number of
Elements Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Flush Die Cast Covers
In-Line Deep In-Line Flat
1 Cover Cover
1 10250TF11 10250TF1
1 2 10250TF12 10250TF2

1 3 10250TF13 10250TF3
4 10250TF14 10250TF4
1 In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 1
With Pullbox Without Pullbox
1 1 10250TS10 10250TS1

1 2 10250TS11 10250TS2
3 10250TS12 10250TS3
1 4 10250TS14 10250TS4
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-277.
1
1 Spacing Increments
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Type F G H

1 Die cast 2.44 (62.0) 2.5 (63.5) 1.88 (47.8)

Polyester 1.88 (47.8) Min. 2.13 (54.1) 2.25 (57.2)
1 Stainless steel 1.69 (42.9) Min. 1.73 (43.9) 2.25 (57.2)

1
Spacing Increments for
1 Enclosures Enclosure Layouts
Top – For Vertical Mounting
1 G
Top – For Horizontal

1 1 1 1
1 H
Mounting

2 2 2
1 3 3

1 F
4

1 Note
1 Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-264 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Contact Blocks
1
Standard Contact Blocks Special Purpose Contact Block Palladium Contacts
● UL A600/P600 rated ● Maximum 300V rated Palladium, which is more 1
● Color-coded plungers—red/ ● Black plungers inert than gold, is well suited
green for NC/NO circuits ● Silver contact tips with for voltages and currents 1
● Silver contact tips with “reliability nibs” approaching zero and is
“reliability nibs” recommended for applications 1
● Black (opaque) housings where environmental
● Gray (opaque) or amber ● Pressure plate terminals conditions are a factor.
(translucent) housings only 1
● Pressure plate or spade ● Fingerproof shrouds not Maximum Contact Block
terminals available Mounting per Operator Type 1
● Fingerproof shrouds (for
Max.
pressure terminals only) Reliability Nibs Operator Stack 1
Reliability nibs are the
Logic Level Contact Blocks Pushbuttons 6
● UL A600/P600 rated
hallmark of Eaton’s contact
blocks. A pointed silver nib on Push-pull operators 2
1
the contact tip ensures
● Color-coded plungers
reliable switching from logic
Roto-push operators 4
1
● Inert palladium knife-blade Two- or three-position 6
contacts level (5V) up to 600V selector switches
applications. Therefore 1
● Gray (opaque) housings standard contact blocks can Four-position selector 4
switches
● Pressure plate or spade
terminals
be used for most logic level
Joysticks 4
1
applications where the

Special Function Contact Blocks

contacts are not exposed to
any harsh environmental
1
● UL A600/P600 rated conditions.
● Color-coded plungers
1
● Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
1
● Gray (opaque) housings
● Pressure plate terminals
1
only
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-265
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

10250T1 Contact Blocks

1 Standard Logic Level
Pressure Terminal Spade Terminal 2 Pressure Terminal Spade Terminal 2
1 Symbol Circuit Description 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Blank 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) 10250T51 10250T59 10250T51E 10250T59E
1 No
Plunger unless otherwise noted.
Blank 1NO Stack up to six blocks six circuits) 10250T53 10250T60 10250T53E 10250T60E
1 No
Plunger unless otherwise noted.
NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) 10250T1 10250T40 10250T1E 10250T40E
1 unless otherwise noted.
2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) 10250T3 10250T42 10250T3E 10250T42E
1 unless otherwise noted.
2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) 10250T2 10250T41 10250T2E 10250T41E
1 unless otherwise noted.
Special Function Blocks 3
1 Blank
No
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six 10250T71 3 — 10250T71E 3 —
Plunger blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
1
ECNO- Early closing NO and standard NC. 10250T47 34 — 10250T47E 3 —
NC Stack up to six blocks unless
1 otherwise noted.
ECNO- Early closing NO and standard NO. 10250T57 34 — 10250T57E 3 —
1 NO Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
1 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. 10250T45 3 — 10250T45E 3 —
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
1 LONC- Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 10250T55 34 — 10250T55E 3 —
ECNO four blocks unless otherwise noted.
1 Special Purpose Blocks 5

1 2NO-
2NC
Four circuits in single block depth.
Rated 300V max. Stack up to four
10250T44 5 —

blocks unless otherwise noted.

1 Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
1 type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).

1 Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
3 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
4 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
1 5 Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or roto-push operators. Okay to use with three-position push-pull operators only

on low voltage (30V or less) circuits. Fingerproof shrouds not available.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-266 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
10250T1CP Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
Standard Logic Level
1
Pressure Terminal 2 Pressure Terminal 2
Symbol Circuit Description 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Blank 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP
No
Plunger 1
Blank 1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP
No
Plunger 1
NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1P 10250T1EP
1
2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3P 10250T3EP
1
2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2P 10250T2EP

Special Function Blocks 3

1
Blank
No
Plunger
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71P 4 10250T71EP 4 1
ECNO-NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T47P 34 10250T47EP 4
1
ECNO-NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks 10250T57P 34 10250T57EP 4
unless otherwise noted. 1
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless 10250T45P 4 10250T45EP 4

otherwise noted. 1
LONC-ECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to four blocks unless 10250T55P 34 10250T55EP 4

otherwise noted. 1
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
1
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change suffix P to CP in catalog number e.g. 10250T51CP. 1
3 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-267
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

10250T1C Amber Contact Blocks

1 Standard Logic Level
Pressure Terminal 2 Spade Terminal 3 Pressure Terminal 2 Spade Terminal 3
1 Symbol Circuit Description 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Blank 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) 10250T51C 10250T59C 10250T51EC 10250T59EC
1 No
Plunger unless otherwise noted.
Blank 1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) 10250T53C 10250T60C 10250T53EC 10250T60EC
1 No
Plunger unless otherwise noted.
NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) 10250T1C 10250T40C 10250T1EC 10250T40EC
1 unless otherwise noted.
2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) 10250T3C 10250T42C 10250T3EC 10250T42EC
1 unless otherwise noted.
2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) 10250T2C 10250T41C 10250T2EC 10250T41EC
1 unless otherwise noted.
Special Function Blocks 3
1 Blank
No
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six 10250T71C 4 — 10250T71EC 4 —
Plunger blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise
noted.
1
ECNO- Early closing NO and standard NC. 10250T47C 45 — 10250T47EC 4 —
NC Stack up to six blocks unless
1 otherwise noted.
ECNO- Early closing NO and standard NO. 10250T57C 45 — 10250T57EC 4 —
1 NO Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
1 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. 10250T45C 4 — 10250T45EC 4 —
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
1 LONC- Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 10250T55C 45 — 10250T55EC 4 —
ECNO four blocks unless otherwise noted.
1
Notes
1 1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2

type 10250T or E34 devices.

2 To order amber contact blocks with fingerproof shrouds, change suffix to CP in the catalog number e.g. 10250T51CP. Not available with spade terminals.

1 3 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).

Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
1 4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
5 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-268 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Replacement Parts
1
Replacement Lamps—For 10250T Illuminated Operators
Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number 1
120MB 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor indicating light 28-3044
#267 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T flasher 10250ED986-4
1
#755 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T transformer, PresTest and full voltage 28-2202 1
#756 12V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5184
#757 24V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5185 1
#1828 32V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5186
#1835 55V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor 28-5187
1
NE48 120V T 4-1/2 bayonet 10250T neon 28-494
1
NE51H-R22 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3754
NE51H-R68 240V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3755 1
1
Standard LED Lamp Replacement LED Lamps—For 10250T, E34 and E22 Units
Continuous Flashing 1
AC/DC AC DC
Voltage Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
6–12V Red E22LED612RN E22LED006RAF E22LED006RDF
Orange E22LED612ON E22LED006OAF E22LED006ODF 1
Yellow E22LED612YN E22LED006YAF E22LED006YDF
Green E22LED612GN E22LED006GAF E22LED006GDF
1
Blue E22LED612BN E22LED006BAF E22LED006BDF
1
White E22LED612WN E22LED006WAF E22LED006WDF
24V Red E22LED024RN E22LED024RAF E22LED024RDF 1
Orange E22LED024ON E22LED024OAF E22LED024ODF
Yellow E22LED024YN E22LED024YAF E22LED024YDF 1
Green E22LED024GN E22LED024GAF E22LED024GDF
Blue E22LED024BN E22LED024BAF E22LED024BDF
1
White E22LED024WN E22LED024WAF E22LED024WDF 1
48V Red E22LED048RN E22LED048RAF E22LED048RDF
Orange E22LED048ON E22LED048OAF E22LED048ODF 1
Yellow E22LED048YN E22LED048YAF E22LED048YDF
Green E22LED048GN E22LED048GAF E22LED048GDF
1
Blue E22LED048BN E22LED048BAF E22LED048BDF
1
White E22LED048WN E22LED048WAF E22LED048WDF
60V Red E22LED060RN E22LED060RAF E22LED060RDF 1
Orange E22LED060ON E22LED060OAF E22LED060ODF
Yellow E22LED060YN E22LED060YAF E22LED060YDF 1
Green E22LED060GN E22LED060GAF E22LED060GDF
Blue E22LED060BN E22LED060BAF E22LED060BDF
1
White E22LED060WN E22LED060WAF E22LED060WDF
1
120V Red E22LED120RN E22LED120RAF E22LED120RDF
Orange E22LED120ON E22LED120OAF E22LED120ODF 1
Yellow E22LED120YN E22LED120YAF E22LED120YDF
Green E22LED120GN E22LED120GAF E22LED120GDF 1
Blue E22LED120BN E22LED120BAF E22LED120BDF
White E22LED120WN E22LED120WAF E22LED120WDF
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-269
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

1
1
1
1 Two-Position
Joystick Operator
Flush Head
Pushbutton
Mushroom Head
Pushbutton
Mushroom Head
Operator with
Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator
Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator Operator Padlock Attachment Operator
1
1
1
1
1 Four-Position Joystick Illuminated Full Voltage, Resistor Transformer Type Potentiometers
Operator (without Latch) Pushbutton Operator and Transformer Type Indicating Light
1 Illuminated Selector Switch

1 10250T Style Operator Replacement Parts

1 Item
No. Description
No.
Req. Part Number
Item
No. Description
No.
Req. Part Number
1 Gasket 1 16-1548 14 Gasket (supplied with basic unit) 1 32-803
1
2 Mounting nut 1 15-1530 15 Round head screw (#4-40 x 0.344 in long) 2 11-4553
(supplied with basic unit)
1 3 Handle 1 24-5045
16 Mounting screw 2 11-1632
4 Knob 1 53-3157
1 Knob (not shown) for joystick operator with latch 1 53-3159
17 Simple potentiometer
(does not include items 18, 28 or 29)
1 As Req. Below

5 Common gate (supplied with operator) 2 16-3400

1 6 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 2 11-2014
1,000 ohms — 41-782-2
2,500 ohms — 41-782-3
1 7 Mushroom head button (includes [2] Item 6) 1 As Req. Below
5,000 ohms — 41-782-10
Black — 53-1317 10,000 ohms — 41-782-4
1 Red — 53-1317-2 25,000 ohms — 41-782-5
Yellow — 53-1317-3
50,000 ohms — 41-782-6
1 Green — 53-1317-4 18 Connector (includes screw and lug) 2 25-1851
Blue — 53-1317-22
1 8 Set screw (#10-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 2 11-544
19 Indicating plate 1 As Req. Above
Standard size (without legend) — 30-4460
1 9 Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—includes [2] Item 8)
1 As Req. Below Large size (specify legend) — 10250TR30
20 Retaining nut 1 15-1547
1 Red — 53-1317-9
21 Knob 1 53-1314
Black — 53-1317-10
Socket set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long) 2 11-2014
1 Yellow — 53-1317-11
22 Coupling 1 29-3749-2
Green — 53-1317-12
1 10 Jumbo mushroom head button 1 53-1349-18
23 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.188 in long) 1 11-1199
(aluminum—red EMERG. STOP) 24 Spacer 2 56-1066-18
1 does not include Item 8
25 Connector (includes screw and lug) 1 25-1851-2
11 Position gate:
26 Mounting nut 1 15-1938
1 Two-position 1 54-7278
27 Four-position joystick operating mechanism 1 24-6565
Three-position 1 54-7173 (complete)
1 Four-position 1 54-12278 28 Four-position joystick operating mechanism 1 24-6565-2
(not shown) (with latch) complete
Eight-position 1
1 54-12279
29 Spring loaded latch 1 52-1214-2
12 Mounting screw (#6-32 x 0.710 in long) 2 10250TA79
30 Hand operated latch 1 52-913-3
1 Washer 2 16-2038
13 Terminal screw and lug (captive) Req. 80-5502KIT
1

V7-T1-270 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Mechanical Ratings
Description Specification
1
Frequency of Operation 1
All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr.
Key and lever selection switches 3000 operations/hr. 1
Auto-latch devices 1200 operations/hr.
Life
1
Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations
1
Contact blocks 10 x 106 operations
PresTest units 10 x 106 operations 1
Lever and key selector switches 0.25 x 106 operations
Twist to release pushbuttons 0.3 x 106 operations 1
Shock Resistance
Duration 20 ms >5g
1
1
General Specifications
1
Description Specification
Climate Conditions 1
Operating temperature 1° to 150°F (–17° to 66°C)
Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C) 1
Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity Max. 95% RH at 60°C
1
Terminals 1
Marking NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1–2
for normally closed, 3–4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005).
1
Clamps Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
conductors
1
Torque 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud 1
Light Units
Transformers Will withstand short-circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60997-5-1 1
Bulbs—average life:
Transformer type 20,000 hrs.
1
Resistor/direct voltage type 2500 hrs. minimum at rated voltage
1
LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-271
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Electrical Ratings
1 Description Specification

1 Insulation Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc

Thermal Ith = 10A
1 Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Rated conditional short circuit current 1 kA
1 Fuse type GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1
1
UL rating A600, P600
1 AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour
10A 110V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
1 5A 250V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
2A 600V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
1
Switching capacity

1 AC 15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)

6A 120V pf 0.3
1 4A 240V pf 0.3
2A 660V pf 0.3
1 DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
125V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
1 1.0A
0.55A 250V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
1 0.1A 660V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
10A 110V pure resistive
1 Maximum ratings for logic level and
hostile atmosphere application
1 Maximum amperes 0.5A
Maximum volts 120 Vac/Vdc
1
1 Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
50 Vac or 60 Hz Vdc
1 Description 120 240 480 600 24/28 125 250

1 Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp) 60 30 15 12 5.7 1.1 0.55
1 Normal load break (amp) 6 3 1.5 1.2 5.7 1.1 0.55
Thermal current (amp) 10 10 10 10 5.0 5.0 5.0
1 Voltamperes:
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 138 138
1
Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138 138
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-272 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Mounting Options
1
Panel Thickness
● Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm) 1
● Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
● Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut 1
● Indicating light: 10250TA30
● Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31 1
1
Mounting Matrix
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Legend
Plate A B C D
1
Small 1.63 (41.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.63 (41.3)
Medium 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.75 (44.5) 1
Large 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2)
1
Mounting Options in Inches (mm) 1
Terminals on Top
D
0.6
(15.2) 1
0.14 (3.6) Min.
Dia.
1
C
B
Min.
A
Min.
Min. 1.22 1
(31)

Terminals at Side
1
Horizontal Mounting Vertical Mounting 1
Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block.
1
Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals. 1
Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 in (3.6 mm) #29 drill.
1
Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
0.14 (3.6) 0.6
(15.2)
1
Dia.
1
1.20
1
(30.5)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-273
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Dimensions
1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators Potentiometer

1 Adjustable
Large Dial Plate
1.88 1.31
(47.8) 1.09 (33.3)
1.0
1 1.62 (41.1)
(27.7) (25.4)

Min. Std. Dial Plate 0.94 0.94

1 2.5 (63.5)
(23.9) (23.9)
Max.
0.94
1 0.88 (22.4)
(23.9)
for Each 0.75
1 Additional
Contact Block 1.07 0.89
(22.6)
(19.1)
(27.2) Potentiometer A B C
1 2 watt single 1.31 (33.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9)
25 watt—up to 25 mohms 2.38 (60.5) 1.19 (30.2) 0.81 (20.6)
1 Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Down Position 50 mohms 2.56 (65.0) 1.69 (42.9) 1.25 (31.8)

1 1.13
(28.7)
Two-Position Joystick Operator
1
1.78
(45.2) Contact 0.89 3.88
1 Block (22.6) (98.6)

2.03 1.09 2.0 2.2 (55.9)

1 (51.6) (27.7) (50.8) 2.06 mom.
(52.3) 2.5 (63.5)
main.
1 2.13
Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable (54.1) 0.06 (1.5) to
1 in the Up Position—Mushroom Head 0.88 (22.4)
per Block
0.26 (6.6)
Panel Thickness 1.25
2.5 (63.5) (31.8)
1.63
1 (41.4) 2.0 (50.8)

Four-Position Joystick Operator

1 1.75
(44.5)
1 1.5
1.25
4.0 (31.8)
(38.1) (101.6)
1
1 Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Up Position—Jumbo Mushroom Head 1.88 1.19 3.75
(47.8) 0.88 (22.4) (30.2) (95.3)
1 2.31 2.38 Per Unit
(58.7) (60.5)
1
1.75
1 (44.5)

1 2.5 (63.5)

1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-274 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Key Operated Pushbutton Operator Operator and Cam
1.13 1.13
1
(28.7) (28.7)
1
1.38 1.38
(35.1) (35.1)
1
1.5 1.53
0.38 (9.7)
Long 1
(38.1) (38.9) Button
Only
1
Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator 1
Only with Button Special Rotor Latch
0.24 (6) 1.55 (39.3) 1.13 1
Spring Return (28.7)
0.86
(21.8) 2.37 (60.3)
Auto-Latch
1
1.38
(35.1)
1.5
1
(38.1) 0.38 (9.7)
1.53
(38.9)
Long
Button
1
Only
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-275
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Surface Mounting
1
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
1 4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
1 7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
1
1 E
B
1
1
D C
A
1 Surface

1 Number of Element Wide High Deep Mounting Conduit

Elements Arrangement A B C D E Entrance
1 Die Cast

1 1 In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 3/4
2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 5.13 (130.3)
1 3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 7.00 (177.8) 1
4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 8.88 (225.6)
1 Polyester
1 In-line 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0)
1 2

2 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0)
1 3 3.81 (96.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 7.13 (181.1)
4 3.81 (96.8) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 9.38 (238.3)
1 Stainless Steel
2
1 In-line 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0)
1 2 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 7.50 (190.5)

1 3 3.50 (88.9) 9.00 (228.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 9.00 (228.6)
4 3.50 (88.9) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8)
1 Notes
1 Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 in (19.1 mm).

1 2 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-276 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Flush Mounting
1
Die Cast and Stainless Steel Covers Only
4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size 1
for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger 1
1
E
B 1
1
D C 1
A
Surface or Pendant
1

Number of Wide High Deep Mounting

1
Elements A B C D E
Die Cast
1
1 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 3.63 (92.2) 1
2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 5.50 (139.7)
3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 6.00 (152.4) 1
4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 9.25 (235.0)
Stainless Steel
1
1 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 1.88 (47.8)
1
2 5.00 (127.0) 6.88 (174.8) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 3.63 (92.2)
3 5.00 (127.0) 8.63 (219.2) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 5.50 (139.7) 1
4 5.00 (127.0) 10.50 (266.7) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 7.25 (184.2)

Notes
1
1 Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover is 3/4 in (19.1 mm) deeper.
2 Depth given includes pull box. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-277
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Flush and Long Pushbutton Half Shroud Push-Pull Switch
1 0.38 0.88 0.88
(9.7) Long (22.4) (22.4)
1.81 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
1 (46)
1.09
(27.7)
1.06
(26.9)
Button
Only Panel Thickness

1 2.63
(66.8)
1.78 1.38 1.13
(45.2) (35.1) 1.65
1 (28.7)
(41.9)

1 Half Shroud Is Same as Long Pushbutton with 0.25 1.78

Lower Half of Guard Ring Cut Back (6.4) (45.2)
1
1 Mushroom and Jumbo Head Pushbutton Flush Pushbutton Operator with
Padlock Attachment
1 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness 1.13
(28.7)
1 2.5
1.5 (63.5)
1 (38.1)
1.78
(45.2)
1 1.13
1.63
(41.4)
0.88 (22.4) (28.7) 1.75
1 for Each
Additional
(44.5) 2.03
(51.6)
1.09
(27.7)
2.0
(50.8)
Contact Block
1
1 Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
Pushbutton with Cylinder Lock with Padlock Attachment
1 1.13 2.5 2.0
(28.7) (63.5) (50.8)
1 1.63
(41.4)

1
1.75
(44.5)
1 1.91
1.38
(35.1)
(48.5)
1 1.5
(38.1)

1
1 Illuminated Pushbutton Indicating Light—Transformer Type
0.69 1.8
1 1.09
(27.7)
1.09
(27.7) (17.5) (45.7)

1 1.78 1.38
(45.2) (35.1)
1.13
1 (28.7)
1.1
A
1 1.38
(35.1)
(27.9)

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-278 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
PresTest Indicating Light—Transformer Type PresTest Indicating Light—Resistor Type
1.88
1
(47.8)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38 1
(35.1)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1) 1
2.19 1.94 1.56
(55.6) (49.3) (39.6) 1
1.88
(47.8)
1.56
(39.6)
1
1
Jumbo Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment Master Test Indicating Light 1
2.31
(58.7)
2.38
(60.5)
Plastic 1.38 (35.1)
Glass 1.59 (40.4)
B
Spade Terminal
1
1.63
(41.4)
A
Screw Terminal 1
1.75
(44.5) 1.38
1
1.78
(45.2) (35.1)
1
2.5
(63.5)
Description B C
1
Relay type 4.38 (111.2) 4.28 (108.7)
1
Solid-state type 2.94 (74.7) 2.88 (73.2)
1
Indicating Light—Resistor and Neon Type Potentiometer Shaft 1
A Threaded
Bushing
1
1.78 1.38
(45.2) (35.1)
1
B
Shaft
1.81 1.1
A
1
(46) (27.9) Shaft Dimensions of Potentiometer
That C-H Operator Will Accept
1
Lens A
Plastic 1.38 (35.1)
Operator
Catalog Number A B
1
Glass 1.56 (39.6)
10250T330 0.38 (9.7) dia. x
0.38 (9.7) long
0.25 (6.4) dia. x
0.63 (16) long
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-279
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Coin Operated Selector Switch Wobble Stick Catalog No. 10250TA5
1 Coin Slot 1.44 2.44
(36.6) (62)
Knob
1 21°
1.38
1 (35.1)
21°
1 Lever 1.22
(31)
A
1 Operator Dim. A

1 Knob 1.38 (35.1)

Lever Operator—For Use with Two
Lever 1.50 (38.1) Vertically Mounted Flush Pushbuttons
1 Coin slot 1.38 (35.1) Catalog No. 10250TA14
2.19 3.59
1 (55.6) (91.2)
Key Operated Selector Switch
1 1.13
Cam
(28.7)
1 1.88
1.38 3.75 (47.8)
1 (35.1) (95.3)

1 1.75
(44.5)
1 Flexible Boot—For Protecting
Illuminated Selector Switch Flush or Long Pushbutton
1 Catalog No. 10250TA3 Typical
1.13
1 (28.7) 1.47
(37.3)
1.38
1 (35.1)

1 1.59
1.09 1.96
(27.7) (49.8) (40.4)
1
1 Roto-Push
1 1.13
(28.7) Transparent Flexible Boot—
For Illuminated Pushbutton
1 1.38 Catalog No. 10250TA25
(35.1)
1
0.38 (9.7) 1.59 1.33
1 1.53
(38.9)
Long
Button
(40.4) (33.8)

Only
1 1.88
(47.8)

1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-280 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Padlock Attachment—For Knob Selector Switch Maintained Contact Attachment
Catalog No. 10250TA11 Catalog No. 10250TA17 Typical
1
0.97

1.63
(24.6)
1
(41.4)
1
1.63 (41.4)
0.44 Min.
(11.2)
2.31 (58.7)
1
Max.
Padlock Attachment—For Flush Pushbutton 1
Catalog No. 10250TA2
0.75 0.94
1
(19.1) 0.84 (23.9) 0.91
1.13
(21.3)
(28.7) (23.1) 1
1.63 Padlock Cover Guard for Flush Pushbutton 1
(41.4)
Catalog No. 10250TA36
1.16 1.0
1
0.25 0.38
(6.4) 0.75 (29.5) (25.4)
(9.7)
(19.1) 1
Padlock Attachment—For Extended Pushbutton 1
Catalog No. 10250TA26
2.19
0.38
1.06
(55.6)
1.91 1
(9.7) (48.5)
(26.9)
0.91 1
(23.1)
2.06
(52.3) 1
Padlock Attachment for Maintained Push-Pull Operator
0.84 1.5 Catalog No. 10250TA64 1
(21.3) (38.1)
0.38
(9.7) 1
Maintained Pushbutton 1
Catalog No. 10250TA66 Typical
2.19
(55.6) 1
Adjustable
0.94 1.25
1
(23.9) 1.47
(37.3) (31.8)
1.62 (41.1) 1
Min.
2.5 (63.5)
Max.
Protecting Shroud for Jumbo Mushroom Head Button 1
Catalog No. 10250TA56
0.88 1
(22.4)
for Each
Additional 1.07
0.89
(22.6)
1
Contact (27.2)
Block 3.25
(82.6) 1
1
1.65
(41.9) 1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-281
 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Protecting Shroud for Extended Retaining Nut Panel Drilling and Minimum Spacing
1 Mushroom Head Button
Catalog No. 10250TA6
Catalog No. 10250TA12
Terminals on Top 0.6
B
1.31 Min. (15.2)
1 1.53 (33.3)
(38.9)
1 1.38
(35.1) B A
A
Min. 1.22
1.69 Min. Min. (31)
1 (42.9)
Terminals at
1.25 Side
1 (31.8)
Horizontal Rows Vertical Rows

1 Protecting Shroud for Lever for Legend A B

Illuminated Pushbutton Roto-Push Operator Plate Min. Min.
1 Catalog No. 10250TA15 Catalog No. 10250TA13 1 or 2 Circuit Contact Blocks

1 1.75
(44.5)
0.44
(11.2)
Small or none 1.63 (41.4) 2.25 (57.2)
Standard 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2)
1 1.50
Jumbo 1 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2)
(38.1) Extra large 2.50 (63.5) 2.60 (66.0)
1 1.81 4 Circuit Contact Block 10250T44
(46)
Small or none 1.88 (47.8) 2.25 (57.2)
1 Standard 1.88 (47.8) 2.25 (57.2)

1 Jumbo 1 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2)

Padlock Hasp or Extra large 2.50 (63.5) 2.60 (66.0)

1 Flip-Up Guard Notes
Catalog No. 10250TA38 Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36–1.4 in (34.5–35.6 mm) #29 drill.
1 0.84 1 If jumbo plates are to be placed one above the other vertically, add 0.13 (3.3) to minimum
(21.3) 1.50 dimensions listed.
(38.1)
1
1.75
1 (44.5)

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-282 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
1.9
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Multiple Button Guard Chain Hook Bracket
1
1.31 0.38 (9.7)
(33.3) Dia. Hole
2.16
(54.9) 1
B E 1
A
1.88
(47.8) D
1
A C
1
Enclosure Size Wide High Deep Mounting
0.75
(19.1) (No. of Elements) A B C D E 1
2, 3 and 4 3.75 1.94 0.13 2.69 1.38
Number of
Elements A
(95.3) (49.3) (3.3) (68.3) (35.1) 1
6 and 7 4.0 2.19 0.13 2.88 1.63
2 4.0 (101.6) (101.6) (55.6) (3.3) (73.2) (41.4) 1
3 5.88 (149.4)
4 7.88 (200.2) 1
7 13.38 (339.9)
1
Master Test Module, Flasher Module and Legend Plate 1
1.63
(41.4)
1.78
(45.2)
A 1
1.31 B 1
(33.3)
1
6 Mounting Holes 1.14
(29) 1
Master Test Module, Legend Plate
Flasher Module 1
Legend
Plate A B
1
1/2 Round Legend Plates 1
Small 1.56 (39.6) 0.91 (23.1)
Standard 1.59 (40.4) 1.07 (27.2) 1
Jumbo 2.06 (52.3) 1.53 (38.9)
Square Legend Plates
1
Small 1.59 (40.4) sq. 0.90 (22.9)
Standard 1.75 (44.5) sq. 1.06 (26.9) 1
1
Jumbo 2.19 (55.6) sq. 1.50 (38.1) 1
Extra large 2.44 (62.0) sq. 1.63 (41.4)

Notes
1
Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36–1.4 in (34.5–35.6 mm) #29 drill.
1 For plastic legend plate, Dimension B is 1.12 (28.4). 1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-283
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Contents

1 Description Page
1 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-285
1 Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-286
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-287
1 Ordering Complete Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
V7-T1-289

Non-Illuminated Momentary
1 Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-290
Plastic Lens Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . V7-T1-290
1 Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-291
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
1 Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-292
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-294
1 Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-295
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-297
1 Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-298
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-302
1 Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-303
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-306
1 Key Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-306
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . V7-T1-308
1 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-309
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-311
1 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
V7-T1-317
V7-T1-319
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-322
1
1 Standards and
Product Description Features Certifications
1 Eaton’s E34 Series 30.5 mm ● Epoxy-coated metal ● CE EN60947-5-1 and
pushbutton line features the operators 60947-5-5
1 same rugged die cast ● Corrosion resistant ● UL 508—File No. E131568
construction of our 10250T ● Integral ground screw ● CSA C22.2 No. 14—File No.
1 line with an additional terminal on operators LR68551
two-layer 100% solid
thermosetting cathodic epoxy
● FDA approved for sanitary ● FDA 3-A Sanitary
1 coating. This coating provides chemical resistance Standards
a flat black smooth, requirements
1 consistent, corrosion
resistant surface that has
1 passed a demanding 600 Ingress Protection
hour salt spray test. (The When mounted in similarly
1 industry standard for this 4X
test requires only 200 hours.)
rated enclosure—
● Standard indicating lights
1 ● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1 ● IEC IP65
1 ● All other operators
● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
1 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
● IEC IP65
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-284 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Product Overview
1
Ultraviolet Light Reliability Nibs Diaphragm Seal with
E34 cathodic coating is not Eaton’s contact blocks Drainage Holes 1
recommended for use in feature enclosed silver
applications where exposure contacts with pointed Liquid Drainage 1
to ultraviolet light exists—use “reliability nibs” for reliable Eaton’s pushbutton operators
NEMA 4X 10250T operators. performance from logic level offer front of panel drainage
up to 600V. To ensure reliable via holes in the operator
1
switching, nibs bite through bushing. Hidden from view by
oxide which can form on silver the mounting nut, these 1
contacts, eliminating the holes prevent buildup of liquid
need for expensive logic level inside the operator, which 1
blocks for most applications. can prevent operation in
Reliability Nibs
freezing environments. The
holes also provide a route for
1
escaping liquid in high
pressure washdowns, 1
effectively relieving pressure
Dry Circuit
from the internal diaphragm 1
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
in applications even beyond 1
NEMA 4.
Medium Duty
Diaphragm Seal 1
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
1
Heavy-Duty
Drainage Hole
Flexible
1
Diaphragm
Stainless 1
Steel
Operating
Spring 1
Colorfast
Molded
Button
1
Drainage Hole 1
Mounting Nut
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-285
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Product Identification
1
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Series
1
Octagonal Mounting Nut Self-Adjusts to
Panel Thickness—Eliminates Spacer Washers
1 and Set Screws
Internal Sealing Diaphragm Terminal Clamps Shipped
for Excellent Sealing Open Ready to Wire
1
1
1
1
1
Die Cast Construction with Thick, Three Styles of Legend Plates
1 Tough Corrosion Resistant Coating in Four Sizes Wide Variety of Operator Stackable Contact Blocks up
Types and Colors to 12 Circuits per Operator
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-286 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
1
1
E34 PB 1 – 1 1

1
PB = Flush
Operator
Blank =
Circuit
Operator only
1
EB = Extended 1= 1NO-1NC
LB = 40 mm mushroom 2= 2NO 1
JB = 65 mm mushroom Button Color 3= 2NC
EVB = 1/2 shroud vertical mount 51 = 1NC
EHB = 1/2 shroud horizontal mount 1 = Black 7 = Gray 53 = 1NO 1
2 = Red 5 = White
3 = Green 6 = Blue
4 = Yellow 8 = Orange 1
1
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Push-Pulls
1
E34 GDB 63 M2 – 1 1

1
Operator Circuit 1
GDB = Two-position maintained LED Voltage Blank = Operator only
GEB = Three-position mom push-mom pull Blank = Non-illuminated 1= 1NO-1NC 1
GFB = Three-position mt push-mom pull Blank = Incandescent 2= 2NO
GHB = Three-position mom push-mom pull 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc 3= 2NC
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 51 = 1NC 1
Incandescent LED 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 53 = 1NO
Light Unit Light Unit 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
1
Blank = Non-illuminated Blank = Non-illuminated
2A = 120 Vac
89 = 24V/XFR
63 = 120V/XFR
89L = 24V/XFR
63L = 120V/XFR
2D = 120 Vdc 1
64 = 208V/XFR 64L = 208V/XFR
65 = 240V/XFR
82 = 277V/XFR
65L = 240V/XFR
82L = 277V/XFR
Non-Illuminated Illuminated 1
Button Incandescent LED Lens Type
66 = 380V/XFR 66L = 380V/XFR C1 = Black 40 mm M2 = RD = Red 40 mm
67 = 480V/XFR 67L = 480V/XFR C2 = Red 40 mm M2N8 = ED = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP 1
68 = 600V/XFR 68L = 600V/XFR C2N8 = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP M3 = GD = Green 40 mm
69 = 6V/FV 97L = Full voltage
70 = 12V/FV
C3 = Green 40 mm
C6 = Blue 40 mm
M6 =
M9 =
LD = Blue 40 mm
AD = Amber 40 mm
1
79 = 24V/FV — = Black 65 mm M5 = WD = White 40 mm
83 = 32V/FV
80 = 120V/RES
J2 = Red 65 mm M0 = — = Clear 40 mm 1
J2N8 = Red 65 mm—“E” STOP
81 = 240V/RES — = Green 65 mm
— = Yellow 65 mm 1
1
Note
1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-287
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
1
1 E34 XB 24 V2 – 1 1

1 Light Unit Type Circuit

XB = Transformer Blank = Operator only
1 CB = Full voltage 1= 1NO-1NC
SB = Resistor 2= 2NO
1 3=
51 =
2NC
1NC
Incandescent Light Unit LED Light Unit
53 = 1NO
1 024 = 24V/XFR
120 = 120V/XFR
024L = 24V/XFR
120L = 120V/XFR
240 = 240V/XFR 240L = 240V/XFR LED Voltage
1 277 = 277V/XFR
380 = 380V/XFR
277L = 277V/XFR
380L = 380V/XFR
Blank =
06 =
Incandescent
6 Vac/Vdc
48 =
60 =
48 Vac/Vdc
60 Vac/Vdc
480 = 480V/XFR 480L = 480V/XFR 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 2A = 120 Vac
1 600 = 600V/XFR 600L = 600V/XFR 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 2D = 120 Vdc
06 = 6V/FV 397L = Full voltage
12 = 12V/FV
1 24 = 24V/FV
Incandescent Lens Color LED Lens Color
32 = 32V/FV V2 = Red RD = Red
V3 = Green GD = Green
1 48 = 48V/FV
120 = 120V/RES V4 = Yellow YD = Yellow
240 = 240V/RES V5 = White WD = White
1 V6 = Blue
V9 = Amber
LD = Blue
AD = Amber
V0 = Clear
1
1 Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test
1 E34 FB06 H2 1

1
Light Unit Type LED Voltage
1 Standard—Incandescent Standard—LED Blank = Incandescent
TB120 = 120V/XFR TB120L = 120V/XFR 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
1 TB240 = 240V/XFR TB240L = 240V/XFR 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
TB277 = 277V/XFR TB277L = 277V/XFR
TB380 = 380V/XFR TB380L = 380V/XFR 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
1 TB480 = 480V/XFR TB480L = 480V/XFR 60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
TB600 = 600V/XFR TB600L = 600V/XFR 2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
1 FB06 = 6V/FV
FB12 = 12V/FV
FB197L = Full voltage
PresTest—LED
FB24 = 24V/FV Plastic Glass Lens Color Plastic Glass Lens Color
TPB120L = 120V/XFR
1 FB32 = 32V/FV
TPB240L = 240V/XFR Standard/Master—Incandescent Standard/Master/PresTest—LED
FB48 = 48V/FV
TPB380L = 380V/XFR H2 = G2 = Red RP = RG = Red
RB120 = 120V/RES
1 RB240 = 240V/RES
TPB480L = 480V/XFR
TPB600L = 600V/XFR
H3 =
H4 =
G3 = Green
G4 = Yellow
GP = GG = Green
NB120 = 120V/neon YP = YG = Yellow
FPB297L = Full voltage H5 = G5 = White WP = WG = White
1 NB240 = 240V/neon
PresTest—Incandescent
H6 = G6 = Blue LP = LG = Blue
H9 = G9 = Amber AP = AG = Amber
TPB120 = 120V/XFR
1 TPB240 = 240V/XFR
H0 = G0 = Clear
PresTest—Incandescent
TPB380 = 380V/XFR
V2 = P2 = Red
1 TPB480 = 480V/XFR
TPB600 = 600V/XFR V3 = P3 = Green
FPB06 = 6V/FV V4 = P4 = Yellow
1 FPB12 = 12V/FV V5 =
V6 =
P5 = White
P6 = Blue
FPB24 = 24V/FV
FPB32 = 32V/FV V9 = P9 = Amber
1 FPB48 = 48V/FV V0 = P0 = Clear
RPB120 = 120V/RES
1 RPB240 = 240V/RES

1 Note
1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.

V7-T1-288 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
Ordering Complete Devices
Complete E34 pushbuttons, individually packaged Ordering Example 1
indicating lights and/or components will be shipped Illuminated Pushbutton
selector switch operators unassembled in a single Device—Catalog Number 1
including contact block(s) and overpack carton marked with E34XB120V2-153SP90
legend plate can be ordered the composite catalog
For a complete Catalog
1
using a single composite number.
Number breakdown, see
catalog number. The
Pages V7-T1-287 to
1
V7-T1-288.
1
1
For Complete E34 Device Ordering
1
E34XB120 V2 – 153 SP90
1
Operator Legend Plate 1
E34;SP90
Lens
E34V2 Contact Blocks
1
10250T1 and 10250T53
Insert Hyphen Before
1
Contact Block(s)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-289
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Product Selection
1
Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1 Flush Button Pushbutton Units

Contact Flush Button Extended Button Mushroom Button Jumbo Mushroom 1
1 Type Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1NO Black E34PB1-53X E34EB1-53X E34LB1-53X E34JB1-53X
1 Red E34PB2-53X E34EB2-53X E34LB2-53X E34JB2-53X
Green E34PB3-53X E34EB3-53X E34LB3-53X E34JB3-53X
1 Extended Button
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — E34JB2N8-53X
1NC Black E34PB1-51X E34EB1-51X E34LB1-51X E34JB1-51X
1 Red E34PB2-51X E34EB2-51X E34LB2-51X E34JB2-51X

1 Green E34PB3-51X E34EB3-51X E34LB3-51X E34JB3-51X

Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — E34JB2N8-51X
Mushroom Button
1 1NO-1NC Black E34PB1-1X E34EB1-1X E34LB1-1X E34JB1-1X
Red E34PB2-1X E34EB2-1X E34LB2-1X E34JB2-1X
1 Green E34PB3-1X E34EB3-1X E34LB3-1X E34JB3-1X
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP
1 — — — E34JB2N8-1X

Jumbo Mushroom
1
1
1
1
Plastic Lens Indicating Light Units
1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1 24V Full Voltage Indicating Light Units
Indicating Light LED/Lamp Indicating Light 1
1 Type Voltage Color Number Catalog Number
LED Lamp
1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Bayonet base E34FB197LRP24

1 Green E34FB197LGP24
Amber E34FB197LAP24
1 120 Vac Red E34FB197LRP2A
Green E34FB197LGP2A
1 Amber E34FB197LAP2A
Incandescent Lamp
1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 E34FB24H2X

1 Green E34FB24H3X
Amber E34FB24H9X
1 Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB E34RB120H2X
Green E34RB120H3X
1 Amber E34RB120H9X
Transformer 120 Vac Red #755 E34TB120H2X
1 50/60 Hz
Green E34TB120H3X
Amber
1 E34TB120H9X

Notes
1 Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1 Anodized aluminum head—may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
1

V7-T1-290 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Pushbuttons
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-Illuminated 1
Button Color Catalog Number
E34PB_ Flush button Black E34PB1
1
Red E34PB2
1
Green E34PB3
Yellow E34PB4 1
White E34PB5
Blue E34PB6 1
Gray E34PB7
Orange E34PB8
1
E34EB_ Extended button Black E34EB1 1
Red E34EB2
Green E34EB3 1
Yellow E34EB4
White E34EB5
1
Blue E34EB6
1
Gray E34EB7
Orange E34EB8 1
E34EHB_ Half shrouded button Vertical Horizontal
Black E34EVB1 E34EHB1 1
Red E34EVB2 E34EHB2
Green E34EVB3 E34EHB3
1
Yellow E34EVB4 E34EHB4 1
White E34EVB5 E34EHB5
Blue E34EVB6 E34EHB6 1
Gray E34EVB7 E34EHB7
Orange E34EVB8 E34EHB8
1
E34LB_ Mushroom button Black E34LB1
1
Red E34LB2
Green E34LB3 1
Yellow E34LB4
Blue E34LB6 1
E34JB_ Anodized aluminum jumbo Black E34JB1 1
mushroom button 1
Red E34JB2
Red (Engraved EMERG. STOP) E34JB2N8
1
Green E34JB3 1
Yellow E34JB4
1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1 Anodized aluminum head—may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-291
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights

1
Illuminated Pushbutton Operators without Lens
1 Illuminated Indicating
Pushbutton Light PresTest
1 Type Voltage Lamp Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
LED Lamp (LEDs not included) 1
1 Full voltage — Bayonet E34CB497L E34FB197L E34FPB297L
base
Transformer AC only 24 E34XB024L — —
1 Indicating Light
120 E34XB120L E34TB120L E34TPB120L
240
1 E34XB240L E34TB240L E34TPB240L
277 E34XB277L E34TB277L —
1 380 E34XB380L E34TB380L E34TPB380L
480 E34XB480L E34TB480L E34TPB480L
1 PresTest 600 E34XB600L E34TB600L E34TPB600L
Incandescent Lamp
1 Full voltage AC/DC 6 #755 E34CB06 E34FB06 E34FPB06

1 12 #756 E34CB12 E34FB12 E34FPB12

24 #757 E34CB24 E34FB24 E34FPB24
1 32 #1828 E34CB32 E34FB32 E34FPB32
48 #1835 E34CB48 E34FB48 E34FPB48
1 Resistor AC/DC 2 120 120MB E34SB120 E34RB120 E34RPB120
240 E34SB240 E34RB240 E34RPB240
1 Transformer AC only 24 #755 E34XB024 — —

1 120 E34XB120 E34TB120 E34TPB120

240 E34XB240 E34TB240 E34TPB240
1 277 E34XB277 E34TB277 —
380 E34XB380 E34TB380 E34TPB380
1 480 E34XB480 E34TB480 E34TPB480
600
1 E34XB600 E34TB600 E34TPB600
Neon AC/DC 120 NE51H-R-22 — E34NB120 —
1 240 NE51H-4-68 — E34NB240 —

Notes
1 Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page V7-T1-269 for LED Selection and Pages V7-T1-287 to V7-T1-288 for Catalog
1 Numbering Selection.
2 Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-292 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Plastic Indicating Light Lens
Plastic Glass 1
1
Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Red E34H2 E34G2
1
Green E34H3 E34G3
1
Glass Yellow E34H4 E34G4
White E34H5 E34G5 1
Blue E34H6 E34G6
Ambler E34H9 E34G9 1
Clear E34H0 E34G0
1

E34V_ Illuminated Pushbutton Lens 1

Color Catalog Number
1
Red E34V2
Green E34V3 1
Yellow E34V4
White E34V5 1
Blue E34V6
Ambler E34V9
1
Clear E34V0 1
1
Plastic PresTest Lens

Color
Plastic
Catalog Number
Glass 1
Catalog Number
1
Red E34V2 E34P2 1
Green E34V3 E34P3
Glass Yellow E34V4 E34P4 1
White E34V5 E34P5
Blue E34V6 E34P6
1
Ambler E34V9 E34P9
1
Clear E34V0 E34P0

Note 1
1 Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-293
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Push-Pull Units
1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1 ● Two- and three-position

● Non-illuminated
1 Two-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated
Two-Position
1 Push-Pull Unit Operator Position 1
Pull Push Mounting Location
Contact
1 Button Type/Color 2 Type A B Catalog Number
Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
1 O X 40 mm/red 1NO E34GDBC2-1X
X O
40 mm engraved 1NC E34GDBC2N8-1X
1 EMERG. STOP/red
65 mm aluminum engraved E34GDBJ2N8-1X
1 EMERG. STOP/red

1
Three-Position Three-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated
1 Push-Pull Unit Operator Position 1
Pull Intermediate Push Mounting Location
1 Button Type/Color 2
Contact
Type A B Catalog Number

1 Maintained Push, Momentary Pull

X O O 40 mm/black 1NC E34GFBC1-3X
X X O
1 40 mm/red 1NC E34GFBC2-3X
40 mm engraved E34GFBC2N8-3X
1 EMERG. STOP/red
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
1 X O O 40 mm/black 1NC E34GEBC1-3X
X X O
40 mm/red 1NC E34GEBC2-3X
1 O O X 40 mm/black 1NO E34GHBC1-1X
X O O
40 mm/red 1NC
1 E34GHBC2-1X

1 Button and Color Selection

1 Color Suffix Code Catalog Number
Standard Standard—40 mm
1 Black C1 E34C1
Red C2 E34C2
1 Red (EMERG. STOP) C2N8 E34C2N8

1 Green C3 E34C3
Blue C6 E34C6
1 Jumbo Mushroom
Head
Jumbo Mushroom Head 3
(Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm

1 Red J2 E34J2
Red (EMERG. STOP) J2N8 E34J2N8
1
1 Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1 1
2
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code
from the table. Example: E34GDBC6-1X.
1 3 Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications.

1
1

V7-T1-294 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
● Two-position maintained 1
● Illuminated

Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull

1
Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit Operator Position 1 1
Maintained— Maintained—
Red Standard
Pull Intermediate
Contact Mounting Location LED/Lamp Push-Pull 1
Lamp Type Voltage Type A B Number Catalog Number 2
O X LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Bayonet E34GDB97LRD24-1X 1
X O base
120 Vac/Vdc 1NC E34GDB97LRD2A-1X
Transformer 24 Vac E34GDB89LRD06-1X 1
120 Vac E34GDB63LRD06-1X
O X Incan- Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 E34GDB79M2-1X
1
X O descent
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120MB E34GDB80M2-1X 1
Transformer 24 Vac #755 E34GDB89M2-1X
120 Vac E34GDB63M2-1X 1
1
Standard Lens and Color Selection
Incandescent LED 1
Color Suffix Code Suffix Code Catalog Number
Standard 1
Red M2 RD E34M2
Red (EMER. STOP) M2N8 ED E34M2N8
1
Green M3 GD E34M3
1
Blue M6 LD E34M6
Amber M9 AD E34M9 1
White M5 WD E34M5
Clear M0 CD E34M0 1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1
1
2
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from Lens and Color Selection table above.
1
Example: E34GDB79M3 -1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-301.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-295
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1 ● Three-position maintained
1 ● Illuminated

Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull

1 Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit Operator Position 1

1 Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Momentary—
Push Mounting Location Red Standard
Contact LED/Lamp Push-Pull
1 Lamp Type Voltage Type A B Number Catalog Number 2
O O X LED Full 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Bayonet E34GHB97LRD24-1X
1 X O O voltage base
120 Vac 1NC E34GHB97LRD2A-1X
1 Trans- 24 Vac E34GHB89LRD06-1X
former
1 120 Vac E34GHB63LRD06-1X

1 X O O Full 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Bayonet E34GEB97LRD24-3X

X X O voltage base
1 120 Vac 1NC E34GEB97LRD2A-3X

1 Trans-
former
24 Vac E34GEB89LRD06-3X

120 Vac E34GEB63LRD06-3X

1
O O X Incan- Full 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 E34GHB79M2-1X
1 X O O descent voltage
Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB E34GHB80M2-1X
1
Trans- 24 Vac #755 E34GHB89M2-1X
former
1 120 Vac E34GHB63M2-1X

1 X O O Full 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 E34GEB79M2-3X

X X O voltage
1 Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB E34GEB80M2-3X

1 Trans- 24 Vac #755 E34GEB89M2-3X

former

1 120 Vac E34GEB63M2-3X

1 Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1 1
2
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from Lens and Color Selection table on the
bottom of Page V7-T1-295. Example: E34GEB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-301.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-296 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
● Three-position—maintained push, momentary pull
● Illuminated 1
Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit Operator Position 1
1
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Maintained—
Push Mounting Location Red Standard 1
Contact LED/Lamp Push-Pull
Lamp Type Voltage Type A B Number Catalog Number 2 1
X O O LED Full 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Bayonet E34GFB97LRD24-3X
X X O voltage base 1
120 Vac 1NC E34GFB97LRD2A-3X

Trans- 24 Vac E34GFB89LRD06-3X

1
former
120 Vac E34GFB63LRD06-3X
1
X O O Incan- Full 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 E34GFB79M2-3X 1
X X O descent voltage
Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB E34GFB80M2-3X 1
Trans-
former
24 Vac #755 E34GFB89M2-3X 1
120 Vac E34GFB63M2-3X
1
1
Vertical or Horizontal Potentiometers
One-Hole Mounting 3 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10% 1
Potentiometer
Ohms Catalog Number 1
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 45
1000 E34PDB1F1
1
2500 E34PDB1F2
1
5000 E34PDB1F5
10000 E34PDB1F10 1
25000 E34PDB1F25
50000 E34PDB1F50 1
Operator only 6 E34PDB1A0
Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings E34LP99
1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-322. 1
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283. 1
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table
on the bottom of Page V7-T1-295.
1
Example: E34GFB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-301.
3 Shown with standard aluminum dial plate. 1
4 Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalog number.

5
Example: E34PDB1F136. To order separately, see footnote 5 below.
Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate
1
as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
6 For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page V7-T1-274. 1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-297
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Push-Pull Operators ● Momentary Pull, Application Guide

1 An illuminated push-pull Maintained Push—(Three- To assist in the selection of
pushbutton unit, arranged for position). Spring returns to contact blocks, the sketch
1 one-hole mounting, can intermediate position when below shows pictorially by
replace two pushbuttons and pulled. Maintains in pushed symbols A and B locations of
1 a pilot light or the non- position until manually
returned to intermediate
contact circuits after
illuminated form can replace assembly of contact blocks
(ready to reset) position. and adapter to the operator.
1 two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic Maintained stop holds The table below shows the
types: circuit open and will effect of the push and pull
1 prevent other series operations on either NO or
● Maintained—(Two- connected operators from NC contacts. (X = contact
1 position). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
starting the system. closed, O = contact open).
until manually actuated to The operators, buttons, Contact Circuit Locations
1 the opposite mode. contact blocks, etc., are
offered as building block Locating Nib
● Momentary—(Three-
1 position). Spring returns to
components that can be
intermixed to satisfy many
an intermediate position
1 when pulled or pushed and
requirements. This minimizes
the need for a varied and
A

released. B
costly inventory.
1
1
Two-Position Maint. Push-Pull Operator Components
1 Push-Pull 1 Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out—Pull Intermediate In—Push
1
Contact Block Mounting Location
1 Type of Operator A B A B A B Contact Block 2 Catalog Number

1 Two-Position Operator without Lens

Maintained push-pull O O No intermediate X X 1NO E34GDB
or or
X X position O O 1NC
1
O O X X 2NO
X X O O 2NC
1 Three-Position Operator without Lens

1 Momentary push-pull O
X
or
O
X
O
O
or
O
X
X
O
or
O
O
1NO
1NC
E34GEB 2

1 O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
2NO
2NC
Maintained push-momentary pull O O O O X O 1NO E34GFB 2
1 X
or
X O
or
X O
or
O 1NC
O O O O X O 2NO
1 X X O X O O 2NC
Momentary push-pull O O O O X X 1NO E34GHB 2
1 X
or
X O
or
O O
or
O 1NC
O O O O X X 2NO
1 X X O O O O 2NC

Notes
1 Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
See Typical Applications on Page V7-T1-233.
1 1 Shown without button on lens.
2 Maximum of two blocks, four circuits. Special function contact blocks shown on Page V7-T1-316 CANNOT be used with
1 three-position push-pull operators E34GEB, E34GFB or E34GHB.

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-298 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Ordering Example with One Composite Number 1
Non-illuminated:
E34GDB + E34C2 + 10250T1 = E34GDBC2-1X
1
Incandescent: 1
E34GDB + 10250T79 + E34M2 + 10250T1 = E34GDB79M2-1X
LED: 1
E34GDB + 10250T97L + E34M2 + Voltage Code + 10250T1 = E34GDB97LRD24-1X
1
06—6 Vac/Vdc 60—60 Vac/Vdc
12—12 Vac/Vdc 2A—120 Vac
24—24 Vac/Vdc 2D—120 Vdc
1
48—48 Vac/Vdc
1
Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices 1
Light Unit LED/Lamp
Type Type Voltage Number Catalog Number 1
LED Full voltage — Bayonet 10250T97L
(LEDs not included) 1
Transformer 24
base
10250T89L
1
AC only
50/60 Hz
120 10250T63L 1
208 10250T64L
240 10250T65L 1
277 10250T82L
380 10250T66L
1
480 10250T67L
1
600 10250T68L
Incandescent Full voltage
AC or DC
6 #755
#756
10250T69 1
12 10250T70
#757
24/28 #1828 10250T79 1
32 10250T83
Resistor 120 120MB 10250T80
1
AC or DC
240 10250T81
1
Transformer 24 #755 10250T89
AC only
50/60 Hz
120 10250T63 1
208 10250T64
240 10250T65 1
277 10250T82
380 10250T66
1
480 10250T67 1
600 10250T68

Notes
1
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from chart on Page V7-T1-301. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-299
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices

1 Incandescent
Color Suffix Code Catalog Number
1 Standard Standard Button
Black
1 C1 E34C1
Red C2 E34C2
1 Red (EMERG. STOP) C2N8 E34C2N8
Green C3 E34C3
1 Blue C6 E34C6
Jumbo Mushroom Jumbo Mushroom Head
1 Head
Red 1 J2 E34J2

1 Red (EMERG. STOP) J2N8 E34J2N8

1
1
E34M_ Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
1 Incandescent LED
Color Suffix Code Suffix Code 2 Catalog Number
1 Red M2 RD E34M2
Red (EMERG. STOP) M2N8 ED E34M2N8
1 Green M3 GD E34M3
Blue M6 LD E34M6
1 Amber M9 AD E34M9

1 White M5 WD E34M5
Clear M0 — E34M0
1 Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1 1 Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications.
2 Suffix codes should only be used for assembling composite catalog numbers. To order lens, order by catalog number.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-300 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Standard LED Lamp LED Selection
Voltage Color Catalog Number Voltage Color Catalog Number
1
6 Vac/Vdc
suitable for
Red E22LED006RN 60 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED060RN
1
Orange E22LED006ON Orange E22LED060ON
use with
transformers Yellow E22LED006YN Yellow E22LED060YN 1
Green E22LED006GN Green E22LED060GN
Blue E22LED006BN Blue E22LED060BN 1
White E22LED006WN White E22LED060WN
12 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED012RN 120 Vac Red E22LED120RA
1
Orange E22LED012ON Orange E22LED120OA 1
Yellow E22LED012YN Yellow E22LED120YA
Green E22LED012GN Green E22LED120GA 1
Blue E22LED012BN Blue E22LED120BA
White E22LED012WN White E22LED120WA
1
24 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED024RN 120 Vdc Red E22LED120RD
1
Orange E22LED024ON Orange E22LED120OD
Yellow E22LED024YN Yellow E22LED120YD 1
Green E22LED024GN Green E22LED120GD
Blue E22LED024BN Blue E22LED120BD 1
White E22LED024WN White E22LED120WD
48 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED048RN
1
Orange E22LED048ON
1
Yellow E22LED048YN
Green E22LED048GN 1
Blue E22LED048BN
White E22LED048WN 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-301
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Selector Switch Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1 ● Two-, three- and four-position—maintained

● Non-illuminated and illuminated
1 Two-Position Selector Switch
Two-Position Maint.
1 Switch Knob Operator Position 1
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Operator Contact Mounting Location Cam Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever
1 Action 2 Type A B Code Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
X O 1NC 1 E34VFBK1-1X E34VFBL1-1X E34VFB120ER-1X E34VFB120FR-1X
1 O X M M
1NO

1
1 Three-Position Maint. Three-Position Selector Switch
Switch Knob Operator Position 1
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
1 Operator Contact Mounting Location Cam Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever
Action 2 Type A B Code Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
1 X O O M 1NO 3 E34VHBK1-2X E34VHBL1-2X E34VHB120TER-2X E34VHB120TFR-2X
O O X M M
1 1NO

1 X
O
O
X
O
O
1NO 3 E34VHBK1-23X E34VHBL1-23X E34VHB120TER-23X E34VHB120TFR-23X

O O X 2NC
1 (Series)
1NO
1
1
Four-Position Maint. Four-Position Selector Switch
1 Switch Lever Operator Position 1
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Operator Contact Mounting Location Cam Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever
1 Action 2 Type A B Code Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3
X O O O M M 1NC 7 E34VTBK1-23X E34VTBL1-23X E34VRB120TER-23X E34VRB120TFR-23X
1 O X O O
O O X O M M 1NO
O O O X
1
1NO

1 1NC

1
1 Color Selection, Non-Illuminated
Color Code Letter Color Code Letter
1 Black 1 White 5
Red Blue
1 2 6
Green 3 Gray 7
1 Yellow 4 Orange 8

Notes
1 For Light Unit Voltage Suffix and Knobs, Levers tables, see Page V7-T1-308.
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained.
1 3 To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from
the Color Selection table. Example: E34VFBK2-X1.

1
1

V7-T1-302 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Selector Switch Selection
1
1
1
1
1
Cam and Contact Block Selection Systematic Approach
Selector switches in their ● Up to six NO or NC Application: HAND-OFF- For the AUTO circuit, the 1
varied forms (two-position, contacts may be mounted AUTO selector switch. In this “X-O” diagram would look like
three-position and four- behind each plunger circuit, one incoming line is this:
position) are a big factor location for a total of distributed to two other
1
contributing to the great twelve contacts. Single outgoing circuits by the
flexibility of control that a well circuit contact blocks have switch. The two circuits can
HAND OFF AUTO
1
rounded line of “pushbuttons” only one plunger with the be looked at individually.
can achieve. Because of their other side of the block
Step 1: Elementary
O O X
1
flexibility, they tend to cause “open.” Therefore, single
Diagram. Putting them together, the
difficulty with product
selection and application.
circuit contact blocks
transmit motion to blocks Construct on paper, or in your complete “X-O” diagram is: 1
The following systematic behind them only for the mind, a simple elementary
approach should simplify position containing the diagram of the switching XOO
1
that task. circuit. scheme as follows: OOX
● Each cam has two 1
Cam and contact block
separate lobes, each of HAND Outgoing Once the “X-O” diagram has
selection is better understood
if you: which operates one of the Incoming
OFF
Circuit been generated, the next 1
two contact block plungers Line step is to select the cam
Outgoing
● Work with each incoming independently of each AUTO Circuit and contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
1
and outgoing wire/circuit other. Those are identified
separately. as position A (locating nib desired “X-O” functions.
side) and position B
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
The selection tables on the
1
● Recognize the terms NO From the elementary
and NC only identify the (opposite of locating nib). diagram, you can construct an following pages list the
type of contact by its mode The position designations “X-O” diagram which various types (shapes) of 1
before mounting to the give direction in selecting describes when the contacts cams by number to choose
operator. The “X-O” chart and mounting of the are to be closed (X) or open from and the type of contact 1
(Page V7-T1-305) shows contact blocks. (O) in the various positions of and position to achieve the
how that contact will act Contact Circuit Locations the switch. The “X-O” for the function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.
1
after assembly to the HAND circuit looks like this:
operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
Locating Nib
1
HAND OFF AUTO
circuit, O = open circuit. A
1
B X O O
1
In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
(HAND) but open in the
1
center and right.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-303
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Step 3: Cam Selection. Step 5: Selector Switch Example Selection Table

1 The cam you select Operator. Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3
determines the operation of Lastly, you have to choose No. “X-O” Pattern Top A Bottom B Top A Bottom B
1 all contact blocks mounted to from the many types of
1 X O O a —
the operator. It is selected on operators—knob and lever
1 the basis that it provides the
simplest circuitry for the
in various colors or keyed.
Also what combinations NO NC NO
desired “X-O” diagram. The of maintained and spring 4 O O X — —
1 selection tables show all the return functions are
“X-O” combinations. For the required. Selection of these NO NO
1 purpose of this example, the operators can be found on
applicable portion of those Page V7-T1-306. For the
Two-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
1 tables is shown on this page. example in step 4, you
Desired Circuit and
may want a three-position
Now to make the cam maintained black knob, Operator Position
1 selection, make a simple cam 3—Catalog Number Contact Blocks Required to
worksheet such as: E34VHBK1. Accomplish Circuit Function
1 No. Top Plunger A Bottom Plunger B
Cam 2 Cam 3 The Complete Switch:
1 X O
or
1 XOO (A)NO-(B)NC (A)NO
E34VHBK1 with one
10250T2 or, for one
NC NC
OOX (B)NO (B)NO
composite catalog number, 2 O X
1 E34VHBK1-Y1 found on NO
or
NO
It becomes immediately Page V7-T1-303.
1 obvious that cam 3 is the Note
better choice for two Diagrams 1 Wired in series.

1 reasons, (1) the series

combination can be avoided
Circuits shown illustrate
connections to obtain a
making it simpler to wire,
1 (2) only two contacts are
selector switch circuit
combination and are shown
required, which is less with their appropriate line
1 expensive than the three diagrams. Field wiring of
contacts required by cam 2. jumper connections required
1 Step 4: Contact Block as shown.
Selection. X = Closed circuit
1 Having selected the cam, O = Open circuit
contact block selection is
1 simply a matter of gathering Wiring of Jumper
the A position and B position Connections
1 circuits into pairs which make
up the most convenient contact
block arrangement. If there is Series Connection
1 an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then
1 single circuit blocks must be
selected for these leftover Parallel Connection
1 circuits.
Back to the worksheet, Four-position selector
1 having selected cam 3 do switches are limited to four
this: contact blocks.
1 Contact Blocks
X O X ANO
1 O O X BNO
10250T2 For selection and number
of available contact blocks
per operator, see Page
1 V7-T1-315.

1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-304 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection
Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
1
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
Desired Circuit and Operator with Cam Code #2 Operator with Cam Code #3 1
Operator Position Mounting Location Mounting Location
Top Bottom Top Bottom 1
Plunger Plunger Plunger Plunger
No. A B A B
1
1 X O O

NO NC NO 1
2 X X O
NC NC 1
3 X O X
1
NO
NO NO
1
4 O O X
1
NO NO

5 O X X 1
NC
NC NO 1
6 O X O
NC NC NC 1
1
Four-Position Switch—Contact Block Selection 1
Contact Blocks Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Required to
Accomplish Circuit 1
Function Function
Desired Circuit and Mounting Location Desired Circuit and Mounting Location 1
Operator Position Top Bottom Operator Position Top Bottom

No.
Plunger
A
Plunger
B No.
Plunger
A
Plunger
B
1
1 X O O O
NC
10 X O X O 1
NC
2 O X O O
NO
1
NO
3 O O X O 11 X X X O 1
NO
4 O O O X NC
1
NC NO NO
5 X O O X 12 O X X X
1
NC NC 1
6 O X X O
NO NC
NO 1
NO NO
7 O O X X 13 X O X X 1
NO NC 1
8 X X O O NO
NC NC 1
NC NO
9 O X O X 14 X X O X 1
NO
NC
NC NO 1
NC
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-305
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Selector Switch Operators

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1 Two-Position Knob Operators with Knob Assembled

Selector Switch Black Knob Selector Switch—
1 Operator Vertical Mounting 2
Positions Action 1 Cam Code 3 Catalog Number 4
1 Two-position—60° throw 1 E34VFBK1
M M

1 1 E34VEBK1
M S
1
Three-position—60° throw M 2 E34VGBK1
1 M M 3 E34VHBK1
M 2 E34VJBK1
1 S M 3 E34VKBK1
2 E34VLBK1
1 S
M
S 3 E34VMBK1

1 M 2 E34VNBK1
M S 3 E34VPBK1
1 Four-position—40° throw M M 7 E34VTBK1

1 M M

1
Key Operators
1 Key Operators with Cam and Cap
Three-Position Keyed
Selector Switch
1 Operator Cam
Key
Removal
Vertical
Mounting
Horiz.
Mounting
Positions Action 1 Code 3 Positions 5 Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Two-position—60° throw 1 1, 2, 3 E34KFB_ E34KFHB_
M M
1
1 2 E34KEB_ E34KEHB_
1 M S

Three-position—60° throw M 2 1–7 E34KGB_ E34KGHB_

1 M M 3 E34KHB_ E34KHHB_
M 2 1, 4, 5 E34KJB_ E34KJHB_
1 S M 3 E34KKB_ E34KKHB_

1 M 2 4 E34KLB_ E34KLHB_
S S 3 E34KMB_ E34KMHB_
1 M 2 2, 4, 6 E34KNB_ E34KNHB_
M S 3 E34KPB_ E34KPHB_
1 Four-position—40° throw M M 7 7 E34KTB_ E34KTHB_

1 M M

Notes
1 Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
1 2 Field convertible to horizontal mounting.
3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and
1 4
tables on Pages V7-T1-303 to V7-T1-305.
For other colors of either the knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the catalog number with the
appropriate suffix code from Alternate Knob and Lever table on Page V7-T1-307. Example: E34VFBL2.
1 5 Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-307. Add key removal code number to listed catalog number.
Example: E34KFB2.
1
1

V7-T1-306 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Key Removal Positions 1 Dissimilar Locks and Keys
C
Listed operators have 1
L R identical locks and keys (Key
Code H661), Catalog Number 1
10250ED824. For dissimilar
Code Key Removal lock and key combinations, 1
Suffix Position see Page V7-T1-242.
1 Right only 1
2 Left only
3 Right and left
1
Center only
4
1
6 Left and center
7 All positions 1
1

Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators 2

1
E34K_

Knob Lever
Lever Designed for
Added Ingress Protection 3
1
Suffix Suffix Suffix
E34L_
Color Code Catalog Number Code Catalog Number Code Catalog Number 1
Black K1 E34K1 L1 E34L1 A1 E34A1
Red K2 E34K2 L2 E34L2 A2 E34A2
1
Green K3 E34K3 L3 E34L3 A3 E34A3 1
Yellow K4 E34K4 L4 E34L4 A4 E34A4
E34A_
White K5 E34K5 L5 E34L5 A5 E34A5 1
Blue K6 E34K6 L6 E34L6 A6 E34A6
Gray K7 E34K7 L7 E34L7 A7 E34A7
1
Orange K8 E34K8 L8 E34L8 A8 E34A8
1
Notes
1 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
2 See operators on Page V7-T1-306.
1
3 For use on maintained operators only.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-307
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Illuminated Selector Switch Operators

1
120 Vac Transformer Operator without Knob or Lever
1 Selector Switch, Cam 1 Transformer Type—50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 1
6V #755 Lamp Lamps—#755, #757, #1835, 120MB 2
1 Positions Operator Action Catalog Number 34 Catalog Number 4
Two-position—60° throw Cam Code 1 5 Cam Code 1 5
1 M M
E34VFB_ E34SFB_

1 Three-position—60° throw M Cam Code 2 5 Cam Code 3 5 Cam Code 2 5 Cam Code 3 5
M M E34VGB_ E34VHB_ E34SGB_ E34SHB_
1
M E34VNB_ 6 E34VPB_ 6 E34SNB_ 7 E34SPB_ 7
1 M S

1 M E34VJB_ 6 E34VKB_ 6 E34SJB_ 7 E34SKB_ 7

S M
1 M E34VLB_ E34VMB_ E34SLB_ E34SMB_
S S
1
Four-position—40° throw M M E34VRB_ — E34SRB_ —
1
M M
1
Knob Knobs and Levers Light Unit Voltage Suffix
1 Knob Lever Add to operator Catalog Number listed in table above.
Catalog Number Catalog Number Type of Light Unit
1 Color 9 and Code Number and Code Number
Transformer Type Full Voltage Type
Red 10250TER 10250TFR 50/60 Hz AC or DC 1
1 Lever Green 10250TEG 10250TFG Voltage Suffix Code Voltage Suffix Code

Yellow 10250TEA 10250TFA 24 024 6 06

1 Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL 120 120 12 12
208 24
1 Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC 208 24

White 10250TEW 10250TFW 240 240 48 48

1 Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM 380 380 120 120
480 480 240 8 240
1 600 600

1
Notes
1 Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-213 to V7-T1-283.
1 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-269.
1 2 120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
3 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
4 Add suffix code for light unit voltage to listed catalog number from Light Unit Voltage Suffix table above.
1 Example: For 24V transformer type light unit, order E34VFB024.
5 For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection tables on Pages V7-T1-303 to V7-T1-305.
1 6 120 and 240V transformer only.
7 120 full voltage only.
1 8
9
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (R). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (R).

1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-308 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Accessories
1
Accessories
Description Catalog Number 1
E34TA2 Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators. E34TA2
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock. 1
Will not lock NO contact.
1
1
10250TA_ Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with flush pushbutton operators.
Clear 10250TA46 1
Black 10250TA47
Red 10250TA48
1
Green 10250TA49
1
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with button operators (extended
buttons preferred).
Black 10250TA3
1
Red 10250TA4 1
1
Green 10250TA10
Clear 10250TA85 1
Transparent Boot for regular, illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest. 10250TA25 2
E34TA3_ Special Retaining Nut—to accommodate thick panel. 1
Indicating light E34TA30
PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches E34TA31 1
1
E34TA6 Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator—prevents accidental operation. E34TA6
(Not for push-pull operators.)
1
1
E34TA12 Extended Retaining Nut—replaces standard nut and provides guard for E34TA12
1
flush type pushbutton operators.
1
1

E34TA15 Guard for illuminated pushbutton E34TA15

1
1
1
E34TA11 Padlocking Attachment for non-illuminated knob selector switches— E34TA11
accommodates up to five, 1/4 in padlocks. 1
1
1
Notes
1 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-309
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Accessories, continued
1 Description Catalog Number

1 E34TK3 Thrust Washer—To meet Ford Motor Company mounting specifications. E34TK3

1
1
10250TA7_ Contact Block Terminal Jumps—Available in multiples of 100 only.

1 Terminal to terminal—within block (short):

100 per package 10250TA70
1 1000 per package 10250TA70-2
Terminal to terminal—block to block (long):
1 100 per package 10250TA71
1000 per package 10250TA71-2
1 10250TMT8 Master Test (Dual Input) Module—Internal Form C relay suitable for either
AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation between monitored and test circuit.
1 Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48 Vdc 10250TMT8
1
1
10250TFL_ Flasher Module—Internal Form C relay suitable for AC applications.
1 One unit required for each operator in master test circuit.
24 Vac 10250TFL2
1 120 Vac 10250TFL1

1
1 E22CW Panel Mounting Nut Wrench—E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T. E22CW

1
1 10250TA101 Fingerproof Shroud—10 per package 10250TA101
Fits new style contact blocks and light units.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-310 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Options
1
Legend Plates 1
Field Color
1
Legend plates can be
supplied printed on black, red,
suffix code to the end of the
catalog number as follows:
Example: E34SP26R—
Standard plate with red field
1
silver or white field. To order marked OPEN.
legend printed on a color “R” for Red field; 1
other than indicated—add “W” for White field; or
“S” for Silver field. 1

For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights

1
Standard

Legend
Color of
Field
Standard 2
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number Legend
Color of
Field
Standard 2
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
1
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High 1
CLAMP Black E34SP90 E34LP90 OFF Red E34SP24 E34LP24
CLOSE E34SP73 E34LP73 ON Black E34SP25 E34LP25 1
Jumbo
DOWN E34SP74 E34LP74 OPEN E34SP26 E34LP26
EMERG. STOP Red E34SP13 E34LP13 OUT E34SP27 E34LP27
1
FAST Black POWER ON
E34SP75 E34LP75 E34SP80 E34LP80
1
FASTER E34SP87 E34LP87 RAISE E34SP28 E34LP28
FEEDER ON E34SP94 E34LP94 READY E34SP86 E34LP86 1
FEEDER OFF E34SP95 E34LP95 RESET E34SP29 E34LP29
FORWARD E34SP15 E34LP15 REVERSE E34SP30 E34LP30 1
HIGH E34SP16 E34LP16 RUN E34SP31 E34LP31
IN E34SP17 E34LP17 SAFE E34SP85 E34LP85
1
INCH E34SP18 E34LP18 SLOW E34SP32 E34LP32
1
JOG E34SP19 E34LP19 SLOWER E34SP88 E34LP88
JOG FOR. E34SP20 E34LP20 START E34SP33 E34LP33 1
JOG REV. E34SP21 E34LP21 STOP Red E34SP34 E34LP34
LOW E34SP22 E34LP22 TEST Black E34SP83 E34LP83 1
LOWER E34SP23 E34LP23 TRANSFER E34SP93 E34LP93
LUBE-FAIL E34SP92 E34LP92 TRIP E34SP84 E34LP84
1
MOTOR RUN E34SP81 E34LP81 UNCLAMP E34SP91 E34LP91 1
MOTOR STOP E34SP82 E34LP82 UP E34SP35 E34LP35
1
Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square 3 1
Color Field Standard Jumbo Extra Large
Lettering Side 1 Side 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Black White Silver 10250TSP76 10250TLP76 10250TEP76
White Red Black 10250TSP77 10250TLP77 10250TEP77
1
Notes
1 For dimensions, see Page V7-T1-288.
1
2 3/32 in high lettering.
3 Legend plates with non-standard markings or aluminum legend plates see 10250T listing on Page V7-T1-262.
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-311
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Standard For Selector Switch Operators

1 Color of Standard Jumbo Color of Standard Jumbo
Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Two-Position—3/16 in High Lettering Three-Position—3/16 in High Lettering
FOR. REV. Black AUTO OFF HAND Black
1 E34SP38 E34LP38 E34SP49 E34LP49
HAND AUTO E34SP39 E34LP39 FOR. OFF REV. E34SP50 E34LP50
Jumbo
1 HIGH LOW E34SP40 E34LP40 FOR. SAFE REV. E34SP69 E34LP69
JOG RUN E34SP41 E34LP41 HAND OFF AUTO E34SP51 E34LP51
1 MAN. AUTO E34SP67 E34LP67 MAN. OFF AUTO E34SP68 E34LP68
OFF ON E34SP42 E34LP42 OPEN OFF CLOSE E34SP53 E34LP53
1 OPEN CLOSE E34SP43 E34LP43 RUN SAFE JOG E34SP70 E34LP70

1 RUN JOG E34SP44 E34LP44 UP OFF DOWN E34SP54 E34LP54

SAFE RUN E34SP45 E34LP45 ON STOP SAFE E34SP71 E34LP71
1 START JOG E34SP46 E34LP46
START STOP E34SP47 E34LP47
1 UP DOWN E34SP48 E34LP48

1
For Push-Pull Units
1 Color of Standard 1 Jumbo 2
Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 PULL ON/PUSH OFF Black E34PP5 E34R5

1 PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black E34PP8 E34R8

PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black E34PP11 E34R11
1 Notes
1 3/32 in (2.4 mm) high lettering.

1 2 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high lettering.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-312 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Enclosures
1
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
1
Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1
Number of
Elements
One Contact Block Depth
Catalog Number
Two Contact Block Depth
Catalog Number
1
Die Cast Enclosure Die Cast Enclosure—In-Line 23 NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
1 E34N1 E34N11
2 E34N2 E34N12 1
3 E34N3 E34N13
4 — E34N14
1
Polyester Enclosure Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1
1 — E34N51
2 — E34N52 1
3 — E34N53
4 — E34N54 1
Stainless Steel Stainless Steel 4—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1
Enclosure
1 — 10250TN33
1
2 — 10250TN34
3 — 10250TN35 1
4 — 10250TN36
1
1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-322.
1
Mounting Instructions 1
These E34 Die Cast One and Two Contact Block
Enclosures feature a Depth Enclosures Enclosure Layouts 1
corrosion resistant coating
identical to finish on the E34
Top – For Vertical Mounting
1
operators except gray in
Top – For Horizontal

1 1 1 1
color. Not for use in 1
Mounting

ultraviolet light applications. 2 2 2

3 3
1
One Contact Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
Block Depth
Enclosure
4 1
Notes
1
1 For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-314.
2 All die cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23. 1
See listing on Page V7-T1-257.
3 When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
4 14 gauge, type 304.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-313
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only 1

1
Flush Mounting Covers Covers Only—Flush Mounting
1 Number of
Elements Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Flush Die Cast Covers
In-Line Deep In-Line Flat
1 Cover Cover
1 E34F11 E34F1
1 2 E34F12 E34F2

1 3 E34F13 E34F3
4 E34F14 E34F4
1 In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 2
With Pullbox Without Pullbox
1 1 10250TS10 10250TS1

1 2 10250TS11 10250TS2
3 10250TS12 10250TS3
1 4 10250TS14 10250TS4
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-323.
1
1 Spacing Increments
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Type F G H

1 Die cast 2.44 (62.0) 2.5 (63.5) 1.88 (47.8)

Polyester 1.88 (47.8) Min. 2.13 (54.1) 2.25 (57.2)
1 Stainless steel 1.69 (42.9) Min. 1.73 (43.9) 2.25 (57.2)

1
Spacing Increments for
1 Enclosures Enclosure Layouts
Top – For Vertical Mounting
1 G
Top – For Horizontal

1 1 1 1
1 H
Mounting

2 2 2
1 3 3

1 F
4

1 Notes
1 These E34 die cast covers feature a corrosion resistant coating identical to the finish on the E34 operators except gray in color.

1 2 Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-314 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Contact Blocks
1
Standard Contact Blocks Special Purpose Contact Block Palladium Contacts
● UL A600/P600 rated ● Maximum 300V rated Palladium, which is more 1
● Color-coded plungers—red/ ● Black plungers inert than gold, is well suited
green for NC/NO circuits ● Silver contact tips with for voltages and currents 1
● Silver contact tips with “reliability nibs” approaching zero and is
“reliability nibs” recommended for 1
● Black (opaque) housings applications where
● Black (opaque) or amber ● Pressure plate terminals environmental conditions are
(translucent) housings only a factor. 1
● Pressure plate or spade ● Fingerproof shrouds not
terminals available Maximum Contact Block 1
● Fingerproof shrouds (for Mounting per Operator Type
pressure terminals only) Reliability Nibs
Max. 1
Reliability nibs are the Operator Stack
Logic Level Contact Blocks
● UL A600/P600 rated
hallmark of Eaton’s contact
blocks. A pointed silver nib on Pushbuttons 6 1
the contact tip ensures Push-pull operators 2
● Black plungers
reliable switching from logic Roto-push operators 4
1
● Inert palladium knife-blade
contacts level (5V) up to 600V
applications. Therefore
Two- or three-position
selector switches
6 1
● Black (opaque) housings standard contact blocks can
Four-position selector 4
● Pressure plate or spade
terminals
be used for most logic level
switches
1
applications where the
Joysticks 4
● Fingerproof shrouds not
available
contacts are not exposed to
any harsh environmental
1
conditions.
Special Function Contact Blocks 1
● UL A600/P600 rated
● Black plungers
1
● Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs” 1
● Black (opaque) housings
● Pressure plate terminals
1
only
● Fingerproof shrouds not
1
available
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-315
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

10250T1 Contact Blocks

1 Standard Logic Level
Pressure Terminal Spade Terminal 2 Pressure Terminal Spade Terminal 2
1 Symbol Circuit Description 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Blank 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) 10250T51 10250T59 10250T51E 10250T59E
1 No
Plunger unless otherwise noted.
Blank 1NO Stack up to six blocks six circuits) 10250T53 10250T60 10250T53E 10250T60E
1 No
Plunger unless otherwise noted.
NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) 10250T1 10250T40 10250T1E 10250T40E
1 unless otherwise noted.
2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) 10250T3 10250T42 10250T3E 10250T42E
1 unless otherwise noted.
2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) 10250T2 10250T41 10250T2E 10250T41E
1 unless otherwise noted.
Special Function Blocks 3
1 Blank
No
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six 10250T71 3 — 10250T71E 3 —
Plunger blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
1
ECNO- Early closing NO and standard NC. 10250T47 34 — 10250T47E 3 —
NC Stack up to six blocks unless
1 otherwise noted.
ECNO- Early closing NO and standard NO. 10250T57 34 — 10250T57E 3 —
1 NO Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
1 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. 10250T45 3 — 10250T45E 3 —
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
1 LONC- Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 10250T55 34 — 10250T55E 3 —
ECNO four blocks unless otherwise noted.
1 Special Purpose Blocks 5

1 2NO-
2NC
Four circuits in single block depth.
Rated 300V max. Stack up to four
10250T44 5 —

blocks unless otherwise noted.

1 Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
1 type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).

1 Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
3 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
4 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
1 5 Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or roto-push operators. Okay to use with three-position push-pull operators only

on low voltage (30V or less) circuits.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-316 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
10250T1CP Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
Standard Logic Level
1
Pressure Terminal 2 Pressure Terminal 2
Symbol Circuit Description 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Blank 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP
No
Plunger 1
Blank 1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP
No
Plunger 1
NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1P 10250T1EP
1
2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3P 10250T3EP
1
2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2P 10250T2EP

Special Function Blocks 3

1
Blank
No
Plunger
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71P 4 10250T71EP 4 1
ECNO-NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T47P 34 10250T47EP 4
1
ECNO-NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks 10250T57P 34 10250T57EP 4
unless otherwise noted. 1
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless 10250T45P 4 10250T45EP 4

otherwise noted. 1
LONC-ECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to four blocks unless 10250T55P 34 10250T55EP 4

otherwise noted. 1
1
Replacement Parts
1
Replacement Lamps—For E34 Illuminated Operators
Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number 1
120MB 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor indicating light 28-3044
#267 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T flasher 10250ED986-4
1
#755 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T transformer, PresTest and full voltage 28-2202
1
#756 12V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5184
#757 24V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5185 1
#1828 32V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5186
#1835 55V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor 28-5187 1
NE48 120V T 4-1/2 bayonet 10250T neon 28-494
NE51H-R22 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3754
1
NE51H-R68 240V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3755 1
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 1
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change suffix P to CP in catalog number, e.g., 10250T51CP.
3 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
1
4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-317
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

1
1
1
1
1
1 Flush Head
Pushbutton Operator
Mushroom Head
Pushbutton Operator
Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator
Potentiometers

1
1
1
1
1
Illuminated Transformer Type Knob-Operated Full Voltage, Resistor
1 Pushbutton Operator Indicating Light Selector Switch and Transformer Type
Operator Illuminated Selector Switch

1
E34 Style Operator Replacement Parts
1 Item No. Part Item No. Part
No. Description Req. Number No. Description Req. Number
1 1 Gasket 1 16-1548 12 Mounting screw 2 11-1632
2 Mounting nut 1 13 Simple potentiometer 1
1 15-1530-4
(does not include items 18, 28 or 29)
As Req. Below
3 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 2 11-2014
1,000 ohms — 41-782-2
1 4 Mushroom head button (includes [2] item 5) 1 As Req. Below
2,500 ohms — 41-782-3
Black — 53-1317
1 Red — 53-1317-2
5,000 ohms — 41-782-10
10,000 ohms — 41-782-4
Yellow — 53-1317-3
1 Green — 53-1317-4
25,000 ohms — 41-782-5
50,000 ohms — 41-782-6
1 Blue — 53-1317-22
14 Connector (includes screw and lug) 2 25-1851
5 Set screw (#10-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 2 11-544
15 Indicating plate 1
1 6 Jumbo mushroom head button 1 As Req. Below
As Req. Above
(aluminum—includes [2] item 5) Standard size (without legend) — 30-4460
1 Red — 53-1317-9 Large size (specify legend) — 10250TR30
Black — 53-1317-10 16 Retaining nut 1 15-1547-3
1 Yellow — 53-1317-11 17 Knob 1 53-1314
Green — 53-1317-12 Socket set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long) 1 11-2014
1 7 Jumbo mushroom head button 1 53-1349-18 18 Coupling 1 11-2014
(aluminum—red EMERG. STOP)
1 does not include item 5
29-3749-2

8 Mounting screw (#6-32 x 0.710 in long) 2 10250TA79 19 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.188 in long) 1 11-1199
1 Washer 2 16-2038
20 Spacer 2 56-1066-18
21 Connector (includes screw and lug) 1 25-1851-2
9 Terminal screw and lug (captive) Req. 80-5502
1 22 Mounting nut 1 15-1938-2
10 Gasket (supplied with basic unit) 1 32-803

1 11 Round head screw (#4-40 x 0.344 in long)

(supplied with basic unit)
2 11-4553

1
1

V7-T1-318 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Mechanical Ratings
Description Specification
1
Frequency of Operation 1
All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr.
Key and lever selector switches 3000 operations/hr. 1
Auto-latch devices 1200 operations/hr.
Life
1
Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations
1
Contact blocks 10 x 106 operations
PresTest units 10 x 106 operations 1
Lever and key selector switches 0.25 x 106 operations
Twist to release pushbuttons 0.3 x 106 operations 1
Shock Resistance
Duration 210 ms >5g
1
1
General Specifications
1
Description Specification
Climate Conditions 1
Operating temperature 1° to 150°F (–17° to 66°C)
Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C) 1
Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity Max. 95% RH at 60°C
1
Terminals 1
Marking NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1–2
for normally closed, 3–4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005).
1
Clamps Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
conductors
1
Torque 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud 1
Light Units
Transformers Will withstand short-circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60947-5-1 1
Bulbs—average life:
Transformer type 20,000 hrs. 1
Resistor/direct voltage type 2500 hrs. minimum at rated V
LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-319
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Electrical Ratings
1 Description Specification

1 Insulation Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc

Thermal Ith = 10A
1 Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Rated conditional short circuit current 1 kA
1 Fuse type GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1
1
UL rating A600, P600
1 AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour
10A 110V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
1 5A 250V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
2A 600V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
1 Switching capacity

1 AC 15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)

6A 120V pf 0.3
1 4A 240V pf 0.3
2A 660V pf 0.3
1 DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
1.0A 125V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
1 0.55A 250V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms

1 0.1A 660V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms

10A 110V pure resistive
1 Maximum ratings for logic level and
hostile atmosphere application
1 Maximum amperes 0.5A
Maximum volts 120 Vac/Vdc
1 Low voltage switching Conical shaped points or “reliability nibs” improve performance in dry circuit,
corrosive, fine dust and other contaminated atmospheres. Under normal
1 environmental conditions, the minimum operational voltage is 5V and the minimum
operational current is 1 mA, Vac/Vdc.

1 Contact operation Slow make and break. All normally closed contacts have positive opening operation,
i.e., normally closed contacts are forced open in the event of contact weld or spring
breakage.
1
1 Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
1 50 Vac or 60 H Vdc
Description 120 240 480 600 24/28 125 250
1 Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC

1 Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp) 60 30 15 12 5.7 1.1 0.55

Normal load break (amp) 6 3 1.5 1.2 5.7 1.1 0.55
1 Thermal current (amp) 10 10 10 10 5.0 5.0 5.0
Voltamperes:
1 Make and emerg. interrupting capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 138 138
Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138 138
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-320 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Mounting Options
1
Panel Thickness
● Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm) 1
● Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
● Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut 1
● Indicating light: 10250TA30
● Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31 1
1
Mounting Matrix
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Legend
Plate A B C D
1
Small 1.63 (41.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.63 (41.3)
Medium 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.75 (44.5) 1
Large 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2)
1
Mounting Options in Inches (mm) 1
Terminals on Top
D
0.6
(15.2) 1
0.14 (3.6) Min.
Dia.
1
C
B
Min.
A
Min.
Min. 1.22 1
(31)

Terminals at Side
1
Horizontal Mounting Vertical Mounting 1
Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block.
1
Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals. 1
Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 in (3.6 mm) #29 drill.
1
Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
0.14 (3.6) 0.6
(15.2)
1
Dia.
1
1.20
1
(30.5)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-321
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Dimensions
1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 Potentiometer Legend Plates

1 Large Dial Plate 2.19

(55.6)
1.88 1.31 1.77
(47.8) 1.09 (33.3)
1.0 (45)
1 (27.7) (25.4)
Std. Dial Plate 0.94 0.94
1 (23.9) (23.9) 1.77
2.19
(55.6)
(45)
0.94
1 (23.9)
0.75 Standard Jumbo
1 (19.1)

1 Surface Mounting
1 Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
1 4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
1 7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester

1
1 E
B

1
1 D C
A
1 Surface

1 Number of Element Wide High Deep Mounting Conduit

Elements Arrangement A B C D E Entrance
1 Die Cast
1 In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 3/4
1
2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 5.13 (130.3)

1 3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 7.00 (177.8) 1
4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 8.88 (225.6)
1 Polyester
1 In-line 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 2
1 2 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0)

1 3 3.81 (96.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 7.13 (181.1)
4 3.81 (96.8) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 9.38 (238.3)
1 Stainless Steel
2
1 In-line 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0)
1 2 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 7.50 (190.5)
3 3.50 (88.9) 9.00 (228.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 9.00 (228.6)
1 4 3.50 (88.9) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8)

1 Notes
1 Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 in (19.1 mm).

1 2 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.

1
1

V7-T1-322 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Flush Mounting
1
Die Cast and Stainless Steel Covers Only
4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size 1
for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger 1
1
E
B 1
1
D C 1
A
Surface or Pendant
1

Number of Wide High Deep Mounting

1
Elements A B C D E
Die Cast
1
1 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 3.63 (92.2) 1
2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 5.50 (139.7)
3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 6.00 (152.4) 1
4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 9.25 (235.0)
Stainless Steel
1
1 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 1.88 (47.8)
1
2 5.00 (127.0) 6.88 (174.8) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 3.63 (92.2)
3 5.00 (127.0) 8.63 (219.2) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 5.50 (139.7) 1
4 5.00 (127.0) 10.50 (266.7) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 7.25 (184.2)

Notes
1
1 Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover is 3/4 in (19.1 mm) deeper.
2 Depth given includes pull box. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-323
 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Padlocking Attachment for Flush Contact Block Terminal Jumps
Pushbutton Operators
1 0.25
0.25
0.84 (6.4)
0.75 0.94 (6.4)
1 (19.1)
(21.3)
(23.9)
0.45 0.86
1.63 (11.4) (21.8)
1 (41.4)
0.25
1 (6.4)
Master Test Module and
Flasher Module
1 Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
1.63 1.78
1 1.47
(37.3)
(41.4) (45.2)

1 1.59
(40.4)
1.31
(33.3)

1 1.14
6 Mounting Holes
(29)
1 Transparent Boot

1 1.92
(48.8) Flush Pushbutton
1.06
1 1.59
(40.4)
(26.9)
Contact Blk.
Each Addl.

1
Contact
1.78 1.38
Blk.

(45.2) (35.1)

1 Shroud for Mushroom

0.88 1.09
Head Operator (22.4) (27.7)
1 1.53
(38.9)
1 Extended Pushbutton
1.50 1.44
1 (38.1) (36.6)
Contact Blk.
Each Addl.

Contact

1 1.78 1.38
Blk.

(45.2) (35.1)
Extended Retaining Nut
1 1.25 0.88 1.09
(31.8) (22.4) (27.7)
1
1.38 1.31
(35.1) (33.3)
1 Half Shroud Pushbutton
1.44
1 (36.6)
Contact Blk.

Guard for Illuminated

Each Addl.

Contact

1.78
1 1.38
Blk.

Pushbutton (45.2) (35.1)

1.63
1 (41.4)
0.88 1.09
1.50 (22.4) (27.7)
1 (38.1)

1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-324 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
1.10
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Mushroom Pushbutton Illuminated Pushbutton
1.63 1.09 1.09 0.69 1
(41.4) (27.7) (27.7) (17.5)
1
Contact Blk.
Each Addl.

Contact

Light
1.78 1.50

Unit
1.78 1.38
Blk.

(45.2) (38.1) (45.2) (35.1)

1
1.13
0.88 1.09
(22.4) (27.7)
(28.7)
1
Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton Selector Switch 1
1.58
(40.1) 1
Contact Blk.
Each Addl.

Contact

1.78 2.50 Knob

Blk.

Each Additional
(63.5)
1

Contact Block
(45.2)

Contact
Block
0.88
(22.4)
1.09
(27.7)
1.75
(44.5)
1
1
Push-Pull Switch
0.88 0.88 0.88
(22.4)
1.09
(27.7)
1.58
(40.1)
1
(22.4) (22.4) 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4) Lever
Panel Thickness 1
2.63
(66.8)
Key Selector Switch 1
Contact Light 1.13
Block Unit (28.7) 1.65
1
Contact Blk.

(41.9)
Each Addl.

Contact
Block

0.25 1.78
1
(6.4) (45.2)
1
Indicating Light 0.88 1.09 1.5
(22.4) (27.7) (38.1) 1
1.58 (40.1)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
to Remove
Key
1
1
1.1 1.38 Illuminated Selector Switch
(27.9) (35.1)
1.58
1
(40.1)
PresTest Indicating Light Knob 1
Each Additional
Contact Block

1.9 1.09 0.69

(48.3) (27.7) (17.5) 1
Light
Unit
Contact Blk.
Each Addl.

Contact

1.78 1.38 1
Blk.

(45.2) (35.1)

1.13
(28.7)
1
0.88 1.09 1.58
(22.4) (27.7) (40.1)
Lever 1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-325
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Contents

1 Description Page
1 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-327
1 Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units,
1 Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-328
Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-330
1 Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-332
1 Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-334
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-336
1 Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-337
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-338
1 Selector Switch Contact Block
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-340
1 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-341
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-342
1 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-345
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-346
1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-347
1
1
1 Standards and
Product Description Features Benefits Certifications
1 The HT800 Series from ● Anodized aluminum ● Corrosion resistant NEMA ● UL508 per File No.
Eaton’s Electrical Sector is a mounting rings 4X finish E131568
1 family of 30.5 mm pushbutton ● Watertight double V-gasket ● Watertight and oiltight ● CSA C22.2 No. 14 per File
devices which includes seals NEMA 4, 13 ingress No. LR68551
1 momentary, illuminated ● Extended height bulbs protection
and mushroom head ● Increased side illumination
pushbuttons, selector
● Transparent housing
1 switches, indicating lights contact blocks of indicating lights and
illuminated pushbuttons
and push-pull switches. The ● Color-coded contact blocks Ingress Protection
1 HT800 devices have a familiar ● Gold-plated contacts (on
● Easy visual inspection of
contact conditions
● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
appearance found in most low voltage contact block) 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 when
1 industrial applications and are ● Reliability ridge on movable
● Easily identifiable NO
(white) or NC (black)
mounted in similarly rated
suitable for replacement of contact enclosures
several other manufacturers’ contact blocks
1 30.5 mm pushbutton devices.
● Stackable screw-mounted ● Gold-plated contacts
contact blocks
suitable for logic level
1 ● Contact blocks can be circuits
mounted in left/right or top/ ● Reliability ridge penetrates
1 bottom positions
contamination buildup on
● Standard NC contact stationary contacts
opens before NO contact
1 closes (break before make
● Left/right or top/bottom
operation) mounted contact blocks
1 ● Bright and long lasting LED
allow correct positioning in
retrofit applications
indicating lights in six
1 colors
● All-purpose selector
switches are convertible
● Field convertible maintained and can rotate in 22.5°
1 selector switches—from increments to suit panel
two- to three-position and layouts
1 vice versa
● Field selectable knob/lever
1 mounting positions—at any
22.5° increment
1

V7-T1-326 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
1
HT800 Pushbuttons, Push-Pulls and Indicating Lights
1
1
HT8 GB R AB T1
1
Pushbuttons
Style
Button Color F3
Light Unit Type/Voltage
= 24V FV, LED
1
AA = Flush G = Green Contact Block Location F7 = 120V FV, LED
AB = Extended H = Black (viewed from rear) 1 L1 = 120V transformer, LED 1
AE = Mushroom head R = Red T1 = 120V transformer, incandescent
Left Side Right Side
V3 = 24V FV, incandescent
Illuminated Pushbuttons
GB = Illuminated PB
Lens Color A = NO A5 = NO V7 = 120V res., incandescent 1
A = Amber/Orange A2 = 2NO A6 = 2NO
Push-Pull Operators B = Blue = NC B = NC
CB = Two-position, maintained C = Clear
B1
B2 = 2NC B6 = 2NC 1
Indicating Lights G = Green C = NOEM C5 = NOEM
HF = Full voltage/resistor type
HB = Transformer type
R
W
= Red
= White
C2
D1
= 2 NOEM
= NCLB
C6 = 2 NOEM
D = NCLB
1
Push-to-Test Operators Y = Yellow D2 = 2NCLB D6 = 2NCLB
GT = All types E1 = NOEM-NCLB E5 = NOEM-NCLB 1
F1 = NO and NC Q1 = NO and NC
F4 = 1NO-1NC
1
1
HT800 Selector Switch
1
HT8 JA H 3A F1Q1
1
Operator Contact Block Location
(viewed from rear) 2
1
JA = Two-pos., knob, maint. Switch Color
JB = Three-pos., knob, maint. H = Black Cam Location/Type Left Side Right Side
JC = Four-pos., knob, maint. 1D = For all three-pos. A = NO A5 = NO
1
JD = Two-pos., lever, maint. 3A = For all two-pos. A2 = 2NO A6 = 2NO
JE
JF
= Three-pos., lever, maint.
= Four-pos., lever, maint.
8E = For all four-pos. B1 = NC B = NC 1
B2 = 2NC B6 = 2NC
JK = Two-pos., knob, spr. rtn., left C = NOEM C5 = NOEM
JL = Two-pos., lever, spr. rtn., left C2 = 2 NOEM C6 = 2 NOEM 1
JN = Two-pos., knob, spr. rtn., right D1 = NCLB D = NCLB
JP = Two-pos., lever, spr. rtn., right
JR = Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., left
D2
E1
= 2NCLB
= NOEM-NCLB
D6 = 2NCLB
E5 = NOEM-NCLB
1
JS = Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., left F1 = NO and NC Q1 = NO and NC
JU
JV
= Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., right
= Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., right
F4 = 1NO-1NC 1
JX = Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., both
JY
LN
= Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., both
= Four-pos., knob, spr. rtn., pos 1 to 2
1
LP = Four-pos., lever, spr. rtn., pos 1 to 2
LR = Four-pos., knob, spr. rtn., pos 4 to 3 1
LS = Four-pos., lever, spr. rtn., pos 4 to 3
1
Notes
1 Maximum of four contact blocks per side or a total of eight contact blocks recommended.
2 Maximum of two contact blocks per side or a total of four contacts blocks recommended.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-327
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Product Selection
1
Momentary Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated
1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
● Flush, extended or 40 mm mushroom head operators
1
HT800 Pushbuttons—Point-of-Purchase Units
1 HT800 Pushbuttons
Description Catalog Number

1 Two-position maintained selector switch 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend
plates: OFF ON, MAN. AUTO, UP DOWN
HT8JAH3AAB-POP

1 Three-position maintained selector switch, black knob, 1NO/1NC contact block,

three square legend plates: HAND OFF AUTO, FOR. OFF REV., OPEN OFF CLOSE
HT8JBH1DAB-POP

1 Three-position selector switch, spring return from left and right, black knob,
1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: UP OFF DOWN, FOR OFF REV.,
HT8JXH1DAB-POP

OPEN OFF CLOSE

1 Red push-pull emergency stop, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: HT8CBRAB-POP
STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF
1 Illuminated push-pull maintained red pushbutton, 120V full voltage low profile LED, HT8FBRABFL7-POP
three square legend plates: STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF
1 Illuminated push-pull maintained red pushbutton, 24V full voltage low profile LED, HT8FBRABFL3-POP
three square legend plates: STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF
1 Green flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: HT8AAGAB-POP
START, ON, RUN

1 Black flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
RESET, JOG, OPEN
HT8AAHAB-POP

1 Red flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
STOP, CLOSE, OFF
HT8AARAB-POP

1 Red extended pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
STOP, CLOSE, OFF
HT8ABRAB-POP

Black extended pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
1 RESET, JOG, OPEN
HT8ABHAB-POP

Illuminated green pushbutton, 120V full voltage incandescent, 1NO/1NC contact block, HT8GBGABV7-POP
1 three square legend plates: START, ON, RUN
Illuminated green pushbutton, 24V full voltage incandescent, 1NO/1NC contact block, HT8GBGABV3-POP
1 three square legend plates: START, ON, RUN

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-328 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Flush Head Operator Momentary Contact Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated
Flush Head Extended Head Mushroom Head (40 mm)
1
Contact Type Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
No contact Black HT8AAH HT8ABH HT8AEH
1
Red HT8AAR HT8ABR HT8AER
1
Green HT8AAG HT8ABG HT8AEG
Extended Head
Operator
1NO Black HT8AAHA HT8ABHA HT8AEHA 1
Red HT8AARA HT8ABRA HT8AERA
Green HT8AAGA HT8ABGA HT8AEGA 1
1NC Black HT8AAHB HT8ABHB HT8AEHB
Red HT8AARB HT8ABRB HT8AERB
1
Green HT8AAGB HT8ABGB HT8AEGB
1
40 mm Mushroom 1NO-1NC Black HT8AAHAB HT8ABHAB HT8AEHAB
Head Operator
Red HT8AARAB HT8ABRAB HT8AERAB 1
Green HT8AAGAB HT8ABGAB HT8AEGAB
2NO-2NC Black HT8AAHF1Q1 HT8ABHF1Q1 HT8AEHF1Q1 1
Red HT8AARF1Q1 HT8ABRF1Q1 HT8AERF1Q1
Green HT8AAGF1Q1 HT8ABGF1Q1 HT8AEGF1Q1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-329
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Illuminated Pushbutton Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13

1 ● Incandescent or LED
● Full voltage or transformer type
1 ● 24V and 120V

1 Illuminated Pushbutton
Operator
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Operator Only 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 2NO-2NC
1 Type Volts Lens Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Incandescent Lamp
1 Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8GBFV — — — —
Red HT8GBRV7 HT8GBRAV7 HT8GBRBV7 HT8GBRABV7 HT8GBRF1Q1V7
1 Green HT8GBGV7 HT8GBGAV7 HT8GBGBV7 HT8GBGABV7 HT8GBGF1Q1V7
Amber HT8GBAV7 HT8GBAAV7 HT8GBABV7 HT8GBAABV7 HT8GBAF1Q1V7
1 Clear HT8GBCV7 HT8GBCAV7 HT8GBCBV7 HT8GBCABV7 HT8GBCF1Q1V7

1 White HT8GBWV7 HT8GBWAV7 HT8GBWBV7 HT8GBWABV7 HT8GBWF1Q1V7

Yellow HT8GBYV7 HT8GBYAV7 HT8GBYBV7 HT8GBYABV7 HT8GBYF1Q1V7
1 Blue HT8GBBV7 HT8GBBAV7 HT8GBBBV7 HT8GBBABV7 HT8GBBF1Q1V7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8GBFV — — — —
1 Red HT8GBRV3 HT8GBRAV3 HT8GBRBV3 HT8GBRABV3 HT8GBRF1Q1V3
Green
1 HT8GBGV3 HT8GBGAV3 HT8GBGBV3 HT8GBGABV3 HT8GBGF1Q1V3
Amber HT8GBAV3 HT8GBAAV3 HT8GBABV3 HT8GBAABV3 HT8GBAF1Q1V3
1 Clear HT8GBCV3 HT8GBCAV3 HT8GBCBV3 HT8GBCABV3 HT8GBCF1Q1V3
White HT8GBWV3 HT8GBWAV3 HT8GBWBV3 HT8GBWABV3 HT8GBWF1Q1V3
1 Yellow HT8GBYV3 HT8GBYAV3 HT8GBYBV3 HT8GBYABV3 HT8GBYF1Q1V3
Blue HT8GBBV3 HT8GBBAV3 HT8GBBBV3 HT8GBBABV3 HT8GBBF1Q1V3
1 Transformer 120 Vac No lens 1 HT8GBT1 — — — —

1 Red HT8GBRT1 HT8GBRAT1 HT8GBRBT1 HT8GBRABT1 HT8GBRF1Q1T1

Green HT8GBGT1 HT8GBGAT1 HT8GBGBT1 HT8GBGABT1 HT8GBGF1Q1T1
1 Amber HT8GBAT1 HT8GBAAT1 HT8GBABT1 HT8GBAABT1 HT8GBAF1Q1T1
Clear HT8GBCT1 HT8GBCAT1 HT8GBCBT1 HT8GBCABT1 HT8GBCF1Q1T1
1 White HT8GBWT1 HT8GBWAT1 HT8GBWBT1 HT8GBWABT1 HT8GBWF1Q1T1
Yellow HT8GBYT1 HT8GBYAT1 HT8GBYBT1 HT8GBYABT1 HT8GBYF1Q1T1
1 Blue HT8GBBT1 HT8GBBAT1 HT8GBBBT1 HT8GBBABT1 HT8GBBF1Q1T1

1 Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-330 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
1
Illuminated Pushbutton Illuminated Pushbuttons, continued
Operator Operator Only 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 2NO-2NC 1
Type Volts Lens Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
LED 1
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8GBFV — — — —
Red HT8GBRF7 HT8GBRAF7 HT8GBRBF7 HT8GBRABF7 HT8GBRF1Q1F7
1
Green HT8GBGF7 HT8GBGAF7 HT8GBGBF7 HT8GBGABF7 HT8GBGF1Q1F7
1
Amber HT8GBAF7 HT8GBAAF7 HT8GBABF7 HT8GBAABF7 HT8GBAF1Q1F7
Clear HT8GBCF7 HT8GBCAF7 HT8GBCBF7 HT8GBCABF7 HT8GBCF1Q1F7 1
White HT8GBWF7 HT8GBWAF7 HT8GBWBF7 HT8GBWABF7 HT8GBWF1Q1F7
Yellow HT8GBYF7 HT8GBYAF7 HT8GBYBF7 HT8GBYABF7 HT8GBYF1Q1F7 1
Blue HT8GBBF7 HT8GBBAF7 HT8GBBBF7 HT8GBBABF7 HT8GBBF1Q1F7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8GBFV — — — —
1
Red HT8GBRF3 HT8GBRAF3 HT8GBRBF3 HT8GBRABF3 HT8GBRF1Q1F3
1
Green HT8GBGF3 HT8GBGAF3 HT8GBGBF3 HT8GBGABF3 HT8GBGF1Q1F3
Amber HT8GBAF3 HT8GBAAF3 HT8GBABF3 HT8GBAABF3 HT8GBAF1Q1F3 1
Clear HT8GBCF3 HT8GBCAF3 HT8GBCBF3 HT8GBCABF3 HT8GBCF1Q1F3
White HT8GBWF3 HT8GBWAF3 HT8GBWBF3 HT8GBWABF3 HT8GBWF1Q1F3 1
Yellow HT8GBYF3 HT8GBYAF3 HT8GBYBF3 HT8GBYABF3 HT8GBYF1Q1F3
Blue HT8GBBF3 HT8GBBAF3 HT8GBBBF3 HT8GBBABF3 HT8GBBF1Q1F3
1
Transformer 120 Vac No lens 1 HT8GBT1 — — — — 1
Red HT8GBRL1 HT8GBRAL1 HT8GBRBL1 HT8GBRABL1 HT8GBRF1Q1L1
Green HT8GBGL1 HT8GBGAL1 HT8GBGBL1 HT8GBGABL1 HT8GBGF1Q1L1 1
Amber HT8GBAL1 HT8GBAAL1 HT8GBABL1 HT8GBAABL1 HT8GBAF1Q1L1
Clear HT8GBCL1 HT8GBCAL1 HT8GBCBL1 HT8GBCABL1 HT8GBCF1Q1L1
1
White HT8GBWL1 HT8GBWAL1 HT8GBWBL1 HT8GBWABL1 HT8GBWF1Q1L1
1
Yellow HT8GBYL1 HT8GBYAL1 HT8GBYBL1 HT8GBYABL1 HT8GBYF1Q1L1
Blue HT8GBBL1 HT8GBBAL1 HT8GBBBL1 HT8GBBABL1 HT8GBBF1Q1L1 1
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-331
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13

1 ● Incandescent or LED
● Full voltage or transformer type
1 ● 24V and 120V

1 Guarded Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons
Operator Only 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 2NO-2NC
1 Type Volts Lens Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
Incandescent Lamp
1 Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8GDFV — — — —
Red HT8GDRV7 HT8GDRAV7 HT8GDRBV7 HT8GDRABV7 HT8GDRF1Q1V7
1 Green HT8GDGV7 HT8GDGAV7 HT8GDGBV7 HT8GDGABV7 HT8GDGF1Q1V7
Amber HT8GDAV7 HT8GDAAV7 HT8GDABV7 HT8GDAABV7 HT8GDAF1Q1V7
1 Clear HT8GDCV7 HT8GDVAV7 HT8GDCBV7 HT8GDCABV7 HT8GDCF1Q1V7

1 White HT8GDWV7 HT8GDWAV7 HT8GDWBV7 HT8GDWABV7 HT8GDWF1Q1V7

Yellow HT8GDYV7 HT8GDYAV7 HT8GDYBV7 HT8GDYABV7 HT8GDYF1Q1V7
1 Blue HT8GDBV7 HT8GDBAV7 HT8GDBBV7 HT8GDBABV7 HT8GDBF1Q1V7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8GDFV — — — —
1 Red HT8GDRV3 HT8GDRAV3 HT8GDRBV3 HT8GDRABV3 HT8GDRF1Q1V3
Green
1 HT8GDGV3 HT8GDGAV3 HT8GDGBV3 HT8GDGABV3 HT8GDGF1Q1V3
Amber HT8GDAV3 HT8GDAAV3 HT8GDABV3 HT8GDAABV3 HT8GDAF1Q1V3
1 Clear HT8GDCV3 HT8GDVAV3 HT8GDCBV3 HT8GDCABV3 HT8GDCF1Q1V3
White HT8GDWV3 HT8GDWAV3 HT8GDWBV3 HT8GDWABV3 HT8GDWF1Q1V3
1 Yellow HT8GDYV3 HT8GDYAV3 HT8GDYBV3 HT8GDYABV3 HT8GDYF1Q1V3
Blue HT8GDBV3 HT8GDBAV3 HT8GDBBV3 HT8GDBABV3 HT8GDBF1Q1V3
1 Transformer 120 Vac No lens 1 HT8GDT1 — — — —

1 Red HT8GDRT1 HT8GDRAT1 HT8GDRBT1 HT8GDRABT1 HT8GDRF1Q1T1

Green HT8GDGT1 HT8GDGAT1 HT8GDGBT1 HT8GDGABT1 HT8GDGF1Q1T1
1 Amber HT8GDAT1 HT8GDAAT1 HT8GDABT1 HT8GDAABT1 HT8GDAF1Q1T1
Clear HT8GDCT1 HT8GDCAT1 HT8GDCBT1 HT8GDCABT1 HT8GDCF1Q1T1
1 White HT8GDWT1 HT8GDWAT1 HT8GDWBT1 HT8GDWABT1 HT8GDWF1Q1T1
Yellow HT8GDYT1 HT8GDYAT1 HT8GDYBT1 HT8GDYABT1 HT8GDYF1Q1T1
1 Blue HT8GDBT1 HT8GDBAT1 HT8GDBBT1 HT8GDBABT1 HT8GDBF1Q1T1

1 Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-332 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
1
Guarded Illuminated Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons, continued
Pushbutton Operator Operator Only 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 2NO-2NC 1
Type Volts Lens Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
LED 1
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8GDFV — — — —
Red HT8GDRF7 HT8GDRAF7 HT8GDRBF7 HT8GDRABF7 HT8GDRF1Q1F7
1
Green HT8GDGF7 HT8GDGAF7 HT8GDGBF7 HT8GDGABF7 HT8GDGF1Q1F7
1
Amber HT8GDAF7 HT8GDAAF7 HT8GDABF7 HT8GDAABF7 HT8GDAF1Q1F7
Clear HT8GDCF7 HT8GDCAF7 HT8GDCBF7 HT8GDCABF7 HT8GDCF1Q1F7 1
White HT8GDWF7 HT8GDWAF7 HT8GDWBF7 HT8GDWABF7 HT8GDWF1Q1F7
Yellow HT8GDYF7 HT8GDYAF7 HT8GDYBF7 HT8GDYABF7 HT8GDYF1Q1F7 1
Blue HT8GDBF7 HT8GDBAF7 HT8GDBBF7 HT8GDBABF7 HT8GDBF1Q1F7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8GDFV — — — —
1
Red HT8GDRF3 HT8GDRAF3 HT8GDRBF3 HT8GDRABF3 HT8GDRF1Q1F3
1
Green HT8GDGF3 HT8GDGAF3 HT8GDGBF3 HT8GDGABF3 HT8GDGF1Q1F3
Amber HT8GDAF3 HT8GDAAF3 HT8GDABF3 HT8GDAABF3 HT8GDAF1Q1F3 1
Clear HT8GDCF3 HT8GDCAF3 HT8GDCBF3 HT8GDCABF3 HT8GDCF1Q1F3
White HT8GDWF3 HT8GDWAF3 HT8GDWBF3 HT8GDWABF3 HT8GDWF1Q1F3 1
Yellow HT8GDYF3 HT8GDYAF3 HT8GDYBF3 HT8GDYABF3 HT8GDYF1Q1F3
Blue HT8GDBF3 HT8GDBAF3 HT8GDBBF3 HT8GDBABF3 HT8GDBF1Q1F3
1
Transformer 120 Vac No lens 1 HT8GDT1 — — — — 1
Red HT8GDRL1 HT8GDRAL1 HT8GDRBL1 HT8GDRABL1 HT8GDRF1Q1L1
Green HT8GDGL1 HT8GDGAL1 HT8GDGBL1 HT8GDGABL1 HT8GDGF1Q1L1 1
Amber HT8GDAL1 HT8GDAAL1 HT8GDABL1 HT8GDAABL1 HT8GDAF1Q1L1
Clear HT8GDCL1 HT8GDCAL1 HT8GDCBL1 HT8GDCABL1 HT8GDCF1Q1L1
1
White HT8GDWL1 HT8GDWAL1 HT8GDWBL1 HT8GDWABL1 HT8GDWF1Q1L1
1
Yellow HT8GDYL1 HT8GDYAL1 HT8GDYBL1 HT8GDYABL1 HT8GDYF1Q1L1
Blue HT8GDBL1 HT8GDBAL1 HT8GDBBL1 HT8GDBABL1 HT8GDBF1Q1L1 1
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-333
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Indicating Light Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13

1 ● Incandescent or LED ● Standard and PresTest PresTest—This device being monitored

● Full voltage or transformer types incorporates a press-to-test and connects the lamp to a
1 type ● 24V and 120V feature whereby depressing continuously energized
the lens disconnects circuit for immediate
the light from the source detection of faulty lamps.
1
1 Indicating Light Unit Indicating Light Units
Indicating Light PresTest
1 Type Volts Lens Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Incandescent
1 Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8HFFV HT8GTFV

1 PresTest Light Unit

Red HT8HFRV7 HT8GTRV7
Green HT8HFGV7 HT8GTGV7
1 Amber HT8HFAV7 HT8GTAV7
Clear HT8HFCV7 HT8GTCV7
1 White HT8HFWV7 HT8GTWV7
Yellow
1 HT8HFYV7 HT8GTYV7
Blue HT8HFBV7 HT8GTBV7

1 24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8HFFV HT8GTFV

Red HT8HFRV3 HT8GTRV3
1 Green HT8HFGV3 HT8GTGV3
Amber HT8HFAV3 HT8GTAV3
1 Clear HT8HFCV3 HT8GTCV3

1 White HT8HFWV3 HT8GTWV3

Yellow HT8HFYV3 HT8GTYV3
1 Blue HT8HFBV3 HT8GTBV3
Transformer 120 Vac No lens 1 HT8HBT1 HT8GTT1
1 50/60 Hz
Red HT8HBRT1 HT8GTRT1
Green HT8HBGT1 HT8GTGT1
1 Amber HT8HBAT1 HT8GTAT1

1 Clear HT8HBCT1 HT8GTCT1

White HT8HBWT1 HT8GTWT1
1 Yellow HT8HBYT1 HT8GTYT1
Blue HT8HBBT1 HT8GTBT1
1
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-334 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
1
Indicating Light Unit Indicating Light Units, continued
Indicating Light PresTest 1
Type Volts Lens Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
LED 1
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8HFFV HT8GTFV
Red HT8HFRF7 HT8GTRF7
1
PresTest Light Unit
Green HT8HFGF7 HT8GTGF7
1
Amber HT8HFAF7 HT8GTAF7
Clear HT8HFCF7 HT8GTCF7 1
White HT8HFWF7 HT8GTWF7
Yellow HT8HFYF7 HT8GTYF7 1
Blue HT8HFBF7 HT8GTBF7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8HFFV HT8GTFV
1
Red HT8HFRF3 HT8GTRF3
1
Green HT8HFGF3 HT8GTGF3
Amber HT8HFAF3 HT8GTAF3 1
Clear HT8HFCF3 HT8GTCF3
White HT8HFWF3 HT8GTWF3 1
Yellow HT8HFYF3 HT8GTYF3
Blue HT8HFBF3 HT8GTBF3
1
Transformer 120 Vac
50/60 Hz
No lens 1 HT8HBT1 HT8GTT1 1
Red HT8HBRL1 HT8GTRL1
Green HT8HBGL1 HT8GTGL1 1
Amber HT8HBAL1 HT8GTAL1
Clear HT8HBCL1 HT8GTCL1
1
White HT8HBWL1 HT8GTWL1
1
Yellow HT8HBYL1 HT8GTYL1
Blue HT8HBBL1 HT8GTBL1 1
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-335
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Push-Pull Units
1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13

1 ● 40 mm mushroom head
● Two-position maintained
1 ● Non-illuminated

1
Round Head Two- Two-Position Push-Pull, Maintained, Non-Illuminated
1 Position Push-Pull Unit Operator Position—Maintained
Round Head Flat Head
1 Mushroom Head
Button
Mushroom Head
Button
Button
Contact Type Out In Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
1
No contact — — Black HT8CBH HT8DBH
1 Flat Head Two-Position
Push-Pull Unit
Red HT8CBR HT8DBR
Green HT8CBG HT8DBG
1 NO O X Black HT8CBHA HT8DBHA
Red HT8CBRA HT8DBRA
1 Green HT8CBGA HT8DBGA

1 NC X O Black HT8CBHB HT8DBHB

Red HT8CBRB HT8DBRB
1 Green HT8CBGB HT8DBGB
NO-NC O X Black HT8CBHAB HT8DBHAB
1 X O
Red HT8CBRAB HT8DBRAB
Green HT8CBGAB HT8DBGAB
1 NCLB 1 X O Black HT8CBHD1B HT8DBHD1B
NC X O
1 Red HT8CBRD1B HT8DBRD1B
Green HT8CBGD1B HT8DBGD1B
1 NCLB 1 X O Black HT8CBHD1D HT8DBHD1D
NCLB 1 X O
Red HT8CBRD1D HT8DBRD1D
1 Green HT8CBGD1D HT8DBGD1D

1 Note
1 NCLB = normally closed late break.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-336 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 1
● Incandescent or LED 1
● Full voltage or transformer type
● 24V and 120V 1
Illuminated
Push-Pull Unit
Illuminated Push-Pull Units 1
Lens Operator Only 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 2NCLB
Type Volts Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc Red HT8FBRV7 HT8FBRAV7 HT8FBRBV7 HT8FBRABV7 HT8FBRD1DV7 1
Green HT8FBGV7 HT8FBGAV7 HT8FBGBV7 HT8FBGABV7 HT8FBGD1DV7
24 Vac/Vdc Red HT8FBRV3 HT8FBRAV3 HT8FBRBV3 HT8FBRABV3 HT8FBRD1DV3 1
Green HT8FBGV3 HT8FBGAV3 HT8FBGBV3 HT8FBGABV3 HT8FBGD1DV3
Transformer 120 Vac Red HT8FBRT1 HT8FBRAT1 HT8FBRBT1 HT8FBRABT1 HT8FBRD1DT1
1
Green HT8FBGT1 HT8FBGAT1 HT8FBGBT1 HT8FBGABT1 HT8FBGD1DT1 1
LED Lamp
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc Red HT8FBRF7 HT8FBRAF7 HT8FBRBF7 HT8FBRABF7 HT8FBRD1DF7 1
Green HT8FBGF7 HT8FBGAF7 HT8FBGBF7 HT8FBGABF7 HT8FBGD1DF7
24 Vac/Vdc Red HT8FBRF3 HT8FBRAF3 HT8FBRBF3 HT8FBRABF3 HT8FBRD1DF3
1
Green HT8FBGF3 HT8FBGAF3 HT8FBGBF3 HT8FBGABF3 HT8FBGD1DF3
1
Transformer 120 Vac Red HT8FBRL1 HT8FBRAL1 HT8FBRBL1 HT8FBRABL1 HT8FBRD1DL1
Green HT8FBGL1 HT8FBGAL1 HT8FBGBL1 HT8FBGABL1 HT8FBGD1DL1 1
Note: Complete illuminated push-pull switches will not fit in a standard 3 in deep enclosure.
1
Illuminated Push-Pull Units with Low Profile Light Units 1
Operator Only 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 2NCLB 1NO-1NCLB
Type Voltage Color Fingersafe Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
LED Lamp
Full 120 Red Yes HT8FBRFL7P HT8FBRAFL7P HT8FBRBFL7P HT8FBRABFL7P HT8FBRD1DFL7P HT8FBRD1BFL7P
1
voltage Vac/Vdc
Red No HT8FBRFL7 HT8FBRAFL7 HT8FBRBFL7 HT8FBRABFL7 HT8FBRD1DFL7 HT8FBRD1BFL7 1
24 Red Yes HT8FBRFL3P HT8FBRAFL3P HT8FBRBFL3P HT8FBRABFL3P HT8FBRD1DFL3P HT8FBRD1BFL3P
Vac/Vdc
Red No HT8FBRFL3 HT8FBRAFL3 HT8FBRBFL3 HT8FBRABFL3 HT8FBRD1DFL3 HT8FBRD1BFL3 1
Incandescent
Full 120 Red Yes HT8FBRVL7P HT8FBRAVL7P HT8FBRBVL7P HT8FBRABVL7P HT8FBRD1DVL7P HT8FBRD1BVL7P
1
voltage Vac/Vdc
Red No HT8FBRVL7 HT8FBRAVL7 HT8FBRBVL7 HT8FBRABVL7 HT8FBRD1DVL7 HT8FBRD1BVL7
1
24 Red Yes HT8FBRVL3P HT8FBRAVL3P HT8FBRBVL3P HT8FBRABVL3P HT8FBRD1DVL3P HT8FBRD1BVL3P
Vac/Vdc
Red No HT8FBRVL3 HT8FBRAVL3 HT8FBRBVL3 HT8FBRABVL3 HT8FBRD1DVL3 HT8FBRD1BVL3 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-337
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Selector Switch Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13

1 ● Two-, three- and four-position

● Non-illuminated
1 Two-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated
Standard Knob
1 Operator Operator Position 1 Operating Mode 2 Standard Standard
Contact Black Knob Black Lever
1 Type Catalog Number Catalog Number
No contacts — — M M HT8JAH3A HT8JDH3A
1 S M HT8JKH3A HT8JLH3A
M S HT8JNH3A HT8JPH3A
1 Standard Lever 1NO O X M M HT8JAH3AA5 HT8JDH3AA5
Operator
S M HT8JKH3AA5 HT8JLH3AA5
1 M S HT8JNH3AA5 HT8JPH3AA5

1 2NO X
O
O
X
M M HT8JAH3AAA5 HT8JDH3AAA5
S M HT8JKH3AAA5 HT8JLH3AAA5
1 M S HT8JNH3AAA5 HT8JPH3AAA5
2NO-2NC X O M M HT8JAH3AF1Q1 HT8JDH3AF1Q1
1 O X
S M HT8JKH3AF1Q1 HT8JLH3AF1Q1
O X
X O M S
1 HT8JNH3AF1Q1 HT8JPH3AF1Q1

1 Three-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated

Standard Knob
Operator
1 Operator Position 1 Operating Mode 2 Standard Standard
Contact Black Knob Black Lever
Type Catalog Number Catalog Number
1
No contacts — — — M M M HT8JBH1D HT8JEH1D
1 S M M HT8JRH1D HT8JSH1D
M M S HT8JUH1D HT8JVH1D
1 Standard Lever S M S HT8JXH1D HT8JYH1D
Operator
2NO X O O M M M HT8JBH1DAA5 HT8JEH1DAA5
1 O O X
S M M HT8JRH1DAA5 HT8JSH1DAA5

1 M M S HT8JUH1DAA5 HT8JVH1DAA5
S M S HT8JXH1DAA5 HT8JYH1DAA5
1 2NO-2NC 3 X O O M M M HT8JBH1DF1Q1 HT8JEH1DF1Q1
O X O
S M M HT8JRH1DF1Q1 HT8JSH1DF1Q1
O O X
1 M M S HT8JUH1DF1Q1 HT8JVH1DF1Q1
S M S HT8JXH1DF1Q1 HT8JYH1DF1Q1
1 2NO-2NC X O O M M M HT8JBH1DF1Q1 HT8JEH1DF1Q1
O X X
1 O O X
S M M HT8JRH1DF1Q1 HT8JSH1DF1Q1
X X O M M S HT8JUH1DF1Q1 HT8JVH1DF1Q1
1 S M S HT8JXH1DF1Q1 HT8JYH1DF1Q1

Notes
1 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained, S = Momentary.

1 3 For OXO, NC contacts must be wired in series—see Three-Position Selector Switch table on Page V7-T1-340.

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-338 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
1
Standard Knob Four-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated 1
Operator Operator Position 1 Operating Mode 2

Contact
Standard
Black Knob
Standard
Black Lever
1
Type Catalog Number Catalog Number
No contacts — — — — M M M M HT8JCH8E HT8JFH8E
1
S M M M HT8LNH8E HT8LPH8E
M M M S HT8LRH8E HT8LSH8E
1
Standard Lever
Operator
2NO-2NC X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
M M M M HT8JCH8EF1Q1 HT8JFH8EF1Q1 1
S M M M HT8LNH8EF1Q1 HT8LPH8EF1Q1
O O X O
O O O X M M M S HT8LRH8EF1Q1 HT8LSH8EF1Q1 1
1
1
Notes 1
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained, S = Momentary.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-339
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Selector Switch Contact Block Selection

1
For Two-, Three- and Four-Position Selector Switches
1
Two-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 3A)
1 Operator Position

1 Left Right
X O
or
1 NO NC
O X
1 or
NC NO
1
1 Three-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 1D)
Operator Position
1
Left Right
1 X O O —

NO
1 O X O

1 NC NC
O O X —
1 NO

1 O X X —

NC
1 X X O —

1 NC

1
Four-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 8E)
1 Operator Position

1 Left Right
X O O O —
1 NO
O X O O —
1
NC
1 O O X O —

NO
1
O O O X —
1 NC

1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-340 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Accessories
1
HT800 Accessories
Description Catalog Number 1
HT8A15 Illuminated Pushbutton Guard HT8A15
1
1
HT8WRENCH Wrench Tool HT8WRENCH
1
1
1
HT8LAMPTOOL Lamp/Bulb Removal Tool HT8LAMPTOOL 1
1
HT8X1 Thrust Washer (Anti-rotation) HT8X1 1
(Included with every operator)

1
1
HT8X2 Trim Ring HT8X2
1
(Included with every operator)
1
1
1
HT8X3 Sealing/Spacer Washer HT8X3
(Five included with every operator)
1
1
1
HT8GR1 Grounding Kit for Pushbuttons and Selector Switches HT8GR1
(Included with every operator) 1
1
1
HT8GR2 Grounding Kit for Indicating Lights
(Included with indicating lights)
HT8GR2 1
1
1
1
Light Unit Light Units 1
Type Voltage Catalog Number
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc HT8F3V3 1
120 Vac/Vdc HT8F7V8
Transformer 120 Vac HT8L1T1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-341
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Options
1
Legend Plates 1
1 For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights
Standard
1 Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number

1 Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High

CLAMP Black HT8SP90 HT8LP90 OFF Red HT8SP24 HT8LP24
1 CLOSE HT8SP73 HT8LP73 ON Black HT8SP25 HT8LP25
Jumbo DOWN HT8SP74 HT8LP74 OPEN HT8SP26 HT8LP26
1 EMERG. STOP HT8SP13 HT8LP13 OUT HT8SP27 HT8LP27
FAST HT8SP75 HT8LP75 POWER ON HT8SP80 HT8LP80
1 FASTER HT8SP87 HT8LP87 RAISE HT8SP28 HT8LP28
FEEDER ON HT8SP94 HT8LP94 READY HT8SP86 HT8LP86
1 FEEDER OFF HT8SP95 HT8LP95 RESET HT8SP29 HT8LP29
FORWARD HT8SP15 HT8LP15 REVERSE HT8SP30 HT8LP30
1 HIGH HT8SP16 HT8LP16 RUN HT8SP31 HT8LP31

1 IN HT8SP17 HT8LP17 SAFE HT8SP85 HT8LP85

INCH HT8SP18 HT8LP18 SLOW HT8SP32 HT8LP32
1 JOG HT8SP19 HT8LP19 SLOWER HT8SP88 HT8LP88
JOG FOR. HT8SP20 HT8LP20 START HT8SP33 HT8LP33
1 JOG REV. HT8SP21 HT8LP21 STOP Red HT8SP34 HT8LP34
LOW HT8SP22 HT8LP22 TEST Black HT8SP83 HT8LP83
1 LOWER HT8SP23 HT8LP23 TRANSFER HT8SP93 HT8LP93
LUBE-FAIL HT8SP92 HT8LP92 TRIP HT8SP84 HT8LP84
1 MOTOR RUN HT8SP81 HT8LP81 UNCLAMP HT8SP91 HT8LP91
MOTOR STOP HT8SP82 HT8LP82 UP HT8SP35 HT8LP35
1
1 Standard For Selector Switch Operators
Color of Standard Jumbo Color of Standard Jumbo
1 Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number
Two-Position—3/16 in High Lettering Three-Position—3/16 in High Lettering
1 FOR. REV. Black HT8SP38 HT8LP38 AUTO OFF HAND Black HT8SP49 HT8LP49
HAND AUTO HT8SP39 HT8LP39 FOR. OFF REV. HT8SP50 HT8LP50
1 Jumbo HIGH LOW HT8SP40 HT8LP40 FOR. SAFE REV. HT8SP69 HT8LP69
JOG RUN HAND OFF AUTO
1 HT8SP41 HT8LP41 HT8SP51 HT8LP51
MAN. AUTO HT8SP67 HT8LP67 MAN. OFF AUTO HT8SP68 HT8LP68

1 OFF ON HT8SP42 HT8LP42 OPEN OFF CLOSE HT8SP53 HT8LP53

OPEN CLOSE HT8SP43 HT8LP43 RUN SAFE JOG HT8SP70 HT8LP70
1 RUN JOG HT8SP44 HT8LP44 UP OFF DOWN HT8SP54 HT8LP54
SAFE RUN HT8SP45 HT8LP45 ON STOP SAFE HT8SP71 HT8LP71
1 START JOG HT8SP46 HT8LP46
START STOP HT8SP47 HT8LP47
1 UP DOWN HT8SP48 HT8LP48

1
For Push-Pull Units Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square
1 Color of Standard 2 Jumbo 3 Color of Standard Jumbo
Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 ON/OFF Black HT8PP5 HT8R5 Black White/Silver HT8SP76 HT8LP76
OPEN/CLOSE HT8PP8 HT8R8 White Red/ Black HT8SP77 HT8LP77
1 UP/DOWN HT8PP11 HT8R11

1 Notes
1 For dimensions, see Page V7-T1-350.
2 3/32 in high lettering.
1 3 1/8 in high lettering.

V7-T1-342 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings
1
When Ordering Specify Ordering Example: Legend Characters
● Catalog number of blank Catalog no.: HT85P76STAMP
Available 1
plate. Letter size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm) ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
● Insert the following into Pos. A—POWER HOUSE PQRSTUVWXYZ/-.,1 1
Order Notes: legend, letter Pos. B—START PUMP 1 234567890
size and locations. See 1
information below.
1
Legend Positions
Jumbo Size Standard Size
1
HT8LP Series HT8SP Series
A A 1
B B G F
C 1
D
AB AE AF
K 1
B4 C4
A4 D4 A 1
G H I
1
Blank Plastic Legend Plates for Non-Standard Markings—Plastic 1
Color of Standard Jumbo
Legend Field Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Black White/Silver HT8SP76STAMP HT8LP76STAMP
White Red/Black HT8SP77STAMP HT8LP77STAMP
1
1
Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions 1
Character Size
Top 3/32 in High 1/8 in High 3/16 in High 1
(Aluminum Number Number of Number Number of Number Number of
and Plastic) Style of Lines Characters of Lines Characters of Lines Characters
1
Standard Square 2 18 2 13 1 9
Jumbo 1 Square 5 23 3 18 2 12 1
Note
1 Can be used on top row only of any enclosure. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-343
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Contact Blocks
1
NO Contact Block Contact Blocks 12
1 Contact Without Guard Fingerproof
Description/Function Type Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Standard normally open contact NO HT8A HT8AP
Standard normally closed contact NC HT8B HT8BP
1 Normally open early make contact will NOEM HT8C HT8CP
make circuit before standard NO contact.
1 NC Contact Block
DC ratings do not apply.
Normally closed late break contact will NCLB HT8D HT8DP
1 open after standard NC contact.
DC ratings do not apply.

1 Logic level, low voltage NO contact.

Gold plated contacts.
NO HT8E HT8EP

1
Contact Block Location (Viewed from Rear)
1 Suffix Codes 34

1 Left Side Right Side

A = NO A5 = NO
1 A2 = 2NO A6 = 2NO
B1 = NC B = NC
1 B2 = 2NC B6 = 2NC
C = NOEM C5 = NOEM
1 C2 = 2 NOEM C6 = 2 NOEM

1 D1 = NCLB D = NCLB
D2 = 2 NCLB D6 = 2 NCLB
1 E1 = NOEM-NCLB E5 = NOEM-NCLB
F1 = NO and NC Q1 = NO and NC
1 F4 = 1NO-1NC

1 Notes
1 See Page V7-T1-346 for contact block electrical ratings.
2 Maximum of four contact blocks per side or a total of eight contact blocks recommended.
1 3 Maximum of two contact blocks per side or a total of four contact blocks recommended.
4 Standard contact blocks without fingerproof protection.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-344 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Replacement Parts
1
Replacement Bulbs and LEDs
Voltage Color Catalog Number 1
Incandescent Bulb Incandescent
6V — HT8BULBV1
1
24V — HT8BULBV3 1
120V — HT8BULBV7
1
1
LED Bulb LED 1
6–12V Red HT8LEDRF1
(For use with transformers with 6V
Green HT8LEDGF1
1
secondary winding)
Amber/orange HT8LEDAF1 1
White/clear HT8LEDWF1
Yellow HT8LEDYF1 1
Blue HT8LEDBF1
24V Red HT8LEDRF3
1
Green HT8LEDGF3
1
Amber/orange HT8LEDAF3
White/clear HT8LEDWF3 1
Yellow HT8LEDYF3
Blue HT8LEDBF3 1
120V Red HT8LEDRF7
Green HT8LEDGF7
1
Amber/orange HT8LEDAF7
1
White/clear HT8LEDWF7
Yellow HT8LEDYF7 1
Blue HT8LEDBF7
1
Replacement Lenses 1
PresTest Lights
Indicating Lights Illuminated Pushbuttons 1
Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
Amber HT8LA HT8BA 1
Blue HT8LB HT8BB
Clear HT8LC HT8BC
1
Green HT8LG HT8BG
1
Red HT8LR HT8BR
White HT8LW HT8BW 1
Yellow HT8LY HT8BY
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-345
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Technical Data and Specifications

1
HT800—Specifications
1 Description Specification
Mechanical Ratings
1
Frequency of operation

1 Pushbuttons 6,000 operations per hour

Selector switches 3,000 operations per hour
1 Push-pull operators 3,000 operations per hour
Mechanical endurance/life
1 Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations 6K ops/hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right
Selector switches 250 x 103 operations 3K ops/hr with 2 NO on left and 2 NC on right
1 Push-pull operators 250 x 103 operations 3K ops/hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right

1 Climatic Conditions
Operating temperature 10° to 140°F (–12° to 60°C)
1 Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m)
1 Humidity 95% RH at 60°C
Terminals
1 Contact blocks #6-32 posidrive saddle clamp type, 1 x 16 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG, 12 in-lbs max.

1 Light units #6-32 posidrive saddle clamp type, 1 x 22 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG, 7 in-lbs max.
Electrical Ratings
1 Standard contact blocks UL (NEMA) rating See table below.
Logic level contact block power rating 5V 1 mA (minimum)
1 28V 500 mA (maximum)

1
Electrical Ratings—HT800 Standard Contact Blocks, UL Rating
1 Contact
Description/Function Type AC DC Catalog Number
1 Standard normally open contact NO A600 1 P600 2 HT8A
Standard normally closed contact NC A600 1 P600 2 HT8B
1 Normally open early make contact will make circuit before standard NOEM A600 1 — HT8C
NO contact. DC ratings do not apply.
1 Normally closed late break contact will open after standard NC NCLB A600 1 — HT8D
contact. DC ratings do not apply.
1 Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated contacts. NO 5V 1 mA (minimum) HT8E
28V 500 mA (maximum)
1
1 UL A600 and P600 Ratings
50 Vac or 60 Hz Vdc 3
1 Description 120 240 480 600 125 250 600
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp) 60 30 15 12 1.1 0.55 0.2
1 Normal load break (amp) 6 3 1.5 1.2 1.1 0.55 0.2
Thermal current (amp) 10 10 10 10 5 5 5
1
Voltamperes:
1 Make and emerg. interrupting capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 4 138 4 138 4
Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138 138
1 Notes
1 Heavy-duty.

1 2 Standard-duty.
3 DC ratings do not apply to NOEM (Normally Open Early Make) and NCLB (Normal Closed Late Break) contact blocks HT8C and HT8D.

1 4 Maximum make or break volt-amperes at 300V or less.

V7-T1-346 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Momentary Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated 1
Back, side and bottom views of pushbutton operator with attached contact blocks.
4.60 (116.8)
1
Stacking Screw Torque: Panel
12 in-lbs Max. 3.70 (94.0)
2.90 (73.7) 0.90 (22.9)
1
2.00 (50.8) Extended
1
1.40
1
(35.6)
1
#6-32 Posi-drive
0.75 (19.1) 1
1.00 Flush
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
(25.4)
Side View 1
12 in-lbs Max. 2.00 (50.8)
Copper Wire Only
1
1
Back View
1
1
1
Optional
2 Stacks
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total) 1
Bottom View
1
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Back, side and bottom views of pushbutton operator with attached contact blocks.
1
Light Unit #6-32 Posi-drive Panel 5.15 (130.8) 1
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG 4.35 (110.5)
Terminal Torque: 3.55 (90.2)
1.50
(38.1)
1
7 in-lbs Max. 2.75 (69.9)
Copper Wire Only
Stacking Screw Torque:
1
12 in-lbs Max.
1.40
(35.6)
1
1
Contact Block
#6-32 Posi-drive 1
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG 1.00
Terminal Torque: (25.4) Side View
1
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only 2.00 (50.8)
Back View
1
1
1
1
1
Optional Recommended 4 Stacks
2 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total) 1
Bottom View
1
Note
1 Recommended maximum of four tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users’ discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added.
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-347
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons and Round Head MRH Push-Pull Operators
1 Back, side and bottom views of mushroom head operator with attached contact blocks.
4.60 (116.8)
1 Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Panel
3.70 (94.0) 1.50
(38.1)
2.90 (73.7)
1 2.00 (50.8)

1
1.40
1 (35.6)

1
#6-32 Posi-drive 1.00
1 Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
(25.4) Side View
Terminal Torque:
1 12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
2.00 (50.8)
1

Back View
1
1
1
Optional Recommended 4 Stacks
1 2 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total)
Bottom View
1
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Flat Head MRH Push-Pull Operators
1 Back, side and bottom views of push-pull operator with attached contact blocks.

1 Light Unit
#6-32 Posi-drive Panel 5.15 (130.8)
1.30
Saddle Clamp Type 4.35 (110.5)
(33.0)
1 1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
3.55 (90.2)
7 in-lbs Max. 2.75 (69.9)

1 Copper Wire Only

1.40
1 (35.6)
Stacking Screw Torque:
1 12 in-lbs Max.

1 Contact Block
#6-32 Posi-drive 1.00
Saddle Clamp Type (25.4)
Side View
1 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque: 2.00 (50.8)
12 in-lbs Max.
1 Copper Wire Only
Back View
12

1
1
1
1 Optional Recommended 4 Stacks
2 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total)
1 Bottom View

Notes
1 1 Recommended maximum of four tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users’ discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added.
2 Contact blocks mount directly to operator adaptor in non-illuminated version.

V7-T1-348 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
1.11
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Indicating Lights
Back, side and bottom views of indicating light operator with attached contact blocks. 1
#6-32 Posi-drive Panel
Saddle Clamp Type
1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
1
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1
1
1.30
(33.0) 1
Stacking Screw Torque:
1
12 in-lbs Max.
1
1.68
Side View
(42.7) Light Unit
Assembly 1
Back View
1.67
(42.4)
1.26
(32.0)
1
1
1
1
1
Bottom View
1
Selector Switches
Back, side and bottom views of selector switch operator with attached contact blocks.
1
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Panel
2.90 (73.7)
1
1.20
2.00 (50.8) (38.1)
1
1.40
1
(35.6)
1

#6-32 Posi-drive
1
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
1.00
(25.4) Side View
1
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only 2.00 (50.8) 1
Back View
1
1
1
1
Recommended
2 Stacks 1
(4 Contact Blocks Total)
Bottom View 1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-349
 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1
Mounting Matrix and Minimum Panel Spacing Requirements Legend Plates
1 2.50 (63.5) 2.19
0.18 (4.6) (55.6)
1 1.77
(45)
0.68
1 (17.3)

1 1.77
2.19
(55.6)
2.50 (45)
1 (63.5)

Optional Notch
1 Locations
Standard Jumbo
1
1 1.20 (30.5)
Diameter

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-350 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Contents
Description Page
1
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations— 1
10250T/E34
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-352 1
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-353
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-353 1
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-354 1
Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . V7-T1-358
Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-360 1
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . V7-T1-361
Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-362 1
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-363 1
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-365
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-367
1
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-370
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-374
1
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-376 1
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-379
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . V7-T1-382 1
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-384
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-387 1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-389
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-390 1
1
Standards and
Product Description Benefits Certifications 1
All the Industry-Proven Single composite catalog ● Pushbutton for hazardous ● UL 508—File No. E131568
Quality of Eaton’s 10250T and numbers for complete locations ● UL 1604—File No. E10323 1
assembled stations and ● Drainage holes prevent ● CSA Certified C22.2
E34 Series of Logic Devices,
plus Class I Division 2
operators for use in Division 2 buildup of liquid inside the No.14—File No. LR 68551 1
hazardous locations are operator which can prevent
Certification featured throughout this
● CSA Certified C22.2 No.
The 10250T1H consists of a section.
operation in freezing
environments
213-M1987—File No. LR 1
normally open-normally 20713
closed factory sealed contact
● Grounding nibs bite 1
block that is UL Listed for use
Features through paint and other
coatings to provide secure
in Class I, Division 2, Groups ● Factory sealed contact
ground 1
B, C and D (NEC 500–503)— blocks
● Suitable for corrosive Ingress Protection
Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC
505) hazardous locations and
● Heavy-duty zinc die cast
construction environments (E34 only) ● Standard indicating lights 1
is rated for both NEMA A600 ● Earth terminal provides ● UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
and NEMA Q300. 10250T and
● NEMA rated 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 12, 13 additional grounding point 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
E34 illuminated components and allows for daisy chain ● IEC IP65
have also been UL Listed for
● Front-of-panel drainage
holes
grounding (E34 line) 1
use in Class I, Division 2,
● All other operators
Grounding nibs on the
Groups B, C and D (NEC 500–
●

operator casing
● UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
4, 4X, 12, 13
1
503)—Class I, Zone 2, IIB +
● Solid thermosetting
H2 (NEC 505).
cathodic epoxy coating on
● IEC IP65 1
This, combined with the E34
industry-proven Eaton ● Corrosion resistance in E34 1
10250T 30.5 mm pushbutton
line, offers a complete
solution to Division 2
1
hazardous location
requirements.
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-351
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Product Overview
1
Operator 10250T Grounding Nibs Diaphragm Seal with
1 The 30.5 mm 10250T 10250T line operators have Drainage Holes
pushbutton line features a “grounding nibs”—four metal
1 zinc die cast construction with points on the operator casting Liquid Drainage
chrome-plated housing and designed to bite through Eaton’s pushbutton operators
mounting nut. most paints and other offer front of panel drainage
1 coatings on metal panels to via holes in the operator
Eaton’s E34 Series 30.5 mm enhance the grounding bushing. Hidden from view by
1 pushbutton line features the connection when the the mounting nut, these
same rugged die cast operator is securely holes prevent buildup of liquid
construction of our 10250T
1 line with an additional two-
tightened. inside the operator, which
can prevent operation in
layer 100% solid thermosetting 10250T Grounding Nibs
1 cathodic epoxy coating. This
freezing environments. The
holes also provide a route for
coating provides a flat black escaping liquid in high
1 smooth, consistent, corrosion pressure washdowns,
resistant surface that has effectively relieving pressure
1 passed a demanding 600 hour
salt spray test. (The industry
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
standard for this 4X test
1 requires only 200 hours.)
in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.
1 Ultraviolet Light E34 Grounding Nibs Diaphragm Seal
E34 epoxy coating is not
E34 line of operators is
1 recommended for use in
equipped with a ground
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
applications where exposure
screw terminal as part of its Drainage Hole
1 to ultraviolet light exists—use
die cast construction. This
NEMA 4X 10250T operators. Flexible
earthing terminal provides an Diaphragm
1 Ratings easily accessible point for
Stainless
grounding operators when Steel
Our Class I Division 2 line of
used in a painted or
1 pushbuttons are UL Listed
nonmetallic enclosure and
Operating
Spring
(NEMA type) 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4,
eliminates the need for extra Colorfast
1 4X, 12 and 13. Our Class I
Division 2 E34 line meets IEC
kits when daisy chain Molded
grounding is required. Button
947-1 IP66 standards and the
1 cathodic coating meets FDA E34 Grounding Nibs Drainage Hole
3A sanitary chemical Mounting Nut
1 resistance requirements.
For a complete listing of all
1 applicable ratings see
Nib
Pages V7-T1-387 to
1 V7-T1-388.
Earth
Terminal
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-352 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Product Identification
1
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1
Non-Illuminated Assembled Operators 1
10250T 718 E J 1
1
Operator Type ACC/SS Type
10250T = Heavy-duty oiltight
E34EX = Corrosion resistant oiltight
Blank = None
J = JMB push-pull
1
B = Booted-FL/EXT
Operator and Contact Block G = Guarded-FL 1
K = Knob-SS
706 = Flush 1NO-1NC 722 = 2P SS MT XO,OX-CAM1 L = Lever-SS
707 = Flush 2NO-2NC 723 = 2P SS MT XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1 A = Lever W/IP-SS 1
708 = Extended 1NO-1NC 724 = 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX-CAM1 C = Coin-SS
709 = Extended 2NO-2NC 725 = 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
710 = Mushroom 1NO-1NC 726 = 3P SS MT XOO,OOX-CAM3 — —
Keyed-SS 1
711 = Mushroom 2NO-2NC 727 = 3P SS MT XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3 Button Color
712 =
713 =
JMB mushroom 1NO-1NC
JMB mushroom 2NO-2NC
728 = 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OOX-CAM3
729 = 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
B = Black
Cam Key Removal
1
R = Red
714 = 2P MT push-pull 1NO-1NC 730 = 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OOX-CAM3 G = Green 1 1 = RT only
715 =
716 =
2P MT push-pull 2NO-2NC 731 = 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P MT push-mom pull 1NO-1NC 732 = 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OOX-CAM3
Y = Yellow 2 2 = LT only 1
W = White 3 3 = RT and LT
717 = 3P MT push-mom pull 2NO-2NC 733 = 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
718 = 3P mom push-pull 1NO-1NC 743 = 4P SS MT XOOO,OXOO,OOXO,OOOX-CAM7 N
L = Blue
= Orange
7 4 = CT only
5 = RT and CT
1
721 = 3P mom push-pull 2NO-2NC E = Red EMERG. STOP 6 = LT and CT
T = Keyed-SS 7 = All 1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-353
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Product Selection
1
Momentary Pushbutton Units
1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D

1 10250T Flush Button Non-Illuminated Flush and Extended Pushbuttons

Flush Button Extended Button
1 Contact Type
Button
Color 1
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number

1 1NO-1NC Black 10250T706B E34EX706B 10250T708B E34EX708B

1 E34 Flush Button

Red
1 10250T706R E34EX706R 10250T708R E34EX708R

1
Green 10250T706G E34EX706G 10250T708G E34EX708G
1 10250T Extended
Button
1
2NO-2NC Black 10250T707B E34EX707B 10250T709B E34EX709B
1
1
Red 10250T707R E34EX707R 10250T709R E34EX709R
1 E34 Extended Button

1 Green 10250T707G E34EX707G 10250T709G E34EX709G

1
1
1 Color Selection
Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code
1 Black B White W
Red Blue
1 R L2
Green G Orange 3 N
1 Yellow Y Red (EMERG. STOP) 4 E

Notes
1 Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
1 appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T710Y.
2 Blue not available on jumbo mushroom pushbutton.
1 3
4
Orange is only available on flush or extended pushbuttons.
Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for jumbo mushroom pushbutton only.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-354 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1
10250T Mushroom Non-Illuminated Mushroom and Jumbo Mushroom Pushbuttons
Button Mushroom Button Jumbo Mushroom Button 1
Button 10250T E34 10250T 2 E34 2
Contact Type Color 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
1NO-1NC Black 10250T710B E34EX710B 10250T712B E34EX712B
1
1
E34 Mushroom Button
Red 10250T710R E34EX710R 10250T712R E34EX712R
1
1
Green 10250T710G E34EX710G 10250T712G E34EX712G 1
10250T Jumbo
1
Mushroom Button
1
2NO-2NC Black 10250T711B E34EX711B 10250T713B E34EX713B
1
1
Red 10250T711R E34EX711R 10250T713R E34EX713R
E34 Jumbo Mushroom
1
Button
1
Green 10250T711G E34EX711G 10250T713G E34EX713G 1
1
1
Color Selection
1
Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code 1
Black B White W
Red R Blue L3 1
Green G Orange 4 N
Yellow Y Red (EMERG. STOP) 5 E
1
Notes 1
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T710Y.
1
2 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet applications.
3 Blue not available on jumbo mushroom pushbutton. 1
4 Orange is only available on flush or extended pushbuttons.
5 Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for jumbo mushroom pushbutton only. 1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-355
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1 ● Momentary contact
1 ● Non-illuminated
● Booted or guarded
1
1 Booted Flush Button 10250T Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded
Booted Flush Button Booted Extended Button Guarded Extended Button 1
1 Contact Type Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1NO-1NC Black 10250T706BB 10250T708BB 10250T706BG
1
1 Red 10250T706RB 2 10250T708RB 10250T706RG
Booted Extended
1 Button

Green 10250T706GB 10250T708GB 10250T706GG

1
1
2NO-2NC Black 10250T707BB 10250T709BB 10250T707BG
1
Guarded Extended
1 Button Red 10250T707RB 2 10250T709RB 10250T707RG

1
Green 10250T707GB 10250T709GB 10250T707GG
1
1
1 Color Selection

1 Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code

Black B White W
1 Red R Blue L
Green G Orange N
1 Yellow Y

1 Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.

1 1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T706YG.
2 Red booted flush pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-356 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1
● Momentary contact
● Non-illuminated 1
● Booted or guarded

E34 Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded

1
Booted Flush Button

Contact Type Button Color

Booted Flush Button
Catalog Number
Booted Extended Button
Catalog Number
Guarded Extended Button 1
Catalog Number
1
1NO-1NC Black E34EX706BB E34EX708BB E34EX706BG
1
1
Red E34EX706RB 2 E34EX708RB E34EX706RG
Booted Extended
Button
1
Green E34EX706GB E34EX708GB E34EX706GG 1
1
2NO-2NC Black E34EX707BB E34EX709BB E34EX707BG
1
Guarded Extended
Button 1
Red E34EX707RB 2 E34EX709RB E34EX707RG
1
Green E34EX707GB E34EX709GB E34EX707GG 1
1
1
Color Selection
Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code
1
Black White
B W
1
Red R Blue L
Green G Orange N 1
Yellow Y

Notes
1
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
1
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T706YG.
2 Red booted flush pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function. 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-357
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, and 13

1 10250T Flush Button Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact

Half Shrouded Button
1 Flush Button Extended Button 10250T E34
10250T 1 E34 10250T E34 Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal
1 Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog
Color Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
1 Black 10250T101 E34PB1 10250T111 E34EB1 10250T501 10250T511 E34EVB1 E34EHB1
E34 Flush Button
1
1 Red 10250T102 E34PB2 10250T112 E34EB2 10250T502 10250T512 E34EVB2 E34EHB2

1
1 10250T Extended
Button
Green 10250T103 E34PB3 10250T113 E34EB3 10250T503 10250T513 E34EVB3 E34EHB3
1
1
1 Yellow 10250T104 E34PB4 10250T120 E34EB4 10250T504 10250T514 E34EVB4 E34EHB4
E34 Extended Button
1
1 Gray 10250T105 E34PB5 — E34EB5 10250T505 10250T515 E34EVB5 E34EHB5

1
1 10250T Half Shrouded
Button
White 10250T106 E34PB6 10250T116 E34EB6 10250T506 10250T516 E34EVB6 E34EHB6
1
1
1 Blue 10250T108 E34PB7 10250T118 E34EB7 10250T508 10250T518 E34EVB7 E34EHB7

1 E34 Half Shrouded

Button

1 Orange 10250T109 E34PB8 10250T119 E34EB8 10250T509 10250T519 E34EVB8 E34EHB8

1
1
Notes
1 Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 To order operator with factory assembled extended retaining nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications, add suffix letter E to listed catalog number.
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-358 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, and 13
1
10250T Mushroom Mushroom Head Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact
Button Mushroom Button Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button 1
10250T E34 10250T 1 E34 2
Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
Black 10250T121 E34LB1 10250T171 E34JB1
1
E34 Mushroom Button 1
Red 10250T122 E34LB2 10250T172 E34JB2
1
1
Red (EMERG. STOP) — — 10250T17213 E34JB2N8
10250T Jumbo
1
Mushroom Button
1
Green 10250T123 E34LB3 10250T173 E34JB3
1
1
Yellow 10250T124 E34LB4 10250T174 E34JB4
E34 Jumbo Mushroom 1
Button
1
Blue 10250T129 E34LB6 — —
1
1
Notes 1
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. 1
2 Anodized aluminum head may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-359
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Illuminated Pushbutton Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D

1 ● Momentary contact
● Illuminated
1 ● Plastic lenses

1 10250T8_ Illuminated Pushbuttons

10250T E34
1 Type Voltage Color Contact
LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number 1
LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number 1

1 LED Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC Bayonet 10250T828RD24 Bayonet E34EX828RD24
1 Green
base
10250T828GD24
base
E34EX828GD24
Amber 10250T828AD24 E34EX828AD24
1 E34EX8_
120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC 10250T828RD2A E34EX828RD2A

1 Green 10250T828GD2A E34EX828GD2A

Amber 10250T828AD2A E34EX828AD2A
1 Transformer 120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC 10250T802RD06 Bayonet E34EX802RD06
base
Green 10250T802GD06 E34EX802GD06
6 Vac
1 Amber 10250T802AD06 E34EX802AD06
Incandescent Lamp
1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC #757 10250T818RD #757 E34EX818RD

1 Green 10250T818GD E34EX818GD

Amber 10250T818AD E34EX818AD
1 Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC 120MB 10250T824RD 120MB E34EX824RD
Green 10250T824GD E34EX824GD
1 Amber 10250T824AD E34EX824AD
Transformer 120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC #755 #755
1 10250T802RD
6 Vac
E34EX802RD
Green 10250T802GD E34EX802GD

1 Amber 10250T802AD E34EX802AD

1
10250TC_ Lens Selection
1 Suffix Suffix
Color Code Catalog Number Color Code Catalog Number
1 10250T E34
Red R 10250TC21 Red R E34V2
1 E34V _ Green G 10250TC22 Green G E34V3
Yellow Y 10250TC23 Yellow Y E34V4
1 Amber A 10250TC43 Amber A E34V9

1 Blue L 10250TC24 Blue L E34V6

Clear C 10250TC25 Clear C E34V0
1 White W 10250TC26 White W E34V5

Note
1 1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the catalog number with appropriate

suffix code from Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T828YD24.

1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-360 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1
● Momentary contact 1
● Guarded illuminated
● Plastic lenses 1
10250T8_ Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons 1
10250T E34

Type Voltage Color Contact

LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number 1
LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number 1
1
LED Lamp 1
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC Bayonet 10250T828RG24 Bayonet E34EX828RG24
Green
base
10250T828GG24
base
E34EX828GG24 1
Amber 10250T828AG24 E34EX828AG24
E34EX8_ 120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC 10250T828RG2A E34EX828RG2A
1
Green 10250T828GG2A E34EX828GG2A
1
Amber 10250T828AG2A E34EX828AG2A
Transformer 120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC 10250T802RG06 E34EX802RG06 1
Green 10250T802GG06 E34EX802GG06
Amber 10250T802AG06 E34EX802AG06 1
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC #757 10250T818RG #757 E34EX818RG
1
Green 10250T818GG E34EX818GG 1
Amber 10250T818AG E34EX818AG
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC 120MB 10250T824RG 120MB E34EX824RG 1
Green 10250T824GG E34EX824GG
Amber 10250T824AG E34EX824AG
1
Transformer 120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC #755 10250T802RG #755 E34EX802RG
6 Vac 1
Green 10250T802GG E34EX802GG
Amber 10250T802AG E34EX802AG 1
1
10250TC2_ Lens Selection
Suffix Suffix 1
Color Code Catalog Number Color Code Catalog Number
10250T E34 1
Red R 10250TC21 Red R E34V2
E34V_ Green G 10250TC22 Green G E34V3 1
Yellow Y 10250TC23 Yellow Y E34V4
Amber A 10250TC43 Amber A E34V9
1
Blue L 10250TC24 Blue L E34V6 1
Clear C 10250TC25 Clear C E34V0
White W 10250TC26 White W E34V5 1
Note
1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the catalog number with appropriate
1
suffix code from Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T828YD24.
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-361
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Indicating Light Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D

1 ● Standard
● Plastic lenses
1
1 10250T_ Indicating Lights
LED/Lamp 10250T E34
1 Type Voltage Color Number Catalog Number 1 Catalog Number 1
LED Lamp
1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Bayonet 10250T197HLRP24 E34FB197HLRP24
base
Green 10250T197HLGP24 E34FB197HLGP24
1 Amber 10250T197HLAP24 E34FB197HLAP24

1 E34_
120 Vac Red 10250T197HLRP2A E34FB197HLRP2A
Green 10250T197HLGP2A E34FB197HLGP2A
1 Amber 10250T197HLAP2A E34FB197HLAP2A
Transformer 120 Vac Red 10250T181HLRP06 E34TB120HLRP06
1 Green 10250T181HLGP06 E34TB120HLGP06
Amber
1 10250T181HLAP06 E34TB120HLAP06
Incandescent Lamp

1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 10250T206HRP E34FB24HRP

Green 10250T206HGP E34FB24HGP
1 Amber 10250T206HAP E34FB24HAP
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB 10250T201HRP E34RB120HRP
1 Green 10250T201HGP E34RB120HGP

1 Amber 10250T201HAP E34RB120HAP

Transformer 120 Vac Red #755 10250T181HRP E34TB120HRP
1 Green 10250T181HGP E34TB120HGP
Amber 10250T181HAP E34TB120HAP
1
1 Plastic Lens Selection
Plastic Glass Plastic Glass
1 Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix
Color Code Catalog Number Code Catalog Number Color Code Catalog Number Code Catalog Number
1 10250T E34
Glass Red RP 10250TC1N RG 10250TC7N Red RP E34H2 RG E34G2
1 Green GP 10250TC2N GG 10250TC8N Green GP E34H3 GG E34G3

1 Amber AP 10250TC19N AG 10250TC9N Amber AP E34H9 AG E34G9

Yellow YP 10250TC3N — — Yellow YP E34H4 YG E34G4
1 Blue LP 10250TC4N LG 10250TC10N Blue LP E34H6 LG E34G6
Clear CP 10250TC5N CG 10250TC11N Clear CP E34H0 CG E34G0
1 White WP 10250TC6N WG 10250TC12N White WP E34H5 WG E34G5

1 Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.

1 1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters in the catalog number with appropriate suffix code from the Lens Selection table above.
Example: 10250T201HYP.

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-362 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1
10250T Illuminated Operators without Lenses 1
Pushbutton Illuminated Pushbutton Indicating Light
LED/Lamp 10250T E34 10250T E34 1
Type Voltage Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
LED Light Unit Type (LEDs not included) 1 1
Full voltage — Bayonet 10250T397HL E34CB497HL 10250T197HL E34FB197HL
Transformer 24
base
10250T416HL E34XB024HL — —
1
E34 Illuminated
Pushbutton AC only
120 10250T411HL E34XB120HL 10250T181HL E34TB120HL 1
240 10250T412HL E34XB240HL 10250T182HL E34TB240HL
277 10250T419HL E34XB277HL 10250T198HL E34TB277HL 1
380 10250T413HL E34XB380HL 10250T183HL E34TB380HL
480 10250T414HL E34XB480HL 10250T184HL E34TB480HL
1
600 10250T415HL E34XB600HL 10250T185HL E34TB600HL
10250T Indicating Light
Incandescent Light Unit Type
1
Full voltage
AC/DC
6 #755 10250T473H E34CB06H 10250T203H E34FB06H 1
12 #756 10250T474H E34CB12H 10250T204H E34FB12H
24 #757 10250T476H E34CB24H 10250T206H E34FB24H 1
32 #1828 10250T477H E34CB32H 10250T207H E34FB32H
E34 Indicating Light 48 #1835 10250T478H E34CB48H 10250T208H E34FB48H
1
Resistor 2 120 120MB
AC/DC
10250T471H E34SB120H 10250T201H E34RB120H
1
240 120MB 10250T472H E34SB240H 10250T202H E34RB240H
Transformer
AC only
24 #755 10250T416H E34XB024H — — 1
120 10250T411H E34XB120H 10250T181H E34TB120H
240 10250T412H E34XB240H 10250T182H E34TB240H 1
277 10250T419H E34XB277H 10250T198H E34TB277H
380 10250T413H E34XB380H 10250T183H E34TB380H
1
480 10250T414H E34XB480H 10250T184H E34TB480H 1
600 10250T415H E34XB600H 10250T185H E34TB600H
Neon 120 NE51H-R-22 — — 10250T226H E34NB120H 1
AC/DC
240 NE51H-4-68 — — 10250T227H E34NB240H

Notes
1
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from the LED Selection table on Page V7-T1-373.
1
2 Resister units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-363
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Indicating Light Lenses

1 10250T E34
Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Plastic Plastic
Red
1 10250TC1N E34H2
Green 10250TC2N E34H3
1 10250TC_
Amber 10250TC19N E34H9
Yellow 10250TC3N E34H4
1 Blue 10250TC4N E34H6
Clear 10250TC5N E34H0
1 E34H_ White 10250TC6N E34H5

1 Glass Glass
Red 10250TC7N E34G2
1 Green 10250TC8N E34G3
Amber 10250TC9N E34G9
10250TC_
1 Yellow — E34G4
Blue 10250TC10N E34G6
1 Clear 10250TC11N E34G0

1 E34G_ White 10250TC12N E34G5

1
10250TC_ Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses
1 10250T E34
Color Catalog Number Catalog Number

1 Red 10250TC21 E34V2

Green 10250TC22 E34V3
1 E34V_ Yellow 10250TC23 E34V4
Amber 10250TC43 E34V9
1 Blue 10250TC24 E34V6

1 Clear 10250TC25 E34V0

White 10250TC26 E34V5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-364 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1
● Two- and three-position 1
● Non-illuminated

Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull

1
10250T71_
Operator Function (Position) 1 1
Maintained— Maintained— Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Pull Push
Contact Mounting Location 1 10250T E34 1
Type 1 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number
O X 1NO 10250T714R E34EX714R 1
X O 1NC
E34EX71_
1
O X 2NO 10250T715R E34EX715R 1
X O 2NC
O
X
X
O
1
1
1
10250T71_ Three-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull 1
Operator Function (Position) 1
Momentary— Maintained— Maintained— Red Standard Push-Pull 3 1
Pull Intermediate Push Mounting Location 1
Contact 10250T E34
Type 1 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
O O X 1NO 10250T716R E34EX716R
X O O 1NC 1
E34EX71_
1
X O O 1NC
X X O 1NC
10250T717R E34EX717R
1
1
Notes 1
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Color Selection

table on Page V7-T1-366. Example: 10250T714G.

1
3 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Color Selection

table on Page V7-T1-366. Example: 10250T716G. 1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-365
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1 ● Two- and three-position
1 ● Non-illuminated

Three-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull

1 10250T7_
Operator Function (Position) 1

1 Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Momentary—
Push Mounting Location 1
Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Contact 10250T E34
1 Type 1 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number
O O X 1NO 10250T718R E34EX718R
1 E34EX7_
X O O 1NC

1
X O O 1NC 10250T721R E34EX721R
1 X X O 1NC

1
1
Button and Color Selection
1 Suffix 10250T E34
Color Code Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Standard Standard
Red
1 R 10250TB62 E34C2
Red (EMERG. STOP) E 10250TB63 E34C2N8
1 Green G 10250TB61 E34C3
Black B 10250TB60 E34C1
1 Blue L 10250TB64 E34C6
Jumbo Mushroom Jumbo Mushroom Head
1 Head (Anodized) Aluminum
Red RJ 10250TJ62 E34J2
1 Red (EMERG. STOP) EJ 10250TJ63 E34J2N8
Green GJ 10250TJ61 —
1
Black BJ 10250TJ60 —

1 Yellow YJ 10250TJ64 —

Notes
1 1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the

1 Button and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T718G.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-366 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1
● Two-position maintained 1
● Illuminated

Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull

1
10250T8_
Operator Function (Position) 1 1
Maintained— Maintained— Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Pull Push
Contact Mounting Location 1 10250T E34 1
Type Voltage Type 1 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number
LED Lamp 1
O X Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 10250T853RD24 E34EX853RD24
X O
120 Vac
1NC
10250T853RD2A E34EX853RD2A 1
E34EX8_
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T843RD06 E34EX843RD06
120 Vac 10250T844RD06 E34EX844RD06
1
Incandescent Lamp 1
O X Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 10250T849RD E34EX849RD
X O
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc
1NC
10250T851RD E34EX851RD 1
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T843RD E34EX843RD
120 Vac 10250T844RD E34EX844RD
1
1
Lens and Color Selection
10250T E34
1
Color Suffix Code Catalog Number Suffix Code Catalog Number
1
Standard Standard
Red RD 10250TC47 RD E34M2 1
Red (EMERG. STOP) ED 10250TC53 ED E34M2N8
Green GD 10250TC48 GD E34M3 1
Blue LD 10250TC49 LD E34M6
Amber AD 10250TC50 AD E34M9
1
White WD 10250TC51 WD E34M5 1
Clear CD 10250TC52 CD E34M0
Side-Lighted Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum 1
(Anodized) Aluminum
Red RS 10250TC57 — —
Red (EMERG. STOP) ES 10250TC63 — —
1
Green GS 10250TC58 — —
1
Blue LS 10250TC59 — —
Amber AS 10250TC64 — — 1
Yellow YS 10250TC60
White WS 10250TC61 — — 1
Clear CS 10250TC62 — —
HD Aluminum with Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
1
Transparent Center
Red RH 10250TC65 — —
1
Green GH 10250TC66 — —
Amber AH 10250TC67 — — 1
1
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the
1
Lens and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T851GS.
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-367
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1 ● Three-position—maintained push, momentary pull
1 ● Illuminated

Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull

1 10250T8_
Operator Function (Position) 1

1 Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Maintained—
Push 1
Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Contact Mounting Location 10250T E34
1 Type Voltage Type 1 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number
LED Lamp
1 O O X Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 10250T864RD24 E34EX864RD24
X O O 1NC
120 Vac 10250T864RD2A E34EX864RD2A
1 E34EX8_
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T854RD06 E34EX854RD06
120 Vac 10250T855RD06 E34EX855RD06
1
X O O Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 10250T875RD24 E34EX875RD24
X X O 1NC
1 120 Vac 10250T875RD2A E34EX875RD2A
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T865RD06 E34EX865RD06
1 120 Vac 10250T866RD06 E34EX866RD06
Incandescent Lamp
1 O O X Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 10250T860RD E34EX860RD
X O O 1NC
Resistor 120 Vac
1 10250T862RD E34EX862RD
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T854RD E34EX854RD
1 120 Vac 10250T855RD E34EX855RD
X O O Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 10250T871RD E34EX871RD
1 X X O
Resistor 120 Vac
1NC
10250T873RD E34EX873RD
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T865RD E34EX865RD
1 120 Vac 10250T866RD E34EX866RD

1 Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.

1 2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and

Color Selection table on the bottom of Page V7-T1-367. Example: 10250T862AS.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-368 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1
● Three-position—momentary
● Illuminated 1
Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
10250T8_
Operator Function (Position) 1
1
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Maintained—
Push Mounting Location 1
Red Standard Push-Pull 2 1
Contact 10250T E34
Type Voltage Type 1 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number
1
LED Lamp
O O X Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 10250T886RD24 E34EX886RD24 1
X O O 1NC
120 Vac 10250T886RD2A E34EX886RD2A
E34EX8_
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T876RD06 E34EX876RD06 1
120 Vac 10250T877RD06 E34EX877RD06
X O O Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 10250T897RD24 E34EX897RD24
1
X X O 1NC
120 Vac 10250T897RD2A E34EX897RD2A 1
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T887RD06 E34EX887RD06
120 Vac 10250T888RD06 E34EX888RD06 1
Incandescent Lamp
O O X Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 10250T882RD E34EX882RD
1
X O O 1NC
Resistor 120 Vac 10250T884RD E34EX884RD
1
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T876RD E34EX876RD
120 Vac 10250T877RD E34EX877RD 1
X O O Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 10250T893RD E34EX893RD
X X O
Resistor 120 Vac
1NC
10250T895RD E34EX895RD 1
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T887RD E34EX887RD
120 Vac 10250T888RD E34EX888RD
1
Notes 1
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and

Color Selection table on the bottom of Page V7-T1-367. Example: 10250T862AS.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-369
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Push-Pull Operators
1 An illuminated push-pull ● Momentary Pull, Application Guide
pushbutton unit, arranged for Maintained Push—(Three- To assist in the selection of
1 one-hole mounting, can position). Spring returns to contact blocks, the sketch
replace two pushbuttons and intermediate position when below shows pictorially by
1 a pilot light or the non- pulled. Maintains in pushed symbols 1 and 2 locations of
illuminated form can replace position until manually contact circuits after
1 two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position.
assembly of contact blocks
and adapter to the operator.
types: Maintained stop holds
1 circuit open and will
The table below shows the
effect of the push and pull
● Maintained—(Two- prevent other series operations on either NO or
1 position). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
connected operators from NC contacts. (X = contact
starting the system. closed, O = contact open).
until manually actuated to
1 the opposite mode. The operators, buttons, Locating Nibs
● Momentary—(Three- contact blocks, etc., are
1 position). Spring returns to offered as building block Locating Nib

an intermediate position components that can be

1 when pulled or pushed and intermixed to satisfy many
1 2

released. requirements. This minimizes

1 the need for a varied and
costly inventory.
1
1 10250T_ Push-Pull Operator Components
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
1 Out—Pull Intermediate In—Push

1 Contact Contact Block Mounting Location 10250T E34

Type of Operator Block 1 2 1 2 1 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Two-Position Operator without Lens

1 E34G_ Maintained push-pull 1NO

1NC
O
X
or
O
X
No intermediate X
position O
or
X
O
10250T5 E34GDB

1 2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
Three-Position Operator without Lens
1
Momentary push-pull 1NO O O O O X O 10250T4 E34GEB
or or or
1NC X X O X O O
1 Maintained push-momentary pull
2NO O O O O X O
10250T9 E34GFB
2NC X X O X O O
1 Momentary push-pull 1NO O O O O X X 10250T10 E34GHB
or or or
1NC X X O O O O
1 2NO O O O O X X
2NC X X O O O O
1 Note
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-370 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D 1
Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices 1
Light Unit LED/Lamp
Type Type Voltage Number Catalog Number 1
LED Full voltage — Bayonet 10250T97HL
(LEDs not included) 1
Transformer 24
base
10250T89HL 1
AC only
120 10250T63HL
50/60 Hz
208 10250T64HL
1
240 10250T65HL 1
277 10250T82HL
380 10250T66HL 1
480 10250T67HL
600 10250T68HL
1
Incandescent Full voltage 6 #755
AC or DC #756
10250T69H
1
12 10250T70H
#757
24/28 #1828 10250T79H 1
32 10250T83H
Resistor 120 120MB 10250T80H 1
AC or DC
240 10250T81H
Transformer 24 #755 10250T89H
1
AC only
50/60 Hz
120 10250T63H
1
208 10250T64H
240 10250T65H 1
277 10250T82H
380 10250T66H 1
480 10250T67H
600 10250T68H
1
Note 1
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from table on Page V7-T1-373.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-371
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices

1 10250T E34
Color Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Standard Standard
Red
1 10250TC47 E34M2
Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TC53 E34M2N8
1 Green 10250TC48 E34M3
Blue 10250TC49 E34M6
1 Amber 10250TC50 E34M9
White 10250TC51 E34M5
1 Clear 10250TC52 E34M0

1 Side-Lighted
(Anodized) Aluminum
Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red 10250TC57 —
1 Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TC63 —
Green 10250TC58 —
1 Blue 10250TC59 —
Amber 10250TC64 —
1 Yellow 10250TC60 —

1 White 10250TC61 —
Clear 10250TC62 —
1 HD Aluminum with Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Transparent Center
Red 10250TC65 —
1 Green 10250TC66 —
Amber
1 10250TC67 —

1
1 Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices

1 Color
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Standard
1 Standard
Red 10250TB62 E34C2
1 Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TB63 E34C2N8
Green 10250TB61 E34C3
1 Black 10250TB60 E34C1
Blue 10250TB64 E34C6
1 Jumbo Mushroom Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum 1
Head
1 Red 10250TJ62 E34J2
Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TJ63 E34J2N8
1 Green 10250TJ61 —
Black 10250TJ60 —
1 Yellow 10250TJ64 —

1 Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.

1 1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use with ultraviolet light applications.

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-372 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Standard LED Lamp LED Selection
Voltage Color Catalog Number Voltage Color Catalog Number
1
6 Vac/Vdc
suitable for
Red E22LED006RN 60 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED060RN
1
Orange E22LED006ON Orange E22LED060ON
use with
transformers Yellow E22LED006YN Yellow E22LED060YN 1
Green E22LED006GN Green E22LED060GN
Blue E22LED006BN Blue E22LED060BN 1
White E22LED006WN White E22LED060WN
12 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED012RN 120 Vac Red E22LED120RA
1
Orange E22LED012ON Orange E22LED120OA 1
Yellow E22LED012YN Yellow E22LED120YA
Green E22LED012GN Green E22LED120GA 1
Blue E22LED012BN Blue E22LED120BA
White E22LED012WN White E22LED120WA
1
24 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED024RN 120 Vdc Red E22LED120RD
1
Orange E22LED024ON Orange E22LED120OD
Yellow E22LED024YN Yellow E22LED120YD 1
Green E22LED024GN Green E22LED120GD
Blue E22LED024BN Blue E22LED120BD 1
White E22LED024WN White E22LED120WD
48 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED048RN
1
Orange E22LED048ON
1
Yellow E22LED048YN
Green E22LED048GN 1
Blue E22LED048BN
White E22LED048WN 1
Note
For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page V7-T1-269.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-373
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Selector Switch Units

1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D

1 ● Two- and three-position

● Non-illuminated
1 Two-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
10250T72_
1 Operator Position 1 Black Knob—Selector Switch 3
Operator Contact Mounting Location 1 Cam 10250T E34
1 Action 2 Type 1 2 Code Catalog Number Catalog Number
X O 1NC 1 10250T722BK E34EX722BK
1 O X M M 1NO

10250T724BK E34EX724BK
1 E34EX72_
M S

1 X
O
O
X M M
1NC
1NO
1 10250T723BK E34EX723BK

X O 1NC
1 O X 1NO 10250T725BK E34EX725BK
M S
1
1 Three-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
10250T_

1 Operator Position 1
Mounting Location 1
Black Knob—Selector Switch 4
Operator Contact Cam 10250T E34
1 Action 2 Type 1 2 Code Catalog Number Catalog Number
X O O M 1NO 3 10250T726BK E34EX726BK
O O X 1NO
1 M M

M 10250T728BK E34EX728BK
1 S M

M 10250T730BK E34EX730BK
1 S S

M 10250T732BK E34EX732BK
1 M S

X O O 1NO 3
1 O X O M
M
M 1NC-1NC
10250T727BK E34EX727BK

O O X (Series)
1 S
M
M
1NO 10250T729BK E34EX729BK

1 M 10250T731BK E34EX731BK
S S
1 M 10250T733BK E34EX733BK
M S
1 Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
1 2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).
W
3 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate

1 suffix code from the table on Page V7-T1-375.

Example: 10250T722LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T722T13.
1 4 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate

suffix code from the Switch and Color Selection table on Page V7-T1-375.
1 Example: 10250T726LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T726T13.

1
1
1
1

V7-T1-374 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
1
● Four-position maintained
● Non-illuminated 1
Four-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
10250T743_
Operator Position 1
1
Black Knob—Selector Switch 3
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Mounting Location 1
1 2
Cam
Code
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
1
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
M M 1NC
1NO
7 10250T743BK E34EX743BK 1
O O X O 1NO
E34EX743_
O O O X
M M
1NC 1
1
1
1
Switch and Color Selection
1
Knob

Color
Knob
Suffix Code
Lever
Suffix Code
Lever 4
Suffix Code
Coin Slot 5
Suffix Code
1
Black BK BL BA BC 1
Lever Red RK RL RA RC
Green GK GL GA GC 1
Yellow YK YL YA YC
White WK WL WA WC
1
Coin Slot 5 Gray AK AL AA AC
Blue LK LL LA LC
1
Orange NK NL NA NC 1
Key Operated Selection Key Removal Positions 7
1
C

Number of Operator
Suffix and
Removal L R
1
Position Action 6 Position
2 M M T1 + 1, 2, 3 1
M
QS T1 + 2 Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position 1
3 M M M T3 + 1–7
S Right only
WM M T3 + 1, 4, 5 1
1
S
WMQS T3 + 4 2 Left only
M M S T3 + 2, 4, 6
4
Q
MMMM T7 + 7
3 Right and left 1
4 Center only
6 Left and center 1
7 All positions

Notes
1
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained. 1
3 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the

Switch and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T743LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam) + _ (key removal position). Example: 10250T743T77.
1
4 Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.
5 10250T only. 1
6 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).
W
7 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended. 1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-375
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Selector Switch Selection

1
1
1
1
1 10250T E34

1
Cam and Contact Block Selection Systematic Approach
1 Selector switches in their ● One NO-NC contact block Application: HAND-OFF- In this circuit, you want a
varied forms (two-position, may be mounted behind AUTO selector switch. In this contact closed on the left
1 three-position, and four- each plunger of the circuit, one incoming line is (HAND) but open in the
position) are a big factor mounting adapter for a distributed to two other center and right.
contributing to the great total of four circuits. outgoing circuits by the
1 flexibility of control that a well ● Each cam has two switch. The two circuits can For the AUTO circuit, the “X-
rounded line of “pushbuttons” be looked at individually. O” diagram would look like
separate lobes, each of
1 can achieve. Because of their which operates one of the
this:
flexibility, they tend to cause Step 1: Elementary
two contact block plungers Diagram.
1 difficulty with product independently of each Construct on paper, or in your
HAND OFF AUTO
selection and application. other. Those are identified mind, a simple elementary
1 The following systematic
approach should simplify
as position 1 (locating nib diagram of the switching O O X
side) and position 2 scheme as follows:
that task.
1 (opposite of locating nib).
The position designations
Putting them together, the
complete “X-O” diagram is:
Cam and contact block
give direction in selecting HAND Outgoing
1 selection is better understood
and mounting of the Incoming Circuit
if you: Line OFF XOO
contact blocks. Outgoing OOX
1 ● Work with each incoming
Contact Circuit Locations
AUTO Circuit
and outgoing wire/circuit
Once the “X-O” diagram has
1 separately. Locating Nib Step 2: “X-O” Pattern. been generated, the next
● Recognize the terms NO From the elementary step is to select the cam and
1 2
1 and NC only identify the diagram, you can construct an
“X-O” diagram which
contact block, or blocks,
type of contact by its mode needed to perform the
before mounting to the describes when the contacts
1 operator. The “X-O” table are to be closed (X) or open
desired “X-O” functions. The
selection tables on the
(Page V7-T1-378) shows (O) in the various positions of following pages list the
1 how that contact will act the switch. The “X-O” for the various types (shapes) of
after assembly to the HAND circuit looks like this: cams by number to choose
1 operator with the selected from and the type of contact
cam shape. X = closed HAND OFF AUTO and position to achieve the
1 circuit, O = open circuit. function outlined in your
X O O “X-O” diagram.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-376 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Step 3: Cam Selection. Step 5: Selector Switch Example Selection Table
The cam you select Operator. Desired Circuit and Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3
1
determines the operation of Lastly, you have to choose Operator Position Contact Blocks and Contact Blocks and
all contact blocks mounted to from the many types of Mounting Location Mounting Location 1
the operator. It is selected on operators—knob and lever No. 1 2 1 2
the basis that it provides the in various colors or keyed. 1
simplest circuitry for the Also what combinations of 1 X O O —
desired “X-O” diagram. The maintained and spring
selection tables show all the return functions are 1
“X-O” combinations. For the required. Selection of these
purpose of this example, the operators can be found on NO NC 1 NO 1
applicable portion of those Page V7-T1-379. For the 4 O O X — —
tables is shown on this page. example in step 4, you may 1
want a three-position
Now to make the cam maintained black knob,
selection, make a simple cam 3—Catalog Number NO NO
1
worksheet such as below. 10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1).
(1) or (2) = mounting location Note 1
from chart above: The Complete Switch: 1 Wired in series.

10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1)

with two 10250T1H or for
1
Cam 2 Cam 3
one composite catalog
XOO
OOX
(1)NO-(2)NC 1
(2)NO
(1)NO
(2)NO number—10250T726BK (or 1
E34EX726BK) found on
Page V7-T1-374. 1
It becomes obvious that
cam 3 is the better choice
because the series
Diagrams 1
Circuits shown illustrate
connection can be avoided,
making it simpler to wire.
connections to obtain a
selector circuit combination
1
and are shown with their
Step 4: Contact Block
Selection. appropriate line diagrams in 1
Having selected the cam, BOLD. Field wiring of jumper
contact block selection is connections required as 1
simply a matter of determining shown.
if you require one NO-NC X = Closed circuit
1
contact block (Cat. No O = Open circuit
10250T1H) or two. Given the 1
limitations of the factory
sealed contact block and the
desired “X-O” application,
1
you may have circuits that
will not be needed—as seen 1
here with the two additional
NC circuits. (1) or (2) = 1
mounting location from chart
above. 1
Qty
2
Catalog No. Cam 3
10250TIH (1)NO (2)NC
1
(1)NC (2)NO
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-377
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Two-Position Selector Switch Four-Position Selector Switch

1 Desired Circuit and Cam Code #1 Desired Circuit and Cam Code #7
Operator Position Contact Blocks and Operator Position Contact Blocks and
1 Mounting Location Mounting Location
Number 1 2 Number 1 2
1 1 X O 1 X O O O —

1
NC NC NC
1 2 O X 2 O X O O —

1
1 NO NO NO
3 O O X O —
1 Three-Position Selector Switch
Desired Circuit and Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3
1 Operator Position Contact Blocks and Contact Blocks and NO
Mounting Location Mounting Location
4 O O O X —
1 No. 1 2 1 2
1 X O O —
1 NC
5 X O O X
1 NO (Series) NC NO
2 X X O — —
1
NC (Parallel) NC
1 6 O X X O
NC NC

1 3 X O X —

1 NO (Parallel) NO
7 O O X X
NO NO (Parallel) NO
1 4 O O X — —

1 NO (Parallel) NC
NO NO 8 X X O O
1
5 O X X —

1
NC (Parallel) NO
1 NC (Parallel) NO NC 9 O X O X —
6 O X O —
1
NO/NC
1 NC NC (Series) NC
(Parallel)
10 X O X O —
1
1 NO/NC
(Parallel)
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-378 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Selector Switch Operators
1
10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1
Black Knob Selector 10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps 1
Switch Black Knob Selector Switch— Black Lever Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 2 Vertical Mounting 2 1
Positions Operator Action 1 Cam Code 3 Catalog Number Cam Code 3 Catalog Number
Two-position—60° throw
M M
1 10250T1311 1 10250T3011 1
1 10250T1371 1 10250T3071 1
M S
Black Lever Selector
Switch Three-position—60° throw M 2 10250T1322 2 10250T3022 1
M M 3 10250T1323 3 10250T3023
M 2 10250T1332 2 10250T3032
1
S M 3 10250T1333 3 10250T3033 1
M 2 10250T1342 2 10250T3042
S S 3 10250T1343 3 10250T3043 1
M 2 10250T1352 2 10250T3052
M S 3 10250T1353 3 10250T3053
1
Four-position—40° throw 7 7
M M 10250T1367 10250T3067
1
M M
1
10250T Key Operators with Cam
Horizontal Mounting
Optional Key Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting
1
Positions Operator Action 1 Cam Code 3 Removal Positions 4 Catalog Number 4 Catalog Number 4
Two-position—60° throw 1 1, 2, 3 10250T1511_ 10250T1611_
1
M M
1
1 2 10250T1571_ 10250T1581_
M S
1
Three-position—60° throw M 2 1–7 10250T1522_ 10250T1622_
M M 3 10250T1523_ 10250T1623_ 1
M 2 1, 4, 5 10250T1532_ 10250T1632_
S M 3 10250T1533_ 10250T1633_
1
2 4 10250T1542_ 10250T1642_
S
M
S
1
3 10250T1543_ 10250T1643_
M 2 2, 4, 6 10250T1652_ 10250T1662_ 1
M S 3 10250T1653_ 10250T1663_
Four-position—40° throw M M 7 7 10250T1677_ 10250T1687_ 1
M M
1
Key Removal Positions Key Removal Positions 5 Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Above Key Operators 1
C Code Key Removal Code Key Removal Listed operators have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661)
L R
Suffix Position Suffix Position Catalog Number 10250ED824. 1
1 Right only 5 Right and center
2 Left only 6 Left and center Replacement Keys 1
3 Right and left 7 All positions Description Catalog Number
4 Center only Replacement keys (code H661) 10250ED824
1
Notes 1
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).
W
2 Field convertible to horizontal mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages V7-T1-376 to V7-T1-378.
1
4 Choose key removal position required for application from table above. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T15112.
5 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended. 1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-379
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13

1
Black Knob Selector E34 Selector Switch Operators with Knob Assembled
1 Switch Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 2
1 Positions Operator Action 1 Cam Code 3 Catalog Number 4
Two-position—60° throw 1 E34VFBK1
1 M M

1 E34VEBK1
1 M S

Three-position—60° throw 2 E34VGBK1

1 M
M
M 3 E34VHBK1

1 M 2 E34VJBK1
S M 3 E34VKBK1
1 M 2 E34VLBK1
S S 3 E34VMBK1
1 M 2 E34VNBK1
M S 3
1 E34VPBK1
Four-position—40° throw M M 7 E34VTBK1

1 M M

1
E34KFB_ E34 Key Operators with Cam and Cap
1 Key Removal Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting
Positions Operator Action 1 Cam Code 3 Positions 5 Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Two-position—60° throw 1 1, 2, 3 E34KFB_ E34KFHB_
M M

1 1 2 E34KEB_ E34KEHB_
M S
1
Three-position—60° throw M 2 1–7 E34KGB_ E34KGHB_

1 M M 3 E34KHB_ E34KHHB_
M 2 1, 4, 5 E34KJB_ E34KJHB_
1 S M 3 E34KKB_ E34KKHB_
M 2 4 E34KLB_ E34KLHB_
1 S S 3 E34KMB_ E34KMHB_

1 M
M
S
2 2, 4, 6 E34KNB_ E34KNHB_
3 E34KPB_ E34KPHB_
1 Four-position—40° throw M M 7 7 E34KTB_ E34KTHB_

M M
1
Notes
1 Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-379.
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).
W
1 2
3
Field convertible to horizontal mounting.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages V7-T1-376 to V7-T1-378.
4 For other colors of either knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the catalog number with the appropriate suffix code from Alternate Knobs and Levers table on
1 Page V7-T1-381. Example: E34VFBL2.
5 Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-381. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number. Example: E34KFB2.
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-380 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Key Removal Positions Key Removal Positions
C Code Key Removal Code Key Removal
1
Suffix Position Suffix Position
L R
1 Right only 5 Right and center
1
Left only Left and center
2 6
1
3 Right and left 7 All positions
4 Center only 1
1
Knob Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators 1
Lever Designed for 1
Knob Lever Added Ingress Protection 2

Color
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
1
Lever
Black K1 E34K1 L1 E34L1 A1 E34A1 1
Red K2 E34K2 L2 E34L2 A2 E34A2
Green K3 E34K3 L3 E34L3 A3 E34A3 1
Yellow K4 E34K4 L4 E34L4 A4 E34A4
Lever for Added
Ingress Protection White K5 E34K5 L5 E34L5 A5 E34A5
1
Blue K6 E34K6 L6 E34L6 A6 E34A6
1
Gray K7 E34K7 L7 E34L7 A7 E34A7
Orange K8 E34K8 L8 E34L8 A8 E34A8 1
Notes
1 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended. 1
2 For use on maintained operators only.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-381
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Illuminated Selector Switch Operators

1
Two-Position Maint. 10250T Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
1 Selector Switch Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 4
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz Lamps: 6V—#755, 12V—#756, 24V—#757,
1 6V #755 Lamp 48V—#1835, 120/240V—120MB
Cam Catalog and Cam Catalog and
1 Position Operator Action 1 Code 3 Voltage Code Number 2 Code 3 Voltage Code Number 2
Two-position—60° throw 1 24 10250T5961H 1 6 10250T6201H
1 M M
120 10250T5971H 12 10250T6211H
208 10250T6511H 24 10250T6221H
1 240 10250T5981H 48 10250T6231H
380 10250T5991H 120 10250T6361H
1 480 10250T6001H 240 5 10250T6371H
600 10250T6011H
1 Three-position—60° throw M + 2 or 3 24 10250T602_H + 2 or 3 6 10250T624_H
M M 120 10250T603_H 12 10250T625_H
1 208 10250T652_H 24 10250T626_H
240 10250T604_H 48 10250T627_H
1 380 10250T605_H 120 10250T638_H

1 480 10250T607_H 240 5 10250T639_H

600 10250T607_H

1 M + 2 or 3 120 10250T620_H + 2 or 3 120 10250T622_H

M S 240 10250T656_H
1 M + 2 or 3 120 10250T621_H + 2 or 3 120 10250T623_H
S M 240 10250T662_H
1 + 2 or 3 24 10250T614_H + 2 or 3 6 10250T628_H
M
1 S S 120 10250T615_H 12 10250T629_H
208 10250T653_H 24 10250T630_H
1 240 10250T616_H 48 10250T631_H
380 10250T617_H 120 10250T640_H
1 480 10250T618_H 240 5 10250T641_H
600 10250T619_H
1 Four-position—40° throw M M 7 24 10250T6087H 7 6 10250T6327H
120 10250T6097H 12 10250T6337H
1 M M 208 10250T6547H 24 10250T6347H
240 10250T6107H 48 10250T6357H
1 380 10250T6117H 120 10250T6427H
480 10250T6127H 240 5 10250T6437H
1 600 10250T6137H

1
Knob Knobs and Levers
1 Knob Lever Knob Lever
Catalog and Catalog and Catalog and Catalog and
Color 6 Code Number Code Number Color 6 Code Number Code Number
1
Red 10250TER 10250TFR Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC
Lever
1 Green 10250TEG 10250TFG White 10250TEW 10250TFW

1 Yellow 10250TEA 10250TFA Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM

Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL

1
Notes
1 1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ).
W
2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Page V7-T1-378.
3 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
1 4 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-269.
5 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.

1 6 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer), red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).

V7-T1-382 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
120 Vac Transformer Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
Selector Switch, Cam 1 Transformer Type—50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 3
1
6V #755 Lamp Lamps—#755, #757, #1835, 120MB 4

Positions Operator Action Catalog Number 12 Catalog Number 2

1
Two-position—60° throw
M M
Cam Code 1 5 Cam Code 1 5
1
E34VFB_H E34SFB_H

Three-position—60° throw M Cam Code 2 5 Cam Code 3 5 Cam Code 2 5 Cam Code 3 5 1
M M E34VGB_H E34VHB_H E34SGB_H E34SHB_H
1
M E34VNB_H 6 E34VPB_H 6 E34SNB_H 7 E34SPB_H 7
M S 1
M E34VJB_H 6 E34VKB_H 6 E34SJB_H 7 E34SKB_H 7 1
S M

M E34VLB_H E34VMB_H E34SLB_H E34SMB_H

1
S S
1
Four-position—40° throw M M E34VRB_H — E34SRB_H —
1
M M
1
Knobs and Levers Light Unit Voltage Suffix
Knob
Knob Lever Add to operator catalog number listed in table above. 1
Catalog Number Catalog Number Type of Light Unit
Color 9 and Code Number and Code Number
Transformer Type Full Voltage Type
1
Red 10250TER 10250TFR 50/60 Hz AC or DC 3
Lever Green 10250TEG 10250TFG Voltage Suffix Code Voltage Suffix Code 1
Yellow 24 024 6 06
10250TEA 10250TFA
120 120 12 12
1
Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL
Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC 208 208 24 24 1
White 10250TEW 10250TFW 240 240 48 48

Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM 380 380 120 120 1

480 480 240 8 240
600 600
1
Notes 1
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-382.
1
2
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
Replace underscore with proper voltage suffix code from Light Unit Voltage Suffix table above. Example: three-position maintained with 120V transformer type light unit:
1
E34VGB120H.
3 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-269. 1
4 120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
5
6
For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Page V7-T1-378.
120 and 240V transformer only.
1
7 120 full voltage only.
8 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density. 1
9 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-383
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Options
1
Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters
1 NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D

1 Contact Block Contact Block

Description Catalog Number
1 Class I Division 2 factory sealed contact block with 1NO-1NC 10250T1H

1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-389.
1
1
1 Mounting Adapter Mounting Adapter
Description Catalog Number
1 Mounting adapter for pushbuttons 10250TD2
Mounting adapter for selector switches 10250TD3
1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-389.

1
1 Mounting Adapters with Contact Block(s)—Overpacked
Description Catalog Number
1 Pushbutton adapter with 1NO-1NC 10250TD21H
Pushbutton adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC) 10250TD21H1H
1 Selector switch adapter with 1NO-1NC 10250TD31H
Selector switch adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC)
1 10250TD31H1H

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-384 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Mounting and Assembly
1
Panel Thickness Mounting Matrix
● Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm) Legend Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1
● Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate Plate A B C D
● Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using Small 2.87 (72.6) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.87 (72.6)
1
optional retaining nut
Jumbo 2.87 (72.6) 2.32 (58.6) 2.32 (58.6) 2.87 (72.6)
● Indicating light: 10250TA30/E34TA30 1
Extra large 2.87 (72.6) 2.56 (65.2) 2.52 (64.1) 2.87 (72.6)
● Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31/E34TA31
1
Panel Spacing and Drilling
1
“B” Min. Terminals for
Notch for
Locating Nib
Light Unit
Terminals for
1
ø.14
(ø3.4) Light Unit “D” Min.
1
.19
(5.0) 1
.60
(15.2) 1
“C” Min.
“A” Min.
.67
1
Notch for
ø1.2 Locating Nib (17.0) ø1.2
(ø30.5) (ø30.5) 1
NOTE: Suitable for Use
in This Alternate 1
Mounting Hole.

Drilling for One Hole Mounting

1
and Dimensions for Minimum
Drilling for One Hole Mounting
Spacing in Horizontal Rows.
1
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Vertical Rows.
1
1
Operator Assembly
1
Illuminated Lens Nameplate RATINGS ARE STAMPED
Pushbutton Washer ON LIGHT UNIT
Thrust
Washer
Operator Operator
Gasket
E34 Earth
Terminal
Contact Block
Mounting Adapter
AND CONTACT BLOCK 1
(Optional)
1
Lamp
Indicator 1
Light
1
1
Push/Pull 1
Panel
Retaining Nut
5 lb-ft (6.8 Nm)
0.06" – 0.25"
(1.6 – 8 mm) Light Unit Contact Block
1
with Optional Terminal Clamp: Terminal Clamp:
Retaining Nut
Up to 0.375"
One or Two Copper Conductors
22 – 12 AWG (0.34 – 4.0 mm2)
Single Copper Conductor
18 – 14 AWG (0.75 – 2.5 mm2)
1
(15.9 mm) 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) 9 lb-in (1.0 Nm)
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-385
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Enclosures
1
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
1
Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1
1 Number of 10250T E34
Elements Catalog Number Catalog Number
1 Die Cast Enclosure Die Cast Enclosure—Deep Cover—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
1 10250TN11 E34N11
1 2 10250TN12 E34N12
3
1 10250TN13 E34N13
4 10250TN14 E34N14
1 Polyester Enclosure Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1 — E34N51
1 2 — E34N52
3 — E34N53
1 4 — E34N54

1
Stainless Steel Stainless Steel 2—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
Enclosure
1 1 — 10250TN33
2 — 10250TN34
1 3 — 10250TN35
4 — 10250TN36
1
1
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-389.
1
Notes
1 1 For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-264.
2 14 gauge, type 304.

1 Application Notes:
1. Operators need to be 2. Polyester enclosures Enclosure Layouts
1 mounted in their must be used when
Top – For Vertical Mounting
horizontal orientation for mounting illuminated
1 all enclosures. For die operators.
Top – For Horizontal

cast enclosures remove 1 1 1 1

1
Mounting

locating nib on operators

2 2 2
and use thrust washer
(Catalog Number
1 10250TK3).
3 3

4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-386 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Technical Data and Specifications
1
Mechanical Ratings
Description Specification
1
Frequency of Operation 1
All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr.
Key and lever selector switches 3000 operations/hr. 1
Life
Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations
1
Contact block 10 x 106 operations
1
Key and lever selector switches 0.25 x 106 operations
Shock Resistance 1
Duration/force 20 ms >5g
1
Climatic Conditions 1
Description Specification
Operating temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 66°C)
1
Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
1
Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity Max. 95% RH at 60°C 1
1
Terminals
Description Specification 1
Light Units
Clamps Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (4.0 mm2)
1
conductors
Torque 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
1
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud
1
Contact Blocks
Clamps Terminals are stainless steel saddle clamp type for 1 x 18–14 AWG (0.75–2.5 mm2)
solid or stranded copper conductor
1
Torque 9 lb-in (1.0 Nm) with size 2 Phillips screwdriver 1
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud
1
Electrical Ratings 1
Description Specification
Light Units
1
Bulbs—average life:
Transformer type 20,000 hrs.
1
Resistor/direct voltage type 2500 hrs. minimum at rated voltage
1
LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
1
1
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-387
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Electrical Ratings—Contact Block

1 Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q300
A600 (AC) Q300 (DC)
1 Description 120V 240V 480V 600V 125V 250V

1 Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amps) 60 30 15 12 0.55 0.27

Normal load break (amps) 6 3 1.5 1.2 0.55 0.27
1 Thermal current (amps) 10 10 10 10 2.5 2.5
Voltamperes:
1 Maximum make 7200 7200 7200 7200 69 69
Maximum break 720 720 720 720 69 69
1
1 Temperature Codes
All illuminated devices have operating temperatures below
1 100°C except for the following catalog numbers with
temperature codes per NEC table 500.5(d) and UL 1604:
1 10250T E34 Temp. Code

1 10250T201H E34RB120H T3C

10250T202H E34RB240H T3A
1 10250T471H E34SB120H TC3
10250T472H E34SB240H T3B
1 10250T80H — T3C

1 10250T81H — T3B
All selector switches w/120 MB lamp T3C
1 All illuminated devices with lamp 1835 T4A

Note: For additional technical information, see Publication Number

1 TD.7.4.T.E.04.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-388 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
Surface Mounting 1
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures 1
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
1
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester 1
1
E
B 1
1
D
A
C 1
Surface
1
Mounting
Number of
Elements
Element
Arrangement
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C D E
Conduit
Entrance
1
Die Cast
1
1 In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 3/4
2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 5.13 (130.3) 1
3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 7.00 (177.8) 1
4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 8.88 (225.6) 1
Polyester
1 In-line 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 1
1
2 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 1
3 3.81 (96.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 7.13 (181.1)
4 3.81 (96.8) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 9.38 (238.3) 1
Stainless Steel
1 In-line 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 1 1
2 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 7.50 (190.5)
1
3 3.50 (88.9) 9.00 (228.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 9.00 (228.6)
4 3.50 (88.9) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8) 1
Contact Block Mounting Adapter 1
1.70
(43.2) 1.85
1.88
(47.8) 0.25
1
(47.0)
1.43 (6.4)
(36.3) 1
1.02
(25.9)
1
1.86 2.57
1.72
(43.7)
(47.2) (65.3)
1
0.84
(21.3)
1
0.44
(11.2) 1
1.23
(31.2) 1
Note
1 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required. 1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-389
 1.12 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34

Ratings Summary of Classifications

1
Summary of NEC Article 500 NEC 500–503
1 The NEC Article 500 explains Class Division Group
in great detail the
I. Gas 1. Hazard may exist—May exist in A. Acetylene
1 requirements for the
installation of wiring and
atmosphere under normal operating
B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing 30% hydrogen by
conditions
electrical equipment in volume (e.g. butadiene, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
1 hazardous locations. The C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen
purpose of this summary is sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane)
1 for general reference only, D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone,
the National Electrical Code ammonia, vinyl chloride)
1 along with other applicable
2. Potential hazard—May be present in A. Acetylene
authorities having jurisdiction atmosphere only under abnormal
B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing 30% hydrogen by
1 over the site should be the
installer’s guidelines when
circumstances OR location adjacent to
Class I, Division 1 location
volume (e.g. butadiene, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
wiring or installing electrical C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen
1 equipment in any hazardous sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane)
or potentially hazardous D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone,
1 location. ammonia, vinyl chloride)
II. Dust 1. Hazard may exist—May exist in E. Conductive and combustible dust (resistivity <105 ohm/cm)
1 Class I, Division 2 Definition atmosphere under normal operating (metal dusts)
Class I, Division 2 covers conditions
F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but <108 ohms/cm) (e.g.
hazardous locations where
1 flammable gases, vapors or
carbon black, coke dust, coal)
G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity >105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain
volatile liquids are handled
1 either in a closed system, or
dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics)

confined within suitable 2. Potential hazard—May be present in F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but <108 ohms/cm) (e.g.
1 enclosures, or where atmosphere only under abnormal
circumstances
carbon black, coke dust, coal)
hazardous concentrations are G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity >105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain
dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics)
1 normally prevented by
positive mechanical III. Fibers 1. Production areas Easily ignitable fibers or flyings
ventilation. Areas adjacent to
1 Division 1 locations, into
2. Handling and storage areas Easily ignitable fibers or flyings

which gases might

1 occasionally flow, would
also belong to Division 2 NEC 505
1 (NEC (500.5[b])). Class Zone Group
Hazardous Location I. Gas 0. Continuously present or present for long IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
1 Any area where there is the periods of time
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
possibility of explosion and
1 fire resulting from the
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard
presence of flammable
1. Likely to exist under normal operating or IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
1 vapors, liquids or gas, or maintenance conditions or adjacent to
combustible dust or fibers. IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
Zone 0
1 Summary of NEC Article 505
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard
The NEC also classifies
1 hazardous locations for
2. Not likely to occur in normal operation
and if they do occur will only exist for
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard

flammable gases and vapors IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard

short period or adjacent to Zone 1
1 into zones under NEC 505. IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
This system is more in line equivalent hazard
1 with the European Note
Standards, CENELEC and
For additional information on grouping of compounds, see NFPA 497M-1991 and NFPA 325-1994.
IEC, with the major
1 difference being that NEC
505 only classifies gases and
1 vapors while CENELEC and
IEC also include dusts.
1
1
1
1

V7-T1-390 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com
 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
1.12
Summary of Basic Methods Available for Class I, Division 2 Locations
1
Features 1
Method Configuration Advantages Disadvantages
Factory sealed contact block Closed-ended labyrinth contact block with an Higher continuous carrying amperages—up to 10A May not be suitable for logic level circuits 1
incendive circuit incapable of external ignition
Direct drive contacts—contacts can be forced open
Suitable for use in all enclosures 1
Best suited for motor control applications
Hermetically sealed block Reed switch sealed against an external Suitable for low energy level circuits Lower continuous carrying amperages are not
1
atmosphere suitable for motor control applications
Suitable for use in all enclosures
(typically 3A to 5A rated) 1
Contacts cannot be forced open
Permanent magnet attracts metallic dust and 1
filings that can reduce the electrical creepage
distance between live terminals
1
Explosion proof enclosures Enclosures capable of withstanding an internal Higher level of protection than required for Class I Higher material and installation costs
(Class I, Division 1 and 2) explosion while preventing external ignition. Division 2
Enclosures designed for Class I, Division 1 can
Conduit sealing is still required 1
safely be used in Class I, Division 2 Time consuming maintenance
1
Factory Sealed Contact Blocks Hermetically Sealed Reed Contact Block
1
Internal
Ignition
Cooled Hermetically sealed
1
Escaping reed does not allow
Gas external atmosphere to
enter switching chamber. 1
1
1
1
Depression of plunger 1
rotates magnet and either
Direct Drive Contacts
• Contacts can be
opens/closes contacts.
Contacts can not be 1
mechanically forced forced apart if subject to
apart if subject to an
arch/fault current.
arch/fault current, because no
mechanical connection exists. 1
1
1
1
Explosion Proof Enclosure
1
1
Threaded Joint Flat Joint 1
Internal
Cooled
Escaping
Ignition Internal
Ignition Cooled 1
Gas Escaping
Gas
1
1
1
1

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T1-391
 Stacklights

SL Series Stacklights 2.1 SL Series

Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-2
2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-2 2
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-2 2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-3
Component Identification—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-4
2
Product Selection—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-6 2
Component Identification—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-12
Product Selection—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-14 2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-19
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-20
2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-25 2
2.2 E26 Series 2
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-32
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-32 2
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-32
2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-32
E26 Series Stacklights Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-33 2
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-34
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-35 2
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-40
2
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-41
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-42 2
Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-43
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-44 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-1
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

Stacklights—SL Series Contents

2 Description Page
2 SL Series
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-3
2 Component Identification—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-4
Product Selection—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-6
2 Component Identification—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-12
Product Selection—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-14
2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-19
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-20
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-25

2
2
2
2
2 Standards and
Product Description Features Certifications
2 The new Eaton SL7 and SL4 Optimal Performance in ● Six lens colors: red, amber, ● UL 508—File No. E29184
stacklights provide reliable Rugged Applications yellow, green, blue, white IEC/EN 60947-5-1
2 control over all key processes ● Continuous, flashing,
●

● All elements have IP66 and ● CSA C22.2 No. 14-10

and machine availability. UL Type 4/4X/13 ratings for strobe and multi-strobe
2 Now available in two sizes, protection against strong lighting functions
● CSA C22.2 No. 94-91
70 mm (SL7) and 40 mm ● CSA Class No. NKCR7
jets of water ● Mono-tone, dual-tone and
2 (SL4), the new stacklights ● Bright and efficient LEDs multi-tone audible alarms
are engineered to keep you
with a lifespan of up to ● LED or incandescent
2 informed about potential
material requirements,
100,000 hours lighting options
downtime and hazards. ● High-performance LEDs for ● Control up to five modules
2 Modules are available in maximum illumination in on a single stack, 10 with
a wide selection of audible, direct sunlight dual-arm base
2 illuminating and mounting ● Acoustic modules with up ● 24V, 120 Vac and 230 Vac
options that are well suited to 100 dB sound levels operating voltages
2 to adapt to any industrial ● Operating temperatures:
application. –22° to +140°F Benefits
2 (–30º to +60ºC)
● Simplified twist-and-lock
Highly Modular and assembly, no tools
2 Versatile Line required
● Easily configurable ● Compact components
2 components reduce inventory
● Simple bayonet mounting requirements and increase
2 mechanism for quick flexibility
assembly ● Versatile hardware for
2 ● Flexible mounting and quick installation and
minimized downtime
lighting options
2 ● Volume-adjustable alarms
● New slim 40 mm size is
ideal for applications with
constrained space
2 ● Lean automation with
SmartWire-DT connectivity
2 ● Ideal for indoor and
outdoor usage
2
2
2

V7-T2-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Product Overview
2
SL7 SL4
Diameter 70 mm 40 mm
2
2
2
2
Acoustic Modules Page V7-T2-9 Page V7-T2-16 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Light Modules Continuous light, LED: Page V7-T2-6 Continuous light, LED: Page V7-T2-16
Flashing light, LED: Page V7-T2-7 Flashing light, LED: Page V7-T2-15 2
Strobe light, LED: Page V7-T2-7 Strobe light, LED: Page V7-T2-15
Continuous light, high-performance LED: Page V7-T2-8 Multi-strobe light, LED: Page V7-T2-17
2
Strobe light, high-performance LED: Page V7-T2-8 Continuous light, Incandescent: Page V7-T2-17
2
Multi-strobe light, high-performance LED: Page V7-T2-8
Continuous light, Incandescent: Page V7-T2-8 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Base Modules Page V7-T2-10, V7-T2-11 Page V7-T2-17
2
Accessories Page V7-T2-19 Page V7-T2-19 2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-3
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

Component Identification—SL7
2
Component Identification
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 Light Modes

2 Continuous Flashing Strobe Multi-Strobe

Incandescent — — —
2
LED
2

V7-T2-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL7—Component Identification Descriptions
Item Page
2
Item Number Description Reference
Acoustic Modules
2
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, place at highest position
Sound pressure up to 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer
1 Continuous tone or pulsed tone, adjustable with internal DIP switches
Frequency: 2800 Hz
V7-T2-9
2
Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor)
2 Continuous tone or pulsed tone; can be actuated externally; takes up to V7-T2-9
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Operational voltages: 24 Vac/Vdc, 110/120 Vac, 230/240 Vac
two inputs (two modules) 2
Frequency: 2800 Hz
3 Multi-tone (eight tones) adjustable with internal DIP switch V7-T2-9 2
Frequency 500–2700 Hz
Incandescent Bulb 4 Accessory V7-T2-19 2
Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb 5 Accessory V7-T2-19
Light Modules 2
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, modules can be arranged in any order
Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor) 2
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Max. 5 modules per stack or up to 10 via dual-arm base option
2
Light Module for Incandescent Bulb
Continuous light 6 BA15d socket, without incandescent bulb V7-T2-7 2
Light Modules with LED
Continuous light 7 V7-T2-6 2
Flashing light 8 Flashing frequency: 2 Hz V7-T2-7
Strobe light 9 Flashing frequency: 1.4 Hz V7-T2-7
2
Light Modules with High-Output LED 2
Continuous light 10 V7-T2-8
Strobe light 11 High-performance LED, flashing frequency: 1.4 Hz V7-T2-8 2
Strobe light, multi-strobe light 12 High-performance LED, with various strobe sequences V7-T2-8
Flashing frequency: 1–2.6 Hz 2
Base Modules
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, includes cover plate, with spring-cage terminals 2
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Base for mounting on both sides 13 Max. 2 x 5 modules that can be actuated individually V7-T2-11 2
Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot 14 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-10
Base with aluminum tube and M20 thread 15 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-10
2
Base with external fixing holes 16 — V7-T2-10
2
Vertical base with bracket 17 — V7-T2-11
Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes 18 — V7-T2-10 2
Base with built-in fixing screws (pre-assembled) 19 — V7-T2-10
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) 20 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-10 2
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) 21 Aluminum tube 100 mm V7-T2-10
and SmartWire-DT ™ connection 2
Mounting Bracket
Bracket 22 Accessory V7-T2-19
2
Bracket 23 Accessory, includes M20 cable gland V7-T2-19
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-5
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

Product Selection—SL7
2
Complete Devices
2 Continuous Light, LED, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
SL7-100-L-R_
2 Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V)
Number of
Modules Color Function
Standard
Pack Catalog Number

2 Base Module with Foot and 100 mm Tube

24 Vac/Vdc 2 Red/Green 1 SL7-100-L-RG-24LED
2 3 Red/Amber/ SL7-100-L-RAG-24LED
Green
2
2
2
2
2
2 Light Module with LED
Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2 SL7-L_
Rated Operational Standard
Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number
2 24 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL7-L24-B

2 Green SL7-L24-G
Red SL7-L24-R
2 White SL7-L24-W
Yellow SL7-L24-Y
2 Amber SL7-L24-A
110/120 Vac Blue 1 SL7-L120-B
2 Green SL7-L120-G

2 Red SL7-L120-R
White SL7-L120-W
2 Yellow SL7-L120-Y
Amber SL7-L120-A
2 230/240 Vac Blue 1 SL7-L230-B

2 Green SL7-L230-G
Red SL7-L230-R

2 White SL7-L230-W
Yellow SL7-L230-Y
2 Amber SL7-L230-A

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Light Module with LED, continued
2
SL7-BL_ Flashing Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 2 Hz
Rated Operational Standard 2
Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number
24 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL7-BL24-B 2
Green SL7-BL24-G
Red SL7-BL24-R
2
White SL7-BL24-W
2
Yellow SL7-BL24-Y
Amber SL7-BL24-A 2
110/120 Vac Blue 1 SL7-BL120-B
Green SL7-BL120-G 2
Red SL7-BL120-R
White SL7-BL120-W
2
Yellow SL7-BL120-Y 2
Amber SL7-BL120-A
230/240 Vac Blue 1 SL7-BL230-B 2
Green SL7-BL230-G
Red SL7-BL230-R
2
White SL7-BL230-W
2
Yellow SL7-BL230-Y
Amber SL7-BL230-A 2
2
SL7-FL_ Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 1.4 Hz
Rated Operational Standard 2
Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number
24 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL7-FL24-B 2
Green SL7-FL24-G
Red SL7-FL24-R
2
White SL7-FL24-W
Yellow SL7-FL24-Y
2
Amber SL7-FL24-A 2
110/120 Vac Blue 1 SL7-FL120-B
Green SL7-FL120-G 2
Red SL7-FL120-R
White SL7-FL120-W
2
Yellow SL7-FL120-Y
2
Amber SL7-FL120-A
230/240 Vac Blue 1 SL7-FL230-B 2
Green SL7-FL230-G
Red SL7-FL230-R 2
White SL7-FL230-W
Yellow SL7-FL230-Y
2
Amber SL7-FL230-A 2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-7
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

SL7 Light Module with High-Output LED

2
SL7-L24-_ Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2 Rated Operational Standard
Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number
2 High-Performance LED for Maximum Signaling Effect
24 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL7-L24-B-HP
2 Green SL7-L24-G-HP

2 Red SL7-L24-R-HP
White SL7-L24-W-HP
2 Yellow SL7-L24-Y-HP
Amber SL7-L24-A-HP
2
2 SL7-FL24-_-HP Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Rated Operational Standard
2 Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number
High-Performance LED for Maximum Signaling Effect, 1.4 Hz
2 24 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL7-FL24-B-HP

2 Green SL7-FL24-G-HP
Red SL7-FL24-R-HP
2 White SL7-FL24-W-HP
Yellow SL7-FL24-Y-HP
2 Amber SL7-FL24-A-HP

2
SL7-FL24-_-HPM Multi-Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2 Rated Operational Standard
Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number
2 High-Performance LED for Maximum Signaling Effect, 1–2.6 Hz

2 24 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL7-FL24-B-HPM

Green SL7-FL24-G-HPM
2 Red SL7-FL24-R-HPM
White SL7-FL24-W-HPM
2 Yellow SL7-FL24-Y-HPM
Amber SL7-FL24-A-HPM
2
2
2
SL7 Light Module for Incandescent Bulb
2
SL7-L-_ Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2 For incandescent bulb selection, see Page V7-T2-19.
Rated Operational Standard
2 Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number
Without Light Elements, Incandescent Bulb, Maximum 7W
2 <250 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL7-L-B
Green SL7-L-G
2 Red SL7-L-R

2 White SL7-L-W
Yellow SL7-L-Y
2 Amber SL7-L-A

V7-T2-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL7 Acoustic Modules
2
SL7-AP_ Continuous Tone or Pulsed Tone, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1
Adjustable with internal DIP switches. 2
Sound pressure 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer.
f = 2800 Hz. 2
Rated Operational Rated Operational Standard
Voltage (Ue V) Current (Ie mA) Color Function Sound Type Pack Catalog Number 2
24 Vac/Vdc Maximum 92 Black 1 SL7-AP24
110/120 Vac Maximum 41 Black SL7-AP120 2
230/240 Vac Maximum 43 Black SL7-AP230
2
2
SL7-AP_-E Continuous Tone or Pulsed Tone, External Actuation, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1 2
Assigned two inputs (two modules).
Sound pressure 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer. 2
f = 2800 Hz.
Rated Operational Rated Operational Standard 2
Voltage (Ue V) Current (Ie mA) Color Function Sound Type Pack Catalog Number
24 Vac/Vdc Maximum 92 Black 1 SL7-AP24-E 2
110/120 Vac Maximum 41 Black SL7-AP120-E
230/240 Vac Maximum 43 Black SL7-AP230-E 2
2
2
SL7-AP_-M Multi-Tone; Eight Tones, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1
Adjustable with internal DIP switch. 2
Sound pressure 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer.
f = 500–2700 Hz. 2
Rated Operational Rated Operational Standard
Voltage (Ue V) Current (Ie mA) Color Function Sound Type Pack Catalog Number 2
24 Vac/Vdc Maximum 115 Black 1 SL7-AP24-M
110/120 Vac Maximum 45 Black SL7-AP120-M 2
230/240 Vac Maximum 43 Black SL7-AP230-M
2
Note
2
1 Place only at the highest position on a pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-9
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

SL7 Base Modules

2
For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules
2 Tube Standard
Description Length Color Pack For use with … Catalog Number
2 SL7-CB-_ Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot 100 mm Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-CB-100
Spring-loaded terminals aluminum SL7-BL-…
250 mm SL7-CB-250
2 400 mm
color tube SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-… SL7-CB-400

2
2
2
2
2 SL7-CB-T-_ Base with aluminum tube and M20 threaded base 100 mm Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-CB-T-100
Spring-loaded terminals aluminum SL7-BL-…
250 mm SL7-CB-T-250
2 400 mm
color tube SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-… SL7-CB-T-400

2
2
2
2
2 SL7-CB-IMH Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes — Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-CB-IMH
Spring-loaded terminals SL7-BL-…
2 SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
2
2
2 SL7-CB-IMS Base with built-in (pre-assembled) fixing screws — Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-CB-IMS
Spring-loaded terminals SL7-BL-…
2 SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…

2
2
2 SL7-CB-EMH Base with external fixing holes — Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-CB-EMH
Spring-loaded terminals SL7-BL-…
2 SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL7 Base Modules, continued
2
For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules, continued
Tube Standard 2
Description Length Color Pack For use with … Catalog Number
SL7-FMS_ Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting 100 mm Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-FMS-100 2
and wiring system) aluminum SL7-BL-…
250 mm SL7-FMS-250
Screw terminals
400 mm
color tube SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-… SL7-FMS-400
2
2
2
2
SL7-SWD Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting 100 mm — 1 SL7-L-… SL7-SWD 2
and wiring system) SL7-BL-…
Blade terminal SWD4-8MF2 SL7-FL-…
Maximum 0.3A per module SL7-AP-… 2
External power supply connectable (24 Vdc)
Configurable with SWD‐Assist (planning and ordering help) 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SL7-CB-FW For Vertical Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules 2
Standard
Description Color Pack For use with … Catalog Number
2
Vertical base with bracket Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-CB-FW
Spring-loaded terminals SL7-BL-…
SL7-FL-… 2
SL7-AP-…
2
2
SL7-CB-D For Mounting on Both Sides—Includes Cover, Maximum 2 x 5 Modules 2
Standard
Description Color Pack For use with … Catalog Number 2
Base with external fixing holes Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-CB-D
Spring-loaded terminals SL7-BL-… 2
SL7-FL-…
SL7-AP-…
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-11
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

Component Identification—SL4
2
Component Identification
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 Light Modes

2 Continuous Flashing Strobe Multi-Strobe

Incandescent — — —
2
LED
2

V7-T2-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL4—Component Identification Descriptions
Item Page
2
Item Number Description Reference
Acoustic Modules
2
Sound pressure 80 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer, frequency 4000 Hz
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, set up as highest module
1 Continuous tone or pulsed tone, adjustable with internal DIP switches
Frequency: 2800 Hz
V7-T2-16
2
Permanently integrated cover plate
Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor)
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2
Incandescent Bulb 2 Accessory V7-T2-19
2
Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb 3 Accessory V7-T2-19
Light Modules 2
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, modules can be arranged in any order
Without light element (incandescent bulb with BA15d socket),
easy mounting with bayonet mount.
2
Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor)
Flashing frequency 2 Hz 2
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Light Module for Incandescent Bulb 2
Continuous light 4 BA15d socket, without incandescent bulb V7-T2-16
Light Modules with LED 2
Continuous light 5 V7-T2-14
Flashing light 6 Flashing frequency: 2 Hz V7-T2-15
2
Strobe light 7 Flashing frequency: 1.4 Hz V7-T2-15 2
Strobe light, multi-strobe light 8 High-performance LED, with various strobe sequences V7-T2-16
Flashing frequency: 1–2.6 Hz
2
Base Modules
Easy mounting with bayonet mount, includes cover plate, with spring-cage terminals 2
Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
Base for mounting on both sides 9 Max. 2 x 5 modules that can be actuated individually V7-T2-17 2
Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot 10 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-17
Base with aluminum tube and M20 thread 11 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-17 2
Base with external fixing holes 12 — V7-T2-17
Vertical base with bracket 13 — V7-T2-17
2
Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes 14 — V7-T2-17
2
Base with built-in fixing screws (pre-assembled) 15 — V7-T2-17
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) 16 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-17 2
Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) 17 Aluminum tube 100 mm V7-T2-17
and SmartWire-DT ™ connection 2
Mounting Bracket
Bracket 18 Accessory V7-T2-19 2
Bracket 19 Accessory, includes M20 cable gland V7-T2-19
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-13
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

Product Selection—SL4
2
Complete Devices
2
SL4-100-L-R_ Continuous Light, LED, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2 Rated Operational Number of Standard
Voltage (Ue V) Modules Color Function Pack Catalog Number
2 Base Module with Foot and 100 mm Tube
24 Vac/Vdc 2 Red/Green 1 SL4-100-L-RG-24LED
2
3 Red/Amber/ SL4-100-L-RAG-24LED
Green
2
2
2
2
2
Light Module with LED
2 Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
SL4-L_
2 Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue V) Color Function
Standard
Pack Catalog Number

2 24 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL4-L24-B

Green SL4-L24-G
2 Red SL4-L24-R
White SL4-L24-W
2 Yellow SL4-L24-Y
Amber SL4-L24-A
2 110/120 Vac Blue 1 SL4-L120-B

2 Green SL4-L120-G
Red SL4-L120-R
2 White SL4-L120-W
Yellow SL4-L120-Y
2 Amber SL4-L120-A

2 230/240 Vac Blue 1 SL4-L230-B

Green SL4-L230-G
2 Red SL4-L230-R
White SL4-L230-W
2 Yellow SL4-L230-Y
Amber SL4-L230-A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Light Module with LED, continued
2
SL4-BL_ Flashing Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 2 Hz
Rated Operational Standard 2
Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number
24 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL4-BL24-B 2
Green SL4-BL24-G
Red SL4-BL24-R
2
White SL4-BL24-W
2
Yellow SL4-BL24-Y
Amber SL4-BL24-A 2
110/120 Vac Blue 1 SL4-BL120-B
Green SL4-BL120-G 2
Red SL4-BL120-R
White SL4-BL120-W
2
Yellow SL4-BL120-Y 2
Amber SL4-BL120-A
230/240 Vac Blue 1 SL4-BL230-B 2
Green SL4-BL230-G
Red SL4-BL230-R
2
White SL4-BL230-W
2
Yellow SL4-BL230-Y
Amber SL4-BL230-A 2
2
SL4-FL_ Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 1.4 Hz 2
Rated Operational Standard
Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number 2
24 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL4-FL24-B
Green SL4-FL24-G
2
Red SL4-FL24-R
2
White SL4-FL24-W
Yellow SL4-FL24-Y 2
Amber SL4-FL24-A
110/120 Vac Blue 1 SL4-FL120-B 2
Green SL4-FL120-G
Red SL4-FL120-R
2
White SL4-FL120-W 2
Yellow SL4-FL120-Y
Amber SL4-FL120-A 2
230/240 Vac Blue 1 SL4-FL230-B
Green SL4-FL230-G
2
Red SL4-FL230-R
2
White SL4-FL230-W
Yellow SL4-FL230-Y 2
Amber SL4-FL230-A
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-15
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

Light Module with LED, continued

2
Multi-Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2 SL4-FL24-_-M
Rated Operational Standard
Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number
2 LED for Effective Signaling Effect
With Various Strobe Sequences, 1–2.6 Hz
2 24 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL4-FL24-B-M
Green SL4-FL24-G-M
2 Red SL4-FL24-R-M

2 White SL4-FL24-W-M
Yellow SL4-FL24-Y-M
2 Amber SL4-FL24-A-M

2
2 SL4 Light Module for Incandescent Bulb
2 SL4-L-_ Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
For incandescent bulb selection, see Page V7-T2-19.
2 Rated Operational Standard
Voltage (Ue V) Color Function Pack Catalog Number
2 Without Light Elements, Incandescent Bulb, Maximum 4W
<250 Vac/Vdc Blue 1 SL4-L-B
2
Green SL4-L-G

2 Red SL4-L-R
White SL4-L-W
2 Yellow SL4-L-Y
Amber SL4-L-A
2
2
2 SL4 Acoustic Modules
Continuous Tone or Pulsed Tone, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66
2 SL4-AP_
Adjustable with internal DIP switches.
Sound pressure 80 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer.
2 f = 4000 Hz.
Rated Operational Rated Operational Standard
2 Voltage (Ue V) Current (Ie mA) Color Function Sound Type Pack Catalog Number
Place only at the highest position on a pole.
2 24 Vac/Vdc Maximum 39 Black 1 SL4-AP24

2 110/120 Vac Maximum 21 Black SL4-AP120

230/240 Vac Maximum 21 Black SL4-AP230
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL4 Base Modules
2
For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules
Tube Standard 2
Description Length Color Pack For use with … Catalog Number
SL4-PIB-_ Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot 100 mm Black 1 SL4-L-… SL4-PIB-100 2
Spring-loaded terminals aluminum SL4-BL-…
250 mm SL4-PIB-250
400 mm
color tube SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-… SL4-PIB-400
2
2
2
2
2
SL4-PIB-T-_ Base with aluminum tube and M20 threaded base
Spring-loaded terminals
100 mm Black
aluminum
1 SL4-L-…
SL4-BL-…
SL4-PIB-T-100 2
250 mm color tube SL4-FL-… SL4-PIB-T-250
400 mm SL4-AP-… SL4-PIB-T-400 2
2
2
2
2
SL4-PIB-IMH Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes — Black 1 SL4-L-… SL4-PIB-IMH
2
Spring-loaded terminals SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-… 2
SL4-AP-…
2
2
2
SL4-PIB-IMS Base with built-in (pre-assembled) fixing screws — Black 1 SL4-L-… SL4-PIB-IMS
Spring-loaded terminals SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
2
SL4-AP-…
2
2
2
SL4-PIB-EMH Base with external fixing holes — Black 1 SL4-L-… SL4-PIB-EMH
2
Spring-loaded terminals SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-… 2
SL4-AP-…
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-17
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

SL4 Base Modules, continued

2
For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules, continued
2 Tube Standard
Description Length Color Pack For use with … Catalog Number
2 SL4-FMS_ Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting 100 mm Black 1 SL4-L-… SL4-FMS-100
and wiring system) aluminum SL4-BL-…
250 mm SL4-FMS-250
2 Screw terminals
400 mm
color tube SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-… SL4-FMS-400

2
2
2
2 SL4-SWD Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting 100 mm — 1 SL4-L-… SL4-SWD
and wiring system) SL4-BL-…
2 Blade terminal SWD4-8MF2
Maximum 0.3A per module
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
External power supply connectable (24 Vdc)
2 Configurable with SWD‐Assist (planning and ordering help)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2 SL4-PIB-FW For Vertical Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules
Standard
2 Description Color Pack For use with … Catalog Number
One-sided base with bracket Black 1 SL4-L-… SL4-PIB-FW
2 Spring-loaded terminals SL4-BL-…
SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
2
2
For Mounting on Both Sides—Includes Cover, Maximum 2 x 5 Modules
2 SL4-PIB-D
Standard
Description Color Pack For use with … Catalog Number
2 Base with external fixing holes Black 1 SL4-L-… SL4-PIB-D
Spring-loaded terminals SL4-BL-…
2 SL4-FL-…
SL4-AP-…
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Accessories
2
SL7 and SL4 Series
Mounting Brackets
2
SL7/4-FW Mounting Brackets for Vertical 2
Mounting, Plastic
Standard Catalog 2
Pack For Use With … Number
1 SL4-PIB… SL7/4-FW 2
SL7-CB...
2
SL7/4-FW-T M20 Cable Gland for Vertical Mounting, 2
Metal (Includes Mounting Bracket)
Standard Catalog 2
Pack For Use With … Number
1 SL4-PIB-T… SL7/4-FW-T 2
SL7-CB-T...

2
Incandescent Bulb Tool 2
Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb
SL7/4-BET
Standard Catalog
2
Pack For Use With … Number
1 SL7-L-… SL7/4-BET
2
SL4-L-…
2
2
Incandescent Bulbs
2
SL7 Series 2
Incandescent Bulbs, Mounting: Ba15d
SL7-L12
Rated Operational Power Standard
2
Lifespan (h) Voltage (Ue V) (Watts) Pack For Use With … Catalog Number
3000 12 5 1 SL7-L-… SL7-L12
2
24 6.5 SL7-L24 2
120 7 SL7-L120
230 6.5 SL7-L230 2
SL4 Series
2
SL4-L12 Incandescent Bulbs, Mounting: Ba15d 2
Rated Operational Power Standard
Lifespan (h) Voltage (Ue V) (Watts) Pack For Use With … Catalog Number 2
3000 12 4 1 SL4-L-… SL4-L12
24 SL4-L24 2
120 SL4-L120
230 SL4-L230
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-19
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

Technical Data and Specifications

2
SL7 Series
2
SL7 General Specifications
2 Description Specification

2 Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1

Lens color Blue, green, red, clear, yellow, amber
2 Number of signal elements Max. 5 with standard base
Max. 10 with base for mounting on both sides

2 Mechanical Ratings
Shock (IEC 68-2-27) 11 ms, 15g
2 Vibration (IEC 68-2-6) 20 sweeps 10–150 Hz, 1g
Climate Conditions
2 Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60069-2-30
2 Operating temperature –22° to +140°F (–30° to +60°C)
Storage temperature –22° to +185°F (–30° to +85°C)
2
Environmental Ratings

2 IEC degree of protection UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66

IEC/EN 60529

2 Protection type UL Type 4/4X/13

Materials
2 Cover Polycarbonate
Lenses Polycarbonate
2 Stacklight base Polycarbonate
Tubes Aluminum
2
Terminal Capacity

2 Solid or flexible conductor 0.13–2.5 mm2

Flexible with ferrule with plastic collar 0.25–1.5 mm2
2 AWG 24–AWG 14
Contacts
2 Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 4000 Vac
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 250V
2 Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/3

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL7 Light Module Specifications
Unit SL7-L-…-… SL7-BL-…-… SL7-FL-…-… SL7-L24-…-HP SL7-FL24-…-HP SL7-FL24-…-HPM SL7-L-…
2
Type of light Continuous light Flashing light Strobe light Continuous light Strobe light Multi-strobe light Continuous
light
2
Light elements LED LED LED High-performance LED High-performance LED High-performance LED Incandescent
bulb (max. 7W) 2
Mounting — — — — — — Ba15d
Flashing/strobe — 2 Hz 1.4 Hz — 1.4 Hz 1–2.6 Hz —
2
frequency
Transmission angle 360° 360° 360° 360° 360° 360° 360°
2
Leakage current A < 0.003 < 0.003 <0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003
2
Current-/power
consumption
2
24 Vac/Vdc A 0.049–0.054 0.058 0.130–0.135 0.170–0.200 0.260–0.265 0.260–0.265 —
110/120 Vac A 0.028–0.031 0.028–0.030 0.010 — — — — 2
230/240 Vac A 0.027–0.028 0.030–0.031 0.010 — — — —
Power — — — — — — Max. 7W with 2
consumption the specified
voltages
2
Voltage levels 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 18–30 Vdc/ 18–30 Vdc/ 18–30 Vdc/ Up to
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10%
18–26 Vac 18–26 Vac 18–26 Vac 250 Vac/Vdc
2
Lifespan h 100,000 100,000 100,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 3000
Weight g 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-21
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

SL7 Acoustic Module Specifications

2 Unit SL7-AP… SL7-AP…-E SL7-AP…-M

2 Type of tone Continuous or pulsed tone Continuous or pulsed tone Continuous or pulsed tone
Eight types of sound

2 Types of sound Two versions,

table of sound types
Two versions,
table of sound types
Eight versions,
table of sound types
Sound setting Internal; single-pole DIP Can be externally actuated Internal; three-pole DIP
2 Sound pressure dB Max.: 100 Max.: 100 Max.: 100
Min.: 88 Min.: 88 Min.: 88
2 Sound pressure level adjustment Built-in, potentiometer Built-in, potentiometer Built-in, potentiometer

2 Transmission angle 360° 360° 360°

Current-/power consumption
2 24 Vac/Vdc A 0.092 0.092 0.115
110/120 Vac A 0.041 0.041 0.045
2 230/240 Vac A 0.043 0.043 0.043
Voltage levels 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
2 110/120 Vac ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10%
230/240 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10%
2 Weight g 102 102 102

2
SL7 Table of Sound Types
2 Maximum
DIP Switch Volume
2 Sound Type Frequency (Hz) Diagram Repeat Rate Position at 1M (dB)
SL7-AP… Continuous tone Approx. 2800 — — 100
2 Pulsed tone Approx. 2800 Approx. 2 Hz — 100

2 SL7-AP…-E Continuous tone Approx. 2800 — — 100

Pulsed tone Approx. 2800 Approx. 2 Hz — 100
2 SL7-AP…-M Continuous tone 2700 — ON Tone 01 100

2 Continuous tone 1350 — ON Tone 02 100

2 Pulsed tone 2700 250 ms on, 250 ms off ON Tone 03 100

2 Pulsed tone 1350 250 ms on, 250 ms off ON Tone 04 100

2 Falling 1200–500 1 Hz ON Tone 05 98

2 Rising 500–1200 Rising 3s, 0.5s off ON Tone 06 98

2 Alternating 800–1000 2 Hz ON Tone 07 94

2 rising/falling 500–1500 10 Hz ON Tone 08 94

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
SL4 Series
2
SL4 General Specifications
Description Specification 2
Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Lens color Blue, green, red, clear, yellow, orange
2
Number of signal elements Max. 5 with standard base
Max. 10 with base for mounting on both sides
2
Mounting position As required
2
Mechanical Ratings
Mechanical shock resistance >15g according to IEC 60068-2-27 2
Shock duration 11 ms
Sinusoidal
Climate Conditions
2
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60069-2-30
2
Ambient temperature –22°F to +140°F (–30°C to +60°C)
2
Environmental Ratings
IEC degree of protection UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 2
IEC/EN 60529
Protection type UL Type 4/4X/13 2
Materials
Enclosure Polycarbonate (PC), black 2
Cap Polycarbonate (PC)
Terminal Capacity
2
Solid or flexible conductor 0.2–1.5 mm2
2
Solid or flexible conductor, with ferrule 0.25–1.5 mm2
Flexible with ferrule with plastic collar 0.25–0.75 mm2 2
AWG 24–AWG 16
Contacts 2
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 4000 Vac
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 250V 2
Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-23
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

SL4 Light Module Specifications

2 Unit SL4-L…-… SL4-BL…-… SL4-FL…-… SL4-FL24-…-M SL4-L…

2 Type of light Continuous light Flashing light Strobe light Multi-strobe light Continuous light
Light elements LED LED LED LED Incandescent bulb
2 (max. 4W)
Mounting — — — — Ba15d
2 Flashing/strobe frequency — 2 Hz 1.4 Hz 1–2.6 Hz —
Transmission angle 360° 360° 360° 360° 360°
2 Leakage current A < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003
Current/power consumption
2 24 Vac/Vdc A 0.022–0.033 0.028–0.036 0.035–0.065 0.048–0.068 —

2 110/120 Vac A 0.030 0.030 0.10 — —

230/240 Vac A 0.030 0.030 0.10 — —
2 Power consumption — — — — Maximum 4W with the
specified voltages
2 Voltage levels 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% Up to 250 Vac/Vdc

230/240 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10%

2 Lifespan h 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000

2 Weight g 45 45 45 45 45

2
SL4 Acoustic Module Specifications
2 Unit SL4-AP…
Type of tone Continuous or pulsed tone
2 Types of sound Two versions, table of sound types
Sound setting Internal; single-pole DIP
2 Sound pressure dB 80

2 Sound pressure level adjustment —

Sound pressure can be lowered —
2 to a minimum of
Transmission angle 360°
2 Current/power consumption
24 Vac/Vdc A 0.039
2 110/120 Vac A 0.021
230/240 Vac A 0.021
2 Voltage levels 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10%
110/120 Vac ± 10%
2 230/240 Vac ± 10%
Weight g 43
2
2 SL4 Table of Sound Types
Maximum
2 Volume
Sound Type Frequency (Hz) Diagram Repeat Rate at 1M (dB)
2 SL4-AP… Continuous tone Approx. 4000 — 80
Pulsed tone Approx. 4000 Approx. 2 Hz 80
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
SL7 Series 2
Complete Devices Light Modules 2
SL7-100-L-RG-24LED SL7-100-L-RYG-24LED SL7-(B)(F)L…
2
2
2.40
(61.0) 2
2
Ø2.87 (Ø73.0) 2
11.61
Acoustic Modules
2
(295.0)
14.02
(356.0) SL7-AP… 2
2
2.80
(71.0)
2
2

Ø2.88 (Ø73.2)
2
Ø2.84
(Ø72.0) 2
2
Ø2.84
(Ø72.0)
2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 2
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0) 2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13 2
(Ø54.0)

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-25
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
Basic Modules
2 SL7-CB-… SL7-CB-T… SL7-CB-D

2
2
2
4.68
2 A A (119.0)

2 1.22
(31.0)
2
2
Ø2.83 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8)

2 (Ø72.0) 3.23 (82.0)

M20
3.78 (96.0)
2 Catalog
Number A
2 SL7-CB-T-100 7.48 (190.0)

2 SL7-CB-T-250 13.38 (340.0)

3.31
SL7-CB-T-400 19.29 (490.0)
(84.0)
2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13
2 (Ø54.0)
Catalog
2 Number A
SL7-CB-100 6.73 (171.0)
SL7-CB-EMH
2 SL7-CB-250 12.64 (321.0)
SL7-CB-400 18.54 (471.0)
2
2
3.25
2 (82.5)

2
2 Ø3.94 (Ø100.0)

2
2
2
2
2
2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8)

Ø3.35 (Ø85.0)
2
2

V7-T2-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
SL7-CB-FW SL7-CB-IMS
2
2
3.23 2
(82.0)
4.21
(107.0)
2
Ø0.24
(Ø6.0)
2
M5 2.05
0.79
2
(52.0)
(20.0)
2.76 (70.0) 2.87 (73.0) 2
3.54 (90.0)
SL7-FMS-… SL7-SWD 1
2
2
2
3.31
(84.0)
2

A
2
7.56
(192.0)
SL7-CB-IMH
2
2
2
3.23
Ø3.15 Ø3.15 2
(82.0) (Ø80.0)
(Ø80.0)
2
2
2.87 (72.0)
2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13 Ø2.13
2
(Ø54.0) (Ø54.0)
Catalog
2
Number A
Ø0.23 (Ø5.8)
SL7-FMS-100 7.55 (192.0)
2
Ø2.05
(Ø52.0)
SL7-FMS-250 13.46 (342.0)
2
SL7-FMS-400 19.37 (192.0)

Note 2
1 For connecting to SmartWire-DT.

2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-27
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
SL4 Series
2 Complete Devices Light Modules
2 SL4-100-L-RG-24LED SL4-100-L-RYG-24LED SL4-(B)(F)L…

2
2 2.44
(62.0)
2
2 1.69
(43.0)
2 10.28
(261.0)
12.72 Acoustic Modules
2 (323.0)
SL4-AP…
2
2
2.80
(71.0)
2
2 Ø2.84
(Ø72.0) 1.73
2 (44.0)

2 Ø2.84
(Ø72.0)
2
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
2 Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
2 Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Basic Modules
SL4-PIB-… SL4-PIB-T… SL4-PIB-D 2
2
2

A
2
3.82
A (97.0) 2
1.38
(35.0) 2
Ø2.83 Ø0.23 (Ø5.9)
2
(Ø72.0)

M20 1.77 (45.0)

2
Catalog 2
Number A
SL4-PIB-T-100 5.90 (150.0) 2
SL4-PIB-T-250 11.81 (300.0) 2.21
SL4-PIB-T-400 17.72 (450.0)
(56.0) 2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 2
Ø2.13
2.44 (62.0)
(Ø54.0) 2
Catalog
Number A
SL4-PIB-EMH 2
SL4-PIB-100 3.53 (136.0)
SL4-PIB-250 11.26 (286.0) 2
SL4-PIB-400 17.16 (436.0)
2
2.24
(57.0) 2
2
Ø2.72 (Ø69.0)
2
2
2
2
2
Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) 2
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0) 2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-29
 2.1 Stacklights
SL Series

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
SL4-PIB-FW SL4-PIB-IMS
2
2
2.24
2 (57.0)
3.15
(80.0)
2
Ø0.23
2 (Ø5.8) M5
0.83 (21.0)
0.87 (22.0)
2 1.77 (45.0)
1.69 (43.0)

2 SL4-FMS-… SL4-SWD 1
2
2.21
2 (56.0)

2 2.56
(65.0) A
2 6.18
(157.0)

2 SL4-PIB-IMH

2
2 2.24
Ø3.15 Ø3.15
(Ø80.0) (Ø80.0)
(57.0)
2
2 1.34 (43.0)

2
2
2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13 Ø2.13
2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8)
(Ø54.0) (Ø54.0)

Catalog
Ø0.87 (Ø22.0)
2 Number A
SL4-FMS-100 6.18 (157.0)
2 SL4-FMS-250 12.09 (307.0)
SL4-FMS-400 17.99 (457.0)
2 Note
1 For connecting to SmartWire-DT.
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
SL Series
2.1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Mounting Brackets Incandescent Bulbs
SL7/4-FW SL7-L12 and SL4-L12 2
Ø0.25 (Ø6.4)
1.38
2
(35.0)
2
1.81 Ø0.51 (Ø13.0)
(46.0)
Ø0.60 (Ø15.3) 2
1.97
3.58 (91.0)
2
(50.0) 0.67 (17.0)
2.83 (72.0) 2
2
Ø0.64 (Ø16.2)
2
Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb 2
SL7/4-BET
2
Ø0.22 (Ø5.5)
Ø2.13
(Ø54.0)
2
2.97
SL7/4-FW-T (75.5) 2
0.94 (24.0)
2
Ø0.47 (Ø12.0)
2.56
2.13 Ø0.79 (Ø20.0)
2
(54.0)
(65.0) 2.76
(70.0) 2
2
1.73
(44.0) 1.38 (35.0) 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-31
 2.2 Stacklights
E26 Series

Stacklights—E26 Series Contents

2 Description Page
2 E26 Series
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-33
2 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-34
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-35
2 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-40
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-41
2 Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-42
Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-43
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-44

2
2
2
2
2 Standards and
Product Description Features Benefits Certifications
2 The E26 stacklight unit is a ● Modular construction ● Combination of visible and ● CE 60947-5-1
modular system that provides Six lens colors audible alarms UL 508—File No. E131568
2 illuminated and audible status
●

● Modular components
●

● Variety of lamp types and ● cUL C22.2 No. 14—File

indication in all directions. voltages reduce inventory No. E131568
2 Easily assembled plug-in
● Mono-tonal, bi-tonal and requirements, increase
modular units include flexibility
intermittent audible alarms
2 constant, flashing and strobe ● Steady and flashing modes
light units, as well as mono- allow one light to signal
tonal, bi-tonal, intermittent
2 audible alarms. Stacklights
multiple conditions Ingress Protection
may be assembled in a
● No-tools assembly permits ● Stacklight base and light
2 variety of configurations, easy lamp replacement units: IP65, NEMA 4, 4X
which are identified in the and 13
2 Maximum Configurations ● Alarm units: IP20, NEMA 1
table on Page V7-T2-33.
2 Several lamp, color and
mounting options further
Electrical Shock Protection
● Stacklight base and light
enhance the stacklight’s
2 versatility.
unit: IP2X
● Alarm units: IP0X
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
Product Identification
2
Complete Stacklight Modules
● Stacklights accept a 2
Level maximum of six
3 incandescent or LED light
modules or two Xenon
2
Level
Flasher modules and can
2
be mounted in any position 2
Standard Stacklight Base Level on the stack.
For use with incandescent or 1 ● Alarm units are mounted in 2
standard LEDs for steady, Stack- the top most position only.
non-flashing illumination or light
Base
2
with flashing LEDs for Xenon Strobe
flashing illumination. Bases
include terminal block for
Sets are similar to standard 2
lens/diffuser units, except Extension
wiring, stacklight cover and Tube
gasket. See Page V7-T2-38.
each set consists of two lens
units. The lower unit includes
2
Mounting
the electronics and is
permanently fused to the
Base
2
upper unit which contains the
Xenon lamp. Xenon units may 2
be placed in any position in a
complete stacklight unit. 2
They will flash 60 times per Maximum Configurations

Flashing Stacklight Base

minute when used with a
standard or flashing base.
Incandescent
or Xenon Alarm Max. Number
2
Allows configuration of each See Page V7-T2-36. LED Modules Modules Modules of Modules
light in the stack for either 6 — — 6
2
steady or 60 times per
minute flashing illumination. 5 — 1 6 2
Flashing circuit for use with 4 1 — 5
incandescent lamps only. 3 1 1 5 2
(Maximum allowable number
2 2 — 4
of light modules is 2 at 12V, 4
at 24V and 6 at 48V and 1 2 1 4
2
above.) See Page V7-T2-38.
Alarms
May be fitted to the top of a 2
For flashing LEDs use complete stacklight unit or
standard base with flashing directly to the stacklight 2
LED light module. bases, if desired. Available in
three versions, each with
adjustable sound levels. See
2
Page V7-T2-39.
2
2
2
Light Modules
Available in a variety of colors
2
for both incandescent lamps
and LED lamps. To maximize 2
illumination and light dispersion,
incandescent units include an 2
opal white diffuser while LED
diffusers are clear. See Page
V7-T2-36.
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-33
 2.2 Stacklights
E26 Series

Catalog Number Selection

2
Stacklight Catalog Numbering System
2
E26X 9 KM L 39R W – V 4
2
2 Mounting Base 1 Voltage 3
Code Description Component Alarm Code Description
2 W None (base mount) —
Catalog No. Code Description Component V1
V2
12V
24V
Catalog No. 2
4 3/4 in NPT hub, chrome E26S104 V3 48V
2 8 Standard three-hole E26S108
W
Q
None
Mono-tonal
—
E26BQ_ V4 120V
9 Standard four-hole E26S109 N Bi-tonal E26BN_ V5 4 240V
2 P Intermittent E26BP_
Extension Tube 5

2 Code Description Component

Catalog No. Code
Light Module
Description Component
W None (base mount) — Catalog No. 2
2 Gray Aluminum 0 Clear incandescent E26B0_
HM 20 mm 3/4 in NPT E26BHM 2 Red incandescent E26B2_
2 JM
KM
160 mm 3/4 in NPT
360 mm 3/4 in NPT
E26BJM
E26BKM
3
4
Green incandescent
Yellow incandescent
E26B3_
E26B4_
MM 760 mm 3/4 in NPT E26BMM 6 Blue incandescent E26B6_
2 Black Aluminum
9 Amber incandescent E26B9_
W White cluster LED with clear lens E26BW_
HU 20 mm 3/4 in NPT E26BHU
2 JU 160 mm 3/4 in NPT E26BJU
R
G
Red cluster LED with red lens
Green cluster LED with green lens
E26BR_
E26BG_
KU 360 mm 3/4 in NPT E26BKU
Y Yellow cluster LED with yellow lens E26BY_
MU 760 mm 3/4 in NPT E26BMU
2 RU Right angle 3/4 in NPT E26BRU
B
A
Blue cluster LED with blue lens
Amber cluster LED with amber lens
E26BB_
E26BA_
W1 White cylindrical LED with clear lens 4 E26BW1_
2 Stacklight Base R1 Red cylindrical LED with red lens 4 E26BR1_
Code Description Component G1 Green cylindrical LED with green lens 4 E26BG1_
2 L Standard
Catalog No. 2
E26BL
Y1
B1
Yellow cylindrical LED with yellow lens 4
Blue cylindrical LED with blue lens 4
E26BY1_
E26BB1_
F Flashing 6 E26BF_ A1 Amber cylindrical LED with amber lens 4 E26BA1_
2 M Flashing white cluster LED with clear lens E26BM_
E Flashing red cluster LED with red lens E26BE_
2 U
V
Flashing green cluster LED with green lens
Flashing yellow cluster LED with yellow lens
E26BU_
E26BV_
K Flashing blue cluster LED with blue lens E26BK_
2 Z Flashing amber cluster LED with amber lens E26BZ_
X0 Xenon flasher with clear lens E26BX0_
2 X2
X3
Xenon flasher with red lens
Xenon flasher with green lens
E26BX2_
E26BX3_
X4 Xenon flasher with yellow lens E26BX4_
2 X6 Xenon flasher with blue lens E26BX6_
X9 Xenon flasher with amber lens E26BX9_

2
2 Voltage Codes
Voltage Code Incandescent Lamp Cluster LED Cylindrical LED Xenon Flasher Flasher Base/Alarm
2 (Blank) No lamp supplied No LED supplied No LED supplied — —
V1 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc
2 V2 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc

2 V3 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc

V4 120 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac/Vdc
2 V5 240 Vac/Vdc 240 Vac — 240 Vac 240 Vac/Vdc

2 Notes
1 Unless base mount is specified, an extension tube must be selected for a complete unit.
2 Component catalog numbers for flashing bases, alarm units and light modules are incomplete and require the addition of a suffix code to specify the required voltage rating. See table above.
2 3 If no voltage is specified, assembled stacklight will be supplied without lamps or LEDs.
4 240V not available for cylindrical LEDs.

2 5 For complete length (extension tube and base), see Page V7-T2-39.
6 Flashing base is for use with incandescent lamps.

V7-T2-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
Product Selection
2
Assembled Units
One-, Two- and Three-Light Assembled Stacklights
2
● Base mountable 2
● Incandescent or LED versions
● 24V and 120V versions 2
2
One-Light Unit Stacklight
Volts
AC/DC Alarm
First Level
Color Illumination Type Catalog Number
2
24V None Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL2W-V2 2
24V None Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLR1W-V2
24V None Green Incandescent—steady E26XWWL3W-V2 2
24V None Green Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1W-V2
24V None Amber Incandescent—steady E26XWWL9W-V2
2
24V None Amber Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLA1W-V2
2
120V None Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL2W-V4
120V 1 None Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLR1W-V4 2
120V None Green Incandescent—steady E26XWWL3W-V4
120V 1 None Green Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1W-V4 2
120V None Amber Incandescent—steady E26XWWL9W-V4
120V 1 None Amber Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLA1W-V4
2
2
Two-Light Unit Stacklight 2
Volts First Level Second Level
AC/DC Alarm Color Illumination Type Color Illumination Type Catalog Number
2
24V None Green Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL32W-V2
24V None Green Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1R1W-V2 2
120V None Green Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL32W-V4
120V 1 None Green Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1R1W-V4 2
2
Three-Light Unit Stacklight
First Second Third
2
Volts Level Level Level
AC/DC Alarm Color Illumination Type Color Illumination Type Color Illumination Type Catalog Number 2
24V None Green Incandescent—steady Amber Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL392W-V2
24V None Green Cylindrical LED—steady Amber Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V2 2
120V None Green Incandescent—steady Amber Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL392W-V4
120V 1 None Green Cylindrical LED—steady Amber Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V4
2
Note 2
1 LED modules have very low current draw and should not be used with triac output devices like PLC triac output modules.

It is recommended that dry contact outputs be used to switch 120 Vac modules. 2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-35
 2.2 Stacklights
E26 Series

Light and Xenon Strobe Modules

2
● Light modules include lens ● Xenon strobes emit a ● Xenon strobe modules
2 diffusers which provide bright attention-getting occupy two positions in the
even illumination and white flashing light. Flash stacklight assembly.
2 eliminate hot spots. rate = 60/min.

2 Light and Xenon Strobe Modules 1

Light/LED Module
2 Incandescent Cylindrical LED Cluster LED Cluster LED Xenon
LED/Lamp Steady or Flashing Steady Only Steady Flashing Flashing
Voltage Lens Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
2 Without bulb Red E26B2 E26B E26BR E26BR —
or LED
2 Green E26B3 E26BG E26BG E26BG —
Yellow E26B4 E26BY E26BY E26BY —
2 Xenon Strobe Module
Blue E26B6 E26BB E26BB E26BB —
Amber E26B9 E26BA E26BA E26BA —
2 Clear E26B0 E26BW E26BW E26BW —

2 12 Vac/Vdc Red E26B2V1 E26BR1V1 E26BRV1 E26BEV1 E26BX2V1

Green E26B3V1 E26BG1V1 E26BGV1 E26BUV1 E26BX3V1
2 Yellow E26B4V1 E26BY1V1 E26BYV1 E26BVV1 E26BX4V1
Blue E26B6V1 E26BB1V1 E26BBV1 E26BKV1 E26BX6V1
2 Amber E26B9V1 E26BA1V1 E26BAV1 E26BZV1 E26BX9V1
Clear E26B0V1 E26BW1V1 E26BWV1 E26BMV1 E26BX0V1
2 24 Vac/Vdc Red E26B2V2 E26BR1V2 E26BRV2 E26BEV2 E26BX2V2

2 Green E26B3V2 E26BG1V2 E26BGV2 E26BUV2 E26BX3V2

Yellow E26B4V2 E26BY1V2 E26BYV2 E26BVV2 E26BX4V2
2 Blue E26B6V2 E26BB1V2 E26BBV2 E26BKV2 E26BX6V2
Amber E26B9V2 E26BA1V2 E26BAV2 E26BZV2 E26BX9V2
2 Clear E26B0V2 E26BW1V2 E26BWV2 E26BMV2 E26BX0V2
48 Vac/Vdc Red E26B2V3 E26BR1V3 E26BRV3 E26BEV3 E26BX2V3
2 Green E26B3V3 E26BG1V3 E26BGV3 E26BUV3 E26BX3V3

2 Yellow E26B4V3 E26BY1V3 E26BYV3 E26BVV3 E26BX4V3

Blue E26B6V3 E26BB1V3 E26BBV3 E26BKV3 E26BX6V3
2 Amber E26B9V3 E26BA1V3 E26BAV3 E26BZV3 E26BX9V3
Clear E26B0V3 E26BW1V3 E26BWV3 E26BMV3 E26BX0V3
2 120 Vac 2 Red E26B2V4 E26BR1V4 E26BRV4 E26BEV4 E26BX2V4

2 Green E26B3V4 E26BG1V4 E26BGV4 E26BUV4 E26BX3V4

Yellow E26B4V4 E26BY1V4 E26BYV4 E26BVV4 E26BX4V4
2 Blue E26B6V4 E26BB1V4 E26BBV4 E26BKV4 E26BX6V4
Amber E26B9V4 E26BA1V4 E26BAV4 E26BZV4 E26BX9V4
2 Clear E26B0V4 E26BW1V4 E26BWV4 E26BMV4 E26BX0V4
240 Vac 2 Red E26B2V5 — E26BRV5 E26BEV5 E26BX2V5
2 Green E26B3V5 — E26BGV5 E26BUV5 E26BX3V5

2 Yellow E26B4V5 — E26BYV5 E26BVV5 E26BX4V5

Blue E26B6V5 — E26BBV5 E26BKV5 E26BX6V5
2 Amber E26B9V5 — E26BAV5 E26BZV5 E26BX9V5
Clear E26B0V5 — E26BWV5 E26BMV5 E26BX0V5
2 Notes
1 Include lens, diffusers and lamps unless otherwise noted.
2 2 Incandescent bulbs are AC/DC rated, LEDs are AC rated only.

2
2

V7-T2-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
LEDs—Cylindrical or Cluster
2
Cylindrical or Cluster LEDs
Cylindrical
Stacklight LED Cylindrical LED Cluster LED Cluster LED
2
Steady Only Steady Flashing
Voltage Color Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 2
12 Vac/Vdc Red E26S110 E26S15 E26S48
Green E26S114 E26S19 E26S53
2
Yellow E26S112 E26S23 E26S58 2
Blue E26S115 E26S27 E26S63
White E26S116 E26S71 E26S75 2
Cluster LED
Amber E26S111 E26S79 E26S84
24 Vac/Vdc Red E26S117 E26S16 E26S49
2
Green E26S121 E26S20 E26S54
2
Yellow E26S119 E26S24 E26S59
Blue E26S122 E26S28 E26S64 2
White E26S123 E26S72 E26S76
Amber E26S118 E26S80 E26S85 2
48 Vac/Vdc Red E26S124 E26S17 E26S50
Green E26S128 E26S21 E26S55
2
Yellow E26S126 E26S25 E26S60
2
Blue E26S129 E26S29 E26S65
White E26S130 E26S73 E26S77 2
Amber E26S125 E26S81 E26S86
120 Vac/Vdc Red E26S138 E26S18 E26S51 2
Green E26S142 E26S22 E26S56
Yellow E26S140 E26S26 E26S61
2
Blue E26S143 E26S30 E26S66 2
White — E26S74 E26S78
Amber E26S139 E26S82 E26S87 2
240 Vac/Vdc Red — E26S44 E26S52
Green — E26S45 E26S57
2
Yellow — E26S46 E26S62
2
Blue — E26S47 E26S67
White — E26S101 E26S102 2
Amber — E26S83 E26S88
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-37
 2.2 Stacklights
E26 Series

Mounting Bases Components

2
Standard Base Flashing Base
2 2 1 2
6 or 6 or

2 2 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 or
1 2
C 1 2 3 4 5 6
5 or
2 2
4 or
1 2

4 or 7 8 9 10
2 2
3

3 or 2
2 2
1
2 or Orange Flasher
2 2
Factory
- C 1 2 3 4 5 6
Wire

1 or Wiring
2 Field External Flasher
Wiring Supply Switching Max. Allowable
2 - C 1 2 3 4 5 6
Devices Flasher
Base Voltage No. of Light
Modules
Flashing Steady 12 Vdc 2
2 External
Circuit Circuit 24 Vac/Vdc
48 Vac/Vdc
4
6
7 8 9 10
Supply Switching 120 Vac/Vdc 6
2 Devices Flashing
Orange Module 240 Vac/Vdc 6
Wire
2
2 Description Voltage Catalog Number

2 Standard Base
For use with steady incandescent or steady/flashing LED 12 Vac/Vdc to 240 Vac/Vdc E26BL
2 Flashing Base
Enables configuration of incandescent light modules for steady or flashing operation 12 Vdc E26BFV1
2 24 Vac/Vdc E26BFV2
48 Vac/Vdc E26BFV3
2 120 Vac/Vdc E26BFV4

2 240 Vac/Vdc E26BFV5

2 Mounting Bases and Hubs

Description Voltage Catalog Number
2 Standard Three-Hole Mounting Base
Mounting Base
2 Standard three-hole mounting base — E26S108

2
2 Standard Four-Hole Standard four-hole mounting base — E26S109
Mounting Base
2
2
2 Myers Type Hub Myers Type Hub
3/4 in NPT threaded hub — E26S104
2
2 Notes
1 Audible alarm units must be wired via the steady circuit on flashing base units.

2 2 Audible alarm units can be wired in positions as shown but only one unit is permitted on each stack and unit must occupy

the last or top mounting position.

V7-T2-38 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
Alarm Units and Extension Tubes Components
2
Audible Alarm Units-NEMA Type 1 (IP20) 1
E26B_
Description Voltage Catalog Number
2
Mono-Tonal 2
4.5 mA 12 Vac/Vdc E26BQV1
12.6 mA 24 Vac/Vdc E26BQV2 2
9.4 mA 48 Vac/Vdc E26BQV3
11.5 mA 120 Vac/Vdc E26BQV4
2
5.1 mA 240 Vac/Vdc E26BQV5
2
Bi-Tonal
4.5 mA 12 Vac/Vdc E26BNV1 2
12.6 mA 24 Vac/Vdc E26BNV2
9.4 mA 48 Vac/Vdc E26BNV3 2
11.5 mA 120 Vac/Vdc E26BNV4
5.1 mA 240 Vac/Vdc E26BNV5
2
Intermittent
2
4.5 mA 12 Vac/Vdc E26BPV1
12.6 mA 24 Vac/Vdc E26BPV2 2
9.4 mA 48 Vac/Vdc E26BPV3
11.5 mA 120 Vac/Vdc E26BPV4 2
5.1 mA 240 Vac/Vdc E26BPV5
2
Extension Tubes
2
Description
2
Voltage Catalog Number
2
Extension Tube Extension “A”
A
0.79 in (20 mm) extension — E26BHM 2
6.30 in (160 mm) extension — E26BJM
14.17 in (360 mm) extension — E26BKM 2
29.92 in (760 mm) extension — E26BMM
Extension Tube Extension “A” 3
2
A
0.79 in (20 mm) extension — E26BHU 2
6.30 in (160 mm) extension — E26BJU
14.17 in (360 mm) extension — E26BKU 2
29.92 in (760 mm) extension — E26BMU
E26BRU Right angle extension tube — E26BRU
2
2
2
Notes
1 Volume adjustment range: 64 dB to 90 dB typical current draw (mA).
2
2 For use with standard mounting base or 3/4 in NPT threaded hub—gray aluminum.
3 For use with standard mounting base or 3/4 in NPT threaded hub—black aluminum. 2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-39
 2.2 Stacklights
E26 Series

Replacement Parts
2
Stacklight Replacement Parts Typical Stacklight Assemblies
2 Number in 1 Cover
Description Notes Diagram Catalog Number Alarm
2 Replacement Normally included with 1 E26S68
cover stacklight base
2 Replacement Normally included with light 2 E26S106 1
lens O-ring modules
2 Replacement lenses Clear 3 E26S38 2 O-Ring

Red E26S39
2 Green E26S40

2 Yellow E26S41 Lens 3

Blue E26S42
2 Amber E26S43
Replacement Xenon 12 Vac/Vdc 4 E26S33
2 strobe dual high
24 Vac/Vdc E26S34 4
(does not include lenses) Light
2 48 Vac/Vdc E26S35 Diffuser
120 Vac E26S36
2 240 Vac E26S37
Replacement diffusers White — normally supplied 4 E26S31 Lamp 5
2 with incandescent light
modules Terminal
Board
2 Clear — normally supplied
with LED light modules
E26S32

2 Replacement lamps 2 12V 5 E26S8

O-Ring 2
24V E26S9
2 48V E26S10 Set Screw
Recommended
120V E26S11 Tightening
2 240V E26S12
Torque
Is 7 in-lb Stacklight
(0.79 Nm) Base
Replacement extension Normally included with 6 E26S107 3
2 tube O-rings extension tubes
Replacement mounting Normally included with 7 E26S105
2 gasket 4 stacklight base 7
Mounting
O-Rings 6
Lamp removal tool For E26 and E22 E22BA3 Gasket
2 incandescent lamps Extension
Tube
2
2 Mounting
Base

2
Typical Stacklight Assembly
2 (Exploded View)

2
2 Panel
Myers Type
ST-2 or
2 ST-2CP Hub

2
Alternate Conduit Hub
2 Notes
1 Sold in packages of 5 pieces.

2 2 For replacement LEDs, see table on Page V7-T2-37.

3 Sold in packages of 10 pieces.

2 4 Mounting gaskets have two sets of mounting holes—one set with center-to-center spacing of

1.75 in (44.5 mm) and another set with center-to-center spacing of 1.65 in (42 mm).

V7-T2-40 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
General Specifications
Description Specification 2
Mechanical Ratings
Shock (IEC 68-2-27) 11 ms, 15g
2
Vibration (IEC 68-2-6) 10 sweeps 10–150 Hz, 2g 2
Bump (IEC 68-2-29) 1000 pulses, 6 ms, 15g
Climate Conditions 2
Operating Maximum 104°F (40°C) at 95% RH,
Temperature –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) 2
Storage Temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Materials
2
Cover Polycarbonate
Lenses Polycarbonate
2
Stacklight base Nylon 2
Extension tubes Aluminum
Mounting base Zinc die cast 2
Terminals
Single conductor 14–30 AWG (2.5–0.05 mm2)
2
18–26 AWG (0.75–0.14 mm2)
Two conductors (same size))
Do not mix solid and stranded wire in the same terminal
2
Recommended tightening torque 4.4–5.3 lb-in (0.5–0.6 Nm)
Electrical Ratings
2
Insulation voltage (Ui) 690V 2
Operational voltage (Ue) 250V
Impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 1.5 kV 2
Bulb Specifications
Incandescent lamp type BA15d
2
Maximum lamp wattage 6W
2
Bulbs—average life
Incandescent 7,000 to 12,000 hrs. (based on voltage) 2
Xenon flasher 20,000 hrs.
LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs. (based on colors) 2
LED/Incandescent Comparison
Incandescent lamps Average operating life of 7,000 hours
2
Each lamp can be used with any color lens
Low cost results in short term savings 2
LED lamps Average operating life of 60,000 to 100,000 hours
Low power consumption 2
Extended life results in long-term savings

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-41
 2.2 Stacklights
E26 Series

Ratings
2 Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory
conditions and should be used for comparison only.
2 Actual life may be shorter due to various application conditions.

2 Stacklight Incandescent Application Data LED Application Data

Type Lamp Approximate Current, Theoretical Lamp Life, Cluster LED Cylindrical LED
2 of Light Used mA per Light Hours as Applied Approximate Approximate Theoretical
Type of Current, mA Current, mA Lamp Life,
12V BA15d 417 7,000
2 24V BA15d 208 7,000
Light Color at Rated Volts at Rated Volts Hours as Applied
Continuous/Flashing Stacklight LED
2 48V BA15d 104 7,000
12 Red 92 92 100,000
110–140V BA15d 36–50 7,000 Vac/Vdc
Amber 92 92 100,000
2 220–260V BA15d 23–27 12,000
Yellow 92 92 100,000

2 Xenon Flasher Application Data

Green 60 60 80,000
Blue 60 60 60,000
Type Lamp Approximate Current, Theoretical Lamp Life,
2 of Light Used mA per Light Hours as Applied White 60 60 60,000

12V DC 460 mA 20,000 24 Red 47 47 100,000

2 AC 780 mA 20,000
Vac/Vdc
Amber 47 47 100,000
Yellow 47 47 100,000
2 24V DC 190 mA 20,000
Green 59 59 80,000
AC 320 mA 20,000
2 48V DC 100 mA 20,000 Blue 59 59 60,000

AC 150 mA 20,000 White 59 59 60,000

2 120V AC 60 mA 1 20,000 48 Red 25 25 100,000
Vac/Vdc
240V AC 30 mA 1 20,000 Amber 25 25 100,000
2 Yellow 25 25 100,000
Green 18 18 80,000
2 Blue 31 31 60,000

2 White 31 31 60,000
60 Red 25 25 100,000
2 Vac/Vdc
Amber 25 25 100,000
Yellow 25 25 100,000
2 Green 18 18 80,000

2 Blue 17 17 60,000
White 17 17 60,000
2 120
Vac/Vdc
Red 24 24 100,000
Amber 24 24 100,000
2 Yellow 24 24 100,000
Green 17 17 80,000
2 Blue 16 16 60,000

2 White 16 16 60,000

Note
2 1 Represents average current draw, 1.6A peak for 120V and 0.8A peak at 240V.

2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
Mounting Instructions
Stacklight bases may be 0.8–30 in (20–760 mm) with 3/4 in NPT threads,
2
mounted without the use of extension tubes that fit allowing for direct connection
an extension tube or between the mounting base to conduit fittings or threaded 2
mounting base. If additional and stacklight base. The holes without the use of a
height is required, choose extension tubes are threaded mounting base. 2
Utilizing Extension Tube
2
Utilizing Extension Tube and 3/4 In (19.1 mm)
Base Mounting and Mounting Base Conduit Hub 2
Customer
Supplied
Set Screw
Recommended
Set Screw
Recommended 2
Tightening Torque Tightening Torque
Is 7 in-lb
(0.79 Nm)
Is 7 in-lb
(0.79 Nm) 2
2
Stacklight Stacklight
Stacklight Base Base
Base 2

Mounting
O-Rings O-Rings 2
Gasket
Extension Extension
2
Panel Tube Tube
2
Mounting Myers Type
Base ST-2 or 2
ST-2CP Hub
Mounting
Gasket Panel
2
Customer
Supplied
Panel 2
2
2
(Use Rubber-Jawed Pliers for
Installation to Avoid Scratching
the Black Anodized Coating)
2
Mounting Dimensions
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
Three-Hole Mounting for Four-Hole Mounting for Conduit Hub for E26S104—
Base Mounting E26S108 E26S109 3/4 In (19.1 mm) 2
0.18 (4.6) Dia. 1.92 (48.8) 2.12 (53.8) 1.06 Dia.
or #8–32 Thread Dia. Dia. (27) 2
or (M4 x 0.7) 0.87 0.87
(22.1) (22.1)
0.87 Dia.
(22.1)
Dia. Dia. 2
2
2
1.75 (44.5) 90°
or 1.65 (42.0) a 2
120° 0.20 (5.08) Dia.
0.18 (4.6) Dia.
or #8–32 Thread
or (M4 x 0.7)
or #10–32 Thread
or (M5 x 0.7)
2
Note
1 Stacklight base and gasket are supplied as standard with two sets of base mount holes.
2
One set with center-to-center spacing of 1.75 in (44.5 mm) and another set with center-to-center spacing of 1.65 in (42 mm).
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-43
 2.2 Stacklights
E26 Series

Dimensions
2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Standard and Flashing Bases 1 Assembled Extension Tubes
2
2

2
1.75
2 (44)

2
2.32
(59)
2 A

2 Alarm Units
2.56
2 (65) Tube Extension Height A
0.79 (20) 1.77 (45)
2 0.59 6.30 (160) 7.28 (185)
(15)
14.17 (360) 15.16 (385)
2 29.92 (760) 30.91 (785)
1.69
2 (42.9)

Right Angle Extension Tubes

2
2
2.00
2 (50.8)

2
2.50
2 (63.5)

Notes
2 1 Bases also suitable for mounting with extension tubes listed on Page V7-T2-39.
2 Mounting gasket and cover are supplied as standard with stacklight bases.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-44 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Stacklights
E26 Series
2.2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
One-Light Unit Stacklight
2
Standard With Alarm With Xenon Flasher
2.56 (65) 2.56 (65) 2.56 (65) 2
0.59 (15)
0.59 (15) Alarm
2
2.24 (57)
Light 2.72 (69)
Xenon
2
2.72 (69) Unit
Light
2.72 (69)
Light
Unit
Unit
(2 High)
2
1.73 (44) Base 2.72 (69) 2
1.73 (44) Base
2
1.73 (44) Base
2
2
Two-Light Unit Stacklight
2
Standard With Alarm With Xenon Flasher
2.56 (65) 2.56 (65) 2.56 (65)
2
0.59 (15) 0.59 (15)
Alarm
2
2.24 (57)
Light
2.72 (69) Unit 2.72 (69)
Xenon
2
Light
2.72 (69)
Light
Unit
Unit
(2 High)
2
Light
2.72 (69) Unit 2.72 (69) 2
2.72 (69)
Light
Unit 2
1.73 (44) Base Light
2.72 (69) Unit 2
1.73 (44) Base
2
1.73 (44) Base
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com V7-T2-45
 2.2 Stacklights
E26 Series

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2
Three-Light Unit Stacklight
2
Standard With Alarm With Xenon Flasher
2 2.56 (65) 2.56 (65) 2.56 (65)
0.59 (15) 0.59 (15)
2 2.24 (57)
Alarm
Light
2.72 (69) Unit
2 2.72 (69)
Xenon
Light
Light Unit
2 Light
2.72 (69) Unit (2 High)
2.72 (69) Unit 2.72 (69)
2 Light
2.72 (69) Unit
2 2.72 (69)
Light
Unit 2.72 (69)
Light
Unit

2 2.72 (69)
Light
Unit
1.73 (44) Base Light
2 2.72 (69) Unit

1.73 (44) Base

2 Base
1.73 (44)
2
2 Light Modules
2 Standard Xenon
2 a
2.56 (65)
a
2.56 (65)
0.59 (15) 0.59 (15)
2
2 2.72 (69.1) 2.72 (69.1)

2
2.72 (69.1)
2
2
Note
2 1 Cover included with stacklight base.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

V7-T2-46 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—September 2016 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers

easyRelay Programmable Relays 3.1 Relay Products

Control Relays and Timers Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-2
3
3.2 XR Series Terminal Block Relays 3
Standard, OptoCoupler and High Current
3
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-3

3.3 Programmable Relays

3
easy500, easy700, easy800, easy802/806 Relays and 3
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays
D1 Series General Purpose Relay Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-19 3
3.4 General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3
General Purpose Relays—D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D7, D8 and D9 Series
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-49 3
3.5 General Purpose Open Style Relays 3
9575H Series 3000 Relay
9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-118
3
3.6 Solid-State Relays 3
D93, D96 and D99 Series
3
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-122
D96 Series Solid-State Relay
3.7 Machine Tool Relays
3
D15, BF/BFD, AR/ARD and D26 Series 3
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-141
3
3.8 Timing Relays
Universal TR, TR and TMR Series 3
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-167
3
3.9 Alternating Relays
Universal TR Series Timing Relay D85 Series 3
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-188
3
3.10 Safety Relays
ESR5 Series
3
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-193 3
3.11 easySafety 3
ES4P Series
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-199 3
Safety Relay 3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-1
 3.1 Control Relays and Timers
Relay Product Overview

Relay Products Contents

3 Description Page
3 Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-3
Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-19
3 General Purpose Plug-In Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-49
General Purpose Type AA Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-118
3 Solid-State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-122
Machine Tool Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-141
3 Timing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-167
Alternating Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-188
3 Safety Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-193

3
3
3
3
3 Control Relays and Timers Comparison
3 Selection Guide by Catalog Number Prefix
Maximum
3 Amperage Page
Relays Type Mounting Contacts (AC) UL CSA CE Number
3 9575H3 General purpose Panel mount Fixed 40 A — ■ ■ ■ V7-T3-119
AR/ARD Machine tool Panel mount Convertible 10 A — ■ ■ — V7-T3-154
3 BF/BFD Machine tool Panel mount Fixed 10 A ■ — ■ — V7-T3-148

3 D2RF Full featured plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-59
D2RR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount / flange Fixed 10 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-59
3 D3RF Full featured plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 16 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-69
D3RR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 16 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-69
3 D4PR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-77
D5RF Full featured plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 16 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-82
3 ■ ■ ■
D5RR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount / PC board Fixed 16 A — V7-T3-82

3 D7PF Full featured plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 20 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-91
D7PR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount / flange Fixed 20 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-91
3 D8PR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount / flange Fixed 30 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-104
D9PR Standard plug-in Panel mounting Fixed 25 A ■ — ■ — V7-T3-109
3 D15 Machine tool DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10 A — ■ ■ ■ V7-T3-143
■ ■
3 D26 Machine tool Panel or channel mount Convertible 10 A — — V7-T3-159
D85 Alternating relays DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10 A ■ ■ — ■ V7-T3-189
3 D1RF Full featured plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 20 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-54
D1RR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 20 A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-54
3 easyRelay Programmable relay DIN rail Fixed 8A — ■ ■ ■ V7-T3-23
TMR5 Timing relay (non-programmable) DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10 A ■ ■ — ■ V7-T3-180
3 TMR6 Timing relay (non-programmable) DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10 A ■ ■ — ■ V7-T3-184

3 TR Timing relay (programmable) DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10 A — ■ ■ — V7-T3-177

Universal TR Timing relay (programmable) DIN rail Fixed 8A — ■ ■ ■ V7-T3-173
3 XR Terminal block relay DIN rail Fixed 6 A, 10 A ■ — — ■ V7-T3-5

3
3

V7-T3-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Terminal Block Relays Contents
Description Page
3
Terminal Block Relays 3
Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-4
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-12 3
High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-15
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-18 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Catalog Number Selection 3
XR Series—Overview 3
XR U 1 D 12 G 3
3
Description Gold-Flashed Contacts
XR = XR terminal block relay Blank = No
G = Yes
3
Connection Type 3
U = Screw Poles Voltage
P = Spring
R = Replacement relay
1 = 1PDT
2 = 2PDT Type
12 =
24 =
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
3
D = Standard relay 24U = 24 Vac/Vdc
S = Octocoupler (solid-state) 120U = 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3
H = High current 230U = 230 Vac/220 Vdc
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-3
 3.2 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays

Standard Terminal Block Relay Contents

3 Description Page
3 Standard Terminal Block Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-5
3 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-6
Electrical Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-11
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-11
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-12
3 High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-15
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-18
3
3
3
3
3
3 Standard Terminal Block Relays
3 Product Description Application Description Features
The XR Series Terminal Used in automation systems, ● Pluggable relay allows for ● Gold-plated contacts
3 Block Relays are ideal for electromechanical relays field replacement available
applications that require a guarantee a safe connection ● Functional plug-in bridges ● Equipped with a robust,
high switching capacity and between process I/O and
3 long electrical service life. electronic controls. The
● Choice of screw miniature relay:
connections or spring-cage ● IP67 protection
The relays are plug-in following functions are
3 interfaces that connect to covered by relay coupling
connection ● Environmentally friendly,
● LED status indication cadmium-free contact
basic terminal blocks. The elements:
material
3 XR Series uses screw or
● Electrical isolation
● DIN rail mount
● Easy, cost-effective
spring-cage technology, as ● Only 6.2 mm wide for
between the input and installation and
3 well as offers quick system
wiring, superior safety output circuits
single-pole versions,
replacement using the
14 mm wide for double-
features, clear labeling and ● Independence of the type pole engagement lever
3 a high level of modularity. of switching current (AC ● All common input
and DC) voltages between Standards and Certifications
3 ● High short-term overload 12 Vdc to 120 Vac ● cULus listed
resistance in the event of ● CE
3 short circuits or voltage
peaks
3 ● Low switching losses
● Ease of operation
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Product Selection
3
Standard Terminal Block Relays
XRU1D 24U
Gold-Plated Rated Supply Standard Catalog
3
Contacts Current Voltage Pack Number
1PDT Screw Connection
3
No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRU1D12
3
No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1D120U
Yes 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1D120UG 3
No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRU1D24
No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU1D24U 3
Yes 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU1D24UG
No 6A 230 Vac/220 Vdc 10 XRU1D230U
3
1PDT Spring Cage Connection 3
No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRP1D12
No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRP1D120U 3
No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRP1D24
No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRP1D24U
3
No 6A 230 Vac/220 Vdc 10 XRP1D230U
3
DPDT Screw Connection
No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRU2D12 3
No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU2D120U
No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRU2D24 3
No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU2D24U
No 6A 230 Vac/220 Vdc 10 XRU2D230U
3
3
Standard Replacement Relays
Gold-Plated Rated Supply Standard Catalog
3
Contacts Current Voltage 1 Pack Number
1PDT
3
No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRR1D12 3
No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRR1D120U
Yes 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRR1D120UG 3
No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRR1D24
Yes 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRR1D24G
3
DPDT
3
No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRR2D12
No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRR2D120U 3
No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRR2D24
No 6A 230 Vac/220 Vdc 10 XRR2D230U 3
Note
1 Voltage is the rating at the base. It may not match the voltage on the specific replacement relay.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-5
 3.2 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

3
Standard 1PDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays
3 Catalog Number XRU1D12 XRU1D24 XRU1D24U XRU1D120U
Replacement Relay XRR1D12 XRR1D24 XRR1D24 XRR1D120U
3 Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc

3 Connection Data
Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5)
3 Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5)
Input Data for 1PDT Screw Connection Versions
3 Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc
Permissible range See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10
3 Typical input current 15.3 mA 9 mA 11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc) 3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc)

3 Typical response time 5 ms 5 ms 6 ms 6 ms

Typical release time 8 ms 8 ms 15 ms 15 ms
3 Input protection Polarity protection diode, Polarity protection diode, Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier
free-wheeling diode free-wheeling diode
3 Output Data
Contact type 1PDT 1PDT 1PDT 1PDT
3 Contact material AgSnO AgSnO AgSnO AgSnO
Max. switching voltage 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1
3 Min. switching voltage 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc

3 Limiting continuous current 6A 6A 6A 6A

Min. switching current 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA
3 Min. switching power 120 mW 120 mW 120 mW 120 mW
Miscellaneous Data
3 Ambient temp range –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor
3 Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94

3 Mechanical service life 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles

Note
3 1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.

Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Standard 1PDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays with Gold Contacts
Catalog Number XRU1D24UG XRU1D120UG
3
Replacement Relay XRR1D24G XRR1D120UG
Input voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
Connection Data 3
Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5)
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3
Input Data for 1PDT Screw Connection Versions with Gold Contacts
Input voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
Permissible range See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10
3
Typical input current 11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc) 3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc)
Typical response time 6 ms 6 ms 3
Typical release time 15 ms 15 ms
Input protection Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier 3
Output Data
Contact type 1PDT 1PDT
3
Contact material AgSnO, gold plated 1
2
AgSnO, gold plated 1
3
Max. switching voltage 30 Vac/36 Vdc (250 Vac/Vdc) 30 Vac/36 Vdc (250 Vac/Vdc) 2
Min. switching voltage 100 mV (12 Vac/Vdc) 2 100 mV (12 Vac/Vdc) 2 3
Limiting continuous current 50 mA (6 A) 2 50 mA (6 A) 2
Min. switching current 1 mA (10 mA) 2 1 mA (10 mA) 2 3
Min. switching power 100 mW (120 mW) 2 100 mW (120 mW) 2
Miscellaneous Data
3
Ambient temp range –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –40 °F to +131 °F (–20 °C to +55 °C) 3
Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor
Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 3
Mechanical service life 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles
3
Notes
1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal

points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.
3
2 If the maximum values are exceeded, the gold layer is destroyed and the values in parentheses apply.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-7
 3.2 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays

Standard 1PDT Spring Cage Terminal Block Relays

3 Catalog Number XRP1D12 XRP1D24 XRP1D24U XRP1D120U
Replacement Relay XRR1D12 XRR1D24 XRR1D24 XRR1D120U
3 Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc

3 Connection Data
Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5)
3 Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5)
Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions
3 Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc

3 Permissible range See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10
Typical input current 15.3 mA 9 mA 11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc) 3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc)
3 Typical response time 5 ms 5 ms 6 ms 6 ms
Typical release time 8 ms 8 ms 15 ms 15 ms
3 Input protection Polarity protection diode, Polarity protection diode, Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier
free-wheeling diode free-wheeling diode
3 Output Data
Contact type 1PDT 1PDT 1PDT 1PDT
3 Contact material AgSnO AgSnO AgSnO AgSnO

3 Max. switching voltage 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1
Min. switching voltage 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc
3 Limiting continuous current 6A 6A 6A 6A
Min. switching current 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA
3 Min. switching power 120 mW 120 mW 120 mW 120 mW
Miscellaneous Data
3 Ambient temp range –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °F to +131 °F (–20 °C to +55 °C)

3 Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor
Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94
3 Mechanical service life 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles

Note
3 1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.

Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Standard DPDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays
Catalog Number XRU2D12 XRU2D24 XRU2D24U XRU2D120U
3
Replacement Relay XRR2D12 XRR2D24 XRR2D24 XRR2D120U
Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
Connection Data 3
Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5)
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3
Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions
Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
Permissible range See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10
3
Typical input current 33 mA 18 mA 17.5 mA 4.5 mA (120 Vac)/4.2 mA (110 Vdc)
Typical response time 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms 7 ms 3
Typical release time 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms
Input protection Polarity protection diode, Polarity protection diode, Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier 3
free-wheeling diode free-wheeling diode
Output Data 3
Contact type 2PDT Single contact, 2PDT Single contact, 2PDT Single contact, 2PDT
Contact material AgNi AgNi AgNi AgNi
3
1 1 1 1
Max. switching voltage 250 Vac/Vdc 250 Vac/Vdc 250 Vac/Vdc 250 Vac/Vdc
3
Min. switching voltage 5V 5V 5V 5V
Limiting continuous current 6A 6A 6A 6A 3
Max. inrush current 15 A (300 ms) 15 A (300 ms) 15 A (300 ms) 15 A (300 ms)
Min. switching current 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA 3
Min. switching power 50 mW 50 mW 50 mW 50 mW
General Data
3
Ambient temp range –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
3
Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor
Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 3
Mechanical service life 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles

Note
3
1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.

Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system. 3

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-9
 3.2 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays

Permissible Range Diagrams

3 1PDT Relay Modules DPDT Relay Modules
Operating Range Voltage for 12 Vdc Operating Range Voltage for 12 Vdc
3
1.4 1.4
3 1.3
A
1.3
A

1.2 1.2
3 U 1.1 U 1.1
UN UN = 12 Vdc UN UN = 12 Vdc
1.0
3 1.0
0.9
0.9

3 0.8
B
0.8
B
0.7 0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
3 TN [°C] TN [°C]

3 Operating Range Voltage for 120 Vac/110 Vdc Operating Range Voltage for 120 Vac/110 Vdc
3 1.4 1.4
A
A
1.3 1.3
3 1.2 1.2
UN = 120 Vac
U 1.1
3 U 1.1
UN
1.0
UN
1.0 UN = 110 Vdc
UN = 110 Vdc/120 Vac
3 0.9 0.9
B
0.8 0.8
B
3 0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C] TN [°C]
3
Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vdc Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vdc
3
1.4 1.4
3 1.3
A
1.3
A

1.2 1.2
3 U 1.1 U 1.1
UN UN = 24 Vdc UN UN = 24 Vdc
3 1.0 1.0
0.9 0.9
3 0.8
B
0.8
B
0.7 0.7
3 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
TN [°C]

3 Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vac/Vdc Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vac/Vdc
3 1.4 1.4
A A
1.3 1.3
3 1.2 1.2

3 U 1.1
UN UN = 24 Vdc/24 Vac
U 1.1
UN UN = 24 Vdc/24 Vac
1.0 1.0
3 0.9 0.9
B
0.8 0.8
B
3 0.7 0.7
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65

3 TN [°C] TN [°C]

Notes
3 General Conditions — Direct alignment in the block, all devices 100% operating factor, horizontal or vertical mounting.
Curve A — Maximum permissible continuous operating voltage Umax with limiting continuous current on the contact side (see respective technical data).
3 Curve B — Minimum permissible relay operate voltage Uop after pre-excitation 1) (see respective technical data).
1 Pre-excitation: Relay has been operated in a thermally steady state at the ambient temperature TU with nominal voltage UN and limiting continuous current on the contact side (see respective
3 technical data) (warm coil). After being switched off for a short time, the relay must reliably pick up again at Uop.

V7-T3-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Electrical Schematics
3
1PDT Terminal Block Relays DPDT Terminal Block Relays
3
3
21
3
24
3
A2 11 3
22

A1 14
A2
11
3
A1
3
12 14
3
12 3
3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
Standard 1PDT Terminal Block Relays Standard DPDT Terminal Block Relays 3
3
3
3
3
3.70 (94.0) 3.70 (94.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3.15 (80.0) 3.15 (80.0)
3
0.24 (6.2)
0.55 (14.0) 3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-11
 3.2 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays

OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relay Contents

3 Description Page
3 Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-4
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays
3 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-13
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-13
3 Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-14
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-14
3 High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-15
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-18
3
3
3
3
3
3 OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays
3 Product Description Application Description Features Standards and Certifications
The XR Series OptoCoupler The XR Series OptoCoupler ● Pluggable relay allows for ● cULus listed
3 Terminal Block Relays can be relays can be used as an input field replacement ● CE
used in all applications and or output interface. They ● Functional plug-in bridges
consist of a pluggable provide the typical reliability
3 miniature OptoCoupler and a of OptoCouplers and are
● LED status indication
basic terminal block. The XR especially suited for high
● DIN rail mount
3 Series uses screw or spring- operating frequencies. ● Only 6.2 mm wide
cage technology, as well as ● Switching capacity up to
3 offers quick system wiring, 24 Vdc/3 A
superior safety features, clear ● IP67-protected optical
3 labeling and a high level of
modularity.
electronics
● Wear-resistant and bounce-
3 free switching
● Insensitive to shock and
3 vibration
● Integrated protection
3 circuit
● Zero voltage switch at AC
3 output

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Product Selection
3
XRU1S24 OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays
Catalog 3
Rated Current Supply Voltage Standard Pack Number
2A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1S120U 3
2A 24 Vdc 10 XRU1S24
3
3
OptoCoupler Replacement Relays
Catalog 3
Rated Current Supply Voltage 1 Standard Pack Number
2A 24 Vdc 18 XRR1S24 3
2A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRR1S120U
3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State) Terminal Block Relays 3
Catalog Number XRU1S24 XRU1S120U
Replacement Relay XRR1S24 XRR1S120U
3
Input voltage 24 Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3
Connection Data
Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5)
Input Data
3
Input voltage 24 Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc
3
Permissible range 0.8–1.2 0.8 –1.1
Typical input current 9 mA 4 mA 3
Switching level 1 signal (“H”) >0.8 >0.8
Switching level 0 signal (“L”) <0.4 <0.25 3
Typical switch-on time 20 μS 6 ms
Typical turn-off time 500 μS 10 ms
3
Input protection Polarity protection diode,
free-wheeling diode
Bridge rectifier
3
Output Data
3
Max. switching voltage 33 Vdc 33 Vdc
Min. switching voltage 3 Vdc 3 Vdc 3
Limiting continuous current 3 A (See derating curve) 3 A (See derating curve)
Max. inrush current 15 A (10 ms) 15 A (10 ms) 3
Output circuit 2-conductor floating 2-conductor floating
Output protection Polarity protection, surge protection Polarity protection, surge protection
3
Voltage drop at maximum
limiting continuous current
< 200 mV < 200 mV
3
General Data
3
Ambient temp range –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °F to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 3
Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94
Mechanical service life 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 3
Note
1 Voltage is the rating at the base. It may not match the voltage on the specific replacement relay.
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-13
 3.2 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays

Derating Curve Dimensions

3 OptoCoupler Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State)

Load Current (A)

3
Terminal Block Relays
2
3
1
3 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
3 Ambient Temperature (°C)

3
Electrical Schematic
3 Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State) 3.70 (94.0)
Terminal Block Relays
3
3
3
3
3 A2 13+ 3.15 (80.0)

3 14 0.24 (6.2)
A1

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
High Current Terminal Block Relay Contents
Description Page
3
Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-4 3
OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-12
High Current Terminal Block Relays 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-16
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-16 3
Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-17
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-17 3
XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-18
3
3
3
3
3
High Current Terminal Block Relays 3
Product Description Application Description Features Standards and Certifications 3
The XR Series Relays include These relays are best suited ● 14 mm wide ● cULus listed
products designed to meet for applications that require ● Pluggable relay allows for ● CE 3
high continuous current and/ higher continuous load field replacement
or long electrical service life currents than miniature
applications. The XR Series relays can carry and switch.
● Convenient plug-in bridge 3
system
Relays are plug-in interfaces They can withstand inrush
that connect to basic terminal currents or brief overloads
● LED status indication 3
blocks that use screw without damage, and allow ● DIN Rail Mount
connection technology. for continuous load currents ● IP67-protected optical 3
Overall width is 14 mm. of up to 10 A. The XR Series electronics
Relay boasts an average
service life of the contacts
● Wear-resistant and bounce- 3
free switching
that is two or three times
the normal life of a less
● Insensitive to shock and 3
vibration
powerful relay, resulting in
service cost savings.
● Integrated protection 3
circuit
● Zero voltage switch at AC 3
output
● Environmentally friendly, 3
cadmium-free contact
material
● Electrical isolation
3
between input and output
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-15
 3.2 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays

Product Selection
3
XRU1H24 High Current Terminal Block Relays
3 Catalog
Rated Current Supply Voltage Standard Pack Number

3 10 A 12 Vdc 10 XRU1H12
10 A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1H120U
3 10 A 24 Vdc 10 XRU1H24
10 A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU1H24U
3
High Current Replacement Relays
3 Catalog
Rated Current Supply Voltage 1 Standard Pack Number
3 10 A 24 Vdc 10 XRR1H24

3 10 A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRR1H24U
10 A 12 Vdc 10 XRR1H12
3 10 A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRR1H120U

3
Technical Data and Specifications
3 High Current Terminal Block Relays (1PDT)
3 Catalog Number XRU1H12 XRU1H24 XRU1H24U XRU1H120U
Replacement Relay XRR1H12 XRR1H24 XRR1H24U XRR1H120U

3 Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc

Connection Data
3 Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5)
Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5)
3 Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions
Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc
3 Permissible range See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10

3 Typical input current 33 mA 18 mA 17.5 mA 4.5 mA (120 Vac)/4.2 mA (110 Vdc)

Typical response time 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms 7 ms
3 Typical release time 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms
Input protection Polarity protection diode, Polarity protection diode, Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier
3 free-wheeling diode free-wheeling diode
Output Data
3 Contact type Single contact, 1PDT Single contact, 1PDT Single contact, 1PDT Single contact, 1PDT
Contact material AgNi AgNi AgNi AgNi
3 Max. switching voltage 250 Vac/Vdc 2 250 Vac/Vdc 2 250 Vac/Vdc 2 250 Vac/Vdc 2
Min. switching voltage 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc
3 Limiting continuous current 10 A 3 10 A 3 10 A 3 10 A 3
Max. inrush current 30 A (300 ms) 30 A (300 ms) 30 A (300 ms) 30 A (300 ms)
3 Min. switching current 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA

3 Min. switching power 1.2 W 1.2 W 1.2 W 1.2 W

Miscellaneous Data
3 Ambient temp range –4 °C to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °C to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °C to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C) –4 °C to +140 °F (–20 °C to +60 °C)
Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor
3 Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94
Mechanical service life 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles
3
Notes
3 1 Voltage is the rating at the base. It may not match the voltage on the specific replacement relay.
2 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules.

Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.

3 3 The current rating for the normally open contact (#14) is 10 A. The current rating for the normally closed contact (#12) is 6 A and can be increased to 10 A by bridging the

two #12 contact connections.

3

V7-T3-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays
3.2
Electrical Schematic
3
High Current Terminal Block Relays
3
3
3
3
A2 11
3
A1 14 3
3
12
3
3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
High Current Terminal Block Relays
3
3
3
3
3
3.70 (94.0)
3
3
3
3
3.15 (80.0)
3
3
0.55 (14.0) 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-17
 3.2 Control Relays and Timers
Terminal Block Relays

XR Series Accessories
3
Product Description Product Selection
3 Power Terminal Block Bridges XR Series Accessories
Standard Catalog
3 Color Pack Number
2-Position Snap-In Jumper
3 Red 10 XRAFBST2RD

3 Blue 10 XRAFBST2BU
Gray 10 XRAFBST2GY

3 80-Position Snap-In Jumper

Red 5 XRAFBST500RD
3 Blue 5 XRAFBST500BU
The XRAPLCESK power Gray 5 XRAFBST500GY
3 terminal block has the same
Power Terminal Block
shape as the relay modules
3 and is used to feed in the The XRAFBST colored,
insulated plug-in bridge
Gray 5 XRAPLCESK
bridging potentials. The End Cover
nominal current is 32 A. system reduces wiring
3 When the total current is less time by up to 70% compared Black 5 XRAATPBK

than or equal to 6 A, supply to conventionally wired

3 can take place directly at the relays. The XRAFBST2,
connecting terminal blocks of 2-position bridges, are Technical Data and Specifications
3 one of the connected relays. suited for bridging a smaller
Power Terminal Block
number of relays and total
currents <6 A. When a circuit
3 End Cover
is supplied from both sides,
Description Specification
Connection Data
the circuit can be opened at
3 any point, allowing all other Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 24–10 (0.2–4)
modules to continue being Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 24–10 (0.2–4)
3 supplied at the same time. Miscellaneous Data
The XRAFBST500 allow up
Max. current 32 A
3 to 80 modules to be bridged
at one time. If bridges with Max. voltage 250 Vac 1
different potentials meet in
3 neighboring modules, the
Note
1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250 V
end cover XRAATPBK (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is
3 should be used. All bridges then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system.
are equipped with a groove
3 for removal with a standard
screwdriver.
The XRAATPBK end cover
3 is required at the start and
stop of a relay strip. It can
3 also be used for visual
separation of groups of
3 relays as well as separating
relays with voltages greater
than 250 V and separating
3 neighboring bridges with
different potentials. It is
3 equipped with pre-scored
break out points at the
3 bridging positions so that
individual bridges can be
passed through as needed.
3 It may also be necessary to
use the end cover between
3 adjacent relays when three
phases (L1, L2, L3) are
3 used on the contact side
of the relay.
3
3

V7-T3-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Programmable Relays Contents
Description Page
3
Programmable Relays 3
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . V7-T3-20
easy802/806 Programmable Relays 3
with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-26
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . V7-T3-30 3
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-33
easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . V7-T3-40 3
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-43 3
3
3
3
3
Product Overview Application Description 3
The easyRelays combine The easy802/806 relays are The easyRelays excel in 3
timers, relays, counters, even more powerful than traditional applications where
special functions, inputs and the easy800 series and multiple relays, timers and
outputs into one compact include an integrated pushbuttons are used.
3
device that is easily SmartWire-DT gateway. Applications span residential,
programmed. The easyRelay Conventional hardwiring commercial and industrial 3
family of products provides an to pushbuttons, selector installations.
exceptional level of flexibility switches, pilot devices and
Typical control
3
together with a substantial contactors can now be
applications are:
savings of commissioning
time and effort.
eliminated, allowing for a
dramatic increase in panel
3
● Lighting controls
wiring productivity. For more
The easyRelays are available information on SmartWire-DT
● Duplex pump controls 3
in more than 35 styles that and how it can increase
● Water fountain controls
support from 12 I/O up to productivity, go to ● Parking garage access 3
a network of up to 320 I/O www.eaton.com/smartwiredt. controls
points, providing the ideal
solution for lighting, energy
● Refrigeration control 3
system
management, industrial
control, irrigation, pump
● Greenhouse temperature 3
control, HVAC and home and ventilation controls
automation. ● Booster pump controls 3
Once easyRelays are See publication no.
installed, changes are AP05013001E for the 3
easily accomplished through easyRelay application guide.
front panel programming, Download from 3
eliminating the need www.eaton.com/easyrelays.
to change wiring and 3
minimizing downtime.
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-19
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays Contents

3 Description Page
3 easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-21
3 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-23
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-24
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-25
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
3 with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-26
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . V7-T3-30
3 MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-33
easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-40
3 easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-43
3
3
3
3 easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays
3 Product Description Standards Catalog Number Selection
Three families make up the ● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987 easy500/700/800
3 easyRelay programmable ● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
relay product line. All models
are available with and without
● EN 55011 EASY512 - AC - R C
3 displays. DIN rail mounted.
● EN 50178
● EN 61131-2
3 easy500—for controlling ● IEC EN 61000-4
Module Type Digital Inputs Display
small applications with up EASY5xx = 500 Series AB = 24 Vac Blank = Display
● IEC 60068-2-6 EASY7xx = 700 Series AC = 110–240 Vac X = No display
3 to 12 input/output signals.
Connectable to Ethernet. ● IEC 60068-2-27 EASY8xx = 800 Series DA = 12 Vdc
DC = 24 Vdc Clock
● UL 508
3 easy700—for controlling C = Clock
medium-sized applications Certifications Blank = No clock
3 with 20 I/O points (expandable
to 40 I/O points). Connectable
● UL
Digital Outputs
to Ethernet and bus systems.
● CSA
3 ● CE
R = Relay
T = Transistor
easy800—for controlling ● CSA Class I, Div. 2,
3 large-scale applications Groups A, B, C, D; Note: Not all combinations are possible. See selection tables.
with 20 points, expandable Temp. Code T3C
to 40 points locally, and
3 expandable using the
● C-Tick
easyNet network up to ● GOST-R
3 320 I/O points. Connectable ● Ukrain-GOST
to Ethernet and bus systems.
3 The easyNet integrated
network provides easy and
3 inexpensive linking of up
to eight easy800 devices Shipping Approvals
3 over a distance of up to ● Bureau Veritas
1000 meters. Each easy800 ● Det Norske Veritas
3 device can run its own ● Germanischer Lloyd
program, or be used as a
distributed input/output
● Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
3 module. Connect up to
eight controllers with up
3 to 40 I/O to obtain 320 I/O.

3
3

V7-T3-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
System Overview
3
easy500/700 Programmable Relays
3
1 3 3
4 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
5
6
7
3
8
3
3
3
3
3
3
11 3
12

10 3
3
Item Description 9

1 easy500 basic devices, standalone

3
2 easy700 basic devices, expandable:
digital inputs/outputs, bus systems
3
11
3 MFD-Titan remote text display
4 Ethernet gateway
3
5 PROFIBUS-DP bus module 10 3
6 AS-Interface bus module
7 CANopen bus module 3
8 DeviceNet bus module
9 Output expansion
3
10, 11 I/O expansions
3
12 Coupling module for the remote connection
of a digital input/output expansion
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-21
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

easy800 Programmable Relay

3
3 1 2

3 3

3
3
3
3
3
13
3
3
3
4
3 5
6
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 10
11

3 9, 12
Item Description
3 1 easy800 basic devices, expandable: 8
digital inputs/outputs and bus systems,
3 easyNet onboard
2 MFD-Titan remote text display
3 3 Ethernet gateway
10
4 PROFIBUS-DP bus module
3 5 AS-Interface bus module

3 6 CANopen bus module 12

7 DeviceNet bus module
3 8 Output expansion
9, 10 I/O expansions
3 11 Coupling module for the remote connection of
a digital input/output expansion
3 12 I/O expansion
13 MFD-Titan multi-function display
3
3

V7-T3-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Product Selection
3
easy500—Display easy500 Programmable Relays (Standalone)
Inputs Outputs Catalog
3
Description 24 Vac 110–240 Vac 12 Vdc 24 Vdc Analog 1 Relay Transistor Number
Display 3
12 I/O, no clock — 8 — — — 4 — EASY512-AC-R
— — — 8 2 4 — EASY512-DC-R
3
12 I/O, clock 8 — — — 2 4 — EASY512-AB-RC
3
— 8 — — — 4 — EASY512-AC-RC
— — 8 — 2 4 — EASY512-DA-RC 3
easy500—No Display — — — 8 2 4 — EASY512-DC-RC
— — — 8 2 — 4 EASY512-DC-TC 3
No Display
12 I/O, clock 8 — — — 2 4 — EASY512-AB-RCX 3
— 8 — — — 4 — EASY512-AC-RCX
— — 8 — 2 4 — EASY512-DA-RCX
3
— — — 8 2 4 — EASY512-DC-RCX
3
— — — 8 2 — 4 EASY512-DC-TCX
3
easy700 Programmable Relays (Expandable and Networkable)
easy700—Display
Inputs Outputs
3
Catalog
Description 24 Vac 110–240 Vac 12 Vdc 24 Vdc Analog 1 Relay Transistor Number
Display
3
18 I/O, clock 12 — — — 4 6 — EASY719-AB-RC 3
— 12 — — — 6 — EASY719-AC-RC
— — 12 — 4 6 — EASY719-DA-RC 3
easy700—No Display — — — 12 4 6 — EASY719-DC-RC
20 I/O, clock — — — 12 4 — 8 EASY721-DC-TC 3
No Display
18 I/O, clock 12 — — — 4 6 — EASY719-AB-RCX
3
— 12 — — — 6 — EASY719-AC-RCX
— — 12 — 4 6 — EASY719-DA-RCX
3
— — — 12 4 6 — EASY719-DC-RCX 3
20 I/O, clock — — — 12 4 — 8 EASY721-DC-TCX
3
easy800 Programmable Relays (Expandable and Networkable)
easy800—Display
Inputs Outputs
3
Catalog
Description 110–240 Vac 24 Vdc Analog 1 Relay Transistor Analog Number
3
Display
18 I/O, clock 12 — — 6 — — EASY819-AC-RC 3
— 12 4 6 — — EASY819-DC-RC
19 I/O, clock — 12 4 6 — 1 EASY820-DC-RC 3
easy800—No Display 20 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 — EASY821-DC-TC
21 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 1 EASY822-DC-TC 3
No Display
18 I/O, clock 12 — — 6 — — EASY819-AC-RCX
3
— 12 4 6 — — EASY819-DC-RCX
3
19 I/O, clock — 12 4 6 — 1 EASY820-DC-RCX
20 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 — EASY821-DC-TCX 3
21 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 1 EASY822-DC-TCX

Note
3
1 Analog inputs optional. Use of analog inputs will result in a decrease in the same number of available digital inputs.
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-23
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

3
easy500 Series
3 Type EASY512-AB… EASY512-AC… EASY512-DA… EASY512-DC-R… EASY512-DC-TC.
Supply voltage 24 Vac 100–240 Vac 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
3 Heat dissipation 5 VA 5 VA 2W 2W 2W
Continuous current outputs 1 8A 8A 8A 8A 0.5 A
3 Short-circuit proof with power factor 1 Line protection B16, 600 A —

3 Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7 Line protection B16, 900 A —
Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
3 Connection cables
Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
3 Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
3 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
Ambient operating temperature –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C
3 Transport and storage temperature –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C

3 Hazardous location CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C

3 easy700 Series
Type EASY719-AB… EASY719-AC… EASY719-DA… EASY719-DC-RC… EASY721-DC-TC.
3 Supply voltage 24 Vac 100–240 Vac 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
Heat dissipation 7 VA 10 VA 3.5 W 3.5 W 3.5 W
3 Continuous current outputs 1 8A 8A 8A 8A 0.5 A
Short-circuit proof with power factor 1 Line protection B16, 600 A Line protection B16, 600 A Line protection B16, 600 A Line protection B16, 600 A —
3 Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7 Line protection B16, 900 A Line protection B16, 900 A Line protection B16, 900 A Line protection B16, 900 A —

3 Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet

Connection cables
3 Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
3 Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
3 Ambient operating temperature –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C
Transport and storage temperature –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C
3 Hazardous location CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C

3
easy800 Series
3 Type EASY819-AC… EASY819-DC-RC… EASY820-DC-RC… EASY821-DC-TC… EASY822-DC-TC.
Supply voltage 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
3 Heat dissipation 10 VA 3.4 W 3.4 W 3.4 W 3.4 W
Continuous current outputs 1 8A 8A 8A 8A 0.5 A
3 Short-circuit proof with power factor 1 Line protection B16, 600 A Line protection B16, 600 A Line protection B16, 600 A Line protection B16, 600 A —

3 Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7 Line protection B16, 900 A Line protection B16, 900 A Line protection B16, 900 A Line protection B16, 900 A —
Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet

3 Connection cables
Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
3 Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
3 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
Ambient operating temperature –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C
3 Transport and storage temperature –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C

3 Hazardous location CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C

Note
3 1 Relay = 8 A (10 A to UL) with resistive load, 3 A with inductive load. Transistor outputs = 0.5 A/24 Vdc, maximum four outputs switchable in parallel.

V7-T3-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
easy500 Series, Drawing Number MD05013001E 3
0.42 (10.8) 1.97 (50.0) 3
easy500
3
3
3.54

1.77
(90.0)
4.02 3
(45.0) (102.0)
4.33
(110.0)
3
0.18 (4.5)
3
(M4) 0.157 Dia.
(3.9) 3
1.87 (47.5)
1.41
2.22 (56.5) (35.8) 3
2.28 (58.0) 2.81 (71.5)
3
easy700 Series, Drawing Number MD05013002E
0.64 (16.3) 2.96 (75.0) 0.64 (16.3)
3
easy700
3

3.54
3
(90.0)
4.02
3
1.77 (102.0)
(45.0) 3
4.33
(110.0)
3
0.18 (4.5)
(M4) 0.157 Dia.
3
(3.9)
1.87 (47.5)
2.22 (56.5) 4.23 (107.5) 3
2.28 (58.0)
3
easy800 Series, Drawing Number MD05013003E 3
0.64 (16.3) 2.96 (75.0) 0.64 (16.3)
easy800
3
3
3.54
(90.0) 3
4.02
1.77
(45.0)
(102.0) 3
4.33
(110.0)
3
0.18 (4.5) 3
1.91 (48.5) 0.157
3
(M4) Dia.
2.78 (70.5) (3.9)
2.83 (72.0) 4.23 (107.5)
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-25
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT Contents

3 Description Page
3 easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . V7-T3-20
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT
3 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-27
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-27
3 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-28
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-29
3 easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . V7-T3-30
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-33
3 easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-40
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
3 and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-43

3
3
3
3 easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT
3 Product Description Standards
SmartWire-DT is a high- The easy802 features a POW In addition to the functionality ● EN 50178
3 performance system that can power feeder for regulating of the easy802, the easy806 ● IEC/EN 60947
be used to quickly and easily power to the device as well also features four fast inputs
connect motor control as the SmartWire-DT devices. (5 kHz). Two of the four
● UL 508
3 components such as relays, A second AUX power feeder inputs can also be configured
contactors, pilot devices, provides the connected as fast outputs (5 kHz) Certifications
3 manual motor protectors, contactors with 24 Vdc. A (transistor 24 Vdc, 0.1 A). ● cULus
soft starters 1 and variable separate 24 Vdc power In addition to the additional ● CE
3 frequency drives 1 as well supply is required to provide inputs/outputs on easy806, ● C-Tick
as digital and analog input/ 24 Vdc power to the easy802 there is a connection option
3 output modules. On the new
easy800 with integrated
or easy806 controllers. The
configuration of the
to the easyNet. Up to eight
EASY806-DC-SWD controllers
SmartWire-DT master, up to SmartWire-DT devices is can be connected via
3 99 SmartWire-DT devices in undertaken at a touch of easyNet, allowing up to
total with up to 166 inputs/ the provided Configuration 1360 inputs/outputs.
3 outputs can be connected button. LEDs provide
via the SmartWire-DT line. feedback on the connecting For more information on
SmartWire-DT and related
3 All required supply voltages, states on the device and
components, see Tab 9 of
including those for bus the SmartWire-DT line. The
this volume or go to
3 devices as well as 24 Vdc for
the contactors, are provided
serial interface serves for
programming as well as for www.eaton.com/smartwiredt.
directly with the flat eight- connection of a remote text
3 pole SmartWire-DT bus line. display, touch panel or for
This reduces wiring effort and connection to the Ethernet.
3 troubleshooting and saves
time and costs.
3
3 Note
1 Soft starters and variable frequency

drives will be available with direct

3 SmartWire-DT connectivity in late 2013.

3
3
3
3

V7-T3-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Product Selection
Control relay for connection of SmartWire-DT and 3
simultaneously for supply of power to the SmartWire-DT
devices, such as switchgear and contactors. 3
EASY802-DC-SWD easy800 with SmartWire-DT 3
Supply
Voltage Description Catalog Number 3
24 Vdc Control relay with EASY802-DC-SWD
SmartWire-DT 3
3
3
EASY806-DC-SWD 24 Vdc Control relay with EASY806-DC-SWD
3
SmartWire-DT, four inputs,
two of which can be used as 3
outputs (transistor 24 Vdc,
0.1 A), easyNet onboard
3
3
3
3
Remote Displays
Both the easy802 and easy806 controllers can be connected to 3
a MFD remote display or a XV touch panel display with Galileo.
3
3
Accessories
3
MFD-80 Accessories—easy800
Description Catalog Number 3
MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated MFD-80
3
3
MFD-CP4 24 Vdc power / communication module MFD-CP4
3
easy802/806 to MFD-CP4 communication
cable, 1.5m
EU4A-RJ45-CAB2 3
easy802/806 to XV HMI communication
cable, 2m
EU4A-RJ45-CAB1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-27
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

3
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT
3 Description Unit Specification
Ambient Climatic Conditions
3 Cold to IEC 60068-2-1, heat to IEC 60068-2-2, damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78;
cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30; temperature change to IEC 68000-2-14
3 Operating ambient temperature °C (°F) –25 ° to +55 ° (–13 ° to +131 °)
Condensation Prevent condensation by means of suitable measures
3 LCD display (reliable legible) °C (°F) 0 ° to +55 ° (32 ° to +131 °)
Storage °C (°F) –40 ° to +70 ° (–40 ° to +158 °)
3 Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC EN 60068-2-30) % 5 to 95
Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795 up to 1080
3 Ambient Mechanical Conditions

3 Protection type EN 50178, IEC 60529, VBG4 IP20

Vibrations (IEC EN 60068-2-6)
3 Constant amplitude: easy800-SWD; 3.5 mm Hz 5–8.4
Constant acceleration: easy800-SWD: 1g Hz 8.4–150
3 Mechanical shock resistance (IEC EN 60068-2-27)
semi-sinusoidal 15g / 11 ms
Shocks 18

3 Drop (IEC EN 60068-2-31) Drop height mm 50

Free fall, packaged (IEC EN 60068-2-32) m 0.3
3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), to IEC EN 61000-4-2
3 Air discharge kV 8
Contact discharge kV 6
3 Electromagnetic fields (RFI), to IEC EN 61000-4-3
0.8–1.0 GHz V/m 10
3 1.4–2.0 GHz V/m 3
2.0–2.7 GHz V/m 1
3 Radio interference suppression EN 55011 Class B
Burst, to IEC EN 61000-4-4
3 Supply cables kV 2
Signal cables kV 2
3 easyNet kV 2
SWD-line kV 2
3 Power pulses (surge), to IEC EN 61000-4-5 (supply cables, symmetrical) kV 1

3 Radiated RFI, to IEC EN 61000-4-6 V 10

Insulation Resistance
3 Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2
3 Clearance in air and creepage distances EN 50178, UL 508, CSA C22.2, No. 142
Insulation resistance EN 50178
3 Terminal Capacity
Solid, minimum to maximum mm2 0.2 to 1.5 (AWG 24–16)
3 Flexible with ferrule, minimum to maximum mm2 0.2 to 1.5 (AWG 24–16)
DC POW Rated Operational Voltage
3 Rated value Ue Vdc, (%) 24 DC (–15/+20)

3 Permissible range 1 Vdc 20.4–28.8

Residual ripple % <5
3 Protection against polarity reversal Yes
Input current
3 At rated operating voltage mA easy802: 500 / easy806: 900
Inrush current and duty factor 12.5 A for 6 ms
3 Voltage dips (IEC EN 61131-2) ms 10

Note
3 1 Use power-feed modules if the cable length of the SWD line causes excessive voltage drop.

V7-T3-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT, continued
Description Unit Specification
3
Heat dissipation
At 24 Vdc W easy802: max. 5 / easy806: max. 6
3
Fuse A >3
3
Potential isolation (easy800-SWD)
To auxiliary 1 Yes 3
To easyNet 1 Yes
To serial interface Yes 3
To easyLink 1 No
To inputs 1 No 3
To outputs 1 No
To SWD 1 No
3
DC AUX Rated Operational Voltage (easy800-SWD)
3
Rated value Ue Vdc, (%) 24 (–15/+20)
Permissible range UAUX Vdc 20.4–28.8 3
Residual ripple % <5
Input current 2 (max.) A 2 (UL) / 3 (CE) 3
Rated operational voltage of the 24 Vdc stations V UAUX –0.3 V
Protection against polarity reversal Yes 3
Short-circuit strength No
Fuse A < 2 (UL) external fuse with FAZ B2
3
Heat dissipation
At 24 Vdc W Normally 1
3
Potential isolation (easy800-SWD)
To POW power supply, inputs and outputs Yes
3
To PC interface (COM), easyNet Yes 3
To SWD Yes

Notes 3
1 If present.
2 If contactors with a higher total power consumption are connected, an EU5C-SWD-PF1 or EU5C-SWD-PF2 power-feed module must be used. 3
3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
easy802 and easy806 Controllers
3
0.30 (7.5)
4.94 (125.5) 3
3
3
4.33
(110.0) 3
4.72
(120.0) 3
5.12
(130.0) 3
3
3
0.18 (4.5) 4.72 (120.0)
1.38 (35.0)
0.30 (7.5) 3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-29
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

easyRelay Expansion Modules Contents

3 Description Page
3 easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . V7-T3-20
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
3 with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-26
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules
3 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-31
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-31
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-32
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-33
3 easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-40
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
3 and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-43

3
3
3
3 easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules
3 Product Description Standards Certifications
Expansion modules are ● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987 ● UL
3 available for increasing the ● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 ● CSA
input/output of the easy700/ ● EN 55011 ● CE
800 and MFD-Titan multi-
3 function displays to 24 inputs
● EN 50178 ● CSA Class I, Div. 2,
and up to 16 outputs. ● EN 61131-2 Groups A, B, C, D;
3 Expansion modules can be ● IEC EN 61000-4 Temp. Code T3C
mounted directly to the ● IEC 60068-2-6
● C-Tick
3 easy700 or easy800 relays ● IEC 60068-2-27
● GOST-R
or up to 98 ft (30m) away ● Ukrain-GOST
● UL 508
3 using coupling module
EASY200-EASY.
3
3 Shipping Approvals
● Bureau Veritas
3 ● Det Norske Veritas
● Germanischer Lloyd
3 ● Lloyd’s Register of Shipping

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Product Selection
3
EASY618_ Digital I/O Expansion Modules
Can be used via easyLink. 3
Outputs Catalog
Supply Voltage Digital Inputs Relay 10 A (UL) Transistor Number 3
100–240 Vac 12 6 — EASY618-AC-RE
24 Vdc 12 6 — EASY618-DC-RE
3
24 Vdc 12 — 8 EASY620-DC-TE 3
24 Vdc 6 4 — EASY410-DC-RE
24 Vdc 6 — 4 EASY410-DC-TE 3
24 Vdc — 2 — EASY202-RE
For distributed connection of a digital input/output expansion at up to 98 ft (30m) distance EASY200-EASY
3
3
Analog I/O Expansion Modules
EASY406_
Can be used via easyLink.
3
Supply
Inputs
Digital/ Can Be Used
Digital Outputs
Analog Catalog
3
Voltage Analog for Digital Relay 10 A (UL) Transistor Outputs Number
24 Vdc 1/2 2 — 2 1 EASY406-DC-ME
3
24 Vdc 1/6 2 — 2 2 EASY411-DC-ME 3
3
Technical Data and Specifications 3
easyRelay I/O Expansion Modules 3
Type EASY202-RE EASY618-AC-RE EASY618-DC-RE EASY620-DC-TE EASY200-EASY
Supply voltage — 100 – 240 Vac 24 Vac 24 Vac — 3
Heat dissipation 1W 10 VA 4W 4W 1W
Continuous current outputs 1 8A 8A 8A 0.5 A —
3
Short-circuit proof with Line protection Line protection Line protection Line protection —
power factor 1 B16, 600 A B16, 600 A B16, 600 A B16, 600 A 3
Short-circuit proof with Line protection Line protection Line protection Line protection —
power factor 0.7…0.7 B16, 900 A B16, 900 A B16, 900 A B16, 900 A 3
Connection cables
Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
3
0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Flexible
3
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4 3
Ambient operating temperature –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C
Transport and storage temperature –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C 3
Certification, standards EN 50178, IEC/EN 60947, UL, CSA
Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-31
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 easy600 Series, Drawing Number MD05013002E

3 easy600
0.64 (16.3) 2.96 (75.0) 0.64 (16.3)

3
3 3.54
(90.0)

3 1.77
4.02
(102.0)
(45.0)
3 4.33
(110.0)

3
3 0.18 (4.5)
0.157
(M4) Dia.
3 1.87 (47.5) (3.9)

2.22 (56.5) 4.23 (107.5)

3 2.28 (58.0)

3
EASY202-RE/EASY200-EASY/EASY205-ASI Series, Drawing Number MD05013012E
3 0.30
(7.5)
3 easy200

3
3 3.54
(90.0)

3 1.77
(45.0)
4.02
(102.0)

3 4.33
(110.0)

3
3 0.18
(4.5) 0.157
(M4) Dia.
(3.9)
3 1.87
(47.5)
0.30
(7.5)
2.22 1.40
3 (56.5) (35.5)
2.28
3 (58.0)

3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays Contents
Description Page
3
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . V7-T3-20 3
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-26 3
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . V7-T3-33
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays 3
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-34
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-35 3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-36
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-37 3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-38
easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-40 3
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-43 3
3
3
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays 3
Product Description Standards Certifications 3
The MFD-Titan multi-function MFD-Titan—for controlling ● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987 ● UL
displays can be used as small applications that require ● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 ● CSA 3
remote text displays for graphic visualization and for ● EN 55011 ● CE
easy500, easy700, easy800 large-scale applications with
and easy802/806 relays or 20 points, expandable to 40
● EN 50178 ● CSA Class I, Div. 2, 3
can be configured as points locally, and expandable ● EN 61131-2 Groups A, B, C, D;
standalone or networked using the easyNet network ● IEC EN 61000-4 Temp. Code T3C 3
multi-function displays. As a up to 320 I/O points. ● IEC 60068-2-6
● C-Tick
multi-function display, the
The MFD-Titan display can be ● IEC 60068-2-27
● GOST-R 3
MFD-Titan combines the ● Ukrain-GOST
linked to the easy500/700/ ● UL 508
control functions of an
easy800 with a door-mounted 800 models to provide an 3
graphics display. enhanced text based operator
interface. 3
MFD-Titan multi-function
The easyNet integrated
display is comprised of three
network provides easy and
Shipping Approvals 3
parts: display, controller and ● Bureau Veritas
I/O modules. Match each inexpensive linking of up to
piece to the needs of your eight MFD-Titan devices over ● Det Norske Veritas 3
application. If you need to a distance of up to 1000 ● Germanischer Lloyd
both monitor and modify meters. Each MFD-Titan ● Lloyd’s Register of Shipping 3
parameters within your device can run its program,
application, choose the MFD- or be used as a distributed
input/output module. Connect
3
80-B display. The
up to eight controllers with up
preprogrammed and user
programmable buttons give to 40 I/O to obtain 320 I/O. 3
you the capability to make
small changes to the way your 3
application is running, start or
stop a process, or change 3
your program completely.
Select a controller with or 3
without easyNet support, and
with AC or DC power. Finally,
add the MFD I/O module that
3
best suits your application.
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-33
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

System Overview
3
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Display
3
3 1

3 2

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3 5
6

3
3
3
3
3
3
9
3 11

3 8, 10

3 7

3 Item Description
1 MFD-Titan, consisting of:
3 display/operating unit, power supply unit, 9
CPU module, I/O module
3 2 Ethernet gateway
3 PROFIBUS-DP bus module 10
3 4 AS-Interface bus module

3 5 CANopen bus module

6 DeviceNet bus module
3 7 Output expansion
8, 9, 10 I/O expansions
3 11 Coupling module for the remote connection
of a digital input/output expansion
3

V7-T3-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Product Selection
3
MFD-Titan Display/Operator Units
MFD-80-B
Monochrome display 132 x 64 pixels with switchable backlight and 3
removable front frame.
Eaton Custom Catalog
3
Description Keypad Logo Engraving Number
MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated — — — MFD-80-X
3
MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated — ■ — MFD-80
■
3
MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated — — MFD-80-ETCH 1
MFD display with keypad 2 ■ — — MFD-80-B-X 3
MFD display with keypad 2 ■ ■ — MFD-80-B
MFD display with keypad 2 — — ■ MFD-80-B-ETCH 1 3
3
MFD-CP4 MFD-Titan Text/Graphics Display Power Module
For use with MFD-Titan displays for use as remote text/graphics display. 3
Supply Catalog
Voltage Description Number 3
100–240 Vac AC power supply / communication module (no cable) MFD-AC-CP4
AC module for easy500/700 relays and cable MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 MFD-AC-CP4-500
3
AC module for easy800 relays and cable MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 MFD-AC-CP4-800 3
24 Vdc DC power supply / communication module (no cable) MFD-CP4
DC module for easy500/700 relays and cable MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 MFD-CP4-500 3
DC module for easy800 relays and cable MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 MFD-CP4-800
3
MFD-CP MFD-Titan Controller Modules 3
For use with MFD-Titan display/operator units.
Add MFD-Titan I/O modules as needed. 3
Supply Catalog
Voltage Description Number 3
100–240 Vac Program and screen memory MFD-AC-CP8-ME
Program and screen memory, with easyNet MFD-AC-CP8-NT
3
24 Vdc Program and screen memory MFD-CP8-ME
3
Program and screen memory, with easyNet MFD-CP8-NT
Double program and screen memory (as MFD-CP8) MFD-CP10-ME 3
Double program and screen memory (as MFD-CP8), with easyNet MFD-CP10-NT

Notes
3
1 To order an MFD display with custom engraving, a marking file with the required text and/or graphics must be created

as a Labeleditor ZIP file. The ZIP file has to be sent to the Eaton factory, and the name of the file must be referenced 3
in the order notes section. To download the Labeleditor configuration software, please visit www.eaton.com/software.
2 To obtain a NEMA 4X indoor rating on MFD displays with keypads, use with a protective membrane cover MFD-XM-80.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-35
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

MFD-R16 MFD-Titan I/O Modules

3 For use with MFD-Titan controller modules.
Inputs Outputs
3 Supply
Voltage Description Digital Analog 1 Relay Transistor Analog
Catalog
Number

3 100–240 Vac 16 I/O 12 — 4 — — MFD-AC-R16

24 Vdc 12 4 4 — — MFD-R16
3 12 4 — 4 — MFD-T16
24 Vdc 17 I/O 12 4 4 — 1 MFD-RA17
3 12 4 — 4 1 MFD-TA17

3
MFD-Titan I/O Modules with Temperature Detection
3 MFD-TP_
For use with MFD-CP8-_ 2 and MFD-CP10-_ MFD-Titan controller modules.
Inputs Outputs
3 Supply Can Be Used Relay Catalog
Voltage Digital For Analog Pt100 10 A (UL) Transistor Analog Temperature Ranges Number
3 24 Vdc 6 2 2 — 4 — –40 ° to +90 °C/0 ° to +250 °C/0 ° to +400 °C MFD-TP12-PT-A

3 6 2 2 — 4 — –200 ° to +200 °C/0 ° to +850 °C MFD-TP12-PT-B

6 2 — — 4 — –40 ° to +90 °C/0 ° to +250 °C MFD-TP12-NI-A
3 6 2 2 — 4 1 –40 ° to +90 °C/0 ° to +250 °C/0 ° to +400 °C MFD-TAP13-PT-A
6 2 2 — 4 1 –200 ° to +200 °C/0 ° to +850 °C MFD-TAP13-PT-B
3 6 2 — — 4 1 –40 ° to +90 °C/0 ° to +250 °C MFD-TAP13-NI-A

3
Accessories
3
Miscellaneous Parts
3 Description Catalog Number

3 MFD-Titan display protective membrane cover MFD-XM-80

MFD-Titan display protective plastic cover MFD-XS-80

3 MFD-Titan display DIN rail mount kit MFD-TS-144

Notes
3 1 Analog inputs optional. Use of analog inputs will result in a decrease in the same number of available digital inputs
2 Version 8 and higher MFD-CP8_ controllers are compatible with the temperature detection modules.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Technical Data and Specifications
3
MFD-80, MFD-CP4, MFD-CP8
Type MFD-80… MFD-CP4/CP8 3
Connection cables
Solid — 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
3
Flexible — 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 3
Degree of protection IP65 IP20
RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 3
Ambient operating temperature Clearly legible at –5 °C to +50 °C –25 °C to +55 °C
Transport and storage temperature –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C
3
Hazardous location CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C
3
MFD-Titan I/O Modules 3
Type MFD-AC-R16 MFD-R16 MFD-RA17 MFD-T16 MFD-TA17
Supply voltage Supply via Supply via Supply via Supply via Supply via 3
MFD-CP8 module MFD-CP8 module MFD-CP8 module MFD-CP8 module MFD-CP8 module
Heat dissipation 0.5 W 0.5 W 0.5 W 0.5 W 0.5 W 3
Continuous current outputs 1 8A 8A 8A 0.5 A 0.5 A
Short-circuit proof with Line protection Line protection Line protection — — 3
power factor 1 B16, 600 A B16, 600 A B16, 600 A
Short-circuit proof with Line protection Line protection Line protection — — 3
power factor 0.7…0.7 B16, 600 A B16, 600 A B16, 600 A
Connection cables 3
Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
3
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
3
RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4
Ambient operating temperature –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C 3
Transport and storage temperature –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C
Mounting Snap fitted to Snap fitted to Snap fitted to Snap fitted to Snap fitted to 3
MFD-CP8 module MFD-CP8 module MFD-CP8 module MFD-CP8 module MFD-CP8 module
3
MFD-CP4 and CP8 Communication Modules
Type MFD-80… MFD-CP4-… MFD-CP8… MFD-AC-CP8… 3
Supply voltage Supply from -CP 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 100–240 Vac
Heat dissipation 3W 1.5 W 3W 8 VA
3
Mounting Front mounting in 2 x 22.5 mm
Standard drill holes
Snap fitted to MFD-80 Snap fitted to MFD-80 or on 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with
ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
3
Note
1 Relay = 8 A with resistive load, 3 A with inductive load.
3
Transistor outputs = 0.5 A/24 Vdc, maximum four outputs switchable in parallel.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-37
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 MFD-80 Series, Drawing Number MD05013005E

3 MFD-80
0.89
(22.5) MFD-80

3 0.67
(17.0) 0.88 + 0.02
(22.3) + 0.4
3
1.26
3 (32.0)
1.18
(30.0)
3
3.41
(86.5)
3 MFD-CP…

3
1.18 ± 0.01 0.79
(30.0) ± 0.2 (20.0)
3 1.11 1.11 0.54
1.18
(30.0)
(28.3) (28.3) (13.7)
3 2.44 Template for Holes, Scale 1:1
(62.0)
3 3.41
(86.5)
3
MFD-CP4, MFD-80 and MFD-CP4 Series Combined, Drawing Number MD013013E
3 -0.24
1-6
(0.04)
3 MFD-80
MFD-CP4

3 0.81 1.70
(20.5) (43.2) MFD-CP4
3
3 MFD-CP4

3
2.28
3 (58.0)

3
3 0.89
(22.5)
0.89
(22.5)
1.43
(36.2)

3 1.08
(27.5)
1.18
(30.0)
2.95
3 (75.0)

3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-38 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
MFD-CP8 Series, Drawing Number MD05013006E
MFD-CP8
3
0.64
(16.3)
2.95
(75.0)
0.640
(16.3)
3
3
3
3
3.54
(90.0) 3
3
3
0.18
1.18 ± 0.01 (4.5)
1.16
3
(30.0 ± 0.2)
(29.5)
1.53
(38.8)
1.53
(38.8)
3
4.23
(107.5) 3
3
MFD-R/MFD-T I/O Module, Drawing Number MD05013007E
MFD-R and MFD-T I/O 3
3
3
3.54
(90.0) 3
3
0.75 3
(19.0) 0.98
3.47
(88.1)
(25.0) 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-39
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

easyRelay Communication Modules Contents

3 Description Page
3 easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . V7-T3-20
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
3 with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-26
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . V7-T3-33
3 MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-33
easyRelay Communication Modules
3 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-41
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-41
3 easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories
and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-43
3
3
3
3
3 easyRelay
Communication Modules
3
Product Description Product Selection
3 Four network modules are The Ethernet gateway connects devices provided with an RS-232 serial
available for easily connecting interface with the Ethernet network. This gateway can be used with easy500
3 to world-standard networks. as well as easy700/800 relays and MFD-Titan displays.
The network modules can be
3 used with the easy700/800 EASY209-SE Ethernet Gateway Module
programmable relays and Catalog
MFD-Titan multi-function
3 displays.
Description Number
Ethernet gateway Serial interface easyRelay or MFD-…CP8/CP10_ to EASY209-SE 1
3 Available communication Ethernet, for connecting to easyOPC server,
easySoft or easyCom
modules support:
3 ● DeviceNet
● PROFIBUS-DP
3 ● AS-Interface EASY204-DP Network Interface Modules
● CANopen Catalog
3 Description Number
All modules operate
DeviceNet interface module Addresses available 0 to 63 EASY222-DN
3 exclusively as nodes on
the given network. PROFIBUS-DP interface module Device addresses available 1 to 126 EASY204-DP
AS-Interface interface module with Device: 4 inputs, 4 outputs, 4 parameter bits EASY205-ASI
3 4 in and 4 out Addresses available 0 to 31

3 CANopen interface module Addresses available 1 to 127 EASY221-CO

3
Note
3 1 To set up the Ethernet gateway, download the EASY209-SE configuration software at www.eaton.com/easyrelays.

3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-40 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Technical Data and Specifications
3
easy700/800/MFD Communication Interface Modules
EASY204-DP, EASY205-ASI, EASY221-CO, EASY222-DN, EASY209-SE 1 3
Description Specification
Supply voltage 24 Vdc 3
Heat dissipation 2 1W
Connection cables
3
0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Solid
3
Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Degree of protection IP20 3
RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4
Ambient operating temperature –25 °C to +55 °C 3
Transport and storage temperature –40 °C to +70 °C
Certification, standards EN 50178, IEC/EN 60947, UL, CSA
3
Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet
3
Notes
1 EASY209-SE is also compatible with easy500 programmable relays. 3
2 EASY204-DP dissipates 2 W.

3
3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
EASY202-RE/EASY200-EASY/EASY205-ASI/ EASY221-CO/EASY222-DN Series, 3
EASY209-SE Series, Drawing Number MD05013012E Drawing Number MD05013010E
EASY202-RE 0.30
EASY221-CO
0.30 3
EASY200-EASY (7.5) 0.157 (7.5)
(M4) Dia.
EASY205-ASI EASY222-DN (3.9)
3
3
3.54
3.54
(90.0) (90.0) 3
4.02
1.77
(45.0) (102.0)
1.77
(45.0)
4.02
(102.0)
3
4.33
(110.0)
4.33
(110.0)
3
3
0.18
(4.5) 0.157
0.18
(4.5)
3
(M4) Dia.
1.87 (3.9) 0.30 1.87 0.30
(47.5) (7.5) (47.5) (7.5) 3
2.22 1.40 2.22 1.40
(56.5) (35.5) (56.5) (35.5) 3
2.28 2.64
(67.0)
(58.0) 3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-41
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

EASY204-DP Series,
3 Drawing Number MD05013011E

3 0.30
(7.5)
EASY204-DP
3
3
3.54
3 (90.0)
4.02
1.77
(102.0)
3 (45.0)
4.33
(110.0)
3
3
0.18
3 (4.5)
(M4)
0.157
Dia.
1.87 (3.9) 0.30
(7.5)
3 (47.5)
2.22
1.40
(35.5)
(56.5)
3 2.44
(62.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software Contents
Description Page
3
easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . V7-T3-20 3
easy802/806 Programmable Relays
with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-26 3
easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . V7-T3-30
MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-33 3
easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-40
easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories 3
and Software
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-44 3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-46
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-46 3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-47
3
3
3
easyRelay Power 3
Supplies, Accessories
and Software 3
Product Description Product Selection 3
Power Supplies—12 Vdc Power supply units are Fast diagnosis of the voltage The primary switched-mode
and 24 Vdc power supplies primary switched-mode
power supplies that are
output: continuous light on
the LED—fault-free
power supply units can be
used everywhere:
3
for applications where only
optimally suited for the operation; flashing on the
100–240 Vac is available.
easyRelay and easySafety LED—short circuit or
● Safety extra low voltage 3
Accessories—Memory product series in terms of overload on voltage output. (SELV to EN 60 950)
modules, cables and other functions and design. The ● Radio interference Class B 3
components to complete new and high-performance
● Suitable for worldwide to EN 55 011 and EN 55 022
use due to wide range
your automation solutions. power supply units support
input from 85 V to 264 Vac,
for use in industrial and
public networks
3
Software—The easySoft safe operation in plants and
50/60 Hz
software is used to program machines. They are simple
and flexible in handling. ● Output voltages can be
3
all of the easyRelays and connected in parallel to
MFD-Titan displays. The increase power output or 3
Windows®-based software for redundant operation to
provides straightforward
circuit diagram input and
achieve greater system 3
availability
editing and the diagrams can
be displayed in the format
● Compliance with 3
desired. When easy800 international standards and
and MFD-Titan controllers are approvals 3
connected using easyNet,
all connected devices can
be accessed and their EASY…-POW Power Supply Units 3
programs loaded from a Rated input voltage 100–240 Vac, single-phase.
single controller. Input Voltage Rated Output Output Voltage Rated Output Rated Output 3
Range Voltage Setting Range Power Current Catalog Number
easySoft includes an
100–240 Vac 24 Vdc/12 Vdc — 8W 0.35 A/20 mA EASY200-POW 3
integrated offline simulation
tool that allows users to 24 Vdc — 30 W 1.25 A EASY400-POW
test a circuit diagram 24 Vdc — 60 W 2.5 A EASY500-POW
3
before commissioning.
24 Vdc — 100 W 4.2 A EASY600-POW 3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-43
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

Bluetooth Adapter
3 Conveniently commission and service machines and other equipment remotely.
3 ● Simple communication
with easy800 or MFD-Titan
● An 8-digit PIN security
code prevents
● Simple recognition in
Windows 7
● Has all necessary radio
type approvals for USA,
from outside loud and/or unauthorized remote Full online functionality Canada and Europe
3 dangerous areas access
●

with easySoft-Pro
V6.91or higher
3
EASY800-BLT-ADP Bluetooth Adapter
3 Description Catalog Number
easy800/MFD Bluetooth adapter EASY800-BLT-ADP
3 The Blue tooth adapter provides wireless connectivity to easySoft-Pro for easy programming
download and upload. Use it with the easyRemote Display Android App for simple and fast access
3 to your easy800 relays up to a distance of 10 meters.

3
3
Accessories
3
easySoft Programming Software
3 Description Catalog Number
Programming software for easy500/700 EASY-SOFT-BASIC
3 Programming software for easy800, easy 802/806 and MFD-Titan EASY-SOFT-PRO
includes SWD-Assist for configuration of the SmartWire-DT network
3
3
3
3
EASY-USB-CAB Programming Cables
3 Description Catalog Number

3 easy500/700 to PC programming cable—USB EASY-USB-CAB

easy500/700 to PC programming cable—RS-232 EASY-PC-CAB

3 easy800/MFD to PC programming cable—RS-232 EASY800-PC-CAB

easy800/MFD to PC programming cable—USB EASY800-USB-CAB
3 easy802/806 to PC programming cable—USB, 2m EU4A-RJ45-USB-CAB1

3
MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 Cables and Connectors
3 Description Catalog Number
easy500/700 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 5m MFD-CP4-500-CAB5
3 easy800 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 5m MFD-CP4-800-CAB5

3 easy800 to MFD-CP8 communication cable, 2m MFD-800-CAB

easy800 to MFD-CP8 communication cable, 5m MFD-800-CAB5

3 easy800 modem, printer, programming cable EASY800-MO-CAB

EASY800-MO-CAB easy802/806 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 1.5m EU4A-RJ45-CAB2
3 easy802/806 to XV HMI communication cable, 2m EU4A-RJ45-CAB1
easy800/MFD easyNet cable, 0.3m networking cable EASY-NT-30
3 easy800/MFD easyNet cable, 0.8m networking cable EASY-NT-80

3 easy800/MFD easyNet cable, 1.5m networking cable EASY-NT-150

easy800/MFD easyNet cable (cable only, no connectors, see EASY-NT-RJ45), 100m EASY-NT-CAB
3 RJ45 network connectors for easyNet cable (EASY-NT-CAB), 10/pack EASY-NT-RJ45
easy800/MFD network termination resistor, 2/pack EASY-NT-R
3

V7-T3-44 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
EASY-M-32K Memory Storage Modules
Description Catalog Number
3
easy500/700 32K memory storage module EASY-M-32K
3
EASY-M-256K easy800/MFD 256K memory storage module EASY-M-256K
easy800/MFD 512K memory storage module EASY-M-512K 3
3
3
3
Miscellaneous Parts
3
Panel Window
Description Catalog Number
3
easy500 panel window SKF-FF4
easy700/800 panel window SKF-FF6 3
easy500/700/800 panel window mounting kit to front mount units SKF-HA
Mounting Kit High current input adapter, six-channel EASY256-HCI
3
Base to expander, interface connector EASY-LINK-DS
3
easy500 relay simulator EASY412-DC-SIM-NA
Mounting feet, 9/pack ZB4-101-GF1 3
Grounding kit ZB4-102-KS1
3
Simulator
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-45
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

3 easyRelay Power Supplies

3 Type EASY200-POW EASY400-POW

Supply voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac
3 Maximum range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac
Output voltage 24 Vdc (±3%) 24 Vdc (±3%)
3 Output current (rated value) 0.25 A 1.25 A

3 Overcurrent limitation form 0.3 A 1.4 A

Short-circuit proof (secondary) Yes Yes
3 Overload proof Yes Yes
Potential isolation (prim/sec.) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805)
3 Others Additional output voltage 12 DC, 20 mA Additional output voltage 12 DC, 20 mA
Connection cables
3
Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12)

3 Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)

Degree of protection IP20 IP20
3 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4
Ambient operating temperature –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C
3 Transport and storage temperature –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C

3 Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet

3
Wiring Diagram
3 EASY256-HCI

3 L
N

3 >1A

S.. S..
3
3 N N 1 2
L N N I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 .....
3
115/230 Vh Input 115/230 Vh
3
3 EASY5..-AC-..
EASY7..-AC-..
3 4 5 6

3 EASY256-HCI

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-46 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays
3.3
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
EASY200-POW/EASY256-HCI and EASY400-POW Series, Drawing Number MD05013004E 3
EASY200-POW
EASY400-POW EASY256-HCI 3
0.42
(10.8)
1.97
(50.0)
0.30
(7.5)
3
3
3
3.54 3.54
(90.0) (90.0) 3
1.77 4.02 4.02
(45.0) (102.0) (102.0) 3
4.33
(110.0)
4.33
(110.0)
3
3
0.18
(4.5) 3
0.157
1.87 1.41 (M4) Dia. 0.30
(47.5) (35.8)
(3.9)
(7.5) 3
2.22 2.81 1.40
(56.5) (71.5) (35.5) 3
MFD-XS-80 and MFD-XM-80 Series, Drawing Number MD05013009E
3
MFD-XS-80 MFD-XM-80 3
3
3
3.48
3.74
(95.0)
(88.5) 3
3
3
3.41
(86.5)
0.98
(25.0)
3.48
(88.5)
0.89
(22.5)
3
3
SKF-FF4 and SKF-FF6 Series, Drawing Number MD05013014E
SKF-FF4 0.63 SKF-FF6 0.63
3
(16.0) (16.0)
3
3
2.99 2.99
(76.0) (76.0) 3
3
3.70 0.98 5.12 0.98
3
(94.0) (25.0) (130.0) (25.0)
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-47
 3.3 Control Relays and Timers
Programmable Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3
SKF-HA Series, Drawing Number MD05013015E
3 SKF-HA 0.43
(11.0)
3
3
3 1.89 2.60
(48.0) (66.0)
3
3
3 3.23
(82.0)
3
ZB4-101-GF1 Mounting Feet
3 Fitting on 35 mm Top-Hat Rail Fitting on Mounting Plate (Horizontal)

3 * *
ZB4-101-GF1

3
3
3
3
* *
3 * 3 mounting feet are sufficient

3
ZB4-102-KS1 Series—
3 Grounding the Screen for Top-Hat Rail EASY412-DC-SIM-NA Series

3 Connect Outputs
Connection
3 Cable
Digital Inputs

3
3 DEL ALT

3
ESC OK

3
ZB4-102-KS1 Series—
3 Grounding the Screen for Mounting Plate

3
3
3 Power Supply Unit

3
3

V7-T3-48 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
General Purpose Plug-In Relay Contents
Description Page
3
D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53 3
D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-57
D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-67 3
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-76
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-80 3
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-89
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-103 3
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-108
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-112
3
3
3
3
3
Product Selection Guide 3
General Purpose Relay Selection Characteristics 3
● Current rating: 1 A–30 A ● Specifications: CSA, CE,
● Contact arrangement: IEC, NEMA, UL, etc. 3
SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT, ● Other: physical
etc. dimensions, maximum 3
● Coil voltage: 6 V–240 Vac/ voltage, mechanical/
electrical life, etc.
6 V–110 Vdc 3
● Mounting options: socket,
flange, DIN rail, panel 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-49
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

General Purpose Plug-In Relays

3 Relay Series D1RR/D1RF D2RR/D2RF D3RR/D3RF

3
3
3
3
3
3 Approvals

3
3 Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket. Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket. Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket.

Features
3 Polycarbonate cover Polycarbonate cover Polycarbonate cover
Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
3 Panel and DIN mounting Panel, DIN and flange mounting Panel and DIN mounting
Latching
3
Contact Data

3 Configuration SPDT DPDT 4PDT DPDT 3PDT

Max. allowable load 15 A 12 A 6A 10 A 10 A 10 A
3 Material Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy
Dielectric strength 1500 V 1500 V 1500 V
3 between poles
Coil Data
3 AC 6 to 240 Vac 6 to 240 Vac 6 to 240 Vac

3 DC 6 to 110 Vdc 6 to 110 Vdc 6 to 110 Vdc

Power
3 VA (Vac) 0.9 VA 1.2 VA 3 VA 1.4 W (D3RR and D3RF)
Watts (Vdc) 0.7 W 0.9 W —
3 General Data
Ambient temperature
3 Storage –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C) –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C) –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)

3 Operational –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C) –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C) –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
Response time 20 milliseconds 20 milliseconds 20 milliseconds
3 Life
Mechanical operations 10 million 10 million 5 million (D3RR and D3RF)
3 Electrical operations 100,000 200,000 100,000
Page Numbers V7-T3-53 to V7-T3-56 V7-T3-57 to V7-T3-66 V7-T3-67 to V7-T3-75
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-50 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
General Purpose Plug-In Relays, continued
Relay Series D4 D5RR/D5RF D7PR/D7PF
3
3
3
3
3
Approvals
3
3
Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket. Note: UL when used with the appropriate socket.

Features 3
Polycarbonate cover Polycarbonate cover Polycarbonate cover
Indicator lamp available Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Indicator lamp and pushbutton available
3
Panel and DIN mounting Panel, DIN and flange mounting Panel and DIN mounting
3
Socket has built-in hold-down spring
Contact Data 3
Configuration SPDT DPDT DPDT 3PDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT
Max. allowable load 10 A at 250 Vac 5 A at 240 Vac 10 A 10 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 3
Material AgCdO Silver alloy Silver alloy
Dielectric strength 5000 V 1500 V 1500 V 2500 V 2500 V
3
Coil Data 3
AC 6 to 240 Vac 6 to 240 Vac 6 to 240 Vac
DC 6 to 110 Vdc 6 to 110 Vdc 6 to 110 Vdc 3
Power
VA (Vac) 0.9 VA 3 VA 1.2 VA 1.5 VA 1.5 VA
3
Watts (Vdc) 0.5 W 1.4 W 0.9 W 1.4 W 1.5 W
3
General Data
Ambient temperature 3
Storage –40 °F to +158 °F (–40 °C to +70 °C) –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C) –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
Operational –40 °F to +158 °F (–40 °C to +70 °C) –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C) –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C) 3
Response time 15 milliseconds 20 milliseconds 20 milliseconds (30 milliseconds for latching)
Life
3
Mechanical operations 10 million 5 million 10 million
3
Electrical operations 100,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 200,000
Page Numbers V7-T3-76 to V7-T3-79 V7-T3-80 to V7-T3-88 V7-T3-89 to V7-T3-102 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-51
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

General Purpose Plug-In Relays, continued

3 Relay Series D8 D9

3
3
3
3
Approvals
3
3
Features
3 Dust cover Dust cover
Panel, DIN and flange mounting Pushbutton available
3 Quick-connect and screw terminals Panel mounting
Screw terminals
3 Contact Data

3 Configuration 4PST
SPST-NO DPST-NO NO NC
3 Max. allowable load 30 A at 25 A at 25 A at 8 A at
220 Vac 220 Vac 220 Vac 220 Vac
3 Material AgCdO AgCdO
Dielectric strength 4000 V 4000 V
3 Coil Data

3 AC 6 to 240 Vac 24 to 240 Vac

DC 12 to 24 Vdc 12 to 110 Vdc
3 Power
VA (Vac) 2.5 VA 2.6 VA
3 Watts (Vdc) 1.9 W 2.0 W
General Data
3 Ambient temperature

3 Storage –4 °F to +185 °F (–20 °C to +85 °C) –13 °F to +140 °F (–25 °C to +60 °C)
Operational –4 °F to +131 °F (–20 °C to +55 °C) –13 °F to +140 °F (–25 °C to +60 °C)
3 Response time 30 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Life
3 Mechanical operations 5 million 1 million
Electrical operations 100,000 100,000
3 Page Numbers V7-T3-103 to V7-T3-107 V7-T3-108 to V7-T3-111

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-52 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
D1 Series Relay Contents
Description Page
3
D1RR/D1RF Series 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-54
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-54 3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-55
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-56 3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-56
D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-57 3
D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-67
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-76
3
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-80
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-89
3
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-103 3
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-108
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-112 3
3
D1RR/D1RF Series 3
Product Description Features Standards and Certifications 3
The D1 Series of relay
provides a compact single- D1RR 3
pole relay capable of handling ● Compact relay capable of
15 A. Multiple feature and breaking relatively large
voltage options allow for the load currents
When used with 3
accompanying Eaton
perfect fit for any application. ● Panel and DIN rail UL Listed
screw terminal socket.
mounting 3
Catalog Number Selection 3
D1RF
● The contact operation D1RF/D1RR Series
can be easily checked by 3
Push-to-Test button
● Flag indicator shows relay
D1RF 1 A 3
status in manual or
powered condition Family Type Coil Voltage 3
● LED status lamp shows D1RF = Full-featured style 1 A = 120 Vac
coil ON or OFF status—
ideal for use in low light
D1RR = Plain cover style A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
3
R1 = 12 Vdc
applications Contact Configuration
● Push-to-Test button allows 1 = SPDT
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
3
for manual operation of W1 = 48 Vdc
relay without the need for 3
coil power Note
● Lock-down door holds 1 Full-featured, LED test button, flag
3
pushbutton and contacts in indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip
the operate position when cover, ID tag. 3
activated
● Finger-grip cover allows 3
operator to remove relays
from sockets easily 3
● ID tag/write label to
identify relays in multiple- 3
relay circuits
Bipolar LED allows for
●

reverse polarity
3
applications
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-53
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Product Selection
3
D1RR/D1RF Relay/Socket Quick Reference
3 Relay Module ID
Type Socket Clip Type Tag Jumper
3 D1RR1 D1RAA PMC-1781 B — —
D1RF1 D1RAA PMC-1781 B — —
3
3 D1RF Series Relay D1RR/D1RF Series

3 Coil
Voltage
Contact
Configuration
Coil Resistance
(Ohms)
Catalog
Number
Full Featured
3
12 Vdc SPDT 188 D1RF1R1

3 24 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 180 D1RF1T

24 Vdc SPDT 750 D1RF1T1
3 110 Vdc SPDT 13,800 D1RF1A1
120 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 4430 D1RF1A
3 240 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 15,720 D1RF1B

3 Plain Cover
12 Vdc SPDT 188 D1RR1R1
3 24 Vdc SPDT 750 D1RR1T1
48 Vdc SPDT 2600 D1RR1W1
3 110 Vdc SPDT 13,800 D1RR1A1
120 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 4430 D1RR1A
3 240 Vac SPDT 15,270 D1RR1B

3
3
Accessories
3 D1RR/D1RF Sockets and Accessories

3 Type
Module
Size
Nominal Voltage
(Max. for Sockets)
Nominal
Current Mounting Style Wire Size
Wire
Connection
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number
12 /14 (2) AWG, 4 /2.5 (2) mm2 D1RAA 1
3 Socket B 300 20 Panel/DIN rail Screw clamping 10
Flange mount adapter — — — Flange — — 25 PFC-D11
3 Metal spring clip — — — — — — 25 PMC-1781
Protection diode B 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BD250
3 LED indicator B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG24
B 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG240
3 MOV suppressor B 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV120

3 B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV24
B 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV240
3 Plastic DIN rail end stop — — — — — — 25 PFP-P

Note
3 1 Protection Category (Finger Safe), EN 60529: IP20.

3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-54 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D1RF/D1RR Relay Specifications
Description D1RR D1RF 3
Contact Characteristics
Contact rating 15 A 15 A
3
Terminal style Plug-in Plug-in
Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy
3
Maximum switching voltage 300 V 300 V 3
Switching current at voltage—resistive 20 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 20 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
20 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 20 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 3
20 A at 28 Vdc 20 A at 28 Vdc
Switching current at voltage 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac
3
1 hp at 277 Vac 1 hp at 277 Vac
3
Pilot duty B300 B300
Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W) 3
Coil Characteristics
Operating range 3
% of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 85 to 110%
% of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110%
3
Average consumption 0.9 VA 0.9 VA 3
0.7 W 0.7 W
Dropout voltage threshold 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 3
10% (DC) 10% (DC)
Performance 3
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 100,000 operations 100,000 operations
Mechanical life operations unpowered 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations
3
Response time 20 ms 20 ms 3
Dielectric strength
Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 2500 V (rms) 2500 V (rms) 3
Between poles Vac (rms) 1500 V (rms) 1500 V (rms)
Environment 3
Ambient air temperature around the device
Storage –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55ºC) –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
3
Operation –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85ºC) –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
3
Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n 3
Degree of protection IP40 IP40
Features 3
Cover options Plain cover Full featured
Features Mechanical flag indicator (optional LED) Locking pushbutton/
3
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/ 3
Mechanical flag indicator
Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA 3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-55
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Wiring Diagram
3
D1RF/D1RR
3 12 1

3
14 5
3
3
11 9
3
3 A1 A2 13 14

3
IEC NEMA

3
3 Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D1RF/D1RR
3 0.10 0.53 0.53
(2.1) (14.0) (14.0)
3
3 1.10 1.10
(27.9) (27.9)
3
3
1.60 1.40
3 (40.6) (35.5)

3 D1RAA
1.18
3 (30.0)
0.74 0.67
3 (19.0) (17.0) 14 5

3 12 1

3 1
N.C.
1
N.C.
5 5
0.16 N.O. N.O.
3 3.14
(80.0)
(4.0) 9
COM
9
COM

3 3.33
14 13
Input
14 13
Input
(84.0)
3 1.57
Module Module
Input Input
(40.0)
3 A2 A1 Input 14 13 Input
Input Input
3
11 9
3 0.82 IEC NEMA
(21.0)
3
3

V7-T3-56 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
D2 Series Relay Contents
Description Page
3
D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53 3
D2RR/D2RF Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-58 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-58
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-60 3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-61
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-62 3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-63
D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-67
3
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-76
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-80
3
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-89 3
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-103
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-108 3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-112
3
D2RR/D2RF Series 3
Product Description Features Standards and Certifications 3
The D2 Series is a compact
line of relays with quick D2RR D2RF 3
response time and long life. ● Ultra-high sensitivity relay ● Flag indicator shows relay
Available in DPDT and 4PDT with quick response status in manual or powered
configurations. High reliability, long life condition
When used with 3
●
accompanying Eaton
● Bipolar LED status lamp UL Listed
screw terminal socket.
● Panel, DIN rail and flange
mounting allows for reverse polarity 3
Small size applications
●
● Shows coil ON or OFF 3
status
● Ideal in low light 3
conditions
● Color-coded pushbutton 3
identifies AC coils with red
or DC coils with blue 3
pushbuttons
● Allows for manual 3
operation of relay without
the need for coil power 3
● Ideal for field service
personnel to test control 3
circuits
Lock-down door, when
●

activated, holds pushbutton

3
and contacts in the operate
position 3
● Excellent for analyzing
circuit problems 3
● Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays 3
from sockets more easily
than conventional relays 3
● White plastic ID tag/write
label used for identification 3
of relays in multi-relay
circuits
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-57
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Catalog Number Selection

3
D2RF/D2RR 1
3
D2RF 2 A
3
Family Type Coil Voltage
3 D2RF = Full-featured style 2 A = 120 Vac
D2RR = Plain cover style A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
3 R1 = 12 Vdc
Contact Configuration T = 24 Vac
3 2 = DPDT
4 = 4PDT
T1 = 24 Vdc
W1 = 48 Vdc

3
3 Product Selection

3 D2RF/D2RR Relay/Socket Quick Reference

Relay Module ID
3 Type Socket Clip Type Tag Jumper
D2RR2, D2RF2 D2PAL PWC-D24 B PWF-D2P D2PJ1
3 PQC-1782 — — —
D2PA6 PQC-1342 None — —
3 D2RR4, D2RF4 D2PAP PWC-D24 B PWF-D2P D2PJ1
PQC-1782 — — —
3
D2PA7 PWC-D24 B — —

3 PQC-1782 B — —
D2PA6 PQC-1342 None — —
3 Notes
1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
3 2 Full-featured, LED test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-58 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
D2RF Series Relay D2RF/D2RR Series
Coil Contact Coil Resistance Catalog
3
Voltage Configuration (Ohms) Number
Full Featured Style
3
12 Vdc DPDT 160 D2RF2R1
3
24 Vac DPDT 180 D2RF2T
24 Vdc DPDT 650 D2RF2T1 3
48 Vdc DPDT 2600 D2RF2W1
110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D2RF2A1 3
120 Vac DPDT 4430 D2RF2A
220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D2RF2B
3
12 Vdc 4PDT 160 D2RF4R1
3
24 Vac 4PDT 180 D2RF4T
24 Vdc 4PDT 650 D2RF4T1 3
48 Vdc 4PDT 2600 D2RF4W1
110/125 Vdc 4PDT 11,000 D2RF4A1 3
120 Vac 4PDT 4430 D2RF4A
220/240 Vac 4PDT 15,720 D2RF4B
3
Plain Cover Style 3
12 Vdc DPDT 160 D2RR2R1
24 Vac DPDT 180 D2RR2T 3
24 Vdc DPDT 650 D2RR2T1
120 Vac DPDT 4430 D2RR2A
3
220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D2RR2B
3
12 Vdc 4PDT 160 D2RR4R1
24 Vac 4PDT 180 D2RR4T 3
24 Vdc 4PDT 650 D2RR4T1
110/125 Vdc 4PDT 11,000 D2RR4A1 3
120 Vac 4PDT 4430 D2RR4A
220/240 Vac 4PDT 15,720 D2RR4B
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-59
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Accessories
3
D2RF/D2RR Sockets and Accessories
3 Module Nominal Voltage Nominal Wire Standard Catalog
Type Size (Max. for Sockets) Current Mounting Style Wire Size Connection Pack Number
3 Socket B 300 12 DIN rail/panel 14/16 (2) AWG, 2.5/1.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 1 D2PAL 1

3 None 300 10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D2PA6
B 300 10 DIN rail/panel 14/16 (2) AWG, 2.5/1.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 1 D2PAP 1
3 B 300 10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D2PA7 1
None 300 10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 5 D2PA4
3 Flange mount adapter — — — Flange — — 25 PFC-D2D72
Plastic ejector clip — — — — — — 10 PWC-D24
3 Metal spring clip — — — — — — 25 PQC-1782

3 — — — — — — 25 PQC-1342
Hold-down spring — — — — — — 100 PYC-A1
3 Protection diode B 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BD250
LED indicator B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG24
3 B 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG240

3 MOV suppressor B 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV120

B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV24

3 B 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV240

Coil bus jumpers — — — — — — 10 D2PJ1
3 Plastic DIN rail end stop — — — — — — 25 PFP-P

3 Note
1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-60 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D2RF/D2RR Relay Specifications
Description D2RR2/D2RR4 D2RF
3
Contact Characteristics 3
Contact rating 12 A / 6 A 6A
Terminal style Plug-in Plug-in 3
Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy
Maximum switching voltage 300 V 300 V
3
Switching current at voltage—resistive 10 A at 120 Vac 10 A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 3
8 A at 277 Vac 8 A at 120 Vac
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 3
8 A at 28 Vdc 8 A at 28 Vdc
Switching current at voltage 1/3 hp at 120 Vac 1/3 hp at 120 Vac
3
1 hp at 277 Vac 1 hp at 277 Vac
Pilot duty B300 B300
3
Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc 100 mA at 5 Vdc
(0.5 W) (0.5 W) 3
Coil Characteristics
Operating range
3
% of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 85 to 110% 3
% of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110%
Average consumption 1.2 VA 1.2 VA 3
0.9 W 0.9 W
Dropout voltage threshold 15% (AC) 15% (AC)
3
10% (DC) 10% (DC)
3
Performance
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 200,000 200,000 3
Mechanical life operations unpowered 10,000,000 10,000,000
Response time 20 ms 20 ms 3
Dielectric strength
Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 1500 rms 1500 rms
3
Between poles Vac (rms) 1500 rms 1500 rms
3
Environment
Ambient air temperature around the device 3
Operation –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C) –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
Storage –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C) –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C) 3
Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n
3
Degree of protection IP40 IP40 3
Features
Cover options Plain cover Full featured 3
Features Mechanical flag indicator Locking pushbutton/
Bipolar LED/ 3
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator
Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-61
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Wiring Diagrams
3
D2RF2/D2RR2
3
12 42 1 4
3
3 14 44 5 8

3
11 41
3 9 12

3
A1 A2 13 14

3
IEC NEMA
3
3 D2RF4/D2RR4
12 22 32 42 1 2 3 4
3
3 14 24 34 44 5 6 7 8

3
3 11 21 31 41 9 10 11 12

3
A1 A2 13 14
3
3 IEC NEMA

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-62 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
D2RF2/D2RR2 3
0.27
(7.0)
0.83
(21.0)
0.83
(21.0)
3
0.02
(0.5)
3
1.10
(27.9)
1.10
(27.9) 3
3
0.24 0.24
1.54
(39.1)
(6.0) 1.40
(35.5)
(6.0)
3
3
D2RF4/D2RR4
0.27 0.83 0.83
3
(7.0) (21.0) (21.0)
0.02
(0.5) 3
1.10 1.10 3
(27.9) (27.9)
3
1.54
0.24
(6.0) 1.40
0.24
(6.0)
3
(39.1) (35.5)
3
D2PA6
3
0.71
(18.0)
3
8 7 6 5
44 34 24 14 8 7 6 5 3
4 3 2 1 3
42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1
3
2.51
4 3 2 1
N.C.
4 3 2 1
N.C.
3
(64.0) 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
N.O. N.O.
3
12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9
2.71 COM COM
(69.0) 3
0.17 14 13 14 13
(4.3) INPUT INPUT
1.25 Dia. 3
(32.0) 1 1 Typ.
4 3
A2 A1
3
INPUT 14 INPUT 13
1
2
1
1
1
0 9
3
11
41 31 21 12 11 10 9
3
1.00 0.89
IEC NEMA
(25.4) (22.7) 3
1.20
(30.7)
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-63
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3
D2PA7
3 1.57
1.00
(40.0)
3 0.74 0.14
(25.4)

(19.0) (3.8)
3 34 24
34 24 7 6
7 6
3 44 14
44 14 8 5
3 8
32
5
12
42 22
3.30 42 32 22 12 3
3 (84.0) 4 3 2 1
4 2 1

3 4 3 2 1
N.C.
4 3 2 1
N.C.
3.11 2.40 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
N.O. N.O.
3 (79.0) (61.0)
12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9
COM COM
3 0.14 14 13 14 13
INPUT INPUT
(3.80)
3 1.55
MODULE MODULE
INPUT INPUT
11 (39.5)
3 A2 A1 11 9
INPUT INPUT 9 A2 A1 14 13
14 13
3 41 31 21 INPUT INPUT
41 31 21 12 11 10
3 12 11 10

IEC
3 1.18 0.82
0.25
NEMA

(6.4)
(30.0) (21.0)
3 1.18
(30.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-64 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D2PAP

2.40
3
(61.0)
0.74
(19.0)
3
41 31 21 11
41 31 21 11 12 11 10 9 3
12 11 10 9
44 34 24 14
44 34 24 14 8 7 6 5 3
8 7 6 5
42 32 22 12 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1
3
3.34 0.20
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
3
(85.0) (5.6) N.C. N.C.
8 7 6 5
N.O.
8 7 6 5
N.O. 3
12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9
3.11
COM COM
3
(79.0) 14 13 14 13
INPUT INPUT
3
1.49 MODULE
INPUT
MODULE
INPUT
3
(38.0)
3
IEC:
A2 A1
NEMA: A2 INPUT A1 14 INPUT 13 3
14 INPUT 13
IEC NEMA 3
0.90
(22.0)
3
1.06
(26.9) 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-65
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3
D2PAL
3
2.40 1.06
(61.0)
3 0.74
(19.0)
(27.0)

41 11
3 41 11 12 9
12 9

3 44 14
44 14 8 5
8 5
3 42 12 42 12 4 1

3 3.34 0.20
4 1
4 1 4 1
(85.0) N.C. N.C.
(5.6) 8 5 8 5
3 N.O. N.O.

12 9 12 9
COM COM
3 3.11
14 13 14 13
(79.0) INPUT INPUT

3
3 1.49
MODULE
INPUT
MODULE
INPUT
(38.0)
3
A2 IEC: A1 A2 INPUT A1 14 INPUT 13
3 NEMA:
IEC NEMA
14 INPUT 13
3
3 0.92
(23.5)

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-66 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
D3 Series Relay Contents
Description Page
3
D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53 3
D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-57
D3RR/D3RF Series 3
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-68
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-68 3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-70
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-71 3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-72
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-76
3
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-80
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-89
3
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-103 3
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-108
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-112 3
3
D3RR/D3RF Series 3
Product Description Features Standards and Certifications 3
The D3 Series of relays D3RR D3RF
provides excellent ● Compact relay capable of ● The contact operation can
3
functionality in a popular breaking relatively large be easily checked by Push- When used with
octal base design. Rigid load currents to-Test button accompanying Eaton
3
pins and guide allow for ● Panel and DIN rail ● Flag indicator shows relay UL Listed
screw terminal socket
quick and easy installation
with little risk of damage.
mounting status in manual or (for D3RF only) 3
● 8- or 11-pin octal plug-in powered condition
● LED status lamp shows 3
coil ON or OFF status—
ideal for use in low light 3
applications
● Push-to-Test button allows 3
for manual operation of
relay without the need for
coil power
3
● Lock-down door holds
pushbutton and contacts in
3
the operate position when
activated 3
● Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays 3
from sockets easily
● ID tag/write label to 3
identify relays in multiple-
relay circuits 3
● Bipolar LED allows for
reverse polarity 3
applications
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-67
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Catalog Number Selection

3
D3RR/D3RF Series 1
3
D3RR 2 1
3
Family Type Coil Voltage
3 D3RR = Standard relay
D3RF = Full featured relay
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
3 Contact Configuration
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
2 = DPDT (8-pin) T1 = 24 Vdc
3 3 = 3PDT (11-pin) W1 = 48 Vdc

3
Product Selection
3
D3 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
3 Relay Module ID
Type Socket Clip Type Tag Jumper
3 D3RR2, D3RF2 D3PA6 PQC-1332 A — D3PJ1
D3PAL8 PQC-1351 A PWF-D3D5 —
3 D3PA2 PQC-1351 None — —
D3RR3, D3RF3 D3PA7 PQC-1332 A — D3PJ1
3 D3PAL11 PQC-1351 A PWF-D3D5 —

3 D3PA3 PQC-1351 None — —

Notes
3 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-68 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
D3 Series Relay D3RR/D3RF Series
Coil Contact Coil Resistance Catalog
3
Voltage Configuration (Ohms) Number
Full Featured Style
3
120 Vac DPDT 1700 D3RF2A
3
240 Vac DPDT 7200 D3RF2B
12 Vdc DPDT 120 D3RF2R1 3
24 Vdc DPDT 470 D3RF2T1
120 Vac 3PDT 1700 D3RF3A 3
220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D3RF3B
24 Vac 3PDT 72 D3RF3T
3
24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D3RF3T1
3
Plain Cover Style
120 Vac DPDT 1700 D3RR2A 3
110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D3RR2A1
220/240 Vac DPDT 7200 D3RR2B 3
12 Vdc DPDT 120 D3RR2R1
24 Vac DPDT 72 D3RR2T
3
24 Vdc DPDT 470 D3RR2T1 3
48 Vdc DPDT 1800 D3RR2W1
120 Vac 3PDT 1700 D3RR3A 3
110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D3RR3A1
220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D3RR3B
3
12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D3RR3R1
3
24 Vac 3PDT 72 D3RR3T
24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D3RR3T1 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-69
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Accessories
3
D3RR/D3RF Series Sockets and Accessories
3 Module Nominal Voltage Nominal Wire Standard Catalog
Type Size (Max. for Sockets) Current Mounting Style Wire Size Connection Pack Number
3 Socket A 300 16 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 1 D3PA6 1

3 A 300 12 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 10 D3PAL8 1
None 300/600 15/10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D3PA2
3 A 600 5 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 1 D3PA7 1
A 300 12 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 10 D3PAL11 1
3 None 300/600 15/5 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D3PA3
Metal spring clip — — — — — — 25 PQC-1332
3 — — — — — — 10 PQC-1351

3 Protection diode A 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AD250

LED indicator A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG24
3 A 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG240
MOV suppressor A 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV120
3 A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV24

3 A 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV240

R/C suppressor A 6 to 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC24

3 A 110 to 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC240

Write-on plastic labels — — — — — — 10 PWF-D3D5
3 Coil bus jumpers — — — — — — 10 D3PJ1
Plastic DIN rail end stop — — — — — — 25 PFP-P
3
Note
3 1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-70 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D3RR/D3RF Series Relay Specifications
Description D3RR D3RF
3
Contact Characteristics 3
Contact rating 10 A 10 A
Terminal style Octal Octal 3
Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy
Maximum switching voltage 300 V 300 V
3
Switching current at voltage—resistive 16 A at 277 Vac 16 A at 277 Vac
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 3
16 A at 120 Vac 16 A at 120 Vac
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 3
16 A at 28 Vdc 16 A at 28 Vdc
Switching current at voltage 1/2 hp at 240 Vac 1/2 hp at 240 Vac
3
1/3 hp at 120 Vac 1/3 hp at 120 Vac
3
Pilot duty B300 B300
Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc 100 mA at 5 Vdc 3
(0.5 W) (0.5 W)
Coil Characteristics 3
Operating range
% of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 85 to 110% 3
% of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110%
Average consumption 3 VA 3 VA
3
1.4 W 1.4 W
3
Dropout voltage threshold 15% (AC) 15% (AC)
10% (DC) 10% (DC) 3
Performance
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 3
Mechanical life operations unpowered 5,000,000 operations 5,000,000 operations
Response time 20 ms 20 ms
3
Dielectric strength 3
Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 1500 V (rms) 1500 V (rms)
Between poles Vac (rms) 1500 V (rms) 1500 V (rms) 3
Environment
Ambient air temperature around the device
3
Storage –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C) –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
3
Operation –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C) –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3
Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n
Degree of protection IP40 IP40 3
Features
Cover options Plain cover Full Featured
3
Features Mechanical flag indicator Bipolar LED/
Locking pushbutton/
3
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator 3
Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-71
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 D3RR2/D3RF2

3
3 1.39 1.39
(35.3) (35.3)
3
3 0.24 1.37 1.37
(6.1) 2.10
3 2.20
(55.2)
(34.8)
(50.3)
(34.8)

3 12 22 4 5

3 14 24 3 6

3 A1 A2 2 7
11 31 1 8
3
IEC NEMA
3
D3RR3/D3RF3
3
3
1.39 1.39
3 (35.3) (35.3)

3
3 0.24
(6.1)
2.20
1.37
2.10
1.37
(34.8) (34.8)
(55.2) (50.3)
3
3 22
21
24 5
6
7
12 32
3 4 8

14 34 3 9
3 A1 A2 2 10
11 31 1 11
3
3 IEC NEMA

3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-72 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D3PA2
0.97
1.60
3
(24.6)
(40.0)
0.59 1.29 3
(15.0) (33.0)
3
A1 11 21 A2 2 1 8 7 3
2 1 8 7
0.16 INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
2.02
(51.0)
(4.2)
1 8 1 8
3
2 7 2 7

2.12
3
3 6 3 6
(54.0)
4 5 4 5 3
1.01 3 5 6 4
(25.6) 14 12 22 24 3 4 5 6 3
NEMA
IEC
3
3
D3PA3
2.32
3
0.97 (59.0)
(24.6)
2.06
3
(52.0)
3
3
11 31 1 11

1 11 14
A1 A2
34 3
2 10
9
3
1.60 Dia. INPUT 1 11 INPUT INPUT 1 11 INPUT
2 10 2.05
(40.0)
3 9 (52.0) 3
2 10
9 3
2 10
9
3
4 8 2.16
(54.8)
4
5 7
8
32
4
5 7
8
3
1.02 12 6 4 6 8
5 7
(25.0)
6 22 24 5 7 3
21 6

IEC NEMA
3
3
0.97
(24.6) 1.60
(40.0)
3
0.59 1.29
(15.0) (33.0) 3
3
A1 11 21 A2 2 1 8 7
2 1 8 7
0.16 INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
3
2.02 1 8 1 8
(4.2)
(51.0)
2 7 2 7 3
2.12
(54.0)
3 6 3 6 3
4 5 4 5
1.01 3 4 5 6 3
(25.6) 14 12 22 24 3 4 5 6

NEMA
3
IEC

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-73
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3
D3PA6
3 1.45
(37.0)
1.42
3 1.10 (36.0)
(27.9)

3 22 11 12 22 11 12 5 1 4
1 4
3 5

24 21 14 24 21 14 6 8 3
3 2.86
6 8 3
(72.0) 0.15
3 3.00
(76.0)
(3.8) 5 4 5 4
6 3 6 3
3
7 2 7 2
3 8 1 8 1
1.58 MODULE MODULE
3 (40.0) INPUT INPUT
IEC:

3 NEMA:

A2 A1 A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1 7 Coil Jumper Buss

2
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
3 7 2
IEC NEMA
3 1.20
(30.0)
3
D3PA7
3
1.45
3 (37.0)
1.10 1.50
3 (27.9) (38.0)

32 24 22
3 8 7 5
12
4 32 24 22 12 8 7 5 4

3 31
11
21 11
31 21 11 11 6 1
6 1
3.18
3 (81.0) 34 14 0.15
(3.8) 34 7
6
5 14 9 7
6
5 3
9 3
8 4 8 4
3 3.01
(76.0) 9 3 9 3
3 10 2 10 2
11 1 MODULE 11 1 MODULE

3 1.58
INPUT INPUT

(40.0)
3 IEC:
A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1 10 Coil Jumper Buss 2
NEMA: INPUT INPUT
3 A2 A1 IEC NEMA
INPUT INPUT
10 2
3
3 1.35
(34.2)
3
3
3

V7-T3-74 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D3PAL8
0.86 3
(22.0)

24 22 12 14 3
24 22 12 14 6 5 4 3
6 5 4 3 3
3
0.12
5 4 5 4
3
(3.10)
2.95
(75.0) 6 3 6 3 3
7 2 7 2
3
8 1 8 1
1.45 3
(37.0) INPUT A2 INPUT A1
MODULE MODULE
7 IEC: 2 INPUT INPUT 3
NEMA:

A2 A2 21 11 A1
A2 A2 21 11 A1 7 7 8 1 2 3
7 7 8 1 2
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT
0.12 3
1.06 (30.0) IEC NEMA
(27.0)
1.49
(38.0)
3
3
D3PAL11
0.86
3
(22.0)
34 32 24 22 14 12
3
34 32 24 22 14 12 9 8 7 5 3 4
9 8 7 5 3 4 3
3
0.12 7
6
5 7
6
5
3
(3.1)
2.95
(75.0)
8 4 8 4
3
9 3 9 3
3
10 2 10 2

1.45
11 1 11 1 3
INPUT A2 INPUT A1
(37.0)
10 IEC: 2
MODULE MODULE 3
NEMA:
INPUT INPUT
A2 A2 31 21 11 A1
A2 A2 31 21 11 A1 2
3
10 10 11 6 1
10 10 11 6 1 2
INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT 3
0.12
(30.0) IEC NEMA
1.06
(27.0)
3
1.49
(38.0)
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-75
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D4 Series Relay Contents

3 Description Page
3 D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53
D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-57
3 D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-67
D4 Series
3 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-78
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-79
3 D5RR/D5RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-80
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-89
3 D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-103
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-108
3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-112
3
3
3
3 D4 Series
3 Product Description Standards and Certifications Catalog Number Selection
The D4 Series is a slim-form File # E1491, E65657 D4 Series 1
3 relay designed to fit into tight
spaces. The retaining clip is File # LR701519 D4PR 1 1 A
built in to the socket to
3 provide easy and secure
assembly. Family Type Coil Voltage
3 D4PR A = 120 Vac
Features A1 = 110 Vdc
3 ● Slim-styled power relay Contact Configuration
B = 240 Vac
P = 6 Vac
● Socket has built-in hold- 1 = SPDT P1 = 6 Vdc
3 down clip 2 = DPDT R = 12 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
● Panel or DIN rail mounting T = 24 Vac
3 Options T1 = 24 Vdc
Blank = Plain cover W = 48 Vac
W1 = 48 Vdc
3 1 = Indicating light

3
3 Product Selection
D4 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
3
Relay Type Socket Hold-Down Clip
3 D4PR1 D4PA1 2

2
D4PR2 D4PA2
3 Notes
1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are
3 readily available.
2 Socket has built-in hold-down spring.

3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-76 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
D4 Series Relay D4 Series
Standard Catalog Standard Catalog
3
Voltage/Poles Pack Number Voltage/Poles Pack Number
DIN Rail Sockets DPDT with Indicating Light
3
Single-pole 10 D4PA1 120 Vac 1 D4PR21A
3
Two-pole 10 D4PA2 110 Vdc 1 D4PR21A1
SPDT with Indicating Light 240 Vac 1 D4PR21B 3
120 Vac 1 D4PR11A 6 Vac 50 D4PR21P
110 Vdc 1 D4PR11A1 6 Vdc 1 D4PR21P1 3
240 Vac 1 D4PR11B 12 Vac 50 D4PR21R
6 Vac 50 D4PR11P 12 Vdc 1 D4PR21R1
3
6 Vdc 50 D4PR11P1 24 Vac 1 D4PR21T
3
12 Vac 50 D4PR11R 24 Vdc 1 D4PR21T1
12 Vdc 1 D4PR11R1 48 Vdc 50 D4PR21W1 3
24 Vac 1 D4PR11T Standard DPDT
24 Vdc 1 D4PR11T1 120 Vac 1 D4PR2A 3
48 Vdc 50 D4PR11W1 110 Vdc 50 D4PR2A1
Standard SPDT 240 Vac 50 D4PR2B
3
120 Vac 1 D4PR1A 6 Vac 50 D4PR2P 3
110 Vdc 50 D4PR1A1 6 Vdc 1 D4PR2P1
240 Vac 50 D4PR1P 12 Vac 50 D4PR2R 3
6 Vac 1 D4PR1P1 12 Vdc 1 D4PR2R1
6 Vdc 50 D4PR1R 24 Vac 1 D4PR2T
3
12 Vac 1 D4PR1R1 24 Vdc 1 D4PR2T1
3
12 Vdc 1 D4PR1R1-A2 48 Vdc 1 D4PR2W1
24 Vac 1 D4PR1T 3
24 Vdc 1 D4PR1T1
48 Vdc 1 D4PR1W1 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-77
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

3
D4 Series
3 Resistive Load Inductive Load
Description (p.f. = 1) (p.f. = 0.4, L/R = 7 ms)
3 D4PR1

3 Rated load 250 Vac 10 A 250 Vac 7.5 A

30 Vdc 10 A 30 Vdc 5 A
3 Carry current 10 A 10 A
Max. operating voltage 380 Vac/125 Vdc 380 Vac/125 Vdc
3 Max. operating current 10 A 10 A
Contact material AgCdO AgCdO
3 Max. switching capacity 2500 VA 1875 VA

3 300 W 150 W
Min. permissible load 100 mA, 5 Vdc 100 mA, 5 Vdc
3 Pickup voltage (max.) 80% AC/70% DC 80% AC/70% DC
Dropout voltage (min.) 30% AC/15% DC 30% AC/15% DC
3 Voltage (max.) 110% 110%

3 Mechanical life (min.) 10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC 10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC

Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.) 100,000 100,000
3 Maximum hp ratings 1/3 hp (125 Vac) 1/3 hp (125 Vac)
1/2 hp (250 Vac) 1/2 hp (250 Vac)
3 1/2 hp (277 Vac) 1/2 hp (277 Vac)
D4PR2
3 Rated load 240 Vac 5 A 250 Vac 2 A

3 30 Vdc 5 A 30 Vdc 3 A
Carry current 5A 5A
3 Max. operating voltage 380 Vac/125 Vdc 380 Vac/125 Vdc
Max. operating current 5A 5A
3 Contact material AgCdO AgCdO
Max. switching capacity 1250 VA 500 VA
3 150 W 90 W

3 Min. permissible load 10 mA, 5 Vdc 10 mA, 5 Vdc

Pickup voltage (max.) 80% AC/70% DC 80% AC/70% DC
3 Dropout voltage (min.) 30% AC/15% DC 30% AC/15% DC
Voltage (max.) 110% 110%
3 Mechanical life (min.) 10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC 10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC

3 Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.) 100,000 100,000

Maximum hp ratings 1/6 hp (120 Vac) 1/6 hp (120 Vac)
3 1/3 hp (240 Vac) 1/3 hp (240 Vac)
1/3 hp (265 Vac) 1/3 hp (265 Vac)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-78 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
D4PR1 D4PR2 3
0.51
0.10
(2.5)
1.14
(29.0)
(13.0)
Max. 0.39 0.01
1.14
(29.0)
0.51
(13.0)
Max. 0.39
3
Max. (10.0) (2.5) Max. (10.0)
0.08
(2.0) 3
1.14 1.10
(29.0) (28.0)
0.79
(20.0)
Max. Max. 0.79
(20.0) 0.08
(2.0)
3
0.02
(0.5)
0.24 0.10 0.02 0.16
3
0.19 0.02 0.16 (6.0) (2.6) (0.5) (4.0)
(4.8) (0.5) (4.0)
5 – 0.035 x 0.12
(0.9 x 3)
Elliptic Holes 0.35 0.30
3
0.30 (8.9) (7.5)
(7.5)
0.20
0.20
(5.2)
1 0.02
(0.5)
0.02
(0.5)
1 2 3 4
3
(5.2) 0.76 8 7 6 5
2 4 3
(19.4)
0.69
(17.5)
5
Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
(Bottom View)
3
(Bottom View)
3
D4PA1 3
0.28 0.16
(7.1)
0.08
(2.0) (4.1)
Dia. Holes
3
Five 0.17 (4.2)

2.82
3.5 x 0.32
(88.9 x 8.0) 4
Dia. Holes
3
(71.6) 1.40
3
Max. (35.6) 1.180 0.002
(29.97 0.05) 3
2 M3 or 3
0.77 (19.6) 5 1 3.30 (0.13)
0.16 0.77 1.18 (30.0) Dia. Holes
(4.1) (19.6)
Max. 2.13 (54.1) Max. 3
Terminal Arrangement Mounting Holes
3
D4PA2
3
0.28 0.08 0.16
(7.1) (2.0) (4.1)
Dia. Holes
0.17 (4.2)
3
Eight
3.5 x 0.32 Dia. Holes
2.82
(71.6)
(88.9 x 8.0)
1.40
6 3 3
(35.6) 5 4
Max. 1.180 0.002
(29.97 0.05)
3

0.16 0.77
0.77 (19.6)
7
8
2
1
M3 or
0.13 (3.30) 3
1.18 (30.0) Dia. Holes
(4.1) (19.6)
Max. 2.13 (54.1) Max.
Terminal Arrangement Mounting Holes
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-79
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D5 Series Relay Contents

3 Description Page
3 D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53
D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-57
3 D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-67
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-76
3 D5RR/D5RF Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-81
3 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-81
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-83
3 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-84
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-85
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-86
3 D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-89
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-103
3 D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-108
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-112
3
3 D5RR/D5RF Series
3 Product Description Features Standards and Certifications
The D5 Series is rated at D5RR D5RF
3 10 A and is available in full- ● Industrial rated 300 V, 10 A ● Flag indicator shows relay
featured and plain cover relay in two-pole and three- status in manual or
3 styles. pole configurations powered condition When used with
accompanying Eaton
● Compact design can be ● LED status lamp shows UL Listed
screw terminal socket
3 panel or DIN rail mounted coil ON or OFF status— (D5RF only)
ideal for use in low light
3 applications
● Push-to-Test button allows
3 for manual operation of
relay without the need for
coil power
3 ● Lock-down door holds
pushbutton and contacts in
3 the operate position when
activated
3 ● Finger-grip cover allows
operator to remove relays
3 from sockets easily
● ID tag/write label to
3 identify relays in multiple-
relay circuits
3 ● Bipolar LED allows for
reverse polarity
3 applications

3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-80 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Catalog Number Selection
3
D5 Series
3
D5RR 3 1
3
Family Type Coil Voltage
D5RR = Standard relay
D5RF = Full featured relay
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
3
B = 240 Vac

Contact Configuration
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
3
2 = DPDT T1 = 24 Vdc
3 = 3PDT W1 = 48 Vdc 3
3
Product Selection 3
D5 Relay/Socket Quick Reference 3
Relay Module ID
Type Socket Clip Type Tag Jumper
3
D5RR2, D5RF2, D5PAL PQC-1351 A PWF-D3D5 D3PJ1
D5RR3, D5RF3
D5PA2 PQC-1351 None — — 3
D5PA3L PQC-1351 None — —
D5PA3S PQC-1351 None — —
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-81
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D5 Series Relay D5 Series

3 Coil Contact Coil Resistance Catalog
Voltage Configuration (Ohms) Number
3 Full Featured

3 120 Vac DPDT 1700 D5RF2A

110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D5RF2A1
3 220/240 Vac DPDT 7200 D5RF2B
12 Vdc DPDT 120 D5RF2R1
3 24 Vac DPDT 72 D5RF2T
24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5RF2T1
3 120 Vac 3PDT 1700 D5RF3A

3 110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D5RF3A1

220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D5RF3B
3 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D5RF3R1
24 Vac 3PDT 72 D5RF3T
3 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D5RF3T1
Side Flange Cover
3 220/240 Vac DPDT 7200 D5RB2B

3 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D5RB2R1

24 Vac DPDT 72 D5RB2T
3 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5RB2T1
Plain Cover
3 120 Vac DPDT 1700 D5RR2A

3 110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D5RR2A1

220/240 Vac DPDT 7200 D5RR2B
3 24 Vac DPDT 72 D5RR2T
24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5RR2T1
3 120 Vac 3PDT 1700 D5RR3A
110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D5RR3A1
3 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D5RR3B

3 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D5RR3R1

24 Vac 3PDT 72 D5RR3T
3 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D5RR3T1

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-82 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Accessories
3
D5 Sockets and Accessories
Module Nominal Voltage Nominal Wire Standard Catalog 3
Type Size (Max. for Sockets) Current Mounting Style Wire Size Connection Pack Number
Socket A 300 25 DIN rail 10 /14 (2) AWG, 6/2.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 10 D5PAL 1 3
None 300 15 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D5PA2
None 300 15 Chassis (Output): 16 AWG, 1 mm2 Solder 10 D5PA3L 3
None 300 15 Chassis (Output): 16 AWG, 1 mm2 Solder 10 D5PA3S
Metal spring clip — — — — — — 10 PQC-1351
3
Protection diode A 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AD250 3
LED indicator A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG24
A 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG240 3
MOV suppressor A 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV120
A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV24
3
A 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV240
R/C suppressor A 6 to 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC24
3
A 110 to 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC240 3
Write-on plastic labels — — — — — — 10 PWF-D3D5
Coil bus jumpers — — — — — — 10 D3PJ1 3
Plastic DIN rail end stop — — — — — — 25 PFP-P
3
Note
1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-83
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

3
D5 Series
3 Description D5RR D5RF

3 Contact Characteristics
Contact rating 10 A 10 A
3 Terminal style Plug-in Plug-in
Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy
3 Maximum switching voltage 300 V 300 V

3 Switching current at voltage—resistive

16 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 16 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
3 16 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 16 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
16 A at 28 Vdc 16 A at 28 Vdc
3 Switching current at voltage 1/2 hp at 240 Vac 1/2 hp at 240 Vac
1/3 hp at 120 Vac 1/3 hp at 120 Vac
3 Pilot duty B300 B300

3 Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)

Coil Characteristics
3 Operating range
% of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 85 to 110%
3 % of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110%
Average consumption 3 VA 3 VA
3 1.4 W 1.4 W
Drop-out voltage threshold 10%/15% (AC) 10%/15% (AC)
3 10% (DC) 10% (DC)
Performance
3 Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 100,000 operations 100,000 operations

3 Mechanical life operations unpowered 5,000,000 operations 5,000,000 operations

Response time 20 ms 20 ms
3 Dielectric strength
Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 1500 V (rms) 1500 V (rms)
3 Between poles Vac (rms) 1500 V (rms) 1500 V (rms)
Environment
3 Ambient air temperature around the device

3 Storage –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C) –40 °F to +185 °F (–40 °C to +85 °C)
Operation –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C) –40 °F to +131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C)
3 Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n
3 Degree of protection IP40 IP40
Features
3 Cover options Flange/plain cover with LED Full featured

3 Features Mechanical flag indicator

(LED optional)
Bipolar LED/
Mechanical flag indicator/
Locking pushbutton/
3 Removable ID tag
Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-84 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Wiring Diagrams
3
D5PA3L and D5PA3S

12 32 22 1 2 3
3
N.C. N.C.
3
14 34 24 4 5 6
N.O. N.O. 3
3
11 31 21 7 8 9
COM COM
3
A1 A2
INPUT
A B
INPUT
3
IEC NEMA
3

D5RR2/D5RF2 DPDT
3
12 22 1 3
3
3
14 24 4 6 3
3
11 21 7 9 3
3
A1 A2 A B
3
IEC NEMA
3
3
D5RR3/D5RF3 3PDT
12 32 22 1 2 3
3
3
14 34 24 4 5 6 3
3
11 31 21 7 8 9 3
3
A1 A2 A B
3
IEC NEMA 3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-85
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 D5RR and D5RF

3
3 1.40
(35.4)
1.40
(35.4)

3
3 0.20
(6.1) 2.10 1.37 1.97 1.37
(34.9) (50.0) (34.9)
(53.1)
3
3 D5PA2

3 1.69
(43.0)

3 1.03
(26.0)
1.53
(39.0)
0.40 1.37
3 (10.0) (35.0)

3
6 5 4
24 34 14 6 5 4

3 3 2 1
22 32 12 3 2 1
0.15
3 (3.8) 3 2 1
N.C.
3 2 1
N.C.
3.00 6 5 4 6 5 4
3 (76.0)
N.O. N.O.

3.14 9 8 7 9 8 7
COM COM
3 (80.0)
B B
A INPUT A INPUT

3 1.50
B A
(38.0) A2 A1 B A
3 INPUT INPUT

3 9 8 7
21 31 11 9 8 7

3 IEC NEMA

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-86 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D5PA3L and D5PA3S

0.30 1.50 0.87

3
(7.5) (38.1) (22.2)
3
0.02
(0.5) 3
3
1 2 3
2.03
(51.0) 1.37
(34.7) 4 5 6 3
7 8 9
1.25
(31.7) 1.68 3
(42.8)
A B 3
3
0.16 Dia.

0.50
(4.2)
2 Holes
3
(2.5) Recommended
0.29
(7.5)
Chassis Cutout
0.87
0.16 (3.9) 3
Dia. Holes
(22.2)
0.28
(5.3)
3
0.63
(16.2)
3
1.68
0.13
(42.6) 3
0.24 (3.3)
1.37
(6.1)
(34.7)
1.27
(32.3)
3
Solder Type Terminals
0.29
(7.5)
3
3
0.63
(16.2) 1.39
3
(35.4)
0.18
(4.7)
3
0.24 1.37 Typ.
(6.1) (34.7) 3
3/16 Q.C. Type Terminals 0.19 (4.7)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-87
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3
D5PAL
3 2.48
(63.0)
3 21 31 11
9 8 7 21 31 11 9 8 7
3 24 34 14
6 5 4 24 34 14 6 5 4
3 22 32 12
3 2 1 22 32 12 3 2 1
3 3.70
(96.0)
N.C. N.C.
3 6 2 5 1 4 N.O. 3 6 2 5 1 4 N.O.
3 3.62
(92.0) 9 8 9 8
7 7
COM COM
3 B A B A
INPUT INPUT
3 MODULE MODULE
INPUT INPUT
3
A2 A1 Coil Jumper Coil Jumper
IEC:
3 7 NEMA:

INPUT
2
A2 Buss A1 B Buss A

3 INPUT
IEC
INPUT INPUT
NEMA
INPUT
1.40
3 (36.0)

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-88 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
D7 Series Relay Contents
Description Page
3
D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53 3
D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-57
D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-67 3
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-76
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-80 3
D7PR/D7PF Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-90 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-90
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-92
3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-93
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-95
3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-96 3
D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-103
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-108 3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-112
3
D7PR/D7PF Series 3
Product Description Features Standards and Certifications 3
The D7 Series is a cost- File # E37317, E65657
effective control relay with D7PR D7PF 3
high dielectric strength and ● Arc barrier equipped relay ● Flag indicator shows relay File # LR217017,
high current-carrying capacity. with high dielectric status in manual or LR217069
strength powered condition
3
● Panel and DIN rail ● Bipolar LED status lamp
mounting allows for reverse polarity 3
applications
● Shows coil ON or OFF 3
status
● Ideal in low light 3
conditions
● Color-coded pushbutton 3
identifies AC coils with red
or DC coils with blue 3
pushbuttons
● Allows for manual 3
operation of relay
without the need for
coil power
3
● Ideal for field service 3
personnel to test
control circuits
● Lock-down door, when
3
activated, holds
pushbutton and contacts in 3
the operate position
● Excellent for analyzing 3
circuit problems
● Finger-grip cover allows 3
operator to remove relays
from sockets more easily 3
than conventional relays
● White plastic ID tag/write 3
label used for identification
of relays in multi-relay
circuits
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-89
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Catalog Number Selection

3
D7 Series
3 D7PR 1 1 A
3 Family Type Coil Voltage

3 D7PR = Standard relay

D7PF = Full featured relay
A = 120 Vac
A1 = 110 Vdc
B = 240 Vac
3 Contact Configuration
R1 = 12 Vdc
T = 24 Vac
2 = DPDT 4 = 4PDT T1 = 24 Vdc
3 3 = 3PDT W1 = 48 Vdc

3 Options
Blank = Plain cover (D7PR only)
3 A = LED test button, flag indicator,
lock-down door, finger-grip cover,
ID tag (D7PF only)
3
3 Product Selection
3 D7 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
Relay Module
3 Type Socket/Adapter Clip Type ID Tag Jumper
D7PR2, D7PF2 D7PAA PQC-1342 B — —
3 PQC-1349 B — —

3 D7PA9 PQC-1342 None — —

PFC-D2D72 — None — —
3 D7PR3, D7PF3 D7PAB PQC-1783 A — —
PMC-1783 A — —
3 PFC-D73 — None — —
D7PR4, D7PF4 D7PAD PQC-1784 A — —
3 PMC-1784 A — —

3 PFC-D74 — None — —

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-90 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
D7 Series Relay D7 Series
Coil Contact Coil Resistance Catalog
3
Voltage Configuration (Ohms) Number
Full Featured
3
120 Vac DPDT 4430 D7PF2AA
3
110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D7PF2AA1
220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D7PF2AB 3
12 Vdc DPDT 160 D7PF2AR1
24 Vac DPDT 180 D7PF2AT 3
24 Vdc DPDT 650 D7PF2AT1
24 Vac 3PDT 103 D7PF3AT
3
24 Vdc 3PDT 400 D7PF3AT1
3
120 Vac 4PDT 2220 D7PF4AA
110/125 Vdc 4PDT 7340 D7PF4AA1 3
240 Vac 4PDT 9120 D7PF4AB
12 Vdc 4PDT 96 D7PF4AR1 3
24 Vac 4PDT 84.5 D7PF4AT
24 Vdc 4PDT 388 D7PF4AT1
3
48 Vac 4PDT 410 D7PF4AW1 3
Plain Cover
120 Vac DPDT 4430 D7PR2A 3
110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D7PR2A1
12 Vdc DPDT 160 D7PR2R1
3
24 Vac DPDT 180 D7PR2T
3
24 Vdc DPDT 650 D7PR2T1
120 Vac 3PDT 2770 D7PR3A 3
240 Vac 3PDT 12,100 D7PR3B
12 Vdc 3PDT 100 D7PR3R1 3
24 Vac 3PDT 103 D7PR3T
24 Vdc 3PDT 400 D7PR3T1
3
120 Vac 4PDT 2220 D7PR4A
3
110/125 Vdc 4PDT 7340 D7PR4A1
240 Vac 4PDT 9120 D7PR4B 3
24 Vac 4PDT 84.5 D7PR4T
24 Vdc 4PDT 388 D7PR4T1 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-91
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Accessories
3
D7 Sockets and Accessories
3 Module Nominal Voltage Nominal Wire Standard Catalog
Type Size (Max. for Sockets) Current Mounting Style Wire Size Connection Pack Number
3 Socket B 300 16 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping — D7PAA 1

3 None 300 10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 1 D7PA9
A 300 16 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping — D7PAD 1
3 A 300 16 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping — D7PAB 1
Flange mount adapter — — — Flange — — 25 PFC-D2D72
3 — — — Flange — — 25 PFC-D73
— — — Flange — — 25 PFC-D74
3 Metal spring clip — — — — — — 25 PQC-1342

3 Plastic ID clip — — — — — — 10 PQC-1349

Metal spring clip — — — — — — 25 PQC-1784
3 Plastic ID clip — — — — — — 10 PMC-1784
Hold-down spring — — — — — — 25 PYC-B2
3 Metal spring clip — — — — — — 10 PQC-1783

3 Plastic ID clip — — — — — — 10 PMC-1783

Protection diode A 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AD250

3 LED indicator A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG24

A 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG240
3 MOV suppressor A 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV120
A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV24
3 A 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV240

3 R/C suppressor A 6 to 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC24

A 110 to 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC240
3 Protection diode B 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BD250
LED indicator B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG24
3 B 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG240
MOV suppressor B 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV120
3 B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV24

3 B 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV240

Plastic DIN rail end stop — — — — — — 25 PFP-P
3 Note
1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-92 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D7PR Relay
Description D7PR (DPDT) D7PR (3PDT) D7PR (4PDT)
3
Contact Characteristics 3
Contact rating 15 A 15 A 15 A
Terminal style Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in 3
Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy
Maximum switching voltage 300 V 300 V 300 V
3
Switching current at voltage—resistive 15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz
3
12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz
10 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz — — 3
12 A at 28 Vdc 12 A at 28 Vdc 12 A at 28 Vdc
Switching current at voltage 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 3
1 hp at 250 Vac 3/4 hp at 250 Vac 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
Pilot duty B300 B300 B300
3
Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
3
Coil Characteristics
Operating range 3
% of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 85 to 110% 85 to 110%
% of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 3
Average consumption 1.2 VA 1.5 VA 1.5 VA
0.9 W 1.4 W 1.5 W
3
Dropout voltage threshold 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 3
10% (DC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC)
Performance 3
Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 100,000 operations 200,000 operations 200,000 operations
Mechanical life operations unpowered 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations
3
Response time 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms
3
Dielectric strength
Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 2500 V (rms) 2500 V (rms) 2500 V (rms) 3
Between poles Vac (rms) 1500 V (rms) 2500 V (rms) 2500 V (rms)
Environment 3
Ambient air temperature around the device
Operation –40 °F to +131 °F –40 °F to +131 °F –40 °F to +131 °F
3
(–40 °C to +55 °C) (–40 °C to +55 °C) (–40 °C to +55 °C)
Storage –40 °F to +185 °F –40 °F to +185 °F –40 °F to +185 °F
3
(–40 °C to +85 °C) (–40 °C to +85 °C) (–40 °C to +85 °C)
Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3
Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n 10 g-n
Degree of protection IP40 IP40 IP40
3
Features 3
Cover options Plain cover Plain cover Plain cover
Features Mechanical flag indicator Mechanical flag indicator Mechanical flag indicator 3
(optional LED) (optional LED) (optional LED)
Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA 3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-93
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D7PF Relay
3 Description D7PF (DPDT) D7PF (3PDT) D7PF (4PDT)

3 Contact Characteristics
Contact rating 15 A 15 A 15 A
3 Terminal style Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in
Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy
3 Maximum switching voltage 300 V 300 V 300 V
Switching current at voltage—resistive
3 15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 15 A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz

3 12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 12 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz

10 A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz — —
3 12 A at 28 VDC 12 A at 28 Vdc 12 A at 28 Vdc
Switching current at voltage 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 3/4 hp at 250 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac
3 1 hp at 250 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 3/4 hp at 250 Vac

3 Pilot duty B300 B300 B300

Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5 W)
3 Coil Characteristics
Operating range
3 % of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 85 to 110% 85 to 110%
% of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 80 to 110%
3 Average consumption 1.2 VA 1.5 VA 1.5 VA

3 0.9 W 1.4 W 1.5 W

Dropout voltage threshold 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 15% (AC)
3 10% (DC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC)
Performance
3 Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 100,000 operations 200,000 operations 200,000 operations
Mechanical life operations unpowered 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations
3 Response time 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms

3 Dielectric strength
Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 2500 V (rms) 2500 V (rms) 2500 V (rms)
3 Between poles Vac (rms) 1500 V (rms) 2500 V (rms) 2500 V (rms)
Environment
3 Ambient air temperature around the device

3 Operation –40 °F to +131 °F

(–40 ° to 55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F
(–40 ° to 55 °C)
–40 °F to +131 °F
(–40 ° to 55 °C)
Storage –40 °F to +185 °F –40 °F to +185 °F –40 °F to +185 °F
3 (–40 ° to 85 °C) (–40 ° to 85 °C) (–40 ° to 85 °C)
Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz
3 Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n 10 g-n

3 Degree of protection IP40 IP40 IP40

Features
3 Cover options Full featured Full featured Full featured
Features Locking pushbutton/ Locking pushbutton/ Locking pushbutton/
3 Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Bipolar LED/
Removable ID tag/
Mechanical flag indicator Mechanical flag indicator Mechanical flag indicator
3 Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA

3
3
3
3

V7-T3-94 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Wiring Diagrams
3
D7PR2/D7PF2
12 42 1 4 3
14 44 5 8
3
3
11 41 9 12
3
A1 A2 13 14 3
IEC NEMA
3
D7PR3/D7PF3 3
12 22 42 1 2 4 3
14 24 44 5 6 8 3
3
11 21 41 9 10 12
3
A1 A2 13 14 3
IEC NEMA
3
D7PR4/D7PF4 3
12 22 32 42 1 2 3 4 3
14 24 34 44 5 6 7 8
3
3
11 21 31 41 9 10 11 12
3
A1 A2 13 14 3
3
IEC NEMA

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-95
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 D7PR1/D7PF1
0.27 0.83 0.83
3 (7.0)
0.29
(7.4) (21.0)
0.29
(7.4) (21.0)
0.02 0.02
3 (0.5) (0.5)
1.10 1.10
3 (27.9) (27.9)

3 0.19 0.19
1.54 1.40
(4.8) (4.8)
3 (39.1) (35.5)

0.38 0.16
3 (9.9) (4.7)
0.23
(5.9)
3 0.30
(7.5)
3
3
0.08
3 (2.1)2X 0.55
(14.1)

3
D7PR2/D7PF2
3 0.27
0.29 0.83 0.29 0.83
(7.0) (21.0) (21.0)
3 (7.4)
0.02
(7.4)
0.02
(0.5) (0.5)
3 1.10 1.10
(27.9) (27.9)
3
3 1.54
0.19
(4.8)
1.40 0.19
(4.8)
(39.1) (35.5)
3 0.38 0.16
(9.9) (4.7)
3 0.23
(5.9)

3 0.30
(7.5)

3
3 0.08
(2.1)2X 0.55
3 (14.1)

3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-96 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D7PR3/D7PF3

0.26 1.20 1.20

3
0.27 (30.8) 0.29
(6.6) (30.8)
(7.4)
(7.0) 0.02
(0.5)
0.02
(0.5)
3
1.10 1.10 3
(27.9) (27.9)
3
0.19
1.60 (4.8) 1.40 0.19 3
(40.0) (35.5) (4.8)
3
0.39
(9.9)
0.39
0.19
(4.7) 3
(9.9) 0.23
(5.9)
0.26
3
(6.7)
3
3
0.39
(9.9)2X 3
0.79
(20.0)
3
D7PR4/D7PF4 3
0.27 0.26 1.60 0.29 1.60
(7.0) (6.6) (40.6) (7.4) (40.6) 3
0.02 0.02
(0.5) (0.5)
3
1.10 1.10
(27.9) (27.9)
3
1.54 0.19 1.40 0.19 3
(39.1) (4.8) (35.5) (4.8)
3
0.38
0.38 (9.9) 3
0.38 (9.9) 0.16
(9.9) (4.7)
0.23 3
(5.9)
0.26
(6.7) 3
3
0.38 3
(9.9)2X
1.18
(29.9) 3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-97
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3
D7PA3 D7PA4
3 1 10 1 13
4 7 5 9
3 2
5 8 6 10
2
3
6 9 7 11
3 3
3 11
Wiring Diagram (Top View) 8 12
4 14
3 2.74 (69.8) Wiring Diagram (Top View)
2.58 (67.5) Max.
3 2.74 (69.8)
2.58 (67.5) Max.
3
1.09
(27.8)
3 0.65
Max.
1.09
(16.6)
(27.8)
3 0.65
Max.
(16.6)
3 Combination Slotted/Phillips
Head Screws 6-32 x 5/16"

3 Combination Slotted/Phillips
Head Screws 6-32 x 5/16"
4 1 10 7

3 1.44
(36.6) 5 2 8
1.59
5 1 13 9
(40.5)
1.27
3 (32.5)
3
Max.
6 2 10
6 11 9 1.83
(46.5) 1.98
3 1.63
(50.5)
Max.
(41.4) 7 3 11

3
8 4 14 12

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-98 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D7PA9 Standard Mount
0.71 3
(18.0)
3
3
8 5
44 14 8 5

4 1 42 12 4 1
3

1 1
3
2.52 4 4
N.C. N.C.
(64.0) 8 5
N.O.
8 5
N.O.
3
2.73 12 9
COM
12 9
COM
3
(69.0)
0.16 3
(4.0) 14 13 INPUT 14 13 INPUT
3
1.26
(32.0)
A2 A1 INPUT 14 13 INPUT 3
14 13

41 11 12 9
3
12 9
IEC NEMA
3
1.02 1.03
3
(26.0) (26.0)
3
1.17
(29.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-99
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3
D7PAA
3 1.18
(30.0)
3 0.74
(19.0)
3
44 14
3 44 14 8 5
8 5
3 42 12 42 12 4 1
3 4 1
4 1 4 1
3.14 N.C. N.C.
3 0.16
(80.0) 8 5
N.O.
8 5
N.O.
(4.0) 12 9 12 9
COM COM
3
3.33 14 13 INPUT 14 13 INPUT
3 (84.0)
2.67
(68.0)

3 MODULE
INPUT
MODULE
INPUT

3 1.57 IEC:
A2 A1 INPUT 14 13 INPUT
(40.0) INPUT NEMA: INPUT
3 A2 A1 0.24
(6.0)
14 13 41 11 12 9
3 41 11
IEC NEMA
3 12 9

3
1.06
3 (26.0)
1.18
(30.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-100 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D7PAB
1.18 3
(30.0) 1.10
0.74
(19.0)
(28.0) 3
44 24 14 3
44 24 14 8 6 5
8 6 5

42 22 12
3
42 22 12 4 2 1
4 2 1
3
4 2 1 4 2 1
N.C. N.C.
3.14 8 6 5
N.O.
8 6 5
N.O. 3
(80.0)
0.16 12 10 9 12 10 9
(4.0)
COM COM
3
14 13 INPUT 14 13 INPUT

3.33
2.67 3
(68.0) MODULE MODULE
(84.0)
IEC:
INPUT INPUT
3
NEMA:

1.57 INPUT INPUT

A2
INPUT
A1 14
INPUT
13 3
(40.0)
A2 A1 0.24
(6.0)
41 21 11 12 10 9 3
14 13
41 21 11 IEC NEMA
3
12 10 9
3
1.45
(37.0)
3
1.57
(40.0) 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-101
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3
D7PAD
3 1.18 44 34 24 14
(30.0)
3 0.74
1.41
(36.0) 42 32 22 12
(19.0)
3 4
8
3
7
2
6
1
5
N.C.

44 34 24 14 N.O.

3 8 7 6 5
12 11 10 9
COM

3 42 32 22 12 INPUT

4 3 2 1
3 MODULE
INPUT

3 0.16
(4.0)
A2
INPUT
A1

3.33
3 (84.0) 2.67
(68.0)
41 31 21 11

IEC

3 3.14
(80.0) 8 7 6 5
3 IEC:
NEMA:
1.57 INPUT INPUT 4 1
3 2
3 (40.0) A2 A1
4 3 2 1
N.C.
14 13
8 7 6 5
3 41 31 21 11 12 11 10 9
N.O.

COM

3 12 11 10 9
INPUT

3 0.24
MODULE
1.81 INPUT
(46.0) (6.0)
3 1.96
14 13
(50.0) INPUT

3 12 11 10 9

3 NEMA

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-102 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
D8 Series Relay Contents
Description Page
3
D1RR/D1RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53 3
D2RR/D2RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-57
D3RR/D3RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-67 3
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-76
D5RR/D5RF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-80 3
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-89
D8 Series 3
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-104
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-104
3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-105
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-105
3
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-108 3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-112
3
3
D8 Series 3
Product Description Features Standards and Certifications 3
The D8 Series power relays ● Allows switching of 25 A File # E1491
are perfect for loads up to 30 and 30 A loads 3
A, with versions for flange ● A high-capacity, high- File # LR701520
mounting and e-clip mounting
available.
withstand voltage relay 3
compatible with
momentary voltage drops
● No contact chattering for
3
momentary voltage drops
up to 50% of rated voltage 3
● UL Class B construction
standard 3
● Wide-range AC-activated
coil that handles 100 to 120 3
Vac at either 50
or 60 Hz 3
● Panel, DIN rail and flange
mounting 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-103
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Catalog Number Selection

3
D8 Series 1
3 D8PR 6 TE A
3 Family Type Coil Voltage
D8PR
3 A = 120 Vac
B = 240 Vac
R1 = 12 Vdc
3 Contact Configuration
6 = SPST-NO
T = 24 Vac
T1 = 24 Vdc
7 = DPST-NO
3
Options
3 TE = E-bracket
TF = Flange mount

3
3 Product Selection
3 D8 Relay/Socket Quick Reference
3 Relay Mounting Adapter Track/
Front Connecting
Sockets Track/
Type Bracket Panel Mount Panel Mount
3 D8PR6TE D8PA5 D8PA1 D8PA2

3 D8PR7TE D8PA5 D8PA1 D8PA2

3 D8 Series 2
D8 Series Relay
3 Type
Standard
Pack
Catalog
Number

3 SPST E-Bracket
Coil voltage
3 24 Vac 1 D8PR6TET
24 Vdc 1 D8PR6TET1
3 SPST Flange Mount
120 Vac 1 D8PR6TFA
3 24 Vdc 1 D8PR6TFT1

3 DPST E-Bracket
Coil voltage
3 120 Vac 1 D8PR7TEA
DPST Flange Mount
3 120 Vac 1 D8PR7TFA
24 Vdc 1 D8PR7TFT1
3 Sockets

3 DIN rail adapter 10 D8PA1

Screw terminal adapter 10 D8PA2
3 Bracket adapter 10 D8PA5
Accessory
3 DIN rail end stop 100 PFP-M

3 Notes
1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available.
2 Additional coil voltages available—consult Sales Office or Customer Support Center.
3
3
3

V7-T3-104 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Technical Data and Specifications
3
Coil Resistance
Coil Voltage Ohms mA 3
24 Vac 303 71
110/120 Vac 5260 20.4
3
220/240 Vac 21,000 10.2
3
12 Vdc 75 158
24 Vdc 303 79 3
D8 Relays 3
Description D8PR6 D8PR7
Rated load 220 Vac 30 A 220 Vac 25 A 3
Carry current 30 A 25 A
Max. operating voltage 250 Vac 250 Vac
3
Max. switching current 30 A 25 A 3
Contact material AgCdO AgCdO
Max. switching capacity 6600 VA 5500 VA 3
Min. permissible load 100 mA at 5 Vdc 100 mA at 5 Vdc
Mechanical life (min.) 5,000,000 operations 5,000,000 operations
3
Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.) 100,000 operations 100,000 operations
3
Maximum hp ratings 1-1/2 hp (120 Vac) 1-1/2 hp (120 Vac)
3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac)
3
Coil Data
3
Coil Voltage Must Operate Must Release Maximum Voltage
24 Vdc/Vac, 12 Vdc 75% maximum 15% minimum 110% 3
120 Vac 75 V 18 V 132 V
240 Vac 150 V 36 V 264 V 3
3
3
Dimensions 3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D8PR6TF
2.70 (68.5) Max. 3
2.36 (60.0)
1.99 (50.5) 1.32 (33.5)
Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
or M4 Tapped Holes 3
Max. Max.
0.08 (2.0)
0.25 (6.4) 0.03
(0.8)
3
0.43 0 1
(11.0)
1.85 4 6
3
(47.0)
Max.
2.362 0.007 3
(60.0 0.2)
Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)
3
0.12 (3.0) 0.18
(4.5) (Top View)
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-105
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3
D8PR7TF
3 2.70 (68.5) Max.
2.36 (60.0)
3 1.99 (50.5) 1.32 (33.5)
Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
or M4 Tapped Holes
Max. Max.
0.08 (2.0)
3 0.25 (6.4) 0.03
(0.8)
0.43 0 1
(11.0)
3 1.85 2 4 6 8
(47.0)
Max.
3 2.362 0.007
(60.0 0.2)
3 Terminal Arrangement/
Internal Connections
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)
0.12 0.18
(3.0) (4.5) (Top View)
3
D8PR6TE with D8PA5 Bracket Attached
3 2.07 (52.5) Max.
Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
3 1.99 1.32 (33.5)
or M4 Tapped Holes
(50.5) Max. Max.
0.08 (2.0)
3 0.25 (6.4) 0.03
(0.8)
0 1
0.43
4 6
3 (11.0)
2.09
(53.0)
1.574 0.003
3 Max.
(40.0 0.1)
Terminal Arrangement/ Mounting Holes
Internal Connections (Bottom View)
3 (Top View)

3 D8PR7TE with D8PA5 Bracket Attached

2.07 (52.5) Max. Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
3 or M4 Tapped Holes
1.99 1.32 (33.5)
3 (50.5) Max.
0.03
Max
0.08 (2.0)
0.25 (6.4)
(0.8) 0 1
3 0.43
(11.0)
2.09 2 4 6 8
3 (53.0)
Max.
1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
Terminal Arrangement/ Mounting Holes
3 Internal Connections (Bottom View)
(Top View)
3 D8PA1
3 Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
3 2.03
(51.5)
3 Max.

3 1.574 0.003
(40.0 0.1)
1.574 0.003
0.20
3 (40.0 0.1)
(5.0)
2.19 (55.5)
0.57 Mounting Holes
3 Max.
(14.5) (Bottom View)
1.39 (35.2)
3 Max.

3
3 Note: Minimum spacing around relay = 0.20 inches (5 mm).

V7-T3-106 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D8PA2
Two M3.5 Screws 3
for Coil 0.31 (8.0)
Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes
3
2.03
(51.5)
3
Max.
3
1.574 0.003
Four M4 Screws 0.36 (9.2) 0.98 (40.0 0.1) 3
for Contact 1.574 0.003 (25.0) 0.20
(40.0 0.1)
1.81 (46.0)
(5.0)
Mounting Holes
3
2.19 (55.5) Max.
Max. (Bottom View)
3
3
3
3
D8PA5 PFP-M DIN Rail End Stop
3
0.94 M4 Spring Washer
0.24
Two
0.18 (4.5)
1.57
(40.0)
0.70 (24.0) M4 x 8 Pan (6.2) 3
Dia. Holes (17.8) Head Screw 0.07
(1.8)
0.45 3
1.02
(26.0)
(11.5) 0.07 1.39
(1.8) (35.3) 3
Two M4 or 0.18 (4.5)
Dia. Holes 0.39 0.19 1.47
1.81
(10.0)
0.12
(3.0)
1.97
(50.0)
(4.8) 0.05
(1.3)
(37.3) 3
(46.0) 0.39 0.39

1.574 0.003 0.27 0.17

(4.4)
(10.0) (10.0)
3
(40.0 0.1) 0.94 (7.0)
(24.0)
Mounting
Holes
3
(Bottom View) 0.78
0.20 1.18 0.20
(19.7) 3
(5.0) (30.0) (5.0)
1.20 (50.0) 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-107
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

D9 Series Relay Contents

3 Description Page
3 D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53
D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-57
3 D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-67
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-76
3 D5RR/D5RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-80
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-89
3 D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-103
D9 Series
3 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-109
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-109
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-110
3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-112

3
3
3 D9 Series
3 Product Description Features Catalog Number Selection
The four-pole D9 Series is ● Ideal for three-phase motor
3 ideal for three-phase motor control applications D9PR 8B A
applications. Various contact ● No contact chattering for
configurations are available.
3 momentary voltage drops Family Type
D9PR
Coil Voltage
up to 50% of rated voltage A = 120 Vac
B = 240 Vac
3 ● Push-to-Test button is a
standard feature to check
R1 = 12 Vdc
Contact Configuration T = 24 Vac
contact operation
3 ● Mounting bracket is
8B = 4PST-NO
9B = 3PST-NO/SPST-NC
T1 = 24 Vdc

10B = DPST-NO/DPST-NC
supplied with relay
3
3 Standards and Certifications
File # E1491
3
File # LR701520
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-108 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Product Selection
3
D9 Series
Catalog Catalog 3
Number Number
4PST-NO Power Relay DPST-NO/DPST-NC Power Relay 3
Coil voltage Coil voltage
24 Vac D9PR8BT 24 Vac D9PR10BT 3
120 Vac D9PR8BA 120 Vac D9PR10BA
240 Vac D9PR8BB 24 Vac D9PR10BT1
3
24 Vdc D9PR8BT1 3
3PST-NO/SPST-NC Power Relay
120 Vac D9PR9BA 3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
Coil Resistance
3
Coil Voltage Ohms mA Coil Voltage Ohms mA 3
24 Vac — 75 12 Vdc 72 167
120 Vac — 21.6 24 Vdc 288 83 3
240 Vac — 10.8 110 Vdc 6050 18
3
D9PR Specifications 3
NO Contacts NC Contacts
Description Resistive Load (p.f. = 1) Resistive Load (p.f. = 1) 3
Rated load 220 Vac 25 A 220 Vac 8 A
30 Vdc 25 A 30 Vdc 8 A 3
Carry current 25 A 8A
Max. operating voltage 250 Vac/125 Vdc 250 Vac/125 Vdc
3
Max. switching current 25 A 8A 3
Max. switching capacity 5500 VA 1760 VA
750 W 240 W
3
Min. permissible load 100 mA at 24 Vdc 100 mA at 24 Vdc
Mechanical life (min.) 1,000,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 3
Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.) 100,000 operations 100,000 operations
Maximum hp ratings 1-1/2 hp (120 Vac) 1-1/2 hp (120 Vac) 3
3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac)
Three-phase 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles
Three-phase 5 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles
Three-phase 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles
Three-phase 5 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-109
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Coil Data
3 Coil Voltage Must Operate Must Release Maximum Voltage

3 24 Vdc/Vac, 12 Vdc, 110 Vdc 75% maximum 10% minimum 110%

120 Vac 75 V 18 V 132 V
3 240 Vac 150 V 36 V 264 V

3
Terminal Arrangements
3
3 14 13 14 13 14 13

3 24 23 24 23 24 23

3 34 33 34 33 34 33

3 44 43 42 41 42 41
A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1
3
D9PR8 D9PR9 D9PR10
3
3 Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
D9PR
3 Screw Terminal Brackets
Ten M3.5
3 1.36
(34.5)
3 Max.

0.30
3 (7.6) 0.17 Two M4 or
0.18 (4.5) Dia.
(4.3)
3 2.52
2.17 (64.0)
3 (55.2) 1.70
(43.2)
Max.

3 1.378 0.004
(35.0 0.1)

3 2.03
(51.5) 0.08
Mounting Holes
(Bottom View)
Max. (2.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-110 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
Mounting Bracket
1.37 3
(35.0) Two M4 or Mounting Holes
0.18 (4.5) Dia.
Two M4 3
0.95
(24.0)
3
1.378 0.004 3
(35.0 1.0)
3
1.18 0.35
(9.0) 1.10
(30.0) (28.0) 3
0.28
1.14 (7.0) 3
(29.0)
3
0.17
1.73 (4.4) 3
(44.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-111
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Accessories Contents
3 Description Page
3 D1RR/D1RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53
D2RR/D2RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-57
3 D3RR/D3RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-67
D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-76
3 D5RR/D5RF Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-80
D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-89
3 D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-103
D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-108
3 Accessories
MOD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-113
3 Relay Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-114
3 Coil Bus Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-116
Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-116
3 Flange Mount Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-117

3
3 Accessories
3 Accessories Selection Guide The MOD Module System
Eaton offers a variety of Eaton’s plug-in modules are a
3 simple-to-install relay simple way to add
accessories that allow you to functionality to your relay
customize the features of a without the hassle of messy
3 relay system to meet your wiring and additional
exact needs. mounting of external
3 electronics. They are available
in a variety of configurations
3 to meet the needs of almost
any application.
3 Circuit Diagrams System Diagrams
3 Diode Circuit LED Circuit The MOD Module System

3
3
3 + +
A2 A1 A2 A1
3 The diode module protects The LED status lamp verifies
external drive circuitry from that power is being supplied
3 inductive voltages generated to the coil. Ideal for both AC
when removing coil voltages. and DC applications. Polarity
3 sensitive for DC applications.
RC Circuit Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV)
3 Circuit

3
3
A2 A1 A2 A1
3
Snubs back EMF of relay coil. The MOV circuit protects
by shunting potentially
3 damaging electrical spikes
away from the relay coil. Ideal
3 for AC and DC applications.

V7-T3-112 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
MOD Modules
3
Eaton’s relay accessories MOD Modules
provide a complete solution Module Catalog Mating 3
for add-on modules and Size Description Nominal Voltage Number Sockets
identification tags.
MOD-AD250 A Protection diode 6–250 Vdc MOD-AD250 D3PA6, D3PAL8, 3
D3PA7, D3PAL11,
D5PAL, D7PAB,
D7PAD
3
3
MOD-RC_ R/C suppressor 6–24 Vac MOD-RC24 3
110–240 Vac MOD-RC240
3
3
MOD-ALG_ LED indicator 24 Vac MOD-ALG24 3
120/240 Vac MOD-ALG240
3
3
MOD-AMV_ MOV suppressor 24 Vac MOD-AMV24 3
120 Vac MOD-AMV120
240 Vac MOD-AMV240
3
3
3
MOD-BD250 B Protection diode 6–250 Vdc MOD-BD250 D1RAA, D2PAL,
D2PAP, D2PA7,
D7PAA 3
3
MOD-BLG_ LED indicator 24 Vac MOD-BLG24
3
120/240 Vac MOD-BLG240
3
3
MOD-BMV_ MOV suppressor 24 Vac MOD-BMV24
3
120 Vac MOD-BMV120 3
240 Vac MOD-BMV240
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-113
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Relay Clips
3
Eaton offers a variety of relay Metal Hold-Down Clips
3 clips designed to improve the Catalog
performance and Number Mating Sockets Mating Relays
3 functionality within an
electrical panel.
PMC-1781 PMC-1781 D1RAA D1RR, D1RF

3 Metal Hold-Down Clips

Metal hold-down clips, or
3 spring clips, are ideal for use
where high heat or humid
3 conditions are a factor. These PQC-1782 PQC-1782 D2PAL, D2PAP, D2PA7 D2RR2, D2RF2, D2RR3, D2RF4
clips hold their shape and
3 tension and are designed
to withstand harsh
environments. All clips
3 are made of corrosion-
resistant stainless steel.
3 PQC-1342 PQC-1342 D2PA6, D7PAA, D7PA9 D2RR4, D2RF4

3
3
3 PQC-1332 PQC-1332 D3PA6, D3PA7 D3RR2, D3RF2, D3RR3, D3RF3

3
3
3 PQC-1351 PQC-1351 D3PAL8, D3PA2, D3PAL11, D3PA3, D3RR2, D3RF2, D3RR3, D3RF4, D5RR, D5RF
D5PAL, D5PA2, D5PA3L, D5PA3S
3
3
3 PQC-1783 PQC-1783 D7PAB D7PR1, D7PF1, D7PR2, D7PF3

3
3
PQC-1784
3 PQC-1784 D7PAD D7PR4, D7PF4

3
3
PYC- _ PYC-B2 D7PA3, D7PA4 D7PR1, D7PR2, D7PR4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-114 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Plastic Ejector/
Hold-Down Clips 3
These clips are great for PWC-D24 Plastic Ejector/Hold-Down Clips
applications where sockets Catalog 3
are located in dense or tight Number Mating Sockets Mating Relays
areas. They allow for quick,
safe and firm securing of PWC-D24 D2PAL, D2PAP, D2PA7 D2RF2, D2RF4 3
relays in the sockets with the
added benefit that the relay 3
can be ejected with one
finger. Plastic clips also aid in 3
keeping operators’ fingers
away from live circuits. The 3
optional snap-in identification
tag allows for custom
marking of sockets when
3
used in multi-socket
applications. 3
Plastic ID Clips Plastic ID Clips 3
Plastic ID clips allow for easy Catalog
circuit identification in multi- Number Mating Sockets Mating Relays 3
relay applications. They are PQC-1349 PQC-1349 D7PAA D7PF1, D7PF2
designed for labeling and
are not ideal for securing
3
the relay in the socket.
3
3
3
PMC-1783 PMC-1783 D7PAB D7PF1, D7PF2
3
3
3

PMC-1784 PMC-1784 D7PAD D7PF4

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-115
 3.4 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays

Coil Bus Jumpers

3 Eaton’s coil bus jumpers
allow inputs to be bridged
3 to adjacent sockets without
additional wiring, making
3 multi-relay connections quick
and easy. The easy-to-install
design requires no tools and
3 can be complete in a matter
of seconds.
3
System Diagrams
3 Coil Bus Jumpers 1 Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags Coil Bus Jumpers
These convenient plastic Catalog
3 labels snap easily onto Number Mating Sockets
the relay socket for clear
D2PJ1 D2PJ1 D2PAL, D2PAP
3 identification in multi-relay
panels. The hinged design
makes wiring simple and
3 allows for angular adjustment
of the tag to improve
3 readability in the panel. D3PJ1 D3PJ1 D3PA6, D3PA7, D5PAL
Marking with a standard
3 permanent marker creates
a smudge-free surface.
3
3
3
3
3 Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags
Catalog
3 Number Mating Sockets
PWF-D2P PWF-D2P D2PAL, D2PAP
3
3
3
3
PWF-D3D5 PWF-D3D5 D3PAL8, D3PAL11, D5PAL
3
3
3
Note
3 1 Jumpers in photo are colored green to improve visibility,

actual jumpers are black.

3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-116 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Plug-In Relays
3.4
Flange Mount Adapters
Eaton’s relay flange mount Flange Mount Adapters 3
adapters create a modular Catalog
approach to flexible Number Mating Relay 3
mounting options. Each low-
PFC-D11 PFC-D11 D1RF1, D1RR1
cost adapter allows for panel 3
mounting of a standard
control relay and can
eliminate the need for
3
a socket.
3
Unit with Flange Mount
Adapter
PFC-D2D72 PFC-D2D72 D2P, D7PF2, D7PR2 3
3
3
3
PFC-D73 PFC-D73 D7PF3, D7PR3
3
3
3
PFC-D74 PFC-D74 D7PF4, D7PR4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-117
 3.5 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Open Style Relays

9575H Series 3000 Relay Contents

3 Description Page
3 9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-119
3 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-119
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-120
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-121

3
3
3
3
3
3
3 9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC
3 Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications
Type AA panel-mounted 9575H Series 3000 relays are ● UL listed, E1491
3 relays are rated (each pole) ideal for applications when ● CSA 41729
40 A up to 300 Vac, 50/60 Hz; controlling smaller loads, ● CE: EN60947-4-1,
5 A at 480/600 Vac, 50/60 Hz such as single-phase motors.
3 and 40 A at 28 Vdc.
EN60947-5-1

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-118 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Open Style Relays
3.5
Product Selection
3
When Ordering, Specify
Catalog number and magnet switch and a 120 V 50/60 Hz Coil Voltage Selection 3
coil code letter. Example: for coil, order Catalog Number Coil Voltage Hz Suffix Code
DPDT relay with auxiliary 9575H3A010.
Volts AC
3
120 50/60 A 3
9575H Series 3000 Type AA Relays 1 240 50/60 B
Relay Catalog 480/440 60/50 C 3
Relay Style Number 2
600/550 60/50 D
Relay (DPDT) 9575H3_000
208 50/60 E
3
Relay with auxiliary switch 9575H3_010
277 50/60 H
Relay with blowout magnets 9575H3_100
6 50/60 J
3
Relay with auxiliary switch and 9575H3_110
blowout magnets
12 50/60 K 3
24 50/60 L
48 50/60 M 3
Volts DC
110 — P
3
220 — Q
3
6 — R
12 — S 3
24 — T
48 — W 3
3
3
Accessories
Enclosure 3
3
Description
Catalog
Number
3
NEMA 1 Enclosure 9575H2449
3
Notes
1 There are no “repair parts” available for these relays.
2 Underscore indicates missing code suffix for magnet coil—see Selection table above.
3
3 Only 9575H3 relays without an auxiliary switch should be mounted in the 9575H2449

enclosure.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-119
 3.5 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Open Style Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

3
Relay Specifications Dielectric Withstanding Voltage Auxiliary Switch Specifications
3 ● Between open contacts: ● Contact combination:
Coil Contacts 1500 Vrms SPDT
3 ● Pull-in voltage: 80%
DC coils, 85% AC coils
● Contact combination:
DPDT
● All other mutually insulated ● Contact rating: Auxiliary
conductive elements: switch rated 10 amps at
of nominal voltage
3 or less at 25ºC
● Contact rating each pole
(main contacts): Each pole
2200 Vrms 125 or 250 Vac, resistive
load; 1/4 hp at 125 or 250
● Dropout voltage: 10% rated 40 amps up to 300 Miscellaneous Vac, motor load; 0.4 amps
3 of nominal voltage Vac, 50/60 Hz, 5 amps at ● Coil terminals: 6–32 at 125 Vdc or 0.20 amps at
or more at 25ºC 480/600 Vac 50/60 Hz, screws 250 Vdc, resistive load; 3
3 ● Coil resistance: ±10% 0.75 PF load. 1-1/2 hp ● Contact terminals: 8-–32
amps at 125 Vac lamp load.
measured at 25ºC motor load (each pole) at All AC ratings are 50/60 Hz
screws
3 ● Max. DC coil dissipation 120–600 Vac, 50/60 Hz.
● Main base material:
● Dielectric withstanding
capability: 4 watts DC 2 hp motor load at voltage: 500 Vac rms
200–600 Vac, 50/60 Hz Molded phenolic, UL
3 continuous at 25ºC
only when using both recognized (QMFZ2)
between open contacts,
1500 Vac rms between all
poles to switch both sides ● Weight (DPDT Relay): other mutually insulated
3 of load, 40 amps at 28 Vdc 11 oz (311 grams) conductive elements
resistive load each pole. approximately ● Terminals: 4–40 round
3 NEMA A 600 pilot duty ● Weight (DPDT Relay with head screws for auxiliary
50/60 Hz auxiliary switch) 14.5 oz contacts standard
3 ● Additional contact ratings (411 grams) approximately
for relays with blowout
3 magnets: 10 A at 110 Vdc
resistive, 4 A at 225 Vdc
resistive, 2 A at 325 Vdc
3 resistive. For inductive
loads, contacts must be
3 derated accordingly.
● Contact material: Silver
3 cadmium oxide, gold
flashed. 5/16 in
3 (7.9 mm) diameter standard

3 Average Operating Times (Milliseconds)

Operation DPDT Relay DPDT Relay with Auxiliary Switch
3 Pickup 40 50

3 Dropout 35 35

3
Temperature Ranges
3 Temperature AC DC
Operating range –30 °C to +55 °C –30 °C to +55 °C
3 Non-operating range –30 °C to +100 °C –30 °C to +100 °C

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-120 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
General Purpose Open Style Relays
3.5
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
9575H3 DPDT Relay 9575H2449 3
Mounting Holes 0.187 (4.75) Dia. (2 Places) 3.31
(84.2) 3
1.88
8-32 Machine Screw on
Contact Terminals (6 Places)
(47.6) 3
0.218 0.230 (5.8)
0.56 (5.5)
(4.3) Dia.
Square Hole
3
2.25
(58.7)
Max. 3
3.55
(90.1)
0.159 (4) Dia. 3
10-32 Tap
1.62 Typ. 4 Places
1.87 (47.5) 0.38 (41.1)
4.50
3
2.50 (63.5) (9.5) 3.12 (79.2) Max. (114.3)
6-32
Machine Screw 5.63
3
on Coil (142.9) 0.136 (3.4) Dia.
Terminals
(2 Places)
0.50
(2.7)
8-32 Tap
Typ. 2 Places 3
3
2.00 3.00
9575H3 DPDT Relay with Auxiliary SPDT Switch (50.8) (76.2) 3
0.218 (5.5) Dia. 0.36 (9.1)
Typ. 2 Places Typ. 2 Places
Mounting Holes 0.187 (4.75) Dia. (2 Places) 3
8-32 Machine Screw on
Contact Terminals (6 Places)
3
3
2.25
(58.7)
Max.
0.20
(5.1)
3
3
1.87 (47.5) 0.38
1.62
(41.1) 3
2.50 (63.5) (9.5) 3.12 (79.2) Max.
6-32 3
Machine Screw
on Coil
Terminals 3
(2 Places)

3
NC
10A 1/4 hp 125 OR 250 Vac
0.4A at 125 Vdc, 0.2A at 250 Vdc
3A 125 Vac “LAMP”
278 VA 125/250 Vac P.D.
3
NO COM

Mounting Holes (2) 3

AUX. SWITCH
MARKING SURFACE
3
Insulators
(2 Sides)
3
3
Screw Terminals
(4-40) RHMS
with External
3
4.44 (112.7) Max. Tooth Lockwashers
(3 Places) 3
RELAY TOP VIEW
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-121
 3.6 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Solid-State Relays Contents

3 Description Page
3 Solid-State Relays
D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-123
3 D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-130
D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-135
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Product Overview
3 Catalog Number Selection
3 Solid-State Relays—D93, D96 and D99 Series

3
D93 3 25 A M D 2
3
3 Description
D93 = Hockey puck
Input Voltage
1 = 90–280 Vac
D96 = Compact 2 = 3–32 Vdc
3 D99 = DIN rail 3 = 3.5–32 Vdc
4 = 4–15 Vdc
3 5 = 20–50 Vdc
Output Voltage

3 1 = 2–60 Vdc
2 = 24–280 Vac 1 Turn On Type
3 = 3–200 Vdc Z = Zero cross
3 4 = 48–480 Vac
6 = 48–600 Vac
R = Random
D = DC switch

3
Current Output Type
3 Output current in amps C = SCR
T = Triac
3 M = MOSFET
Contact Configuration

3 A = SPST-NO
B = SPST-NC
C = DPST-NO
3 D = DPST-NC

3
Note
3 1 For D96208ACZ3, output voltage is 3–150 Vdc.

3
3
3

V7-T3-122 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
D93 Series—Solid-State Relays Contents
Description Page
3
D93 Series 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-124
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-124 3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-125
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-129 3
D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-130
D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-135 3
3
3
3
3
3
D93 Series 3
Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications 3
Eaton’s D93 series of solid- A solid-state relay (SSR) can ● All solid-state circuitry with ● UL/cUL recognized—
state relays is a line of heavy- perform many applications no moving parts to wear UL 508 3
duty industrial relays in the that an electromechanical ● Compact, panel mounting ● CSA certified
common “hockey puck” relay can perform. The SSR
package. The removable, differs in that it has no
for flexible installation ● CE marked 3
● Isolated input and output ● RoHS compliant
finger-safe cover and optional moving mechanical parts
accessories make the D93 within it and has some
terminals to protect the
system from electrical
3
safe and easy to install in a distinct advantages over an noise
variety of applications. electromechanical relay.
● Internal snubber circuitry
3
Models are available in a When used correctly in the to protect the SSR from
variety of input voltages and intended application, the SSR transients 3
switch types up to 75 A. provides a high degree of
reliability, a long service life, 3
significantly reduced
electromagnetic interference, 3
fast response and high
vibration resistance.
3
Applications for the SSR
typically include equipment 3
that requires high cycling
rates, low acoustical or
electrical noise, or high
3
vibration resistance. Some
examples are medical 3
equipment, heating/cooling
equipment, lighting control 3
and pumps/compressors,
among others. 3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-123
 3.6 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Product Selection
3
D93 Series
3 D93210ACZ1
Contact Rated Current
Input Voltage Output Voltage Configuration Switching Type Load (Amps) Catalog Number
3 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D93210ACZ1

3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D93210ACZ2

3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 10 D93210ATZ2
3 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D93225ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D93225ACZ2
3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 25 D93225ATZ2
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D93240ACZ1
3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D93240ACZ2

3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 40 D93240ATZ2

90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 50 D93250ACZ1
3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 50 D93250ACZ2
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 75 D93275ACZ1
3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 75 D93275ACZ2

3 3–32 Vdc 3–200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 12 D93312AMD2

3–32 Vdc 3–200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 25 D93325AMD2

3 3–32 Vdc 3–200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 40 D93340AMD2

3
Accessories
3
D93HS1 D93 Series—Heat Sink D93TP1 D93 Series—Thermal
3 Eaton’s D93HS1 heat sink is Transfer Pad
specifically designed to be The D93TP1 is a self-
3 used with D93 solid-state
relays. It is pre-drilled and
adhesive transfer pad
designed for use with
tapped, and matches the heat Eaton’s D93 solid-state
3 dissipation requirements for relays. When used properly,
relays up to 50 A. it will adequately conduct the
3 heat to a heat sink without
Heat Sink Accessory the use of grease.
3 Description
Catalog
Number

3 Heat sink D93HS1

Note: Always ensure that all

3 details of the application are
considered when determining
3 heat dissipation requirements,
including ambient temperature.
The D93 relays must be firmly
3 mounted to the heat sink using a
suitable thermally conductive
3 grease or thermal transfer pad.

3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-124 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D93 Series 3
Description Units D93210ACZ1 D93210ACZ2 D93210ATZ2 D93225ACZ1 D93225ACZ2 D93225ATZ2
Output Characteristics
3
Contact configuration SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO 3
Switching device SCR SCR Triac SCR SCR Triac
Current rating A 10 10 10 25 25 25 3
Switching type Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 200 250 700 500 500 250
3
Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 8 16 16 16 16 16
3
Motor load rating (rms) A 4.5 8 8 8 8 8
Min. load current to maintain on mA 50 120 250 120 120 120 3
Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 83 250 1000 250 250 250
Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 24 80 50 40 40 80 3
Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 8 10 10 8 10 10
Peak blocking voltage Vpk 600 300 — 600 600 —
3
Typical on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.35 1.6 1.6 1.6 3
Max. on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
Max. I2t for fusing (A2) 72 300 1700 312 250 300 3
Input Characteristics
Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 10 AC 1 DC 1 DC
3
Typical input impedance ohms 13k Current regulator 16–25k 13k Current regulator 1.5k
Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 20 2 12 20 16 2
3
Reverse polarity protection NA Yes NA NA Yes Yes 3
Performance Characteristics
Operating time (response time) 3
ON ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3
OFF ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3
3
Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
3
Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
Environment 3
Product certifications UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE
Ambient air temperature 3
Storage °C –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100
Operating °C –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80
3
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3
Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 3.5 3.5 1.45 1.02 1.02 1.45 3
Weight g (oz) 100 (3.5) 100 (3.5) 100 (3.5) 100 (3.5) 100 (3.5) 100 (3.5)
LED—input Green Green Green Green Green Green 3
Input terminals M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5
Output terminals M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4
3
Terminal torque (max.) Nm 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-125
 3.6 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

D93 Series, continued

3 Description Units D93240ACZ1 D93240ACZ2 D93240ATZ2 D93250ACZ1 D93250ACZ2

3 Output Characteristics
Contact configuration SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO
3 Switching device SCR SCR Triac SCR SCR
Current rating A 40 40 40 50 50
3 Switching type Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 500 500 250 500 500
3 Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 30 30 20 39 39

3 Motor load rating (rms) A 14 14 14 14 14

Min. load current to maintain on mA 250 250 50 250 250
3 Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 625 625 250 520 520
Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 80 80 80 100 100
3 Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 10 10 10 10 8

3 Peak blocking voltage Vpk 600 600 600 600 600

Typical on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.1 1.8
3 Max. on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.8 1.8
Max. I2t for fusing (A2) 1250 1250 438 1250 1250
3 Input Characteristics
Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 1 DC 10 AC 1 DC
3 Typical input impedance ohms 13k ACL 1.5k 13k Current regulator

3 Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 20 16 2 20 16

Reverse polarity protection N/A Yes Yes NA Yes
3 Performance Characteristics
Operating time (response time)
3 ON ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3
OFF ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3
3 Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

3 Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

Environment
3 Product certifications UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE
Ambient air temperature
3 Storage °C –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100

3 Operating °C –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80

Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

3 Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 0.9 0.9 0.95 0.63 0.63
3 Weight g (oz) 100 100 100 135 (4.8) 135 (4.8)
LED—input Green Green Green Green Green
3 Input terminals M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5

3 Output terminals M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
Terminal torque (max.) Nm 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-126 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
D93 Series, continued
Description Units D93275ACZ1 D93275ACZ2 D93312AMD2 D93325AMD2 D93340AMD2
3
Output Characteristics
3
Contact configuration SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO
Switching device SCR SCR MOSFET MOSFET MOSFET 3
Current rating A 75 75 12 25 40
Switching type Zero cross Zero cross DC switching DC switching DC switching 3
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 500 500 NA NA NA
Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 39 39 NA NA NA
3
Motor load rating (rms) A 25 25 NA NA NA 3
Min. load current to maintain on mA 250 250 20 20 20
Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 1150 1150 27 50 90 3
Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 150 150 NA NA NA
Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 10 10 8 8 8
3
Peak blocking voltage Vpk 600 600 — — —
3
Typical on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.8 1.8 1.6 1.6 1.6
Max. on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.8 1.8 2.83 2.83 2.83 3
Max. I2t for fusing (A2) 5000 5000 NA NA NA
Input Characteristics 3
Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC
Typical input impedance ohms 13k Current regulator 1k 1k 1k
3
Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 20 16 10 10 10
3
Reverse polarity protection NA Yes No No No
Performance Characteristics 3
Operating time (response time)
ON ms 8.3 8.3 300 μs 600 μs 600 μs 3
OFF ms 8.3 8.3 1 2.6 2.6
Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
3
Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 4000 4000 2500 2500 2500 3
Environment
Product certifications UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE 3
Ambient air temperature
Storage °C –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100
3
Operating °C –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80
3
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Miscellaneous Characteristics 3
Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 0.6 0.63 1.06 1.06 0.63
Weight g (oz) 200 135 (4.8) 110 (3.9) 110 (3.9) 135 (4.8) 3
LED—input Green Green Green Green Green
Input terminals M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5
3
Output terminals M6 M6 M4 M4 M6
3
Terminal torque (max.) Nm 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-127
 3.6 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Temperature Derating Curves

3 10 Amp Styles 40 and 50 Amp Styles
3 16 90
6" x 6" x 1/8" aluminum plate 80 Mounted on heat sink with
14
3 1°C/W thermal resistance

Load Current (amps rms)

12
Load Current (amps rms)

70
3 Heat sink 50
0.14°C/W (50A)
10 with 1°C/W
3 8
thermal
resistance
40 5" x 6" x 1/8"
aluminum plate

3 6 30

20
3 4
Free air mounting 10
2
3 0
0
20° 40° 60° 80° 100°
20° 40° 60° 80° 100°
3 Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)

3
3 25 Amp Styles 75 Amp Styles
40 75
3 35
Mounted on heat sink with 90
1°C/W thermal resistance

Max. Allowable Temperature

(sink to ambient)
3 60
Load Current (amps rms)

30
Load Current (amps rms)

95
5" x 6" x 1/8"
3 25 aluminum plate
45 100
20 0.14°C/W
3 40
15 105
5" x 6" x 1/8" 30
3 aluminum
10 plate 20 110
1.5°C/W
3 5 10

0
3 20° 40° 60° 80° 100°
0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80°
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-128 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
D93 Series 3
2.28
(57.9)
0.66
(16.8)
Screw Terminals
3
0.18
(4.4) 3
0.6
(15.1)
1.74 3
(44.1)
3
3
1.87
1.4
(35.9)
(47.5) 3
3
2.28 3
(57.9)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-129
 3.6 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

D96 Series—Solid-State Relays Contents

3 Description Page
3 D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-123
D96 Series
3 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-131
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-132
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-134
D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-135
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 D96 Series
3 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s D96 series of A solid-state relay (SSR) can ● All solid-state circuitry has ● UL/cUL listed—UL 508
3 solid-state relays is a perform many applications no moving parts to wear ● CSA certified
technologically advanced set that an electromechanical ● Integral heat sink ● CE marked
of electronic relays for tough relay can perform. The SSR
3 applications and harsh differs in that it has no
eliminates the need for ● RoHS compliant
added accessories and
environments. The compact moving mechanical parts installation
3 17.5 mm wide package within it and has some ● Flexible mounting allows
with an integrated heat sink distinct advantages over an DIN rail or panel mounting
3 provides easy mounting electromechanical relay. without additional
in tight spaces. hardware or tools
When used correctly in the
3 intended application, the SSR ● Isolated input and output
provides a high degree of terminals protect the
3 reliability, a long service life, system from electrical
significantly reduced noise
3 electromagnetic interference, ● Internal snubber circuitry
fast response and high protects the SSR from
vibration resistance.
3 transients
Applications for the SSR
3 typically include equipment
that requires high cycling
3 rates, low acoustical or
electrical noise, or high
vibration resistance. Some
3 examples are medical
equipment, heating/cooling
3 equipment, lighting control
and pumps/compressors,
3 among others.

3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-130 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
Product Selection
3
D96 Series
D96115ACZ3
Contact Rated Current
3
Input Voltage Output Voltage Configuration Switching Type Load (Amps) Catalog Number
3.5–32 Vdc 3–50 Vdc SPST-NO DC switch 15 D96115ACZ3
3
3.5–32 Vdc 3–150 Vdc SPST-NO DC switch 8 D96208ACZ3
3
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96210ACR1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96210ACR2 3
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96210ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96210ACZ2 3
3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NC Random 10 D96210BCR2
90–280 Vac 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96410ACR1
3
3–32 Vdc 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96410ACR2 3
90–280 Vac 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96410ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96410ACZ2 3
90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96610ACR1
90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96610ACZ1
3
3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96610ACZ2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-131
 3.6 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

3
3 D96 Series
Description Units D96210ACZ1 D96210ACZ2 D96210ACR1 D96210ACR2 D96115ACZ3 D96208ACZ3 D96210BCR2
3
Output Characteristics

3 Contact configuration SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NC

Switching device SCR SCR SCR SCR MOSFET MOSFET SCR
3 Current rating A 10 10 10 10 15 8 10
Switching type Zero cross Zero cross Random turn on Random turn on DC switching DC switching Random turn on
3 Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk) V 35 35 35 35 NA NA 35

3 Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 500 500 500 500 NA NA 500
Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 8 8 8 8 NA NA 8
3 Motor load rating (rms) A 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 NA NA 4.5
Min. load current to maintain on mA 50 50 50 50 20 20 50
3 Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 500 500 500 500 50 35 500
Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 24 24 24 24 24 17 24
3 Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

3 Typical on state voltage drop (rms) V 1.25 AC 1.25 AC 1.25 AC 1.25 AC 1.25 DC 1.25 DC 1.25 AC
Max. on state voltage drop (rms) V 1.6 AC 1.6 AC 1.6 AC 1.6 AC 1.6 DC 1.6 DC 1.6 AC
3 Max. I2t for fusing (A2) 1250 1250 1250 1250 NA NA 1250
Input Characteristics
3 Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC
Typical input impedance ohms 16–25k Current regulator 16–25k ACL Current regulator Current regulator ACL
3
Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 12 16 12 16 12 12 12

3 Reverse polarity protection NA Yes NA Yes Yes Yes Yes

Performance Characteristics
3 Operating time (response time)
ON ms 40 8.3 8.3 8.3 5 5 8.3
3 OFF ms 80 8.3 8.3 8.3 5 5 8.3

3 Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 2500 2500 4000 4000 2500 2500 4000
Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
3 Environment
Product certifications UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE
3 Ambient air temperature
Storage °C –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100
3 Operating °C –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80

3 Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Miscellaneous Characteristics
3 Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66
Integral heat sink °C/W 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
3 Weight g (oz) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1)
LED—input Green Green Green Green Green Green Green
3
Terminal wire capacity AWG (mm2) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1)

3 Terminal torque (max.) in-lb (Nm) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8)

3
3
3
3

V7-T3-132 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
Temperature Derating Curves
8 Amp Style 15 Amp Style
3
35 24 3
30 18 3
Load Current (amps rms)

Current (amps DC)

25 15
3
20 12
3
15 9
3
10 6
8
5 3
3
1.5
0 0
3
85°
0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90° 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90°
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
3
10 Amp Style 3
14 3
12
3
Load Current (amps rms)

10
3
8
3
6

4
3

1.8 2
3
0 3
0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90°
Max. Ambient Temperature (°C) 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-133
 3.6 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 D96 Series

0.69 0.20
3 (17.6) (5.0)
0.20
3 (5.0)
0.07
3 (1.7)

3 0.56
(14.2) 3.54
(90.0)
3
1.78 3.64
1.40
(92.4)
3 2.63
(45.3) (35.6)

(66.8)
3
1.39
3 (35.2)

3 0.63 0.56
0.27 (16.0) 0.13
(14.3)
3 (6.9) 1.36
(3.4)
(34.6)
3 2.56 Max.
(65.0)

3
0.24
3 (6.0)
0.62
(15.8)
3 0.55
(14.9)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-134 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
D99 Series—Solid-State Relays Contents
Description Page
3
D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-123 3
D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-130
D99 Series 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-136
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-137 3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-140
3
3
3
3
3
3
D99 Series 3
Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications 3
Eaton’s D99 series of solid- A solid-state relay (SSR) can ● All solid-state circuitry has ● UL/cUL listed—UL 508
state relays is a line of perform many applications no moving parts to wear ● CSA certified 3
heavy-duty industrial relays that an electromechanical ● Integral heat sink ● CE marked
with an integrated heat sink. relay can perform. The SSR
The attached metal hardware differs in that it has no
eliminates the need for ● RoHS compliant 3
added accessories and
can be used for DIN rail or moving mechanical parts installation
panel mounting. within it and has some ● Flexible mounting allows
3
distinct advantages over an DIN rail or panel mounting
Models are available in a
variety of input voltages in
electromechanical relay. without additional 3
10 A, 25 A and 40 A sizes. When used correctly in the hardware or tools
intended application, the SSR ● Isolated input and output 3
provides a high degree of terminals protect the
reliability, a long service life, system from electrical 3
significantly reduced noise
electromagnetic interference, ● Internal snubber circuitry 3
fast response and high protects the SSR from
vibration resistance. transients 3
Applications for the SSR
typically include equipment 3
that requires high cycling
rates, low acoustical or
electrical noise, or high
3
vibration resistance. Some
examples are medical 3
equipment, heating/cooling
equipment, lighting control 3
and pumps/compressors,
among others. 3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-135
 3.6 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Product Selection
3
D99 Series
3 D99210ACZ1
Contact Rated Current
Input Voltage Output Voltage Configuration Switching Type Load (Amps) Catalog Number
3 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99210ACZ1

3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99210ACZ2

90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99225ACZ1
3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99225ACZ2
90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99240ACZ1
3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99240ACZ2
90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99610ACZ1
3 3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99610ACZ2

3 90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99625ACZ1

3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99625ACZ2
3 90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99640ACZ1
3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99640ACZ2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-136 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
Technical Data and Specifications
3
D99 Series 3
Description Units D99210ACZ1 D99210ACZ2 D99225ACZ1 D99225ACZ2 D99240ACZ1 D99240ACZ2
Output Characteristics
3
Contact configuration SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO 3
Switching device SCR SCR SCR SCR SCR SCR
Current rating A 10 10 25 25 40 40 3
Switching type Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross
Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk) V 35 35 35 35 35 35
3
Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 500 200 500 500 500 500
3
Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 8 8 16 16 20 20
Motor load rating (rms) A 4.5 4.5 8 8 14 14 3
Min. load current to maintain on mA 50 50 120 120 250 250
Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 83 83 800 800 800 800 3
Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 24 24 40 40 100 100
Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 10 10 10 10 10 10
3
Typical on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.25 1.25 1.35 1.35 1.6 1.6 3
Max. on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.8 1.8 1.6 1.6
Max. I2t for fusing (A2) 83 83 3700 3700 3700 83 3
Input Characteristics
Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 1 DC
3
Typical input impedance ohms 16–25k Current regulator 16–25k Current regulator 13k Current regulator
Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 12 12 12 12 16 16
3
Reverse polarity protection NA Yes NA Yes NA Yes 3
Performance Characteristics
Operating time (response time) 3
ON ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 10
OFF ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 10
3
Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
3
Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
Environment 3
Product certifications UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE
Ambient air temperature 3
Storage °C –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100
Operating °C –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80
3
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3
Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.43 1.5 0.43 3
Integral heat sink °C/W 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2
Weight g (oz) 320 (11.3) 320 (11.3) 320 (11.3) 326 (11.5) 320 (11.3) 332 (11.7) 3
LED—input Green Green Green Green Green Green
Terminal wire capacity AWG (mm2) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10)
3
Terminal torque (max.) in-lb (Nm) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-137
 3.6 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

D99 Series, continued

3 Description Units D99610ACZ1 D99610ACZ2 D99625ACZ1 D99625ACZ2 D99640ACZ1 D99640ACZ2

3 Output Characteristics
Contact configuration SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO
3 Switching device SCR SCR SCR SCR SCR SCR
Current rating A 10 10 25 10 40 40
3 Switching type Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross
Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk) V 35 35 35 35 35 35
3 Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 200 200 700 700 500 500

3 Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 8 8 16 16 20 20

Motor load rating (rms) A 4.5 4.5 8 8 14 14
3 Min. load current to maintain on mA 80 80 250 250 250 250
Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 83 83 1000 1000 800 800
3 Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 24 24 50 50 100 100

3 Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 10 10 10 10 10 10

Typical on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.25 1.25 1.35 1.35 1.6 1.6
3 Max. on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
Max. I2t for fusing (A2) 83 83 1700 1700 3700 3700
3 Input Characteristics
Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 1 DC
3 Typical input impedance ohms 16–25k Current regulator 16–25k Current regulator 13k Current regulator

3 Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 12 16 12 16 16 16

Reverse polarity protection NA Yes NA Yes NA Yes
3 Performance Characteristics
Operating time (response time)
3 ON ms 8.33 8.3 8.33 8.3 10 10
OFF ms 8.33 8.3 8.33 8.3 10 10
3 Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

3 Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
Environment
3 Product certifications UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE
Ambient air temperature
3 Storage °C –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100

3 Operating °C –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80

Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

3 Miscellaneous Characteristics
Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 1.8 1.8 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43
3 Integral heat sink °C/W 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2
Weight g (oz) 320 (11.3) 321 (11.3) 326 (11.5) 326 (11.5) 332 (11.7) 332 (11.7)
3 LED—input Green Green Green Green Green Green

3 Terminal wire capacity AWG (mm2) 8 (10) 9 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10)
Terminal torque (max.) in-lb (Nm) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4)
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-138 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays
3.6
Temperature Derating Curves
10 Amp Styles 40 Amp Styles
3
12 40 3
10 30 3
Current in amps

Current in amps
8 25
3
6 20
3
4 15
3
2 10
3
0 0
0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90° 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90°
3
Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C)

3
3
25 Amp Styles
3
25 3
3
Current in amps

20

15
3
10
3
5
3
0
0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90° 3
Ambient Temperature (°C)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-139
 3.6 Control Relays and Timers
Solid-State Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 D99 Series

1
3

Output
Input
3
+

2
3
3.20 1.20
(80.0) (30.0)
3
3
1.20
3 (30.0)

3
0.05
3 4.20
(1.20)
(107.0)
3
3
3
3 3.10
(77.5)
0.20 (5.0) 0.20 (5.0)
3 Radius Radius

3
0.50 (11.9)
3
3 3.70
(92.9)
3 4.00
(102.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-140 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
Machine Tool Relays Contents
Description Page
3
Machine Tool Relays 3
D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . V7-T3-142
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact 3
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-147
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact 3
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-153
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole 3
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-158
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole 3
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-163
3
3
3
3
Product Overview 3
Eaton’s machine tool relay
offering includes a variety of
3
NEMA type relays. Included
in this are open style relays 3
and relays with convertible
or side-mount contacts. Also 3
included in this family are a
variety of accessories to
match the application,
3
including suppressors, timing
contacts and enclosures. The 3
relay coils are available in a
variety of line and control 3
level voltages.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-141
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole Contents

3 Description Page
3 D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-143
3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-144
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-145
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-146
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact
3 Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-147
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
3 Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-153
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
3 with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-158
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
3 with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-163

3
3
3 D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole
3 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits
Contact poles on the D15 Side-mounted contact ● 600 V, 10 A continuous ● Contact pole terminals
3 relay are of the fixed design blocks can be used to thermal current have captive, backed-out,
and are not convertible. The provide additional poles ● State indicator visually self-lifting pressure plates
basic four-pole relay will in applications where a with ± screws—reduced
3 accept a front-mounted pneumatic timer is installed
shows relay ON or OFF
wiring time
status
contact pole deck and/or side- on the front of the relay. ● All terminals are shrouded
3 mounted contact blocks (one They can also be used where
● Relay base has mounting
holes on 35 x 60 mm or “finger-proofed” to
per side). In addition, a side- panel depth is restricted. centers, permitting direct reduce possibility of
3 mounted solid-state timer or
The maximum number of replacement of electrical shock
a front-mounted pneumatic competitive relays
contacts recommended per
3 timer can be added to the
relay. Only one front- relay is eight, six of which can ● Relay also mounts on
mounted attachment can be be NC. When a pneumatic 35 mm DIN rail as standard Standards and Certifications
3 added to the basic relay. timer is used, the maximum ● Magnet coil has three ● UL
recommended number of terminals, permitting either ● CSA certified
3 NC contacts is three. top or diagonal wiring—
Relays with DC coils are easy to replace European
3 supplied with a coil clearing or U.S. relays without
NC contact mounted on the changing wiring layout
3 side of the relay.

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-142 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
Product Selection
3
When Ordering, Specify
Catalog number and magnet coil code letter. Example: For a four-pole relay having 3
4NO contacts with a 120 V 60 Hz coil, order Catalog Number D15CR40AB.
Factory-Assembled Multipole Relays 3
Number of Type of Contacts Open Type
Poles NO NC Catalog Number 1 3
D15CR40_B 4 4 0 D15CR40_B
3
3 1 D15CR31_B
2 2 D15CR22_B 3
1 3 D15CR13_B
0 4 D15CR04_B 3
3

D15CR60_B 6 6 0 D15CR60_B
3
(four-pole relay with two-pole
front-mounted deck) 5 1 D15CR51_B 3
4 2 D15CR42_B
3 3 D15CR33_B 3
2 4 D15CR24_B
1 5 D15CR15_B 2
3
D15CR06_B 2
0 6
3
D15CR80_B 8 8 0 D15CR80_B
(four-pole relay with four-pole
front-mounted deck)
7 1 D15CR71_B 3
6 2 D15CR62_B
5 3 D15CR53_B 3
4 4 D15CR44_B
3 5 D15CR35_B 2
3
2 6 D15CR26_B 2
3
Additional Contact Poles Magnet Coil Selection 3
Catalog AC Coils Code DC Coils Code
Description Number Volts and Hertz Suffix Volts Suffix
3
Front Contact Pole Deck 120/60 or 110/50 A 12 R1
1NO-1NC C320KGT3 240/60 or 220/50 B 24 T1 3
2NO C320KGT4 480/60 or 440/50 C 48 W1
2NC C320KGT5 600/60 or 550/50 D 120 A1
3
1NO (early closing)–1NC (late opening) C320KGT7 208/60 E
3
4NO C320KGT13 277/60 H
3NO-1NC C320KGT14 208–240/60 J 3
2NO-2NC C320KGT15 24/60 T
1NO-3NC C320KGT16 3
4NC C320KGT17
Side-Mounted Contact Blocks
3
1NO-1NC C320KGS3
3
2NO C320KGS4
2NC C320KGS5 3
1NO (early closing)–1NC (late opening) C320KGS7

Notes
3
1 Underscore indicates missing code suffix for magnet coil—see Magnet Coil Selection table above.
2 Not all suffix codes available: consult Customer Support Center.
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-143
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Accessories
3
C320 Pneumatic Pneumatic Timer Attachment C32MP1 Metal Mounting Plate
3 Timer Attachment Catalog Catalog
Timing Range Number Description Number
3 0.1 to 30 seconds C320TP1 Metal mounting plate C321MP1
10 to 180 seconds C320TP2
3
Maximum Ampere Ratings
3 Volts AC
Description 120 240 480 600
3 Fits all D15 multipole relays.
Make 30 15 7.5 6
Break 3 1.5 0.75 0.6 Mounting Channel (DIN Rail)
3 DIN Rail
Catalog
Attachment mounts on top of timed contacts—circuits in Description Number
3 any Freedom Series relay each pole must be the same
1 meter length XBANS3575P
(top-mounted auxiliary polarity. Units are convertible
3 contacts can not be installed
on device when timer is
from OFF to ON delay or
vice-versa.
used). Timer unit has DPST
3 Designed for DIN rail
Finger Protection Shields mounting of Freedom
3 Catalog Series relays.
Application Number
3 D15 C320LS1 C320TS2 Transient Suppressor Kits
Coil Voltage Catalog
3 Snap-on shields for both Finger Protection. Prevents Description 50/60 Hz 5 Number
contactors and starters accidental contact with line/ Transient 24/120 V C320TS1
3 provide IEC Type IP20 load terminals.
Suppressor 208/240 V C320TS2
Adhesive Dust Cover 277/480 V C320TS3
3
Catalog
Description Number
3
25 to a package C320DSTCVR These kits limit high voltage
3 These adhesive stickers applied to side opening
transients produced in the
control circuit when power is
come 25 to a package and where auxiliaries are not removed from the contactor
3 provide extra protection from installed and provide extra or starter coil. There are three
contaminants when applied protection from metal filings separate suppressors for use
3 to the sides of Freedom D15.
Adhesive covers are easily
and other debris. on 24–120 V, 208–240 V or
27–480 V coils respectively.
3 Solid-State Timer Solid-State ON DELAY Timer 1 These devices mount directly
Catalog to the coil terminals.
3 Timing Range Number 234
0.1 to 1.0 seconds C320TDN1_ Notes
3 1 to 30 seconds C320TDN30_
1 Side mounted on Freedom Series NEMA 00–2, D15, IECA-K and C25D, C25E and C25F frame.
2 Add operating voltage suffix to catalog number; A = 120 V, B = 240 V, E = 208 V.

3 30 to 300 seconds C320TDN300_ 3 Rated 0.5 ampere pilot duty—not to be used on larger contactors.

5 to 30 minutes C320TDN3000_ 4 Terminal connections are quick connects only. Two per side.

3 This timer is designed to be

5 Suppressor is compatible with coil voltages/ranges as shown, both 50 and 60 Hz.

wired in series with the

3 load (typically a coil). When
the START button is pushed
3 (power applied to timer), the
ON delay timing function
3 starts. At the completion of
the set timing period, timer
and series wired load will
3 both be energized.

3
3

V7-T3-144 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
C320DC AC/DC Interface Module— The Catalog Number C320DC provisions for DIN rail
Controller Coil Voltage Ranges Interface Module is an mounting. 3
Controller Catalog Controller Coil Range optically isolated solid-state
The module will operate coils
Number Prefix Size or Rating Volts AC switch that provides a means
within the voltage ranges
3
of operating AC coils with a
AE16, AE17, AE56, A–F 24–240 shown in the table to the left.
AE57, CE15, CE55
G–K 48–240
24 Vdc control signal. It acts
as a space-saving interposing
3
Design Characteristics
L–N 110–240 relay that can switch a
specified 50/60 Hz AC source ● DC input: 24 V ±10% at 3
AN16, AN56, 00–0 24–240
CN15, CN55 to the contactor or starter coil. mA nominal
1–2 48–240
The module may be directly
● AC operating voltage: 3
3 110–240 24–240 Vac ±10%
attached to the coil terminals
CN35 10–30 A 24–240 of any Freedom Series
50/60 Hz 3
60 A 48–240 contactor or starter—NEMA
● AC current rating:
100 A 110–240
Sizes 00–3, D15, IEC Sizes 10 A make (inrush), 3
A–N and lighting contactors 1 A break (sealed)
10–100 A. It also has 3
Typical Application—Solid-State Switch
3
Contactor Coil
24 Vdc 3
Input
24–240 Vac
Observe
Polarity on 50/60 Hz 3
Module
3
3
Technical Data and Specifications
3
Contact Ratings—NEMA A600 Example of Terminal Marking with 2NO and 2NC Contacts
Continuous Thermal Rating: 10 A
Location
3
AC Volts Make Break Status
(NO or NC)
120 60 6.0 13 21 31 43
3
240 30 3.0
480 15 1.5
3
600 12 1.2 3
14 22 32 44
Contact Ratings—NEMA P300 3
Continuous Thermal Rating: 5 A Relay terminals are identified The first digit indicates the
DC Volts Make/Break Amperes by a two-digit number in location of the contact on the 3
125 1.1
accordance with International relay. The numbering begins
Standards approved by with 1 and continues without 3
250 0.55 CENELEC (European a break from left to right.
Committee for Electro-
The second digit indicates 3
technical Standardization).
Magnet Coil Data The number is marked on the status of the contacts
the relay and is used to (NO or NC). Terminal marking 3
Pickup Sealed
AC
identify location and status 1 and 2 mean NC and 3 and
Voltage VA Watts VA Watts
of the contacts. 4 mean NO. 3
12–600 V 80 49 7.5 2.4

Pickup Sealed
3
DC
Voltage Amps Watts VA Watts
3
12 6.4 76.8 0.28 3.36
24 3.2 76.8 0.14 3.36 3
48 1.6 76.8 0.07 3.36
120 0.64 76.8 0.028 3.36 3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-145
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 D15 Four-Pole Relay

0.54 0.54
3 (13.7) (13.7)
1.8
(45.7)
3 C

3
Side 2.96
3 2.36
(59.9)
Frt.
Mtd.
Acc.
Mtd. (75.2)
Blk.
3
3 1.36
(34.5) Optional Additional
3 Mtg. Holes for Contact Poles
M4 or #8 Screws or Accessories

3
3 D15 Six- and Eight-Pole Relays
0.54 0.54
3 (13.7) (13.7)
1.8
(45.7)
3 4.66
(118.4)

3
Frt. Side 2.96
3 2.36
(59.9)
Mtd.
Acc.
Mtd.
Blk.
(75.2)

3
3 1.36
(34.5) Optional Additional
3 Mtg. Holes for Contact Poles
or Accessories
M4 or #8 Screws
3
3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights
Shipping Weights
3 Description Dimension C Lbs (kg)
Relay only 3.30 (83.8) 1.3 (0.6)
3 Relay with timer attachment 5.55 (141.0) 1.5 (0.7)

3 Relay with front contact pole deck 4.66 (118.4) 1.7 (0.8)

3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-146 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control Contents
Description Page
3
D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-142 3
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial
Control 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-148
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-150 3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-151
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-152 3
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-153 3
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-158 3
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-163 3
3
3
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control 3
Product Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications 3
Type BF is AC operated, ● UL recognized, UL File No.
300 V maximum, and the Wiring to Relay E19223 (AC relays only) 3
BFD is DC operated, 250 V. ● In parallel with coil—one ● CSA certified, File No.
timed and up to 12
Fixed contact relays are
available in any combination instantaneous contacts, or
LR39402-6, LR28548-10, 3
11 (AC and DC relays)
of NO and NC from two to 12 ● In series with coil—up
poles. BF and BFD relays to 12 timed contacts in 3
have captive clamp terminals one relay
fully accessible from the 3
front, a molded coil with low Permanent Magnet Latch
operating temperature and ● Field mountable on Catalog 3
silver alloy contacts suitable Number BF; factory
for low voltage circuits. installed on BFD 3
● Latch coil continuously
rated 3
● Latch plunger adjustable
for optimum performance 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-147
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Product Selection
3
When Ordering, Specify
3 ● Catalog number of basic relay
● If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table and
3 substitute it for the last letter in the catalog number. Example: BF80V for a 110/60 AC coil

3 Type BF Complete Relay—Type BF and BFD, Two-, Three-, Four- and Six-Pole 1
BFD 250 Vdc Basic
3 BF 300 Vac Basic Relays Relays
Type of Contact 120/60, 110/50 AC Coil 120 DC Coil

3 Number
of Poles NO (Form A) NC (Form B)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number

3 2 2 0 BF20F BFD20S
1 1 BF11F BFD11S
3 0 2 BF02F BFD02S
Type BFD 3 3 0 BF30F BFD30S
3 2 1 BF21F BFD21S 2
1 2 BF12F BFD12S
3 0 3 BF03F BFD03S

3 4 4 0 BF40F BFD40S
3 1 BF31F BFD31S
3 2 2 BF22F BFD22S
1 3 BF13F BFD13S
3 0 4 BF04F BFD04S

3 6 6 0 BF60F BFD60S
5 1 BF51F BFD51S
3 4 2 BF42F BFD42S
3 3 BF33F BFD33S
3 2 4 BF24F BFD24S
0 6 BF06F BFD06S
3
3 Coil Voltage
BF Coils BFD Coils
3 Volts AC Hz Suffix Code Volts DC Suffix Code

3 12 60 H 6 C
24 60 I 12 D
3 48 60 J 24 L
110 60 V 38 N
3 110/120 50/60 F 48 M
208 60 K 72 E
3
220/240 50/60 G 95 B

3 440 60 C 120 S
130 U
3 240 T

3 Notes
1 Relays listed above with equal number of NO and NC contact poles are specially priced—1NO and 1NC pole

are supplied at no additional charge.

3 2 Consult Customer Support Center for availability.

3
3
3

V7-T3-148 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
When Ordering, Specify
● Catalog number of basic relay 3
● If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table and
substitute it for the last letter in the catalog number. Example: BF80V for a 110/60 AC coil 3
Type BF Complete Relay—Type BF and BFD, Eight-, 10- and 12-Pole 1 3
BFD 250 Vdc Basic
BF 300 Vac Basic Relays Relays 3
Type of Contact 120/60, 110/50 AC Coil 120 DC Coil
Number
of Poles NO (Form A) NC (Form B)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
3
8 8 0 BF80F BFD80S 3
7 1 BF71F BFD71S
6 2 BF62F BFD62S 3
Type BFD 5 3 BF53F BFD53S
4 4 BF44F BFD44S
3
0 8 BF08F BFD08S
3
10 10 0 BF100F BFD100S
8 2 BF82F BFD82S 2 3
7 3 BF73F 2 BFD73S
6 4 BF64F BFD64S 3
5 5 BF55F BFD55S 2

4 6 BF46F BFD46S
3
2 8 BF28F BFD28S 3
12 12 0 BF120F BFD120S
8 4 BF84F BFD84S 3
7 5 BF75F BFD75S
6 6 BF66F BFD66S
3
5 7 BF57F BFD57S
3
4 8 BF48F BFD48S

3
Coil Voltage 3
BF Coils BFD Coils
Volts AC Hz Suffix Code Volts DC Suffix Code 3
12 60 H 6 C
24 60 I 12 D 3
48 60 J 24 L
110 60 V 38 N
3
110/120 50/60 F 48 M 3
208 60 K 72 E
220/240 50/60 G 95 B 3
440 60 C 120 S
130 U 3
240 T
3
Notes
1 Relays listed above with equal number of NO and NC contact poles are specially priced—1NO and 1NC pole

are supplied at no additional charge.

3
2 Consult Customer Support Center for availability.
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-149
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Permanent Magnet Permanent Magnet Latch

3 Latch, Relay Mounted Coil Catalog
Volts Coil Hz Number
3 AC Relays
BFMLI 2
3 24 60
48 60 BFMLJ 2
3 110/120 50/60 BFMLF
220/240 50/60 BFMLG
3 DC Relays
24 — BFMLL
3 48 — BFMLM

3 120 — BFMLS
240 — BFMLT
3
3
Options
3
FASTON Push-On Terminals NEMA 1 Enclosure for Relay Types
3 Code Catalog Code Catalog
Description Letter Number Description Letter Number
3 Insert letter F after relay type designation in listed catalog F — BF, AR—all poles — 4977D40G04
number. Example: BFF20F or BFDF20S
BFD—4–8 poles — 4977D40G04
3 ARD—4–8 poles — 4977D40G04

3 Overlapping Contacts
Notes
1 For panel mount, add Suffix F.
2 Consult Customer Support Center for availability.
3 Description
Code
Letter
Catalog
Number

3 NO contact closes before corresponding NC contact opens—

supplied as NO/NC set(s). Insert letter A after relay
A —

type designation in listed catalog number. Example: BFA22F

3 or BFDAF22S

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-150 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
Technical Data and Specifications
3
General Specifications
BF Relay Electrical Ratings—NEMA A300
3
Maximum Current Maximum VA
Volts Cont. Make Break Make Break
3
120 10 60 6 7200 720
3
240 10 30 3 7200 720

Horsepower Ratings (UL Recognized) DC Rating—NEMA P300

3
AC Volts Maximum Current
Phase 115 230 Volts Cont. Make Break
Max. Make
or Break (VA)
3
1 1/6 1/2 125 5.0 1.1 1.1 138
3
3 — 1 250 5.0 0.55 0.55 138

Resistive Rating
3
125 Vdc 3A
3
250 Vdc 1.5 A

Coil Power Requirements

3
AC 72 VA open, 22 VA closed 3
DC 12 watts (nominal), 250 V max.
3
Permanent Magnet Latch Specifications
Item Specification 3
Unlatching power requirements Open gap: 24 VA AC
Closed gap: 7 VA 3
Burden: 4 watts (AC)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-151
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Contact Arrangements—BF and BFD Relays

3
2 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles

3
3
3 6 Poles 8 Poles

3
Rear Rear
3
3 Front Front

3 10 Poles 12 Poles

3
Rear Rear
3
Center Center
3
3 Front Front

3 Note: NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed

3 Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
BF Relay with Permanent BFD Relay with Solid-State Enclosures—NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD
3 Magnet Latch and Solid- Timer
2.83
State Timer
(71.9) 5.66
3 (143.8)
1.05 1.72 1.72 0.19 (4.8)
(26.7) (43.7) (43.7)
3 KO KO KO
KO
E 0.25 (6.4) Dia.
3 B
C 6.59
4.5
Mtg. Holes (3)
D (167.4)
A (114.3)
3 0.63
(16)
KO
KO KO KO
3 3.13
(79.5)
1.97
(50)
3.13
(79.5)
1.69
(42.9)
0.38 x 0.5
1.69 (42.9)
(9.7 x 12.7) A
3 3.38 (85.9) Conduit
(2 Top, 2 Bottom)

3
BF and BFD Relay Dimensions NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD Dimensions
3 Number A B C D E Catalog A
of Poles BF Only BF w/Latch BF w/Timer BFD Only BFD w/Timer Poles Number NEMA 1

3 4 3.22 (81.8) 6.22 (158.0) 5.88 (149.4) 4.03 (102.4) 7.06 (179.3) Relays without Attachments
8 4.19 (106.4) 7.19 (182.6) 6.88 (174.8) 4.97 (126.2) 8.00 (203.2) All BF, AR, ARD 5.34 (135.6)
3 12 4.81 (122.2) 7.81 (198.4) 7.50 (190.5) 5.63 (143.0) 8.66 (220.0) 4–8 BFD 5.34 (135.6)
10, 12 BFD 7.97 (202.4)
3 Relays with Attachments

3 All BF, AR, ARD 7.97 (202.4)

3
3

V7-T3-152 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control Contents
Description Page
3
D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-142 3
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-147 3
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-154
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-155 3
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-155
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-156 3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-157
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole 3
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-158
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole 3
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-163
3
3
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control 3
Product Description Features and Benefits Operation 3
The AR/ARD relays are Permanent Magnet Latch Surge Suppressor AR relays are available in
electromechanical convertible By energizing the relay coil, ● Mounts in contact cavity of either four- or six-pole 3
contact relays. AR relays are the latch attachment “sets” AR relays configurations. AR relays are
AC devices and the ARD is
for DC applications.
(when the base relay’s ● Limits high transient easily converted to eight- or
10-poles simply by adding a
3
armature/crossbar assembly voltages resulting from de-
four-pole deck. In addition,
has closed) holding the relay
ON, even after the relay coil
energizing relay coil or
mechanical latch attachments 3
Application Description other electromechanical
has been de-energized. The devices are available with four- and
Type AR and ARD relays are
designed for use on machine clearing coil on the latch is ● Protects sensitive
six-pole relays. 3
tools, process lines, energized to release the instruments and solid-state Contacts are convertible from
conveyors and similar armature/crossbar assembly. devices NO to NC, to provide any
3
automatic and semi- ● Field mountable to four- ● 120 Vac maximum, not combination desired up to a
automatic equipment. and six-pole used on Vdc maximum of 10. For the ARD, 3
● Latch plunger is adjustable ● For noise suppression, see the number of poles cannot
● Latch coil continuously Catalog Number SS-56 exceed four NC in any pole 3
starter mounted surge configuration. Wide spacing
rated
● Unlatching power suppressor. of contacts simplifies
installation, contact testing and
3
requirements maintenance. Contacts are
● Open gap: 24 VA electrically and mechanically 3
● Closed gap: 7 VA isolated from each other.
● Burden: 4 watts AC, 6 Overlap contacts are also 3
watts DC available in one or two sets.
These contacts should be 3
mounted in the center pole
positions. AC and DC contact
cartridges should not be used
3
in the same relay.
3
Standards and Certifications
● UL File No. E19223 3
● CSA File No. LR39402-6,
LR54517 and LR54520 3
3
Reference Information
● ART, ARTD: IL 14510,
3
IL 14485
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-153
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Product Selection
3
When Ordering, Specify
3 ● Catalog number of basic relay with 120/60, 110/50 AC coil from AR/ARD Relays table.
● If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table below
3 and substitute it for the last letter in the catalog number. Example: AR64V for a 110/60 AC coil.

3 AR/ARD Relays AR/ARD Relays

AR 600 Vac Relays ARD 600 Vdc Relays
3 Contact 120/60, 110/50 AC Coil 120 DC Coil
Number Blank Catalog Catalog
3 of Poles NO NC Cavities Number Number
4 0 0 4 AR4A ARD4S
3 2 0 2 AR420A ARD420S
4 0 0 AR440A ARD440S
3 6 0 0 6 AR6A ARD6S

3 4 0 2 AR640A —
6 0 0 AR660A ARD660S
3 81 6 0 2 AR860A ARD860S 2
8 0 0 AR880A ARD880S
3 10 1 10 0 0 AR10100A ARD10100S

3 Coil Voltage
3 AR Coils ARD Coils
Volts AC Hz Suffix Code Volts DC Suffix Code
3 12 60 F 12 D
24 60 I 24 L
3 48 60 G 48 M

3 110 60 V 95 B
110/120 50/60 A 120 S
3 208 60 B 130 U
220/240 50/60 W 240 T
3 277 60 C
380/440 50/60 H
3 440/480 50/60 X

3 550 60 D
550/600 50/60 E
3
Contact Cartridges—600 V
3 Standard Contact Overlap Contact
Cartridge Cartridge
3 Terminal Catalog Catalog
Type Number 3 Number 4
3 AC Cartridges
With clamp terminals ARC AROC
3 With screw terminals ARCR AROCR

3 DC Cartridges
With clamp terminals ARDC ARDOC
3 With screw terminals ARDCR ARDOCR

Notes
3 1 Will not accept top-mounted latch or timers.
2 Contact Customer Support Center for availability.

3 3 Standard cartridges are sold in cartons of four cartridges. Catalog number is for single cartridge.
4 Overlap contact cartridges are sold in sets of two cartridges. Catalog number is for sets of two.

V7-T3-154 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
ARML Permanent Permanent Magnet Latch
Magnet Latch for Operating Catalog
3
AR/ARD Relays
Volts Coil Hz Number
For AC Control Circuits
3
24 60 ARMLI
3
48 60 ARMLG
120 60/50 ARMLA 3
240 60/50 ARMLW
For DC Control Circuits 3
24 — ARMLL
48 — ARMLM
3
120 — ARMLS
3
240 — ARMLT
3
3
Accessories
3
Four-Pole Top Deck Adder
● Increases contact capacity from four/six-poles to eight/10-poles 3
● Mounts on top of basic relay using three screws
● Will not interfere with wiring, testing or convertible cartridges 3
● Screw terminals for ring connectors available; to order, add
Suffix R to catalog number listed below 3
Four-Pole Top Four-Pole Top Deck Adder ARSS Surge Surge Suppressor 3
Deck Adder Contacts Suppressor for
No. of Blank Catalog
AR Relays Catalog
Number
3
Poles NO NC Cavities Number
With 600 Vac Cartridges
Surge Suppressor ARSS 3
4 2 0 2 ARA20
4 0 0 ARA40
3
With 600 Vdc Cartridges
3
4 2 0 2 ARDA20
4 0 0 ARDA40 3
3
Options 3
Convertible Contacts Overlapping Contacts
3
Code Catalog Code Catalog
Description Letter Number Description Letter Number
1
3
AR and ARD relays listed are supplied with NO contacts that — NO contact closes before corresponding NC contact opens — S or —
are easily converted to NC. If both NO and NC poles are supplied as NO/NC sets of two cartridges. Insert letter S after S2 1
required, order by catalog number. Example: four-pole relay relay type designation in listed catalog number. Example: 3
with 1NO and 3NC contacts, order AR413A. AR402AS. Specify the number of sets required: S for one set
and S2 for two sets.
3
Screw Terminals
Code Catalog Note 3
Description Letter Number 1 Consult Customer Support Center for availability.

For ring-type connectors, add suffix R to the catalog number. R — 3

Example: AR420AR.
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-155
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

3
General
3 Contact Ratings—600 Vac Cartridge NEMA A600
Maximum Current Maximum VA
3 Volts Cont. Make Break Make Break

3 120 10 60 6 7200 720

240 10 30 3 7200 720
3 480 10 15 1.5 7200 720
600 10 12 1.2 7200 720
3
DC Cartridges—NEMA P600
3 Maximum Current Maximum VA
Make or Make or
Volts Continuous Break Break
3
125 5 1.10 138
3 250 5 0.55 138
600 5 0.20 138
3
Resistive Rating

3 125 Vdc 3A
250 Vdc 1.5 A
3
Coil Power Requirements

3 AC 96 VA open, 14 VA closed
DC 14 watts open, 250 V max.
3
Voltage AR Relays ARD Relays
3 Pickup voltage (max.) 85% 65%
Dropout voltage (min.) 60% 15%
3 Voltage (max.) 110% 110%

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-156 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
Four- and Six-Pole with Four-Pole Adder, Solid-State Timer and Mechanical Latch 3
3.44 (87.4) 4.09 (103.9)
2.75 (69.9) Latch 2.88 (73.2) 2.88 (73.2) 3
S.S. Timer 3
Adder Deck 3
3
Base Relay
D 3
C
B
A
3
3
3.13
(79.5) 1.44 (36.6)
2.05
(52.1)
3
CL CL CL
of Mounting Slots of Mounting Slots of Mounting Slots
(2) for 0.164 Screws (2) for 0.164 Screws (2) for 0.164 Screws 3
End View, 4- and 6-Pole Side View, 4-Pole Side View, 6-Pole
3
Four- and Six-Pole with Four-Pole Adder, Solid-State Timer and Mechanical Latch
Relay 3
Catalog A B C D
Number Four-, Six-Pole Relays Relay Adder Relay with Timer Relay with Latch
3
AR 3.56 (90.4) 4.94 (125.5) 6.00 (152.4) 6.39 (162.3)
ARD 4.63 (117.6) 6.00 (152.4) 7.06 (179.3) 7.45 (189.2) 3
3
Enclosures—NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD
2.83 3
(71.9) 5.66
1.05 1.72
(143.8)
1.72 0.19 (4.8)
3
(26.7) (43.7) (43.7)
KO KO KO
KO
3
0.25 (6.4) Dia.
6.59
(167.4) 4.5
Mtg. Holes (3)
3
(114.3)
0.63
(16)
KO
3
KO KO KO

1.69 (42.9) 0.38 x 0.5 3

(9.7 x 12.7) A
3.38 (85.9) Conduit
(2 Top, 2 Bottom) 3
Enclosures—NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD
3
Poles
Catalog
Number
Dimension A
NEMA 1
3
Relays without Attachments
3
All BF, AR, ARD 5.34 (135.6)
4–8 BFD 5.34 (135.6) 3
10, 12 BFD 7.97 (202.4)
Relays with Attachments 3
All BF, AR, ARD 7.97 (202.4)
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-157
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts Contents

3 Description Page
3 D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-142
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial
3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-147
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
3 Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-153
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
3 with Convertible Contacts
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-159
3 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-161
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-162
3 D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-163
3
3
3
3 D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts
3 Product Description Features Options Standards and Certifications
Relays can be ordered as Contact poles D26MPR and Adding a front deck, the total ● UL listed—Class No.
3 complete devices in any pole D26MPF in 2- through 8-pole number of poles can be NKCR2, File E1230(N)
combination up to a relays are convertible NO to increased to 8, all convertible ● CSA certified—File LR353
3 maximum of 12NO or 8NC
and 4NO poles, or can be
NC or vice versa. Simply
reverse the terminal screws
NO to NC.

assembled from components and rotate the unit pole 180 ° Adding a D26MF, 4-pole fixed
3 shown on Page V7-T3-160. (in either direction). NO attachment, builds a 12-
pole relay with 8 convertible
3 Relay base assembly poles and 4 fixed NO poles.
(D26MB) will accept from 1
to 4 rear poles (D26MPR, Relays with mechanical latch
3 D26MPS and/or D26MPL). are available in any
convertible pole combination
3 up to eight poles maximum.

3
Normally Closed
3 Contact

3
3 Normally Open
Contact

3 To obtain overlapping
contacts, use D26MPS (NO
3 early closing) and D26MPL
(NC late opening) rear poles,
3 in related circuits.

3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-158 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
Product Selection
3
Complete AC Relays
When Ordering, Specify 3
● Catalog number and magnet coil suffix letter.
● Example: For a 4-pole relay having 4NO contacts, order Catalog Number D26MR40, with a 120 V, 3
60 Hz coil, order D26MR40A.
● For fast delivery and minimum inventory, it is recommended that component parts or complete 3
relays with NO poles be ordered.
Complete AC Relays—Open Type
3
4-Pole

Type of Contact Relay Only

Relay with
Mechanical Latch
3
Number Catalog Catalog
of Contacts NO (Form A) NC (Form B) Number Number 3
2 2 0 D26MR20 D26MR202
1 1 D26MR11 D26MR112 3
0 2 D26MR02 D26MR022
4-Pole with Latch 3 3 0 D26MR30 D26MR302 3
2 1 D26MR21 D26MR212
1 2 D26MR12 D26MR122
3
0 3 D26MR03 D26MR032
4 4 0 D26MR40 D26MR402
3
3 1 D26MR31 D26MR312
3
2 2 D26MR22 D26MR222

4-Pole with Pneumatic

1 3 D26MR13 D26MR132 3
Timer Attachment 0 4 D26MR04 D26MR042
61 6 0 D26MR60 D26MR602 3
5 1 D26MR51 D26MR512
4 2 D26MR42 D26MR422 3
3 3 D26MR33 D26MR332
2 4 D26MR24 D26MR242 3
1 5 D26MR15 D26MR152
0 6 D26MR06 D26MR062 3
81 8 0 D26MR80 D26MR802
7 1 D26MR71 D26MR712
3
6 2 D26MR62 D26MR622
5 3 D26MR53 D26MR532
3
4 4 D26MR44 D26MR442
3
3 5 D26MR35 D26MR352
2 6 D26MR26 D26MR262 3
1 7 D26MR17 D26MR172
0 8 D26MR08 D26MR082 3
Magnet Coil Selection 3
Volts/Hertz Suffix Code Volts/Hertz Suffix Code
120/60–110/50 A 32/60 2 V 3
240/60–220/50 B 12/60 2 R
208/60 2 E 6/60 P 3
24/60 T 380/50 2 L
277/60 H 480/60 or 440/50 C
3
600/60 or 550/50 2 D
3
Notes
1 10- and 12-Poles: The 6 and 8 contact relays (without mechanical latch only) listed above can be provided

with four additional NO non-convertible contacts. Add suffix number 4 to above listed catalog number plus
3
magnet coil suffix. Example: For a 12 contact relay, order D26MR804A.
2 Consult Customer Support Center for availability. 3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-159
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Relay Component Parts Location Relay Base Relay Base Assembly (without Poles)
3 Assembly Catalog
D26MF
Front Attachment Description Number
3 Timer Attachments or Relay base assembly D26MB 4
Mechanical Latch
3
D26MD10
3 Front Deck
D26MF
D26MB Basic four-pole D26 relay as needed, D26MPR,
Relay Base Front Attachment
3 Assembly Pneumatic Timer or without contacts. Provision D26MPL and/or D26MPS
Mechanical Latch for adding one to four poles rear pole type.
3 Front Deck (Convertible Contact Poles)
Rear Pole
3 Description
Catalog
Number

3 Relay with Pneumatic Timer Attachment Front Deck with …

Factory Installed (without Relay Contacts) 1NO contact pole D26MD10
3 Contact Timer Catalog 2NO contact poles D26MD20
Positions 1 Operation Number 2
4NO contact poles D26MD40
3 4 ON delay D26MR005
4 OFF delay D26MR006 Provides up to four additional
3 front pole type D26MPF
contacts. Convertible, NO
3 to NC.
The relays listed above will For additional information
3 accept up to four catalog on timer attachment, see Four-Pole Front Four-Pole Front Attachment
number D26MPR contacts Page V7-T3-161. Attachment (4NO Fixed Circuit)
3 (convertible—NO or NC) for
For assembly of relays from Description
Catalog
Number
instantaneous operation.
component parts and relay
3 Order contacts separately.
accessories, see components
Front attachment D26MF

tables below.
3
Rear Pole Separate Contacts
3 Catalog Can be added to any two- to relay. Four NO, non-
Description Number
eight-pole Type M, D26 relay convertible contacts are
3 Convertible Contacts to provide up to a 12-pole included in this assembly.
Front Pole Rear pole—NO D26MPR
3 Rear pole—NC D26MPR02
Notes
1 Number of available instantaneous contact positions (order contacts
Front pole—NO D26MPF
3 separately—Catalog Number D26MPR).
2 Consult Customer Support Center for availability.
Front pole—NC D26MPF02
3 To obtain overlapping contacts, these two special poles must be used in related circuits.
3 Gold plated
(for low power circuits)
4 Add magnet coil suffix letter, see Page V7-T3-159. Example: D26MBA.

3 Rear pole—NO D26MPR03

Front pole—NO D26MPF03

3 Non-Convertible Contacts
Rear pole NO early closing 3 D26MPS
3 Rear pole NC late opening 3 D26MPL

3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-160 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
Relay State Relay State Indicating Light Manual Test Accessory Manual Test Accessory
Indicating Light Catalog Catalog
3
Description Number Description Number
120 Vac, 50/60 Hz D26MAP120 Manual test accessory D26MTA
3
240 Vac, 50/60 Hz D26MAP240
3
Light provided with leads and used to monitor state
Tool to manually hold relays
in the energized position for
panel. (10 per box, order in
multiples of 10.)
3
bracket for mounting on two- of magnet coil or relay circuitry testing on completed
to 12-pole relays. May be contact operation. 3
Transient Suppressor Transient Suppressor
Pneumatic Timer Pneumatic Timer Attachment Catalog
3
Attachment Catalog Description Number
Description Number
Magnet coil transient suppressor D26MAS1 3
ON delay D26MTE Latch coil transient suppressor D26MAS2
OFF delay D26MTD
3
May be mounted on any Limits high voltage transients
120 Vac relay magnet coil produced in the circuit when 3
Attachment mounts on any 0- range—0.1 to 180 seconds, or latch coil or 120 Vdc latch power is removed from the
to four-pole D26 relay without
latch. Timer unit has DPDT
repeat accuracy ±10%.
Units are convertible from
coil—connects directly across coil. 3
coil terminals. All DC magnet
timed contacts (circuits in OFF delay to ON delay or
each pole must be the same vice versa.
coils have a built-in varistor
for transient suppression.
3
polarity). Adjustable timing
3
Mounting Channel Mounting Channel
Catalog 3
Description Number
10 in length for 4 relays D26MC4 3
20 in length for 8 relays D26MC8
30 in length for 12 relays D26MC12
3
40 in length for 16 relays D26MC16
3
Pre-spaced mounting for length. Captive mounting
adjacent relay installation. screws provided in channel 3
Indexed for cutting to desired for easier installation.
3
Technical Data and Specifications 3
General 3
Contact Ratings (Amperes) A600
Make and 3
Emergency

AC Volts 1
Interrupting
Capacity Break
Continuous
Thermal Rating
3
120 60 6 10
3
240 30 3 10
480 15 1.5 10 3
600 12 1.2 10
3
Coil Power Operating Time
Watts VA Range in 3
Relay Inrush Sealed Inrush Sealed Milliseconds
Two- to 12-pole 95.0 9 155 22 Pickup: 6–13 3
Latch coil 18.5 11 41 17 Dropout: 8–26

Note
3
1 For DC contact ratings, see Page V7-T3-165.
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-161
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 AC and DC D26 Relays

1 Slot 0.44
3 A D26MAS1 #10 Screw (11.2)

3
3
3.13
3.50
3 (88.9) 2 Holes
(79.5)
#10 Screw
3
3
0.75
3 D26MAS2 (19.1)
0.44
(11.2)
2.38 (60.5)
3 Max.
AC Relay DC Relay Ship. Wt.
3 D26 D26 Dimension A Lbs (kg)
1–4 poles 1–3 poles 4.00 (101.6) 2.5 (1.1)
3 1–4 poles with timer D26 or D87 1–3 poles with timer D26 or D87 6.00 (152.4) 3.3 (1.5)
1–4 poles with latch 1–2 poles with latch 6.13 (155.7) 3.5 (1.6)
3 1–4 poles with D26MF 1–3 poles with D26MF 5.81 (147.6) 2.8 (1.3)
5–8 poles 4–7 poles 5.25 (133.4) 2.8 (1.3)
3 5–8 poles with timer D87 4–7 poles with timer D87 7.25 (184.2) 3.5 (1.6)
5–8 poles with latch 3–6 poles with latch 7.31 (185.7) 3.8 (1.7)
3 9–12 poles 8–11 poles 7.00 (177.8) 3.0 (1.4)

3
Mounting Channel
3 A
0.69 B 1.06
3 (17.5)
2.50 2.38
(26.9) 0.38
(9.7)
(63.5) (60.5)

3 Type
M
3 3.63 Relay
(92.2) D26
3
3 1.25 2.50 1.38
(31.8) (63.5) (35.1)
3 Catalog
Number Dimension A Dimension B
3 D26MC16 40 (1016) 37.5 (952.5)
D26MC12 30 (762) 27.5 (698.5)
3 D26MC8 20 (508) 17.5 (444.5)
D26MC4 10 (254) 7.5 (190.5)
3
Note: Channel mounts through keyholes with #10 screws
3 (two each end and one every fourth relay). Relays mount with screws
captive in channel. All screws must be tightened firmly.

3
3
3

V7-T3-162 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts Contents
Description Page
3
D15 Series—Freedom 600 V Multipole . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-142 3
BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-147 3
AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact
Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-153 3
D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole
with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-158 3
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole
with Convertible Contacts 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-164
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-165 3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-166
3
3
3
D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts 3
Product Description Latch Operation 3
DC Type M Relay
Type M, DC multipole Component parts for With the latch coil de-
relays are physically and these relays are the same energized, energizing the 3
mechanically similar to as those listed for the (D26) relay coil will pick up the relay DC Input
the (D26) Type M AC
relays described on Page
Type M AC relays on Page
V7-T3-159, except for the
and mechanically latch it in
the pickup position. With the
LS1 3
Pick-Up
V7-T3-159. They differ only in Indicating Light, which is not relay coil de-energized,
the electrical ratings and applicable to a DC relay. energizing the latch coil will L = NC Late Opening
3
available pole combinations allow the relay to drop out.
due to the use of a normally Contact poles D26MPR and 3
closed late opening, coil D26MPF in 2- to 7-pole relays Convertible Contacts DC Type M Relay
are convertible NO to NC or with Latch
clearing contact, factory
vice versa. Simply reverse the
3
wired to the pickup winding DC Input Relay
of the magnet coil. (Contact is terminal screws and rotate Coil
shown as L in figure to the the unit pole 180 ° (in either Normally Closed
LS1 L
Pick-Up 3
right.) Magnet coil has built-in direction). Contact
Hold
varistor for transient
(Not Used)
L = NC Late Opening
3
suppression.
The mechanically latched Latch
3
Normally Open Coil
relay has one extra contact, Contact LS1 S
normally open early closing, Release
3
factory wired in series with S = NO Early Closing
the winding of the 3
intermittent rated latch coil.
(Contact is shown as S in 3
figure to the right.)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-163
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Product Selection
3
Complete DC Relays
3 When Ordering, Specify
● Catalog number and magnet coil suffix letter.
3 ● Example: For a 4-pole relay having 4NO contacts, order Catalog Number D26MRD40, with a
120 Vdc coil, order D26MRD40A1.
3 Complete DC Relays—Open Type
3-Pole
3 Type of Contact 1 Relay Only
Relay with
Mechanical Latch
Number Catalog Catalog
3 of Contacts NO (Form A) NC (Form B) Number Number
2 2 0 D26MRD20 D26MRD202
3 1 1 D26MRD11 D26MRD112
0 2 D26MRD02 D26MRD022
3 3 3 0 D26MRD30 D26MRD302
3-Pole with Latch
2 1 D26MRD21 D26MRD212
3 1 2 D26MRD12 D26MRD122

3 0 3 D26MRD03 D26MRD032
4 4 0 D26MRD40 D26MRD402

3 3 1 D26MRD31 D26MRD312
2 2 D26MRD22 D26MRD222
3 1 3 D26MRD13 D26MRD132
0 4 D26MRD04 D26MRD042
3 62 6 0 D26MRD60 D26MRD602
5 1 D26MRD51 D26MRD512
3 4 2 D26MRD42 D26MRD422
3 3 D26MRD33 D26MRD332
3 2 4 D26MRD24 D26MRD242
1 5 D26MRD15 D26MRD152
3 0 6 D26MRD06 D26MRD062
72 7 0 D26MRD70 —
3 6 1 D26MRD61 —

3 5
4
2
3
D26MRD52
D26MRD43
—
—

3 3 4 D26MRD34 —
2 5 D26MRD25 —
3 1 6 D26MRD16 —
0 7 D26MRD07 —
3
Magnet Coil Selection
3 Volts/Hertz Suffix Code Volts/Hertz Suffix Code
12 R1 120 A1
3 24 T1 240 B1
48 W1
3
Notes
3 1 Relay has additional factory wired normally closed coil clearing contact (see diagram).
2 10- and 11-Poles: The 6 and 7 contact relays (without mechanical latch only) listed above can be provided with four

additional NO non-convertible contacts. Add suffix number 4 to above listed catalog number plus magnet coil suffix.
3 Example: For an 11 contact relay, order D26MRD704A1.

3
3
3
3

V7-T3-164 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays
3.7
3-Pole with Timer Relay with Pneumatic Timer Attachment
Attachment (without Relay Contacts) 3
Contact Timer Catalog
Positions 1 Operation Number 3
3 ON delay D26MRD005
3 OFF delay D26MRD006
3
3
The relays listed above will Order contacts separately.
accept up to three catalog For additional information 3
number D26MPR contacts on timer attachment, see
(convertible—NO or NC) for
instantaneous operation.
Page V7-T3-161. 3
3
Technical Data and Specifications 3
General 3
Contact Ratings (Amperes) 2

DC Volts
Inductive
Make/Break
Resistive
Make/Break
3
28 7.0 10.0 3
48 2.5 10.0
120 1.1 2.0 3
240 0.2 0.4
3
Coil Power Operating Time
Watts Average 3
Relay Inrush Sealed Milliseconds
Two- to 11-pole 168 13.2 Pickup: 10 3
Latch coil 21.6 intermittent 21.6 intermittent Dropout: 16
3
Notes
1 Number of available instantaneous contact positions (order contacts

separately—Catalog Number D26MPR).

3
2 Contact ratings do not apply to contacts D26MPL and D26MPS.

For AC contact ratings, see Page V7-T3-161. 3

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-165
 3.7 Control Relays and Timers
Machine Tool Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 AC and DC D26 Relays

1 Slot 0.44
3 A D26MAS1 #10 Screw (11.2)

3
3
3.13
3.50
3 (88.9) 2 Holes
(79.5)
#10 Screw
3
3
0.75
3 D26MAS2 (19.1)
0.44
(11.2)
2.38 (60.5)
3 Max.
AC Relay DC Relay Ship. Wt.
3 D26 D26 Dimension A Lbs (kg)
1–4 poles 1–3 poles 4.00 (101.6) 2.5 (1.1)
3 1–4 poles with timer D26 or D87 1–3 poles with timer D26 or D87 6.00 (152.4) 3.3 (1.5)
1–4 poles with latch 1–2 poles with latch 6.13 (155.7) 3.5 (1.6)
3 1–4 poles with D26MF 1–3 poles with D26MF 5.81 (147.6) 2.8 (1.3)
5–8 poles 4–7 poles 5.25 (133.4) 2.8 (1.3)
3 5–8 poles with timer D87 4–7 poles with timer D87 7.25 (184.2) 3.5 (1.6)
5–8 poles with latch 3–6 poles with latch 7.31 (185.7) 3.8 (1.7)
3 9–12 poles 8–11 poles 7.00 (177.8) 3.0 (1.4)

3 Mounting Channel
3 0.69
A
1.06
B
(17.5) (26.9) 0.38
3 2.50
(63.5)
2.38
(60.5) (9.7)

3 Type
M

3 3.63
(92.2)
Relay
D26

3
3 1.25
(31.8)
2.50
(63.5)
1.38
(35.1)

3 Catalog
Number Dimension A Dimension B

3 D26MC16 40 (1016) 37.5 (952.5)

D26MC12 30 (762) 27.5 (698.5)
3 D26MC8 20 (508) 17.5 (444.5)
D26MC4 10 (254) 7.5 (190.5)
3 Note: Channel mounts through keyholes with #10 screws
(two each end and one every fourth relay). Relays mount with screws
3 captive in channel. All screws must be tightened firmly.

3
3
3

V7-T3-166 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
Timing Relays Contents
Description Page
3
Timing Relays 3
Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-172
TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-176 3
TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-179
TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-183 3
TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-185
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Selection Guide 3
Function Code Cross-Reference Guide 3
Timer Series
Function Description Universal TR TR TMR5 TMR6 TMRP E5-248 3 3
1 Asymmetrical flasher, pause first lp — R/P — — RC DLY
2 Asymmetrical flasher, pulse first li — Y — — RC 3
3 ON delay and OFF delay with control contact ER — — — — —
4 ON delay and single shot leading edge voltage controlled EWu — — — — —
3
5 ON delay and single shot leading edge control contact EWs — — — — —
3
6 Single shot leading and single shot trailing edge with control contact WsWa — — — — —
7 Pulse sequence monitoring Wt — — — — — 3
8 ON delay, power triggered E A1 N — A —
9 Single shot leading edge voltage controlled Wu B1 T — C — 3
10 OFF delay/signal OFF delay R E 2 F — D OFF DLY
11 Single shot leading edge with control input Ws F2 C/G — H SS
3
12 Single shot trailing edge with control input Wa — — — — — 3
13 ON delay control signal start, trailing edge OFF Es — — — — —
14 Flasher, pause first Bp C1 L — B — 3
15 Retriggerable single shot — — W/D — E SS
16 Flasher, ON first — D1 — — F —
3
17 ON delay control signal start, leading edge OFF — A2 — — — ON DLY
3
18 Flasher—control signal start, pause first — B2 — — — RC DLY
19 Flasher—control signal start, ON first — C2 — — — RC 3
20 Signal ON/OFF delay — D2 — — — —
21 ON/OFF delay — — — — I — 3
22 Single pulse generator — — — — G OS
23 Memory latch — — — — J —
3
24 True OFF delay — — — X — —
3
Notes
1 Applies to TRN model only. 3
2 Applies to TRF model only.
3 The E5-248 is battery powered and has three programmable trigger functions.
3
This product may perform somewhat differently from the standard timing relays.
Refer to the operator instructions for details.
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-167
 3.8 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Product Overview
3 Timer Function Descriptions
3 Function #1—Universal TR, TMR5, E5-248 Function #4—Universal TR
Asymmetrical Flasher, Pause First ON Delay and Single Shot Leading Edge Voltage Controlled
3 Repeat Cycle, OFF/ON Delay
When the supply voltage U After the interval t2 has When the supply voltage U switches into OFF position. If
3 is applied, the set interval t1 expired, the output relay is applied, the set interval t1 the supply voltage is
begins. After the interval t1 switches into OFF position. begins. After the interval t1 interrupted before the interval
3 has expired, the output relay The output relay is triggered has expired, the output relay t1 + t2 has expired, the
R switches into ON position at the ratio of t1:t2 until the R switches into ON position interval already expired is
3 and the set interval t2 begins. supply voltage is interrupted. and the set interval t2 begins.
After the interval t2 has
erased and is restarted
when the supply voltage is
expired, the output relay next applied.
3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U)
3 LED U/t* LED U/t*

3 Output LED** Output LED**

Output Relay (R) t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 Output Relay (R) t1 t2

3
3 Function #2—Universal TR, TMR5, E5-248 Function #5—Universal TR
Asymmetrical Flasher, Pulse First ON Delay and Single Shot Leading Edge Control Contact
3 Repeat Cycle, ON/OFF Delay
When the supply voltage U and the set interval t2 begins. The supply voltage U must interval t2 begins. After the
3 is applied, the output relay R After the interval t2 has be constantly applied to the interval t2 has expired, the
switches into the ON position expired, the output relay device. When the control output relay R switches into
3 and the set interval t1 begins.
After the interval t1 has
switches into ON position.
The output relay is triggered
contact S is closed, the set
interval t1 begins. After the
OFF position. During the
interval, the control contact is
expired, the output relay R at the ratio of t1:t2 until the interval t1 has expired, the ignored. A new cycle can only
3 switches into OFF position supply voltage is interrupted. output relay R switches into be initiated when the cycle
ON position and the set has been completed.
3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U)
3 LED U/t* LED U/t*
Output LED** Trigger Signal (S)
3 Output Relay (R) t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 Output LED**
Output Relay (R) t1 t2
3
3 Function #3—Universal TR Function #6—Universal TR
ON Delay and OFF Delay with Control Contact Single Shot Leading and Single Shot Trailing Edge
3 with Control Contact
Asymmetrical Signal ON/OFF Delay
3
The supply voltage U must interval t2 begins. After the The supply voltage U must output relay again switches to
be constantly applied to the interval t2 has expired, the be constantly applied to the the ON position and the set
3 device. When the control output relay R switches into device. When the control interval t2 begins. After the
contact S is closed, the set OFF position. If the control contact S is closed, the interval t2 has expired, the
3 interval t1 begins. After the contact is opened before the output relay R switches to output relay R switches into
interval t1 has expired, the interval t1 has expired, the the ON position and the set OFF position. During
3 output relay R switches into interval already expired is interval t1 begins. After the the interval, the control
ON position. If the control erased and is restarted with interval t1 has expired, the contact is ignored. During
3 contact is opened, the set the next cycle. output relay R switches into
OFF position. If the control
the interval, the control
contact can be operated
contact S is opened, the any number of times.
3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U)
3 LED U/t* LED U/t*
Trigger Signal (S) Trigger Signal (S)
3 Output LED** Output LED**

3 Output Relay (R) t1 t2 <t1 Output Relay (R) t1 t2 t1 t2

V7-T3-168 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
Function #7—Universal TR Function #10—Universal TR, TRF, TMR5, TMRP, E5-248
Pulse Sequence Monitoring OFF Delay/Signal OFF Delay 3
Delay ON Release
When the supply voltage U interval t2, the relay will The supply voltage U must output relay R switches
3
is applied, the set interval t1 remain in the ON position. be constantly applied to the to the OFF position. If the
begins and the output relay If the control switch is not device. When the control control contact S is closed 3
R switches to the ON closed and opened within contact S is closed, the before interval t expires,
position. After the interval the interval t2, the relay output relay R switches to the output relay will remain 3
t1 has expired, the interval will change to the OFF the ON position. When the in the ON position until the
t2 begins. As long as the position until supply control contact is opened, control switch opens, at 3
control switch S is closed voltage U is interrupted interval t begins. After the which time the interval t
and opened within the and reapplied. interval t has expired, the will begin again.
3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U) 3
LED U/t* LED U/t*
Trigger Signal (S) Trigger Signal (S) 3
Output LED** Output LED**
Output Relay (R) t1 <t2 <t2 <t2 t2 Output Relay (R) t <t 3
3
Function #8—Universal TR, TRN, TMR5, TMRP Function #11—Universal TR, TRF, TMR5, TMRP, E5-248 3
ON Delay, Power Triggered Single Shot Leading Edge with Control Input
Delay ON Make Single Shot/One Shot (Signal Start)/Momentary Interval 3
When the supply voltage U R switches to the ON The supply voltage U must interval t has expired, the
is applied, the set interval t position. The relay will remain be constantly applied to the output relay R switches to 3
begins. After the interval t in that position until supply device. When the control the OFF position. The control
has expired, the output relay voltage U is interrupted. contact S is closed, the contact is ignored during the 3
output relay R switches to interval t, and a new cycle
the ON position and the set
interval t begins. After the
cannot be started until the
set interval t has timed out.
3
3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U)
LED U/t* LED U/t* 3
Output LED** Trigger Signal (S)
Output Relay (R) t <t Output LED** 3
Output Relay (R) t t
3
3
Function #9—Universal TR, TRN, TMR5, TMRP Function #12—Universal TR
Single Shot Leading Edge Voltage Controlled Single Shot Trailing Edge with Control Input 3
Interval ON/Interval (Power Start)
When the supply voltage U The relay will remain in that The supply voltage U must has expired, the output 3
is applied, the output relay R position until supply voltage U be constantly applied to the relay R switches to the
switches to the ON position is interrupted. If the supply device. When the control OFF position. The control 3
and set interval t begins. voltage is interrupted prior to contact S is closed and contact is ignored during
After the interval t has interval t timing out, the relay reopened, the output relay the interval t, and a new 3
expired, the output relay R will immediately switch to the R switches to the ON cycle must be started
switches to the OFF position. OFF position. position and the set interval t after the set interval t has
begins. After the interval t timed out.
3
3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U)
LED U/t* LED U/t* 3
Output LED** Trigger Signal (S)
Output Relay (R) t <t Output LED** 3
Output Relay (R) t t
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-169
 3.8 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Function #13—Universal TR Function #16—TRN, TMRP

3 ON Delay Control Signal Start, Trailing Edge OFF Flasher, ON First
Cycle 3 (Power Start, ON First)
3 The supply voltage U must will remain in that position When the supply voltage U After interval t has expired,
be constantly applied to the until the control switch is applied, the relay switches the relay will again switch to
3 device. When the control opens. If the control switch is to the ON position and set the ON position for the set
switch S is applied, the set opened prior to interval t interval t begins. After the interval t. This cycle will
3 interval t begins. After the timing out, the relay will interval t has expired, the repeat at a 1:1 ratio until
interval t has expired, the remain in the OFF position output relay R switches to supply voltage U is
3 output relay R switches to and any elapsed time will be the OFF position and set interrupted.
the ON position. The relay erased. interval t will begin again.
3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U)
3 LED U/t* Output LED**
Trigger Signal (S) Output Relay (R) t t t t t t <t
3 Output LED**
Output Relay (R) t <t
3
3
Function #14—Universal TR, TRN, TMR5, TMRP Function #17—TRF, E5-248
3 Flasher, Pause First ON Delay Control Signal Start, Leading Edge OFF
Cycle 1 (Power Start, OFF First)
3 When the supply voltage U has expired, the relay will The supply voltage U must until the control switch has
is applied, the set interval t switch to the OFF position be constantly applied to the opened and closed. If the
3 begins. After the interval t for the set interval t. This device. When the control control switch is opened and
has expired, the output relay cycle will repeat at a 1:1 switch S is applied, the set closed prior to interval t
3 R switches to the ON ratio until supply voltage U interval t begins. After the timing out, the relay will
position and set interval t will is interrupted. interval t has expired, the remain in the OFF position
begin again. After interval t output relay R switches to and any elapsed time will be
3 the ON position. The relay erased.
will remain in that position
3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U)
3 LED U/t* Trigger Signal
Output LED** Output LED**
3 Output Relay (R) t t t t t <t Output Relay (R) t t

3
3 Function #15—TMR5, TMRP, E5-248 Function #18—TRF, E5-248
Watchdog Flasher—Control Signal Start, Pause First
3 Retriggerable Single Shot

3 The supply voltage U must

be constantly applied to the
switches to the OFF position.
Closing the control switch
The supply voltage U must
be constantly applied to the
After interval t has expired,
the relay will switch to the
device. When the control during interval t will reset the device. When the control OFF position for the set
3 switch S is applied, the relay time. Continuous cycling of switch S is closed, the set interval t. This cycle will
switches to the ON position the trigger signal at a rate interval t begins. After the repeat at a 1:1 ratio until
3 and the set interval t begins. faster than the preset time interval t has expired, the supply voltage U is
After the interval t has will cause the relay to remain output relay R switches to interrupted. The control
3 expired, the output relay R in the ON position. the ON position and set switch is ignored during
interval t will begin again. the cycle.
3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U)
3 Trigger Signal (S) Trigger Signal
Output Relay (R) t <t <t t Output LED**
3 Output Relay (R) t t t t <t

3
3

V7-T3-170 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
Function #19—TRF, E5-248 Function #22—TMRP, E5-248
Flasher—Control Signal Start, ON First Single Pulse Generator, Voltage Controlled 3
The supply voltage U must
be constantly applied to the
again. After interval t has
expired, the relay will again
When the supply voltage U
is applied, the set interval t
0.5 seconds before returning
to the OFF position. Supply
3
device. When the control switch to the ON position begins. After the interval t voltage U must be removed
switch S is closed, the relay for the set interval t. This has expired, the relay will and reapplied to repeat the 3
switches to the ON position cycle will repeat at a 1:1 switch to the ON position for pulse.
and set interval t begins. ratio until supply voltage U 3
After the interval t has is interrupted. The control
expired, the output relay R switch is ignored during 3
switches to the OFF position the cycle.
and set interval t will begin
3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U)
Trigger Signal Output LED**
3
Output Relay (R)
Output LED**
Output Relay (R) t t t t <t
t t
3
3
Function #20—TRF Function #23—N/A 3
Signal ON/OFF Delay Memory Latch
Control Switch Make 3
The supply voltage U must
be constantly applied to the
position. When the control
switch is opened, the relay
The supply voltage U must
be constantly applied to the
with every closure of the
control switch S (leading
3
device. When the control will switch to the ON position device. Output changes state edge).
switch S is closed, the relay again and the interval t will 3
switches to the ON position begin. If the control switch is
and set interval t begins. closed and opened within the 3
After the interval t has interval t, the relay will remain
expired with the control in the ON position until 3
switch still closed, the output interval t has timed out after
relay R switches to the OFF the control switch is opened. 3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U) 3
Trigger Signal Trigger Signal
Output LED** Output LED** 3
Output Relay (R) t t <t t Output Relay (R)
3
3
Function #21—TMRP Function #24—TMR6
ON/OFF Delay True OFF Delay 3
Make/Break with Control Switch Trigger
The supply voltage U must control switch is opened, When the supply voltage U interval t has expired, the 3
be constantly applied to the interval t will begin again. is applied, the relay switches relay switches to the OFF
device. When the control After interval t has timed out, to the ON position. When position and will remain there 3
switch S is closed, the set the relay will switch to the supply power is removed, set until supply power U is
time interval t begins. After applied again.
interval t begins. After the
interval t has expired, the
OFF position. If supply
voltage U is removed at any
3
output relay R switches to time, the relay will return to
the ON position. When the the OFF position. 3
Input Power (U) Input Power (U)
3
Trigger Signal Output Relay (R) t
Output LED**
3
Output Relay (R) t t t
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-171
 3.8 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Universal TR Series Contents

3 Description Page
3 Universal TR Series
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-173
3 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-173
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-174
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-175
TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-176
3 TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-179
TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-183
3 TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-185

3
3
3
3
3 Universal TR Series
3 Product Description Application Description Features Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s Universal TR Series A timing relay is a simple ● Multiple user-selectable ● cULus listed
3 timers are our most flexible form of time-based control, timing functions and timing ● CE marked
and cost-effective timing allowing the user to open or ranges in a single unit ● RoHS compliant
relays available. Products are close the contacts based on reduce product variations
3 available with up to seven a specified timing function. and stock keeping units
● IEC/EN 61812
user-selectable functions and The Universal TR Series (SKUs)
3 seven user-selectable time timers are equipped with a ● Universal input voltages
ranges. Each unit is DIN rail set of selector switches, from 12 or 24 to 240 Vac or
3 mountable with a direct which can easily be set to a Vdc eliminate the need to
connection, eliminating the specific function and time, order and stock separate
3 need for additional sockets.
The Universal TR Series
thereby reducing the number
of product variations required.
coil voltages
● Compact, DIN rail
timers are available in SPDT The universal input voltage
3 and DPDT contact (either 12–240 Vac/Vdc or
mountable case reduces
panel size
configurations, and have a 24–240 Vac/Vdc, depending
3 compact IEC-style footprint on the model) further
● Advanced LED indication
and a universal input voltage reduces the number of makes troubleshooting
easy
3 range for AC and DC product variations.
applications. ● Staggered terminal
The Universal TR Series locations allow access
3 timers are ideal for high- to lower-level terminals
variability operations, such after wiring
3 as systems integrators, ● SPDT or DPDT contacts
distributors, and small with 8 A ratings
3 equipment manufacturers.
The compact design saves
panel space, and the low
3 cost and high flexibility of
the units reduce inventory
3 requirements.

3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-172 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
Product Selection
3
Universal TR Timing Relays
Single-Pole Model
Catalog
3
Supply Voltage Description Number
4-Function
3
24–240 Vac/Vdc Compact DIN rail mount, SPDT TRL04
3
7-Function
24–240 Vac/Vdc Compact DIN rail mount, SPDT TRL07 3
12–240 Vac/Vdc Compact DIN rail mount, DPDT TRL27
Asymmetrical pulse generator, DPDT TRW27 3
3
Technical Data and Specifications 3
Universal TR Timing Relays 3
Description TRL04 TRL07 TRL27 TRW27
Functions 1 E, R, Wu, Bp E, R, Wu, Bp, Ws, Wa, Es E, R, Wu, Bp, Ws, Wa, Es Ii, Ip, ER, Ewu, Ews, WsWa, Wt 3
Time range 0.05 sec to 100 hours 0.05 sec to 100 hours 0.05 sec to 100 hours 0.05 sec to 100 hours
Input
3
Supply voltage 24–240 Vac/Vdc 24–240 Vac/Vdc 12–240 Vac/Vdc 12–240 Vac/Vdc
3
Rated supply frequency +10% /–15% +10% /–15% ±10% ±10%
Rated consumption 4 VA (1.5 W) 4 VA (1.5 W) 6 VA (2 W) 6 VA (2 W) 3
Duty cycle 100% 100% 100% 100%
Reset time 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 3
Residual ripple for DC 10% 10% 10% 10%
dropout voltage >30% of rated supply voltage >30% of rated supply voltage >30% of rated supply voltage >30% of rated supply voltage
3
Overvoltage category III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1)
3
Rated surge voltage 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Output 3
Contact configuration SPDT (one changeover contact) SPDT (one changeover contact) DPDT (two changeover contacts) DPDT (two changeover contacts)
Rated voltage 250 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 3
Switching capacity 2000 VA (8 A/250 V) 2000 VA (8 A/250 V) 2000 VA (8 A/250 V) 2000 VA (8 A/250 V)
Fusing 8 A fast acting 8 A fast acting 8 A fast acting 8 A fast acting
3
Mechanical life 20 x 10^6 operations 20 x 10^6 operations 20 x 10^6 operations 20 x 10^6 operations 3
Electrical life 2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load, 2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load, 2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load, 2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load,
resistive resistive resistive resistive
3
Switching frequency Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load
(in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1) (in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1) (in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1) (in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1)
3
Overvoltage category III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1)
Rated surge voltage 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 3
Control Signal
Loadable Yes Yes Yes Yes 3
Maximum cable length 10m 10m 10m 10m
Trigger level (sensitivity) Automatic adaption to Automatic adaption to Automatic adaption to Automatic adaption to
3
supply voltage supply voltage supply voltage supply voltage
Minimum control pulse length DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms
3
Note
1 Refer to Function Code Cross-Reference Guide on Page V7-T3-167 for function details.
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-173
 3.8 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Universal TR Timing Relays, continued

3 Description TRL04 TRL07 TRL27 TRW27

3 Accuracy
Base accuracy ±1% of maximum scale value ±1% of maximum scale value ±1% of maximum scale value ±1% of maximum scale value
3 Adjustment accuracy <5% of maximum scale value <5% of maximum scale value <5% of maximum scale value <5% of maximum scale value
Repetition accuracy <0.5% or ±5 ms <0.5% or ±5 ms <0.5% or ±5 ms <0.5% or ±5 ms
3 Temperature influence <0.01% / °C <0.01% / °C <0.01% / °C <0.01% / °C
Physical
3 Ambient temperature –25 to 55 °C –25 to 55 °C –25 to 55 °C –25 to 55 °C

3 Storage temperature –25 to 70 °C –25 to 70 °C –25 to 70 °C –25 to 70 °C

Relative humidity 15% to 85% (in accordance 15% to 85% (in accordance 15% to 85% (in accordance 15% to 85% (in accordance
3 with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3) with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3) with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3) with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3)
Pollution degree 2, if built in 3 (in accordance 2, if built in 3 (in accordance 2, if built in 3 (in accordance 2, if built in 3 (in accordance
3 with IEC 60664-1) with IEC 60664-1) with IEC 60664-1) with IEC 60664-1)
Housing material Self-extinguishing plastic housing, Self-extinguishing plastic housing, Self-extinguishing plastic housing, Self-extinguishing plastic housing,
IP40 rating IP40 rating IP40 rating IP40 rating
3 Mounting Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according
to EN 60715, any position to EN 60715, any position to EN 60715, any position to EN 60715, any position
3 Terminal rating Shockproof terminal connection Shockproof terminal connection Shockproof terminal connection Shockproof terminal connection
according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required), according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required), according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required), according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required),
3 IP20 rating IP20 rating IP20 rating IP20 rating
Tightening torque Max. 1 Nm Max. 1 Nm Max. 1 Nm Max. 1 Nm
3
3 Terminal Capacity
Description
3 1 x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 with/without multicore cable end

3 1 x 4 mm2 without multicore cable end

2 x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 with/without multicore cable end
3 2 x 2.5 mm2 flexible without multicore cable end

3 Wiring Diagrams
3 Single-Pole, Double-Throw Units (SPDT)— Double-Pole, Double-Throw Units (DPDT)—
TRL04 and TRL07 TRL27 and TRW27
3 (+) (+)
U= U=
3 (–) (–)
S (Used only for
S (Used only for
3 control switch
control switch
triggered functions)
triggered functions)
15 15 25
3
A1 B1 A1 B1
3
A1 15 A1 15 25

3 R R R

3 A2 16 18 A2 16 18 26 28

3 A2 A2

16 18 16 18 26 28
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-174 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3
17.5 mm (TRL04 and TRL07) 35 mm (TRL27 and TRW27) 3
3
3
1.77 3.43
(45.0) (87.0)
1.77 3.43
(45.0) (87.0)
3
3
3
0.20 1.73 0.20 1.73
3
(5.0) (44.0) 0.69 (5.0) (44.0) 1.38
2.36 (17.5) 2.36 (35.0) 3
(60.0) (60.0)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-175
 3.8 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

TR Series Contents
3 Description Page
3 Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-172
TR Series
3 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-177
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-177
3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-177
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-178
3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-178
TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-179
3 TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-183
TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-185
3
3
3
3
3 TR Series
3 Product Description Features Operation
The upgraded TR Series ● 20 time ranges and 10 TRNP and TRNB
3 Timing Relays are designed timing functions
Internal Connections
to meet most timing ● Time delays from 0.1 sec
3 requirements by offering to 600 hrs 4 5
1 2 3
more flexibility in range of ● Space-saving, compact 3 6
4 5 6
input voltage, timing range
3 and functionality. Use a rotary
package 2 7
7 8 9
● High repeat accuracy of 1 8 A B
switch to choose from
3 20 selectable time ranges ± 0.2%
(–/+) (–/–)
(–/+) (–/–)
from 0.1 second to 600 ● LED indication
3 hours. We offer both a power ● Standard 8- or 11-pin and TRNP TRNB
triggered and signal triggered 11-blade termination
3 model—each with expanded
operation modes. There is a
● 2 Form C DPDT delayed TRFP and TRFB
output contacts
green LED to indicate when Internal Connections
3 power is ON and an orange
● 10 A contact rating
External External
LED when output is ON. Control Start Control Start
3 Signal Signal
1 2 3
5 6 7
4 8 4 5 6
3 3 9
7 8 9
2 10
3 1 11 A B

(–/+) (–/–) (–/+) (–/–)

3 TRFP TRFB

3
Standards and Certifications
3 ● cULus listed
● CSA
3 ● CE marked
● TUV
3 TUV

3
3
3

V7-T3-176 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
Catalog Number Selection
3
TR N P 240 AC 3
3
Family Type Input Voltage
TR 24AD = 24 Vac
(50/60 Hz)/24 Vdc
3
Operational Mode 240AC = 100–240 Vac
N = Power Triggered F = Signal Triggered
(50/60 Hz) 3
A = ON delay A = ON delay, control signal start
B = Interval
C = Flasher (pause first)
(leading edge OFF)
B = Flasher, control signal start
Model Type
P = Pin/octal
3
D = Flasher (ON first) (pause first) B = Blade style
C = Flasher, control signal Start 3
(ON first)
D = Signal ON/OFF delay
E = OFF delay 3
F = Single shot leading edge with
control input 3
3
Product Selection Accessories
TR Plug-In Timing Relays—Power Triggered Sockets for Use with TR Timers—Standard Pack of 10
3
Octal
Catalog
Blade
Catalog Timing Relay Terminal Style
Catalog
Number
3
Coil Voltage Number Number
24 Vac/Vdc TRNP24AD TRNB24AD
TRNP 8-pin octal D3PA2
3
TRFP 11-pin octal D3PA3
100–240 Vac TRNP240AC TRNB240AC TRNB, TRFB 0.187 in solder/QC terminals D5PA2 3
(blade style)

3
TR Plug-In Timing Relays—Signal Triggered
Octal Blade 3
Catalog Catalog
Coil Voltage Number Number
3
24 Vac/Vdc TRFP24AD TRFB24AD
100–240 Vac TRFP240AC TRFB240AC 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-177
 3.8 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions

3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
General
3 TR Series Dimensions and Weights
Description Specification
Description Specification
Operation system Solid-state CMOS circuit
3 Time range 0.1 sec to 600 hours
Dimensions
TRNP, TRFP 1.58H x 1.42W x 3.07D in. (40H x 36W x 77.9D mm)
3 Pollution degree 2 (IE60664-1)
TRNB, TRFB 1.58H x 1.42W x 2.95D in. (40H x 36W x 74.9D mm)
Overvoltage category III (IE60664-1)
Weights
3 Rated operational voltage
240 AC 100–240 Vac (50/60 Hz) TRNP 87g

3 24 AC 24 Vac (50/60 Hz)/24 Vdc TRFP 89g

12 DC 12 Vdc TRNB, TRFB 85g

3 Voltage tolerance
240 AC 85–264 Vac (50/60 Hz)
3 24 AC 20.4–26.4 Vac (50/60 Hz)/21.6–26.4 Vdc

3 12 DC 10.8–13.2 Vdc
Input OFF voltage Rated voltage x 10% minimum

3 Ambient operating temperature –4 to 149 °F (–20 to 65 °C)

Reset time 100 ms maximum
3 Repeat error ± 0.2%, ± 20 ms 1
Voltage error ± 0.2%, ± 20 ms 1 3.07 (77.9) 2.95 (74.9)
3 Temperature error ± 0.5%, ± 20 ms 1 Pin (P) Type Blade (B) Type
Setting error ± 10% maximum
3 Insulation resistance 100M ohm minimum (500 Vdc) Note
1 For the value of the error against a preset time, whichever value is larger should apply.
3 Dielectric strength
Between power and output terminals 2000 Vac, 1 minute
3 Between contacts of different poles 2000 Vac, 1 minute
Between contacts of same pole 1000 Vac, 1 minute
3 Vibration resistance 10–55 Hz amplitude 0.5 mm;
2 hrs in each of 3 axes
3 Shock resistance
Operating extremes 10G
3 Damage limits —
TRNP, TRFP 40G (3x in each of 3 axes)
3 TRNB, TRFB 10G (3x in each of 3 axes)
Power consumption (approx.)
3 240 AC 6.5 VA TRNP, TRNB/6.6 VA TRFP, TRFB

3 240 Vac/60 Hz 11.6 VA TRNP, TRNB/12.1 VA TRFP, TRFB

24 AC (AC/DC) 3.4 VA–1.7 W TRNP, TRNB/3.5 VA–1.7 W TRFP,
TRFB
3 12 DC 1.6 W

3
TR Series Contact Ratings
3 Description Specification
Contact configuration 2 Form C, DPDT (delayed output)
3 Allowable voltage/current 240 Vac, 30 Vdc/10 A

3 Max. permissible operating frequency 1800 cycles per hour

Rated load

3 Resistive 10 A, 240 Vac/30 Vdc

Inductive 7 A, 240 Vac/30 Vdc
3 Horsepower rating 1/6 hp 120 Vac, 1/3 hp 240 Vac
Life
3 Electrical 500,000 operations minimum (resistive)
Mechanical 50,000,000 operations minimum
3

V7-T3-178 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
TMR5 Series Contents
Description Page
3
Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-172 3
TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-176
TMR5 Series 3
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-180
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-180 3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-180
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-181 3
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-181
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-182
3
TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-183
TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-185
3
3
3
3
TMR5 Series 3
Product Description Features Standards and Certifications 3
The TMR5 Series Time ● Single timing range for ● cRUus
Delay Relays are designed each unit ● UL listed (with Eaton socket) 3
for a broad range of ● Ranges available from ● RoHS compliant
OEM applications. The
TMR5 Series offers
0.02 sec to 24 hours ● CE marked 3
● Wide variety of functions
non-programmable plug-in
style timers with a variety
available 3
of functions available. Each
● Plugs into standard 8- or with
unit offers a single function 11-pin socket Eaton
socket 3
and single input voltage, and ● 10 A DPDT output contacts
operates over a defined time
delay range. Units with fixed
● Can be easily customized 3
to meet your needs
time delays are also available.
Eaton also offers
3
customization capabilities for
these timers—remote 3
adjustments, special pin
configurations, and more. 3
Contact us to discuss your
specific application and
design of a custom timer.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-179
 3.8 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Catalog Number Selection

3
3
All configurations from Catalog Number Selection are available. TMR5 N 05 120
3 Family Type Input Voltage
TMR5 120 = 120 Vac/Vdc
3 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
Operational Mode
240 = 240 Vac/Vdc
3 N
8-Pin Octal Sockets
= ON delay
11-Pin Octal Sockets
F = OFF delay, control switch trigger
T = Interval ON C = Single shot, control switch trigger Timing Range 2
3 L = Flasher-pause-first W = Watchdog, control switch trigger 04 = 0.05–5 sec
05 = 0.1–10 sec
R = Repeat cycle 1 (retriggerable single shot)
P = OFF delay, power trigger 08 = 0.6–60 sec
3 (OFF time first followed by
ON time and repeating) G = Single shot, power trigger 12 = 3–300 sec
Y = Repeat cycle 1 D = Watchdog, power trigger (retriggerable 15 = 0.3–30 min
3 (ON time first followed by
OFF time and repeating)
single shot) 16 = 0.6–60 min
22 = 6 sec–10 min

3
3 Product Selection Accessories
TMR5 Time Delay Relays Accessories for Use with TMR5 Time Delay Relays
3
Input Timing Catalog Catalog
Voltage Socket Range Number Description Standard Pack Number
3
ON Delay 8-pin socket 10 D3PA2

3 120 Vac/Vdc 8-pin 0.1–10 sec TMR5N05120 11-pin socket 10 D3PA3-A2

0.6–60 sec TMR5N08120 Hold-down spring 10 D65CHDS
3 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec TMR5N0524
0.6–60 sec TMR5N0824
3 OFF Delay, Control Switch Trigger
Notes
1 Indicates DUAL knob unit. All dual knob units can have independently selectable and

adjustable ON and OFF times. If different ON and OFF times are desired, add two codes for
3 120 Vac/Vdc 11-pin 0.1–10 sec TMR5F05120
time ranges in the part number. The first code listed indicates the first timing range of the
0.6–60 sec TMR5F08120 unit (OFF time for R, ON time for Y) and the second code indicates the second timing range
(ON time for R, OFF Time for Y).
3 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec TMR5F0524 2 Fixed time delay settings are available for orders of 50 pieces or more. Contact EatonCare for

0.6–60 sec TMR5F0824 additional information at 877-ETN-CARE (386-2273).

3 Interval ON
120 Vac/Vdc 8-pin 0.1–10 sec TMR5T05120
3 0.6–60 sec TMR5T08120

3 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec TMR5T0524

0.6–60 sec TMR5T0824
3 Single Shot, Control Switch Trigger
120 Vac/Vdc 11-pin 0.1–10 sec TMR5C05120
3 0.6–60 sec TMR5C08120
24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec TMR5C0524
3
0.6–60 sec TMR5C0824

3 Repeat Cycle
(OFF Time First Followed by ON Time and Repeating)

3 120 Vac/Vdc 8-pin 0.1–10 sec TMR5R05120

0.6–60 sec TMR5R08120
3 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec TMR5R0524
0.6–60 sec TMR5R0824
3 Repeat Cycle
(ON Time First Followed by OFF Time and Repeating)
3 120 Vac/Vdc 8-pin 0.1–10 sec TMR5Y05120
0.6–60 sec TMR5Y08120
3 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec TMR5Y0524

3 0.6–60 sec TMR5Y0824

V7-T3-180 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
Technical Data and Specifications Wiring Diagrams
3
TMR5 Time Delay Relays Wiring for 8-Pin Units Wiring for 11-Pin Control
Switch Trigger Units 3
Description Specification
Control
Voltage tolerance
AC operation +10/–15% of nominal at 50/60 Hz 4 5
Switch 3
DC operation +10/–15% of nominal 3 6 6 7
Load burden 2 VA 2 7
4
5
8 3
1 8 3 9
Setting accuracy
Maximum setting (adjustable) +5%, –0%
(DC)+ −(DC) 2
1 11
10 3
L1 L2
Minimum setting (adjustable) +0%, –50%
Fixed time delay Input Voltage
(DC)+ (DC)−
3
< 2 seconds +1% L1 L2
0.1–2 seconds ±5% Input Voltage 3
Repeat accuracy (constant voltage and temperature)
> 2 seconds delay ±0.1% 3
0.1–2 seconds delay ±2% Wiring for 11-Pin Power
Reset time
Trigger Units 3
ON Delay/interval/repeat cycle 0.1 second
OFF Delay/single shot/watchdog 0.04 second
Power
Trigger * 3
+ −
Startup time (time from when power is applied until unit is timing)
120 and 240 V units 0.05 second
3
5 6 7
12, 24 and 48 V units 0.08 second 4 8
Maintain function time (time unit 0.01 second 3 9
3
continues to time after power is 2 10
removed) 1 11 3
Temperature
12–120 V input voltage –18 to 150 °F (–28 to 65 °C) (DC)+ (DC)− 3
240 V input voltage –18 to 122 °F (–28 to 50 °C) L1 L2
Insulation voltage 2000 V Input Voltage
* Should Be Same Voltage
3
Output contacts DPDT 10 A @ 240 Vac/30 Vdc,
as Input Voltage
1/2 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NO contacts)
1/3 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NC contacts)
3
B300 and R300; AC-15 and DC-13
Life
3
Mechanical 10,000,000 operations
Full load 100,000 operations 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-181
 3.8 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3 TMR5

3 Dual Knob
Only

3
3 2.40
(61.0)

3
3
2.90 (73.7)
1.70
3 (43.2) 3.50 (88.9)

3
D3PA2 Socket D3PA3 Socket
3 6–32 x 0.312 Combination 6–32 x 0.312 Combination
Head Screw and Pressure Clamping Plate Head Screw and Pressure Clamp
3 (8 places) (11 places)

3 2.14
Two 0.165
(4.2) Dia.
Two 0.17
(4.3) Dia.
Slots 2.05 Holes
(54.3) (52.1)
3 2.03 Max.
(51.6)

3 0.15 (3.8)
0.82 (20.8) 2.06
1.30 (52.3) 0.13–0.16 0.58 (14.7)
3 (33.0) 0.58 (14.7)
2.33 (59.2)
(3.2–4.0) 0.77 (19.6)
1.60 0.97 0.97
(40.6) (24.6) Max. (24.6)
3 Max. Tolerances: ± 0.010 Max. Tolerances: ± 0.010
± (0.25) ± (0.25)
Unless Otherwise Shown
3 Unless Otherwise Shown

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-182 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
TMR6 Series Contents
Description Page
3
Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-172 3
TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-176
TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-179 3
TMR6 Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-184 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-184
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-184 3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-184
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-184
3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-184
TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-185
3
3
3
3
TMR6 Series 3
Product Description Features Operation 3
Most electronic time delay ● Provides OFF delay True OFF Delay
relays with an OFF delay function without requiring Upon application of input Voltage must be applied for 3
function require input voltage input voltage during OFF voltage, the relay is a minimum of 0.1 second to
to be applied continuously time delay energized. When the input assure proper operation. 3
in order to operate correctly. ● Duplicates operation of voltage is removed, the Any application of the input
However, there are many
applications where this is
pneumatic OFF delay preset time begins. At the voltage during the preset 3
timers end of the preset time, the time will keep the relay
not possible—-keeping a relay is de-energized.
relay energized for some
● Each unit has eight timing
ranges built in, covering
energized and reset the time
delay. No external trigger
3
amount of time after input 0.05 seconds to switch is required.
voltage has been removed. 30 minutes
3
Eaton’s TMR6 true OFF True OFF Delay
● Selecting a range is easy
delay product provides
using a rotary switch Input ON 3
this function even when
input voltage is removed. (no math is required or Power
It duplicates the operation DIP switches to set) (Voltage)
OFF
3
of the older OFF delay ● Uses industry-standard
pneumatic time delay relays. 8-pin octal socket 3
● 10 A DPDT output contacts ON
Output
(Load)
Delay 3
Timing Ranges
OFF
Select one of the eight timing 3
ranges using the selector
knob, and then adjust the
time within that range for an
3
Standards and Certifications
accurate delay setting. ● cRUus 3
Timing Ranges ● UL listed (with Eaton socket)
Dial Setting Timing Range ● RoHS compliant 3
A 0.05–5 sec. ● CE marked
B 0.1–10 sec.
3
C 0.3–30 sec.
with
Eaton
3
D 0.6–60 sec.
socket
E 1.8–180 sec. 3
F 3–300 sec.
G 0.1–10 min. 3
H 0.3–30 min
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-183
 3.8 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Catalog Number Selection Wiring Diagram

3
All configurations from Catalog Number Selection are available. Wiring for 8-Pin Units
3 TMR6 X 00 120
4 5
3 3 6
Family Type Input Voltage
3 TMR6 120 = 120 Vac/Vdc
2
1 8
7

24 = 24 Vac/Vdc (DC)+ −(DC)

3 Operational Mode 240 = 240 Vac/Vdc L1 L2
X = True OFF delay
Timing Range Input Voltage
3 00 = Programmable

3
Product Selection Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
TMR6 True OFF Delay Relays
3 Input Timing Catalog
TMR6
Voltage Range Number
3 True OFF Delay

3 120 Vac/Vdc 0.05 sec–30 min

(user selectable, 8 ranges)
TMR6X00120
2.40
24 Vac/Vdc TMR6X0024
(61.0)
3 240 Vac/Vdc TMR6X00240

3
Accessories
3 1.70
2.90 (73.7)

(43.2) 3.50 (88.9)

Accessories for Use with TMR6 Time Delay Relays
3 Catalog
Description Standard Pack Number
3 8-pin socket 10 D3PA2
D3PA2 Socket
6–32 x 0.312 Combination
Hold-down spring 10 D65CHDS
3 Head Screw and Pressure Clamping Plate
(8 places)

3 Technical Data and Specifications Two 0.165

2.14 (4.2) Dia.
3 TMR6 Time Delay Relays (54.3) Slots
2.03
Description Specification (51.6)
3 Voltage tolerance
AC operation +10/–15% of nominal at 50/60 Hz 0.82 (20.8)
3 DC operation +10/–15% of nominal
1.30
(33.0) 0.58 (14.7)
Load burden 2 VA 1.60 0.97
3 Setting accuracy
(40.6) (24.6)
Max. Tolerances: ± 0.010 Max.

3 Maximum setting (adjustable)

Minimum setting (adjustable)
+5%, –0%
+0%, –50%
± (0.25)
Unless Otherwise Shown

3 Repeat accuracy (constant voltage

and temperature)
±0.1% or 50 ms, whichever is greater

Temperature –18 to 150 °F (–28 to 65 °C)

3 Insulation voltage 2,000 V
Output contacts DPDT 10 A @ 240 Vac/30 Vdc,
3 1/2 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NO contacts)
1/3 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NC contacts)
3 B300 and R300; AC-15 and DC-13
Life
3 Mechanical 2,000,000 operations
Full load 100,000 operations
3
3

V7-T3-184 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
TMRP Series Contents
Description Page
3
Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-172 3
TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-176
TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-179 3
TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-183
TMRP Series 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-186
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-186 3
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-187
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-187
3
3
3
3
3
TMRP Series 3
Product Description Application Description Features 3
Eaton’s TMRP Series timers A timing relay is a simple ● Multiple user-selectable ● Flexible design for back-
combine flexibility with ease form of time-based control, timing functions and timing panel, through-panel 3
of use and installation to allowing the user to open or ranges in a single unit (45 mm x 45 mm cutout),
make the most versatile timer close the contacts based on reduce product variations
in our offering. The thumb- a specified timing function. and stock keeping units
or DIN rail mounting 3
● SPDT or DPDT contacts
wheel setting design allows The TMRP series is equipped (SKUs) with 12 A ratings
for quick selection and review with a set of thumb-wheel ● Universal input voltages
3
● Plastic dust cover keeps
of up to 10 timing functions style selector switches, which from 12–240 Vac/Vdc out contaminants and
and seven timing ranges. The can easily be set to a specific eliminate the need to eliminates accidental set
3
TMRP units can be mounted function and time, thereby order and stock separate point changes
in a 1/16 DIN cutout or on a
DIN rail with our D3 series
reducing the number of
product variations required.
coil voltages ● Use with standard Eaton 3
● Timing ranges up to 9990 D3 sockets—see Technical
sockets. Input voltage is 12– The universal input voltage
240 Vac/Vdc to work with all of 12–240 Vac/Vdc further
hours Data and Specifications 3
popular control voltages. reduces the number of
● Dual LED indication makes
product variations. troubleshooting easy 3
The TMRP timers are ideal LED Indicator
for high-variability operations,
3
LED Description Function
such as systems integrators,
distributors, and small equip- Solid green “Input” Supply voltage present 3
ment manufacturers. The Solid red “Output” Relay energized
flexible enclosure design Slowly flashing red “Output” Timing cycle activated, relay not energized 3
allows for back-panel mounting,
Rapidly flashing red “Output” Timing cycle activated, relay energized
through-panel mounting, or
DIN rail mounting.
3
3
Standards and Certifications
● UL recognized
3
● CE marked
● RoHS compliant
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-185
 3.8 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays

Product Selection
3
TMRP Timing Relays
3 TMRP5100
Catalog
Supply Voltage Description Number
3 10-Function

3 12–240 Vac/Vdc Control switch trigger, DPDT TMRP5100

Control switch trigger, SPDT TMRP5101
3 Power trigger, DPDT TMRP5102

3
3
3 Technical Data and Specifications
TMRP Timing Relays
3
Description TMRP5100 TMRP5101 TMRP5102
3 Functions 1 A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J A, B, C
Time range 0.1 sec to 9,990 hours 0.1 sec to 9,990 hours 0.1 sec to 9,990 hours
3 Input
Supply voltage 12–240 Vac/Vdc 12–240 Vac/Vdc 12–240 Vac/Vdc
3 Supply voltage tolerance ±15% ±15% ±15%

3 Rated consumption 2.5 VA (2 W) maximum 2.5 VA (2 W) maximum 2.5 VA (2 W) maximum

Reset time 150 ms 150 ms 150 ms
3 Reverse polarity protection Yes Yes Yes
Operate time 25 ms maximum 25 ms maximum 25 ms maximum
3 Release time 25 ms maximum 25 ms maximum 25 ms maximum

3 Rated surge voltage 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV

Output
3 Contact configuration DPDT SPDT DPDT
Contact rating (AC) 12 A resistive at 120, 240 UL 508 12 A resistive at 120, 240 UL 508 12 A resistive at 120, 240 UL 508
3 Contact rating (DC) 12 A resistive at 30 UL 508 12 A resistive at 30 UL 508 12 A resistive at 30 UL 508
Contact rating horsepower 1/2 at 120 Vac, 1 at 240 Vac 1/2 at 120 Vac, 1 at 240 Vac 1/2 at 120 Vac, 1 at 240 Vac
3 Contact rating pilot duty A300, 720 VA at 240 Vac A300, 720 VA at 240 Vac A300, 720 VA at 240 Vac

3 Minimum load 12 V/100 mA 12 V/100 mA 12 V/100 mA

Contact material Silver-nickel 90/10 Silver-nickel 90/10 Silver-nickel 90/10
3 Contact resistance 100 milliohms max. at 1 A 12 Vdc 100 milliohms max. at 1 A 12 Vdc 100 milliohms max. at 1 A 12 Vdc
Mechanical life—full load 10 million operations 10 million operations 10 million operations
3 Electrical life—full load 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 100,000 operations
Control Signal
3 Minimum control pulse length 50 ms minimum 50 ms minimum 50 ms minimum

3 Accuracy
Repetition accuracy 0.10% at constant voltage and temperature 0.10% at constant voltage and temperature 0.10% at constant voltage and temperature
3 Physical
Ambient temperature –10 to 55 °C –10 to 55 °C –10 to 55 °C
3 Storage temperature –40 to 85 °C –40 to 85 °C –40 to 85 °C

3 Mounting Use with D3PA3 socket Use with D3PA2 socket Use with D3PA2 socket

Note
3 1 Refer to Function Code Cross-Reference Guide on Page V7-T3-167 for function details.

3
3

V7-T3-186 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Timing Relays
3.8
Wiring Diagrams
3
TMRP5100 TMRP5101 TMRP5102
3

External Control Switch

External Control Switch

4 5 4 5
3
3 6 3 6
Instant if 6–7 Shorted 3
6 2 7 2 7
5 7
4 8 1 8 1 8
3
3 9
2
1 11
10 INPUT INPUT 3
3
INPUT 3
3
Dimensions 3
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
TMRP Series 3
3
4 5

6
1.88 0.06 2.83

7
(47.8) (1.5) (71.9) 1 8
3
OUTPUT

INPUT
R.045 3
1.88 FUNCTION
TIME
SET
TIME
BASE
1.76 8-Pin Octal Base
(47.8)
A 0 0 0 S
(44.7) 3
3
6
0.25 0.64
3
5 7

(6.4) (16.3)
4

3.15
3

(80.0)
3
10
2

1 11

11-Pin Octal Base

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-187
 3.9 Control Relays and Timers
Alternating Relays

D85 Series—Alternating Relays Contents

3 Description Page
3 D85 Series—Alternating Relays
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-189
3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-189
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-190
3 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-190
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-192
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Product Description Features
Alternating relays are used The D853 Series is designed Each of the D85 Series ● For duplex loads
3 in applications where the for use with three-switch alternating relays is available ● Works with one-, two-, or
optimization of load usage is applications (LEAD, LAG and with an optional three- three-switch applications
3 required by equalizing the run STOP). The D853 Series position selector switch, ● Compact plug-in design
time of two loads. They are combines a standard DPDT which allows the unit to using industry standard
3 also used where additional Cross-Wired alternating relay, alternate the two loads as sockets
capacity is required in case contactor auxiliary contacts, normal, or lock the relay to ● 10 A SPDT or DPDT output
3 of excess load requirements.
This alternating action is
and a control relay into one
compact and economical
one load or the other. By
locking the alternating relay to configurations
initiated by a control switch— product. This saves space one load, the other load can ● Optional low profile
3 such as a float switch, manual and labor, while reducing the be removed for service selector switch to lock in
switch, timing relay, pressure number of components without rewiring the first load one sequence
3 switch or other isolated needed. The D853 Series for continuous operation. The ● Two LEDs indicate relay
contact. Each time the uses Sequence On– selector switch has a low status
3 initiating switch is opened, Simultaneous Off (S.O.S.O.) profile to prevent any ● D853 Series replaces
the output relay contacts will operation, where the two accidental actuation. separate components in
change state, thus alternating loads are energized
3 the two loads. Two LED sequentially, but remain on
duplex panel—saving
space and reducing labor
indicators show the status of together until the STOP
3 the output relay. switch is opened. This device
also protects against failure of Standards and
3 The D851 and D852 Series
Relays are used with one
the STOP and LEAD Certifications
switches. If both switches ● CE
control switch and are
3 available in either SPDT or
fail, the two pump motors will ● cRUus
be energized simultaneously
DPDT output configurations when the LAG switch is
● UL listed 1
3 with or without a selector closed. ● RoHS compliant
switch to lock in one
3 sequence. The D852X Series
Relays are available in DPDT
cross-wired output
3 configurations for use with
Note
one or two control switches
3 (LEAD and LAG).
1 When used with appropriate Eaton

socket.

3
3
3
3

V7-T3-188 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Alternating Relays
3.9
Product Selection
3
D85 Series—Alternating Relays 1
Control Catalog 3
Output Contacts Voltage Socket Number
SPDT 12 Vac 8-pin D851NR 3
SPDT 24 Vac 8-pin D851NT
SPDT 120 Vac 8-pin D851NA
3
SPDT 240 Vac 8-pin D851NB 3
SPDT w/selector switch 12 Vac 8-pin D851LR
SPDT w/selector switch 24 Vac 8-pin D851LT 3
SPDT w/selector switch 120 Vac 8-pin D851LA
SPDT w/selector switch 240 Vac 8-pin D851LB
3
DPDT 12 Vac 11-pin D852NR
DPDT 24 Vac 11-pin D852NT
3
DPDT 120 Vac 11-pin D852NA 3
DPDT 240 Vac 11-pin D852NB
DPDT w/selector switch 12 Vac 11-pin D852LR 3
DPDT w/selector switch 24 Vac 11-pin D852LT
DPDT w/selector switch 120 Vac 11-pin D852LA
3
DPDT w/selector switch 240 Vac 11-pin D852LB
3
DPDT cross-wired 12 Vac 8-pin D852XNR
DPDT cross-wired 24 Vac 8-pin D852XNT 3
DPDT cross-wired 120 Vac 8-pin D852XNA
DPDT cross-wired 240 Vac 8-pin D852XNB 3
DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch 12 Vac 8-pin D852XLR
DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch 24 Vac 8-pin D852XLT
3
DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch 120 Vac 8-pin D852XLA 3
DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch 240 Vac 8-pin D852XLB
3
Accessories
3
D85 Series—Alternating Relays
Standard Catalog 3
Description Pack Number
8-pin socket 10 D3PA2 3
11-pin socket 10 D3PA3-A2
Hold-down spring 10 D65CHDS
3
Note 3
1 Contact Eaton for relays for 3-switch applications (Lead-Lag-Stop).

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-189
 3.9 Control Relays and Timers
Alternating Relays

Technical Data and Specifications

3
D85 Series—Alternating Relays
3 Description Specification
Voltage tolerance +10%/-15% of control voltage at 50/60 Hz
3 Load (burden) Less than 3 VA
Output contacts 10 A resistive at 240 Vac / 30 Vdc, 1/2 hp at 120/240 Vac (NO), 1/3 hp at 120/240 Vac (NC)
3 Mechanical life 10,000,000 operations
Electrical life 100,000 operations
3 Temperature –20 °F to +150 °F (–28 ° to 65 °C)
Transient protection 10,000 volts for 20 microseconds
3 Indicator LEDs 2 LEDs marked LOAD A and LOAD B

3 Optional selector switch settings ALTERNATE, LOCK LOAD A, LOCK LOAD B

3 Wiring Diagrams
D851 Series Relays, SPDT D852 Series Relays, DPDT D852X Series Relays, D853 Series Relays,
3 DPDT Cross-Wired Three-Switch Applications

3 Input
Voltage L1
Input
Voltage L2 L1
Input
Voltage L2 L1
Input Voltage
Stop
L2

L2 L1 Control Control
3 Switch Switch
4 5 4 5
4 5 6 7 3 6 Lag 3 6
5 Lag
3 3 6 4
3
8
9 2 7 Load
B
2
1 8
7 Load
B
2 7 1 8
1 8 2 10
3 1 11 Lead Lead

Load A: Pin 2 Load Load

Load A: Pins 3 or 11
A
3 Load B: Pin 8 Load B: Pins 1 or 9 A

3 Typical Installations for SPDT and DPDT Alternating Relays, Typical Installations for SPDT and DPDT Alternating Relays,
Standard Installation Anti-Bounce Installation
3 L1 L2 L1 L2

3 M2
M2
SPDT
3 1 O/L M1

3 Control
2 M1 M1

Switch O/L SPDT

3 5
8 M2 1
Control 2
3 Off Switch
4 3 5
8
3
4 3
3
3 In the OFF state (standard When the control switch When the control switch To eliminate any bounce
installation), the control opens, the first load (M1) is opens, the second load (M2) condition of the control
switch is open, the turned off and the alternating is turned off, the alternating switch, the addition of a
3 alternating relay is in the relay toggles to the LOAD B relay toggles back to the second switch (OFF) along
LOAD A position, and both position. When the control LOAD A position, and the with two auxiliary contacts is
3 loads (M1 and M2) are off. switch closes again, it process can be repeated recommended as shown in
When the control switch energizes the second load again. On relays with DPDT the Anti-Bounce Installation.
3 closes, it energizes the first (M2). The red LED marked contacts, two pilot lights can
load (M1). The red LED “LOAD B” glows. be used for remote indication
3 marked “LOAD A” glows. As
long as the control switch
of LOAD A or LOAD B status.

remains closed, M1 remains

3 energized.

V7-T3-190 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Alternating Relays
3.9
Typical Installations for DPDT Cross-Wired Alternating Typical Installations for DPDT Cross-Wired Alternating
Relays, Standard Installation Relays, Anti-Bounce Installation 3
L2
L1 L2 L1
M2
3
M2
Cross-Wired
3
M1
Lag
2 O/L M1 3
8 M1 Cross-Wired

Lead
Lag 3
2
1 O/L 8
7 M2
Off Lead
3
1
7 3
3 6 3
3 6
3
In the OFF state, both the LEAD control switch and the LAG When the LEAD control switch closes, it turns on the second
control switch are open, the alternating relay is in the LOAD A load (M2). The red LED marked “LOAD B” glows. If the LAG 3
position, and both loads are off. When the LEAD control switch control switch closes, it will energize the first load (M1). When
closes, it energizes the first load (M1). The red LED marked the LAG control switch opens, the first load (M1) is turned off. 3
“LOAD A” glows. As long as the LEAD control switch remains When the LEAD control switch opens, the second load (M2) is
closed, M1 remains energized. If the LAG control switch closes, turned off, the alternating relay toggles back to the LOAD A 3
it energizes the second load (M2). position, and the process can be repeated again.
When the LAG control switch opens, the second load (M2) is To eliminate any bounce condition of the control switch, the 3
turned off. When the LEAD control switch opens, the first load addition of a second switch (OFF) along with two auxiliary
(M1) is turned off and the alternating relay toggles to the LOAD contacts is recommended as shown in the Anti-Bounce 3
B position. Installation.
3
Typical Installations for DPDT Cross-Wired Relays for Three-Switch Applications
Lag
3
Switch
L1
M1
2
8 M1
O/L
3
Lead
L2
M1
Motor Switch
O/L
3
1 1
M1
L3
Stop
7 M2
3
Switch
L1
M2 4 3
L2
M2
Motor
L1 3 3
2
M2 L2 6
L3 3
In the OFF state, all three switches are open, the alternating relay The alternating relay toggles to the LOAD B position. The entire
3
is in the LOAD A position, and both loads are off. No action cycle is then repeated, but with Load #2 (M2) energized first
happens with the alternating relay or either load when the STOP followed by Load #1 (M1). This type of operation is known as 3
switch closes. When the LEAD switch closes, Load #1 (M1) turns “Sequence On–Simultaneously Off (S.O.S.O.)”—the two loads
on. When the LAG switch closes, Load #2 (M2) turns on. Both are energized sequentially, but remain on together until the 3
loads remain on as long as all three switches are closed. STOP switch is opened.
When the LAG switch opens, Load #2 (M2) remains on because If both the STOP switch and LEAD switch fail to close and turn 3
the STOP switch is still closed. When the LEAD switch opens, on the first load, both loads will be turned on simultaneously
Load #1 (M1) remains on because the STOP switch is still when the LAG switch is closed. 3
closed. When the STOP switch opens, both Load #1 (M1) and
Load #2 (M2) are turned off simultaneously. 3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-191
 3.9 Control Relays and Timers
Alternating Relays

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3 D85 Series—Alternating Relays

3
3
2.4
3 (60)

3
3 2.9
(74)
1.7 3.1
(43) (79)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-192 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays
3.10
Safety Relays Contents
Description Page
3
Safety Relays 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-194
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-195 3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-198
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Standards and 3
Product Description Application Description Features Certifications
Safety relays are intended to Eaton’s ESR5 safety relays ● Use for the highest ● UL 508; CSA C22.2 No
3
reliably monitor the signals provide optimal safety and a safety requirements in 14-95; CE Marked
from safety devices at all high degree of reliability on accordance with EN 954-1 ● UL/cUL file number:
3
times and switch off quickly plant machinery. Applications EN ISO 13849-1, E29184
and reliably in an emergency. that meet the highest IEC 62061 and EC 61508 ● Degree of protection: IP20
3
Single-channel and dual safety requirements in ● Suitable for the world ● TÜV Rhineland certified
channel versions are available accordance with EN 954-1, market with UL, cUL
● UL/cULus listed
3
for the construction of safety EN ISO 13849-1 up to PL e certifications and TÜV
applications. The internal and accordance with
logic of the safety relays IEC 62061 up to SILCL 3
Rhineland functional
safety certifications
3
monitors the safety circuits can be realized with the
(emergency stop, guard door, ESR5 safety relay.
● Applicable for EN 60204
stop categories 0 or 1
3
and so on) and activates the
enable paths in a fault-free Compatible with a wide
variety of safety devices:
● Plug-in screw terminals
for fast and fault-free
3
condition. Upon actuation of
replacement
the safety device or in the
even of a fault, the enable
● Emergency stops ● Multi-voltage versions
3
● Rope pulls (24–230 Vac/Vdc) for a
paths are switched off. Any
faults that occur in the control
● Two-hand control stations flexible range of application 3
circuit, such as ground fault, ● Light curtain (OSSD) ● Delayed and non-delayed
cross connection fault or wire ● Gate enable device contact expansions 3
breakage are also detected. ● Safety switches accommodate a wide
variety of applications 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-193
 3.10 Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays

Product Selection
3
Safety Relays Technical Overview
3 Safety Signal Removable
Single Dual Safety Output (NO) Output Output Feedback Control Terminal Type of
3 Channel Channel Output (NO) (Delayed) Delay (NC) Output Voltage Blocks Unit Catalog Number
■ — 4 — — 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC
3 ■ ■ 2 — — 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC
■ ■ 3 — — 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC
3 ■ ■ 3 — — 1 — 230 Vac ■ Main ESR5-NO-31-230VAC

3 ■ ■ 3 — — 1 — 24–230 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-31-AC-DC

■ ■ 2 2 0.1–30s — — 24 Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NV3-30
3 — ■ 2 — — 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NZ-21-24VAC-DC
■ — 5 — — 1 1 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Expansion ESR5-NE-51-24VAC-DC
3 ■ — — 4 0.3–3s 1 1 24 Vdc ■ Expansion ESR5-VE3-42

3
Application Overview
3 Emergency Safety Light Curtain/ Two-Hand Control Contact Cross Circuit Monitored
Stop Switches OSSD 1 (EN 574 Type III C) Expansion Off-Delayed Recognition Manual Reset 2 Catalog Number
3 ■ ■ — — — — — — ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC

3 ■ ■ — — — — ■ — ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC
■ ■ — — — — ■ — ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC
3 ■ ■ — — — — ■ ■ ESR5-NO-31-230VAC
■ ■ — — — — ■ ■ ESR5-NO-31-AC-DC
3 ■ ■ ■ — — ■ ■ ■ ESR5-NV3-30
— ■ — ■ — — ■ — ESR5-NZ-21-24VAC-DC
3 — — — — ■ — — — ESR5-NE-51-24VAC-DC

3 — — — — ■ ■ — — ESR5-VE3-42

Application Overview, continued

3 Single Dual Stop Category Control Category Achievable PL per Achievable SIL per
Channel Channel EN 60204 to EN 954-1 ISO 13849-1 EN IEC 62061 Catalog Number
3 ■ — 0 2 PL d SIL 3 ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC

3 ■ ■ 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC
■ ■ 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC
3 ■ ■ 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NO-31-230VAC
■ ■ 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NO-31-AC-DC
3 ■ ■ 0/1 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NV3-30

3 — ■ 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NZ-21-24VAC-DC
■ — 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NE-51-24VAC-DC
3 ■ — 1 3 PL d SIL 2 ESR5-VE3-42

Notes
3 1 Laser scanners or light curtains with OSSD outputs.
2 All main units can also be reset automatically or manually.

3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-194 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays
3.10
Technical Data and Specifications
3
Safety Relay
Description Unit ESR5-NO-21_ ESR5-NO-41_ ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC ESR5-NZ-21_ 3
General
Standards EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061,
3
IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178,
UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed 3
Type-dependent standards — — — EN 574 Part no. IIIC
Lifespan, mechanical—c (contacts) x 106 10 10 10 10 3
Maximum operating frequency Ops/h 3600 3600 3600 3600
Climatic proofing Cold according to Dry heat according to Cold according to Dry heat according to 3
EN 60068-2-1, dry heat EN60068-2-2, damp heat EN 60068-2-1, dry heat EN60068-2-2, damp heat
according to EN60068-2-2,
damp heat according to
according to EN 60068-2-3 according to EN60068-2-2,
damp heat according to
according to EN 60068-2-3
3
EN 60068-2-3 EN 60068-2-3
Ambient temperature °F (°C) –4 ° to 131 ° (–20 ° to 55 °) –4 ° to 131 ° (–20 ° to 55 °) –4 ° to 131 ° (–20 ° to 55 °) –4 ° to 131 ° (–20 ° to 55 °) 3
Ambient temperature storage °F (°C) –13 ° to 167 ° (–25 ° to 75 °) –13 ° to 167 ° (–25 ° to 75 °) –13 ° to 167 ° (–25 ° to 75 °) –13 ° to 167 ° (–25 ° to 75 °)
Mounting position Any Any Any Any 3
Vibration resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-6) 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2 g, frequency: 10–150 Hz,
amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm 3
Shock resistance (IEC 60068-2-27) — — — —
Protection type 3
Housing IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Terminals IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3
Protection against direct contact when Finger- and back-of-hand Finger- and back-of-hand Finger- and back-of-hand Finger- and back-of-hand
actuated from front (IEC 0106 Part 100) proof proof proof proof 3
Weight kg 0.17 0.22 0.17 0.22
Terminal capacity 3
Solid or flexible mm2 1 x (0.2–2.5) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 1 x (0.2–2.5)
2 x (0.2–1) 2 x (0.2–1) 2 x (0.2–1) 2 x (0.2–1) 3
Flexible with ferrule mm2 1 x (0.25–2.5) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 1 x (0.25–2.5)

Solid or stranded AWG

2 x (0.25–1)
24–12
2 x (0.25–1)
24–12
2 x (0.25–1)
24–12
2 x (0.25–1)
24–12
3
Terminal screw
Pozidriv screwdriver Size 2 2 2 2
3
Flat-blade screwdriver mm 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5
3
Max. tightening torque Nm 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Main Contacts 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage—Uimp Vac 6000 4000 4000 6000
Overvoltage category/pollution degree 3
Outside III/2 III/2 III/2 III/2
Inside — — — — 3
Rated insulation voltage—Ui Vac 250 250 250 250
Rated operating voltage—Ue Vac 230 230 230 230 3
Rated operation current
AC-15 3
230 V (360 ops./h)—Ie A 5 4 5 4
230 V (3600 ops./h)—Ie A 3 3 3 3 3
DC-13
24 V (360 ops./h)—Ie A 6 4 6 4 3
24 V (3600 ops./h)—Ie A 3 2.5 3 2.5
Max. summation current of all poles 3
24 Vac/Vdc devices A 72 72 72 72
230 Vac devices A — — — — 3
Square of the total current 72 A2 (6 + 6) 72 A2 (4.2 + 4.2 + 4.2 + 4.2) 72 A2 (4.9 + 4.9 + 4.9) 72 A2 (6 + 6)
(and total current) 3
of all current paths
Short-circuit protection 3
Max. fuse A gG/gL 10 6 10 6
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-195
 3.10 Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays

Safety Relay, continued

3 Description Unit ESR5-NO-21_ ESR5-NO-41_ ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC ESR5-NZ-21_
Power Supply Circuit
3 Actuating voltage 50/60 Hz Vac 24 24 24 24

3 Actuating voltage—Us Vdc 24 24 24 24

Voltage tolerance pick-up voltage xe 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1
3 Power consumption
AC operated 50/60 Hz VA — — — —

3 AC operated 50/60 Hz W 3.4 3.4 3.4 3

DC operated W 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.5
3 Fuse for control circuit supply
24 V Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof
3 115/230 V — — — —
Control Circuit
3 Rated output voltage Vdc 24 24 24 24
Rated operational current mA S12, S22: 30, S34: 45 S12: 65, S34: 40 S12, S22: 30, S34: 45 S11, S21: 60, Y2: 45
3 Resistance—R 50 22 50 22
Short-circuit current A 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3
3 Response time ms 100 65 100 50
Recovery time ms — — — —
3 Response time with reset monitoring—tA1 ms — — — —
Response time without reset monitoring—tA2 ms 100 65 100 50
3 Reset time—tR/tR1 ms Single-channel 45; 45 Single-channel 45; 20
dual-channel 10 dual-channel 10
3 Minimum on duration—tM ms — — — —
Recovery time—tW ms Approx. 1000 Approx. 1000 Approx. 1000 Approx. 1000
3 Synchronous monitoring time—tS ms — — — 500
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
3 Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4

3 Interference immunity According to EN 61000-6-2,

EN 62061
According to EN 61000-6-2 According to EN 61000-6-2,
EN 62061
According to EN 61000-6-2

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-196 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays
3.10
Safety Relay, continued
ESR5-NO-31-24V-
3
Description Unit ESR5-NO-31-230VAC 230VAC-DC ESR5-NV3_ ESR5-VE3_ ESR5-NE-51_
General 3
Standards EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061,
IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, 3
UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed
Type-dependent standards EN 60204
(if applicable)
EN 60204
(if applicable)
EN 60204
(if applicable)
— — 3
Lifespan, mechanical—c (contacts) x 106 10 10 10 10 10
3
Maximum operating frequency Ops/h 3600 3600 3600 900 3600
Climatic proofing Dry heat according to Dry heat according to Cold in accordance with: Dry heat according to Dry heat according to
EN60068-2-2, damp heat EN60068-2-2, damp heat EN 60068-2-1, dry heat in EN60068-2-2, damp heat EN60068-2-2, damp heat
3
according to EN 60068-2-3 according to EN 60068-2-3 accordance with EN according to EN 60068-2-3 according to EN 60068-2-3
60068-2-2, humidity 3
storage test in accordance
with 60068-2-78
Ambient temperature °F (°C) –4 ° to 131 ° (–20 ° to 55 °) –4 ° to 131 ° (–20 ° to 55 °) –4 ° to 131 ° (–20 ° to 55 °) –4 ° to 131 ° (–20 ° to 55 °) –4 ° to 131 ° (–20 ° to 55 °)
3
Ambient temperature storage °F (°C) –13 ° to 167 °
(–25 ° to 75 °)
–13 ° to 167 °
(–25 ° to 75 °)
–13 ° to 167 °
(–25 ° to 75 °)
–13 ° to 167 °
(–25 ° to 75 °)
–13 ° to 167 °
(–25 ° to 75 °)
3
Mounting position Any Any Any Any Any
Vibration resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-6) 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz,
3
amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm
Shock resistance (IEC 60068-2-27) — — — — — 3
Protection type
Housing IP40 IP40 IP20 IP20 IP20 3
Terminals IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Protection against direct contact when Finger- and back-of-hand Finger- and back-of-hand Finger- and back-of-hand Finger- and back-of-hand Finger- and back-of-hand
3
actuated from front (IEC 0106 Part 100) proof proof proof proof proof
Weight kg 0.3 0.3 0.17 0.17 0.22 3
Terminal capacity
Solid or flexible mm2 1 x (0.2–2.5) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 3
2 x (0.2–1) 2 x (0.2–1) 2 x (0.2–1) 2 x (0.2–1) 2 x (0.2–1)
Flexible with ferrule mm2 1 x (0.25–2.5) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 3
2 x (0.25–1) 2 x (0.25–1) 2 x (0.25–1) 2 x (0.25–1) 2 x (0.25–1)
Solid or stranded AWG 24–12 24–12 24–12 24–12 24–12 3
Terminal screw
Pozidriv screwdriver Size 2 2 2 2 2
3
Flat-blade screwdriver mm 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5
Max. tightening torque Nm 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 3
Main Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage—Uimp Vac 6000 6000 4000 4000 4000 3
Overvoltage category/pollution degree
Outside III/2 III/2 III/2 III/2 III/2 3
Inside — — — — —
Rated insulation voltage—Ui Vac 250 250 250 250 250 3
Rated operating voltage—Ue Vac 230 230 230 230 230
Rated operation current 3
AC-15
230 V (360 ops./h)—Ie A 4 4 — 5 4 3
230 V (3600 ops./h)—Ie A 3 3 3 3 3
DC-13 3
24 V (360 ops./h)—Ie A 4 4 — 6 4
24 V (3600 ops./h)—Ie A 2.5 2.5 3 3 2.5
3
Max. summation current of all poles
24 Vac/Vdc devices A 50 50 49 50 50 3
230 Vac devices A 50 50 — — —
Square of the total current 50 A2 (4 + 4 + 4) 50 A2 (4 + 4 + 4) 50 A2 (4 + 4 + 4) 49 A2 50 A2
3
(and total current) (3.5 + 3.5 + 3.5 + 3.5) (3.7 + 3.7 + 3.7 + 3.7
of all current paths + 3.7) 3
Short-circuit protection
Max. fuse A gG/gL 6 6 10 10 6 3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-197
 3.10 Control Relays and Timers
Safety Relays

Safety Relay, continued

3 ESR5-NO-31-24V-
Description Unit ESR5-NO-31-230VAC 230 VAC-DC ESR5-NV3_ ESR5-VE3_ ESR5-NE-51_
3 Power Supply Circuit
Actuating voltage 50/60 Hz Vac 230 24–230 — — 24
3 Actuating voltage—Us Vdc — 230 24 24 24
Voltage tolerance pick-up voltage xe 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.8–1.1
3 Power consumption
AC operated 50/60 Hz VA — — — — —
3 AC operated 50/60 Hz W 5.8 5.8 — — 2.2

3 DC operated
Fuse for control circuit supply
W 2.9 2.9 1.8 2 2.2

24 V — Short-circuit proof — — —
3 115/230 V Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof — — —

3 Control Circuit
Rated output voltage Vdc 24 24 24 24 24

3 Rated operational current mA S10, S12, S22: 35, S34,

S35: 45
S10, S12, S22: 35, S34,
S35: 45
S12, S22: 3.5, S34, S35: 7 A1, A2: 84, K1/K2: 5 A1, A2: 92

3 Resistance—R
Short-circuit current A
11
0.7
11
0.7
500
0.1
—
—
—
—

3 Response time ms 250 250 150 20 20

Recovery time ms — — — — —
3 Response time with reset
monitoring—tA1
ms 60 60 150 20 20

3 Response time without reset

monitoring—tA2
ms 250 250 150 20 20

Reset time—tR/tR1 ms 20 20 20 (non-delayed enable 0.3–3 s (+50%) 20

3 paths); 100 (min. delayed adjustable
enable paths)
3 Minimum on duration—tM ms — — — — —
Recovery time—tW ms Approx. 1000 Approx. 1000 Approx. 330 Approx. 1000 —
3 Synchronous monitoring time—tS ms — — — — —
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
3 Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4
Interference immunity According to According to According to EN 61000-6-2, According to According to
3 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 62061 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2

3
3 Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3 Safety Relays, Contact Expansion Modules
3 ESR5_ 24 Vac/Vdc ESR5_ 230 Vac
0.88 1.77
3 (22.5)
4.51
(45.0) 4.51
(114.5) (114.5)
3
3 3.26 2.62 3.06 3.90
3.26 2.62 3.06 3.90
(82.8) (66.5) (77.6) (99.0) (82.8) (66.5) (77.6) (99.0)
3
3
3.74
3 0.26
3.74
(95.1) 0.26 (95.1)
(6.6) (6.6)
3
3

V7-T3-198 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
easySafety
3.11
easySafety Contents
Description Page
3
easySafety 3
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-200
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-200 3
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-201
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-204 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Product Description Application Description Features 3
The easySafety control relay Because of the large number Safety function blocks: ● All-in-one: Safety and
for safety-related applications of safety function blocks, control functions combined
3
monitors all commonly used the user can tackle a large
● Emergency stop in one device
safety devices and also takes number of application options ● Guard door monitoring ● Simple configuration 3
over the required control tasks with only one device. The with and without interlock/ through prefabricated and
for the machine. Packed with user can also respond directly guard locking tested safety components 3
a host of conventional safety to future and changing ● Two-hand control (EN 574) ● Direct state display and
relays in the form of safety
function blocks, easySafety
application requirements.
This saves financial resources
● Electro-sensitive protective increased machine 3
devices (light curtains) availability due to fast
not only features integrated and offers future investment
safety functions but also security. Last but not least,
● Light curtain muting error diagnosis through 3
● Enable switch integrated display
standard functions in a single it reduces the stock-keeping
device—all in one. required for special safety ● Start device ● Multistep password
concept prevents
3
relays. The easySafety meets ● Operating mode selector
In addition to the safety circuit unwanted manipulation
diagram containing the safety
the requirements of ● Safety timing relay 3
Category 4 to EN 954‐1, PL e
configuration, the safety ● Overspeed monitoring
control relay also contains a
to EN ISO 13849‐1, SILCL 3
● Feedback loop monitoring
Standards and 3
to EN IEC 62061 and SIL 3 to Certifications
standard circuit diagram. This EN IEC 61508. With easySafety, (EDM)
circuit diagram can be used it is possible to implement ● Zero speed monitoring
● Product standards: 3
for standard tasks, such as applications meeting the CE marked; UL 508;
the processing of diagnostics
signals or general control
most stringent safety CSA C22.20.4-04;
CSA 22.2 No. 142-MI1987
3
requirements.
tasks of a machine. UL CCN: NRAQ
●
3
● CSA File No. 012528
● CSA Class No. 2252-81
and 2252-01
3
● TÜV Rhineland certified 3
● Degree of Protection IEC:
IP20 3
3
3
3
3
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-199
 3.11 Control Relays and Timers
easySafety

Product Selection
3
easySafety easySafety Relays 1
3 Outputs Outputs Outputs
Inputs (Safety) (Safety) (Safety) (Safety) Display +
3 Digital 6 A Relay Transistor Test Signal Keypad Catalog Number
14 1 (redundant) 4 4 — ES4P-221-DMXX1
3 14 1 (redundant) 4 4 Yes ES4P-221-DMXD1

3 14 4 — 4 — ES4P-221-DRXX1
14 4 — 4 Yes ES4P-221-DRXD1

3
3
3
Accessories
3
easySoft Programming Software Memory Card Memory Card
3 Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number
easySoft-Safety ESP-SOFT 256 kB module ES4A-MEM-CARD1
3 (including easySoftPro) 2

3
Programming Cables Input/Output Simulator
3 Description Catalog Number
Input/Output Simulator
Description Catalog Number

3 SUB-D Cable SUB-D, nine-pole, serial, 2m EASY800-PC-CAB With plug-in power supply unit
100–240 Vac/24 Vdc
ES4A-221-DMX-SIM

3
3
3
3 USB Cable USB, 2m EASY800-USB-CAB
Notes
1 EN 954-1: 1996, Category 4.

3 EN ISO 13849-1: 2006, PL e (Performance Level).

IEC 61508: 1998, SIL 3 (Safety Integrity Level).
IEC 62061: 2005, SILCL 3 (Safety Integrity Level Claim Limit).
3 Expandable: standard inputs/outputs and standard bus systems.
24 Vdc supply voltage.
3 2 Operating systems:

Windows® 2000 SP4, Windows XP SP1, Windows Vista (32 bit).

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-200 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
easySafety
3.11
Technical Data and Specifications
3
easySafety Relay
Description Unit ES4P_ 3
General
Standards EN 55011, EN 55022, IEC/EN 61000-4, IEC 60068-2-6,
3
IEC 60068-2-27, EN 954-1: Category 4,
EN ISO 13849-1: PL e, EN IEC 62061: SILCL 3, EN IEC 61508: SIL 3 3
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 107.5 (6 space units) x 90 x 72
Mounting Top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715, 35 mm or screw fixing using fixing brackets ZB4-101-GF1 (accessories) 3
Times
Inputs 3
Maximum duration of external test pulse ms 1
Semi-conductor output 3
Off test pulse ms <1
Switch-off delay ms <0.15 3
Terminal Capacity
Solid mm2 0.2–4 (AWG 22–12) 3
Flexible with ferrule mm2 0.2–2.5 (AWG 22–12)
Standard screwdriver mm 3.5 x 0.8 3
Maximum tightening torque Nm 0.6
Ambient Climatic Conditions
3
Operating ambient temperature °C –25 to +55, low temperatures to IEC 60068-2-1, high temperatures to IEC 60068-2-2
Condensation Prevent condensation by means of suitable measures
3
LCD display (clearly legible) °C 0 to +55
3
Storage °C –40 to +70
Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 5 to 95 3
Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795 to 1080
Ambient Mechanical Conditions 3
Protection type, IEC/EN 60529 IP20
Vibrations (IEC/EN 60068-2-6) 3
Constant amplitude 0.15 mm Hz 10 to 57
Constant acceleration, 2g Hz 57 to 150 3
Mechanical shock resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-27) Shocks 18
semi-sinusoidal 15g/11 ms 3
Drop to IEC/EN 60068-2-31 Drop mm 50
Mounting position Horizontal/vertical 3
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) According
to IEC/EN 61000-6-2
3
Electrostatic discharge (IEC/EN 61000-4-2, Level 3, ESD)
Air discharge
Contact discharge
kV
kV
8
6
3
Radio interference suppression (EN 55011) EN 55011 Class B, EN 55022 Class B 3
Power pulses (surge) (IEC/EN 61000-4-5, Level 2) kV 1 (supply cables, symmetrical)
Insulation Resistance 3
Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/2
Clearance in air and creepage distances EN 50178, UL 508, CSA C22.2, No. 142, EN 60664-1:2003 3
Insulation resistance EN 50178
Backup/Accuracy of the Real-Time Clock 3
Accuracy of the real-time clock s/day Normally ±5 (±0.5 h/year)
Repetition Accuracy of Timing Relays in 3
Standard Circuit
Accuracy of timing relay (of value) % ±0.02 3
Resolution
Range “S” ms 5 3
Range “M:S” s 1
Retentive Memory 3
Write cycles of the retentive memory (minimum) 10,000,000,000 (1010) (read/write cycles)
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-201
 3.11 Control Relays and Timers
easySafety

easySafety Relay, continued

3 Description Unit ES4P_
Power Supply
3 Rated operational voltage Ue V 24 Vdc (–15/+20%)

3 Permissible range Vdc 20.4 to 28.8

Ripple % 5
3 Interfaces
EASYNet (CAN-based)
3 Bus termination (first and last station) Yes
Control operating mode EASYNet
3 Number of users Maximum 8
NET Network
3 Stations Number Maximum 8
Data transfer rate/distance 1000 Kbit/s, 6m
3 500 Kbit/s, 25m
250 Kbit/s, 60m
125 Kbit/s, 125m
3 50 Kbit/s, 300m
20 Kbit/s, 700m
10 Kbit/s, 1000m
3 Bus lengths greater than 40m can only be achieved with enhanced cross-section conductors and
terminal adapters
3 Potential isolation
From power supply Yes
3 From the inputs Yes
From the outputs Yes
3 From the PC interface, memory card, NET network, EASYLink Yes
Bus termination (first and last station) Yes
3 Terminal type RJ45
Digital Inputs 24 Vdc
3 Number 14
Inputs can be used as analog inputs —
3 Status display LCD display (if provided)
Potential isolation
3 From power supply No
Between digital inputs No
3 From the outputs Yes
From PC interface, memory card, EASYLink No
3 From network EASYNet Yes

3 Rated operational voltage Ue Vdc 24

At signal “0” Ue Vdc <5

3 At signal “1” Ue Vdc >15

Clock Outputs
3 Number 4
Voltage Vdc 24
3 Electrical isolation No

3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-202 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 Control Relays and Timers
easySafety
3.11
easySafety Relay, continued
Description Unit ES4P_
3
Relay Outputs
Number 4 for ES4P-…-DR_, 1 redundant for ES4P-…-DM_
3
Outputs in groups of 1
3
Parallel switching of outputs to increase power Not permissible
Protection of an output relay Fuse: 6 A gG, circuit breaker with characteristic C: 24 Vdc 4 A, Short-circuit current <250 A 3
Potential isolation
From power supply Yes 3
From the inputs Yes
From PC interface, memory card, EASYNet, EASYLink Yes 3
Safe isolation according to EN 50178 Vac 300
Basic insulation Vac 600 3
Lifespan, mechanical Operations x 106 10
Contacts 3
Conventional thermal current A 6
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp contact coil kV 6 3
Rated operational voltage Ue Vac 250
Rated insulation voltage Ui Vac 250 3
Safe isolation to EN 50178 between coil and contact Vac 300
Making capacity 3
AC-15, 230 Vac, 3 A Operations 80,000
DC-13, 24 Vdc, 5 A, 0.1 Hz Operations 40,000 3
Switching frequency
Mechanical operations x 106 10 3
Switching frequency Hz 10
UL/CSA 3
UL 508 B300/R300
Transistor Outputs 3
Number 4
Rated operational voltage Ue Vdc 24
3
Permissible range Ue Vdc 20.4–28.8
Ripple % 5
3
Protection against polarity reversal Yes (Caution: A short-circuit will result if 0 V or GND is applied to the outputs in the event that the
supply voltage is connected to the wrong poles.)
3
Potential isolation
From power supply Yes 3
From the inputs Yes
From PC interface, memory card, network, EASYNet, EASYLink Yes
3
Rated operational current at signal “1” DC Ie A Maximum 0.5
At signal “1” with Ie = 0.5 A V U = Ue –1 V
3
Short-circuit protection Yes, thermal
Short-circuit tripping current for RA 10 m ohms A 0.7 Ie 2 per output
3
Total short-circuit current
Peak short-circuit current
A
A
8
16
3
Thermal cutout Yes
3
Maximum operating frequency at constant resistive load RL <100 kO Ops/h 40,000
(dependant on program and load)
Parallel connection of outputs No
3
Status indication of the outputs LCD display (if provided)
3
Inductive load
Without external suppressor circuit
Duty factor T0.95 ≈ 3 x T0.65 = 3 x L/R T0.95 = Time in ms, until 95% of the
3
steady-state current has been reached
With external suppressor circuit 3
Utilization factor g 1
Duty factor % DF 100
3
Maximum switching frequency, maximum duty factor Operations Depending on the suppressor circuit
3

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T3-203
 3.11 Control Relays and Timers
easySafety

Dimensions
3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3 ESR5_

3
3
3
1.77 3.54 3.54
3 (45.0) (90.0) (90.0)

3
3
3
1.87 (47.5)
3
2.68 (68.0) 4.23 (107.5)

3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

V7-T3-204 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2017 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products

4.1 XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XC Series PLCs
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-2
4
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-3 4
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-4
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-6 4
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-12
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-28
4
XC152 Series PLCs

4.2 XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers

4
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-30 4
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-31
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-32 4
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-33
4
4.3 XN300 Series Remote I/O
XN300 Series Remote I/O 4
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-34
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-34 4
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-34
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-35 4
Note: For EASY Programmable Relays, see Tab 3 in this volume. 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-1
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Contents

4 Description Page
4 XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-3
4 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-4
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-4
4 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-6
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-9
4 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-12
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-28
4
4
4
4
4
4 Product Overview Features and Benefits Standards and
The XC100 and XC200 series Flexible Range High Performance Certifications
4 modular PLCs stand out on ● IEC—UL508; CSA C22.2
● Compact and modular CPU ● Parallel backplane bus for
account of their highly No. 0-M; CSA C22.2
4 scalable design. Different
versions to suit the needs
of the application
faster processing speed
No. 142-M; CE marking
CPU performance classes
● Fiber optic CANopen
With or without on-board interface for environments ● UL File No.—E135462
4 and a wide range of
●

Ethernet and/or built-in with severe electromagnetic ● UL CCN—NRAQ

expansion modules are
web server interference ● CSA File No. 012528
4 available. An important
feature is their ability to be ● Range of CPU performance ● High performance XC202 ● CSA Class No. 2252-01
integrated in modern ● Integrated CANopen CPU with NA Certification—
4 communication systems. interface for easy ● 10/100 Mbit Ethernet
●

● UL Listed
Innovative solutions can be integration with XI/ON ● XSoft-CoDeSys
4 created thanks to the remote I/O programming software
● CSA certified/cUL
possibility of exchanging data ● RoHS
4 with OPC clients via the
Ethernet interface and the
integrated web server.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

V7-T4-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
Product Selection Guide
4
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4
4
4
4
XC121 Compact PLC XC101 Modular PLCs XC201 Modular PLCs XC202 Modular PLCs
Page V7-T4-6 Page V7-T4-6 Page V7-T4-7 Page V7-T4-7
4
This PLC is particularly suitable for The modular PLCs of the XC101 series are The modular PLCs of the XC201 series offer a The modular PLCs of the XC202 series offer
applications where space is at premium and universal automation devices for small and high CPU performance, a high speed and a higher CPU performance and memory than the 4
with high communication requirements. medium-sized applications. wide range of communication options. XC201 PLCs.
● Two serial and two CAN interfaces enable: ● Locally expandable with up to 15
XIOC modules
● Locally expandable with up to 15
XIOC modules
● Locally expandable with up to 15
XIOC modules
4
– the coupling of two CAN networks
– Modbus master/slave coupling ● Data storage on SD card ● Ethernet interface for communication ● Ethernet interface for communication
(RS-232 or RS-485)—CAN ● CAN interface and programming and programming 4
– RS-232—CAN coupling ● CAN interface ● CAN interface
● I/O expansion with 18 digital and 8 analog
inputs/outputs
● Data storage on SD card or USB stick ● Data storage on SD card or USB stick 4
● Web server enables visualization via ● Operating system update via Ethernet,
● 6 interrupt inputs
● Expandable with standard XIOC modules ●
CoDeSys
Operating system update SD card or USB ●
SD card or USB
Up to three IP addresses can be configured
4
● 29-bit CAN identifier
4
Features XC121 XC101 XC201 XC202 4
Input voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
Memory size 256 kB 64, 128 or 256 kB 256 kB or 2 MB 4 MB 4
Microprocessor Infineon CC161 Infineon C164 MIPS RISC ARM11
Processor speed 36 MHz 24 MHz 131 MHz 532 MHz 4
Cycle time per 1k instructions <0.3 ms <0.5 ms <0.15 ms <0.025 ms
SD card slot Yes Yes Yes Yes
4
USB interface No No Yes Yes
4
Real time clock Yes Yes Yes Yes
On-board digital inputs — 8 8 8 4
On-board digital outputs — 6 6 6
Interrupt inputs 6 4 2 2 4
Expandability XIO-EXT base module + Up to 15 XIOC modules Up to 15 XIOC modules Up to 15 XIOC modules
Up to 15 XIOC modules 4
Removable terminal blocks Yes Yes Yes Yes
Screw terminal option No Yes Yes Yes 4
Spring-cage terminal option Yes Yes Yes Yes
Serial interface 1, RS-232 1, RS-232 1, RS-232 1, RS-232
4
1, RS-232/RS-485
Ethernet port No No Yes Yes 4
CANopen interface 2 1 1 1
On-board high speed counters No No Yes Yes
4
On-board encoder inputs No No Yes Yes
OPC server Yes Yes Yes Yes
4
Integrated web server No No On suffix “-XV” models Yes 4
FTP server No No On suffix “-XV” models Yes
Networks master CANopen/easyNet CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/easyNet Ethernet/CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/ Ethernet/CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/ 4
easyNet easyNet
Networks node/device CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP®/
easyNet
CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/
easyNet
Ethernet/CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/
easyNet
Ethernet/CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/
easyNet
4
Operating system Proprietary Proprietary Windows CE Windows CE
4
X-Soft-CoDeSys version V2.3 V2.3 V2.3 V2.3 and 3.0
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-3
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

Catalog Number Selection

4
Controllers
4
XC - CPU 201 - EC 512K - XV
4
Model Number Visualization Option
4 101 = Modular (Infineon C164—16 bit at 24 MHz) XV = Web server
121 = Compact (Infineon XC161—16 bit at 36 MHz)
4 201 =
202 =
Modular (MIPS RISC—32 bit at 131 MHz)
Modular (ARM 11—32 bit at 532 MHz)
Communication Ports User Memory
C = 1 CANopen 64K = 64 kB
4 2C = 2 CANopen
EC = Ethernet and CANopen
128K = 128 kB
256K = 256 kB
512K = 2 MB
4 4M = 4 MB

4 System Overview
4 System Configuration

4 1
CPU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

XIOC-BP-XC XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-3

4
4 XIOC-BP-XC1 XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-3

4 CPU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2
4 XIOC-BP-XC XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-EXT XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-2

4 XIOC-BP-XC1 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-EXT XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-2

4
Notes
4 1 Maximum basic version, <7 signal modules.
2 Maximum total version, <15 signal modules.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

V7-T4-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
Product Identification
1
2
4
4
7 4
4
4
4
4
5
4
5
5 4
4
6 3 4
4
4
4
4 4
4
7
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8 9 8 9 4
Item Item 4
Number Description Number Description
1 XC121 Compact PLC CPU 6 Battery 4
2 XC121 I.O Expansion module 7 SD Memory card
3 XC100/XC200 Modular PLC 8 XIOC Terminal block, screw terminals
4
4 XIOC I/O modules 9 XIOC Terminal block, spring-cage terminals 4
5 XIOC Module backplane
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-5
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

Product Selection
4
XC121 Compact PLC CPU
4 Can be locally expanded with I/O module XIO-EXT-121-1.
● 24 Vdc input supply ● RS-232 interface for ● Slot for SD memory card
4 ● Real time clock programming and ● Spring-cage terminal
● 2 CANopen interfaces communication blocks
4 (500 kB) ● Second RS-232/RS-485 ● OPC server
interface ● RUN/STOP switch
4
XC121 XC121 Compact PLC
4 Program
Memory Size
Cycle
Time 1 Ethernet CAN
Serial
Interface
Web
Server
Pkg.
Qty.
Style
Number
Catalog
Number

4 256 kB <0.3 ms — 2 1, RS-232

1, RS-232/RS-485
— 1 290446 XC-CPU121-2C256K

4
4
XC121 I/O Expansion Module
4
Base I/O module for the XC121.
4 ● 10 digital inputs 24 Vdc ● 2 analog inputs 0–10V ● Removable spring-cage
● 6 interrupt inputs ● 2 analog inputs 0–20 mA terminals
4 ● 8 digital inputs/outputs ● 2 analog inputs PT100 RTD ● Expandable with 15 XIOC
modules 2
24 Vdc 0.5A ● 2 analog outputs 0–10V
4 XC121 I/O Expansion Module
XC121 I/O Module
4 Digital
Inputs
Digital
Inputs/Outputs
Analog
Inputs
Analog
Outputs
Pkg.
Qty.
Style
Number
Catalog
Number

4 10, 24 Vdc 8, 24 Vdc 0.5A 2, 0–10V

2, 0–20 mA
2, 0–10V 1 290450 XIO-EXT121-1

2, PT100 RTD
4
4
XC101 Modular PLCs
4
Order backplane, terminals and battery separately.
4 ● 24 Vdc input supply ● 4 interrupt inputs ● CANopen interface
● Real time clock ● 6 digital outputs (500 kB)
4 ● Expandable with 15 XIOC ● RS-232 interface for ● Slot for SD memory card
modules programming and ● RUN/STOP switch and
4 ● 8 digital inputs communication LED indicators

4 XC101 XC101 Modular PLCs

Program Cycle Serial Web Pkg. Style Catalog
4 Memory Size Time 1 Ethernet CANOpen Interface Server Qty. Number Number
64 kB <0.5 ms — 1 1, RS-232 typ. — 1 262152 XC-CPU101-C64K
4 128 kB <0.5 ms — 1 1, RS-232 typ. — 1 262146 XC-CPU101-C128K

4 256 kB <0.5 ms — 1 1, RS-232 typ. — 1 274399 XC-CPU101-C256K

4 Notes
1 Cycle time per 1k of instructions.

4 2 Except the XIOC-NET-DP-M module.

4
4
4

V7-T4-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
XC201 Modular PLCs
Order backplane, terminals and battery accessories separately.
4
● 24 Vdc input supply ● Incremental encoder
inputs
● Ethernet and RS-232
interface for programming
● RUN/STOP switch and LED
indicators
4
● Real time clock
High speed counter and communication Built-in Web server on
● Expandable with 15 XIOC
modules
●

(50 kHz) inputs ● CANopen interface (1 MB)

●

XV models
4
● 6 digital outputs ● Slot for SD memory card
● 8 digital inputs
● USB interface
4
● 2 interrupt inputs

XC201 XC201 Modular PLCs 4

Program Cycle Serial Web Pkg. Style Catalog
Memory Size Time 1 Ethernet CANOpen Interface Server Qty. Number Number 4
256 kB <0.15 ms ✓ 1 1, RS-232 — 1 262155 XC-CPU201-EC256K
2 MB <0.15 ms ✓ 1 1, RS-232 — 1 262157 XC-CPU201-EC512K
4
✓ ✓
256 kB
Integrated web server
<0.15 ms 1 1, RS-232 1 262156 XC-CPU201-EC256K-XV
4
2 MB <0.15 ms ✓ 1 1, RS-232 ✓ 1 262158 XC-CPU201-EC512K-XV
Integrated web server 4

XC202 Modular PLCs

4
Order backplane, terminals and battery accessories separately. 4
● 24 Vdc input supply ● Incremental encoder ● Ethernet and RS-232 ● RUN/STOP switch and LED
● Real time clock inputs interface for programming indicators 4
● Expandable with 15 XIOC ● High speed counter and communication ● Built-in Web server
modules (50 kHz) inputs ● CANopen interface (1 MB) 4
● 8 digital inputs ● 6 digital outputs ● Slot for SD memory card
● 2 interrupt inputs ● USB interface 4
XC202 Modular PLCs
XC202 4
Program Cycle Serial Web Pkg. Style Catalog
Memory Size Time 1 Ethernet CANOpen Interface Server Qty. Number Number
4
4 MB <0.025 ms ✓ 1 1, RS-232 ✓ 1 134238 XC-CPU202-EC4M-XV
Integrated web server
4
4
XIOC Expansion Modules 4
Order screw, spring-cage terminals or 40-pin connector cable for 32 I/O modules separately.
● 8, 16 and 32 input modules ● User configurable input/ ● Isolated relay output
4
output module module
● 8, 16 and 32 output
modules
4
XIOC—Digital XIOC Digital Expansion Modules 4
Pkg. Style Catalog
Description Qty. Number Number
4
8 inputs, 24 Vdc 1 257891 XIOC-8DI
16 inputs, 24 Vdc 1 257892 XIOC-16DI 4
32 inputs, 24 Vdc 1 267411 XIOC-32DI
8 outputs, 24 Vdc, 0.3A 1 257894 XIOC-8DO 4
16 outputs, 24 Vdc, 0.3A 1 257896 XIOC-16DO
16 outputs, 24 Vdc, 0.8A, short-circuit protected 1 257895 XIOC-16DO-S
4
16 terminals, 4 inputs, 12 configurable as inputs/outputs, 24 Vdc—outputs 0.5A 1 262322 XIOC-16DX
32 outputs, 24 Vdc, 0.2A 1 267413 XIOC-32DO
4
12 relay outputs, isolated 1 257897 XIOC-12DO-R 4
Note
1 Cycle time per 1k of instructions. 4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-7
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XIOC—Analog XIOC Analog Modules

4 Pkg. Style Catalog
Description Qty. Number Number
4 Inputs: 8 inputs 4–20 mA 1 262549 XIOC-8AI-I2

4 Inputs: 8 voltage inputs 0–10V 1 257899 XIOC-8AI-U1

Inputs: 8 voltage inputs, ±10V 1 257900 XIOC-8AI-U2
4 Inputs: 4 inputs for temperature monitoring, PT100/1000 1 257901 XIOC-4T-PT
Inputs: 4 inputs for thermocouples Type K, J, L, B, N, E, R, S, T 1 289933 XIOC-4AI-T
4 Outputs: 2 outputs, ±10V 1 257904 XIOC-2AO-U2
Outputs: 2 outputs 0–10V, 2 outputs 4–20 mA 1 257902 XIOC-2AO-U1-2AO-I2
4 Outputs: 4 outputs 0–10 V 1 257903 XIOC-4AO-U1

4 Combination modules: 2 inputs and 1 output 0–10V/1 ms conversion time 1 262409 XIOC-2AI-1AO-U1
Combination modules: 2 inputs and 1 output 0–10V, 0–20 mA/1 ms conversion time, individual changeover 1 281545 XIOC-2AI-1AO-U1-I1
4 Combination modules: 4 inputs and 2 outputs 0–10V/1 ms conversion time 1 262405 XIOC-4AI-2AO-U1
Combination modules: 4 inputs and 2 outputs 0–10V, 0–20 mA/1 ms conversion time, individual changeover 1 281544 XIOC-4AI-2AO-U1-I1
4
4 XIOC—Counter Counter Modules
Pkg. Style Catalog
4 Description Qty. Number Number
1 input up to 100 kHz, 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc, 2 digital transistor outputs, opto-isolated, 24 Vdc 1 257906 XIOC-1CNT-100KHZ
4 30-pin connector required for counter module
2 inputs up to 100 kHz, (24 Vdc or 5V diff), 4 digital transistor outputs, opto-isolated, 24 Vdc 1 257907 XIOC-2CNT-100KHZ
4 30-pin connector required for counter module
2 incremental encoders up to 400 kHz, 5 Vdc, 2 analog outputs ±10V 1 262417 XIOC-2CNT-2AO-INC
4
4 XIOC—Communication Communication Modules
Card Pkg. Style Catalog
4 Description Qty. Number Number
PROFIBUS-DP master module 1 257908 XIOC-NET-DP-M
4 PROFIBUS-DP node module 1 286419 XIOC-NET-DP-S

4 Serial interfaces: RS-232C, RS-485, RS-422 (for XC101, XC201 and XC202)
Modes of operation: Transparent mode, Modbus master/node
1 267191 XIOC-SER

Serial interfaces: RS-232C, RS-485, RS-422 (for XC201 and XC202 only) 1 135265 XIOC-TC1
4 Modes of operation: Transparent mode, Modbus master/node

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

V7-T4-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
Accessories
4
Terminals
Terminals
One 18 pole terminal plug is required for each digital and analog module.
4
Description
Pkg.
Qty.
Style
Number
Catalog
Number
4
18-pin connector with screw terminals for digital or analog I/O 10 258102 XIOC-TERM-18S
4
18-pin connector with spring-cage terminal for digital or analog I/O 10 258104 XIOC-TERM-18T
40-pin connector for digital module, with 4 m cable 1 267414 XIOC-TERM32 4
XIOC-32DI
XIOC-32DO
30-pin connector for counter module, with 4 m cable 1 262248 XIOC-TERM30-CNT4
4
XIOC-1CNT-100KHZ
XIOC-2CNT-100KHZ 4
4
Module Backplane
Pkg. Style Catalog 4
Description Qty. Number Number
Backplane Basic backplane for mounting XC100/200 on top-hat rail, can be expanded 1 260792 XIOC-BP-XC 4
Width: 2 slots for controller
Expansion backplane for mounting XIOC modules on top-hat rail, can be expanded 1 260794 XIOC-BP-2 4
Width: 2 slots for XIOC modules
4
4
4

Backplane Basic backplane for mounting XC100/200 on DIN rail, can be expanded 1 260793 XIOC-BP-XC1
4
Width: 3 slots for controller and one XIOC module
Expansion backplane for mounting XIOC modules on DIN rail, can be expanded 1 260795 XIOC-BP-3
4
Width: 3 slots for XIOC modules
Expansion backplane for mounting XIOC modules on DIN rail, can be expanded 1 274291 XIOC-BP-EXT
4
Width: 3 slots for XIOC modules 1
4
4
Memory Card
4
Memory Card
For storage of programs, data, recipes for XC100, XC121, XC200.
4
Pkg. Style Catalog
Description Qty. Number Number
4
512 MB 1 138257 XT-MEM-MM512M
32 MB 1 262731 XT-MEM-MM32M 4
4
Note
1 Module backplane for expansion with up to 15 modules, must be plugged into the 6th slot.
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-9
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

Battery Battery
4 Pkg. Style Catalog
Description Qty. Number Number
4 Lithium 1/2 AA 3.6V battery for backup of real-time clock 1 256209 XT-CPU-BAT1

4
4 Programming Cables
Pkg. Style Catalog
4 Description Qty. Number Number
D-Sub 9-Pin 2m, D-sub 9-pin, serial 1 262186 XT-SUB-D/RJ45
4
4
Ethernet Cross 2m, Ethernet cross 1 256487 XT-CAT5-X-2
4 5m, Ethernet cross 1 256488 XT-CAT5-X-5

4
4 Programming Programming cable for XC through USB interface 1 115735 EU4A-RJ45-USB-CAB1

4
4
4
Connection Cable Connection Cables
4 Pkg. Style Catalog
Description Qty. Number Number
4 0.3m: Connection cable for XC200 to interface switch 1 256283 EASY-NT-30
0.8m: Connection cable for XC200 to interface switch 1 256284 EASY-NT-80
4 1.5m: Connection cable for XC200 to interface switch 1 256285 EASY-NT-150

4
Empty Module Empty Module
4 Pkg. Style Catalog
Description Qty. Number Number
4 Empty module to cover open XIOC slots 1 288894 XIOC-NOP

4
4
4 Interface Switch Interface Switch
Pkg. Style Catalog
4 Description Qty. Number Number
Interface adapter to split the combined RS-232/Ethernet 1 289170 XT-RJ45-ETH-RS232
4 interface of the XC200 into RJ45 sockets. Connection cable
EASY-NT-30/80/150 usable for connection to XC200

4
4
Filter Filter
4 Description
Pkg.
Qty.
Style
Number
Catalog
Number

4 Interference suppression of the external 24 Vdc supply of the

XC100/200. Maximum current consumption: 2.2A
1 285316 XT-FIL-1

4 Power supply interference suppression of I/O modules of

XC100/200. Maximum current consumption: 12A
1 118980 XT-FIL-2

V7-T4-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software
4
Combined Logic and Visualization Development for XC Series PLCs
IEC 61131-3 Programming Languages 4
● Ladder Diagram
● Structured Text 4
● Sequential function chart
● Function block diagram
4
● Freely definable function block chart/continuous function chart
● Instruction List
4
Project Development Target Visualization Simulation ● Fieldbus Configurator 4
● Automatic variable Integrated design of Operator Users can also test the for CANopen, PROFIBUS-
declaration Interface screens for the XV application when the XV HMI- DP and SmartWire-DT® 4
HMI-PLC series. Visualization PLC is not connected to the device I/O
● On-line editing
● Pop-up variable and and logic developed as part of process. This is possible ● Ethernet and serial
communication function
4
function search/pick tools the same project. Simplifies thanks to the integrated
screen design and always online simulation feature. blocks (OPC server, UDP,
● Automatic formatting and keeps the Logic and Simulation supports both the TCP/IP, FTP client/ server, 4
color coding of logic/ visualization in synch. screens and logic that have Modbus Master/Node,
declaration text been designed using XSoft- email, SMS, and more) 4
● Re-usable Visual-Logic Web Visualization CoDeSys. ● 8 level password
Function Blocks Optionally XSoft-CoDeSys-2
Advanced Features
protection 4
can automatically generate ● Web access selectable
Debugging and Up to 16 time and/or event
commissioning
XML-based runtime screens
to make the screens from the
●

driven tasks per project

per screen 4
XSoft-CoDeSys-2 offers you XV HMI-PLC accessible
● System function libraries
● Each task can include
a number of important remotely using a web multiple logic programs or
(OS Storage Card, and 4
functions for debugging, browser with a JavaScript more)
subroutines
testing and commissioning plug-in such as Internet ● Programs and screen
● On-line and historical 4
your applications quickly and Explorer®, Firefox® alarms
designs can be exported
efficiently. and others. and imported to support
● On-line and historical 4
reuse trends
All these features are
available as soon as you log ● Powerful, built-in function System Requirements
4
on to the XV HMI-PLC or block libraries
Windows XP and Windows 7
XC200 PLC (online mode) ● Ability to create user- 32-bit systems 4
over an Ethernet connection. defined function blocks
4
XSoft-CoDeSys-2 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software
Description Catalog Number
4
Single Seat License SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S
4
Multiple Seat License (3) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-11
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

Technical Data and Specifications

4
XC121 Compact PLC
4 Description Unit XC-CPU121-2C256K

4 General
Standards IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178
4 Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°)
Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°)
4 Mounting position Horizontal
Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 10–95
4 Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795–1080
Vibration resistance Frequency 5–9 Hz; 3.5 mm amplitude
4 9–150 Hz; 1.0g constant acceleration
Mechanical shock resistance 15g/11 ms
4 Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
4 Degree of protection IP20

4 Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Emitted interference
V 500
EN 61000-6-4

4 Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2

Backup time At least 72 hours
4 Weight kg 0.15
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Refer to Page V7-T4-27
4 Connections
Supply voltage
4 Connection type —
Terminal capacity mm2 0.14–1 (AWG28-18)
4 COM1 interface
Connection type RJ45
4 COM2, CAN1, CAN2 interfaces
Connection type Spring-loaded terminal block, 6-pole
4 Terminal capacity mm² 0.14–0.5 (AWG28-20)
Power Supply
4 Input voltage Vdc 24

4 Permissible range
Input power
Vdc
W
20.4–28.8
Max. 1.44

4 Input current mA 60
Ripple % <5
4 Maximum heat dissipation (without local I/O) (Pv) W 6
Overvoltage protection Yes
4 Protection against polarity reversal Yes
Inrush current x In No limitation
4 (limited only by upstream 24 Vdc power supply unit)
Supply failure bridging
4 Duration of power failure ms 10
Repetition rate s 1
4 External supply filter Part No.: XT-FIL-1, Refer to Page V7-T4-10
Memory
4 Program code/program data kByte 256/244
Marker/input/output/retain data kByte 16/4/4/8
4 Cycle time for 1k of instructions (bits, bytes) ms <0.3

4
4
4

V7-T4-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
XC121 Compact PLC, continued
Description Unit XC-CPU121-2C256K
4
Interfaces
Serial interface (RS-232) without handshake lines
4
Baud rate kbit/s Programming (character format: 8 data bits,
No parity, 1 stop bit) 19.2, 38.4 (default), 57.6 4
Connector type RJ45
Potential isolation No
4
In transparent mode
Baud rate kbit/s 0.3, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2
4
Character formats
Number of send bytes for block
8E1, 8O1, 8N1, 8N2, 7E2, 7O2, 7N2, 7E1
190
4
Number of receive bytes for block 190 4
COM2 (RS-232/RS-485) without handshake lines
Baud rate kbit/s Transparent mode (setting through function blocks)
0.3, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6
4
Character formats 8E1, 8O1, 8N1, 8N2, 7E2, 7O2, 7N2, 7E1
(setting through function blocks) 4
Potential isolation No
Bus termination External, for RS-485
4
CAN1/CAN2 interface
Baud rate kbit/s 10 – 500
4
Potential isolation No
4
Stations 126
Bus termination Adjustable for each interface (CAN1/CAN2) 4
PDO type Asyn., cyc., acyc.
Power Supply of Local Inputs/Outputs (24 VQ/0 VQ) 4
Input voltage Vdc 24
Voltage range Vdc 19.2–30, observe polarity 4
Potential isolation
Between power supply and CPU voltage Yes 4
Overvoltage protection Yes
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-13
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XC121 Expansion Module

4 Description Unit XIO-EXT121-1
General
4 Standards IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178

4 Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°)

Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°)
4 Mounting position Horizontal
Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 10–95
4 Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795–1080
Vibration resistance Frequency 5–9 Hz; 3.5 mm amplitude
4 9–150 Hz; 1.0g constant acceleration
Mechanical shock resistance 15g/11 ms
4 Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
4 Degree of protection IP20
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 500
4 Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4
Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2
4 Backup time At least 72 hours
Weight kg 0.15
4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Refer to Page V7-T4-27

4 Connections
X1 connector

4 Connector type
Terminal capacity (solid) mm2
Spring-loaded terminal block, 20 pole, B2L 3.5
0.5–1

4 X2/X3 connector
Connector type Spring-loaded terminal block, 10-pole, BLZF 3.5/180 or
BLI/O 3.5/10F with LEDs
4 Terminal capacity (solid) mm² 0.5–1
Power Supply
4 Supply failure bridging
Duration of power failure ms 10
4 Repetition rate s 1

4 Input voltage Vdc 24

Permissible range Vdc 20.4 – 28.8

4 Input power W Max.1.68

Input current mA 70
4 Ripple % <5
Overvoltage protection Yes
4 Protection against polarity reversal Yes
Inrush current x In Max. 1A
4 Output voltage for signal modules
Max. field current (IL) A 2
4 Digital Inputs
Number X2: 9 with plug BLI/O 3.5/10F or 10 with plug BLZF 3.5/
4 180 X3: 8 (can also be used as outputs)
Rated voltage (Ue) Vdc 24
4 At state “0” (Ue) Vdc <5
At state “1” (Ue) Vdc >15
4 Rated operational current
At state “1” (Ie) mA 3.3
4 Delay time
X2: DI0–DI3 μs 20
4 X2: DI4–DI9 μs 250
X2: DX0–DX7 ms 20
4 Potential isolation No

V7-T4-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
XC121 Expansion Module, continued
Description Unit XIO-EXT121-1
4
Digital Outputs
Number At X3: 8 (can also be used as inputs)
4
Rated voltage
Rated voltage (Ue) Vdc 24
4
Permissible range 20.4–28.8 Vdc
<5
4
Ripple %
Rated operational current
At state “1” (Ie) A 0.5 at 24 Vac
4
Utilization factor (%) g 1 4
Maximum duty factor ms 100%
Lamp load without (Rv) W 5 4
Potential isolation No
Residual current at state “0” per channel mA <0.1 4
Max. output voltage
At state “0” with external load <10M ohms V 2.5 4
At state “1” at Ie = 0.5A V U = Ue–1V
Short-circuit tripping current 4
Short-circuit tripping current for Ra <10M ohms A 0.7 < Ie <2 for output
Total short-circuit current A 16 4
Peak short-circuit current A 32
Max. operating frequency ops/h 40,000 4
Parallel connection capability Yes
Analog Inputs 0–10V
4
Number of channels 2
Primary voltage range V 0–10
4
Resolution bit 10
<5
4
Conversion time ms
Overall accuracy < ± 1% (of full-scale value) 4
Input resistance kohm 200
Analog Inputs 0–20 mA 4
Number of channels 2
Primary voltage range mA 0–20 4
Resolution bit 10
Conversion time ms <5 4
Overall accuracy < ± 1% (of full-scale value)
Input resistance ohm 50
4
PT100 RTD
Number of channels 2
4
Temperature range °F (°C) –348° to 392° (–200° to 200°)
4
Resistance range ohm 18.5–175.8
Resolution bit 10 4
Overall accuracy < ± 2%
Analog Outputs 4
Number of channels 2
Secondary voltage range V 0–10 4
Resolution bit 12
Conversion time ms <5 4
Overall accuracy < ± 1% (of full-scale value)
External load resistance (R) kohm 10 4
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-15
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XC101 Modular PLCs

4 Description Unit XC-CPU101-C64K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-C128K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-FC128K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-C256K-8DI-6DO

4 General
Standards IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178

4 Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°)
Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°)
4 Mounting position Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Relative humidity, noncondensing % 10–95 10–95 10–95 10–95
4 (IEC/EN 60068-2-30)
Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795–1080 795–1080 795–1080 795–1080
4 Vibration resistance 10–57 Hz ±0.075 mm/57–150 Hz ±1.0g
Mechanical shock resistance 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms
4 Overvoltage category II II II II
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2
4 Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 500 500 500 500
4 Emitted interference Ui EN 61000-6-4, Class A EN 61000-6-4, Class A EN 61000-6-4, Class A EN 61000-6-4, Class A

4 Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2

Battery (lifespan) Normally 5 years Normally 5 years Normally 5 years Normally 5 years

4 Weight kg 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23

Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block
4 Terminal capacity
Screw terminals
4 Flexible with ferrule mm2 0.5–1.5 0.5–1.5 0.5–1.5 0.5–1.5
Solid mm2 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5
4 Spring-cage terminal
Flexible mm2 0.34–1.0 0.34–1.0 0.34–1.0 0.34–1.0
4 Solid mm2 0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Refer to Page V7-T4-27
4 Power Supply

4 Mains failure duration ms 10 10 10 10

Repetition rate s 1 1 1 1

4 Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24 24

Permissible range Vdc 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8
4 Input power W Max. 26 Max. 26 Max. 26 Max. 26
Ripple % <5 <5 <5 <5
4 Maximum heat dissipation W 6 6 6 6
(without local I/O) (Pv)
4 Overvoltage protection Yes Yes Yes Yes
Protection against polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Mains filter (external) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Inrush current x In Not limited, (limiting only by a supply-side 24 Vdc PSU)
4 Output voltage for signal modules
Rated value Vdc 5 5 5 5
4 Output current A 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
Short-circuit rating Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Isolated from supply voltage No No No No

4 CPU
Microprocessor Infineon C164 Infineon C164 Infineon C164 Infineon C164
4 Memory
Program code/program data kByte 64/64 128/128 128/128 256/256
4 Marker/retain data kByte 4/4 8/8 8/8 8/8
Cycle time for 1k of instructions ms <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5
4 (bits, bytes)

V7-T4-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
XC101 Modular PLCs, continued
Description Unit XC-CPU101-C64K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-C128K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-FC128K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101- C256K-8DI-6DO
4
Interfaces
Serial interface (RS-232)
4
without handshake lines
Baud rate kbit/s Max. 57.6 Max. 57.6 Max. 57.6 Max. 57.6 4
Connections RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45
Potential isolation No No No No
4
CANopen
Maximum data transfer rate bit/s 500,000 500,000 500,000 500,000
4
Potential isolation
Device profile
Yes
To DS 301 V4
Yes
To DS 301 V4
Yes
To DS 301 V4
Yes
To DS 301 V4
4
PDO type Asyn., cyc., acyc. Asyn., cyc., acyc. Asyn., cyc., acyc. Asyn., cyc., acyc. 4
Connection Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Optical fiber interface, wavelength Plug-in terminal block
660 mm, plug for example
HFBR-4516 Agilent Technologies 4
Bus terminating resistors External External External External
Stations Number Max. 126 Max. 126 Max. 126 Max. 126
4
Watchdog Yes Yes Yes Yes
4
RTC (real-time clock) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Power Supply of Local Inputs/Outputs (24 VQ/0 VQ) 4
Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24 24
Voltage range Vdc 19.2–30, observe polarity 19.2–30, observe polarity 19.2–30, observe polarity 19.2–30, observe polarity 4
Potential isolation
Between power supply and Yes Yes Yes Yes 4
CPU voltage
Overvoltage protection Yes Yes Yes Yes 4
Protection against polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes Yes
Digital Inputs 4
Input current for channel at rated mA Normally 3.5 Normally 3.5 Normally 3.5 Normally 3.5
voltage 4
Heat dissipation for channel mW Normally 85 Normally 85 Normally 85 Normally 85
Voltage level to IEC/EN 61131-2 4
Limit value type 1 Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc Low <5 Vdc,/High >15 Vdc Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc
Input delay 4
OFF ON ms Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1
ON OFF ms Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 4
Inputs Number 8 (of which 4 interrupt inputs) 8 (of which 4 interrupt inputs) 8 (of which 4 interrupt inputs) 8 (of which 4 interrupt inputs)
Channels with the same reference Number 8 8 8 8 4
potential
Status indication LED LED LED LED 4
Digital Outputs
Channels Number 6 6 6 6 4
Heat dissipation for channel W 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
Load circuits A 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
4
Output delay
OFF ON Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms
4
ON OFF Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms
Channels with the same reference Number 6 6 6 6
4
potential
Status indication LED LED LED LED
4
Switching capacity IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1,
utilization category DC-13 utilization category DC-13 utilization category DC-13 utilization category DC-13 4
Duty factor % DF 100 100 100 100
Utilization factor g 1 1 1 1
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-17
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XC200 Series Modular PLCs

4 Description Unit XC-CPU201-EC256K-8DI-6DO(-XV) XC-CPU201-EC512K-8DI-6DO(-XV) XC-CPU202-EC4M-8DI-6DO-XV

4 General
Standards IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178

4 Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°)
Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°)
4 Mounting position Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 10–95 10–95 10–95
4 Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795–1080 795–1080 795–1080
Vibration resistance 10–57 Hz ±0.075 mm 10–57 Hz ±0.075 mm 10–57 Hz ±0.075 mm
4 57–150 Hz ±1.0g 57–150 Hz ±1.0g 57–150 Hz ±1.0g
Mechanical shock resistance 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms
4 Overvoltage category II II II
Pollution degree 2 2 2
4 Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) V 850 850 850
4 Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4, Class A EN 61000-6-4, Class A EN 61000-6-4, Class A

4 Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2

Battery (lifespan) Normally 5 years Normally 5 years Normally 5 years

4 Weight kg 0.23 0.23 0.23

Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block
4 Terminal capacity
Screw terminals
4 Flexible with ferrule mm2 0.5–1.5 0.5–1.5 0.5–1.5
Solid mm2 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5
4 Spring-cage terminal
Flexible mm2 0.34–1.0 0.34–1.0 0.34–1.0
4 Solid mm2 0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Refer to Page V7-T4-27
4 Power Supply

4 Duration of mains failure ms 10 10 10

Repetition rate s 1 1 1

4 Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24

Permissible range Vdc 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8
4 Input power W Max. 33 Max. 33 Max. 33
Ripple % <5 <5 <5
4 Maximum heat dissipation (Pv) W 6 6 6
Overvoltage protection Yes Yes Yes
4 Protection against polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes
Line filter Yes Yes Yes
4 Inrush current x In Not limited (limiting only by a supply-side 24 Vdc PSU)

4 Output voltage for signal modules

Rated value Vdc 5 5 5

4 Output current A 3.2 3.2 3.2

Short-circuit rating Yes Yes Yes
4 Isolated from supply voltage No No No
CPU
4 Microprocessor NEC VR4181 A MIPS NEC VR4181 A MIPS ARM 532 MHz
Memory
4 Program code/program data 256 kByte/256 kByte 2 Mbyte/512 kByte 4 Mbyte/512 kByte
Marker/retain data kByte 16/32 16/32 16/64
4 Cycle time for 1k of instructions (bits, bytes) ms <0.15 <0.15 <0.025

4
4

V7-T4-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
XC200 Series Modular PLCs, continued
Description Unit XC-CPU201-EC256K-8DI-6DO(-XV) XC-CPU201-EC512K-8DI-6DO(-XV) XC-CPU202-EC4M-8DI-6DO-XV
4
Interfaces
Ethernet
4
Baud rate Mbit/s 10/100–Autodetect 10/100–Autodetect 10/100–Autodetect
Connector type RJ45 RJ45 RJ45
4
Potential isolation No No No 4
Serial interface (RS-232) without handshake lines
Baud rate kbit/s Max. 115.2 Max. 115.2 Max. 115.2 4
Connector type RJ45 RJ45 RJ45
Potential isolation No No No 4
USB interface 1.0 1.0 2.0
CANopen 4
Maximum data transfer rate Mbit/s 1 1 1
Potential isolation Yes Yes Yes 4
Device profile To DS 301 V4 To DS 301 V4 To DS 301 V4
PDO type Asyn., cyc., acyc. Asyn., cyc., acyc. Asyn., cyc., acyc. 4
Connection Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block
Bus terminating resistors External External Internal
4
Stations
Watchdog
Number Max. 126
Yes
Max. 126
Yes
Max. 126
Yes
4
RTC (real-time clock) Yes Yes Yes 4
Power Supply of Local Inputs/Outputs (24 VQ/0 VQ)
Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24 4
Voltage range Vdc 19.2–30, observe polarity 19.2–30, observe polarity 19.2–30, observe polarity
Potential isolation 4
Between power supply and CPU voltage Yes Yes Yes
Between power supply and inputs/outputs No No No 4
Status indication LED LED LED
Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block 4
Overvoltage protection Yes Yes Yes
Protection against polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes
4
Digital Inputs
4
Input current per channel at rated voltage mA Normally 3.5 Normally 3.5 Normally 3.5
Heat dissipation per channel Normally 85m W Normally 85m W Normally 85m W 4
Voltage level to IEC/EN 61131-2
Limit value type 1 Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc 4
Input delay
OFF ON ms Type 0.1 Type 0.1 Type 0.1 4
ON OFF ms Type 0.1 Type 0.1 Type 0.1
Inputs Number 8, of which parameterizable: 2 counters, 50 kHz, 2 interrupt inputs, 1 incremental input 4
Channels with the same reference potential Number 8 8 8
Status indication LED LED LED 4
Digital Outputs
Channels Number 6 6 6 4
Heat dissipation per channel W 0.08 0.08 0.08
Load circuits A 0.5 0.5 0.5
4
Output delay
OFF ON Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms
4
ON OFF Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms
4
Channels with the same reference potential Number 6 6 6
Status indication LED LED LED 4
Switching capacity IEC/EN 60947-5-1, utilization category DC-13
Duty factor % DF 100 100 100 4
Utilization factor g 1 1 1
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-19
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XIOC Digital Input Modules

4 Description Unit XIOC-8DI XIOC-16DI XIOC-32DI

4 Modules
Input type DC input DC input DC input

4 Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24

Permissible range Vdc 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8
4 Input voltage Vac — — —
Permissible range Vac — — —
4 Input resistance Normally 3.5 kohm Normally 5.9 kohm Normally 5.6 kohm
Input current mA Normally 6.9 Normally 4.0 Normally 4.3
4 Voltage level to IEC 61131-2, limit value type 1
ON Vdc >15 >15 >15
4 OFF Vdc <5 <5 <5
Input delay
4 OFF ON ms 5 (normally 4) 5 (normally 4) 5 (normally 4)
OFF ON ms 5 (normally 4) 5 (normally 4) 5 (normally 4)
4 Input channels Number 8 16 32

4 Channels with the same reference potential Number 8 16 32

Potential isolation With optocouplers With optocouplers With optocouplers

4 Indication LED (green) LED (green) 16 LEDs (green),

switchable: 0–15, 16–31

4 Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block XIOC-TERM32

(connector and cable)
Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Normally 26 Normally 51 Normally 100
4 Weight kg 0.16 0.16 0.16

4
XIOC Digital Output Modules
4 Description Unit XIOC-8DO XIOC-16DO XIOC-16DO-S XIOC-32DO

4 Modules
Output type Transistor (source type) Transistor (source type) Transistor (source type) Transistor (source type)
4 Output voltage Vdc 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%)
Switching current, minimum mA 1 1 1 1
4 Leakage current mA 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Maximum load current
4 Per circuit A 0.3 0.3 0.8 0.2
Per common potential terminal A 2.4 4 5 3.2
4 Output delay
OFF ON ms <0.3 <0.3 <0.3 <0.3
4 OFF ON ms <1 <1 <1 <1
Output channels Number 8 16 16 32
4 Channels with the same reference potential Number 8 16 16 32

4 Overvoltage protection Diode Diode Integrated Diode

Fuse rating A 4 8 None 8
4 Potential isolation With optocouplers With optocouplers With optocouplers With optocouplers
Indication LED (green) LED (green) LED (green) 16 LEDs (green)
4 switchable: 0–15, 16–31
Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block XIOC-TERM32
(connector and cable)
4 Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Normally 30 Normally 50 Normally 50 Normally 250

4 External voltage for outputs/module

(30 mA for module supply) (Us)
Vdc 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%)

Short-circuit protection — — Yes —

4 Weight kg 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16

4
4

V7-T4-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
XIOC Relay Output Module
Description Unit XIOC-12DO-R
4
Modules
Output type Relays
4
Output voltage Vdc 24
4
Output voltage Vac 100/240
Switching current, minimum mA 1 4
Maximum load current
Per circuit A 2 4
Per common potential terminal A 5
Output delay 4
OFF ON ms <10
OFF ON ms <10 4
Output channels Number 12
Channels with the same reference potential Number 12 4
Overvoltage protection External
Fuse rating A External 4
Potential isolation With optocouplers
Indication LED (green) 4
Terminals Plug-in terminal block
Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Normally 40
4
External voltage for operating the relay
Weight kg
24 Vdc (–15 to +20%, max. 70 mA)
0.2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-21
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XIOC Digital Input/Output Module

4 Description Unit XIOC-16DX
Power Supply
4 Supply voltage 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%)

4 Ripple % <5
Overvoltage protection Yes
4 Protection against polarity reversal Yes
Potential isolation
4 Between power supply and I/O bus Yes
Between power supply and I/O No
4 Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Normally 80
Channels Number 16
4 Terminals Plug-in terminal block
Status indication LED
4 Inputs
Input type DC input
4 Input voltage Vdc 24
Inputs Number 4, 12, configurable
4 Input current mA Normally 4

4 Voltage level to IEC 61131-2, limit value type 1

ON Vdc >15
<5
4 OFF
Input delay
Vdc

OFF ON ms Normally 0.1

4 OFF ON ms Normally 0.1

4 Outputs
Output type Transistor (source type)
4 Output voltage Vdc 12/24 –15 to +20%)
Output current A Normally 0.5
4 Outputs Number Max. 12, configurable
Short-circuit tripping current A Max. 1.2 over 3 ms for output
4 Lamp load W Max. 3
Drop-out delay (High Low) μs Normally 100
4 Switching capacity IEC/EN 60947-5-1, utilization category DC-13
Short-circuit rating Yes
4 Parallel connection of outputs In groups 0 – 3, 4 – 7, 8 – 11; Actuation of the outputs
within a group only in the same program cycle
4 Number of outputs that can be switched in parallel Max. 3
Total maximum current A 2 for group
4 Weight kg 0.16

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

V7-T4-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
XIOC Analog Modules
Description Unit XIOC-8AI-I2 XIOC-8AI-U1 XIOC-8AI-U2 XIOC-4T-PT
4
Modules
Input voltage Vdc — 0 to 10 –10 to +10 —
4
Input current mA 4–20 — — — 4
Resolution, digital bit 12 12 12 15 bit with sign
Conversion time <5 ms <5 ms <5 ms — 4
Total errors % < ± 1 (of full-scale value) < ± 1 (of full-scale value) < ± 1 (of full-scale value) < ± 1 (of full-scale value)
Input resistance kohm — 100 100 — 4
Potential isolation
Circuit within each channel With optocouplers With optocouplers With optocouplers With optocouplers 4
Between the input channels No No No No
Input channels Number 8 8 8 4 4
Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block
External power supply 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%), 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%), 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%), 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%),
4
approx. 150 mA approx. 150 mA approx. 150 mA 100 mA
External resistance (R) kohm — — — Max. 0.4, 4 channels 4
Connection type 2-core shielded cable (<20m) 2-core shielded cable (<20m) 2-core shielded cable (<20m) Shielded cable
Platinum RTD — — — PT100 (IEC 751), PT1000
4
Accuracy
–20° to 40°C (PT100) °C — — — ±0.5
4
–50° to 400°C (PT100) °C — — — ±3
4
–50° to 400°C (PT1000) °C — — — ±6
Temperature measuring range — — — –20 to 40°/–50 to 400°
(uninterrupted current: 2 mA)
4
Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Normally 100 Normally 100 Normally 100 Max. 200
4
Additional function — — — Linearization
Fault detection
< –25°C or > +45°C = resistance
4
–20° to 40°C — — —
value 7FFFFhex
–50° to 400°C — — — < –60°C or > +410°C =
4
resistance value 7FFFFhex
Response to cable break or unused inputs — — — In these cases, the resistance
4
value is 7FFFhex
Weight kg 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 4
4
XIOC Thermocouple Module
Description Unit XIOC-4AI-T 4
Channels
Number 4
4
Temperature measuring range °C Type K: –270 to 1370
Type J: –210 to 1200 4
Type B: 100 to 1800
Type N: –270 to 1300
Type E: –270 to 1000
4
Type R: –50 to 1760
Type T: –200 to 400 4
Voltage measurement mV –50 to 50
–100 to 100
–500 to 500
4
–1000 to 1000
Cold-junction compensation Yes, built-in
4
Interference suppression 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Unit 0.1°C, 0.1 F
4
Resolution bit 16
4
Total errors % ±0.5 of measurement range
Conversion time <1s 4
Temperature coefficient <200 ppm/°C of measurement range
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-23
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XIOC Analog Modules

4 Description Unit XIOC-2AO-U1-2AO-I2 XIOC-4AO-U1 XIOC-2AO-U2

4 Modules
Output voltage Vdc 0–10 0–10 –10 to 10

4 Output current mA 4–20 — —

Resolution bit 12 12 12
4 Conversion time <5 ms <5 ms <5 ms
Total errors % < ±1 (of full-scale value) < ±1 (of full-scale value) < ±1 (of full-scale value)
4 External load resistance
Voltage output >10 kohm >10 kohm >10 kohm
4 Current output ohm 0 to 500 ohm — —
Potential isolation
4 Circuit within each channel With optocouplers
Between channels No No No
4 Number of outputs
Output voltage 2 (channels 0 and 1) 4 2
4 Output current 2 (channels 2 and 3) — —

4 Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block
Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Normally 100 Normally 100 Normally 100
4 External power supply 24 Vdc (–15/+20%), approx. 150 mA 24 Vdc (–15/+20%), approx. 150 mA 24 Vdc (–15/+20%), approx. 150 mA
Connection type 2-core shielded cable (<20m) 2-core shielded cable (<20m) 2-core shielded cable (<20m)
4
4 XIOC Analog Modules
Description Unit XIOC-2AI-1AO-U1 XIOC-2AI-1AO-U1-I1 XIOC-4AI-2AO-U1 XIOC-4AI-2AO-U1-I1
4 Inputs
Input voltage Vdc 0–10 0–10 0–10 0–10
4 Input current mA — 0–20 — 0–20

4 Resolution bit 14 14 14 14
Conversion time <1 ms <1 ms <1 ms <1 ms

4 Total errors % Normally 0.4 Normally 0.4 Normally 0.4 Normally 0.4
Potential isolation
4 Circuit within each channel No No No No
Between the input channels No No No No
4 Between input/output channels No No No No
Channels Number 2 2 4 4
4 Input resistance kohm 40 40 40 40
Outputs
4 Output voltage Vdc 0–10 0–10 0–10 0–10
Output current mA — 0–20 — 0–20
4 Resolution bit 12 12 12 12

4 Errors Normally 0.4% Normally 0.4% Normally 0.4% Normally 0.4%

Potential isolation

4 Circuit within each channel No No No No

Between the output channels No No No No

4 Number of channels 1 1 2 2
External load resistance >2 kohm >2 kohm >2 kohm >2 kohm
4 Short-circuit rating Yes Yes Yes Yes
Terminal Connection
4 Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block
Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Normally 200 Normally 200 Normally 200 Normally 200
4 Weight kg 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16

4
4

V7-T4-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
XIOC Communication Modules
Description Unit XIOC-NET-DP-M XIOC-NET-DP-S XIOC-SER XIOC-TC1
4
Interfaces
Interfaces PROFIBUS-DP, RS-485, EN 50170 PROFIBUS-DP, RS-485, EN 50170 RS-232(C), RS-422, RS-485 RS-232(C), RS-422, RS-485
4
Protocol PROFIBUS-DP master (class 1) PROFIBUS-DP slave Transparent mode, Modbus
master/slave
Transparent mode, Modbus
master/slave, DNP3 protocol
4
Character formats — — 8E1, 8O1, 8N1, 8N2, 7E2, 7O2,
7N2, 7E1
8E1, 8O1, 8N1, 8N2, 7E2, 7O2,
7N2, 7E1 4
Control and signal cables — — RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD
Transfer rate kbit/s 9.6 to 12,000 9.6 to 12,000 0.3 –57.6 0.3–57.6
4
Potential isolation Yes Yes Yes (RS-485, RS-422) Yes (RS-485, RS-422)
4
Number of slaves 124 — — —
Send/receive data 3500 Byte each Max. 244 Byte 250 Byte per slave
120 Byte per slave
250/500 4
Bus terminating resistors Switchable Switchable Switchable for RS-485, RS-422 Switchable for RS-485, RS-422
4
Connector type D-sub 9-pin socket D-sub 9-pin socket RS-232: D-sub 9-pin RS-232: D-sub 9-pin
RS-485, 422: plug-in RS-485, 422: plug-in
terminal block terminal block 4
Current consumption mA <300 <300 <275 <275
Weight kg Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.2
4
Number of modules XC100: 1/XC200: 3 XC100: 1/XC200: 3 XC100: 2/XC200: 4 XC200: 4
Slots 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 Any Any
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-25
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XIOC Counter Modules

4 Description Unit XIOC-1CNT-100KHZ XIOC-2CNT-100KHZ XIOC-2CNT-2AO-INC

4 Inputs
Counter limits 0–4294967295 (32 bit) 0–4294967295 (32 bit) 0–4294967295 (32 bit)

4 Internal current consumption mA 200 200 450

Frequency kHz 100 (25 with four times resolution) 100 (25 with four times resolution) 400 (100 with four times resolution)
4 Number of channels 1 2 2
Input voltage Vdc 12–24 12–24 —
4 Voltage for ON Vdc >10 >10 —
Voltage for OFF VA/W <4 <4 —
4 Input current mA >4 >4 —

4 Differential input voltage Vdc ±5 ±5 ±5

Voltage for ON Vdc 2–5 2–5 0.2–5

4 Voltage for OFF Vdc –5 to 8 –5 to 8 –5 to –0.2

Differential input current mA 35 35 5
4 Minimum pulse width μs ON >4/OFF >4 ON >4/OFF >4 —
Potential isolation With optocouplers With optocouplers —
4 Connection for external cabling 30-pin plug: XIOC-TERM30-CNT4 30-pin plug: XIOC-TERM30-CNT4 Plug-in terminal block
External cabling Shielded, twisted pair cable Shielded, twisted pair cable Shielded, twisted pair cable
4 Outputs

4 Output type Transistor (open collector) Transistor (open collector) Analog

External power supply 12/24 Vdc (30 max.) 12/24 Vdc (30 max.) —

4 Minimum load current mA 1 1 —

Maximum load current (Ie) mA 20 20 —
4 Max. leakage current mA 0.5 0.5 —
Max. voltage drop at ON V 1.5 1.5 —
4 Debounce OFF
OFF ON ms <1 <1 —
4 OFF ON ms <1 <1 —
Output channels Number 2 4 2
4 Potential isolation With optocouplers With optocouplers —

4 Output voltage Vdc — — –10 to 10

Resolution bit — — 12
4 Conversion time — — <1 ms
Total errors % — — Normally 0.4
4 Load resistance — — >1 kohm
Connection for external cabling 30-pin plug: XIOC-TERM30-CNT4 30-pin plug: XIOC-TERM30-CNT4 Plug-in terminal block
4 External cabling Shielded, twisted pair cable Shielded, twisted pair cable Shielded 2-core cable
Current per channel mA — — <300
4 Power supply of encoders — — 5 Vdc

4 Current consumption mA 200 200 Max. 450

Weight kg 0.16 0.16 0.18
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

V7-T4-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
Power Supply Suppression Filters
Description Unit XT-FIL-1 XT-FIL-2
4
General
4
Standards IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178
Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 4
Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°)
Mounting position Vertical or horizontal Vertical or horizontal 4
Vibration resistance 10–57 Hz ± 0.075 mm 10–57 Hz ± 0.075 mm
57–150 Hz ± 1.0g 57–150 Hz ± 1.0g 4
Mechanical shock resistance 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms
Impact strength 500g /50 mm ±25g 500g/50 mm ±25g 4
Overvoltage category II II
Pollution degree 2 2 4
Protection type IP20 IP20
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) V 850 850
4
Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2
4
Weight kg 0.1 0.1
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 35 x 90 x 30 35 x 90 x 57 4
Terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals
Terminal capacity 4
Screw terminals
Flexible with ferrule mm2 0.2–2.5 (AWG22–12) 0.2–2.5 (AWG22–12) 4
Solid mm2 0.2–2.5 (AWG22–12) 0.2–2.5 (AWG22–12)
Power Supply
4
Input voltage Vdc 24 24
Permissible range Vdc 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8
4
Ripple % <5 <5
4
Mains overvoltage protection Yes Yes
Potential isolation 4
Between input voltage and PE Yes Yes
Between input voltage and output voltage No No 4
Between output voltage and PE Yes Yes
Rated value Vdc 24 24 4
Output current A 2.2 12
4
General Information on Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) of Automation Systems 4
Description Specification
4
Emitted interference EN 55011/22 Class A (VDE 0875, Part 11)
Interference immunity 4
ESD IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: 4 kV
Air discharge 8 kV
4
RFI IEC/EN 61000-4-3 AM (80%) 80–1000 MHz 10V/m
Mobile phones/cellphones IEC/EN 61000-4-3 PM 800–960 MHz 10V/m 4
Burst IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Mains/digital I/O (direct): 2 kV
Analog I/O, fieldbus (capacitive coupling): 1 kV 4
Surge IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Digital I/O, asymmetric, analog I/O, asymmetric, connection to shielding: 0.5 kV
Mains DC, asymmetric: 1 kV
Mains DC, symmetric: 1 kV
4
Mains AC, asymmetric: 0.5 kV
Mains AC, symmetric: 2 kV 4
Conducted interference, induced by IEC/EN 61000-4-6; 2003 AM (80%) 150 kHz–80 MHz 3V
high-frequency fields 4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-27
 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers

Dimensions
4 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4 XC-CPU101, XC-CPU201, XC-CPU202

4
4
4
3.94
4 (100.0)

4
4
4 2.36 (60.0) 3.94 (100.0)

4
XIOC_
4
4
4 3.94
(100.0) 2.87
4 (73.0)

4
4 1.18 3.74 0.83 3.74 1.97
0.19
(30.0) (95.0) (21.0) (95.0) (50.0)
(5.0)
4
Backplates
4 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-XC1
XIOC-BP-XC XIOC-BP-EXT
4 0.12 (3.0) 0.12 (3.0)
1.54 (39.0) 1.54 (39.0)
4 0.14
(3.5)
2.36 (60.0) 0.14
(3.5)
3.54 (90.0)

4 3.46
(88.0)
2.11 2.11
4 (53.5) (53.5)
1.97 1.97
4 1.40
(35.5)
(50.0) (50.0)

4
4 0.18
(4.5)
0.33 2.11 2.11
M4 (8.5) (53.5) (53.5)
4 1.97 1.97
(50.0) (50.0)
4
0.55
4 (14.0)
0.83 0.04 0.63 0.04 2.36 (60.0)
(21.0) (1.0) (1.0)
(16.0) 0.63 (16.0)
4
4

V7-T4-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4
XC-CPU-121_, XIO-EXT121-1 XT-RJ45-ETH-RS232
4
1.97
(50.0) 4
4
3.94 3.54
1.38 (100.0) (90.0) 4
(35.0)
4
1.97
(50.0) 4
1.38 1.18 4
(35.0) (30.0)
3.54 1.85
(90.0) (47.0) 4
4
0.63 0.90 1.47 0.24
(16.0) (22.8) (37.3) (6.0) 4
4
4
4
3.46
(88.0) 4
0.34
(8.5) 4
4
0.27
(6.8) 4
0.18
(4.5)
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-29
 4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers

XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Contents

4 Description Page
4 XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-31
4 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-31
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-31
4 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-32
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-33
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits
The XC152 compact Flexible Solutions for SmartWire-DT ● CoDeSys PLC and Web
4 PLC combines plenty of visualization
Modular Machine Units The XC152 relies on Eaton’s
processing power with a tried-and-true SmartWire-DT ● Galileo/CoDeSys remote
4 large number of
In the field of automation,
complex processes are connection system, visualization
communication interfaces. subdivided into easily eliminating the need for ● Ethernet port on all models
4 This makes the device manageable functional units control current wiring in ● Windows® CE 5 operating
particularly well-suited to to make programming, every single machine system
4 standardized automation production and installation module and simplifying the ● 32-bit RISC CPU at
solutions in modular machine easier. For example, a commissioning process by
building applications. 400 MHz
4 packaging machine can be means of better diagnostic
options. This results in ● 64 MB internal memory
The XC152 not only provides subdivided into infeed,
significant design, ● SD card slot for external
4 machine segment control positioning (erector), filling
and sealing (gluing) modules. commissioning and memory
functions that can be
programmed with CoDeSys, Other systems and machines maintenance cost reductions. ● Run/Stop switch
4 but it can store module- can also be effectively ● Optional: Integrated
subdivided to create a wide Standard CAN and SmartWire-DT master
specific visualizations.
4 These visualizations can be variety of different models or PROFIBUS Fieldbus for 99 nodes
to delimit various expansion Systems
retrieved and displayed on ● Optional: RS-232, RS-485,
4 a central HMI or a computer stages. Servo drives, frequency PROFIBUS-DP/MPI,
as needed. inverters and hydraulic CANopen/easyNet
With the XC152, a powerful components can all be easily
4 In addition, the XC152 PLC controls individual connected using the large
connects SmartWire-DT system modules while number of fieldbus interfaces Standards and
4 systems to standard fieldbus making it possible to directly available on the XC152. Certifications
systems via its interfaces. connect SmartWire-DT
● IEC/EN 61131-2, EN 50178
4 This enables the XC152 PLC system devices and standard
fieldbus components. Data
Visualization ● EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
to support Eaton’s Lean
transfers via the Ethernet The integrated Web
Automation strategy while ● cULus
4 enabling users to design interface to OPC clients, visualization function offers a
● CE
together with the available key advantage, as machine
automation systems in a
4 flexible manner and run them remote visualization system, module diagnostic and
support a connection to a visualization information can
cost-effectively.
be displayed on a central HMI
4 central control and
or a terminal.
visualization system.
4
4
4
4

V7-T4-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.2
Catalog Number Selection
4
XC152 PLCs with and without SmartWire-DT
4
XC-152 – E6 – 11
4
Family Mounting
XC-152 = Windows CE OS CoDeSys firmware 11 = DIN rail or panel mount 4
Features Features 4
Base Unit Variant Additional COMM Options
D = Ethernet, RS-485 and USB host
E = SmartWire-DT, Ethernet and
3 = None
6 = 1-CANopen
4
USB host 8 = 1-PROFIBUS-DP
4
4
Product Selection
4
XC152 PLC XC152 PLC
CoDeSys Fieldbus Catalog 4
Firmware Type RS-232 RS-485 Ethernet Number
Yes CANopen Yes Yes Yes XC-152-D6-11 4
Yes PROFIBUS-DP Yes Yes Yes XC-152-D8-11
4
XC152 PLC XC152 PLC SmartWire-DT 4
SmartWire-DT CoDeSys Fieldbus Catalog
Firmware Type RS-232 RS-485 Ethernet SmartWire-DT Number 4
Yes None Y None Yes Yes XC-152-E3-11
Yes CANopen None Yes Yes Yes XC-152-E6-11
4
Yes PROFIBUS-DP None Yes Yes Yes XC-152-E8-11
4
4
Accessories 4
XC PLC Accessories 4
Catalog
Description Number
4
PLC programming software, single seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S
PLC programming software, multiple seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 4
SD memory card MEMORY-SD-A1-S
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-31
 4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers

Technical Data and Specifications

4
XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4 Description Unit XC-152-D6-11 XC-152-D8-11 XC-152-E3-11 XC-152-E6-11 XC-152-E8-11
System
4 Processor RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz

4 Internal memory
DRAM Mbyte 64 64 64 64 64
(OS-, program and data memory)
4 NAND FLASH Mbyte Approx. 128 available Approx. 128 available Approx. 128 available Approx. 128 available Approx. 128 available
(can be used for data security)
4 NVRAM (retain) kByte Approx. 32 available Approx. 32 available Approx. 32 available Approx. 32 available Approx. 32 available
External memory
4 SD memory card slot SDA Specification 1.00 SDA Specification 1.00 SDA Specification 1.00 SDA Specification 1.00 SDA Specification 1.00
Real-time clock (battery backup)
4 Battery (not rechargeable) Zero maintenance Zero maintenance Zero maintenance Zero maintenance Zero maintenance
Backup time at zero voltage Normally 10 years Normally 10 years Normally 10 years Normally 10 years Normally 10 years
4 Operating system Windows CE 5 Windows CE 5 Windows CE 5 Windows CE 5 Windows CE 5
Engineering
4 PLC-Programming software CoDeSys 2/3 CoDeSys 2/3 CoDeSys 2/3 CoDeSys 2/3 CoDeSys 2/3

4 Visualization
WEB-VISU CoDeSys CoDeSys CoDeSys CoDeSys CoDeSys

4 Remote Client Galileo/CoDeSys Galileo/CoDeSys Galileo/CoDeSys Galileo/CoDeSys Galileo/CoDeSys

Communication Interfaces
4 Ethernet 100Base-TX/10Base-T 100Base-TX/10Base-T 100Base-TX/10Base-T 100Base-TX/10Base-T 100Base-TX/10Base-T
USB host 1 — — — — —
4 USB device 1 USB 2.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0
System port (RS-232) 1 ■ ■ ■ — —
4 SmartWire-DT 1 — — ■ ■ ■
CAN 1 ■ — — ■ —
4 PROFIBUS/MP 1 — ■ — — ■
RS-485 1 ■ ■ — ■ ■
4 General

4 Rated operating voltage 24 Vdc SELV 24 Vdc SELV 24 Vdc SELV 24 Vdc SELV 24 Vdc SELV
Power consumption W Max. 5 Max. 5 Max. 5 Max. 5 Max. 5
4 Protect against polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Approvals CE, cULus CE, cULus CE, cULus CE, cULus CE, cULus
4 Ambient air temperature °C 0 to 55 0 to 55 0 to 55 0 to 55 0 to 55
Storage temperature °C –40 to +70 –40 to +70 –40 to +70 –40 to +70 –40 to +70
4 Protection type IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Flush mounting DIN rail EN 60715, 35 mm DIN rail EN 60715, 35 mm DIN rail EN 60715, 35 mm DIN rail EN 60715, 35 mm DIN rail EN 60715, 35 mm
4 Dimensions (H x W x D) mm 105 x 155 x 40 105 x 155 x 40 105 x 155 x 40 105 x 155 x 40 105 x 155 x 40
Weight (approximate) kg 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
4 Applied standards and directives
Product standard IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178
4 EMC EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

4 Note
1 Interface not galvanically isolated.

4
4
4
4
4

V7-T4-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers
4.2
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4
XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4
Ø 0.18 (4.5)
1.63 (41.5)
4
4
4
4
4.77
(121.2)
4.34 4
(110.2) 4.16 4.04
(105.6) (102.6)
4
4
4
4
0.06 (1.5)
1.99 (50.6)
4
5.15 (130.8)
6.11 (155.1) 4
With Fixing Brackets Without Fixing Brackets 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-33
 4.3 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XN300 Series Remote I/O

XN300 Series Remote I/O Contents

4 Description Page
4 XN300 Series Remote I/O
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-35
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 Product Description Features Standards and
The XN300 family of slice I/O Coupled with the new XV300 ● Efficient—a wide range of Certifications
4 modules offers the highest HMI-PLC, the XN300 I/O discrete and analog input ● CE Mark
density I/O available on the products provide a high- and output modules along UL/cUL
4 market today. With a very powered low-cost system with specialty modules
●

cost-effective price per I/O solution for MOEMs. Bundled focused on solving
● RoHS
4 point, it meets the needs of with Visual Designer and application needs
machinery OEMs for high- CoDeSys 3 on an XV300 ● Compact—up to 20
4 speed, low-cost and compact
I/O systems. The CANopen
HMI-PLC, you get the
smallest, most cost-effective
channels per slice (12.5 x
102 mm) helps reduce
Gateway provides a remote and powerful HMI-PLC and installation space and cost
4 I/O connection that can SCADA system available on ● Simple—tool-free
connect to all Eaton XC PLCs the market. This industry- assembly with PUSH-IN &
4 and XV HMI-PLCs as well as leading combination of plug connection, with
many third-party PLCs. The compact I/O solutions and simple dismounting of plug
4 tool-less assembly saves HMI-PLCs can significantly connectors
time in connecting modules reduce the overall control
on a DIN rail and the PUSH-IN panel size, helping MOEMs in
● Fast identification of errors
4 technology makes wiring up the never-ending quest to and signal conditions via
the I/O a breeze. Status reduce the size and cost of LED status displays for all
4 LEDs on all I/O points make their machinery. points
it easy to quickly identify ● Application specific, free,
4 any wiring errors and to programmable module
determine current signal status LED
4 conditions. The free XN300 ● CANopen Gateway
Assist programming tool connects up to 32 slices
helps you to generate and per block to connect I/O
4 check the I/O configuration to both Eaton PLCs and
and produce both electronic HMI-PLCs and many third-
4 documentation and EDS files party PLCs. Mini USB port
to simplify PLC configuration to connect to XN300 Assist
4 of XN300 I/O. ● XN300 Assist software tool
to generate electronic
4 documentation and EDS
files for PLC configuration
4
4
4
4

V7-T4-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 PLC, I/O and Communications Products
XN300 Series Remote I/O
4.3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Product Selection 4
XN-322_ XN300 Series Remote I/O 4
Description Style Number Catalog Number
Digital Inputs 4
Digital, 20 input, P, 24 Vdc, 5.0 ms 178786 XN-322-20DI-PD
Digital, 20 input, P, 24 Vdc, 0.5 ms 178768 XN-322-20DI-PF
4
Digital, 20 input, P, 24 Vdc, 2/4 cnt, 25 kHz 178767 XN-322-20DI-PCNT 4
Counters
Counter, 1 cnt, 125 kHz, 16 bit, 4 DO, 4 DI 178795 XN-322-1CNT-8DIO 4
Digital Outputs
Digital,16 output, P, 24 Vdc, 0.5 A, sp 178787 XN-322-16DO-P05
4
Digital,12 output, P, 24 Vdc, 1.7 A, sp 178788 XN-322-12DO-P17
4
Analog
Analog, 6 input, ±10 V, 1 PT/KTY, Uref 178789 XN-322-7AI-U2PT 4
Analog, 8 input, 0/4–20 mA 179288 XN-322-8AI-I
Analog, 8 input, thermo element, 2 KTY 178792 XN-322-10AI-TEKT 4
Analog, 4 input, PT/NI/KTY/R, 2/3 wire 178772 XN-322-4AI-PTNI
Analog, 8 output, ±10 V 178790 XN-322-8AO-U2
4
Analog, 4 In-/4 output, ±10 V, Uref 178791 XN-322-8AIO-U2
4
Specialty
Weigh module, 2 DMS, 24 bit 178793 XN-322-2DMS-WM 4
DC-motor driver, 12–30 V, brush, 3.5 A 178794 XN-322-1DCD-B35
Power 4
Power supply, 4 x 24 Vdc / 2 A, sp 178796 XN-322-4PS-20
Power distribution, 18 channel, GND 178769 XN-322-18PD-M
4
Power distribution, 18 channel, VCC 178770 XN-322-18PD-P 4
Serial and SSI
Serial, 2 SSI, RS-422, 32 bit 178773 XN-322-2SSI 4
Gateways
CANopen Gateway module (supports 32 slices) 178782 XN-312-GW-CAN
4
4

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T4-35
 Operator Interface Products

XV-100 Operator Interface 5.1 Product Overview

Product and Software Selection Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-2
5
5.2 XV-100 Operator Interface 5
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-8
5
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-8
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-8 5
XV-300 Operator Interface
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-9
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-9 5
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-10
5
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-11

5.3 XV-300 Operator Interface

5
XP-500 Operator Interface Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-12 5
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-12
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-12 5
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-13
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-14
5
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-15 5
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-16
5
5.4 XP-500 Operator Interface
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-17 5
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-17
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-17 5
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-18
5
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-18
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-18 5
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-19
5
5.5 Operator Interface Software
Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-20 5
XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21
Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-22
5
5
Learn
Online
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-1
 5.1 Operator Interface Products
Product Overview

Product and Software Selection Guides

5
Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Selection Guide
5
5
5
5
5 Description XV-100 Operator Interface XV-300 Operator Interface XP-500 Series Operator Interface
Page V7-T5-8 Page V7-T5-12 Page V7-T5-17
5 Screen size 3.5-inch, 5.7-inch, 7.0-inch, 8.4-inch and 10.4-inch 7.0-inch, 10.1-inch, 15-inch 10.1-inch, 15.6-inch, 21.5-inch

5 Screen options Color TFT, 64 k colors; resolutions from QVGA

(320 x 240) to WVGA (800 x 480)
LED backlit Projected Capacitive Touch (PCT),
resolutions from (1024 x 600) to (1366 x 768)
LED backlit Projected Capacitive Touchscreen (PCT),
resolutions from (1024 x 600) to (1920 x 1080)

5 Interface Resistive touchscreen Non-reflective tempered scratch-resistant glass Non-reflective tempered scratch-resistant glass
Communication ports Ethernet, RS-232 and/or RS-485, USB; CANopen Ethernet, RS-232 and/or RS-485, USB; CANopen 2 Ethernet, 1 RS-232, 1 RS-485, 2 USB 3.0, 1 DVI-I
or PROFIBUS®-DP, SmartWire-DT®, USB and or PROFIBUS-DP, SmartWire-DT, USB and
5 RS-485 on CoDeSys models RS-485 on CoDeSys models
Simultaneous protocols Varies 3 on Visual Designer, varies for Galileo and 5 (8 optional)
5 XSoft-CoDeSys-3
Ethernet drivers Yes Yes Yes
5 Upload/download Serial, Ethernet, USB Serial, Ethernet, USB Serial, Ethernet, USB
Windows® Embedded Standard 7 (protected)
5 Operating system Windows CE 5.0 Professional Windows CE 7
Third-party software support — — Yes
5 Screen saver Yes Yes Yes

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V7-T5-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
Product Overview
5.1
Product Selection Guide
5
XV Series with Galileo
Series
Model
XV
Model XV-102-H
XV
Model XV-303
5
Screen Size 3.5, 5.7, 7.0
Housing material Plastic Plastic
5
Operating system WinCE 5.0 Standard WinCE 7.0 Professional
5
Touchscreen Resistive Projected Capacitive Touchscreen (PCT)
Communications ports 1 Ethernet, 1 RS-232, or 1 RS-485, 1 USB 1 Ethernet, 1 RS-232, or 1 RS-485, 1 USB 5
Optional field buses N/A N/A
Development software Galileo Galileo 5
Alarm online/historical Yes Yes
Trend online/historical Yes Yes
5
Scripting Structured text Structured text 5
Scheduler No No
Recipe Yes Yes 5
Reports No No
Full remote access Yes Yes
5
Ability to run third-party software No No
5
Vision system interfaces Yes Yes
Multi-language support Yes Yes 5
PLC variable import Yes Yes
5
XV Series with CoDeSys Runtime (Not Available on XP Series)
Series XV
5
Model XV-102 XV-152 XV-303
Screen Size 3.5, 5.7, 7.0 5.7, 8.4, 10.4 7.0, 10.1 5
Housing material Plastic Metal Plastic
Operating system WinCE 5.0 Standard WinCE 5.0 Standard WinCE 7.0 Professional
5
Touchscreen Resistive Resistive PCT, ruggedized glass
5
Communications ports 1 Ethernet, 1 or 2 serial, 0 or 1 USB 1 Ethernet, 1 or 2 serial, 0 or 1 USB 1 Ethernet, 2 serial, 1 USB, CAN
Optional field buses PROFIBUS, CANopen, SmartWire-DT PROFIBUS, CANopen, SmartWire-DT Optional Field Buses—2nd Ethernet,
SmartWire-DT, PROFIBUS
5
Development software XSoft-CoDeSys-3 XSoft-CoDeSys-3 XSoft-CoDeSys-3 5
IEC-61131-3 logic programming (LD, ST, SFC, IL, FBD, CFC) Yes (LD, ST, SFC, IL, FBD, CFC) Yes (LD, ST, SFC, IL, FBD, CFC) Yes
Integrated screen design Yes Yes Yes 5
Integrated field bus configuration Yes Yes Yes
Alarm online/historical Yes Yes Yes
5
Trend online/historical Yes Yes Yes
5
Scripting Structured Text Structured Text Structured Text (ST)
Scheduler Yes Yes Yes 5
Recipe Yes Yes No
Reports No No Yes 5
OPC, TCP/IP and communication driver Yes (OPC Server for PC) Yes (OPC Server for PC) Yes (OPC Server for PC)
Web Server and Web Thin Client support Yes Yes Yes
5
Full remote access Yes Yes Yes
5
Local/remote data base access Limited (DDE) Limited (DDE) Yes (with Visual Designer software bundle)
Ability to run third-party software No No No 5
ActiveX and .NET controls No No No
Full document viewing No No Yes (PDF and HTML) 5
Windows media player No No No
Vision system interfaces No No No
5
Network camera monitoring No No No 5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-3
 5.1 Operator Interface Products
Product Overview

XV Operator Interface with Visual Designer

5 Series
Model XV-300
5 Screen Size 7.0, 10.1
Housing material Plastic
5 Operating system WinCE 7.0 Professional

5 Touchscreen technology PCT, ruggedized glass

Communication ports 1 Ethernet, 2 serial, 1 USB, CAN
5 Optional field buses Optional Communication Ports—2nd Ethernet, SmartWire-DT, PROFIBUS-DP
Development software Visual Designer
5 Pre-licensed tags, driver and Web session 1500 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session
and field upgrade options Optional upgrade to 4000 tags, 3 drivers, 1, 2, 4 or 8 simultaneous Web sessions
5 Alarm online/history Yes
Trend online/history Yes
5 Scripting Yes (VB Script)

5 Scheduler Yes
Recipe Yes
5 Reports Yes
OPC, TCP/IP, and communication drivers Yes
5 Web Server and Web Thin Client support Yes
Full remote access Yes
5 Local/remote database interface Yes

5 Ability to run third-party software No

ActiveX and .NET controls No
5 Full document viewing Yes (PDF and HTML)
Windows media player No
5 Vision system interfaces No

5 Network camera monitoring No

5 XP Operator Interface with Galileo

Series XP
5 Model XP-503
Screen Size 10.1, 15.6, 21.5
5 Housing material Powder-coated aluminum
Operating system Windows Embedded Standard 7
5 Touchscreen technology Projected Capacitive Touchscreen (PCT), non-reflective tempered glass
Communication ports 2 Ethernet, 2 serial, 4 USB
5 2 Ethernet; 1 RS-232; 1 RS-485; 2 USB 3.0
Optional field buses N/A
5 Development software Galileo

5 Alarm online/historical Yes

Trend online/historical Yes
5 Scripting Structured text
Scheduler No
5 Recipe Yes
Reports No
5 Full remote access Yes

5 Ability to run third-party software No

Vision system interfaces Yes
5 Multi-language support Yes
PLC variable import Yes
5
5

V7-T5-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
Product Overview
5.1
XP Operator Interface with Visual Designer
Series XP 5
Model XP-503
Screen Size 10.1, 15.6, 21.5 5
Housing material Powder-coated aluminum
Operating system Windows Embedded Standard 7 5
Touchscreen technology Projected Capacitive Touchscreen (PCT), non-reflective tempered glass
Communication ports 2 Ethernet, 2 serial, 4 USB 5
2 Ethernet; 1 RS-232; 1 RS-485; 2 USB 3.0
Optional field buses N/A 5
Development software Visual Designer (VISUALDXP) (Runtime pre-installed)
Pre-licensed tags, driver and Web session Standard 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session 5
and field upgrade options Optional upgrades to 64,000 tags, 8 drivers, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 simultaneous Web sessions
Alarm online/history Yes 5
Trend online/history Yes
Scripting Yes (VB Script) 5
Scheduler Yes
Recipe Yes 5
Reports Yes
OPC, TCP/IP, and communication drivers Yes
5
Web Server and Web Thin Client support Yes
Full remote access Yes
5
Local/remote database interface Yes
5
Ability to run third-party software Yes
ActiveX and .NET controls Yes 5
Full document viewing Yes
Windows media player Yes 5
Vision system interfaces Yes
Network camera monitoring Yes 5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-5
 5.1 Operator Interface Products
Product Overview

Software Product Selection Guide

5
5
5
5 Description Galileo XSoft-CoDeSys-3 1 Visual Designer

5 Overview Intuitive visualization tool. Use Galileo on

XV-102-H_ units or on XV units running CoDeSys
Feature-rich software package with integrated
logic and visualization that can be run on specific
Feature-rich software package with SCADA
functionality and Web serving capabilities that
when a stronger visualization package is needed XV operator interface models can be run on XV, XP, ePro PS operator interfaces
5 or personal computers
Catalog ID
5 Development software seat license SW-GALILEO-S SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-S 2 VISUALDCE (CE hardware)
SW-GALILEO-M SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-M 3 VISUALDXP5 (5-pack of VISUALDXP)
5 VISUALDCE5 (5-pack of VISUALDCE)
VISUALDXP (PCs, XPe, and CE hardware)

5 Runtime software for a PC ■ N/A VISUALRTPC

Time-Saving Editor Features
5 Online and offline simulation ■ ■ ■

Macro capability ■ ■ ■
5 VB scripting — — ■

■ ■ ■
5 Multi-language
System/internal variables ■ ■ ■

5 Auto-scale application to different

resolution/screen size
■ ■ ■

5 Scripting
(IF, THEN, ELSE, GOTO)
■ ■ ■

5 Graphics library ■ — ■

Master pages ■ Screen groups ■ One ■ Screen groups

5 User-created controls ■ ■ ■

Customizable application symbols ■ ■ ■

5 Full math evaluation ■ With macros ■ ■

Reusable controls, images and pages ■ ■ ■ Via indirect tag and/

5 or PLC assignments
Advanced search and replace ■ ■ ■
5 Advanced context sensitive help ■ ■ ■

5 Conversion of legacy PanelMate®

configurations
— — ■

■
5 Optional PanelBuilder™ conversion
utility
— —

Online configuration/editing — ■ ■
5
Notes
5 1 See the logic section of the catalog for details on the logic features in the XSoft-CoDeSys-3 software package.
2 Includes XSoft-CoDeSys-3 software for developing applications, runtime software for the XV Series. Single User License.
3 Includes XSoft-CoDeSys-3 software for developing applications, runtime software for the XV Series. Multi User License.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V7-T5-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
Product Overview
5.1
Software Product Selection Guide, continued
5
5
5
Description Galileo XSoft-CoDeSys-3 1 Visual Designer
5
Runtime Features 5
Clock synchronization with ■ ■ Configured via visualization screens ■
controller 5
Sound actions or control ■ — ■

Security ■ ■ ■ Advanced multi-level 5

Pop-up screens ■ — ■ And group screens

Animated graphics ■ ■ ■
5
Multi-touch and gesture support ■ — ■
5
Real-time trending ■ ■ ■

Recipes ■ ■ ■ 5
Report generation ■ — ■

Timer scheduling ■ ■ ■ 5
Calendar scheduling — ■ ■

Notification of data and events — ■ ■

5
via email/text messaging
Data archiving ■ ■ ■
5
Archive to shared network drive ■ ■ ■
5
Alarm and event archiving ■ ■ ■

Historical trending ■ ■ ■ 5
Import/export from XML or CSV ■ ■ ■

Database interface — ■ DDE ■ ADO.net compliant 5

Vision system interfaces ■ — ■

Secure document and Web network — ■ With user created passwords ■

5
browser
Web server—viewing and control — ■ ■
5
Automatic scaling of Web clients — — ■
5
Remote desktop ■ VNC and RemoteClient ■ VNC and RemoteClient ■ VNC and RemoteClient

Launch/control third-party applications — — ■ 5

Embedded PLC logic — ■ —

Note
5
1 See the logic section of the catalog for details on the logic features in the XSoft-CoDeSys-3 software package.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-7
 5.2 Operator Interface Products
XV-100 Operator Interface

XV-100 Series Operator Interface Contents

5 Description Page
5 XV-100 Series Operator Interface
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-9
5 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-9
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-10
5 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-11

5
5
5
5
5
5
5 XV-100 with Galileo and XSoft-CoDeSys-3
5 Product Description Features Standards and Certifications
XV with Galileo XV-102 with Galileo only units XV-100 with XSoft-CoDeSys ● CE
5 The XV Series with Galileo ● 3.5-, 5.7- and 7.0-inch XV Series operator interface ● UL
offers a global visualization (widescreen) with Windows CE operating ● cUL
5 software package for all ● Plastic housing system ● RoHS
applications in system and ● Resistive touch with 3.5-, 5.7-, 7.0- (widescreen),
5 machine building. It is flush bezel
●

8.4- and 10.4-inch screen

designed to optimize
● Ethernet on all models sizes
5 performance on the XV
platform. Galileo can also ● RS-232 or RS-485 serial ● Cost-effective plastic or
run as the visualization ports available metal housing
5 package on XV CoDeSys ● Prelicensed for Galileo ● Resistive touch with flush
units when a stronger Runtime (GRS) bezel
5 visualization tool is required. ● Ethernet and serial ports
on all models
5 XV with XSoft-CoDeSys
● PROFIBUS, CANopen and
The XV series with XSoft-
SmartWire-DT optional
5 CoDeSys combines powerful
logic and visualization ● XSoft-CoDeSys-3
capabilities into a single programming software
5 device. It is ideal for OEM ● Pre-licensed for CoDeSys
applications where low runtime
5 component count and ease
of program development
5 and remote administration
is critical.
5 The XV Models with XSoft-
CoDeSys offer multiple field
5 bus options built directly on-
board the unit to provide an
5 overall solution optimized
both for size and cost.
5
5
5
5

V7-T5-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
XV-100 Operator Interface
5.2
Selecting the right model for your application
The XV product offered with Visual Designer, Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys offers the highest
5
level of flexibility for one operator interface product.
5
Galileo provides a visualization XSoft-CoDeSys turns the On XV-300 models on Page Visual Designer provides a
environment designed around
the needs of machine building
XV into a fully integrated
Logic and OI platform
V7-T5-12, you can take
advantage of the best of both
fully integrated SCADA and
HMI platform. Use Visual
5
OEMs. Use Galileo when (HMI-PLC). Use XSoft- worlds with Visual Designer Designer when Web
designing high-performance CoDeSys to unleash the and XSoft-CoDeSys together. enabling, remote access,
5
machines in the OEM space. PLC functionality on an XV. Combining the power of database and connectivity,
With optional communication these two software platforms and when one operator 5
interfaces like SmartWire-DT, provides limitless possibilities software package is required
CANopen and PROFIBUS, on an HMI-PLC and SCADA across XV and XP platforms. 5
Eaton welcomes you into the platform.
Lean Automation space. 5
5
Catalog Number Selection
5
XV Operator Interface—XV-102, XV-152
XV-102, XV-152 5
XV – 102 – B3 – 35TQRG – 10 5
Family Branding and Bezel 5
XV = Microsoft Windows 10 = Standard blank front bezel with
CE operating system Eaton branded product label
Features
5
Features
Performance Class Base Unit Variant 1 Additional COMM Options Display Size Display Technology OS Build
102 = CE, plastic housing, 2nd gen B = Retentive memory 3 = 1-RS-232 35 = 3.5-inch TQR = TFT (QVGA) resistive C = XSoft-CoDeSys/Galileo 5
152 = CE, metal housing, 2nd gen D = Retentive memory, USB 4 = 1-RS-485 57 = 5.7-inch TVR = TFT (VGA) resistive G = CE Professional OS and
host, RS-232
E = Retentive memory, USB
6 = 1-CANopen
8 = 1-PROFIBUS
70 = 7.0-inch
84 = 8.4-inch
TWR = TFT (widescreen)
resistive
Visual Designer runtime
1500 tags 2
5
host, SmartWire-DT E = 1-SmartWire-DT 10 = 10.4-inch L = Galileo only unit
H = Galileo only unit, USB host 5
5
5
Product Selection
5
XV Operator Interface with Galileo Only 3
Description Catalog Number 5
XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-35TQRL-10
XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-35TQRL-10
5
XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-57TVRL-10
5
XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-57TVRL-10
XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-70TWRL-10 5
XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-70TWRL-10

Notes
5
1 All 1xx performance class units have 400 MHz processor, 64 MB DRAM, 1 x 10/100 Ethernet, and 1 x USB device.
2 Standard software on embedded hardware. These XV models have a Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional operating 5
system and are pre-licensed with Visual Designer runtime for up to 1500 tags, 3 simultaneous communication drivers,
and 1 Web session. Field upgrades are available for up to 4000 tags, 3 drivers, and 2, 4 or 8 simultaneous Web sessions.
3 For more information on Galileo software, see Page V7-T5-20.
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-9
 5.2 Operator Interface Products
XV-100 Operator Interface

XV Operator Interface with XSoft-CoDeSys, HMI-PLC 1

5 Description Catalog Number

5 XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-485 XV-102-B6-35TQRC-10

XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-485 XV-102-B8-35TQRC-10
5 XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, SmartWire-DT XV-102-BE-35TQRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D6-57TVRC-10
5 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D8-57TVRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-102-E6-57TVRC-10
5 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-102-E8-57TVRC-10

5 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D6-70TWRC-10
XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D8-70TWRC-10
5 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-102-E6-70TWRC-10
XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-102-E8-70TWRC-10
5 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D6-57TVRC-10

5 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D8-57TVRC-10
XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E6-57TVRC-10

5 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E8-57TVRC-10
XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D6-84TVRC-10
5 XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D8-84TVRC-10
XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E6-84TVRC-10
5 XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E8-84TVRC-10

5 XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D6-10TVRC-10
XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D8-10TVRC-10
5 XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E6-10TVRC-10
XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E8-10TVRC-10
5
5 Accessories

5 XV Family Accessories
Description Catalog Number
5 SD memory card for all XV-102 and XV-152 models MEMORY-SD-A1-S
Spare part kit for XV-102 models—1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen ACC-TP-57-KG-1
5
Spare part kit for XV-152 models—1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen ACC-TP-10-12-RES-1

5 SD memory card with 1 GB storage for all XV-100 and XV-300 models MEMORY-SD-A2-S
Accessory set for XV-303 (10 mounting brackets and 1 power plug) ACCESSORIES-TP-10-KG
5
5 XV Family Software Options
Description Catalog Number
5 Product license for 40 points for use with Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys units LIC-OPT-1ST-LEVEL

5 Product license for 80 points for use with Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys units LIC-OPT-2ND-LEVEL
License product Paper PLC with license sticker for XSoft-CoDeSys-2/-3 for XV-300 LIC-PLC-A

5 License product Paper Visual Designer with license sticker for XV-300 LIC-VISD-A

Note
5 1 For more information on XSoft-CoDeSys software, see Page V7-T5-21.

5
5
5
5

V7-T5-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
XV-100 Operator Interface
5.2
Technical Data and Specifications
5
XV Operator Interface
Series XV Midrange Operator Interface 5
Model XV-102 XV-152
Screen Size 3.5-Inch 5.7-Inch 7.0-Inch 5.7-Inch 8.4-Inch 10.4-Inch 5
Operating system WinCE 5.0 Professional/Standard WinCE 5.0 Professional/Standard
Touchscreen technology Resistive Resistive Resistive Resistive Resistive Resistive
5
Display, colors Color TFT, 64 k colors Color TFT, 64 k colors Color TFT, 64 k colors Color TFT, 64 k colors Color TFT, 64 k colors Color TFT, 64 k colors 5
Pixel resolution (landscape) QVGA 320 x 240 VGA 640 x 480 WVGA 800 x 480 VGA 640 x 480 VGA 640 x 480 VGA 640 x 480
portrait mode also available
5
Brightness (cd/m2) 250 250 250 350 350 350
Backlight LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming 5
Lifespan of backlight (half-life) 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs
Processor 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 5
Volatile memory 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM
Non-volatile memory 125 KB NVRAM/64 MB 125 KB NVRAM/64 MB NAND/ 125 KB NVRAM/64 MB NAND/
5
NAND, 1 SD card slot 2 MB NOR, 1 SD card slot 2 MB NOR, 1 SD card slot
Real time clock Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
Communication ports Ethernet 10/100, RS-485
or RS-232 USB Device
Ethernet 10/100, RS-485, RS-232
USB Host, USB Device
Ethernet 10/100, RS-485, RS-232 USB Host, USB Device
5
Slots for COMM modules None None None None None None
5
Power supply rated voltage 24 Vdc nominal (–20%/+25%) with polarity protection 24 Vdc nominal (–20%/+25%) with polarity protection
Continuous current consumption 0.2
(max. amps)
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.6 0.6 5
Starting current inrush (A2s) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 5
Ambient conditions
Operation—relative humidity,
noncondensing
0 to 50 °C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50 °C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50 °C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50 °C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50 °C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50 °C, 10 to 95% 5
Storage/transport—relative
humidity, noncondensing
–20 to 60 °C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60 °C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60 °C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60 °C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60 °C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60 °C, 10 to 95% 5
Shock IEC 60068-2-27 15 g for 11 ms duration IEC 60068-2-27 15 g for 11 ms duration
5
Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-6
5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement
9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement
5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement
9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement 5
60–150 Hz: 2 g acceleration 60–150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
Agency certifications and CE, UL/cUL, CSA (pending), RoHS CE, UL/cUL, CSA (pending), RoHS 5
standards
Protection type 5
Front IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor)
Rear IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 5
Housing material Plastic Plastic Plastic Metal Metal Metal
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 136 x 100 x 30 170 x 130 x 39 210 x 135 x 38 212 x 156 x 53 275 x 208 x 53 345 x 260 x 54
5
Mounting cutout W x H (mm) 123 x 87 157 x 117 197 x 122 198 x 142 261 x 194 329 x 238
5
Approximate weight lbs (kg) 0.7 (0.3) 1.3 (0.6) 1.3 (0.6) 2.9 (1.3) 4.3 (2.1) 6.1 (3.0)
Ability to run third-party No No No No No No 5
software
XSoft-CoDeSys-3 development
software
SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-S (seat)
SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-M (multi-seat)
SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-S (seat)
SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-M (multi-seat)
5
Galileo development software SW-GALILEO-S (seat)
SW-GALILEO-M (multi-seat)
SW-GALILEO-S (seat)
SW-GALILEO-M (multi-seat)
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-11
 5.3 Operator Interface Products
XV-300 Operator Interface

XV-300 Series Operator Interface Contents

5 Description Page
5 XV-300 Series Operator Interface
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-13
5 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-14
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-15
5 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-16

5
5
5
5
5
5
5 XV-300 with Galileo, XSoft-CoDeSys-3 or Visual Designer
5 Product Description Features
All XSoft-CoDeSys models
5 XV with Galileo XV with Visual Designer XV-300 Software Bundles include XSoft-CoDeSys logic
The XV Series with Galileo Positioned between the HMi The XV-300 series is the and visualization tools, but
offers a global visualization and the XP series of operator latest and most powerful in also include a Galileo runtime
5 software package for all interface, the XV series is the XV product line. Its license at no additional
applications in system and ideal for applications requiring powerful CPU and graphics charge so the user can
5 machine building. It is extensive connectivity and co-processor provide the choose which visualization
designed to optimize the advanced features high-performance engine tool is appropriate for their
5 performance on the XV available in Visual Designer required by demanding HMI needs. Users who have
platform. Galileo can also without the expense and HMI-PLC applications. large or demanding HMI
5 run as the visualization
package on XV CoDeSys
associated with more
powerful open platforms.
Coupled with an attractive,
sleek design and multi-touch
applications that also require
some SCADA software
units when a stronger touchscreen, it supports features such as web serving,
5 visualization tool is required. The XV models were the modern gesture based document (PDF) viewing,
designed with OEMs in mind user interface that redefines SQL database interfaces,
5 XV with XSoft-CoDeSys featuring an attractive bezel ease of use. FDA 21 CFR Part 11
and slim and light weight compliance or other
The XV series with XSoft-
housing. The clip mount The XV-300 series can run
5 CoDeSys combines powerful
design simplifies installation. Visual Designer, XSoft-CoDeSys
advanced functionality could
logic and visualization choose the XV-300 models
and Galileo and unlike the
5 capabilities into a single
XV-100 series, there are
bundled with Visual Designer
software. For users who
device. It is ideal for OEM
bundles that include Visual need PLC applications and
applications where low
5 component count and ease
Designer and XSoft-CoDeSys advanced Visualization and
runtime licenses on a single SCADA features, they can
of program development
5 and remote administration
unit. Because of the higher
capacity and performance of
choose XV-300 models
is critical. with both XSoft-CoDeSys
the XV-300 over the XV-100,
5 The XV Models with XSoft- these appeal to OEMs
and Visual Designer runtime
licenses bundled in a single
CoDeSys offer multiple field who have demanding HMI- package.
5 bus options built directly on- PLC applications in which
board the unit to provide an case they will choose
5 overall solution optimized a model bundled with
Standards and Certifications
both for size and cost. XSoft-CoDeSys software.
● CE
5 ● UL
5 ● cUL
● RoHS
5
5

V7-T5-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
XV-300 Operator Interface
5.3
Selecting the right model for your application
The XV product offered with Visual Designer, Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys offers the highest
5
level of flexibility for one operator interface product.
5
Galileo provides a visualization XSoft-CoDeSys turns the On XV-300 models, you can Visual Designer provides a
environment designed around
the needs of machine building
XV into a fully integrated
Logic and OI platform
take advantage of the best of
both worlds with Visual
fully integrated SCADA and
HMI platform. Use Visual
5
OEMs. Use Galileo when (HMI-PLC). Use XSoft- Designer and XSoft-CoDeSys Designer when Web
designing high-performance CoDeSys to unleash the together. Combining the enabling, remote access,
5
machines in the OEM space. PLC functionality on an XV. power of these two software database and connectivity,
With optional communication platforms provides limitless and when one operator 5
interfaces like SmartWire-DT, possibilities on an HMI-PLC software package is required
CANopen and PROFIBUS, and SCADA platform. across XV and XP platforms. 5
Eaton welcomes you into the
Lean Automation space. 5
Software Suite
5
Features

5
5
5
FTP, Remote Client, Real VNC ® Gateway, SD Slot 5
HMI
PL
C 5
5
Catalog Number Selection
5
XV Operator Interface—XV-303, XV-313 5
XV-303, XV-313
5
XV – 303 – 70 – C00 – A00 – 1D
5
Family Software Bundle
XV = Microsoft Windows
CE operating system A00
Future 1B = Basic
1C = CoDeSys
5
1D = Visual Designer
Performance Class Display Size 2nd Ethernet Port SWDT Port PROFIBUS Port
1E = Visual Designer 5
and CoDeSys
303 = Panel mount, 3rd gen 70 = 7.0-inch wide B = No 0 = No 0 = No
313 = Back mount, 3rd gen 10 = 10.0-inch wide C = Yes E = Yes 2 = Yes 5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-13
 5.3 Operator Interface Products
XV-300 Operator Interface

Product Selection
5
XV Operator Interface with Galileo 1
5 Description Catalog Number
XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet XV-303-70-B00-A00-1B
5 XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet XV-303-70-C00-A00-1B

5 XV with 10.1-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet XV-303-10-B00-A00-1B
XV with 10.1-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet XV-303-10-C00-A00-1B
5 XV with 15.4-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet XV-303-15-C00-A00-1B
XV with 15.4-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, Profibus XV-303-15-C02-A00-1B
5
5 XV Operator Interface with XSoft-CoDeSys, HMI-PLC 2
Description Catalog Number
5
XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet, CAN, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-70-B00-A00-1C

5 XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-70-C00-A00-1C
XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet, CAN, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-70-B02-A00-1C
5 XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-70-C02-A00-1C
XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet, CAN, SmartWire-DT, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-70-BE0-A00-1C
5 XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, SmartWire-DT, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-70-CE0-A00-1C

5 XV with 10.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet, CAN, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-10-B00-A00-1C
XV with 10.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-10-C00-A00-1C
5 XV with 10.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet, CAN, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-10-B02-A00-1C
XV with 10.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-70-C02-A00-1C
5 XV with 10.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet, CAN, SmartWire-DT, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-10-BE0-A00-1C
XV with 10.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, SmartWire-DT, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-10-CE0-A00-1C
5 XV with 15.4-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet XV-303-15-C00-A00-1C

5 XV with 15.4-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, Profibus XV-303-15-C02-A00-1C
XV with 15.4-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, SWDT XV-303-15-CE0-A00-1C
5 XV with 15.4-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, Profibus and SWDT XV-303-15-CE2-A00-1C

5
XV Rear Mounted Operator Interface with XSoft-CoDeSys, HMI-PLC
5 Description Catalog Number
XV rear mount with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet XV-313-70-B00-A00-1C
5 XV rear mount with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet XV-313-70-C00-A00-1C

5 XV rear mount with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, SWDT XV-313-70-CE0-A00-1C
XV rear mount with 10.1-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, single Ethernet XV-313-10-B00-A00-1C
5 XV rear mount with 10.1-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet XV-313-10-C00-A00-1C
XV rear mount with 10.1-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, SWDT XV-313-10-CE0-A00-1C
5
Notes

5 1 For more information on Galileo software, see Page V7-T5-20.

2 For more information on XSoft-CoDeSys software, see Page V7-T5-21.

5
5
5
5
5
5

V7-T5-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
XV-300 Operator Interface
5.3
XV Operator Interface XV Operator Interface with Visual Designer 1
Description Catalog Number
5
XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-70-C00-A00-1D
5
XV with 10.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-10-C00-A00-1D
XV with 15.4-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet XV-303-15-C00-A00-1D 5
5
XV Operator Interface with Visual Designer and XSoft-CoDeSys 2
Description Catalog Number 5
XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-70-C00-A00-1E
XV with 7.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, SmartWire-DT, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-70-CE0-A00-1E
5
XV with 10.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-10-C00-A00-1E 5
XV with 10.0-inch TFT, plastic housing, PCT multi-touch, dual Ethernet, CAN, SmartWire-DT, RS-232, RS-485, USB host XV-303-10-CE0-A00-1E
5
Accessories 5
XV Family Accessories
Description Catalog Number
5
SD memory card for all XV-102 and XV-152 models MEMORY-SD-A1-S 5
Spare part kit for XV-102 models—1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen ACC-TP-57-KG-1
Spare part kit for XV-152 models—1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen ACC-TP-10-12-RES-1 5
SD memory card with 1 GB storage for all XV-100 and XV-300 models MEMORY-SD-A2-S
Accessory set for XV-303 (10 mounting brackets and 1 power plug) ACCESSORIES-TP-10-KG
5
5
XV Family Software Options
Description Catalog Number
5
Product license for 40 points for use with Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys units LIC-OPT-1ST-LEVEL 5
Product license for 80 points for use with Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys units LIC-OPT-2ND-LEVEL
License product Paper PLC with license sticker for XSoft-CoDeSys-2/-3 for XV-300 LIC-PLC-A 5
License product Paper Visual Designer with license sticker for XV-300 LIC-VISD-A
5
Notes
1 For more information on Galileo software, see Page V7-T5-20.
2 For more information on Visual Designer software, see Page V7-T5-22.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-15
 5.3 Operator Interface Products
XV-300 Operator Interface

Technical Data and Specifications

5
XV Operator Interface
5 Series
Model XV-303
5 Screen Size 7.0-Inch 10.0-Inch 15.0-Inch
Operating system WinCE7.0 Professional WinCE7.0 Professional WinCE7.0 Professional
5 Touchscreen technology Projected Capacitive Multi-touch Projected Capacitive Multi-touch Projected Capacitive Multi-touch

5 Display colors 16 million 16 million 16 million

Pixel resolution (landscape) portrait mode also available WSVGA 1024 x 600 WSVGA 1024 x 600 1366 x 768
5 Brightness (cd/m2) 400 400 400
Backlight LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming
5 Lifespan of backlight (half-life) 50,000 hrs 50,000 hrs 50,000 hrs
Processor 800 MHz Cortex A8 CPU 800 MHz Cortex A8 CPU 800 MHz Cortex A8 CPU
5 with graphics co-processor with graphics co-processor with graphics co-processor
Volatile memory 512 MB DRAM 512 MB DRAM 512 MB DRAM
5 Non-volatile memory 128 KB NVRAM (PLC), 128 KB NVRAM (PLC), 128 KB NVRAM (PLC),
1 GB SLC, 1 SD card slot 1 GB SLC, 1 SD card slot 1 GB SLC, 1 SD card slot
5 Real time clock Yes Yes Yes

5 Communication ports Ethernet 10/100, RS-232, RS-485,

CAN, USB Host, USB Device
Ethernet 10/100, RS-232, RS-485,
CAN, USB Host, USB Device
Ethernet 10/100, RS-232, RS-485,
CAN, USB Host, USB Device
Optional communication ports Second Ethernet 10/100, Second Ethernet 10/100, Second Ethernet 10/100,
5 PROFIBUS DP, SmartWire-DT PROFIBUS DP, SmartWire-DT PROFIBUS DP, SmartWire-DT
Power supply rated voltage 24 Vdc nominal (–20%/+25%) 24 Vdc nominal (–20%/+25%) 24 Vdc nominal (–20%/+25%)
5 with polarity protection with polarity protection with polarity protection
Continuous current consumption (max. amps) 0.6 (7.0-inch) 0.75 (10.1-inch) 0.9 (15.4-inch)
5 Starting current inrush (A2s) 1.0 (7.0-inch) 1.0 (10.1-inch) 1.0 (15.4-inch)

5 Ambient conditions
Operation-relative humidity, noncondensing 0 to 50 °C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50 °C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50 °C, 10 to 95%
5 Storage/transport-relative humidity, noncondensing –20 to +60 °C, 10 to 95% –20 to +60 °C, 10 to 95% –20 to +60 °C, 10 to 95%
Shock IEC 60068-2-27 15 g for 11 ms duration IEC 60068-2-27 15 g for 11 ms duration IEC 60068-2-27 15 g for 11 ms duration
5 Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-6
5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement 5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement 5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement
5 9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement
60–150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement
60–150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement
60–150 Hz: 2 g acceleration

5 Agency certifications and standards CE, UL/cUL, RoHS2, UL/cUL Class I Div 2
groups A, B, C, D (pending)
CE, UL/cUL, RoHS2, UL/cUL Class I Div 2
groups A, B, C, D (pending)
CE, UL/cUL, RoHS2, UL/cUL Class I Div 2
groups A, B, C, D (pending)
ATEX Zone 22 (pending) ATEX Zone 22 (pending) ATEX Zone 22 (pending)
5 Protection type
Front IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor)
5 Rear IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1

5 Housing material Plastic Plastic Plastic

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 196 x 135 x 51 269 x 174 x 58 404 x 255 x 53
5 Mounting cutout W x H (mm) 182 x 121 254 x 160 388 x 239
Approximate weight lbs (kg) 1.6 (0.74) 2.5 (1.13) 8.6 (3.9)
5 Ability to run third-party software No No No

5 Visual Designer development software VISUALDCE or VISUALDXP VISUALDCE or VISUALDXP VISUALDCE or VISUALDXP
Pre-licensed tags, drivers, Web 1500 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session 1500 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session 1500 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session

5 Field upgradeable max. tags, drivers, Web sessions (VisD) 4000 tags, 5 drivers,
1, 2, 4 or 8 simultaneous Web sessions
4000 tags, 5 drivers,
1, 2, 4 or 8 simultaneous Web sessions
4000 tags, 5 drivers,
1, 2, 4 or 8 simultaneous Web sessions

5 XSoft-CoDeSys-3 development software SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-S (seat) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-M (multi-seat) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-M (multi-seat)

5
5
5

V7-T5-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
XP-500 Operator Interface
5.4
XP Operator Interface Contents
Description Page
5
XP-503 with Visual Designer 5
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-18
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-18 5
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-18
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-19 5
5
5
5
5
5
5
XP-503 with Visual Designer 5
Product Description Features Standards and Certifications 5
The XP-500 series sets a new XP-500 series operator ● 4 GB DDR3-RAM large ● UL/cUL (UL 508)
standard for HMI and SCADA interface with Windows memory for parallel ● CE Mark 5
controls. Capacitive multi- Embedded Standard 7 processing and increased ● UL Class 1 Div 2
touch displays allow familiar operating system system performance
intuitive gestures for zoom,
(Groups A, B, C, D) 5
● 10.1, 15.6 and 21.5 inch
● 32 GB internal solid-state ● ATEX Zone 22,
scroll and swipe, and offer drive high volume internal
increased safety to your high resolution widescreen
memory
Category 3D 5
system with two hand or displays ● Front
● 2 independent Ethernet
multiple button activation ● Projected capacitive
ports standard for
● IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor), 5
control for critical functions. touchscreen supports NEMA 12
gestures and recognizes separation of IT and
XP-500 Panel PCs run on an up to 4 simultaneous touch process level ● Rear 5
open Windows Embedded inputs communications ● IP20
Standard 7 Operating System ● Remote access to mobile
● All solid-state media and 5
to support all Windows devices or tablets using no moving parts or fan
standard PC applications and HTML5 interface increases reliability 5
feature Protect Mode™ for ● Non-corruptible OS with
preventing unauthorized
● 1.65 GHz Dual Core CPU
changes to the operating with fast Radeon™ HD Protect Mode increases 5
graphics for best-in-class security and reliability
system.
speed and graphics 5
XP-500 units come with performance
advanced yet easy-to-use
Visual Designer software
5
pre-installed and licensed.
5
All these features come
standard in a package that is
slim and modern in design
5
yet also rugged. With no fan
or moving parts, a scratch- 5
resistant glass screen, and
powder-coated aluminum 5
body, XP-500 is fit for any
industrial application. 5
5
5
5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-17
 5.4 Operator Interface Products
XP-500 Operator Interface

Catalog Number Selection

5
XP Operator Interface
5 XP

5 XP – 503 10 A10 A00 1V

5
Family Development License
5 XP = Windows Embedded 1V = Win7 Embedded Std., Visual
Standard 7 Panel PC Designer runtime bundle
5
Performance Class Display Size Processor and Memory Mounting and Logo
5 503 = Multi-touch, metal housing, 10 = 10.1-inch widescreen A10 = 1.65 GHz AMD, 32 GB SSD A00 = Panel mount, no logo
glass screen 15 = 15.6-inch widescreen
5 21 = 21.5-inch widescreen

5
5 Product Selection

5 XP Operator Interface with Galileo

Description Catalog Number
5 10.1-inch widescreen with multi-touch, 1.65 GHz dual core CPU, 4 GB DDR3-RAM, 4 GB CFast memory XP-503-10-A10-A00-1B
15.4-inch widescreen with multi-touch, 1.65 GHz dual core CPU, 4 GB DDR3-RAM, 4 GB CFast memory XP-503-15-A10-A00-1B
5 21.5-inch widescreen with multi-touch, 1.65 GHz dual core CPU, 4 GB DDR3-RAM, 4 GB CFast memory XP-503-21-A10-A00-1B

5
XP Operator Interface with Visual Designer
5 XP Operator Interface
Description Catalog Number

5 XP 10.1-inch widescreen with multi-touch, 1.65 GHz dual core CPU, 4 GB DDR3-RAM, 4 GB CFast memory, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-503-10-A10-A00-1V
XP 15.6-inch widescreen with multi-touch, 1.65 GHz dual core CPU, 4 GB DDR3-RAM, 4 GB CFast memory, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-503-15-A10-A00-1V
5 XP 21.5-inch widescreen with multi-touch, 1.65 GHz dual core CPU, 4 GB DDR3-RAM, 4 GB CFast memory, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-503-21-A10-A00-1V

5
Accessories
5
XP Operator Interface
5 Description Catalog Number

5 XP-500 spare part kit for all XP models—1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip ACC-TP-57-RES-1

Notes
5 1 All 5XX units have 2 x 10/100/1000 Ethernet, 2 x USB 3.0, 1 x RS-232, 1 x RS-485, 1 x DVI-I.
2 Standard software on embedded hardware.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V7-T5-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
XP-500 Operator Interface
5.4
Technical Data and Specifications
5
XP Operator Interface
5
5
5

Model 10.1-inch XP-503-10-A10-A00-1V 15.6-inch XP-503-15-A10-A00-1V 21.5-inch XP-503-21-A10-A00-1V

5
Display 5
Screen diagonal 10.1-inch widescreen 15.6-inch widescreen 21.5-inch widescreen
Resolution 1024 x 600 pixels 1366 x 768 pixels 1920 x 1080 pixels 5
Backlight LED, dimmable via software LED, dimmable via software LED, dimmable via software
Display brightness (typical) 500 cd/m2 300 cd/m2 250 cd/m2 5
Contrast ratio (typical) 500:1 500:1 1000:1
Operation
5
Touch sensor Multi-touch touchscreen
(4 simultaneous touches)
Multi-touch touchscreen
(4 simultaneous touches)
Multi-touch touchscreen
(4 simultaneous touches) 5
Technology Projected Capacitive Touch (PCT) Projected Capacitive Touch (PCT) Projected Capacitive Touch (PCT)
Enclosures
5
Front glass Non-reflective tempered glass Non-reflective tempered glass Non-reflective tempered glass
5
Bezel Powder-coated aluminum Powder-coated aluminum Powder-coated aluminum
Device dimensions (w x h x d) 275 x 179 x 80 mm 404 x 255 x 80 mm 536 x 328 x 83 mm 5
Installation cutout (w x h) 261 x 164 mm 387 x 238 mm 519 x 313 mm
Weight 2.6 kg 4.8 kg 7.8 kg 5
System
Processor AMD GX217GA 1.65 GHz DualCore AMD GX217GA 1.65 GHz DualCore AMD GX217GA 1.65 GHz DualCore 5
Graphic AMD Radeon HD8280E 450 MHz AMD Radeon HD8280E 450 MHz AMD Radeon HD8280E 450 MHz
Memory 4 GB DDR3-RAM 4 GB DDR3-RAM 4 GB DDR3-RAM
5
Internal mass memory 32 GB SSD mSATA 32 GB SSD mSATA 32 GB SSD mSATA
Removable memory 1 x CFast slot, pre-populated with 4 GB 1 x CFast slot, pre-populated with 4 GB 1 x CFast slot, pre-populated with 4 GB
5
CFast memory card CFast memory card CFast memory card
Interfaces 2 x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbps; 2 x USB 3.0; 2 x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbps; 2 x USB 3.0; 2 x Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbps; 2 x USB 3.0;
5
1 x RS-232; 1 x RS-485; 1 x DVI-I 1 x RS-232; 1 x RS-485; 1 x DVI-I 1 x RS-232; 1 x RS-485; 1 x DVI-I
Power supply 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 5
Maximum current 1.2 A 1.5 A 1.7 A
Operating system Windows Embedded Standard 7 Windows Embedded Standard 7 Windows Embedded Standard 7
5
Environment
5
Agency certifications UL/cUL Class I Div 2, Groups A, B, C, D, UL/cUL Class I Div 2, Groups A, B, C, D, UL/cUL Class I Div 2, Groups A, B, C, D,
ATEX Zone 22 ATEX Zone 22 ATEX Zone 22
Degree of protection Front: IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor), NEMA 12; Front: IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor), NEMA 12; Front: IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor), NEMA 12;
5
Rear: IP20 Rear: IP20 Rear: IP20
Operating temperature 0 to +50 °C 0 to +50 °C 0 to +50 °C
5
Storage temperature –20 to +60 °C –20 to +60 °C –20 to +60 °C
Relative air humidity 10 to 20% noncondensing 10 to 20% noncondensing 10 to 20% noncondensing
5
Shock IEC 60068-2-27 15 g for 11 ms duration IEC 60068-2-27 15 g for 11 ms duration IEC 60068-2-27 15 g for 11 ms duration 5
Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-6
5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement
9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement
5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement
9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement
5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement
9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement 5
60–150 Hz: 2 g acceleration 60–150 Hz: 2 g acceleration 60–150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
Software 5
Development software Visual Designer Visual Designer Visual Designer
Ability to run third-party software Yes Yes Yes 5
Pre-licensed tags, drivers, Web sessions
Standard models 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session
5
Field upgradable max. tags, drivers, 64,000 tags, 8 drivers, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 64,000 tags, 8 drivers, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 64,000 tags, 8 drivers, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or
Web sessions 128 Web sessions simultaneously 128 Web sessions simultaneously 128 Web sessions simultaneously 5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-19
 5.5 Operator Interface Products
Operator Interface Software

Galileo Software Contents

5 Description Page
5 Operator Interface Software
Galileo Software
5 XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21
Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-22
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5 Galileo Software
5 Product Description Features Product Selection
The Intuitive Visualization Tool
● Easy to learn and intuitive ● Multi-line display of Galileo Development
5 Galileo is an easy to learn
graphical user interface alarm entries Software
with a project overview ● Online language selection Catalog
yet powerful and extensive window
5 project design environment ● Unicode support (also Description Number
that can be used ideally in all
● User-friendly project design Asian character sets) Single-seat license SW-GALILEO-S
with project simulation on
5 system and machine building
development PC
● Text import/export in XML Multiple-seat license SW-GALILEO-M
applications close to the format (example, Excel®)
● Different user interface
5 machine and process.
styles
● Brilliant image display,
Galileo is designed for use up to 65536 colors
● Drag and drop positioning of
5 in all sectors and offers objects, WYSIWYG (what
● Import of 15 different
comprehensive project image formats
you see is what you get)
5 design tools. Galileo provides
a full range of functions without
● Simple, clear user
● Dynamic objects
guidance
● Object parameter list, any
any graduated restrictions on
5 tags or screens, and is ● Tabular object properties,
number of data objects in
a screen
optimized for our XV operator easy and fast assignment
5 interface panels. of attributes—copy and
● Dynamic unit of measure
selection (example, °C–°F,
paste
inch–mm)
5 ● Convenient series
● Direct printing on panel
assignment of texts
(reports, forms)
5 and images to tags
● Many specific objects and
● Many graphical objects
such as bar graph, slide system functions
5 adjuster, graph plotter, ● Simple import of PLC
curve chart, camera variables
5 ● Anti-aliased gauge display ● Full functionality always
● Enhanced password available, no graduated
5 handling with complex performance level
password and aging
5 ● Extensive recipe handling
System Requirements
Windows XP and Windows 7
● Alarm handling with
5 time stamp, history and
diagnostics support with
5 image display

5
5

V7-T5-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
Operator Interface Software
5.5
XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Software Contents
Description Page
5
Operator Interface Software 5
Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-20
XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Software 5
Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-22
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Software 5
Product Description Features Advanced Features 5
● Up to 16 time and/or event ● 8-level password
Combined Logic and Project Development
Visualization Development ● Automatic variable
driven tasks per project protection 5
● Each task can include ● Web access selectable
IEC 61131-3 Logic declaration
Programming ● On line editing
multiple logic programs or
subroutines
per screen 5
● System function libraries
● Ladder Diagram (LD) ● Pop-up variable and
● Structured Text (ST) function search/pick tools
● Programs and screen
designs can be exported
(OS Storage Card, and
more)
5
Sequential function chart ● Automatic formatting and and imported to support Online and historical
●

(SFC) color coding of logic/ reuse

●

alarms
5
Function block diagram declaration text ● Powerful, built-in function ● Online and historical trends
●

(FBD) ● Re-usable Visual-Logic block libraries 5

● Freely definable function Function Blocks ● Ability to create user- System Requirements
block chart/continuous Debugging and
defined function blocks Windows XP and Windows 7 5
function chart (CFC) commissioning ● Fieldbus Configurator 32-bit systems
● Instruction List (IL) XSoft-CoDeSys-3 offers you
for CANopen, PROFIBUS- 5
DP and SmartWire-DT
a number of important
Target Visualization
functions for debugging,
device I/O 5
Integrated design of Operator testing and commissioning
● Ethernet and serial
Interface screens for the XV your XV applications quickly communication function 5
series. Visualization and logic and efficiently. blocks (OPC server, UDP,
developed as part of the TCP/IP, FTP client/ server,
same project. Simplifies All these features are Modbus Master/Slave,
5
screen design and always available as soon as you log email, SMS, and more)
keeps the Logic and on to the XV (online mode) 5
visualization in synch. over an Ethernet connection.
Web Visualization Simulation
5
Product Selection
Optionally XSoft-CoDeSys-3
can automatically generate
Users can also test the
application when the XV is
5
XSoft-CoDeSys-3 XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Software
XML-based runtime screens not connected to the process.
to make the screens from the This is possible thanks to the
Description Catalog Number 5
XV accessible remotely using integrated online simulation Single Seat License SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-S
a Web browser with a feature. Simulation supports Multiple Seat License (3) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-3-M 5
JavaScript plug-in such as both the screens and logic
Internet Explorer®, Firefox® that have been designed 5
and others. using XSoft-CoDeSys.
5
5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-21
 5.5 Operator Interface Products
Operator Interface Software

Visual Designer Software Contents

5 Description Page
5 Operator Interface Software
Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-20
5 XSoft-CoDeSys-3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21
Visual Designer Software
5 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-23

5
5
5
5
5
5
5 Visual Designer Software
5 Product Description Features
Advanced GUI Development, Visual Designer is a software Advanced Features Advanced Development
5 Made Easy development package ● Pop-ups and group screens Features
optimized for OEMs. New ● Full mathematical and
● Conversion of legacy
Time-saving solutions, lower
tools streamline the
5 costs.
application development
logical evaluation PanelMate configurations
● Web browsing and
● Optional PanelBuilder
With application development process, and the creation of
5 expense often outweighing Web-based applications has document viewing conversion utility
● Remote access and control
● Online configuration/
the hardware expense, the never been easier. In addition
editing
5 demand to quickly design and to basic monitor and control without having to install
● Advanced search and
implement advanced GUI functionality, Visual Designer software to the remote PC
replace
5 solutions is greater than ever. is packed with advanced
features streamlining the
● Database interfacing
● Automatic scaling of Web
Even advanced features such ● Historical alarms and
design of sophisticated clients
5 as data archiving, recipe
management, multi-language, applications.
events
● Customizable application
● Historical data archiving
SQL database access, and symbols
5 Web serving are made easy
and trending
● Reusable controls, images,
● Recipe management
through an elegant and and screens via indirect tag
5 modern user interface. Visual ● Multi-language
and/or PLC assignments
Designer’s ease-of-use and ● VB scripting
5 time-saving features lower ● Report generation System Requirements
your total installed cost. ● Scheduling Windows XP and Windows 7
5 ● Resolution conversion 32-bit and 64-bit systems
● Emailing and text
5 messaging
● Launch and control of third-
5 party applications

5
5
5
5
5
5

V7-T5-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Operator Interface Products
Operator Interface Software
5.5
Fully connected, Web-enabled
Today’s operator interface applications range from basic monitor and control to high-end, feature- 5
rich HMI software with Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA). Customers demand
communications capability with any network, PLC, Web client, and database. The answer: Eaton’s 5
Web-enabled Visual Designer operator interface software.
Web-based thin client Connectivity Open platform Peace of mind
5
● Zero admin client—no need ● Extensive list of over 240 ● Visual Designer Software All of these capabilities— 5
to install software on the native communication can host third-party combined with Eaton’s
remote PC drivers for PLCs, drives, ActiveX® and .NET controls commitment to provide free
● Supports multiple and many other industrial and Visual Basic® programs technical support for both OI 5
simultaneous and and commercial devices ● In addition to Eaton’s hardware and software—
independent Web clients ● Visual Designer software can Operator Interface families, make it quick and easy to 5
● Simplified security—the same interface to any relational Visual Designer’s runtime purchase, develop and deploy
local user accounts and database—access both local may be licensed on any 32 XP and XV operator interface 5
passwords for viewing and and enterprise functions or 64-bit Windows PC solutions.
control also apply remotely such as MRP/ERP through
databases such as
Interoperability 5
Microsoft® Access, FoxPro,
● Software is designed to
SQL Server, Oracle®, open standards such as 5
PI System® and many others XML, OPC, ActiveX, .NET,
● Other connectivity tools
ODBC, ADO, SOAP, DDE 5
and more
provide redundancy
capabilities, Real-Time Data 5
Exchange, Centralized Alarm
Management, and more 5
Product Selection
5
Visual Designer Software
5
Visual Designer Visual Designer Development Software License Key
Development Software Runtime Software 5
Description Catalog Number Catalog Number
Development license for CE hardware VISUALDCE — 5
Development license for PCs, XP-503 and CE hardware VISUALDXP —
Multiple development licenses for CE hardware (5-pack of VISUALDCE) VISUALDCE5 —
5
Multiple development licenses for PCs, XP-503 and CE hardware (5-pack of VISUALDXP) VISUALDXP5 —
5
Development license for all hardware platforms (for use with VISUALD-LIC-SERVER) VISUALDXPLS —
Multiple development licenses for use with VISUALD-LIC-SERVER (5-pack for use with VISUALDXPLS) VISUALDXP5LS — 5
License server key to serve development licenses over a LAN VISUALD-LIC-SERVER —
Visual Designer development software license and PC Runtime software licenses for a maximum VISUALRTDEVPC VISUALRTDEVPC 5
of 64 k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session
For a PC Runtime license with a maximum of 64 k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session — VISUALRTPC64K 5
For a PC Runtime license with a maximum of 4 k tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session — VISUALRTPC4k
For a PC Runtime license with a maximum of 1500 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session — VISUALRTPC1500
5
For a PC Runtime license with a maximum of 300 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session — VISUALRTPC300
5
For an XP-503 PC Runtime license with a maximum of 4 k tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session — N/A: Unit pre-licensed
For an XP-503 PC Runtime license with up to 64 k tags, 8 drivers, and 128 Web sessions — See upgrade list on next page 5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com V7-T5-23
 5.5 Operator Interface Products
Operator Interface Software

Visual Designer Software Updates and Upgrades

5 Description Catalog Number

5 Update to current version Visual Designer development software for CE hardware VISUALDUPCE
Update to current version Visual Designer development software PCs/XPe/CE VISUALDUPXP
5 Update to current version of Visual Designer runtime license for PCs VISUALRTUPPC
Upgrade from Visual Designer CE 1500 tag to 4000 tag runtime VISUALRT4KCE
5 Upgrade from Visual Designer XP-500 4000 tag, 5 driver to 64 k tag, 8 driver runtime license VISUALRT64KXP
Upgrade from Visual Designer development software CE to CE plus PC and XPe (64 k tag, 8 drivers) VISUALDCE2XP
5 Visual Designer PanelBuilder conversion utility optional plug-in (requires Visual Designer software) VISUALDPBCU

5 Visual Designer 1 additional Web thin client license for Internet Explorer: Total of 2 VISUALWEB1
Visual Designer 3 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer: Total of 4 VISUALWEB3
5 Visual Designer 7 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer Total of 8 VISUALWEB7
Visual Designer 15 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer: Total of 16 VISUALWEB16
5 Visual Designer 31 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer: Total of 32 VISUALWEB32

5 Visual Designer 63 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer: Total of 64 VISUALWEB64
Visual Designer 127 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer: Total of 128 VISUALWEB128

5 Visual Designer 1 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 2 VISUALSVT2
Visual Designer 3 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 4 VISUALSVT4
5 Visual Designer 7 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 8 VISUALSVT8
Visual Designer 15 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 16 VISUALSVT16
5 Visual Designer 31 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 32 VISUALSVT32

5 Visual Designer 63 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 64 VISUALSVT64
Visual Designer 127 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 128 VISUALSVT128
5 Visual Designer 1 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 2 VISUALSMA2
Visual Designer 3 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 4 VISUALSMA4
5 Visual Designer 7 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 8 VISUALSMA8
Visual Designer 15 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 16 VISUALSMA16
5 Visual Designer 31 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 32 VISUALSMA32

5 Visual Designer 63 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 64 VISUALSMA64

Visual Designer 127 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 128 VISUALSMA128
5 Visual Designer collaborative server VISUALCBSERVER
Visual Designer business dashboard tool VISUALDASHBOARD
5 Visual Designer communication package for electrical products VISUALDELECDRVS

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V7-T5-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—January 2018 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies

Power Supplies 6.1 General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-2
6
PSL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-4 6
PSC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-10
PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-16 6
ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-36
easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-39
6
Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-43 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-1
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Power Supplies Contents

6 Description Page
6 General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
PSL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-4
6 PSC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-10
PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-16
6 ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-36
easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-39
6 Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-43

6
6
6
6
6
6 Product Selection Guide
6 Power Supply Series and Features

6
6
6
6
6
PSL Series PSC Series PSG Series
6 Features Universal AC input range 90–264 Vac (125–375 Vdc) Ultra-compact size General-purpose 12 Vdc and 24 Vdc output for
10 to 100 W power output at 24 Vdc Full power from –25 to +71 °C operation 1.25 A to 40 A loads
6 Operating temperature range from –25 to +71 °C Universal AC input voltage 100–240 Vac Single-phase and three-phase inputs up to
(120–375 Vdc) 500 Vac
Output adjustable from 24 to 28 Vdc
6 Support up to 3000 microfarads of load capacitance Up to 88.0% efficiency at 230 Vac 150% power surge output

Extreme low temperature cold start at –40 °C Redundancy modules

Protection Class 2, double Isolation (no earth connection
6 required) resulting in low leakage current Overvoltage / overcurrent / overtemperature Buffer module

Short-circuit protection using Hicc-up mode, non-latching protections DIN rail mount
6 and auto-recovery Class 1 Protection (with primary earth
connection)
Rugged metal and plastic housing options
MTBF greater than 500,000 hours ensures uptime and reliability Heavy-duty screw and finger-safe terminals
6 Protection from overvoltage, short circuit, overcurrent and
overtemperature conditions
Hazardous Location Class I, Division 2 rated models
NEC Class 2 rated model
Plastic housings provide the durability required to withstand
6 harsh environments
Protection from overvoltage, overcurrent and
overtemperature conditions
Finger-safe terminals
6 LED indicating light for DC OK simplifies troubleshooting
Redundancy modules keep loads up and running in the event of
6 a device failure
NEC® Class 2 rated model
6 150% power surge output
IP20 Protection degree
6 Product Selection Page V7-T6-5 Page V7-T6-11 Page V7-T6-17

6 Technical Data and

Specifications
Page V7-T6-6 Page V7-T6-12 Page V7-T6-19

6 Dimensions Page V7-T6-8 Page V7-T6-14 Page V7-T6-30

V7-T6-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Power Supply Series and Features, continued
6
6
6
6
6
ELC Series easyRelay Power Series Sensor Power Supplies
Features Compact, low cost 24 Vdc control for Low profile power supplies for 12 Vdc 27 Vdc supplies for tough sensor
6
loads up to 2 A or 24 Vdc applications applications
Plastic enclosure can be DIN rail or 8 W, 30 W, 60 W or 100 W output Rugged housings with integrated
6
panel mounted power junction box for mounting outside
Single-phase (100–240 Vac) input easyRelay styling provides optimal of electrical enclosures 6
panel aesthetics Advanced diagnostic features
Plastic enclosure can be DIN rail or
panel mounted (with optional kit)
6
CSA Class 1, Division 2 qualified
6
Single-phase (100–240 Vac) input
Product Selection Page V7-T6-37 Page V7-T6-40 Page V7-T6-44 6
Technical Data and Page V7-T6-37 Page V7-T6-41 Page V7-T6-44
Specifications 6
Dimensions Page V7-T6-38 Page V7-T6-42 Page V7-T6-45
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-3
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

PSL Series Contents

6 Description Page
6 PSL Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-5
6 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-5
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-6
6 Power Derating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-8
6 PSC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-10
PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-16
6 ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-36
easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-39
6 Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-43
6
6
6
6 PSL Series
Features, Benefits and
6 Product Description Application Description Functions
Eaton’s single-phase Low The Low Profile is part of the ● Universal input voltage: ● Finger-safe terminals
6 Profile DIN Rail Power Supply PSL DIN Rail Power Supply 90–264 Vac or 125–375 Vdc ● LED indicating light for
series offers double isolated series, which is designed for ● Under 100 W power output DC OK simplifies
6 input with no earth use in compact cabinets for at 24 Vdc troubleshooting
connection required, resulting home automations and the ● Wide operating ● Redundancy modules keep
6 in low leakage current and a food and beverage industry. temperature range: loads up and running in the
longer lifespan. The PSL Applications include –25 °C to +71 °C event of a device failure
series provides a universal communication networks,
6 input voltage range of 90– sensors, PLCs and many
● MTBF greater than ● NEC Class 2 rated model
264 Vac, and a wide other electrical systems. 500,000 hours ensures ● 150% power surge output
6 temperature range of –25 °C uptime and reliability ● IP20 protection degree
to +71 °C with greater than ● Protection from ● Protection Class 2,
6 80% efficiency. The low- overvoltage, short circuit, double isolation
profile series is certified to overcurrent and over-
temperature conditions
● No earth connection
6 safety standard according to
IEC/EN/UL 60950-1
required
● Plastic housings provide
Information Technology the durability required
6 Equipment (ITE) and UL 508 to withstand harsh
Industrial Control Equipment environments
6 (ICE). The series is also fully
compliant with RoHS
6 Directive 2011/65/EU for Standards and Certifications
environmental protection. ● UL/cUL Listed 60950 It also reduces wiring, labor and
6 NEC Class 2 and Limited additional system components
● UL 60950-1
Power Source (LPS) acting as a short-circuit current
approvals are available for
● IEC limiter. The redundancy modules
6 this product. ● NEC Class 2 allow for two or more power
supplies to be connected
● CE marked
6 together to perform parallel or
redundancy operation. Parallel
operation or load sharing is when
6 the load is split evenly between
two or more power supplies.
Redundancy operation is where
6 Note: The NEC Class 2 model is N (number of power supplies)
certified as an NEC Class 2 power is required for the load and
6 source. This means that after a
small startup window, the power
one additional power supply is
connected in the event that one
supply cannot exceed a maximum should fail.
6 of 100 W under any circumstances,
including overload, short-circuit or
internal failure.
6

V7-T6-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Catalog Number Selection
6
Note: Catalog number selection breakdown shown below is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used
to create new catalog number configurations.
6
PSL Series
6
PSL 10 E 24 R P
6
Series Housing 6
PSL = Low Profile Power Supply P = Plastic
6
Output Power Terminals
10 = 10 W R = Finger-safe 6
30 = 30 W
60 = 60 W Model Output Voltage
100 = 100 W E = Single-phase 24 = 24 Vdc 6
6
Product Selection 6
PSL10E24RP
PSL Series 6
Catalog
Power Description Number
6
24 Vdc output, single-phase power supplies 10 W, 0.42 A output, plastic housing PSL10E24RP
(100–240 Vac nominal input)
30 W, 1.25 A output, plastic housing PSL30E24RP 6
60 W, 2.5 A output, plastic housing PSL60E24RP
100 W, 3.8 A output, plastic housing PSL100E24RP
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-5
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Technical Data and Specifications

6
PSL Series
6 PSL10E24RP PSL30E24RP PSL60E24RP PSL100E24RP
Input
6 Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac / 125–250 Vdc
AC input range 90–264 Vac 90–264 Vac 90–264 Vac 90–264 Vac
6 DC input range 125–375 Vdc 125–375 Vdc 125–375 Vdc 125–375 Vdc

6 Input frequency range 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz

Nominal current <0.30 A at 115 Vac, <0.8 A at 115 Vac, <1.5 A at 115 Vac, <2.2 A at 115 Vac,
<0.20 A at 230 Vac <0.6 A at 230 Vac <1.0 A at 230 Vac <1.0 A at 230 Vac
6
Inrush current limitation <15 A at 115 Vac, <25 A at 115 Vac, <30 A at 115 Vac, <30 A at 115 Vac,
<30 A at 230 Vac <50 A at 230 Vac <60 A at 230 Vac <60 A at 230 Vac
6 Mains buffering at nominal load >10 ms at 115 Vac, >25 ms at 115 Vac, >16 ms at 115 Vac, >10 ms at 115 Vac,
>30 ms at 230 Vac >30 ms at 230 Vac >30 ms at 230 Vac >30 ms at 230 Vac
6 Turn-on time <3 sec. <3 sec. <3 sec. <1.5 sec. at 115 Vac,
<1 sec. at 230 Vac
6 Internal fuse T 1 A / 250 V T 3.15 A / 250 V T 3.15 A / 250 V T 3.15 A / 250 V
Leakage current <0.25 mA at 240 Vac <0.25 mA at 240 Vac <0.25 mA at 240 Vac <0.25 mA at 240 Vac
6 Output
Power 10 W 30 W 60 W 91.2W
6 Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2%

6 Adjustment range 24–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 22–24 Vdc
Nominal current 0.42A 1.25 A 2.5 A 3.8 A

6 Derating >55 °C (2.5% / °C) in vertical >55 °C (2.5% / °C) in vertical >55 °C (2.5% / °C) in vertical >55 °C (2.5% / °C) in vertical
Power derating—horizontal mounting N/A N/A N/A N/A
6 Startup with capacitive loads Max. 3,000 μF Max. 3,000 μF Max. 3,000 μF Max. 3,000 μF
Max. power dissipation idling / nominal 2W 3.8 W 8.5 W 12 W
6 load approx.
Efficiency >80.0% at 115 Vac and 230 Vac >83.0% at 115 Vac and 230 Vac >86.0% at 115 Vac and 230 Vac >85.0% at 115 Vac,
6 >87.0% at 230 Vac
Residual ripple / peak switching (20 M Hz) <50mVpp / 150mVpp <50 mVpp / <150 mVpp <50 mVpp / <150 mVpp <50 mVpp / <150 mVpp
6 Parallel operation PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM /
With o-ring diode
PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM /
With o-ring diode
PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM /
With o-ring diode
PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM /
With o-ring diode

6 Galvanic isolation
Input / output 3.0K Vac 3.0K Vac 3.0K Vac 3.0K Vac
6 Input / ground N/A N/A N/A N/A
Output / ground N/A N/A N/A N/A
6 General / physical data
Housing material Plastic (PC), enclosed Plastic (PC), enclosed Plastic (PC), enclosed Plastic (PC), enclosed
6 Signals Green LED DC OK Green LED DC OK Green LED DC OK Green LED DC OK
MTBF >500,000 hr >500,000 hr >500,000 hr >500,000 hr
6 Dimensions (length) 91 mm 91 mm 91 mm 91 mm
Dimensions (width) 18 mm 53 mm 71 mm 89.9 mm
6 Dimensions (height) 55.6 mm 55.6 mm 55.6 mm 55.6 mm

6 Weight (kg) 0.065 kg 0.14 kg 0.24 kg 0.35 kg

Terminals Finger-safe Finger-safe Finger-safe Finger-safe
6 Wire size AWG 26-12 AWG 24-12 AWG 22-12 AWG 22-12 (1 piece)
AWG 24-12 (2 pieces)

6 Operating temperature –25 °C to +71 °C –25 °C to +71 °C –25 °C to +71 °C –25 °C to +71 °C
Storage temperature –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C
6 Operating humidity <95% RH <95% RH <95% RH <95% RH

6
6
6

V7-T6-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
PSL Series, continued
PSL10E24RP PSL30E24RP PSL60E24RP PSL100E24RP
6
General / physical data, continued
Vibration IEC60068–2–6, IEC60068–2–6, IEC60068–2–6, IEC60068–2–6,
6
Sine wave: 10–500 Hz at 19.6 m/S² Sine wave: 10–500 Hz at 19.6 m/S² Sine wave: 10–500 Hz at 19.6 m/S² Sine wave: 10–500 Hz at 19.6 m/S²
(2G peak); 10 min per cycle, (2G peak); 10 min per cycle, (2G peak); 10 min per cycle, (2G peak); 10 min per cycle, 6
60 min for all X, Y, Z directions 60 min for all X, Y, Z directions 60 min for all X, Y, Z directions 60 min for all X, Y, Z directions
Shock (operating) IEC60068–2–27, IEC60068–2–27, IEC60068–2–27, IEC60068–2–27, 6
Half sine wave: 4 G for a duration of Half sine wave: 4 G for a duration of Half sine wave: 4 G for a duration of Half sine wave: 4 G for a duration of
22 ms, 3 shocks for each 3 directions, 22 ms, 3 shocks for each 3 directions, 22 ms, 3 shocks for each 3 directions, 22 ms, 3 shocks for each 3 directions,
9 times in total 9 times in total 9 times in total 9 times in total 6
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2
Altitude 2000 m 2000 m 2000 m 2000 m
6
Certification and protection
Safety entry low voltage SELV (EN 60950) SELV (EN 60950) SELV (EN 60950) SELV (EN 60950)
6
Electrical safety
(of information technology equipment)
UL/C–UL recognized to UL 60950–1 UL/C–UL recognized to UL 60950–1 UL/C–UL recognized to UL 60950–1 UL/C–UL recognized to UL 60950–1
6
Industrial control equipment UL/C–UL listed to UL 508 UL/C–UL listed to UL 508 UL/C–UL listed to UL 508 UL/C–UL listed to UL 508
Class 2 power supply UL/C–UL recognized to UL 60950–1 UL/C–UL recognized to UL 60950–1 UL/C–UL recognized to UL 60950–1 UL/C–UL recognized to UL 60950–1
6
CE In conformance with EMC directive In conformance with EMC directive In conformance with EMC directive In conformance with EMC directive
2014/30/EU and low-voltage directive 2014/30/EU and low-voltage directive 2014/30/EU and low-voltage directive 2014/30/EU and low-voltage directive
6
2014/35/EU 2014/35/EU 2014/35/EU 2014/35/EU
Immunity EN 55024 EN 55024 EN 55024 EN 55024 6
(EN 61000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8,11) (EN 61000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8,11) (EN 61000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8,11) (EN 61000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8,11)
Emissions EN 55032, EN 61000–3–2 Class A, EN 55032, EN 61000–3–2 Class A, EN 55032 Class A, EN 61000–3–2 EN 55032, EN 61000–3–2 Class A, 6
EN 61000–3–3 EN 61000–3–3 Class A, EN 61000–3–3, EN 61000–3–3,
RoHS compliant Yes Yes Yes Yes 6
Safety and protection
Current limitation at short-circuits approx. Isurge = 150% of PoMax typically Isurge = 150% of PoMax typically Isurge = 150% of PoMax typically Isurge = 150% of PoMax typically 6
Surge voltage protection against internal Yes Yes Yes Yes
surge voltages 6
Protection degree IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Safety class Class II (No primary earth connection Class II without PE connection Class II without PE connection Class II without PE connection 6
is required)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-7
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Power Derating Curves

6
Vertical Mounting Position PSL10E24RP Vertical Mounting Position PSL60E24RP
6 110 110
100 100
6 90 90
80 80
6 70 70
Load (%)

Load (%)
60 60
6 50 50
40 40
6 30 30
20 20
6 10 10
0 0
6 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 71
Ambient Temperature (°C)
-25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 71
Ambient Temperature (°C)

6 Vertical Mounting Position PSL30E24RP Vertical Mounting Position PSL100E24RP

110 110
6 100 100
90 90
6 80 80
70 70
6
Load (%)

Load (%)

60 60
50 50
6 40 40
30 30
6 20 20
10 10
6 0 0
-25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 71 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 71
6 Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C)

6 Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm
6
Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
6 PSL10E24RP PSL30E24RP
6 55.6 ±0.5 55.6 ±0.5
18.0
49.0 ±0.5
6 49.0
32.1
32.1
6 3.5

6
6
6 91.0
±0.5 43.1 62.6 84.0
43.0 63.0
6
6
6
6 3.5 46.0

V7-T6-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Approximate Dimensions in mm
Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
6
PSL60E24RP 6
64.0 ±0.5
3.5
±0.5
6
6
6
6
6
43.0 62.5 84.0 91.0
±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
6
6
6
6
32.2
±0.5
3.5 ±0.5 6
46.6 ±0.5
6
PSL100E24RP 6
3.5
83.0 ±0.5
±0.5 6
6
6
6
6
43.0 62.5 84.0 91.0
±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 6
6
6
6
32.2 6
±0.5 3.5 ±0.5

46.6 ±0.5
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-9
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

PSC Series Contents

6 Description Page
6 PSL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-4
PSC Series
6 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-11
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-11
6 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-12
Power Derating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-14
6 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-14
PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-16
6 ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-36
easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-39
6 Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-43
6
6
6
6 PSC Series
Features, Benefits and
6 Product Description Application Description Functions
The PSC Compact series The ultra-compact and ● 30 W, 50 W and 100 W ● Protection from
6 operates with universal AC competitively priced Eaton ratings overvoltage, short circuit,
input range and offers full Compact DIN Rail Power ● Ultra-compact size overcurrent and over
6 power up to 55 °C. The Supply series is designed for ● Universal AC input voltage temperature conditions
output is adjustable from industrial applications ● Plastic housings provide
100–240 Vac (120–375 Vdc)
6 24 to 28 volts and can requiring highly reliable
● Up to 87% efficiency at the durability required to
support up to 3000 power supply within a tight withstand harsh
microfarads of load space. Simple to operate with 230 Vac
6 capacitance. All models in the HMI displays and industrial ● Extreme low temperature
environments
cold start at –40 °C
● Finger-safe terminals
series are certified according ethernet.
6 to IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 ● Overvoltage / overcurrent /
● LED indicating light for
Information Technology over-temperature DC OK simplifies
6 Equipment (ITE) and UL 508 protections troubleshooting
Industrial Control Equipment ● Under 100 W power output
● Redundancy modules keep
loads up and running in the
6 (ICE). The series is also fully
compliant with RoHS
at 24 Vdc
event of a device failure
● Wide operating
Directive 2011/65/EU for ● NEC Class 2 rated model 1
6 environmental protection.
temperature range: –20 °C
● 150% power surge output
to +70 °C
NEC Class 2 and Limited
6 Power Source (LPS) approvals ● Storage temperature: ● IP20 protection degree
are available for this product. –20 °C to +85 °C ● Earth connection is
6 ● MTBF greater than required
350,000 hours ensures ● A green LED indicates
uptime and reliability output is present
6
6 Standards and Certifications
6 ● UL 508
● NEC Class 2
6 ● CE marked
● RoHS compliant
6
Note
1 The NEC Class 2 model is certified as an NEC Class 2 power source. This means that after
6 a small startup window, the power supply cannot exceed a maximum of 100 W under any
circumstances, including overload, short-circuit or internal failure.
6
6

V7-T6-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Catalog Number Selection
6
Note: Catalog number selection breakdown shown below is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used
to create new catalog number configurations.
6
PSC Series
6
PSC 10 E 24 R P
6
Series Housing 6
PSC = Compact Power Supply P = Plastic
6
Output Power Terminals
30 = 30 W R = Finger-safe 6
50 = 50 W
100 = 100 W Model Output Voltage
E = Single-phase 24 = 24 Vdc 6
6
Product Selection 6
PSC100E24RP
PSC Series 6
Catalog
Power Description Number
6
24 Vdc output single-phase power supplies 30 W, 1.25 A output, plastic housing PSC30E24RP
(100–240 Vac nominal input)
50 W, 2.1 A output, plastic housing PSC50E24RP 6
100 W, 4.0 A output, plastic housing PSC100E24RP
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-11
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Technical Data and Specifications

6
PSC Series
6 PSC30E24RP PSC50E24RP PSC100E24RP
Input
6 Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac / 50–60 Hz 100–240 Vac / 50–60 Hz 100–240 Vac / 50–60 Hz
AC input range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac
6 DC input range 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc

6 Input frequency range 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz

Nominal current <0.8 A at 115 Vac, <0.4 A at 230 Vac <1.0 A at 115 Vac, <0.6 A at 230 Vac <1.2 A at 115 Vac, <0.6 A at 230 Vac
6 Inrush current limitation <35 A at 115 Vac, <60 A at 230 Vac <35 A at 115 Vac, <60 A at 230 Vac <35 A at 115 Vac, <60 A at 230 Vac
Mains buffering at nominal load 20 ms typ. at 115 Vac, 100 ms typ. at 230 Vac 20 ms typ. at 115 Vac, 90 ms typ. at 230 Vac 25 ms typ. at 115 Vac, 50 ms typ. at 230 Vac
6 Turn-on time <3 sec. at 115 Vac, <1.6 sec. at 230 Vac <3 sec. at 115 Vac, <1.5 sec. at 230 Vac <3 sec. at 115 Vac, <1.5 sec. at 230 Vac
Internal fuse T 3.15 A / 250 V T 3.15 A / 250 V T 3.15 A / 250 V
6 Leakage current <1 mA at 240 Vac <1 mA at 240 Vac <1 mA at 240 Vac
Output
6 Power 30 W 50 W 91.2 / 96 W
Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2%
6
Adjustment range 24–28 Vdc (Maximum power ≤ 30 W) 24–28 Vdc (Maximum power ≤ 50 W) 22–24 Vdc (Maximum power ≤ 91.2W)

6 Nominal current 1.25 A 2.1 A 3.8 A

Derating –10 °C to –20 °C (2% / °C), >55 °C (3.33% / °C) –10 °C to –20 °C (2% / °C), >55 °C (3.33% / °C) –10 °C to –20 °C (2% / °C), >55 °C (3.33% / °C)
in Vertical in Vertical in Vertical
6
Power derating–horizontal mounting N/A N/A N/A

6 Startup with capacitive loads Max. 3,000 μF Max. 3,000 μF Max. 3,000 μF
Max. power dissipation idling / 0.5 W / 4.5 W 0.5 W / 7 W 0.4 W / 10 W
nominal load approx.
6
Efficiency 87.0% typ. at 115 Vac, 88.0% typ. at 230 Vac 86.0% typ. at 115 Vac, 88.0% typ. at 230 Vac 87.0% typ. at 115 Vac, 89.0% typ. at 230 Vac

6 Residual ripple/peak switching (20 M Hz) <75 mVpp <75 mVpp <75 mVpp
Parallel operation PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring
6 Diode Diode Diode
Galvanic isolation

6 Input/output 3.0K Vac 3.0K Vac 3.0K Vac

Input/ground 3.0K Vac 3.0K Vac 3.0K Vac
6 Output/ground 0.5K Vac 0.5K Vac 0.5K Vac
General / physical data
6 Housing material Plastic (PC), enclosed Plastic (PC), enclosed Plastic (PC), enclosed
Signals Green LED DC OK Green LED DC OK Green LED DC OK
6 MTBF >350,000 hr >350,000 hr >350,000 hr
Dimensions (length) 75 mm 75 mm 75 mm
6 Dimensions (width) 21 mm 30 mm 45 mm

6 Dimensions (height) 89.5 mm 89.5 mm 100 mm

Weight (kg) 0.11 kg 0.18 kg 0.325 kg
6 Terminals Finger safe Finger safe Finger safe
Wire size AWG 22-12 / AWG 20-12 AWG 22-12 / AWG 20-12 AWG 22-12 / AWG 20-12
6 Operating temperature –20 °C to +70 °C –20 °C to +70 °C –20 °C to +70 °C
Storage temperature –40 °C to +85 °C –40 °C to +85 °C –40 °C to +85 °C
6 Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH 5 to 95% RH 5 to 95% RH

6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
PSC Series, continued
PSC30E24RP PSC50E24RP PSC100E24RP
6
General / physical data, continued
Vibration
6
Operating IEC60068–2–6, sine wave: 10 Hz to 500 Hz at
19.6 m/s²; displacement of 0.35 mm, 60 min.
IEC60068–2–6, sine wave: 10 Hz to 500 Hz at
19.6 m/s²; displacement of 0.35 mm, 60 min.
IEC60068–2–6, sine wave: 10 Hz to 500 Hz at
19.6 m/s²; displacement of 0.35 mm, 60 min.
6
per axis for all X, Y, Z directions per axis for all X, Y, Z directions per axis for all X, Y, Z directions
Non-operating IEC60068–2–6, Random: 5 Hz to 500 Hz (2.09 IEC60068–2–6, Random: 5 Hz to 500 Hz (2.09 IEC60068–2–6, Random: 5 Hz to 500 Hz (2.09 6
Grms); 20 min. per axis for all X, Y, Z directions Grms); 20 min. per axis for all X, Y, Z directions Grms); 20 min. per axis for all X, Y, Z directions
Shock (operating) 6
Operating IEC60068–2–27, half sine wave: 10 G for a IEC60068–2–27, half sine wave: 10 G for a IEC60068–2–27, half sine wave: 10 G for a
duration of 11 ms, shock for 1 direction (X axis) duration of 11 ms, shock for 1 direction (X axis) duration of 11 ms, shock for 1 direction (X axis) 6
Non-operating IEC60068–2–27, half sine wave: 50 G for a IEC60068–2–27, half sine wave: 50 G for a IEC60068–2–27, half sine wave: 50 G for a
duration of 11 ms, 3 shocks for each 3 directions duration of 11 ms, 3 shocks for each 3 directions duration of 11 ms, 3 shocks for each 3 directions 6
Pollution degree 2 2 2
Altitude 2000 m 2000 m 2000 m 6
Certification and protection
Safety entry low voltage SELV (EN 60950) SELV (EN 60950) SELV (EN 60950) 6
Electrical safety (of information technology N/A N/A N/A
equipment) 6
Industrial control equipment UL/C–UL listed to UL 508 UL/C–UL listed to UL 508 UL/C–UL listed to UL 508
Class 2 power supply UL/C–UL listed to UL 508 UL/C–UL listed to UL 508 UL/C–UL listed to UL 508 6
CE In conformance with EMC directive 2014/30/EU In conformance with EMC directive 2014/30/EU In conformance with EMC directive 2014/30/EU
and low-voltage directive 2014/35/EU and low-voltage directive 2014/35/EU and low-voltage directive 2014/35/EU 6
Immunity EN 55024, EN 61000–6–1, EN 61000–6–2 EN 55024, EN 61000–6–1, EN 61000–6–2 EN 55024, EN 61000–6–1, EN 61000–6–2
(EN 61000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11) (EN 61000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11) (EN 61000–4–2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11) 6
Emissions EN 55032, EN 55011, EN 61000–3–3, EN 55032, EN 55011, EN 61000–3–3, EN 55032, EN 55011, EN 61000–3–3,
EN 61000–6–3, EN 61000–6–4 EN 61000–6–3, EN 61000–6–4 EN 61000–6–3, EN 61000–6–4
6
RoHS compliant Yes Yes Yes
Safety and protection 6
Current limitation at short–circuits approx. N/A N/A N/A
Surge voltage protection against internal No No No 6
surge voltages
Protection degree IP20 IP20 IP20 6
Safety class Class I with primary earth connection Class I with primary earth connection Class I with primary earth connection
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-13
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Power Derating Curves Dimensions

6 Approximate Dimensions in mm
Vertical Mounting Position PSC30E24RP
6 110
Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
100
PSC30E24RP
6 90
80 0.3 ±0.2
6 70
Load (%)

60
6 50
40
6 30
20
6 10
0
6 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Ambient Temperature (°C)

6 Vertical Mounting Position PSC50E24RP

110
6 100 0.3 ±0.2
90
6 80
70 21.0
6 ±0.5
Load (%)

60
50
6 40
30
6 20
10
6 0
-25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
6 Ambient Temperature (°C)

Vertical Mounting Position PSC100E24RP 78.0 75.0

6 ±0.5 ±0.5
110

6 100
90

6 80
70
Load (%)

6 60
5.5
50
89.5 ±0.5
6 40
30

6 20
10

6 0
-25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Ambient Temperature (°C)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Approximate Dimensions in mm
Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
6
PSC50E24RP PSC100E24RP 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
30.0
±0.5
6
45.0
+1.2/–0.5
6
6
6
6
78.6 75.0
6
±0.5 ±0.5

78.6 75.0
6
±0.5 ±0.5
6
6
5.5 6
89.5 ±0.5
5.5 6
100.0 ±0.5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-15
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

PSG Series Contents

6 Description Page
6 PSL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-4
PSC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-10
6 PSG Series
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-17
6 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-18
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-19
6 Power Derating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-27
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-30
6 ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-36
easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-39
6 Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-43
6
6
6
6 PSG Series
Features, Benefits and
6 Product Description Application Description Functions
Eaton’s PSG Series of power The PSG Series is a line of ● Universal input voltages: ● All-metal DIN rail mounting
6 supplies is designed to be general-purpose power 100–240 Vac for single- hardware
a high-performance, high- supplies for use in a wide phase units, 400–500 Vac ● Heavy-duty screw and
6 quality line of products variety of industrial control for three-phase units finger-safe terminals
covering a majority of 12 Vdc applications. Applications ● General-purpose 12 Vdc ● LED indicating light for
6 and 24 Vdc control include communication and 24 Vdc adjustable DC OK simplifies
applications. With global networks, sensors, PLCs output troubleshooting
certifications, a compact and many other electrical
6 size and an impressive systems. Each model is
● 150% power surge output ● Conformal coated
operating temperature range, equipped with the options
● Wide operating electronics
6 the PSG Series fits a wide of a rugged metal or plastic temperature range: –25 °C ● Hazardous Location Class I,
variety of applications at a housing, heavy-duty screw to +80 °C Division 2 rated models
6 competitive price. or finger-safe terminals and ● MTBF up to 1,000,000 ● UL/NEC® Class 2 rated
a variety of protection hours ensures uptime model
Our expansive 22 model and reliability
6 offering is able to provide
features, making the PSG
one of the most versatile
● Redundancy modules keep
● Protection from overvoltage, loads up and running in the
solutions for most industrial power supply lines overcurrent and over-
6 applications with PSG on the market. temperature conditions
event of a device failure
outputs ranging from 12 Vdc ● Buffer module has the
● Rugged aluminum and
6 at 1.25 A up to 24 Vdc at
plastic housings provide
stored power needed to
keep loads running through
40 A, plus redundancy and
buffer modules to ensure the durability required to a short duration power
6 uptime. stand up to harsh failure
environments ● Three-year standard
6 warranty

6 Standards and Certifications

● cULus listed—UL 508
6 ● CSA listed—CSA 22.2
No. 107.1-01
6 ● Hazardous Location, Class I,
Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D
6 ● IEC
● EN Note: Some models may not
6 ● NEC Class 2
carry all certifications listed.
● UL Class 2
6 ● CE marked
6 ● RoHS compliant

V7-T6-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Catalog Number Selection
6
Note: Catalog number selection breakdown shown below is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used
to create new catalog number configurations.
6
PSG Series
6
PSG 240 F 24 R M
6
Series Housing 6
PSG = PSG Power Supply M = Aluminum
P = Plastic 6
Blank = Aluminum

15 =
Output Power
15 W 120 = 120 W
6
30 = 30 W 240 = 240 W Terminals
60 = 60 W 480 = 480 W S = Screw 6
100 = 100 W 960 = 960 W R = Finger-safe
Blank = Screw
Model 6
E= Single-phase
F= Three-phase Output Voltage 6
R= Redundancy module 24 = 24 Vdc
B= Buffer module 12 = 12 Vdc
N= NEC Class 2 Blank = 24 Vdc 6
6
Note: Not all combinations are available. See Pages V7-T6-19–V7-T6-26 for all available combinations.
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-17
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Product Selection
6
PSG Series
6 Screw Type Terminals—Connections for those that require multiple types
of terminations and lug connections.
6 Catalog
Power Description Number
6 Screw Type Terminals
PSG100E12SM 12 Vdc output single-phase power supplies 15 W 1.25 A output, plastic housing PSG15E12SP
6 (100–240 Vac nominal input)
30 W 2.5 A output, plastic housings PSG30E12SP

6 60 W 5 A output, aluminum housing PSG60E12SM

100 W 8.33 A output, aluminum housing PSG100E12SM
6
6
PSG60E 24 Vdc output single-phase power supplies 60 W 2.5 A output, aluminum housing PSG60E
6 (100–240 Vac nominal input)
60 W 2.5 A output, plastic housing PSG60E24SP
120 W 5 A, aluminum housing PSG120E
6
240 W 10 A, aluminum housing PSG240E
6 480 W 20 A, aluminum housing PSG480E

6
6 Finger-Safe Terminals—Connections for those that require IP20 terminals
for all your safety solutions
6
Catalog
Power Description Number
6
Finger-Safe Terminals
6 PSG60E24RM 24 Vdc output single-phase power supplies
(100–240 Vac nominal input)
60 W 2.5 A output, aluminum housing PSG60E24RM
120 W 5 A, aluminum housing PSG120E24RM
6 240 W 10 A, aluminum housing PSG240E24RM
480 W 20 A, aluminum housing PSG480E24RM
6
60 W 2.5 A output, plastic housing, PSG60N24RP
UL/NEC Class 2
6
6
PSG480F24RM 24 Vdc output, three-phase power supplies 60 W 2.5 A, aluminum housing PSG60F24RM
6 (400–500 Vac nominal input)
120 W 5 A, aluminum housing PSG120F24RM

6 240 W 10 A, aluminum housing PSG240F24RM

480 W 20 A, aluminum housing PSG480F24RM
6 960 W 40 A, aluminum housing PSG960F24RM

6
PSG480B24RM Module power supplies (24 Vdc input) Buffer module, 480 W 20 A output, aluminum PSG480B24RM
housing
6
Redundancy module, 480 W <20 A output, PSG480R24RM
aluminum housing
6
Redundancy module, 960 W <40 A output, PSG960R24RM
aluminum housing
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Technical Data and Specifications
6
PSG Series
Single-Phase 6
PSG15E12SP PSG30E12SP PSG60E12SM PSG100E12SM PSG60E PSG60E24SP PSG60E24RM
Input 6
Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac
AC input range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac
6
DC input range 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc
Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz
6
Nominal current 1 <0.37 A <0.7 A <1.35 A <2.5 A 1.1 A <1.10 A <1.4 A 6
Inrush current limitation 1 <30 A <30 A <50 A <100 A 30 A <40 A <20 A
Internal fuse T3.15 AH / 250 V T3.15 AH / 250 V T3.15 AH / 250 V T3.15 AH / 250 V T3.15 AH / 250 V T3.15 AH / 250 V T3.15 AH / 250 V 6
External fusing 4 A or 6 A 4 A or 6 A 6 A, 10 A or 16 A 6 A, 10 A or 16 A 6 A, 10 A or 16 A 6 A, 10 A or 16 A 6 A, 10 A or 16 A
Leakage current <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA 6
Output
Power 15 W 30 W 60 W 100 W 60 W 60 W 60 W 6
Nominal output voltage 12 Vdc ±2% 12 Vdc ±2% 12 Vdc ±2% 12 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2%
Adjustment range 11–14 Vdc 11–14 Vdc 11–14 Vdc 11–14 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc
6
Nominal current 1.25 A 2.5 A 5A 8.33 A 2.5 A 2.5 A 2.5 A
Startup with capacitive loads Max. 5000 μF Max. 6600 μF Max. 8000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 8000 μF Max. 8000 μF Max. 8000 μF
6
Efficiency >84% at 115 Vac,
>83% at 230 Vac
>85% at 115 Vac
and 230 Vac
>85% at 115 Vac
and 230 Vac
>85.5% at 115 Vac,
>87.5% at 230 Vac
>85% typ >86% at 115 Vac,
>87% at 230 Vac
>90% at 115 Vac
and 230 Vac
6
Current surge 1.875 A 3.75 A 7.5 A 12.495 A 3.75 A 3.75 A 3.75 A
Current surge time 3s 3s 3s 3s 1 s (at 10 s intervals) 3 s 5s
6
Residual ripple/peak switching
(20 MHz)
<100 mVpp <100 mVpp <100 mVpp <100 mVpp <50 mV /
<240 mVpp
<50 mV /
<240 mVpp
<50 mVpp /
<150 mVpp
6
Turn-on time <2.5 s <2.5 s <2.5 s <0.6s <2.5 s <3 s <2s
6
Mains buffering at nominal >22 ms >22 ms >22 ms >22 ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms
load (typ.) 1
Parallel operation With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM /
6
PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM /
With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode 6
Galvanic Isolation
Input/output 4 k Vac 4 k Vac 4 k Vac 4 k Vac 4 k Vac (type test) / 4 k Vac 4 k Vac 6
3 k Vac (routine test)
Input/ground 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac (type test) / 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 6
1.5 k Vac (routine
test)
Output/ground 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac (type test) / 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac
6
500 Vac (routine test)
General/Physical Data
6
Housing material Plastic Plastic Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Plastic Aluminum
Signals Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK
6
MTBF >1,000,000 hr >1,000,000 hr >800,000 hr >800,000 hr >800,000 hr >800,000 hr >1,000,000 hr 6
Dimensions (L) 100 mm 100 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 120.6 mm 121 mm
Dimensions (W) 32 mm 32 mm 32 mm 50 mm 32 mm 32 mm 32 mm 6
Dimensions (H) 100.6 mm 100.6 mm 120 mm 118.7 mm 120 mm 113 mm 125 mm
Weight (kg) 0.18 0.2 0.33 0.64 0.37 0.33 0.37 6
Terminals Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Finger-safe,
removable 6
Wire size AWG 22–14 AWG 22–14 AWG 22–14 AWG 18–24 AWG 22–14 AWG 22–14 AWG 22–12
Operating temperature –20 °C to +75 °C –20 °C to +75 °C –20 °C to +75 °C –20 °C to +75 °C –20 °C to +75 °C –20 °C to +75 °C –20 °C to +80 °C 6
Storage temperature –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C

Note
6
1 Ratings for single-phase models are at 115 Vac; three-phase models are at 400 Vac.
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-19
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

PSG Series, continued

6 Single-Phase
PSG15E12SP PSG30E12SP PSG60E12SM PSG100E12SM PSG60E PSG60E24SP PSG60E24RM
6 General/Physical Data, continued
Power derating— >50 °C derate >50 °C derate >50 °C derate >50 °C derate >50 °C derate <0 °C to –20 °C derate >50 °C derate
6 vertical mounting power by 2.5% / °C, power by 2.5% / °C, power by 2.5% / °C, power by 2.5% / °C power by 2.5% / °C power by 1% / °C, power by 2.5% / °C
>70 °C derate >70 °C derate >70 °C derate >50 °C derate
6 power by 4% / °C power by 4% / °C power by 4% / °C power by 2.5% / °C,
>70 °C derate
power by 4% / °C
6 Power derating— N/A N/A N/A >50 °C derate N/A N/A >50 °C derate
horizontal mounting power by 2.5% / °C, power by 2.5% / °C
6 >70 °C derate power
by 4% / °C

6 Operating humidity <95% RH,

noncondensing
<95% RH,
noncondensing
<95% RH,
noncondensing
<95% RH,
noncondensing
<95% RH,
noncondensing
<95% RH,
noncondensing
<95% RH,
noncondensing
Vibration 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s2, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6
6 Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

6 Climatic class 3K3 according to

EN 60721
3K3 according to
EN 60721
3K3 according to
EN 60721
3K3 according to
EN 60721
3K3 according to
EN 60721
3K3 according to
EN 60721
3K3 according to
EN 60721
Safety and Protection
6 Transient surge voltage Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor

6 Surge voltage protection against

internal surge
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Safety class Class I with ground Class I with ground Class I with ground Class I with ground Class I with ground Class I with ground Class I with ground
6 connection connection connection connection connection connection connection
Shock 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all
6 directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according
to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
PSG Series, continued
Single-Phase, continued
6
PSG60N24RP PSG120E PSG120E24RM PSG240E PSG240E24RM PSG480E PSG480E24RM
Input
6
Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac
AC input range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac
6
DC input range N/A 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 6
Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz
Nominal current 1 <1.5 A at 100 Vac 1.4 A <2.2 A 2.9 A <2.5 A 5.7 A <5 A 6
Inrush current limitation 1 <40 A <80 A <35 A N/A <35 A N/A <35 A
Internal fuse T3.15 AH / 250 V T3.15 AH / 250 V T4 AH / 250 V T6.3 AH / 250 V T6.3 AH / 250 V F10H / 250 A T8 AH / 250 V 6
External fusing 6 A, 10 A or 16 A 6 A, 10 A or 16 A 6 A, 10 A or 16 A 10 A or 16 A 10 A or 16 A 10 A or 16 A 10 A or 16 A
Leakage current <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA <3.5 mA <1 mA <1 mA <3 mA 6
Output
Power 60 W 120 W 120 W 240 W 240 W 480 W 480 W
6
Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2%
Adjustment range 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc
6
Nominal current 2.5 A 5A 5A 10 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 6
Startup with capacitive loads Max. 8000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF
Efficiency >86% at 115 Vac, >84% typ >89% at 115 Vac, >84% typ >90% at 115 Vac >86% typ >90% at 115 Vac 6
>87% at 230 Vac >90% at 230 Vac and 230 Vac and 230 Vac
Current surge N/A 7.5 A 7.5 A 15 A 15 A 30 A 30 A 6
Current surge time N/A 1 s (at 10 s intervals) 5 s 1 s (at 10 s intervals) 5 s 1 s (at 10 s intervals) 5 s
Residual ripple/peak switching <50 mVpp / <50 mV / <50 mVpp / <50 mV / <50 mVpp / <50 mV / <50 mVpp 6
(20 MHz) <240 mVpp <240 mVpp <150 mVpp <240 mVpp <150 mVpp <240 mVpp
Turn-on time <3 s <1 s <1 s <1 s <1 s <1 s <1 s 6
Mains buffering at nominal >20 ms >35ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms
load (typ.) 1
6
Parallel operation PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM /
PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM /
With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode 6
Galvanic Isolation
Input/output 4 k Vac 4 k Vac (type test) / 4 k Vac 4 k Vac (type test) / 4 k Vac 4 k Vac (type test) / 4 k Vac
6
3 k Vac (routine test) 3 k Vac (routine test) 3 k Vac (routine test)
Input/ground 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac (type test) / 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac (type test) / 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac (type test) / 1.5 k Vac 6
1.5 k Vac (routine 1.5 k Vac (routine 1.5 k Vac (routine
test) test) test)
6
Output/ground 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac (type test) / 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac (type test) / 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac (type test) / 1.5 k Vac
500 Vac (routine test) 500 Vac (routine test) 500 Vac (routine test)
General/Physical Data
6
Housing material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum 6
Signals Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK
MTBF >800,000 hr >800,000 hr >800,000 hr >300,000 hr >500,000 hr >300,000 hr >500,000 hr 6
Dimensions (L) 120.6 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm
Dimensions (W) 32 mm 32 mm 50 mm 85 mm 85 mm 160 mm 144 mm 6
Dimensions (H) 119.3 mm 120 mm 123.1 mm 118.5 mm 124.1 mm 115 mm 118.6 mm
Weight (kg) 0.33 0.54 0.72 1.04 1.1 1.8 1.37 6
Terminals Finger-safe, fixed Screw Finger-safe, Screw Finger-safe, Screw Finger-safe, fixed
removable removable 6
Wire size AWG 22–10 AWG 22–14 AWG 20–12 AWG 22–14 AWG 16–12 AWG 16–14 (input) AWG 18–10
AWG 12–10 (output) 6
Operating temperature –20 °C to +80 °C –20 °C to +75 °C –20 °C to +80 °C –20 °C to +75 °C –20 °C to +80 °C –20 °C to +75 °C –25 °C to +75 °C
Storage temperature –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C 6
Note
1 Ratings for single-phase models are at 115 Vac; three-phase models are at 400 Vac. 6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-21
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

PSG Series, continued

6 Single-Phase, continued
PSG60N24RP PSG120E PSG120E24RM PSG240E PSG240E24RM PSG480E PSG480E24RM
6 General/Physical Data, continued
Power derating— >50 °C derate power >50 °C derate power >50 °C derate power >50 °C derate power >50 °C derate power >50 °C derate power >50 °C derate power
6 vertical mounting by 2.5% / °C, by 2.5% / °C by 2.5% / °C by 2.5% / °C, by 2.5% / °C by 2.5% / °C by 2.5% / °C,
>70 °C derate power >70 °C derate power >70 °C to 75 °C derate
6 by 4% / °C by 4% / °C power by 5% / °C
Power derating— >50 °C derate power N/A >50 °C derate power N/A N/A N/A N/A
6 horizontal mounting by 2.5% / °C,
>70 °C derate power
by 2.5% / °C

by 4% / °C
6 Operating humidity <95% RH, <95% RH, <95% RH, <95% RH, <95% RH, <95% RH, <95% RH,
noncondensing noncondensing noncondensing noncondensing noncondensing noncondensing noncondensing
6 Vibration 10 to 500 Hz, 0.35 mm 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm
acc. 30 m/s2, single acc. 50 m/s2, single acc. 50 m/s2, single acc. 50 m/s2, single acc. 50 m/s2, single acc. 50 m/s2, single acc. 50 m/s2, single
amplitude (3 G max.) amplitude (5G max.) amplitude (5G max.) amplitude (5G max.) amplitude (5G max.) amplitude (5G max.) amplitude (5G max.)
6 for 60 min. in each for 90 min. in each for 90 min. in each for 90 min. in each for 90 min. in each for 90 min. in each for 90 min. in each
X, Y and Z directions, X, Y and Z directions, X, Y and Z directions, X, Y and Z directions, X, Y and Z directions, X, Y and Z directions, X, Y and Z directions,
6 in accordance with
IEC 60068-2-6
in accordance with
IEC 60068-2-6
in accordance with
IEC 60068-2-6
in accordance with
IEC 60068-2-6
in accordance with
IEC 60068-2-6
in accordance with
IEC 60068-2-6
in accordance with
IEC 60068-2-6
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
6 Climatic class 3K3 according to 3K3 according to 3K3 according to 3K3 according to 3K3 according to 3K3 according to 3K3 according to
EN 60721 EN 60721 EN 60721 EN 60721 EN 60721 EN 60721 EN 60721
6 Safety and Protection
Transient surge voltage Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor
6
Surge voltage protection against Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
internal surge
6 Safety class Class I with ground Class I with ground Class I with ground Class I with ground Class I with ground Class I with ground Class I with ground
connection connection connection connection connection connection connection
6 Shock 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all
directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according
6 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27 to IEC 60068-2-27
UL 1310 Class 2 — — — — — —
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
PSG Series, continued
Three-Phase
6
PSG60F24RM PSG120F24RM PSG240F24RM PSG480F24RM PSG960F24RM
Input
6
Nominal voltage 3 x 400–500 Vac 3 x 400–500 Vac 3 x 400–500 Vac 3 x 400–500 Vac 3 x 400–500 Vac
AC input range 3 x 320–600 Vac 3 x 320–600 Vac 3 x 320–600 Vac 3 x 320–600 Vac 3 x 320–600 Vac
6
DC input range 450–800 Vdc 450–800 Vdc 450–800 Vdc 450–800 Vdc 450–800 Vdc 6
Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz
Nominal current 1 <0.3 A <0.5 A <0.75 A <1 A <1.7 A 6
Inrush current limitation 1 <30 A <30 A <40 A <50 A <40 A
Internal fuse T 3.15 AH / 500 V, 600 V T 3.15 AH / 500 V, 600 V T 3.15 AH / 500 V, 600 V T 3.15 AH / 500 V T 4 AH / 500 V 6
External fusing 3 x circuit breakers 3 x circuit breakers 3 x circuit breakers 3 x circuit breakers 3 x circuit breakers
6 A, 10 A or 16 A 6 A, 10 A or 16 A 6 A, 10 A or 16 A 6 A, 10 A or 16 A 10 A or 16 A 6
Leakage current <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA
Output 6
Power 60 W 120 W 240 W 480 W 960 W
Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 6
Adjustment range 24–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc
Nominal current 2.5 A 5A 10 A 20 A 40 A
6
Startup with capacitive loads Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF
6
Efficiency >86% at 3 x 400 Vac >88% at 3 x 400 Vac >92% at 3 x 400 Vac >91% at 3 x 400 Vac >92% at 3 x 400 Vac
and 3 x 500 Vac and 3 x 500 Vac and 3 x 500 Vac and 3 x 500 Vac and 3 x 500 Vac
Current surge 3.75 A 7.5 A 15 A 30 A 60 A
6
Current surge time 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
6
Residual ripple/peak switching <50 mVpp <50 mVpp <150 mVpp <150 mVpp <240 mVpp
(20 MHz)
Turn-on time <1 s <1 s <1 s <1 s <1.5 s
6
Mains buffering at nominal >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms
load (typ.) 1
6
Parallel operation PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM / PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM /
PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode 6
With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode
Galvanic Isolation 6
Input/output 4 k Vac 4 k Vac 4 k Vac 4 k Vac 4 k Vac
Input/ground 2 k Vac 2 k Vac 2 k Vac 2 k Vac 2 k Vac 6
Output/ground 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac
General/Physical Data
6
Housing material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum
Signals Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK
6
MTBF >500,000 hr >500,000 hr >300,000 hr >500,000 hr >300,000 hr
6
Dimensions (L) 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm
Dimensions (W) 50 mm 50 mm 70 mm 140 mm 255 mm 6
Dimensions (H) 117.3 mm 117.3 mm 117.3 mm 117.3 mm 117.3 mm
Weight (kg) 0.66 0.66 0.89 1.35 2.6 6
Terminals Finger-safe, fixed Finger-safe, fixed Finger-safe, fixed Finger-safe, fixed Finger-safe, fixed
Wire size AWG 18–12 AWG 18–12 AWG 18–12 (input) AWG 18–8 (input) AWG 18–8 (input) 6
AWG 16–12 (output) AWG 12–10 (output) AWG 12–10 (output)
Operating temperature –25 °C to +75 °C –25 °C to +75 °C –25 °C to +75 °C –25 °C to +80 °C –25 °C to +65 °C 6
Storage temperature –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C –25 °C to +85 °C

Note
6
1 Ratings for single-phase models are at 115 Vac; three-phase models are at 400 Vac.
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-23
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

PSG Series, continued

6 Three-Phase, continued
PSG60F24RM PSG120F24RM PSG240F24RM PSG480F24RM PSG960F24RM
6 General/Physical Data, continued
Power derating— >50 °C derate power >50 °C derate power >50 °C derate power >50 °C derate power >50 °C derate power
6 vertical mounting by 2.5% / °C, by 2.5% / °C, by 2.5% / °C, by 2.5% / °C, by 2.5% / °C
>70 °C derate power >70 °C derate power >70 °C derate power >70 °C derate power
6 by 5% / °C by 5% / °C by 5% / °C by 5% / °C
Power derating— >45 °C derate power >40 °C derate power >40 °C derate power N/A N/A
6 horizontal mounting by 2.5% / °C,
>55 °C derate power
by 2.5% / °C,
>60 °C derate power
by 2.5% / °C,
>60 °C derate power
by 1.66% / °C, by 5% / °C by 5% / °C
6 >70 °C derate power
by 5% / °C

6 Operating humidity <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing 5 to 95% RH, noncondensing 5 to 95% RH, noncondensing
Vibration 10 to 500 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 30 m/s2, single amplitude (3 G max.) for 60 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6
6 Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2
Climatic class 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721
6 Safety and Protection
Transient surge voltage Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor
6 Surge voltage protection against Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
internal surge
6 Safety class Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection
Shock 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all 30 G (300 m/s2) in all
6 directions according to
IEC 60068-2-27
directions according to
IEC 60068-2-27
directions according to
IEC 60068-2-27
directions according to
IEC 60068-2-27
directions according to
IEC 60068-2-27

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
PSG Series, continued
Redundancy Modules
6
PSG480R24RM PSG960R24RM
6
Input
Nominal voltage 24–48 Vdc 24–48 Vdc 6
DC input range 22–60 Vdc 22–60 Vdc
Nominal current <20 A <40 A 6
Inrush current limitation <25 A <50 A
Output
6
Nominal output voltage Vin–0.65 V (typ.) Vin–0.65 V (typ.)
6
Nominal current <20 A <40 A
Efficiency >97% typ. >97% typ. 6
Galvanic Isolation
Input/ground 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac 6
Output/ground 1.5 k Vac 1.5 k Vac
General/Physical Data
6
Housing material Aluminum Aluminum 6
Signals 1 Green LED for DC Vin1 OK and DC Vin2 OK Green LED for DC Vin1 OK and DC Vin2 OK
MTBF >800,000 hr >800,000 hr 6
Dimensions (L) 121 mm 121 mm
Dimensions (W) 50 mm 50 mm
6
Dimensions (H) 122.1 mm 122.1 mm
Weight (kg) 0.375 0.515
6
Terminals Finger safe—fixed Finger safe—fixed 6
Wire size AWG 12–10 AWG 12–10
Operating temperature –40 °C to +80 °C –40 °C to +80 °C 6
Storage temperature –40 °C to +85 °C –40 °C to +85 °C
Power de-rating—vertical mounting > 50 °C de-rate power by 2.5% / °C > 50 °C de-rate power by 2.5% / °C
6
Power de-rating—horizontal mounting N/A N/A
6
Operating humidity < 95% RH, noncondensing < 95% RH, noncondensing
Vibration 10 to 500 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 30m/s², single amplitude (3 G max.) for 60 min. 10 to 500 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 30m/s², single amplitude (3 G max.) for 60 min.
in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6
6
Pollution degree 2 2 6
Climatic class 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721
Safety and Protection 6
Safety class Class 2 with ground connection Class III with ground connection
Shock 30 G (300 m/S²) in all directions according to IEC 60068-2-27 30 G (300 m/S²) in all directions according to IEC 60068-2-27
6
Note
1 The LED will turn on when the Vin1 and Vin2 > 18 V ±5% (for 24 V system) or > 36 V ±5% (for 48 V system) and not more than 30 V (for 24 V system) or not more than 60 V (for 48 V system),
6
the relay contacts will be closed. If Vin1 and Vin2 is under or over this range, the LED will be turned off.
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-25
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

PSG Series, continued

6 Buffer Module
PSG480B24RM
6
Input

6 Nominal voltage 24 Vdc

DC input range 22.8–28.8 Vdc
6 Maximum voltage 35 Vdc
Current Charging mode: <0.6 A
6 Discharging mode: 20 A max.
Power (standby mode) 2.5 W average
6 Maximum signal (inhibit) 35 V / 10 mA
Max inrush current < 20 A
6 Charging time < 30s

6 Output
Nominal voltage 24 Vdc typ.
6 DC adjustment range Switch = “Fix 22V”: Buffering starts if terminal voltage falls below 22 V
Switch = “Vin-1V” (Factory Setting): Buffering starts if terminal voltage is decreased by >1 V
6 Maximum voltage 35 Vdc
Current 20 A max.
6 buffering time 250 ms min. at 24 V/20 A load, 5 s min. at 24 V/1 A load
Maximum signal 35 V / 10 mA
6 PARD (20MHz) <200 mVpp
Galvanic isolation
6
Input/ground 1.5 k Vac

6 Output/ground 1.5 k Vac

Signal/ground 1.5 k Vac
6 General/Physical Data
Housing material Aluminum
6 Signals Green LED off: unit is discharged or Vin < 22 Vdc
Green LED on: unit is fully charged
6 Green LED blinking slowly: unit is charging
Green LED blinking quickly: unit is discharging
6 MTBF >800,000 hr

6 Parallel connection Yes

Series connection No
6 Dimensions (L) 121 mm
Dimensions (W) 70 mm
6 Dimensions (H) 120.1 mm
Weight (kg) 0.76
6 Terminals Finger safe–fixed
Wire Size Input / Output: AWG 12–10
6 Signal: AWG 24–10

6 Operating temperature –25 °C to +75 °C

Storage temperature –25 °C to +85 °C
6 Power de-rating—vertical mounting >70 °C de-rate power by 5% / °C
Operating humidity < 95% RH, noncondensing
6 Vibration 10 to 500 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 30 m/s², single amplitude (3 G max.) for 60 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6
Pollution degree 2
6 Safety and Protection
Shock 30 G (300 m/S²) in all directions according to IEC60068-2-27
6 Safety class Class I with ground connection

6
6

V7-T6-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
Power Supplies
6.1
Power Derating Curves
6
Vertical Mounting Position PSG15E12SP Vertical Mounting Position PSG60E
110 110 6
100 100
90
80
90
80
6
70 70
6
Load (%)

Load (%)
60 60
50 50
40 40 6
30 30
20
20
10 10 6
0 0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)
70 80 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85 6
Ambient Temperature (°C)
6
Vertical Mounting Position PSG30E12SP Vertical Mounting Position PSG60E24SP
110 110 6
100 100
90 90 6
Load (%)

80 80
70 70
6
Load (%)
60 60
50 50
40 40 6
30 30
20
10
20
10
6
0 0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 6
Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C)

Vertical Mounting Position PSG60E12SM Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG60E24RM
6
110 110 6
100 100
90
80
90
80
6
Load (%)

70 70
Load (%)

60 60 6
50 50
40 40 6
30 30
20 20
10 10
6
0 0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)
70 80 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 6
Ambient Temperature (°C)

6
Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG100E12SM Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG60N24RP
110 110
6
100 100
90 90 6
80 80
6
Load (%)

70 70
Load (%)

60 60
50 50
40 40 6
30 30
20
20 6
10
10
0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 6
Ambient Temperature (°C)
Ambient Temperature (°C)
Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting 6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-27
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Vertical Mounting Position PSG120E Vertical Mounting Position PSG480E

6 110 110
100 100
6 90 90
80 80
6 70 70
Load (%)

Load (%)
60 60
50 50
6 40 40
30 30
6 20 20
10 10
6 0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85
0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85
Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C)
6
Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG120E24RM Vertical Mounting Position PSG480E24RM
6
110 110
6 100
90
100
90
80 80
6
Load (%)

70 70
Load (%)
60 60
6 50
40
50
40
30
6 20
30
20
10 10
6 0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0
-25 -15 -5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75
Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C)
6
Vertical Mounting Position PSG240E Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG60F24RM
6
110 110

6 100
90
100
90
80 80
6 70 70
Load (%)
Load (%)

60 60
50
6 50
40
40
30
30
6 20
20
10
10 0
6 0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Ambient Temperature (°C)
60 70 80

Ambient Temperature (°C) Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting

6
Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG240E24RM Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG120F24RM
6
110 110

6 100
90
100
90
80 80
6
Load (%)

70 70
Load (%)

60 60
6 50
40
50
40
30 30
6 20 20
10 10
6 0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C)
6 Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting

6
6

V7-T6-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG240F24RM Vertical Mounting Position PSG480R24RM
110
6
110
100
100
90 90 6
80 80
70 6

Load (%)
70
Load (%)

60 60
50
40
50
40
6
30 30
20 20 6
10 10
0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 6
Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C)
Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting 6
Vertical Mounting Position PSG480F24RM Vertical Mounting Position PSG960R24RM 6
110
100
110
100
6
90 90
80 80 6
Load (%)

70 70

Load (%)
60
50
60
50
6
40 40
30 30 6
20 20
10
0
10 6
0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C) 6
Vertical Mounting Position PSG960F24RM Vertical Mounting Position PSG480B24RM 6
110 110
100 100
6
90 90
80 80 6
70 70
Load (%)

Load (%)

60
50
60
50
6
40 40
30 30 6
20 20
10
0
10
0
6
-25 -15 -5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 -25 -15 -5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75
Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C) 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-29
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Dimensions
6 Approximate Dimensions in mm

6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only.

PSG15E12SP PSG60E12SM
6
32.0 ±0.5 10.6 90.0 ±0.5 120.5 ±0.5
6 (C) 32.0
±0.5 106.4 ±0.5
Catalog Number:

6 PSG60E12SM
24V 2.5A

CAUTION

6 HOT SURFACE

6
Adjust

DC OK
100.0 121.0 ±0.5 SPEC LABEL
±0.5
6 3.3

6
6 100-240V~1.5A
50-60Hz

6 5.0 ±0.2

6
PSG30E12SP PSG100E12SM
6 7.1 ±0.5
32.0 ±0.5 10.6 90.0 ±0.5

6 111.6 ±0.5
50.0 ±0.5 98.0 ±0.5
6
6
6 100.0 Catalog Number:
PSG100E12SM Adjust
121.0
±0.5
24V 8.33A
±0.5 DC OK

6 3.3 1.6

6 SPEC LABEL

6
6 100–240V~ 2.5A
50–60 Hz

6 5.0

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Approximate Dimensions in mm
Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
6
PSG60E PSG60E24RM 6
32.0 ±0.5 120.5 ±0.5 125.0 ±1.0 6
105.2 ±0.5 106.6 ±0.5
32.0
Catalog Number:
PSG60E
±0.3
5.5 ±0.2
6
24V 2.5A

CAUTION
HOT SURFACE
6
Adjust
6
DC OK

121.0 ±0.5 SPEC LABEL

121.0 6
±0.4
Spec Label 6
100-240V~1.5A
50-60Hz
6
6
5.0 ±0.2
6
1.5 ±0.4 5.5 ±0.4 6
PSG60E24SP PSG60N24RP
6
32.0
±0.6 113.0 ±0.6
32.0
±0.6 16.4 ±0.5 6
10.0 ±0.3
0.8 (ref.) 101.0 ±0.3
0.8 ±0.4 101.0 ±0.3
6
Catalog Number:
PSG60E24SP
24V 2.5A
Catalog Number:
PSG60N24RP
24V 2.5A 6
120.6
6
120.6 126.0
±0.3
Adjust
±0.6 Adjust

DC OK
SPEC LABEL 35.5
6
DC OK 35.5
SPEC LABEL ±0.2 ±0.5
NEC Class 2

6
6
100–240V~ 1.5A
100–240V~ 1.5A
50–60 Hz
6
50–60 Hz

119.3 (ref.) 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-31
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Approximate Dimensions in mm
6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
6 PSG120E PSG240E

6 50.0 ±0.2 118.5 ±0.5

DC 24V 5A
105.2 ±0.5
6
6 Adjust
DC OK CAUTION

121.0 HOT SURFACE

6 ±0.2
24V 10A Adjust

DC OK

121.0 Catalog Number:

6
PSG240E
±0.5
SPEC LABEL

6 AC 100-240V 2A
50-60 Hz

6 13.0 4.0
100-240V~5A
50-60Hz

5.5 115.0 ±0.6

85.0 ±0.5 5.0 ±0.2
6
6 PSG120E24RM PSG240E24RM
6 5.5 ±0.2
124.1 ±1.0
116.6 ±1.0
85.0 ±0.5 105.2 ±0.5
6 50.0 ±0.5 98.0 ±0.5

6 121.0
±0.5
6 24V 10A Adjust

DC OK
CAUTION
HOT SURFACE

Catalog Number:
121.0 1.6
6
Catalog Number:
PSG120E24RM
24V 5A
Adjust ±0.5 PSG240E24RM

DC OK
SPEC LABEL
1.6
6
SPEC LABEL
6 100–240V~ 3.5A
50–60 Hz

6 5.0
100–240V~ 2.5A

6 50–60 Hz

5.0
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
Power Supplies
6.1
Approximate Dimensions in mm
Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
6
PSG480E PSG60F24RM 6
160.0 ±0.5 7.1 50.0 ±0.5 117.3 ±0.5 6
6
6.6
24V 2.5A
Adjust
97.5
±0.5
6.6 6
Catalog Number:
DC OK
±0.35
Catalog Number: ±0.1 PSG60F24RM
121.0
PSG480E

±0.5 6
N L Adjust
Three-Phase 400–500V ~0.3A
50–60 Hz
6
DC OK

100-240V~

121.0
7A 50-60Hz 24V 20A
6
±0.5 96.6 ±0.5 86.8 ±0.5
111.4 ±0.5
5.0
110.2 ±0.5
6
6
PSG480E24RM PSG120F24RM

121.0 50.0 ±0.5 117.3 ±0.5

6
7.1
±0.5
144.0 ±1.0
96.7 ±0.5 6
97.5 6
24V 5A
Adjust 6.6
6.6 ±0.5
±0.35
6
DC OK
Catalog Number:

±0.5 PSG120F24RM
121.0
Catalog Number:
PSG480E24RM ±0.5
Adjust

DC OK Three-Phase 400–500V ~0.3A

50–60 Hz
6
6
100–240V ~6A
50–60 Hz
24V 20A
N L + + – –

111.5 ±1.0 5.0

86.8 ±0.5 6
110.2 ±0.5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-33
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Approximate Dimensions in mm
6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
6 PSG240F24RM PSG960F24RM

6 70.0 ±0.5 117.3 ±0.5 6.6

±0.35

6
+ + – –
255.0 ±0.5 117.3 ±0.5

24V 5A 24V 40A

121.0
6 Adjust
97.5
±0.5
6.6 ±0.5
Catalog Number: DC OK

SPEC LABEL ±0.5 Catalog Number: SPEC LABEL

PSG240F24RM
121.0
PSG960F24RM Adjust

97.5
6 ±0.5 Three-Phase 400–500V ~1.7A
50–60 Hz
+ + + – – –
DC OK

±0.5

6 Three-Phase 400–500V ~0.75A

50–60 Hz

88.1 ±0.5
5.0 106.0 ±0.5
6 110.2 ±0.5
86.8 ±0.5 111.3 ±0.5
6 5.0
110.2 ±0.5

6 PSG480F24RM PSG480R24RM
6 140.0 ±0.5 117.3 ±0.7 115.0 ±1.0

50.0 ±0.5 98.0 ±0.5

6
24V 20A
7.1 (ref)
6 Catalog Number:
SPEC LABEL 6.6
PSG480F24RM
121.0
6 Adjust

DC OK
±0.8 Vin1 Vin2 Com

*121.0
Three-Phase 400–500V ~1A
50–60 Hz
24V–60V 20A
Vin1 OK
±0.5
6 + + – –

Catalog Number:
Vin2 OK

1.6
PSG480R24SM

SPEC LABEL
6 87.0
5.0
110.2 ±0.5
6 Vout OK

6 20A Max.
Redundancy Module

6 5.0

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Approximate Dimensions in mm
Note: Dimensions are for reference only.
6
PSG960R24RM PSG480B24RM 6
115.0 ±1.0 70.0 ±0.5 5.5 ±0.5 6
50.0 ±0.5 98.0 ±0.5

1.2
+0.5 6
–0.3
24V 20A
Status

121.0
6
Catalog Number: 35.5
Vin1 Vin2 Com PSG480B24RM
±0.5 ±0.5
22V–60V 40A
Vin1 OK
121.0
±0.5
SPEC LABEL 6
Vin2 OK

Catalog Number:
PSG960R24RM
1.6 6
SPEC LABEL 7.1
±0.5 6
Vout OK
96.6 ±0.8
5.0 113.0 ±1.0 6
20A Max.
Redundancy Module
6
5.0 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-35
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

ELC Series Contents

6 Description Page
6 PSL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-4
PSC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-10
6 PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-16
ELC Series
6 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-37
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-37
6 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-38
easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-39
6 Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-43

6
6
6
6
6 ELC Series
Features, Benefits and
6 Product Description Functions Standards and Certifications
6 Eaton’s ELC power supplies
are the perfect products for
● Universal input voltage:
85–264 Vac
● cULus listed
● CE marked
those applications requiring a
6 very compact and low-cost
● Compact size, with
common depth and height
● RoHS compliant
source for 24 Vdc power. across models allows for
6 While these products were common panel depths and
developed to be a perfect family consistency
6 match for our Eaton Logic ● ELC styling provides
Controllers, they can be used maximum aesthetic appeal
6 in a variety of applications. when used with Eaton
The lightweight, DIN rail Logic Controllers
6 mounted enclosures, wide ● Front-mounted pressure
input voltage range and plate screw terminals for
6 robust screw terminals
make these power supplies
a robust connection
● Removable finger-safe
easy to install and use.
6 They are available in 1 A
protective cover for
terminals
and 2 A models. Power ON indication LED
6 ●

● Integrated mounting
hardware for panel
6 mounting or DIN rail
mounting
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Product Selection
6
ELC-PS01 ELC Series
Catalog 6
Description Number
24 watt, 1 amp power supply ELC-PS01 6
6
48 watt, 2 amp power supply ELC-PS02
6
6
Technical Data and Specifications 6
ELC Series
ELC-PS01 ELC-PS02
6
Capacity 24 W 48 W
Input
6
Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac
Voltage range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac
6
Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 6
Output
Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3% 6
Nominal current 1A 2A
Efficiency 78% to 87% typical at full load 78% to 87% typical at full load 6
Residual ripple/peak switching < 100 mV typical at full load < 240 mV typical at full load
(20 MHz) 6
General/Physical Data
Housing material Plastic Plastic 6
Dimensions (D) 60 mm 60 mm
Dimensions (W) 36.5 mm 55 mm 6
Dimensions (H) 90 mm 90 mm
Weight (g) 158 250
6
Operating temperature 0 °C to +55 °C 0 °C to +55 °C
6
Storage temperature –25 °C to +70 °C –25 °C to +70 °C
Operating humidity 50% to 95% RH, noncondensing 50% to 95% RH, noncondensing 6
Pollution degree 2 2
Approvals/Certifications 6
UL 508, CE, RoHS, EMC directive UL 508, CE, RoHS, EMC directive
89/336/EEC, low voltage
directive 73/23/EEC
89/336/EEC, low voltage
directive 73/23/EEC
6
Safety and Protection
6
Overload/short circuit Auto recovery Auto recovery
protection
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-37
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Dimensions
6 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

6 ELC-PS01 Power Supply

6
6
6 L
N
6 3.54
(90.0)

6 24V
0V
6 POWER

6 ELC-PS01

6 2.36
1.44 13.3 (60.0)
0.12
6 (3.0)
(36.5) (0.52)

6
ELC-PS02 Power Supply
6 2.17
(55.0) 2.36
6 13.3
(0.52)
(60.0)

6 0.12
(3.0)
6
L
6 N
3.94
6 (100.0)
3.54 24V
6 (90.0) 0V
POWER
6
ELC-PS02
6
1.28
6 0.12 (32.5)
(3.0)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-38 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
easyRelay Power Supply Contents
Description Page
6
PSL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-4 6
PSC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-10
PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-16 6
ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-36
easyRelay Power Supply 6
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-40
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-41 6
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-42
Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-43
6
6
6
6
6
easyRelay Power Supply 6
Features, Benefits and
Product Description Functions Standards and Certifications 6
Eaton’s easyRelay power
supplies are the perfect
● Universal input voltage:
85–264 Vac, 50/60 Hz
● Primary switched-mode
power supplies
● UL listed 6
● CSA certified
products for those applications
requiring a low amperage
● Wide operating
temperature range
● Output voltages can be
connected in parallel to
● CE marked 6
24 Vdc power source. While
● RoHS compliant
(–25 °C to +55 °C) increase power output or
these products were ● Power ON / diagnostics for redundant operation to
● CSA Class I, Division 2 6
developed to be a perfect achieve greater system rated for groups A, B, C, D
LED: continuous light on—
match for our easyRelay fault-free operation; availability 6
products, they can be used flashing LED—short circuit ● Safety extra low voltage
in a variety of applications. overload on voltage output (SELV to EN 55 022) 6
● Optional mounting ● Radio interference Class B
hardware for panel to EN 55 011 and EN 55 022 6
mounting (EZB4-101-GF1) for use in industrial and
or standard DIN rail
mounting
public networks 6
● Finger-safe, side-entry
screw clamp terminals for
6
clean wiring
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-39
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Product Selection
6
easyRelay Power Supply Units
6 Rated input voltage 100–240 Vac, single-phase.
Input Voltage Rated Output Output Voltage Rated Output Rated Output
6 Range Voltage Setting Range Power Current Catalog Number
EASY200-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc/12 Vdc — 8W 0.35 A / 20 mA EASY200-POW
6
6
6
6
6 EASY400-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc — 30 W 1.25 A EASY400-POW

6
6
6
EASY500-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc — 60 W 2.5 A EASY500-POW
6
6
6
6
EASY600-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc — 100 W 4.2 A EASY600-POW
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-40 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Technical Data and Specifications
6
easyRelay Series
EASY200-POW EASY400-POW EASY500-POW EASY600-POW 6
Capacity 8W 30 W 60 W 100 W
Input 6
Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac
Voltage range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 6
Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz
Output
6
24 Vdc
6
Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3%
Nominal current 0.35 A 1.25 A 2.5 A 4.2 A 6
12 Vdc
Nominal output voltage 12 Vdc — — — 6
Nominal current 20 mA — — —
General/Physical Data 6
Housing material Plastic Plastic Plastic Plastic
Dimensions (D) 2.22 in (56.5 mm) 2.22 in (56.5 mm) 2.22 in (56.5 mm) 2.22 in (56.5 mm) 6
Dimensions (W) 1.40 in (35.5 mm) 2.81 in (71.5 mm) 2.81 in (71.5 mm) 4.23 in (107.5 mm)
Dimensions (H) 3.54 in (90 mm) 3.54 in (90 mm) 3.54 in (90 mm) 3.54 in (90 mm)
6
Operating temperature –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C –25 °C to +55 °C
6
Storage temperature –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 6
Connection cables
Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 6
Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12)
Approvals/Certifications 6
UL, CE, RoHS, CSA, UL, CE, RoHS, CSA, UL, CE, RoHS, CSA, UL, CE, RoHS, CSA,
EN 50178m IEC/EN 60947 EN 50178m IEC/EN 60947 EN 50178m IEC/EN 60947 EN 50178m IEC/EN 60947 6
Safety and Protection
Overload/short circuit protection Yes Yes Yes Yes 6
Overcurrent limitation form 0.3 A 1.4 A 2.8 A 4.6 A
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
6
RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B,
IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 6
Potential isolation (prim./sec.) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-41
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Dimensions
6 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

6 EASY200-PO W, EASY400-POW and EASY500-POW Series

EASY400-POW
6 EASY200-POW EASY500-POW
0.30 0.42 1.97
6 (7.5) (10.8) (50.0)

6
6
3.54 3.54
6 (90.0) (90.0)

1.77 4.02 4.02

6 (45.0) (102.0) (102.0)

4.33 4.33
6 (110.0) (110.0)

6
0.18
6 (4.5)
.157 .157
1.87 (M4) DIA. 0.30 1.41 (M4) DIA.
(3.9) (3.9)
6 (47.5) (7.5) (35.8)
2.22 1.40 2.81
6 (56.5) (35.5) (71.5)

6 EASY600-POW Series

6 0.64 (16.25)
2.96 (75.0)
0.64 (16.25)
M4 #8
6
6 4.33
(110.0)
6 4.02
1.77 (102.0)
6 (45.0)
3.54
(90.0)

6
6
6 0.18 (4.5)
1.87 (47.5)
2.22 (56.5) 4.23 (107.5)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Sensor Power Supply Contents
Description Page
6
PSL Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-4 6
PSC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-10
PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-16 6
ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-36
easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-39 6
Sensor Power Supply
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-44 6
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-44
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-45
6
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-45
6
6
6
6
Sensor Power Supply 6
Features, Benefits and
Product Description Functions Standards and Certifications 6
Eaton’s sensor power supply
was specially designed to be
● Integrated AC junction box
for one-step mounting and
● Dual output connection ● UL listed 6
terminals to make it easy ● CSA approved
used with the 200 Series and wiring without the need for and convenient to locate
E68 Series zero pressure additional accessories the power supply at the
6
accumulation systems, but is ● Built-in DC power health center of the cable run
also suitable for use in a wide contact allows easy ● Power switch protected 6
variety of applications. The monitoring of power supply against accidental
unit delivers 100 W output at status operation 6
27 Vdc and supports easy, Unitized design features a
● ● Power in and out indicators
Class II wiring. The power
supply is a tamper-proof,
tamper-proof encapsulated show status at a glance 6
construction to reduce the ● Conduit entry box for NEC
rugged component easily
mounted to a conveyor side-
risk of damage associated compliance 6
with conventional open
channel or support. Internal ● Simple mounting with two
control-panel type
components are fully construction
1/4-inch bolts 6
encapsulated in a strong die- ● Rugged die-cast housing
● Built-in slug-release input
cast housing to stand up to
converts an AC or DC input
● Fully encapsulated 6
rugged handling, ensuring electronics
flawless performance in any to the appropriate DC
material handling environment. signal for integration with 6
the 200 Series and E68
Series zero pressure 6
accumulation systems
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-43
 6.1 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies

Product Selection
6
Sensor Power Supply
6 PS256 A_
Catalog
Output Slug Input Type Slug Output Number
6 Operating Voltage 105–132 Vac

6 27 Vdc, 100 W;
short circuit, overload and
15–132 Vac/Vdc
3 mA minimum
Standard
For use with 200 Series and
Sinking or sourcing, switch selectable;
80 mA maximum; short circuit protection for
PS256 A-01B1 2

overvoltage protection E68 systems loads less than 32 Vac or Vdc (auto reset)
6 (cycle power to reset)
15–132 Vac/Vdc High current slug Sinking only; 100 W output; short circuit, PS256 A-04B1 2
3 mA minimum For use with solenoid valve systems overload and overvoltage protection
6 requiring full current slug signals (cycle power to reset) 1

6
Technical Data and Specifications
6
Sensor Power Supply
6 Description PS256 A-01B1 PS256 A-04B1
Input power 144 W, maximum inrush 30 A from cold start 144 W, maximum inrush 30 A from cold start
6
Input voltage 105–132 Vac 105–132 Vac

6 Input current (full load) 105 Vac–1.92 A, 115 Vac–1.65 A, 132 Vac–1.5 A 105 Vac–1.92 A, 115 Vac–1.65 A, 132 Vac–1.5 A
Output power 100 W 100 W
6 Output voltage 27 Vdc 27 Vdc
Output protection Short circuit, overload and overvoltage protection Short circuit, overload and overvoltage protection
6 (cycle power to reset), diode protected (cycle power to reset), diode protected
Regulation ± 3% ± 3%
6 Slug input 15–132 Vac/Vdc 15–132 Vac/Vdc
Slug output Sinking or sourcing, switch selectable; 80 mA maximum; Sinking only; 100 W output; short circuit, overload and
6 short circuit protection for loads less than 32 Vac or Vdc
(auto reset)
overvoltage protection (cycle power to reset) 1

6 Indicators Red LED: AC In; Green LED: DC Out Red LED: AC In; Green LED: DC Out
DC fail indication output NO contact, solid-state relay, 80 mA maximum NO contact, solid-state relay, 80 mA maximum
6 Temperature range –13 ° to 131 °F (–25 ° to 55 °C) –13 ° to 131 °F (–25 ° to 55 °C)
Vibration 20 g 20 g
6 Enclosure material Die-cast aluminum Die-cast aluminum
Enclosure rating NEMA 1 NEMA 1
6 Connections Main output/slug output: Main output/slug output:
Two three-position finger protected barrier strips; Two three-position finger protected barrier strips;
6 AC line input, DC fail indication and slug input:
8-position screw terminal strip inside conduit entry box
AC line input, DC fail indication and slug input:
8-position screw terminal strip inside conduit entry box

6 Notes
1 Total output power of supply is 100 W. Total supply output power (100 W) = main output power + slug output power.
6 2 Stocked product, typical order quantities guaranteed in stock.

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

V7-T6-44 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com
 Power Supplies
General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies
6.1
Wiring Diagram
6
Sensor Power Supply
Slug
V+ Output Com
Slug
V+ Output Com
6
Junction
Box
6
Sinking Slug
6
PS256A-01B1 only
Sourcing Slug
6
AC Input Power Power Monitor 15-132 VAC/
Chassis internally
connected to AC GND
15-132 VDC
Slug In Not 6
L1 L2 GND L1 L2 L1 L2 Used

6
6
Dimensions 6
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
6
Sensor Power Supply
4.6 4.6 6
(117) (117)
6
6
9.0 6
(229)
8.2 9.7 6
(208) (246)

3.0 6
(76)

6
Hole for 1/4 Inch Hardware 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2019 www.eaton.com V7-T6-45
 Industrial Control Transformers

Types MTE and MTK 7.1 Transformers

Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-2
7
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-3 7
Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-4
Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-13 7
CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-18
Type AP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-25
7
7
Learn
Online
7
7
7
7
CE Marked
7
7
7
7
7
Type AP
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2017 www.eaton.com V7-T7-1
 7.1 Industrial Control Transformers
Transformers

Industrial Control Transformers Contents

7 Description Page
7 Transformers
Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-4
7 Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-13
CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-18
7 Type AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-25

7
7
7
7
7
Standards and Certifications
7 Eaton dry-type distribution transformers are approved, listed, recognized or may comply with the following standards.

7 Engineering Standards
Catalog UL/cUL UL Listed cUL Energy CSA Insulation kVA kVA Applicable
7 Product
Name
UL
Standard 1
File
Number
Control
Number
Efficiency
File Number
File
Number
System
Temp/ºC
Single-
Phase
Three-
Phase
IEC
Standard

7 Industrial Control Transformer

MTE 5085 E46323 702X — — 105 0.025–1.5 N/A 61558
7 MTK 5085 E46323 702X — — 180 0.05–5 N/A 61558
Encapsulated Transformer
7 AP 5085 E10156 591H — — 180 3–10 N/A 61558

7 AP 1561 E78389 591H — — 180 15 N/A 61558

EP 5085 E10156 591H — LR60545 180 0.05–10 N/A 61558
7 EP 1561 E78389 591H EV157 2 LR60545 3 180 15–50 N/A 61558 4 / 726 5
EPT 5085 E10156 591H — LR60545 180 N/A 3–9 61558 6 / 726 7
7 EPT 1561 E78389 591H EV157 8 LR60545 9 180 N/A 15–75 726
MPC 1062 E53449 591H — LR60546 180 3–25 15–30 —
7 Ventilated Transformer

7 DS-3 1561 E78389 591H — — 220 15–167 N/A 60726

DT-3 1561 E78389 591H — — 220 N/A 15–750 60726
7 KT 1561 E78389 591H — — 220 N/A 9–500 N/A

Notes
7 1 UL 5085 replaces UL 506. In addition to the above standards, Eaton ANSI C57.12.70: Terminal Markings and
2 Applies to 25–50 kVA. dry-type distribution transformers are also Connections for Distribution and Power
7 3 Applies to 25 kVA. manufactured in compliance with the
applicable standards listed below.
Transformers.
ANSI C57.12.91: Standard Test Code
4 Applies to 15–25 kVA.
Not all of the following standards apply for Dry-Type Distribution and Power
7 5 Applies to 37.5 kVA.
6 Applies to 3 kVA.
to every transformer. Transformers.
NEC: National Electrical Code®. CSA C22 No. 47-M90: Air-Cooled
7 Applies to 5–9 kVA.
Transformers (Dry-Type).
7 8 Applies to 30–75 kVA.
NEMA ST-1: Specialty Transformers (C89.1)
(control transformers). CSA C9-M1981: Dry-Type Transformers.
9 Applies to 30 kVA.
NEMA ST-20: General-Purpose CSA C22.2 No. 66: Specialty Transformers.
7 Transformers. CSA 802-94: Maximum Losses for
NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Distribution, Power and Dry-Type
7 Equipment (1000 volts maximum).
IEEE C57.12.01: General Requirements
Transformers.

for Dry-Type Distribution and Power

7 Transformers (including those with solid-
cast and/or resin-encapsulated windings).

7
7

V7-T7-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—April 2017 www.eaton.com
 Industrial Control Transformers
Transformers
7.1
Catalog Number Selection
7
Industrial Control Transformers, CE Marked Control Transformers—Example: CE0250E2FCE 1
7
CE 0250 E 2F CE
7
Type
C = Industrial control transformer Type MTE/MTK
Modifications
7
CE = CE Marked control transformer Transformer Design Voltage CE = CE Marked control transformer
A = MTA Primary Secondary FB = Factory-mounted two-pole primary 7
VA Rating C = MTC fuse block for rejection type fuses
AC = 380 x 415 24
FBN = Factory-mounted two-pole primary
0025 =
0050 =
25
50
0350 = 350
0500 = 500
Type AP Only:
0003 = 3000
E = MTE
K = MTK
AG
1B
=
=
208/240/277/380/480
120 x 240
24
24
fuse block for non-rejection–type 7
P = AP fuses
0075 = 75 0750 = 750 0005 = 5000 2A = 240 x 480, 120/115/110
0100 = 100 1000 = 1000 0007 = 7500 230 x 460,
Q = Secondary fuse clips for
1/4 x 1-1/4 inch fuses 2
7
0150 = 150 1500 = 1500 0010 = 10000 220 x 440
XX = No secondary fuse clips
2B = 240 x 480
0200 =
0250 =
200
250
2000 = 2000
3000 = 3000
0015 = 15000
2C = 240 x 480
24
120 x 240
RT = Ring type terminals for 7
connection to fuse block
0300 = 300 5000 = 5000 2F = 230/460 115
ES = Electrostatic shield
2G
2U
=
=
230/460
220/380/440/550,
115/230
23/110, 24/115,
FS = Factory-mounted finger-safe 7
terminal shields
230/400/460/575, 25/120
240/416/480/600
Type AP
7
2V = 208/230/400/460/575 24/115/230
B = Bottom mounted
2W = 208/230/400/460/575 115/230
3A = 208/277 120
S = Side/wall mounted
ES = Electrostatic shield
7
3B = 115 24
CU = Copper windings
3C
3D
=
=
230/460/575
208/380/416
115/95
115/95
7
Type MTA/MTC
4B = 208/230/460/575 24
4C
4D
=
=
550/575/600
380/400/415
110/115/120
110 x 220
FB = Factory-mounted three-pole fuse
block (two-pole primary rejection 7
type with single-pole secondary
4E = 208/230/460/575 115
4H = 380/400/415 22/23/24
non-rejection type)
ES = Electrostatic shield
7
4W = 550/575/600 22/23/24
L = Lead terminations
5E = 200/220/440,
208/230/460,
23/110, 24/115,
25/120
7
240/480
6U = 240/416/480/600,
230/400/460/575,